-------
g 60.284 Monitori11\lg oil I2misslolUS and op-
erations.

(a) Any owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall in.
13tall, calibrate, maintain, and operate
ihe following .continuous monitoring
fJystems: -
(1) A continuous monitoring system
(to monitor and record the opacity of
ihe gases discharged into the atmos.
!)Ihere from any recovery furnace. The
span of this system shall be set at 70
percent opacity.
{2) Continuous monitoring systems
(to monitor and record the concentra-
tAon of TRS emissions on a dry basis
and the percent of oxygen by volume
@n a dry basis in the gases discharged
mto the atmosphere from any lime
klln, recovery furnace. digester
system, brown stock washer system,
multiple-effect evaporator system,
black liquor oxidation system, or con-
densate stripper system, except where
the provisions of f 60.283(a)(1) (iii) or
(!v) apply. These systems shall be lo-
cated downstream of the control
device(s) and the span(s) of these con-
-tinuous monitoring system(s) shall be
set:
m At a TRS concentration of 30
ppm for the TRS continuous monitor-
h1g system. except that for any cross
recovery furnace the span shall be set
at 50 ppm.
W) At 20 percent oxygen for the
oontlnuous oxygen monitoring system.
(b) Any owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall in-
stall, calibrate, maintain, and operate
the following continuous monitoring
devices:
(1) A monitoring device which mea-
sures the combustion temperature at
the point of incineration of effluent
gases which are emitted from any di-
gester system. brown stock washer
system. multiple-effect evaporator
system. black liquor oxidation system,
OJ!' condensate stripper system where
the provisions of f 60.283(a)(l)(iii>
&!pply. The monitoring device is to be
certified by the manufacturer to be ac-
curate within ::!:1 percent of the tem-
perature being measured.
(2) For any lime kiln or smelt dis-
wIving tank using a scrubber emission
control device:
CD A monitoring device for the con-
tinuous measurement of the pressure
loss of the gas stream through the
control equipment. The monitoring
device is to be certified by the manu-
facturer to be accurate to within a
gage pressure of ::!:500 pascals (ca. ::!:2
inches water gage pressure).
(ll) A monitoring dev1e~ for t,he con-
tinuous measurement of the scrubbing
liquid supply pressure to the control
equipment. The monitoring device is
to be certified by the manufacturer to
be accurate within ::!: 15 percent of
design scrubbing liquid supply pres-
sure. The pressure sensor or tap is to
be located close to the scrubber liquid -
discharge point. The Administrator
may be consulted for approval of alter-
native locations.
(c) Any owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall,
except where the provi~ions of
fi 60.283(a)(1)(iv)' or * 60.283(a)(4)
apply.
(1) Calculate and record on a daily
basis 12-hour average TRS concentra-
tions for the two consecutive periods
of each operating day. Each 12-hour
average shall be determined as the
arithmetic mean of the appropriate 12
contiguous I-hour average total re-
duced sulfur concentrations provided
by each continuous monitoring system
installed under paragraph (a)(2) of
this section.
(2) Calculate and record on a daily
basis 12-hour average oxygen concen-
trations for the two consecutive peri-
ods of each operating day for the re-
covery furnace and lime kiln. These
12-hour averages shall correspond to
the 12-hour average TRS concentra-
tions under paragraph (c)(l) of this
section and shall be determined as an
arithmetic mean of the appropriate 12
contiguous 1-hour average oxygen con-
centrations provided by each continu-
ous monitoring system installed under
paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(3) Correct all 12-hour average TRS
concentrations to 10 volume percent
oxygen, except that all 12-hour aver-
age TRS concentration from a recov-
ery furnace shall be corrected to '8
volume percent using the fOllowing
equation: .

C.....=C.....x(21-X/21- Y>
where:

C....=the concentration corrected for
oxygen.
c.-=the concentration uncorrected for
oxygen.
X=the volumetric oxygen concentration in
percentage to be corrected to (8 percent
for recovery furnaces and 10 percent for
lime kilns. incinerators. or other de.
" vices).
Y=the measured 12-hour average volumet-
ric oxygen concentration.

(d) For the purpose of reports re-
quired under * 60.7(c), any owner or
operator subject to the provisions of
this sUbpart shall report periods of
excess emissions as follows:
(1) For emissions from any recovery
furnace periods of excess emissions
are:
(1) All 12-hour averages of TRS con-
centrations above 5 ppm by volume for
straight kraft recovery furnaces and
above 25 ppm by volume for cross re-
covery furnaces.
(11) All G-mlnute average opacities
"that exceed 35 percent.
(2) For emissions from any lime kiln,
periods of excess emissions are all 12-
hour average TRS concentration
above 8 ppm by "'lume.
(3) For emissions from any digester
system, brown stock washer system.
II!-S4
multiple-effect evaporator system.
black liquor oxidation system, or con-
densate stripper system periods of
excess emissions are:
(1) All 12-hour average TRS concen-
trations above 5 ppm by volume unless
the provisions of 1 60.283(a)( 1) (1). (U).
or (iv) apply; or
(11) All periods in excess of 5 minutes
and their duration during which the
combustion temperature at the point
of incineration is less than 1200' F.
where the provisions of
160.283(a)(1)(U) apply.
(e) The Administrator will not con-
sider periods of excess emissions re-
ported under paragraph (d) of this sec-
tion to be indicative of a violation of
160.11(d) provided that:
(1) The percent of the total number
of possible contiguous periods of
excess emissions in a quarter (exclud-
ing periods of startuP. -Shutdown, or
malfunction and periods when the fa-
c1llty is not operating) during which
excess emissions occur does not
exceed:
(1) One percent for TRS emissions
from recovery furnaces.
(Ii) Six percent for average opacities
from recovery furnaces.
(2) The Administrator determines
that the affected facility, including air
pollution control equipment, is main-
tained and operated in a manner
which is consistent with good air pol-
lution control practice for min1mizin~
emissions during periods of excess
emissions.

1 60.285 Test methods and procedures.

(a) Reference methods in Appendix
A of this part, except as provided
under f 60.8(b), shall be used to deter-
mine compliance with 160.282(a) as
follows:
(1) Method 5 for the concentration
of particulate matter and the associat-
ed moisture content,
(2) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses.
(3) When determining compliance
with 160.282(a)(2), Method 2 for veloc-
ity and volumetric flow rate,
(4) Method 3 for gas analysis, and
(5) Method 9 for visible emissions.
(b) For Method 5, the sampling time
for each run shall be at least 60 min-
utes and the sampling rate shall be at
least 0.85 dscm/hr (0.53 dscf/mIn)
except that shorter sampling times.
when necessitated by process variables
or other factors, may be approved by
the Administrator. Water shall be
used as the cleanup solvent instead of
acetone in the sample recovery proce-
dure outlined in Method 5.
(c) Method 17 (in-stack fUtration)
may be used as an alternate method
for Method 5 for determining compli-
ance with f 80.282(a)(1)(1): Provided,
That a constant value of 0.009 g/dscm
(0.004 gr/dscf> is added to the results
of Method 17 and the stack tempera-

-------
ture is no greater than 205' C (ca. 400'
F). Water shall be used as the cleanup
solvent instead of acetone in th.o
aample recovery procedure outlined in
Method 17.
(d) For the purpose of determining
compliance with 060.283(a) (1). (2).
(3), (4), and (5). the following refer-
ence methods shall be used:
(1) Method 16 or, at the discretion of
the owner or operator. Method 16A for
the concentration of TRS,2t'8
(2) Method 3 for gas analysis. and
(3) When detennining compliance
with 160.283(a)(4), use the results of
Method 2. Method 16 or 16A. and the
black liquor solids feed rate in the
following equation to detennine the TRS
emission rate on an equivalent hydrogen
sulfide (fi2S) basis.

E = (C11ls)(F)(Qad)/BLS
Where:
E=mass of TRS emitted per unit of black
liquor solids (g/kg)(lb/ton).
Cms=average combined concentration of
TRS as determined b)' Method 16 or l6A
during the test period. ppm.
F=O.001417 g HoS/m' ppm for metric units.
0=0.08844 X10-s lb HoS/ft'ppm for
English units.278
Qod=dry volumetric stack 8as flow rate
corrected to standard conditions. dscm/
hr (dscf/hrJ.
BLS=black liquor solids feed rate. k8!hr
(ton/hrJ. 268
(4) When determinin8 whether a
fuinace 19 !i stralsht kraft recovery
furnace or a cross recovery furnace,
TAPPI Method T.824 (incorporated by
reference--eee 180.17) shall be used to
determine sodium sulfide, sodium
hydroxide, and sodium carbonate. Thl!se
determinations shall be made three
times daily from the green liquor and the
daily average values shall be converted
to sodium oxide (Na.O) and substituted
Into the following equation to determine
the green Uquor lulfidity:
GLS :: 100 c...,s 1 (CNa. + CN..oH +
c..~,.:n.J .
where:
G1.5=percent green liquor sulfidlty
CNe,s) c: average concentration of NazO
expressed a8 Na.O (rngl J)
CNaOH = average concentration of NaOH
expressed as Na.O (rngl J)
c..",cn. :: average concentration of
Na;tC03 expressed as Naz (mgl/) 177
(5) When detennining compliance
with 180.283(a)(l)(Yi). use the results of
Method 2, Method 16. and the pulp
production rate in the eqaation specified
In I 8O.285(d)(3). except substitute the
pulp production rate (PPR) [kg/hr (tonsl
hr)) for the black liquor solids feed rate
(B1.5).
(8) All concentrations of particulate
matter and TRS required to be mea-
sured by this section from lime kilns
or incinerators shall be corrected 10
volume percent oxygen and those con-
centrations from recovery furnaces
shall be corrected to 8 volume percent
oxygen. These corrections shall be
made in the manner specified in
t 8O.284(c)(3).
160.286 Innovetlve technology welver 261

(a) Pursuant to section 111(j) or the
Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7411(j). the r\u
10 batch digester at Owens-Illim'is
Incorporated's Valdosta kraft pulp mi!l
in. Clyattville. Georgia. shall comp1y
with the following conditions:
(1) Owens-Illinois. Incorporated sh"i!
obtain the necessaI')' permits as requirE,r:
by Section 173 of the Clean Air A{ ~. a~
amended August 1977, to operate the
No. 10 batch digester at the Valdosta
mill.
(2) Commencing on
Februal1' 14, 1985 262 and
continuing for 2 years or to December
31, 1986, or until the displacement
heating system that can achieve the
standard specified in 40 CFR 80.283 is
demonstrated to the Administrator's
satisfaction, whichever comes first,
Dwells Illinois, Incorporated shall limit
the discharge of TRS emissions to the
atmosphere:
(i) From the No. 10 batch digester at
the Valdosta mill to 0.021b of TRS per
ton of air-dried pulp.
(H) From the existing multiple-effect
evaporators at the Valdosta mill to the
TRS level existing prior to the
modifications,
(3) Commencing the day after the
expiration of the period described in (2)
above. and continuing thereafter,
emissions of TRS from the No. 10 batch
digester shall not exceed the TRS level
of 0.005 g/kg ADP (O.Otlb/ton ADP) as
specified in 40 CFR 80.283.
(4) The No. 10 batch digester system
shsll comply with the provisions of
II 80.284 and 80.285.
(5) A technology development report
shall be senUo EPA. Emission
Standards and Engineering Division
(MD-13), Research Triangle Park. North
Carolina 27711 and EPA Region IV, 345
Courtland, NE. Atlanta, Georgia 30365,
postmarked before 80 days after the
promulgation of this waiver and every 8
months thereafter while this waiver is in
effect. The technology development
report shall summarize the displacement
heating system work including the
results of tests of the variolls emission t
1II-85
points being evaluated. The report shall
include an updated schedule of
attainment of 40 CFR 60.283 based on
the most current infonnation. Tests will
be conducted prior to and after the
digester modifications for 1'RS
emissions and air flow rates on all vents
to the atmosphere from the No. 10
digester system. the multiple effect
evapor~tor system. and at the existing
batch digester system. In addition, tests
will be perfonned to determine the BOD
content of the effluents from the multiple
effect evaporator system, the brown
stock washing system, and the mill prior
to and after the digester modifications.
(b) This waiver shall be a federally
promulgated standard of perfonnance.
As such. it shall be unlawful for Owens-
Illinois, Incorporated to operate the No.
10 batch digester or the multiple-effect
evaporators in violation of the
requirements established in this waiver.
Violations of the tenns and conditions
of this waiver shall subject Owens-
Illinois, Incorporated to enforcement
under section 113 (b) and (c). 42 U.S.C.
7412 (b) and (c), and Section 120, 42
U.S.C. 7420. of the Act as well as
possible citizen enforcement under
section 304 of the Act. 42 U.S.C. 7604.
Proposed/effective
~76
Promu1Qated
43 FR 7568. 2/23/78 (82)
Revised
~4784. 8/7/78 (91) .
48 FR 3734. 1/27/83 (177)
50 FR 6316, 2/14/85 (261)
50 FR 7595. 2/25/85 (262)
50 FR 9578. 3/8/85 (268)
50 FR 19022. 5/6/85 (278)

-------
@Wplii'U ~~=~tan@jtilni!iI @g
[Po~ g@G' @!/;jJg !.WaBfi1I~etm~
. ~emr~

o OO.Z!9@ ~~~!eablraty &100 ~~S!;;M~I@i'I @fI
@Wee~eCJ ~.
[~) Each gisal) melting furnace is an
oNec~ecl [lI!cili~ ~o which the provision..
~[ this subpart apply.
[b) Any faci'iity under paragraph (a) of
illnia section that commences
(Construction or modification after June
115, 1979, il) subject ~o the requirements
@f this subpart
[c) This subpart does not apply to
Jill,md glas8 melting furnaces, glass
mil!~lting fumac0s designed to produce
Blass than .,550 kilograms of glass per
~ey and all-electric melters.

~ 80.291 [!)eflnltlon..
As used in !his subpart. aU terms not
irllefined herein shall have the meaning
given them in the Act and in Subpart A
of this part. unless otherwise required
by the context
"All-elecbic melter" means 8 glass
melting furnace in which all the heat
required for. melting is provided by
electric current from electrodes
oubmerged in the molten glass. although
some fossil fuel may be charged to the
qurnace a8 raw material only.
"Borosilicate recipe" means glass
, product composition of the following
approximate ranges of weight. .
proportions: 60 to 80 percent sIlicon
dioxide. 4 to 10 percent total ~O (e.g..
Na20 and ~O). 5 to 35 percent boric 249
oxides, and 0 to 13 percent other oxides.
"Container glass" means glass made
of Boda-lime recipe, clear or colored.
which is pressed and/or blown into
bottles, jars. ampoules. and other
products listed in Standard Industrial
Classification 3221 (SIC 3221).
"Experimental furnace" means a glass
melting furnace with tbe sole purpose of
operating to evaluate glass melting
processes. technologies, or glass
products. An experimental furnace does
not produce glass that is sold (except for
further research and development
pUi1'oses) or that is used as a raw 241'
material for nonexperimental furnaces.
"Flat glass" means glass made of
soda-lime recipe and produced into
continuous flat sheets and other
pll'oducts listed in SIC 3211.
--"Flow channels" means appendages
used for conditioning and distributing
molten glass to forming apparatuses and
are a permanently separate source of
emissions such that no mixing of
emissions occurs with emissions from
the melter cooling system prior to their
h 249
being vented to the atmosp ere. .
"Glass melting furnace" means a unit
comprising a refractory vessel in which
raw materials are charged. melted at
high temperature. refined, a:1d
conditioned to produce moJten giJss.
The unit includes foundations.
superstructure and retaining walls, raw
material charger systems, heat
exchangern. melter cooling system,
exhaust system, refractory brick work,
fuel supply and electrical boosting
equipment. integral control system.s and
instrumentation. and appendages tor
conditioning and distributing molten
glass to forming apparatuses. The
forming apparatuses, including thp float
bath used in flat glass manufacturing
and flow channels in wool fiberglass
and textile fiberglass manufacturing. are
not considered part of the g!ass melting
fumace.249
"Glass produced" means the weight of
the glass pulled from the glass melting
furnace.
"Hand glass melting furnace" means a
glass melting furnace where the molten
glass is removed fiI'om the furnace by Ii
glussworkcr using a blowpipe or 41
ponti I.
"Lead recipe" means glass product
composition of the following ranges of
weight proportions: 50 to 00 percent
silicon dioxide. 18 to 35 percent lead
oxides. 5 10 20 percent total ~O (e.g.,
Na20 and ~O), 0 to 8 percent total ~~
(e.g.. Ab~). 0 to 15 percent total RO
(e.g.. CaO. MgO). other than lead2 oxide.
and 5 to 10 percent other oxides. 4
"Pressed and blown glass" means
glass which is pressed. blown. or both.
including textile fiberglass.
noncontinuous flat glass, noncontioliner
glass. and other products listed in SIC
3229. It is separated into:
(1) Glass of borosilicate recipe.
(2) Glass of soda-lime and lead
recipes. ,
(3) Glass of opal. fluoride. and other,
recipes.
"Rebricking" means cold replacement
of damaged or worn refractory parts of
the glass melting furnace. Rebricking
includes replacement of the refractories
comprising the bottom. sidewalls. or
roof of the melting vessel; replacement
of refractory work in the heat
exchanger: replacment of refractory
portions of the glass conditioning and
distribution system.
"Soda-lime recipe" means glass
product composition of the following
ranges of weight proportions: 60 to 75
percent silicon dioxide. 10 to 17 perunt
total 'R20 (e.g., Na20 and K20). 8 to 20
percent total RO but not to include any
PbO (e.g.. CaO. and MgO). 0 to 8 percent
total 'R2~ (e.g.. AI2~J, and 1 to 5
percent other oxides. 249
"Textile fiberglass" means ~ibrous
glass in the form of continuous strands
having uniform thickness. 249
111-86
"With modified-processes" means
using any technique designed to
minimize emissions without the use of
add-on pollution controls. 249
"Wool fiberglass" means fibrous g:oIs!-,
of randoIl\.texture. including fi!J.ergla~5
insulation. and other products hstcd In
SIC 329ft
(Sec. 111. 301(a). of the Clean Air Act as
amended 142 U.S.C. 7411. 7601(a)))
U 60.292 Standards for particulate matter.
(a) On and after the date on which thl!
performance test required to be
conducted by ~ 60.8 is completed, no
owner or operator of a glass melting
furnace subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall cause to be discharged
into the atmosphere-
(1) From any glass melting furnace
fired t:xclusively with either a gaseous
fuel or a liquid fuel. particulate matter at
emission rates exceeding thpse specified
in Table CC-1. Column 2 and Column 3.
respectively. or
(2) From any glass melting furnace.
fired simultaneously with gaseous imd
liquid fuels, particulate matter al
emission rates exceeding sm a9
specified by the following equation:
STD=X [1.3(Y)+(Z))
Where:
STD= Particulate matter emission limit, g of
. particulate/kg of glass produced.
X=Emission rate specified In Table CC-1 for
furnaces fired with gaseous Cuel (Column
2).
y';' Decimal percent of liquid fuel heAting.
value 10 lolal (gaseous snd liquid) Cuel
heating valua Cired In the glass melting
furnaces as determined Ir. a OO.290[f).
(joules/joules).
Z=(l-Y).

(b) Conversion of a glass melting.
furnace to the use of liquid fuel is not
coasidered a modjfication for the
purposes of A 60.14. .,
(c) Rebricking £.nu fne cost of
rc~ricIdn8 is not considered a
, recons(.'Uclion for the purposes of
~ 60.15.

Table CC-1':.-E.-dssion Rates

(g of particulate/kg 01 gfaas produced)
Co!. 1-Glass manufacturing' plant
Industry segment
Col.
2-
Fur.
nace
fired
wilh
gas-
eou9
1001
Col.
3-
Fur.
nace
fired
with
liquid
1001
Container gtass............................................. 0.1
Pressed and blown gla9s .
(a) Borosilicate Recipes........................ 0.5
(b) Soda-Ume and Load Recipes ""'" 0.1
(c) Other.Than 1Ioro9IIica1e. Soda.
Limo. and Lead Recipes (lnclud-
Ing opal. ftuoride. and other rec.

~~gf~.~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::= ~::5
0.13
0.85
0.13
0.325
0.325
0.225

-------
(d) An owner or operator of an
experimental furnace is not subject to
the requirements of this section.249
Ie) Duri'1g routine maintenance of
add-on pollution controls. an owner or
operator of a glass meltinR furnace
subject to the pro\'isions of ~ 6O.292(a) is
exempt from the provisions of
~ 6O.292(u) if:
(1) Routine maintenance in each
calendar year does not exceed 6 days;
(2) Routine maintenance is conducted
in a manner consistent with good air
pollution control practices for
minimizing emissions; and
(3) A report is submitted to the
Administrator 10 davs before the start of
the routine maintemince (if 10 days
cannot be provided. the report must be
submitted as soon as practicable) and
the report contains an explanation of the
schedule of the maintenance. 249

(Sec. 111. 301(a). of the Clean Air Act as
amended (42 U.S.C. 7411. 7601(a)))
~ 60.293 Standard. for particulate ma"er
from gla88 melting furnace with modified-
proce..e.. 249

(a) An owner or operator of a glass
melting furnaces with modified-
processes is not subject to the
provisions of ~ 60.292 if the affected
facility complies with the provisions of
this section.
(b) On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by ~ 60.8 is completed, no
owner or operator of a glass melting
furnance with modified-processes
subject to the provisions of this subpart
shall cause to be dischal'Red into the
atmosphere from the affected facility:
(1) Particulate matter at emission
rotes exceeding 0.5 gram of particulate
per kilogrom of glass produced (g/kg) as
measured according to paragraph (e) of
this section for container gloss. nat
glass, and pressed and blown glass with
a soda-lime recipe melting furnaces.
(2) Particulate matter at emission
rates exceeding 1.0 g/kg as measured
according to paragraph (e) of this
section for pressed and blown glass
with a borosilicate recipe melting
furnace.
(3) Particulate matter at emission
rates exceedin~ 0.5 g/kg as measured
according to paragraph (e) of this
sp.ction for textile fiberglass and wool
fiber~lass melting furnaces.
(e) The owner or operator of an
affected facility that is subject to
emission limits specified under
paragraph (b) of this section shall:
(1) Install. calibrate. maintain. and
operate a continuous monitoring system
for the measurement of the opacity of
emissions discharged into the
atmosphere from the affected facility.
(2) During the performance test
required to be conducted by ~ 60.8.
conduct continuous opacity monitoring
during each test run.
(3) Calculate 6-minute opacity
averages from 24 or more data points
equally spaced over each 6-minute
period during the test runs.
(4) Determine, based on the 6-minute
opacity averages. the opacity value
corresponding to the 97.5 percent upper
confidence level of a normal distribution
of average opacity values.
(5) For the purposes of ~ 60.7, report to
the Administrator as excess emissions
all of.the 6-minute periods during which
the average opacity. as measured by the
continuous monitoring system Installed
under paragraph (c)(l) of this section.
exceeds the opacity value corresponding
to the 97.5 percent upper confidence
level determined under paragraph (c)(4)
of this section.
(d)(1) After receipt and consideration
of written application. the Administrator
may approve alternative continuous
monitoring systems for the measurement
of one or more process' or opera ting
parameters that is or are demonstrated
to enable accurate and representative
monitoriRg of an emission limit specified
in paragraph (b)(1) oUhis section.
(2) After the Administrator approves
an alternative continuous monitoring
system for an affected facility. the
requirements of paragraphs (c) (1)
through (5) of this section will not apply
for that affected facility.
(3) An owner or operator may
redetermine the opacity value
corresponding to the 97.5 percent upper
confidence level as described in
paragraph (cJ(4) of this section if the
owner or operator:
(i) Conducts continuous opacity
monitoring during each test run of a
performance test that demonstrates
compliance with an emission limit of
paragraph (b) of this section,
(ii) Recalculates the 6-minute opacity
averages as described in paragraph
(c)(3) of this section, and
(Iii) Uses the redetermined opacity
value corresponding to the 97.5 percent
upper confidence level for the purposes
of paragraph (c)(5) of this section.
(e) Test methods and procedures as
specified in A 60.296 shall be used to
determine compliance with this section
except that to determine compliance for
any glass melting furnace using modified
processes and fired with either a
gaseous fuel or a liquid fuel containing
less than 0.50 weight percent sulfur.
Method 5 shall be used with the probe
and filter holder heating system in the
sampling train set to provide a gas
temperature of 120:t14 .C.
111-87
(Sec. 111.114. 301(a). of the Clean Air Act as
nmended [42 U.S.C. 7411. 7414. 7601(olJ)
~ 60.298 Test methoda and procedures.

(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part. except as provided under
A 6O.alb). shall be used to determine
compliance with I 60.292 and I 60.293 as
follows: 249
(1) Method 1 shall be used for sample
and velocity traverses. and
(2) Method 2 shall be used to
determine velocity and volumetric now
rate.
(3) Method 3 shall be used for gas
analysis.
(4) Method 5 shall be used to
dclp.rmine the concentration of
particulate matter and the associated
moisture content.
(b) For Method 5. the probe and filter
holder heating systen in the sampling
train shall be set to provide a gas
temperature no greater than 177. C. The
sampling time for each run shall be at
lellst 60 minutes and the collected
particulate shall weigh at least 50 mg.
(c) The particulate emission rate. E.
shall be computed as follows:

E=QxC
Whe~:
(1) E iA the particulate emission rate (g/hrl
[2) Q Is the average volumetric now rate
[dscm/tlrlaa found from Method 2
(3) C is the average concentration (g/dscm) of
particulate mailer as found from,the
modined Method 5
(d) The rate of glass produced. P (kg/
. hr). shall be determined by dividing the
weight of glass pulled in kilograms (kg)
from the affected facility during the
performance test by the number of hours
(hr) taken to perform the performaDce
test. The glass pulled, in kilograms. shall
be determined by direct measurement or
computed from materials balance by
good engineering practice.
(e) For the purposes of these
standards the furnace emission rate
shall be computed as follows:

R=E-A+P
Where:
(11 R is the furnace emission rate (g/kg)
(21 E Is the particulate emission rate (g/hrl
from (c) above
(3) A Is the zero producllon rate correction;
A is 227 g/hr for container glass, pressed
and blown (soda-lime and lead) gtass.
and pressed and blown (other~han
borosilicate. soda-lime. and lead) glass
A 18 454 g/hr for pressed and blown
(borosilicate) gtass. wool fiberglass. and
not glass
(4) P Is the rate of glass production (kg/hr)
from (d) above .

-------
(f) When gaseous and liquid Fuels are
fired simultaneously in a glass melting
furnace, the heat input of each fuel.
expressed in joules, is determined
during each testing period by
multiplying the gross calorific value of
each Fuel fired (in joules/kilogram) by
the rate of each fuel fired (in kilograms/
second) to the glass melting furnaces.
The decimal percent of liquid fll!"!1
heating value to total Fuel heating value
is determined by dividing the heat input
of the liquid fuels by the sum of the heat
input for the liquid fuels and the gaseous
Fuels. Gross calorific values are
determined in accordance with
American Society of Testing and
Materials (A.S.T.M.) Method 0 240-
64(73) (liquid Fuels) and 0 1826-64(7)
(gaseous fuels), as applicable. The
owner or operator IIhall determine thl!
rute of fuels burned during each testing
period by suitable methods and shall
confirm the rate by a material balance
over the glass melting system. [Section
114 of Clean Air Act, as amended (42
V.S.C.7414).J

(g) If an owner or operator changes an
affected Facility from a glass melting
Furnace with modified processes to a
glass melting furnace without modified
processes or from a glass melting
furnace without modified processes to a
glass melting furnace with modified
processes, the owner or operator shaH
notify the Adminl8trntor 60 days before
the change Is scheduled to occur.249

(Sec. 111. 114, 301(8), of the Clean Air Act as
amended (42 U.S.C. 7411. 7414. 7601(alJ)
Proposed/effective
44 FR 34840. 6/15/79
Promulgated
45 FR 66742. 10/7/80 (118)
Revised
48 FR 3734. 1/27/83 (177)
49 FR 41030. 10/19/84 (249)
111-:)3

-------
Subpart DD-Standarcl. 0'

Performance 'or Grain Elevator. 90

* 60.300 Applicability and designation of
affected facility.

(a) The provisions of this subpart
apply to each affected facility at any
grain terminal elevator or any grain
storage elevator, except as provided
under 160.304(b). The affected facill.
ties are each truck unloading station,
truck loading station, barge and ship
unloading station, barge and ship load.
ing station, railcar loading station,
railcar unloading station, grain dryer,
and all grain handling operations.
(b) Any facility under paragraph (a)
of this section which commences con.
struction, modification, or reconstruc.
tion after (date of reinstatement of
proposal> is subject to the require-
ments of this part.
160.301 Definitions.

As used in this subpart, all terms not
defined herein shall have the meaning
given them in the act and in subpart A
of this pan.
(a) "Grain" means com, wheat, sore
ghum, rice, rye, oats, barley, and soy-
beans.
(b) "Grain elevator" means any
plant or installation at which grain is
unloaded, handled, cleaned, dried,
stored, or loaded.
(c) "Grain terminal elevator" means
any grain elevator which has a perma-
nent storage capacity of more than
88.100 mS (ca. 2.5 million U.S. bushels),
except those located at animal food
manufacturers, pet food manufactur-
ers, cereal manufacturers, breweries,
and livestock feedlots.
(d) "Permanent storage capacity"
means grain storage capacity which is
inside a building, bin, or silo.
(e) "Railcar" means railroad hopper
car or boxcar.
(f) "Grain storage elevator" means
any grain elevator located at any
wheat flour mIll, wet com mill, dry
com mill (human consumption), rice
mill, or soybean oil extraction plant
which has a permanent grain storage
capacity of 35,200 mS (ca. 1 million
bushels).
(g) "Process emission" means the
particulate matter which is collected
by a capture system.
(h) "Fugitive emission" means the
particulate matter which is not collect-
ed by a capture system and is released
directly into the atmosphere from an
affected facility at a grain elevator.
(J) "Capture system" means the
equipment such as sheds, hoods, ducts,
fans, dampers, etc. used to collect par.
ticulate matter generated by an affect.
ed facility at a grain elevator.
(j) "Grain unloading station" means
that portion of a grain elevator where
the grain is transferred from a truck,
railcar, barge, or ship to a receiving
hopper.
(k) "Grain loading station" means
that portion of a grain elevator where
the grain is transferred from the ele.
vator to a truck, railcar, barge, or ship.
(}) "Grain handling operations" in.
clude bucket elevators or legs (exclud-
Ing legs used to unload barges or
ships), scale hoppers and surge bins
(garners), turn heads, scalpers. clean-
ers, trippers, and the headhouse and
other such structures.
(m) "Column dryer" means any
equipment used to reduce the mois-
ture content of grain in which the
grain flows from the top to the bottom
in one or more continuous packed col-
umns between two perforated metal
sheets.
(n) "Rack dryer" means any equip-
ment used to reduce the moisture con-
tent of grain in which the grain flows
from the top to the bottom in a cas-
cading flow around rows of baffles
(racks).
(0) "Unloading leg" means a device
which includes a bucket-type elevator
which is used to remove grain from a
barge or ship.

* 60.302 Standard for particulate matter.

(a) On and after the 60th day of
achieving the maximum production
rate at which the affected facility will
be operated, but no later than 180
days after initial startup. no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of
this subpart shall cause to be dis-
charged into the atmosphere any
gases which exhibit greater than 0
percent opacity from any:
(1) Column dryer with column plate
perforation exceeding 2.4 mm diame-
ter (ca. 0.094 inch).
(2) Rack dryer in which exhaust
gases pass through a screen filter
coarser than 50 mesh.
(b) On and after the date on which
the performance test required to be
conducted by * 60.8 is completed, no
owner or operator subject to the provi-
sions of this subpart shall cause to be
discharged into the atmosphere from
any affected facility except a grain
dryer any process emission which:
(1) Contains particulate matter in
excess of 0.023 g/dscm (ca. 0.01 gr/
dscf>.
(2) Exhibits greater than 0 percent
opacity.
(c) On and after the 60th day of
achieving the maximum production
rate at which the affected facility will
be operated, but no later than 180
days after initial startup, no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of
this subpart shall cause to be dis-
charged into the atmosphere any fugi.
tive emission from:
(1) Any individual truck unloading
station, railcar unloading station. or
railcar loading station, which exhibits
greater than 5 percent opacity.
(2) Any grain handling operation
which exhibits greater than 0 percent
opacity.
111-.89
(3) Any truck loading station which
exhibits grea.ter than 10 percent opac.
ity.

(4) Any barge or ship loading station
which exhibits greater than 20 percent
opacity.

(d) The owner or operator of any
barge or ship unloading station shall
operate as follows:
(1) The unloading leg shall be en-
closed from the top (including the re-
<:eiving hopper) to the center line of
the bottom pulley and ventilation to a
control device shall be maintained on
both sides of the leg and the grain reo
celving hopper.
(2) The total rate of air ventilated
shall be at least 32.1 actual cubic
meters per cubic meter of grain han-
dling capacity .
-------
(4) The installation of permanent
storage capacity with no increase in
hourly grain handling capacity.
~
~. 8/3/78 (90)
111-90
-------
Subpart EE-Standards of
Performance for Surface Coating of
Metal Furniture 166 .

160.310 Applicability and designation of
aflected facility.
(a) The affected facility to which the
provisions of this subpart apply i8 each
metal furniture surface coating
operation in which organic coatings are
applied.
(b) This subpart applies to each
affected facility identified in paragraph
(a) of this section on which construction,
modification, or reconstruction is
commenced after November 28, 1980.
(c) Any owner or operator of a metal
furniture surface coating operation that
uses less than 3,842 liters of. coating (as
applied) per year and keeps purchase or
inventory records or other data
necesaary to substantiate annual
coating usage shall be exempt from all
other provisions of this subpart. These
records shall be maintained at the
source for a period of at least 2 years~76
f 60.:311 ;'hllnltlona and symbols.
(a) All tem'fs used in this subpart not
defined below are given the meaning in
the Act and in Subpart A of this part.
"Bake oven" means a devic., which
uses heat to dry or cure coatings.
"Dip coating" means a method of
applying coatings in which the part is
submerged in a tank filled with the
coatings.
"E1ectrodeposition (EDP)" means a
method of applying coatings in which
the part is submerged in a tank filled
with the coatings and in which an .
electrical potential is used to enhance
deposition of the coatings on the part.
"Electrostatic spray application"
means a spray application method that
uses an electrical potential to increase
the transfer efficiency of the coatings.
"Flash-off area" means the portion of
a surface coating operation between the
coating application area and bake oven.
"Flow coating" means a method of
'applying coatings in which the part is
carried through a chamber containing
numerous nozzles which direct
unatomized streams of coatings from
many different angles onto the surface
of the part.
"Organic coating" means any coating .
used in a surface coating operation.
including dilution solvents. from which
volatile organic compound emissions
occur during the application or the
curing process. For the purpose of this
regulation. powder coatings are Dot
included in this definition.
"Powder coating" means any surface
coating which is applied 8S a dry
pdwder and is fused into a continuous
coating rilin througb the use of heat.
"Spray application" means a method
of applying coatings by atomizing and
directing the atomized spray toward the
part to be coated.
"Surface coating operation" meaRS
the sys~em on a metal furniture surface
coating line used to apply and dry or
cure an organic coating on the surface of
the metal furniture part or product. The
8urface coating operatioR may be a
prime coat or a top coat operation and
includes the coating application
1Itation(8), flash-off area, and curing
oven.
"Transfer efficiency" means the ratio
of the amount of coating soUds
deposited onto the surface of a part or
product to the total amount ef coati"8
solic:h used.
"VOC content" meant! the proportion
of a coating thet is volatile organic
compounds (VOC's), expressed 88
kilograms of VOC's per liter of wating
solids.
"VOC emissions" means the mass of
volatile organic compounds (VOC's).
expressed as kilograms of VOC's per
liter of applied coating solids, emitted
from a metal furniture surface coating
operation. .

(b) All symbols used in this subpart
not defined below are given the meaning
in the Act and in Subpart A of this part.

c.=the VOC concentration In each 8as
stream leaving the control device and
entering the atmosphere (parts per
million by volume. as csrbon)
c..= the VOC concentration in each 8as
stream entering the control device (psrts
per million by volume. as carbon)
c,= lite VOC concentration in each 8as
stream emitted directly to the
atmosphere (parts per million by volume,
88 carbon)
D.=density of each coating, 8sleceived
(kilograms per liter)
Dd=density of each diluent VOC-solvent
(kilograms per liter)
D.:;density of VOC-solvent recovered by an
emission control device (kil08rams per
Hter)
E= VOC destruction efficiency of the control
device (fraction)
F = the proportion of total V0C'8 emitted by
1m affected facility that enters the control
device (fraction)
G=the volume-weighted average mass of
VOC's in coatings consumed in a calendar
month per unit volume of coating solids
applied (kilograms per liter)
L.=the volume of each coating consumed. as
received (liters)
!...t= the volume of each diluent VOC-flolvent
added to coatings (liters)
1..= the volume of VOC-solvent recovered by
.an emission control device (1iters)
L.=the volume of coating solids consumed
(liters)
'111-91
M.t=the ma88 of diluent VOC-solvent
consumed (kilograma) .
M.,= the ma88 of VOC's in coatings
consumed. as received (kilograms)
Mr=the mass ofVOC's recovered by an
emission control device (kilograms)
N=the volume weighted avera8e mass of
VOCemiasions to the atmosphera per unit
80Iume of coating solids applied (kilograms
per liter)
Q. = the yolumetric flow rate of each gas
stream leaving the coatrol device aDd
entering the atmosphere (dr)' standard
cubic meters per hour)
Q.= the volumetric flow rate 01 each gas
stream entering the coatrol device (dry
standard cubic meters per hour)
~=the volumetric flow rate of each 8as
stream emitted directly to the atmosphere
(dry standard cubic met81'S per hour)
R=the overall VOC emi88ion reduction
achieved for aD affected facility (fraction)
T=the trander efficiency (fraction)
V.-=the proportion of 80licla in each coating
(or input etreamJ... received (fractioD by
volume)
W.=~e proportion of VOCe in each coating
(or Input stream,), a8 received (fraction by
weight) \
f 60.312 Shlndard for vo!atlle organic
com~unds (VOC).

(a) On and after the date on which the
initial performance test required to be
conducted by A 6O.8(a) is completed, no
owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall cause
the discharge into the atmosphere of
VOC emissions from any metal furniture
surface coating operation in excess of
0.90 kilogram of VOC per liter of coating
solids applied.

f 60.313 Performance tests and
compliance provisions.

(a) Sections 6O.8(d) and (f) do not
apply to the performance test
procedures required by this subpart..
(b) The owner or operator of an
affected facility shall conduct an initial
performance test as required under
A 6O.8(a) and thereafter a performance
test each calendar month for each
affected facility according to the
procedures in this section.
(c) The owner or opera tor shall use
the following procedures for determining.
monthly volume-weighted average
emissions of VOC's in kilograms per
liter of coating solids applied (G).
. (1) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedures for any affected
facility which does not use a capture
system and control device to comply
with the emissions limit specified under
A 60.312. The owner or operator shall
determine the composition of the
coatings by formulation data supplied
by the manufacturer of the coating or by
an analysis of each coating, as received.
using Reference Method 24. The
-------
Administrator may require the owner or
operator who uses formulation data
Gupplied by the manufacturer of the
coating to determine the vac content of
coatings using Reference Method 24. The
owner or operator shall determi.ne the
volume of coating and the mass of vac-
solvent used for thinning purposes from
com;>any records on a monthly basis. If
G common coating distribution system
(lerves more than one affected facility or
serves both affected and existing
facilities. the owner or operator shall
estimate the volume of coating used at
each facility by using the average dry
weight of coating and the surface area
coated by each affected and existing
fscility or by other procedures
acceptable to the Administrator.
(i) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of the total mass of vac's
consumed per unit volume of coating
solids applied (G) during each calendar
month for each affected facility. except
as provided under I 6O.313(c)(2) and
(c)(3). Each monthly calculation is
considered a performance test. Except
as provided in paragral'h (c)(1)(iv) of
this section. the volume-weighted
average of the total mass of vac's
consumed per unit volume of coating
IOlids applied (G) each calendar month
will be determined by the 'following
procedures. .
(A) Calculate the mass of vac's used
(M.,+M.s) during each calendar month
for each affected facility by the
following equation:
M., + M.. =i La Del W 01 + f L.u Dell
'~1 1-1
'1:L.uDdI will be 0 if no VOC solvent is added
Where more than one application
method is used within a single surface
coating operation, the owner or operator
shall determine the composition and
volume of each coating applied by each
method through a means acceptable to
the Administrator and compute the
weighted average transfer efficiency by
the followins equation:
. f f a-V~T~

T=lulkdl
L"
Where n Is the number of coatings used and p
is the number of application methods used.

(C) Calculate the volume-weighted
average mass of vac's consumed per
anit volume of coating solids applied (G)
during the calendar month for each
lowest transfer efficiency at which the
coating is applied, results in a value
equal to or less than 0.90 kilogram per
liter. the affected facility is in
compli.ance provided no vac's are
added to the coatings during distribution
or application.
(2) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedures for any affected
facility that uses a capture system and a
control device that destroys vac's (e.g..
incinerator) to comply with the emission
limit specified under t 60.312.
(i) Determine the overall reduction,
efficiency (R) for the capture system and
control device. For the initial
performance test the' overall reduction
efficiency (R) shall be determined as
prescribed in (c)(2)(i) (A). (B). and (C) of
this section. In subsequent months, the
owner or operator may use the most
recently determined overall reduction
efficiency (R) for the performance test
providing control device and capture
system operating conditions have not
changed. The procedure in (c)(2)(i) (A).
(B). and (C). of this section, shall be
repeated when directed by .the
Administrator or when the owner or
operator elects to operate the control
device or capture system at conditions
different from the initial performance
test.
. (A) Determine the fraction (F) of total
Transfer
efficiency vac's emitted by an affected facility
(T) that enters the control device using the
~.25 following equation:
.25
.80
.70

.80
.90 F
.95
to the coatings, 611 received.)
WI>ere: n io the number of different coatings
used during the calendar month and m is the
number of different diluent VQC-solvents
used during the calendar month.

(H) Calculate the total volume of
coating solids used (1...) in each calendar
month for each affected facility by the
following equation:
1..= t Lct-Vol
I~I
Where: n is the number of different coatings
used during the calendar month.

Select the appropriate transfer
efficiency from Table 1. If the owner or
operator can demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the Administrator that
other transfer efficiencies other than
those shown are appropriate, the
Administrstor will approve their use on
a case-by-case basis. Transfer efficiency
values for application methods not listed
below shall be determined by the
Administrator on a case-by-case basis.
An owner or operator must submit
sufficient data for the Administrator to
judge the accuracy of the transfer
efficiency claims.
TABLE 1.- TRANSFER EFFICIENCIES
Application methods
Air 8Iomized &Fay[[[
Airtess spray[[[
Manual etectrostatic spray........................................
NonrotabonBl automatic eIectro8tatic spray...........
Ro18ting head 8IectrosI8tic apray (m&nu8I and
8UIom8ticl """"'"''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
Dip COBt and now COB!..............................................
EIecIrodepositio [[[
affected fscility by the following
equation:
G= M.,+M..
L"T
(ii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of vac emissions to the
atmosphere (N) during the calendar
month for each affected facility by the
following equation: .

N=G

(Hi) Where the volume-weighted
average mass of VOC discharged to the
atmosphere per unit volume of coating
solids applied (N) is less than or equal
to 0.90 kilogram per liter. the affected
facility is in compliance. .
(iv) If each individual coating used by
an affected facility has a vac content.
as received, which when divided by the
III-'92
D
rc-.Q...
I-I
f c.,..Q... + I Co Qe
101 '-I
Where n Is the number of 8as streams
entering the control device and m is the
number of 8as streams emitted directly to the
atmosphere.

(B) Determine the destruction
efficiency of the control device (E) using
values of the volumetric flow rate of
each of the gas streams and the vac
content (as carbon) of each of the gas
streams in and out of the device by the
following equation:
f Q..s Cbj- f Qw c.,
E-1~' 1~1

-------
(C) Determine overall reduction
efficiency (R) using the following
equation:

R=EF

(ii) Calculate the vclume-weighted
average of the total mass of VOC's per
unit volume of coating solids applied (G)
during each calendar month for each
affected facility using equations in
paragraphs (c)(1)(i) (A), (B). and (C) of
this section.
(iii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of VOC emissions to the
atmosphere (N) during each calendar
,month by the following equation:

N=G(1-R)

(iv) If the volume-weighted average
mass of VOC's emitted to the
atmosphere for each calendar month (N)
is less than or equal to 0.90 kilogram per
liter of coating solids applied. the
affected facility is in compliance. Each
monthly calculation is a performance
test.
(3) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedure for any affected
facility which uses a control device that
recovers the VOC's (e.g..:.!I.rlJon
ad sorber) to comply with the applicable
emission limit specified under I 60.312.

(i) Calculate the total mass of VOC's
consumed CMo+~) and the volume-
weighted average of the total mass of
VOC's per unit volume of coating solids
applied (G) during each calendar month
for each affected facility using equations
in paragraph (c)(I)(i) (A), (B), and (C) of
this section.
(Ii) Calculate the total mass of VOC's
recovered (M,) during each calendar
month using the following equation:

M,o:I.D,

(iIi) Calculate overall reduction
efficiency of the control device (R) for
each calendar month for each affected
facility using the following equation:
M,
R= td.,+M.t
(Iv) Calculate the volume-weighted
average mass of VOC's emitted to the
atmosphere (N) for each calendar month
for each affected facility using equation
in paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this section.
(v) If the weighted average mass of
VOC's emitted to the atmosphere for
each calendar month (N) Is less than or
equal to 0.90 kilogram per liter of coating
solids applied, the affected facility is in
compliance. Each monthly calculation is
a performance test.
f 10.314 lIon"orfng of emI88Ion8 and
operations.
(a) The owner or operator of an
affected facility which uses a capture
system and ah incinerator to comply
with the emission limits specified under
1 60.312 shall install, calibrate, maintain,
and operate temperature measurement
devices according to the following
procedures:
(1) Where thermal incineration is
used, a temperature measurement
device shall be installed in the firebox.
Where catalytic incineration is used, a
temperature measurement device shall
be installed in the gas stream
immediately before and after the
catalyst bed.
(2) Each temperature measurement
device shall be installed, calibrated, and
maintained according to the
manufacturer's specifications. The
device shall have an accuracy of the
greater of 0.75 percent of the
temperature being measured expressed
in degrees Celsius or :t2.5°C.
(3) Each temperature measurement
device shall.be equipped with a
recording device so that a permanent
continuous record is produced.
(b) The owner or operator of an
affected facility which uses a capture
system and a solvent recovery system to
comply with the emission limits
specified under 1 60.312 shall install the
equipment necessary to determine the
total volume of VOC-solvent recovef.13d
daily.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.s.c. 7414))

f 10.315 Reporting and recordkeeplng
NqUIrementa.
(a) The reporting requirements of
Section 6O.8(a) apply only to the initial
performance test. Each owner or
operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall include the following data
in the report of the initial performance
test required under 160.8(a):
(1) Except as provided in paragraph
(a)(2} of this section, the volume-
weighted average mass of VOC's
emitted to the atmosphere per volum!! of
applied coating solids (N) for a period of
one calendar month from each affected
facility.
(2) For each affected facility where
compliance is determined under the
provisions of 160.313(c)(I)(iv), a list of
the coatings used during a period of one
calendar month, the VOC content of
each coating calculated from data
determined using Reference Method 24
or supplied by the manufacturer of the
coating, and the minimum transfer
111-93
efficiency of any coating application
equipment used during the month.
(3) For each affected facility where
compliance is achieved through the use
of an incineration system, the following
additional information will be reported:
(i) The proportion of total VOC's
emitted that enters the control device
(F), .
(ii) The VOC reduction efficiency of
the control device (E),
(ill) The average combustion
temperature (or the average temperature .
upstream and downstream of the
catalyst bed), and .
(iv) A description of the method used
to establish the amount of VOC's
captured and sent to the incinerator.
(4) For each affected facility where
compliance is achieved through the use
of a solvent recovery system, the
following additional information will be
reported:
(i) The volume of VOC-solvent
recovered (1.,), and
(Ii) The overall VOC emission
reduction achieved (R).
(h) Following the initial performance
test, the owner or operator of an
affected facility shall identify and
record: .
(1) Each instance in which the
volume-weighted average of the total
mass of VOC's emitted to the
atmosphere per volume of applied
coating solids (N) is greater than the
limit specified under I 60.312.
(2) Where compliance with i 60.312 is
achieved through the use of thermal
incineration. each 3-hour period when
metal furniture is being coated during
which the average temperature of the
de\'ice was more than 28°C below the
a\'erage temperature of the device
during the most recent performance test
at which destruction efficiency was
determined as specified under i 60.313.
(3) Where compliance with i 60.312 is
achieved through the use of catalytic
incineration. each 3-hour period when
metal furniture is being coated during
which the average temperature of the
device immediately before the catalyst
bed is more than 28°C below the
average temperature of the device
immediately before the catalyst bed
during the most recent performance test
at which destruction efficiency was
determined as specified under i 60.313.
Additionally. when metal furniture is
being coated. all 3-hour periods during
which the average temperature
difference across the catalyst bed is less
than 80 percent of the average
temperature difference across the
-------
catalyst bed during the most recent
performance test at which destruction
efficiency was determined as specified
under ~ 60.313 will be recorded.
(c) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
maintain at the 8O\IJ'C8, for a period of at
le88t 2 years. recordl of aU data and
calculations used to detennine VOC
emissions from each affected faciHty.
Where compliaDce is achieved through
the use of thennal incineration. each
owner or operator shall maintain. at the
lDurce, daily records of the incinerator
combustion chamber temperature. If
catalytic incineratioD is used. the owner
or operator shall maintain at the source
daily records of the gas temperature.
both upstream and downstream of the
incinerator catalyst bed. Where
compliance is achieved through the use
of a solvent recovery system. the owner
or operator shall maintain at tHe source
daily records of the amount of solvent
recovered by the system for each
affected facility.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act a8 amended (<<2
U.S.C. 7414))

f 10.316 Teat methodsll!'d procedures.

(a) The reference methods in
Appendix A to this part except as
provided under I 6O.8(b) shall be used to
determine compliance with I 60.312 al
follows:
(1) Method 24, or coating
'manufacturer's formulation data. for ule
in t~e determination of VOC content of
each batch of coating as applied to the
surface of the metal parts. In case of an
inconsistency between the Method 24
relultl and the formulation data. the
Method 24 11I8u1,t8 wiD sovem. '
(2) Method 25 for the measurement of
VOC concentration.
(3) Method 1 for sample and veJocity
traverses.
(4) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric flow rate. '
(5) Method 3 for gas analysis.
(6) Method 4 for stack gas moisture.
(b) For Method 24. the coating sample
must be at least a 1 liter sample in a 1
liter container taken at a point where
the sample will be representative of the
coating material as applied to the
lurface of the metal part.
(c) For Method 25. the minimum
lampling time for each of 3 runs is 60
minutes and the minimum sample
volume is 0.003 dry standard cubic
meters except that shorter sampling
times or smaller volumes. when
necessitated by process variables or
other factors. may be approved by the
Administrator.
(d) The Administrator wiJI approve
testing of representative stacks on a
case-by-case basis if the owner or
operator can demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the Administrator that
testing of representative stacks yieldl
results comparable to those that would
be obtained by testing all stacks.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act a8 amended (42
U.S.C. 1414))
~
~IO
~. 10129/82 011) .
Revised
5lr1InII247, 4{30{85 (276)
II.I;"~~;:''<
-------
Subpart GG-Standards of
Performance for Stationary Gas
Turbines 101

o 60.330 Applicability and designation 0'
8ffected "clllty.

The provisions of this subpart are
applicable to the following affected
facilities: all stationary gas turbines
with a heat Input at peak load equal to
or greater than 10.7 gigajoules per hour.
based on the lower heating value of the
fuel fired.
o 60.331 Definitions.

As used In this subpart. all tenns not
defmed herein shall have the meaning
given them In the Act and in subpart A
of this part.
(a) "Stationary gas turbine" means
any simple cycle gas turbine,
regenerative cycle gas turbine or any
gas turbine portion of a combined cycle
stpam/electric generating system that is
not self propelled. It may, however, be
mounted on a vehicle for portability.
(b) "Simple cycle gas turbine" means
any stationary gas turbine which does
not recover heat from the gas turbine
exhaust gases to preheat the inlet
combustion air to the gas turbine, or
which does not recover heat from the
gas turbine exhaust gases to heat water
or generate steam.
(c) "Regenerative cycle gas turbine"
means any stationary gas turbine which
recovers heat from the gas turbine
exhaust gases to preheat the inlet
combustion air to the gal turbine.
(d) "Combined cycle pa mrbine"
means any atatioDary 88S turbine which
recovers heat from :he gRa turbine
exhaust gases to heat water or generate
steam.
(e) "Emergency g88 turbine" means
any stationary gas turbine which
operates as a mechanical or electrical
power source only when the primary
power source for a facility"has been
rendered inoperable by an emergency
situa tion.
(f) "Ice fog" meal18 an atmospheric
suspension of highly reflective ice
crystals.
(g) "ISO standard day conditions"
means 288 degrees Kelvin. 60 percent
relative bumidity and 101.3 kilopascals
pressure.
(b) "Efficiency" means the gas turbine
manufacturer's rated beat rate at peak
load in terms of heat input per unit of
power output based on the lower
heating value of the fuel
(i) "Peak load" means 100 percent of
the manufacturer's design capacity of
the gas turbine at ISO standard day
conditions.
m "Base load" means the load level at
which a gas turbine is nonnally
operated.
(k) "Fire-fighting turbine" means any
stationary g88 turbine that is used solely
to pump water for extinguishing fires.
(1) "Turbines employed in oil/gas
production 011' oil/gas transportation"
means any stationary gas turbine used
to provide power to extract crude oil/
natural gas from the earth or to move
crude oil/naturalg88, or products
refined from these substances through
pipelines.
(m) A "Metropolitan Statistical Area"
or "MSA" as defmed by the Department
of Commerce.
(n) "Offshore platform gas turbines"
means any stationary gas turbine
located on a platform in an ocean.
(0) "Garrison facility" means any
pennanent military installation.
(P) "Gas turbine model" means a
group of gas turbines having the same
nominal air flow, combuster inlet
pressure. combuster inlet temperature,
firing temperature. turbine inlet
temperature and turbine inlet pressure.
(q) "Electric utility stationary gas
lurbine" means any stationary gas
turbine constructed for the purpose of
supplying more than one-third of its
potential electric output capacity to any
utility power distribution system for
sale.14' .
(r) "llinergency fuel" is a fuel fired by
a gas turbine only during circumstances,
such as natural.gas supply curtailment
or breakdown of delivery system, that
make it impossible to fire natural gas in
the gas turbine.'42
(s) "Regenerative cycle 888 turbine"
means any stationary 88S turbine thai
recovers thermal energy from the
exhaust 88se8 and utilizes the thermal
energy to preheal air prior to enterins
the combustor,142
t 60.332 Sta4. d lor IIftrogen oJlldes.
(a) On and after the date of the
performance teat required by . 60.8 I.
completed. every owner or operator
subject to the provisions 0' this subpart
as specified In paragraphs (b). (c). and
(d) of this section shall comply with one
of the following, except 88 provided ID
paragraphs (e), (I). (8). (h). (I). 0). (Ie). and
(I) of this section. 142
(1) No owner or~per8tor subject to
the provisioos of \hia aubpart shall
caU8e to be discllarged into the
atmosphere from any atationary gas
turbine, any lale8 which contain
nitrogen oxides in exceal of:
~
SrD = 0.0075 Y + F
32
111-95
where:
Sm=aDowable No,. emissions (percent by
volume at 15 peECent oxygen and 011 a
dry basis).
Y=manufacturer's rated heat rate at
manufacturer's rated load (kiJojouJes per
watt hour) or, actual measured heat rate
based OD lower heating value of fuel as
measured at actual peak load for the
facility. The veJue of Y shall not exceed
14.4 kilojouJes per watt hour.
F=NO. emission allowance for fuel-bound
llitrogen as defined in part (3) of this
paragraph.
(2) No owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall cause to be
discharged into the atmosphere from any
stationary gas turbine. any gases which
eonlam nitrogeu oxides in excess of:
srD = 0.0150 (~) + F
where:
SID=allowable NO. emissions (percent by
yoiume at U percent oxygen and on a
dry basis).
Y = manufacbl1w's rated heat rate at
manufactures". rated peak load
(kiJojoules per walt hour). or actual
measured heat rate based on lower
heating value of fuel as measured at
aclual peak load for the facility. The
value of Y shall not exceed 14.4
kilojoules per watt hOUT.
F=NO. emission allowance for fuel-bound
nitrogen 8S defined in part (3) 6f this
paragraph.

(3) F shall be defined according to the
nitrogen content of the fuel as follows:
Fue1-8ound Ititl'Ogftl
(percrnt by weiqht)

. c 0.015
F
~~rceftt by vnlume)

o
0.015' ": 0.1
0.1 . " ~ o. Z5
0.04(N)
0.004. + 0.0061(11-0.1)
" .. 0.25
0.005
where:
N = the Ditn9m COIdent of.. fuel (percent
by weiBbt).
or:
Manufacturers may ~Yelop C1Istom
fuel-bound nitroRf!J1 aUowances for each
gaa turbine model they manufacture.
These. fuel-bound nitrogen allowances
shall be substantiated with data and
must be approved for use by the
Administrator before the initial
performance test required by I 60.8.
Notices of approval of custom fuel-
bound nitrogen allowances will be
published in the Fedora) Register.
(b) mectric utility stationary gas
turbines with a heat Input at peak load
greater than 107.z glgafoules per hour
(100 million Dtu/hour) based on the
lower heating value 0' the fuel fired
-------
shall comply witb the provisions of
G 6O.332(a)(1).142

(c) Stationary gas tW'bines with a heat
inpu& at peak load equal to or greater
than 10.7 gigajoules per hour (10 million
J3tu/hour) but less than or equal to 107.2
gigajoule.s per hoW' (100 million Btu/
lwur} based on the lower heating value
of the fuel fired. shall comply with the
provisions of i 6O.332(a)(2).
(d) Stationary 885 hlrbines with a
manufacturer's rated base load at ISO
conditions of 30 megawatts or leas
except as proVlidecl in 160.33~b) shaD
comply with i 00.332(a)(2),142

(e) Stationary gas turbines with a heat
input £It peak load equal to or greater
fuan 10.7 gigajoules per hour (10 million
13tu/hour) but less than or equal to 107.2
gigajoules per hour (100 million Btu/
hour) based on tlie lower beating value
of the fuel fired and that have
commenced construction prior to
October 3. 1962 are exempt from
paragraph (a) of this section.
(f) Stationary gas turbines using water
or steam injection for control of NOs
emissions are exempt from paragraph
(a) when ice fog is deemed a traffic
hazard by the owner or operator of the
gas turbine.
(g) Emergency gas turbines. military
gas turbines for use in other than a
garrison facility, military gas tW'bines
installed for use as military training
facilities. and fire fighting gas turbines
are exempt from paragraph (a) of this
section.
(h) Stationary gas turbines engaged by
manufacturers in research and
development of equipment for both gas
turbine emission control techniques and
gas turbine efficiency improvements are
e)(empt from paragraph (8) on a case-by.
case basis a8 determined by the
Administrator.
(i) Exemptions from the requirements
of paragraph (8) of this section will be
gnnted on a case-by-c:ase basis as
determined by the Admiuistrator in
specific geographical areas where
mandatory water restrictions are
required by govemmental agencies
becauae of drought condjtions. Tbese
exemptions will be allowed only while'
the mandatory water restrictions are In
effect.

(j) Stationary 888 turbines with a beat
input at peak load greater than 1a1.2
gigajoules per hour that commenced
construction. modificattoa. or
recolUJtruction between the dates o'
October 3, 1971, and JanWU')' ZI,1982,
and were required in the September 10.
1979. Federal Register (44 FR S2192) 10
comply with , 6O.332{a)(I), except
electric utility stationary gas turbines.
are exempt from paragraph (a) of this
section. 142
(k) Stationary g86 turbines with fa heat
input greatsf than or equal to 10.7
gigajoules per hour (10 million Btufhour)
when fired with natural gas are exempt
from paragE'aph (a)(2) of this section
when being fired with an emergency
fuel. '12

(I) Regenerative cycle gas turbines
with e heat input leis than or equal to
107.2 gig8joules per hour (100 million
Btu/hour) ere exemp~ from par8graph
(a) of tM£! s8ctIon.'4L
~ 60.3$$ S~ndanl ~~7 8u1fur dioxide.
On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by 1 60.8' is completed. every
owner or operator subject to the
provision of this subpart shall comply
with one or the other of the following
conditions:
(a) No owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
cause to be discharged into the
atmosphere from any stationary gas
turbine any gases which contain sulfur
dioxide in excess of 0.015 percent by
volume at 15 percent oxygen and on a
dry basis.
(b) No owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall bum
in any stationary gas turbine any fuel
which contains sulfur in excess of 0.8
percent by weight.

~ 60.3$4 [M@nltorlng of operations.

(a) The owner or operator of any
stationary gas turbine subject to the
provisions of this subpart and using
water injection to control NOs emissions
shall install and oper.ate a continuous
monitoring system to monitor and record
the fuel consumption and the ratio of
water to fuel being fired in the turbine.
This system shall be accurate to within
:!:5.0 percent and shall be approved by
the Administrator.
(b) The owner or operator of any
.stationary gas turbine subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall monitor
sulfur content and nitrogen content of
the fuel being fired in the turbine. The
frequency of determination of these
values shall be as follows:
(1) If the turbine is supplied its fuel
from a bulk storage tank. the values
shall be determined on each occasion
that fuel is transferred to the storage
tank from any other source.
(2) If the turbine is supplied its fuel
without intermediate bulk storage the
values shall be determined and recorded
daily. Owners. operators or fuel vendors
may develop custom schedules for
determination of the values based on the
design and operation of the affected
facility and the characteristics of the
fuel supply. These custom schedules
shall be substantiated with data and
111-96
must be approved by the Administrator
before they can be used to comply with
paragraph (b) of this section.
(c) For the purpose ofreports required
under 160.7(c), periods of excess
emissions that shall be reported are
defined as follows:
(1) Nitrogen oxides. Anyone-hour
period during which the average water-
to-fuel ratio. 8S measUred by the
continuous monitoring system. falls
below the water-ta-fuel ratio determined
to demonstrate' compliance with 160.332
by the performance test required in
I 60.8 or any period during which the
fuel-bound nitrogen of the fuel is greater
than the maximum nitrogen content
allowed by the fuel-bound nitrogen
allowance u8ed during the performance
test required in 1 60.8. Each report shall
Include the average water-to-fuel ratio.
average fuel consumption. ambient
conditions. gas turbine load. and
nitrogen content of the fuel during tne
period of excess emissions. and the
graphs or figures developed under
160.335(a).
(2) Sulfur dioxide. Any daily period
during which the sulfur content of the.
fuel being fired in the gas turbine
exceeds 0.8 percent.
(3) Ice fog. Each period during which
an exemption provided in I 6O.332(g) is
in effect shall be reported in writing to
the Administrator quarterly. For each
period the ambient conditions existing
during the period. the date and time the
air pollution control system was
deactivated. and the date and time the
air pollution control system was
reactivated shall be reported. All
quarterly reports shall be postmarked by
the 30th day following the end' of each
cale~dar quarter.

(4) Emel'8ency fuel. Each period
during which an exemption pro~ded in
I 5O.332(k) is in effect shall be included
in the report required in 160.7(c). For
each period. the type, reasons. and
duration of the firing of the emergency
fuel shaU be reported.'42

(Sec. 114 or the Clean Air Ad 81 amended 142
U.S.C. 18570-9))

160.335 Test methods and procedures.
(a) The reference methods in
Appendix A to this part. except as
provided in 1 5O.8(b). shaH be used to
determine compliance with the
standards prescribed in 1 60.332 as
follows:
(1) Reference Method 20 for the
concentration of nitrogen oxides and
oxygen. For affected facilities under this
subpart. the span value shaH be 300 .
parts per million of nitrogen oxides.
(i) The nitrogen oxides emission level
measured by Reference Method 20 shaH
be adjll~/ed to ISO standard day
-------
conditions by the following ambient
condition correction factor:
NO
x
= (NOX )
obs
(~ref)0.5 e19(HObS - 0.00633)
PObS
T
( AMB _)1.53
288°K
where:
NO. = emissions of NO. at 15 percent oxygen
and 150 standard ambient conditions.
NO.-==measured NO. emissions al15
percent oxygen. ppmv.
Pnf==reference combuster inlet absolute
pressure at 101.3 ldlopasC8ls ambient
pressure.
P_=measured combustor inlet absolute
pressure at tesl ambienl pressure.
"-=specific humidity of ambient air at lesl
ectranscendenlal constant (2.718).
TAJIOI=lemperalure of amblenlair al tesl

The adjusted NO. emission level shall
be used to determine complianr-e with
I 60.332.
(Ii) Manufacturers may develop
custom ambient condition correction
factors for each gas turbine model they
manufacture in terms of combustor inlet
pressure. ambient air pressure. ambient
air humidity and ambient air'
temperature to adjust the nitrogen
oxides emission level measured by the
performance test as provided for in
I 60.8 to ISO standard day conditions.
These ambient condition correction
factors shall be substantiated with data
and must be approved for use by. the
Administrator before the initial
performance test required by I 60.8.
Notices of approval of custom ambient
condition correction factors will be
published in the Federal Register.
(iii) The water-ta-fuel ratio necessary
to comply with I 60.332 will be
determined during the initial
performance test by measuring NO.
~rnission using Reference Method 20 and
the water-to.fuel ratio necessary to
comply with I 60.332 at 30. 50. 75. and
100 percent of peak load or at four
points in the normal operating range of
the gas turbine. including the minimum
point in the range and peak load. All
loads shall be corrected to ISO
conditions using the appropriate
equations supplied by the ptanufacturer.
(2) The analytical methods and
procedures employed to determine the
nitrogen content of the fuel being fired
shall be approved by the Administrator
and shall be accurate to within :f:5
percent.
(b) The method for determining
compliance with I 60.333. except as
provided In I 6O.8(b). shall be as
follows:
(1) Reference Method 20 for the
concentration ofsulfur dioxide and
oxygen or
(2)(i) ASTM D 2~71 for the suliur
content of liquid fuels and Asnf D
1072-80. D 3031-81. D 4084-82, o. D
524&-81 for the sulfur content of gaseous
mels (these methods are incorporated
by reference-see 160.17). These
methods shall also be used to compl~
with 1 6O.334(b). 177
(ii) The applicable ranges of some
A~TM methods mentioned above are
not adequate to measure the levels of
8UUUr in some fuel gases. Dilution of
samples prior to analysis (with
verification of the dilution ratio) is
allowable subject to the approval of the
Administrator. 236
111-97
(c) Analysis for the purpose of
determining the sulfur content and the
nitrogen content of the fuel as required
by 160.334(b). this subpart. may be
performed by the owner/operator. a
lervicl' contractor retained by the
owner/operator. the fuel vendor. or any
other qualified agency provided that the
analytical methods employed by these
agencies comply with the applicable
paragraphs of this section.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 18570-81)).
~S~~~ff~ti;e
FR 3 2. 01 177
promul~ated
44 FR 2792. 9/10/79 (101)
Revised
~67. 1/27/82 (142)
48 FR 3734. 1/27/83 (177)
49 FR 30672. 7/31/84 (236)
-------
Subpart HH-Standardl of 'erfor-
mance for Lime Manuf~durln9
Plantl 85,224

~ 60.340 AppllC8bl11ty and de8lgnatJon of
affected facility.
(a) The provisions of this subpart Rre
applicable to each rotary lime kiln used
in the manufacture of lime.
(L) The provisions of this subpart are
nut applicable to facilities used in the
manufacture of lime at kraft pulp mills.
(c) Any facility under paragraph (a) of
this section that commences
construction or modification after May
3. 1977. is subject to the requirementll of
this subpar:.

(!kr. 111. CI~an Air Act. as limendl'd (42
l:.S.C.7414))

~ 60.341 Definitions.
As used in this subpart. all terms not
dP.fined herein shall have the same
meaning given them in the Act and in
the General Provisions.
(a) "Lime manufacturing plant'. means
any plant which uses a rotary lime kiln
to produce lime product from limestone
by calcination.
(b) "Lime product" means the product
of the calcination process including. but
not limited to. calcitic lime. dolomitic
lime. and dead-burned dolomite.
[c) "Positive-pressure fabric filter"
means a fabric filter with the fans on the
upstream side of the filter bags.
(d) "Rotary lime kiln" means a unit
with an inclined rotating drum that is
used to produce a lime product from
limestone bv calcination.
(r.) "Stone feed" means limestone
feedstock and miIIscale or other iron
oxide additives that become part of the
r-oduct.

~ 60.342 Standard for particulate matter.
(a) On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by I 60.8 is completed, no
owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this subpar! shall cause to
be discharged into the atmosphere from
any rotary lime kiln any gases which:
(1) Contain particulate matter in
excess of 0.30 kilogram per megagram
(0.60 lb/ton) of stone feed.
(2) Exhibit greater than 15 percent
opacity when exiting from a dry
emission control device.
(S..c. 114. Clean Air Act a8 amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))

160.343 Monitoring of emInIona 8nd
operationa.
(a) TIle owner or operator of a facility
that is subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall install. calibrate. maintain.
and operate B continuous monitoring
system. except as provided in
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section. to
monitor and record the opacity of a
representative portion of the gasps
discharged into the atmosphere from
any rotary lime kiln. The span of this
system shall be set at 40 perc~nt
opacity.
(b) The owner or operator of any
rotary lime kiln using B positive-
pressure fabric filter control device
subject to the provisions of this subpart
may. in lieu of the continuous
monitoring requirement of 160.J4J{a).
monitor visible emissions 81 1('08t once
per day of operation by using Ii certified
visible emissions observer who. for each
site where visible emissions are
observed, will perform and record three
Method 9 tests on the gases dischargp,d
into the atmosphere.
(c) The owner or operator of any
rotary lime kiln using a wet scrubbing
emission control device subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall not be
required to monitor the opacity of the
gases discharged as required in
paragraph (a) of this section. but shall
install. calibrate. maintain. operate. and
record the resultant infonnation from
the following continuous monitoring
devices:
(1) A monitoring device for the
cor.tinuous measure:nent of the pressure
loss of the gas stream through the
scrubber. The monitoring device must be
accurate within :t250 pascals (one inch
of water).
(Z) A monitoring device for continuous
measurement of the scrubbing liquid
supply pre~sure to the control device.
The monitoring device must be accurate
within :t 5 percent of the design
scrubbing liquid supply pressure.
(d) For tbe purpose of conducting a
performance test under I 60.8. the owner
or operator of any lime manufacturing
plant subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall install, calibrate, mllintain.
and operate a device for measuring t~e
mass rate of stone feed to any affected
rotary lime kiln. The measuring device
used must be accurate to within :t5
percent of the mass rat£' over its
operating range.
(e) For the purpose of {eports required
under I ao.7(c). periods of excess
emissilU1s that shall be reported are
defined as all 6-minute periods during
which the average opacity of the visible
emissions from any lime kiln subject to
paragraph (a) of this subpart is greater
than 15 percent or. in the case of wet
scrubbers. any period in which the
scrubber pressure drop is greater than
30 percent below the rate established
during the perfonnance test. Reports of
excess emissions recorded during
observations made as required by
160.344(c) shall be submitted semi-
annually.
(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act. 08 amended (42
U.S.C.7414))
111-98
(Approved by the Office of Managemenl and
Budget under Control Number 2060-0C3nl
160.344 Teat methods and procedures.

(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part, except as provided under
I 6O.8(b). shall be used to detennine
compliance with I 6O.342(a) as follow~:
(1) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses:
(2) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric flow rate:
(3) Method 3 for gas analysis:
(4) Method 4 for stack gas moisture;
(5) Method 5 or 5D for the
measurement of particulate matter: and
(6) Method 9 for visible emissions.
(b) For Method 5 or 5D. the sampling
time for each run shall be at least 60
minutes. and the sampling rate shall be
at least 0.85 std m3/h. dry basis (0.53
dscf/min), except that shorter sampling
times. when necessitated by process
variables or other factors. may be
approved by the Administrator.
(c) Visible emission observations of
positive-pressure fabric filters shall
occur during normal operation of the
rotary lime kiln, at least once per day of
operation. For at least three 6-minute
periods. the opacity shall be recorded
and maintained for any point(s) where
visible emissions are observed. and the
corresponding feed rate of the kiln shall
also be recorded and maintained. These
observations shall be taken in
accordance with Method 9. Records
shall be maintained of any 6-minute
average that is in excess of the.
emissions limit specifi£'d in f 6O.34Z(a)
of this subpart.
(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act, a8 amended (';~
U.S.C.7414))
(Approved by the OfficI! of M"nagpnlt'nl and
Budget under Control Number 2G6(H)()63)
Proposed/effective
42 FR 22506. 5/3/77
Promu1 gated
43 FR 9452. 3/7/78 (85)
Revised
49 FR 18076, 4/26/84 (224)
-------
Subpart KK-8tand8rd8 of
Performance for ~Acld Battery
Manufacturing Planta '45

~ 60.370 AppIlc8bllIty and designation of
8ff8c:ted facility.
(a) The provi'sions of this subpart are
applicable to the affected facilities listed
In paragraph (b) of this section at any
lead-acid battery manufacturing plant
that produces or has the design capacity
to produce in one day (24 hours)
batteries containing an amount oflead
equal to or greater than 5.9 Mg (6.5 tons).
(b) The provisions of this subpart are
applicable to the following affected
facilities used In the manufacture of
lead-acid storage batteries:
(1) Grid casting facility.
(2) Paste mixing facility.
(3) Three-process operation facility.
(4) Lead oxide manufacturing facility.
(5) Lead reclamation facility.
(6) Other lead-emitting operations.
(c) Any facility under paragraph (b) of
this section the construction or
modification of which Is commenced
after January 14. 1980. Is subject to the
requirements" of this subpart.

160.371 Deflnltlona.
As used in this subpart. all terms not
defined herein shall have the meaning
given them In the Act and in Subpart A
of this part.
(a) "Grid casting facility" means the
facility which Includes all lead melting
pots and machines used for casting the
grid used In battery manufacturing.
(b) "Lead-acid battery manufacturing
plant" means any plant that produces a
storage battery using lead and lead
compounds for the plates and sulfuric
acid for the electrolyte.
(c) "Lead oxide manufacturing
facility" means a facility that produces
lead oxide from lead. Including product
recovery.
(d) "Lead reclamation facUity" means
the facility that remelts lead scrap and
casts it into lead ingots for use in the
battery manufacturing process. and
which Is not a furnace affected under
Subpart L of this part.
(e) "Other lead-emitting operation"
means any lead-acid battery
manufacturing plant operation from
which lead emissions are collected and
duc1ed to the ahnosphere and which is
not part of a grid C8sting. lead oxide
manufacturing. lead reclamation. paste
mixing. or three-process operation
facility. or a furnace affected under
Subpart L of this part.
(f) "Paste mixing facility" means the
facility including lead oxide storage.
conveying. weighing. metering. and.
charging operations: paste blending.
handling. and cooling operations; and
plate pasting. takeoff. cooling. and
drying operations.
(g) "Three-process operation facility"
means the facility including those
processes involved with plate stacking.
burning or strap casting. and assembly
of elements into the battery case.

180.372 Standard. for lead.

(a) On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by I 60.8 is completed. no
owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall cause to
be discharged into the abnosphere:
(1) From any grid casting facility any
gases that contain lead in excess of 0.40
milligram of lead per dry standard cubic
meter of exhaust (0.000176 gr/dscf).
(2) From any paste mixing facility any
gases that contain in excess of 1.00
milligram of lead per dry standard cubic
meter of exhaust (0.00044 gr/dscf).
(3) From any three-process operation
facility any gases that contain in excess
of 1.00 milligram of lead per dry
standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044
gr I dscf).
(4) From any lead oxide
manufacturing facility any gases that
contain in excess of 5.0 milligrams of
lead per kilogram of lead feed (0.010 lb/
ton).
(5) From any lead reclamation facility
any gases that contain in excess of 4.50
milligrams of lead per dry standard
cubic meter of exhaust (0.00198 gr/dscf).
(6) From any other lead-emitting
operation any gases that contain in
excess of 1.00 milligram per dry
standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044
gr / dscf).
(7) From any affected facility other
than a lead reclamation facility any
gases with greater than 0 percent
opacity (measured according to Method
9 and rounded to the nearest whole
percentage).
(8) From any lead reclamation facility
any gases with greater than 5 percent
opacity (measured according to Method
9 and rounded to the nearest whole
percentage).
(b) When two or more facilities at the
same plant (except the lead oxide
manufacturing facility) are ducted to a
common control device. an equivalent
standard for the total exhaust from the
commonly controlled facilities shall be
determined as follow.:
N
S.= I: S.(Q.../Q..,T}
a=1
III-99
Where:
5.=ls the equivalenl standard for the lolal
exhausistream.
5. = Is the aclual) slandard for each exhaust
slream ducted to Ihe control device.
N = Is Ihe lolal number of exhaust slreams
ducled 10 Ihe control device.
Q~=ls the dry standard volumetric flow
role of the effluenl gas stream from each
facilily ducled 10 Ihe control devic;e.
Qoc>r = Is the lotal dry standard volumetric
flow rale of all effluenl g8S streams
ducled 10 the control device.
f 60.373 MonItoring of emIs8ion8 and
operations.

The owner or operator of any lead.
acid battery manufacturing facility
subject to the provisions of this subpart
and controlled by a scrubbing system(s)
shall install. calibrate. maintain. and
operate a monitoring device(s) that
measures and records the pressure drop
across the scrubbing system(s) at least
once every 15 minutes. The monitoring
device shaD have an accuracy of:tS
percent over its operating range.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.5.C.7414})

f 60.374 Teet methods and procedur...
(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part. except as provided under
t 6O.8(b). shall be used to determine
compliance according to I 60.8 as
follows:
(1) Method 12 for the measurement of
lead concentrations.
(2) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses.
(3) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric Dow rate. and
(4) Method 4 for stack gas moisture.
(b) For Method 12, the sampling time
for each run shall be at least 60 minutes
and the sampling rate shall be at least
0.85 dscm/h (0.53 dscf/min). except that
shorter sampling times, when
necessitated by process variables or
other factors. may be approved by the
Administrator.
(c) When different operations in a
three-process operation facility are
ducted to separate control devices. the
lead emission concentration from the
facility shall be determined using the
equation:
N
C"'T= ~
a=1
(C-Q.../~
Where:
c...,.= 10 the facility emissiorn concentration
for the entire facility.
N = is the Dumber of control devices to which
separale OperatioDi iD the facility are
ducted.
C.... "" \a the eminloD OODCentration from
each control device.
-------
Q.... =18 the dry standards volumetric flow
rate of the emuent ga8 stream from each
control device.
~=is the total dry standard volumetric
flow rate from all of the control devices.

(d) For lead oxide manufacturing
Cacilities. the average lead Ceed rate to a
Cacility, expressed in kilograms per hour.
shall be determined Cor each test run as
Collows:
(1) Calculate the total amount oC lead
charged to the Cacility during the run by
multiplying the number oC lead pigs
(ingots) charged during the run by the
average mass of a pig in kilograms or by
another suitable method.
(2) Divide the total amount of lead
charged to the facility during the run by
the duration of the run in hours.
(e) Lead emissions from lead oxide
manufacturing facilities, expressed in
milligrams per kilogram of lead charged.
shall be determined usins the following
equation:

E"" = C""Q./F
Where:
E",,=is the lead emission fate from the
facility In milligrams per kilosram of lead
charsed.

C,." = is the concentration of lead in the
exhaust stream in milligrams per dry
standard cubic meter a8 detennined
according to paragraph (a)(1) of this
section.
Q... = is the dry standard volumetric flow rale
in dry standard cubic meters per hour as
detennined according to paragraph (a}(3)
of this section.
F = is the lead feed rate to the facility in
kilograms per hour as determined
according to paragraph (d) of this
section.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act a8 amended 142
U.S.C. 7414))
~
45 FR 2790. 1114jJfO
:~m~a~~~
FR 6 . 4/16/82 (145)
111-100
-------
Subpart LL-Stanclard8 of
hrformance for lIetallic IIlnerat
Proce88lng planta 219
~ 60.380 AppIIc:8b1Dty and d881gn811on 0'
affected ,acuity.

(a) The provisions of this subpart are
applicable to the following affected
facilities in metallic mineral processing
plants: Each crusher and screen in open-
pit mines; each crusher. screen. bucket
elevator. conveyor belt transfer point.
thermal dryer. product packaging
station. storage bin. enclosed storage
area. truck loading station. truck
unloading station. railcar loading
station. and railcar unloading station at
the mill or concentrator with the
following exceptions. All facilities
located in underground mines are
exempted from the provisions of this
subpart. At uranium ore processing
plants. all facilities subsequent to and
including the beneficiation of uranium
ore are exempted from the provisions of
this subpart.
(b) An affected facility under
paragraph (a) of this section that
commences construction or modification
after August 24. 1982. is subject to the
requirements of this part.
o 80.381 Definitions.
All terms used in this subpart. but not
specifically defined in this section. shall
have the meaning given them in the Act
and in Subpart A of this part.
"Oucket elevator" means a conveying
device for metallic minerals consisting
of a head and foot assembly that
supports and drives an endless single or
double strand chain or belt to which
buckets are attached.
"Capture system" means the
equipment used to capture and transport
particulate matter generated by one or
more affected facilities to a control
device.
"Control device" means the air
pollution control equipment used to
reduce particulate matter emissions
released to the atmosphere from one or
more affected facilities at a metallic
mineral processing plant.
"Conveyor belt transfer point" means
a point in the conveying operation
where the metallic mineral or metallic
mineral concentrate is transferred to or
from a conveyor belt except where the
mQtQII~ mineral is being transferred 10 a
stockpile.
"Crueher" means a machine used! to
crush any metallic mineral and includes
feeders or conveyors located
immediately below the crushing
lurfaces. erulhers include. but are not
limited to, the following typel: jaw.
gyratory. cone, and hammermlll.
"Enclosed Itol'88e &rea" means any
area covered by a roof under which
metallic minera" are Itored prior to
further procelling or loading.
"Metallic mineral concentrate" means
a material containing metallic
compounds in concentrations higher
than naturally occurring in ore but
requiring additional processing if pure
metal is to be isolated. A metallic
mineral concentrate contains at least
one of the following metals In any of its
oxidation states and at a concentration
that contributes to the concentrate's
commercial value: Aluminum. copper.
gold. iron. lead. molybdenum. silver.
titanium. tungsten. uranium. zinc. and
zirconium. This definition shall not be
construed as requiring that material
containing metallic compounds be
refined to a pure metal in order for the
material to be considered a metallic
mineral concentrate to be covered by
the standards.
"Metallic mineral processing plant"
means any combination of equipment
that produces metallic mineral
concentrates from ore. Metallic mineral
processing commences with the mining
of ore and includes all operations either
up to and including the loading of wet or
dry concentrates or solutions of metallic
minerals for transfer to facilities at non.
adjacent locations that will
subsequently process metallic
concentrates into purified metals (or
other products). or up to and including
all material transfer and storage
operations that precede the operations
that produce refined metals (or other
products) from metallic mineral
concentrates at facilities adjacent to the
metallic mineral processing plant. This
definition shall not be construed as
requiring that mining of ore be
conducted in order for the combination
of equipment to be considered a metallic
mineral processing plant. (See also the
definition of "metallic mineral
concentrate:')
"Process fugitive emissions" means
particulate matter emissions from an
affected facility that are not collected by
iI capture system.
"Product packaging station" means
the equipment used to fill cqntainera
with metallic compounds or metallic
mineral concentrates.
"Railcar loading station" means that
portion of a metallic mineral processing
plant where metallic minerals or
metallic mineral concentratel are
noaded by a cOnveying .ystem into
I!'ailcars.
1.11-101
"Railcar unloading .tation" means
that portion of a metallic mineral
processil18 plant where metallic ore i.
unloaded from a railcar into a hopper.
ecreen. or c:n1sher.
"Screen" means a device for
aeparating material according to size by
palsing undersize material through one
or more mesh lurfaces (screens) in
.eries and retaining oversize material on
the mesh lurfaces (screens).
"Stack emissions" means the
particulate matter captured and released
to the atmosphere through a stack.
chimney. or flue.
"Storage bin" means a facility for
storage (including surge bins Bnd
hoppers) or metallic minerals prior to
further processing or loading.
"Surface moisture" m98ns water thllt
is not chemically bound to a metallic
mineral or metallic mineral concentrate.
''Thermal dryer" means Sl unit in
which the surface moisture content of a
metallic mineral or a metBUic mineral
concentrate is reduced by direct or
indirect contact with a heated gas
stream.
''Truck loading station" lIIleaDS that
portion of a metallic mineral processing
plant where metallic minerals or
metallic mineral concentrates are
loaded by a conveying system into
trucks. '
''Truck unloading station" means that
portion of a metallic mineral processing
plant wliere metallic ore i8 unloaded
from a truck into a hopper. screen. or
crusher.
. 80.382 St8ndard for particulate 1118tt8r.

(a) On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by I 60.8 is completed. no
owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall cause to
be discha'1led into the atmosphere from
an affected facility any stat:k emissions
that:
(1) Contain particulate matter in
excess of 0.05 grams per dry standard
cubic meter.
(2) Exhibit greater than" percent
opacity. Unless the stack emissions are
discha'1led from an affected facility
using a wet scrubbing emiosion control
device.
(h) On and after the sixtieth day after
achieving the maximum production rate
at which the affected facilftiy will be
operated. but not later than 160 days
after initial startup. no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of !biG
subpart shall cause to be discba'1led
into the atmosphere from en affected
facility any process fugitive emissions
-------
iliat exhibit 8J'8aifi ~a1i110 percent
opacity. -

110.363 ~~

(8) The cost of replacemeili of ore~
conilact surfaces on proce!lSRIiiIJ
equ!jplment 3h811 not be considered in
calculating either the "fixed capital coot
of the new componeniB" or Ute "fiXed
capital cost that would be required to
construct 8 comparable new facility"
\!Ander ~ 60.115. Ore-coKltGlct surfaces are:
Clmahing surface!): screen meshes. bars.
Bnd !>lmt~B: conveyor belts: I!levator
buckets: snd pan feedere.
{b) IUnder 5 00.11), ilil!l "fiJt0cl capital
coet of the Klew componento" includes
Rbi! fixed capital COllt of all depreciable
iComponento (except components
c}?ecified in pmragraph (a) of this
oection) that are or will be replaced
l!'W'Buent to all continuous programs of
component replacement commenced
within any 2-year period following
August 24, 1982.

f 10.384 MonItoring of operatIona.

(a) The owner or operator aubject to
Qhe provisions of this subpart shall
mstall, calibrate. maintain. and operate
8 monitoring device for the continuous
measurement of the change in pressure
of the 8as stream through the scrubber
for any affected facility using a wet
scrubbing emission control device. The
monitoring device must be certified by
the manufacturer to be accurate within
:t25O pascals (:t1 inch water) gauge
pressure and must be calibrated on an
annual basis in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
(b) The owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
install, calibrate, maintain, and operate
8 monitoring device for the continuous
measurement of the scrubbing liquid
flow rate to a wet scrubber for any
affected facility using any type of wet
scrubbing emission contrQl device. The
monitoring device must be certified by
the manufacturer to be accurate within
:t5 percent of design scrubbing liquid
Dow rate and must be calibrated on at
least an annual basis in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
i 10.385 1i18COt'dkeeping and reporting
r8quir8menta.

(a) The owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
conduct m performance test and submit
to the Administrator a written report of
the result9 of the test as specified in
I 80.3(111).
(b) During the initial performlilnce test
of s wet ocrubber, and at least weekly
theroafteli'. the oWlflar or operator shall
!J'ec~ij'(jj thQ wnessW'emeliits of both the
change in pre8i!W'e of the 8BS stream
across the scrubber Bnd the scrubbmg
liquid flow rate.
(c) After the initisl performance test of
a wet IJcfilbber. the OWlllIi!i' or op<1rstor
shall 9ubmit aemil\\lU1usl reporta to the
AdminiBtntor of occurrences when the
measurements of the B::rubber pressure
los9 (or gam) and liquid flow Ii'sQe differ
by more than :t:30 percent from those
measurements recorded during the most
recent performance test.
(d) The reports required under
paragraph (c) shall be postmarked
within 30 days following the end of the
second and fourth calendar quartel'S.
(e) The requirements of this
subsection remain in force until and
unless the Agency. in delegating
enforcement authority to a State under
section l11(c) of the Act. approves
reporting requirements or an alternative
means of compliance surveillance
adopted by such States. In that event.
affected sources within the State will be
relieved of the obligation to comply with
this subsection. provided that they
comply with requirements established
by the State.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act 88 amended (42
U.S.C.7414})
(Approved b, the Office of Management and
Budget under the contra! number 20l1O-OO1&.)

f 6G.388 'irellt methods Imd procedures.
(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
01 this part. except as provided under
180.8(b), shall be used to determine
compliance with the standards
prescribed under I 80.382 8S fonows:
(1) Method 5 or Method 11 for
concentration of particulate matter and
associated moisture content
III-I02
(2) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses:
(3) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric Dow rate:
(4) Method 3 for gas analysis;
(5) Method 9 for measurin8 opacity
from stack emissions and process
fugitive emissions.
(b) For method 5. the following
stipulations shall apply:
(1) The sampling probe and filter
holder may be operated without beaters
if the gal stream being samplea is at
ambient temperature:
(2) 1F0r gss streams above ambient
teu.tperature. the, sampling train shall be
operated with a probe and nIter
temperature slightly sbove the effluent
temperature (up to a maximum filter
temperature of 121"C (250°F)) in order to
prevent water condensation on the filter:
(3) The minimum sample volume shall
be 1.7 dscm (00 dscO.
(c) For method 9, the following
stipulation shall apply: the observer
shall read opacity only when emissions
are clearly identified as emanating
solely from the affected facility being
observed.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act. a8 amended (42
U.S.c. 7414))
Proposed/effective
47 FR 36859, 8/24/82
Promulgated
49 FR 6458, 2/21/84 (219)
-------
Subpart MM-Standards of
Performance for Automobile and Ught
Duty Truck SUrface Coating
Operations 124

f 80.390 Applicability and designation 0'
8flected 'acility.

(a) The provisions of this subparl
apply to the following affected facilities
in an automobile or light-duty truck
assembly plant: each prime coat
operation. each guide coat operation.
and each topcoat operation.
(b) Exempted from the p'rovisions of
this subpart are operations used to coat
plastic body components or all-plastic
automobile or light-duty truck bodies on
separate coating lines. The attachment
of plastic body parts to a metal body
before the body is coated does not cause
the metal body coating operation to be
exempted.
(c) The provisions of this subpart
apply to any affected facility identified
in paragraph (a) of this section that
begins construction. reconstruction. or
modification af~er October 5. 1979.
f 80.391 DeflnItlon8.

(a) All terms used in this subpart that
are not defined below have the meaning
given to them in the Act and in Subpart
A of this part.
"Applied coating solids" means the
volume of dried or cured coating solids
which is deposited and remains on the
surface of the automobile or light-duty
truck body.
"Automobile" means a motor vehicle
capable of carrying no more than 12
passengers.
"Automobile and light-duty truck
body" means the exterior surface of an
automobile or light-duty truck including
hoods. fenders. cargo boxes. doors. and
grill opening panels.
"Bake oven" means a device that uses
heat to dry or cure coatings.
"Electrodeposition (EDP)" means a
method of applying a prime coat by
which the automobile or light-duty truck
body is submerged in a tank filled with
coating material and an electrical field
is used to effect the deposition of the
costing material on the body.
"Electrostatic spray application"
means a spray application method that
uses an electrical potential to increase
the tranafer efficiency of the coating
solids. Electrostatic spray application
can be used for prime coat. guide coat.
or topcoat operations.
"Flash-off ares" means the structure
on automobile and light-duty truck
assembly lines between the coating
application system (dip tank or spray
booth) and the bake oven.
"Guide coat operation" means the
guide coat spray booth. flash-off area
and bake oven(s) which are used to
apply and dry or cure a surface coating
between the prime coat and topcoat
operation on the components of
automobile and light-duty truck bodies.
"Light-duty truck" means any motor
vehicle rated at 3.850 kilograms gross
vehicle weight or less. designed mainly
to transport property.
"Plastic body" means an automobile
or light-duty truck body constructed of
synthetic organic material.
"Plastic body component" means any
component of an automobile or light-
duty truck exterior surface constructed
of synthetic organic material.
"Prime coat operation" means the
prime coat spray booth or dip tank.
flash-off area. and bake oven(s) which
are used to apply and dry or cure the
initial coating on components of
automobile or light-duty truck bodies.
"Purge" or "line purge" means the
coating material expelled from the spray
system when clearing it
"Solvent-borne" means a coating
which contains five percent or less
water by weight in its volatile fraction.
"Spray application" means a method
of applying coatings by atomizing the
coating material and directing the
atomized material toward the part to be
coated. Spray applications can be used
for prime coat. guide coat. and topcoat
operations.
"Spray booth" means a structure
housing automatic or manual spray
application equipment where prime
coat. guide coat. or topcoat is applied to
components of automobile or light-duty
truck bodies.
"Surface coating operation" means
any prime coat. guide coat. or topcoat
operation on an automobile or light-duty
truck surface coating line.
"Top.coat operation" means the
topcoat spray booth. flash-off area. and
bake oven(s) which are used to apply
and dry or cure the final coating(s) on
components of automobile and light-
duty truck bodies.
"Transfer efficiency" means the ratio
of the amount of coating solids
transferred onto the surface of a part or
product to the total amount of coating
solids used.
"VOC content" means all volatile
organic compounds that are in a coating
expressed as kilograms of VOC per liter
of coating solids.'
"Waterborne" or "water reducible"
means a coating which contains more
than five weight percent water in its
volatile fraction.
(b) The nomenclature used in this
subpart has the following meanings:
111-103
Caj = concentration of vac (as carbon) in the
effluent gas flowing through stack (j)
leaving the control device (parts per million
by volume).
Cbi=concentration of vac (as carbon) in the
effluent gas flowing through stack (i)
entering the control device (parts per
million by volume).
Cn. = concentration of vac (as carbon) in the
effluent gas flowing through exhaust stack
(k) not entering the control device (parts
per million by volume).
Dc. = density of each coating (i) as received
[kilograms per liter).
Do; = density of each type vac dilution
solvent (j) added to the coatings. as
received (kilograms per liter).
Dr=density of vac recovered from an
affected facility (kilograms per liter).
E = vac destruction efficiency of the control
device.
F = fraction of total vac whi~h is emitted by
an affected facility that enters the control
device.
G = volume weighted average mass of vac
per volume of applied solids (kilograms per
liter).
Le. = volume of each coating (i) consumed. as
received (liters).
Le;'1 = volume of each coating (i) consumed by
each application method (I). as received
liters).
L." = volume of each type vac dilution
solvent Ij) added to the coatings. as
received (liters).
[.. = volume of vac recovered from an
affected facility (liters).
L, = volume of solids in coa tings consumed
(liters).
M. = total mass of vac in dilution solvent
Ikilograms}.
M. = total mass of vac in coatings as
received (kilograms).
Mr = total mass of vac recovered from an
affected facility (kilograms).
N = volume weighted average mass of vac
per volume of appl!l!d coating solids after
the control device
r. k i lograms of VOC "\
\:iter of applied solid~
Q., = volumetric flow rate of the effluent gas
flowing through stack (j) leaving the control
device (dry standard cubic meters per
hour).
Qbl = volumetric flow rate of the effluent gas
flowing through stack (i) entering the
control device (dry standard cubic meters
per huur).
Qn. = volumetric flow rate of the effluent gas
flowing through exhaust stack (k) not
entering the control device (dry standard
cubic meters per hour).
T = overall transfer efficiency.
T, = transfer efficiency for application method
II). .
-------
Vol = proportion of solids by volume in each
coating IiI as received
(liter solids\
\.1 iter coating")
and
W01 = proportion of vac by weight in each
coating (il. as received
r: k 11 ograms VOC "
\!ilograms coating)
g 60.392 Standards for volatile organic
compounds
an and after the date on which the
initial performance test required by
fi 60.8 is completed. no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall discharge or cause the
discharge into the atmosphere from any
affected facility vac emissions in
excess of:
(a) 0.16 kilograms of vac per liter of
applied coating solids from each prime
coat operation.
(b) 1.40 kilograms of vac per liter of
applied coating solids from each guide
coat operation.
(c) 1.47 kilograms ofVaC per liter of
applied coating solids from each topcoat
operation.
~ 60.393 Performance test and compliance
provl8lon8.
(a) Sections 60.8 (d) and (f) do not
apply to the performance test
procedures required by this section.
(b) The owner or operator of an
affected facility shall conduct an initial
performance test in accordance with
~ 6O.8(a) and thereafter for each
calendar month for each affected facility
according to the procedures in this
section.
(c) The owner or operator shall use
the following procedures for determining
the monthly volume weighted average
mass of vac emitted per volume of
applied coating solids.
(1) The owner or operator shall use
the following procedures for each
affected facility which does not use a
capture system and a control device to
comply with the applicable emission
limit specified under t 60.392.
(i) Calculate the volume weighted
average mass of vac per volume of
applied coating solids for each calen~ar
month for each affected facility. The
owner or operator shall determine the
composition of the coatings by
formulation data supplied by the
manufacturer of the coating or from data
determined by an analysis of each
coating, as received. by Reference
Method 24. The Administrator may
require the owner or operator who uses
formulation data supplied by the
manufacturer of the coating to
determine data used in the calcu1ation
of the vac content of coatings by
Reference Method 24 or an equivalent or
alternative method. The owner or
operator shall determine from company
records on a monthly basis the volume
of coating consumed, as received. and
the mass of solvent used for thinning
purposes. The volume weighted average
of the total mass of vac per volume of
coating solids used each calendar month
will be determined by the following
procedures.
(A) Calculate the mass of vac used
in each calendar month for each
affected facility by the following
equation where "n" is the total number
of coatings used and "m" is the total
number of vac solvents used:
n
Mo + Md =.Z Lei
1=1
Dei Woi
m
+ 1: Ld' Dd'
j=1 J J
[1: L.u OcIJ will be zero if no vac solvent
is added to the coatings. as received].
(b) Calculate the total volume of
coating solids used in each calendar
month for each affected facility by the
following equation where "n" is the total
number of coatings used:
n
LS =. E lei
1=1
Vsi
III-IG4
(c) Select the appropriate transfer
efficiency (T) from the following tables
for each surface coating operation:
ApphcB/Ion Method
Trsnsler
effiCIency

0.39
0.50
0.75
0.95
1.00
AIr Ato'ntzed Spray (waterbor"lZed 5p
-------
(2) The owner or operator shall use
the following procedures for each
affected facility which uses a capture
system and a control device that
destroys VOC (e.g., incinerator) to
comply with the applicable emission
limit specified under A 60.392.
(i) Calculate the volume weighted
average mass of VOC per volume of
applied coating solids (G) during each
calendar month for each affected facility
as described under A 6O.393(c)(1)(i).
(ii) Calculate the volume weighted
average mass of VOC per volume of
applied solids emitted after the control
device, by the following equation:
N=G(l-FE]
(A) Determine the fraction of total
VOC which is emitted by an affected
facility that enters the control device by
using the following equation where "n"
is the total number of stacks entering the
control device and "p" is the total
number of stacks not connected to the
control device:
F =
n
E Qb'
. 1 1
1=
Cb;
n p
E Qb' Cb' + E Qfk Cfk
1 =1 1 1 k=l
If the owner can justify to the
Administrator's satisfaction that another
method will give comparable results, the
Administrator will approve its use on a
case.by.case basis.
(1) In subsequent months, the owner
or operator shall use the most recently
determined capture fraction for the
performance test.
(8) Determines the destruction
efficiency of the control device using
values of the volumetric flow rate of the
gas streams and the VOC content (as
carbon) of each of the gas streams in
and out of the device by the following
equation where "n" is the total number
of stacks entering the control device and
"m" is the total number of stacks lE'aving
the control device:
E=
n
E
;=1
m
Qb1' Cb' - E Q . C .
1 j=l aJ aJ
n
r Qb' Cb'
;=1 1 1
(1) In subsequent months, the owner
or operator shall use the most recently
determined VOC destruction efficiency
for the performance test.
(C) If an emission control device
controls the emissions from more than
one affected facility, the owner or
operator shall measure the VOC
concentration (Cbl) in the efnuent gas
entering the control device (in parts per
million by volume) and the volumetric
flow rate (Qbt) of the efnuent gas (in dry
standard cubic meters per hour) entering
the device through each stack. The
destruction or removal efficiency
determined using these data shall be
applied to each affected facility served
by the control device.
(iii) If the volume weighted average
mass of VOC per volume of applied
solids emitted after the control device
(N) calculated on a calendar month
basis is less than or equal to the
applicable emission limit specified in
I 60.392, the affected facility is in
compliance. Each monthly calculation is
a performance test for the purposes of
this subpart.
(3) The owner or operator shall use
the following procedures for each
affected facility which uses a capture
system and a control device that
recovers the VOC (e.g., carbon
ad sorber) to comply with the applicable
emission limit specified under I 60.392.
(i) Calculate the mass of VOC
(Mo + Md) used during each calendar
month for each affected facility as
described under I 6O.393(c)(1)(i).

(ii) Calculate the total volume of
coating solids (1..) used in each calendar
month for each affected facility as
described under 160.393(c)(1)(i).
(iii) Calculate the mass of VOC
recovered (M.) each calendar month for
each affected facility by the following
equation: M.=L.D.
(iv) Calculate the volume weighted
average mass of VOC per volume of
applied coating solids emitted after the
control device during a calendar month
by the following equation:
MO + Md - Mr
N =
Ls T
(v] If the volume weighted average
mass of VOC per volume of applied
solids emitted after the control device
(N) calculated on a calendar month
III-IDS
basis is less than or equal to the
applicable emission limit specified in
I 60.392. the affected facility is in
compliance. Each monthly calculation is
a performance test for the purposes of
this subpart.

~ 60.394 Monltortng of eml88l0ns and
operations.

The owner or operator of an affected
facility which uses an incinerator to
comply with the emission limits
specified under I 60.392 shall install,
calibrate, maintain, and operate
temperature measurement devices as
prescribed below:
(a) Where thermal incineration is
used. a temperature measurement
device shall be installed in the firebox.
Where catalytic incineration is used, a
temperature measurement device shall
be installed in the gas stream
immediately before and after the
catalyst bed.
(b) Each temperature measurement
device shall be installed, calibrated, and
maintained according to accepted
practice and the manufacturer's
specifications. The device shall have an
accuracy of the greater of :to.7S percent
of the temperature being measured
expressed in degrees Celsius or :t2.S0 C.
(c) Each temperature measurement
device shall be equipped with a
recording device so that a permanent
record is produced.

(Section 114 or the Clean Air Act as amended
(42 V.S.C. 7414011
~ 60.395 Reporting and recordkeeplng
requlrementa.

(a) Each owner or operator of an
affected facility shall include the data
outlined in subparagraphs (1) and (2) in
the initial compliance report required by
A 60.8.
(1) The owner or operator shall report
the volume weighted average mass of
VOC per volume of applied coating
solids for each affected facility.
(2) Where compliance is achieved
through the use of incineration, the
owner or operator shall include the
following additional data in the control
device initial perfcrmance test requried
by 160.8(a) or subsequent performance
tests at which destruction efficiency is
determined: the combustion temperature
(or the gas temperature upstream and
downstream of the catalyst bed), the
total mass of VOC per volume of
applied coating solids before a:1d after
the incinerator, capture efficiency. the
destruction efficiency of the incinerator
used to attain compliance with the
applicable emission limit specified in
1 60.392 and a description of the method
used 10 establish the fraction of VOC
captured and sent to the control device.
-------
(b) Following the initial report, each
owner or operator shall report the
"olume weighted average mass of vac
per volume of applied coating solids for
each affected facility during each
calendar month in which the affected
facility is not in compliance with the
applicable emission limit specified in
~ 60.392. This report shall be
postmarked not later than ten days after
the end of the calendar month that the
affected facility is not in compliance.
Where compliance is achieved through
the use of a capture system and control
device. the volume weighted average
after the control device should be
reported.
(c) Where compliance with ~ 60.392 is
achieved through the use of incineration.
the owner or operator shall continuously
record the incinerator combustion
temperature during coating operations
for thermal incineration or the gas
temperature upstream and downstream
of the incinerator catalyst bed during
coating operations for catalytic
incineration. The owner or operator
shall report quarterly as defined below.
(1) For thermal incinerators, every
three-hour period shall be reported
during which the average temperature
measured is more than 28°C less than
the average temperature during the most
recent control device performance test
at which the destruction efficiency was
determined as specified under ~ 60.393.
(2) For catalytic incinerators. every
three-hour period shall be reported
during which the average temperature

immediately before the catalyst bed.
when the coating system is operational.
is more than 28° C less than the average
temperature immediately before the
catalyst bed during the most recent
control device performance test at
which destruction efficiency was
determined as specified under ~ 60.393.
In addition, every three-hour period
shall be reported each quarter during
which the average temperature
difference across the catalyst bed when
the coating system is operational is less
than 80 percent of the average
temperature difference of the device
during the most recent control device
performance test at which destruction
efficiency was determined as specified
under ~ 60.393.
(3) For thermal and catalytic
incinerators. if no such periods occur.
the owner or operator shall submit a
negative report.
(d) The owner or operator shall notify
the Administrator 30 days in advance of
any test by Reference Method 25.

(Section 114 of the Clean Air Act a8 amended
(42 U.S.C. 7414))
~ 60.396 Reference methods and
procedures.
(a) The reference methods in
Appendix A to this part, except as
provided in ~ 60.8 shall be used to
conduct performance tests.
(1) Reference Method 24 or an
equivalent or alternative method
approved by the Administrator shall be
used for the determination of the data
used in lhe calculation of the vac
content of the coatings used for each
affected facility. Manufacturers'
formulation data is approved by the
Administrator as an alternative method
to Method 24. In the event of dispute.
Reference Method 24 shall be the referee
method.
(2) Reference Method 25 or an
equivalent or alternative method
approved by the Administrator shall be
used for the determination of the vac
concentration in the effluent gas
entering and leaving the emission
control device for each stack equipped
with an emission control device and in
the effluent gas leaving each stack not
equipped with a control device.
(3) The following methods shall be
used to determine the volumetric flow
rate in the effluent gas in a stack:
(i) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses.
(ii) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric flow rate.
(iii) Method 3 for gas analysis, and
(iv) Method 4 for stack gas moisture.
(b) For Reference Method 24. the
coating sample must be a 1-liter sample
taken in a 1-liter container.
(c) For Reference Method 25. the
sampling time for each of three runs
must be at least one hour. The minimum
sample volume must be 0.003 dscm
except that shorter sampling times or
smaller volumes. when necessitated by
process variables or other factors. may
be approved by the Administrator. The
Administrator will approve the sampling
of representative stacks on a case-by-
case basis if the owner or operator (;an
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Administrator that the testing of
representative stacks would yield
results comparable to those that would
be obtained by testing all stacks.

{Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))
ti 60.397 Modifications.
The following physical or operational
changes are not, by themselves.
considered modifications of existing
facilities:
111-106
(1) Changes as a result of model year
changeovers or switches to larger cars.
(2) Changes in the application of the
coatings to increase coating film
thickness.
17S
I 60.- InoIOV8tM tec:h.1OIogy W8IMr8

(a) General Motors Corporation.
Wentzville. Missouri. automobile
assembly plant. (1) Pursuant to Section
111(j) of the Clean Air Act. 42 V.S.C.
7411U). each topcoat operation at
General Motors Corporation automobile
assembly plant located in Wentzville.
Missouri. shall comply with the
following condJtions:
(i) The General Motors Corporation
shall obtain the necessary permits as
required by Section 173 of the Clean Air
Act. as amended August 1971. to operate
the Wentzville assembly plant.
(ii) Commencin8 on February 4. 1983.
and continuing to December 31. 1986. or
until the base coat/clear coat topcoat
system that can achieve the standard
specified in 40 CPR 6O.392(c) (December
24. 1980) is demonstrated to the
Administrator's satisfaction the General
Motors Corporation shall limit the
discharge of VOC emissions to the
atmosphere from each topcoat operation
at the Wentzville. Missouri. usembly
plant. to either:
(A) 1.9 kilogra.ms of vac per liter of
applied coating solids from bue coat/
clear coat topcoats. and 1.47 kilograms
of VOC per liter of applied coating
solids from all other topcoat coatings; or
(B) 1.4r kilograms of VOC per liter of
applied coating solids from all topcoat
coatings.
(ill) CommenciDs on the day after the
expiration of the period deacribed in

paragraph (8)(I)(U) ofthia section. and
continuing thereafter. emiaaions of VOC
from each topcoat operations shall Dot
exceed 1.47 kilograms of VOC per liter
of applied coating solids as specified in
40 CFR 6O.392(c) (December 24. 1980).
(iv) Each topcoat operation shall
comply with the provisions of 160.393.
1 60.394. 1 60.395. 1 60.396, and 1 60.397.
Separate calculations shall be made for
base coat/clear coat coatings and all
other topcoat coatings when necessary
to demonstrate compliance with the
emission limits in 160.398(a)(I) (ii)(A).
(v) A technology development report
shall be sent to EPA Region vn. 324 East
11th Street. Kansas City. Mlssourl84108.
postmarked before 60 days after the
promulgation of this waiver and
annually thereafter while this waiver Is
in effect. The technology development
report shall s1DDD1arize the base coat/
-------
clear coat development work includin8 emi88ion limita in 18O.398(b)(I)(U)[A).
the resulta of exposure and endurance [v) A technology development report
tests of the various coatinp bein8 ' Ihall be Mnt to EPA Region V, Z30 South
evaluated. The report ,hal1 include an Dearborn Street, Chic:qO, Dlinois 808M.
. updated achedule of attainment of 40 postmarked before 80 da)'l after the
CPR 8O.39Z(c) (December 2t, 1980)'bued promulgation of this waiver and
on the most current information. annuaDy thereafter whlle this waiver is
(2) This waiver ,haD be a Federally , in effect The technology development
promulgated standard of performance. report shalllUDDD8r1ze the baBe coat/
As IUch. it shaD be unlawful for General clear coat development work includfna
Motors Corporation to operate a topcoat the I'88Ulta of exposure and endurance
operation in violation of the testa of the various coatinp being
requirements established in this waiver. evaluated. Tbe report shaD Include an
Violation of the terms and conditioDl of updated schedule of attainment of 40
this waiver shaD lubject the General CPR 8O.S92(c) (December Z4. 1980) baled
Motors Corporation to enforcement on the moat cunent information. .
Wider Section 113 (b) ood (c). 4Z U.S.C. (2) This waiver shaD be a Fedarally
7412 (b) and (c). and Section 120. 42 promulgated ltandard of performance.
V.S.C. 7420. of the Act as well as A8 lOch, It 8ball be unlawful for General
possible citizen enforcement under Motors Corporation to operate a topcoat
Section 304 of the Act. 42 U.S.C: 1804. operation in violation of the
(b) General Motors CorporatJon. requirements established in this waiver.
Detroit, Michigan. Automobile Violation of the terms and conditions 01
Assembly plant (1) Pursuant to Section this waiver shaD subject the General
111UJ of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. Motors Corporation to enforcement
7411(j). each topcoat operation at under Section 113 (b) and (c), 4Z U.S.c.
General Motors Corporation's 704112(b) and (c), and Section 120, 4Z
8utomobUe assembly plant located in U.S.c. 7420, of the Act as well 88
Detroit, Michigan, shall comply with the possible citizen enforcement under
following conditions: Section 304 of the Act, 4Z U.S.c. 1804.
(I) The General Motors Corporation {c) General Motors Corporation.
shall obtain the necessary permits as Orion Township. Michisan. automobile
required by Section 173 of the Clean Air assembly plant (1) Pursuant to Section
Act, 8S amended August 1977. to operate t1l1(j) of the Clean Air Act, 4Z U.S.C.
the Detroit assembly plant. 74110). each topcoat operation at
(Ii) Commencing on February 4, 1983, General Motors Corporation automobUe
and continuing to December 31. 1986, or assembly plant located in Orion
until the base coat/clear coat topcoat Township Michigan. 8hall comply with
sY8tem that can achieve the 8tandard the fOllowing conditions:
epecified in 40 CPR 8O.392(c) [December (i) The General Motors Corporation
14. 1980). is demonstrated to the shaD obtain the nece88ary permita a8
Administrator's satisfaction. the General required by Section 179 of the Clean Air
Motors Corporation 8haD limit the Act. a8 amended August 1977, to operate
discharse of VOC emissions to the tbe Orion Township a888mbly plant
atmosphere from each topcoaloperatioo (U) Commencing on February 4. 19&1,
at the Detroit, Michisan. 8888mbly plant, and COl1tinuing to .December 31,t98&, or
- ~ elllW': - - - - - - -uDffi the 6888 coat/clear coad topcoa~
(A) t.81d10Bf81D1 of VOC pc liter of I)'stem that caD achieve the ltandarc!!
8pplied coatIDs IOlidI from bue coati apecIfIed in 40 CPR 8O.392{c) (December
dear coat topcoata. and lA7' Jdj08!'~ 2t, 1810) Ia demonstrated to the
of Vex: per liter 01 applied coat!q AdmIDiatrator's sati8faction, the GeneraD
eoUda &om aU other topcoat coatinp; o:i' Moton Corporation ehalllimft the
(B) 1.47 kUogr8JD8 of VOC per liter aJf discharse of VOC emU8ions to the
app~ coating IOli~ &omau topcoot atm08phere from each topcoat operatioo

[ill» ~ on the dBy aftc:r t!!le at the Orton Township. Mic:b!gcm,
ffiWH~:!)D of the period desaibed in ~ilD 888embly plant, ic either:
tl~o, - contiDums therenftar, (A) t.lkUograme of VOC ~ Mter off
cmismmw @fVOC h:m eacl1 topcoaa app:!led eoeting solids from bS8fJ eoe.ftl
operatl1taD aWill not exc:oed 1,,47 c1eBJ!' ooat topcoottJ. !me! tA7 kilograme
Jd)jG~ ~f VOC per lite;? I!lapplid of VOC per liter of applied coatin:J
wa~ ~~. 6AJ 3pecilied 11m 40 em solids from all other topc;oeU ooatim.g£: Of
oo.u2(c) (D;Jt:cmber Z4. 1980). (8) U7ldJograms ofVOr: per liter oN
[fi",) Each topcoot operatio:!! sMIl applied coating solids from all topooeft
oom!,)ly with the proviaiODB of G 60.393, . coatinp.
100.394.180.395,180.396. and Q 60.397. (111) Commencing on the day after the
Sapara~9 calculations shaD be made fM expiration of the period described m
bB80 ooat/clear coat coatinp and aU paragraph (c)(l)(U) of this section uen
@@ler topcoat coatinp when neces88.l')' continuing thereafter. emissions of VOC
~o demonstrate compli~ with the &om each topcoat operation shall not
lII-107
exceed U11d1ograma of VOC per Uter
of applied coatlns IOlida as specfffed in
40 CPR 6O.39Z(c) (December 24, 1980).
(Iv) Bach topcoat operation shaD
comply with the provisions of 160.393,
. 8O.3IM. 1 80.395. I 80.398. and 1 80.397.
Separate calculations thall be made for
bale coat/clear coat coatlnp and aD
other topcoat coatinp when necessary
to demoDltrate compliance with the
emi88ion limita in 180.398(c)(l) (U)(A).
(v) A technolosY development report
shall be I8Dt to BPA Resion V, Z30 South
Dearbom Street, Chicaao' Winola 806(N,
postmarked before 80 daYI after the
pl"OJDulsation of thI8 waiver and ,.
annually thereafter whUe this waiver Ia
in effect. 'I11e technology development
report shaD summarize the base coatI
ciear ooat development work including
the results of exposure and endurance
tests of the various coatings being
evaluated. The report shaD include an
updated ecbedule of attaimnent of 40
CPR 8O.392(c) (December 14, 1980) based
on the most cunent information.
(2) This waiver shaD be a FederaDy
promulgated standard of penformance.
As such, it shall be unlawful for GeneraR
Motors Corporation to operate a topcoat
operation in violation of the
requirements established in this waiver.
Violation of the terms and conditions of .
this waiver shall subject the GeneraD
Motors Corporation to enfo:rcement
under Section 113 (b) and! (c). 42 U.S.C.
7412 (b) and (c). and Section 120, 42
U.S.c. 7420. of the Act as well 8S
possible Gltizen enforcement under
Section 304 of the Act, 4Z U.S.C. '7U04.
(d) Honda 01 Americo Manufacturing,
Incorporated (Honda), Maryaville. Ohio,
automobile 088embly plant (1) Pursuant
to Section 111(j) of the aean AIr Act, 42
UAC. 74110), each topcoat operation at -

Honda's automobile assembly plot
located in Marysville, Ohio, shall
comply with the following conditfoD8:
(I) Honda shall obtain tho necessary
permits as required by Sectio!J 173 of the
iClean Air Act, 8S amended August 1911,
to operate the Marysville assembly
plant.
(Ii) Commencing on Wabruary 4, 19&1,
and continuing for .;\ Y\9&r8 or to
December 3t. 1986, whichever ie OOOIU)1I',
(Dr until the bass coai/clsSl coat topcoeft
aysiem thai can achieve ftho standard!
specified in 40 CPR 6O.392(c) (Decembs1i'
24, 19S0)' ie dI!1MonstI'etedl.to the
Administrator's eatisfaction, Honde
shall limit the discharge of VOC
emioslono to the atmosphere from oacli1
topcoat operation at Muysville, Ohio,
assembly plant, to either:
(A) :U kilogralD8 of VOC per liter of
applied coating solids from base coatI
clear coat topcoats, and 1.47 kilograms
of VOC per liter of appliod coating
-------
. Bolide from all. other topcoat ooatinp; m
(B) 1.41 kilograms of VOC per liter of
6Ipplied coating solids from all topcoat
coatings.
(i1!) Commencins on the day after the
expiration of the period deecribed in
!)I$.ragraph (d)(l)(ii) of thi. llection and
oontinuin8 thereafter. emissions of VOC
flrom each to]?coat operation shall not
Gmceed ~.«,. Iillcgreme 01 VOC per liter
j1Jff applied coating 80l!d8 88 ~cified m
'00 em 1iro.$9~(c) (Decemoori' ~.19aO]. .
[tv) &lch togx:oat operation I1Jhel1
«:oM]?iy with Rho l\JIroviGlBCW) oq GOO...
o iOO.3~, ~ ~.39S. ~ 00._, and! ~ 6O.SW.
~l?mr&il!1 cl.!\ilCUlmtlone ahmJ!] \1!2 !!i!llAde flCJ:?
lOOee iCOlAi/c!QSr iCOCJi iCOci1l~8 ood ann
lID~eJj' ~O!?CIQ)8t 00i8~ wlIDe!ill Irnece88~
~ @!mn~~oo oomjj)~ ~~ ~e
~~IAIttJi) Moo.ft~ !!1m ~ 001._@][1~{M][A.].
['\Y] Ii QQclB&1oio~ @D\70HGp1i!OOJilt ~~
Ql'ao!J] ~ (%I!illt ~ICJ WA, ~~~ 'If, ~ ~\\\\~
~Dffi!i'lwlillil ~~Qlf!, ~~, JDIJ!lliJlICJW ~
~D\oinOl!i'ThtGdl ooforro 00 ~)'ft3 mltiJr @as
~Jroimm~l'l tlC!!!l (jj)f iliio wfill1'\YGiI? onr.rll
81iN1i\\\\\E\lly iliGlrGU(GlI? wMG fillB!o w-mJ1Wfil!i' !lo
fuQl effect. '1rrMI ~GlOOID\C!~ @G'\Y€JnO!)me1ili~
!?O!9Jort G~IBU 01Wi\Jilli\~Q @fto lliJmSG ooetf
@loElli' «:OG1~ rcl!G"'l!InOl91ImeB1\~ WI!iJ~ IDclt\~
~Q 1i'e8WW o~ Gxpc01.!!Jj'@ a!iA@ 9!illd1.!i'aDOO
~QBto off iliG wli'JrlCWB ~Q~B \OOAq
0W3mated. The oo~rt ~Iill include IW
\)IJpdated 8chifidwe of attaiDment of 40
aft OO.392(c] (December M. 1980) base«!!
@:ri! the most ~!!1t mformatlon.
(~) ThAB waiver shall be a Federlilly
~:romuJg8ted standard 01 perforIDUloo.
As BUch. it ehl3ll be umIawfuJl for HOlmdo:!
~o operate a tc~at operation m
mlolatiolfil 01 the requ1rementa
(J8tabliclAad! m !ht:i waiver. V~cRat11on @jf
~e ierme ull concll~ona 01 this waiver
shaIn subJsct ~ondm to enforcement
uder Section U3(b) Dd (c), U U.S.c.
~412(b] GOd [c], Imd Section 120, 42
!!J.$.iC. 7420. of the Act as we!! 88
)?oBsibla citizen enforcement under
&lction 304 of the Act, 42 {,J.B.C. 7e04.
(e) Ni88OF1 MotaI'MOFIulacturins
Corporouon. U.S.A. (NiS8an), Smyrna,
'jJ'IiJM6886e, /ighi-duiy truck OB8emb/y
fjJ/ant. (1) Pursuant to Section 111m of
~e Clean Air Act, 42 U.s.c. 74UU). esdn
1opcoat operation at NiBean'!I Ught-duty
('(ruck 8ssembly plant located in Smyrna,
, Tennessee. shall comply with the
ffollowing conditions:
(I) Nissan shall obtain the necessary
~rmits as required by Section 113 01 the
aaan AIr Act. u 8JD8Dded A8pat 1871,
00 operate the Smyma assembly plant.
(U) Commencing on Pebroary 4. 1883,
8Dd continuins for 4 yean or to
December St. 1988, whichever 18 sooner.
or until the base coat/clear coat topcoat
Ifltem that can achieve the standard
apeclfted in 40 CPR 8O.~c) [December
24. 11.980). ~ demonstrated to the
Administrator'lI satisfaction, Nl8san
Ihalllimi~ the ditlch818e of VOC
ilJmisaio!IUJ to the atmosphere from "each
topcoat O]!)8ration at the Smyrna,
TmmessMJ. 8ssembly plant, to either:
(A] 2.3 Jkilograms 01 VOC per :ilter of
appUed ooatlns lOiida from base coatI
deti coat topcoats, ud 1.47 kilograms
of VOC pm' Uter of applied coatins
$CUm tfrom ell] (!)~e!l' oo~a ooatiD,p; Of?
[BJ) 1.~7 Mogruu a;jf VQC J!M!I!' liter of
(])!)PRfoo 006~ w!1afuJ hm ~ ro~Qt
ooa~.
[AM] ~~ @1ii) ~0 oo~ ~f1J1i' ~$
expooQ:;@T!l1 @fl Rfm~ ~lftlOO ~&embed m
~~h [e][lUM] @~~5 MCMoJ!j\ cmtrB
@mtMntili!tJ ~GromtEl!r, OoMUiOM of VOC
hi!!ID oadi tGjjIOOm~ (QJ~UO!i) Mlffill fiM1J~
~00@@l 11.4\1 J!.rl!~ (jj)f VOC ~ nMI3l!'
,@~ e~]9.>Moo ~g~ ool!!tM ~B ~~d m
~crmoo,3m!«:] ~~mbel!'U.19!O].
~@'m ~(Qj~CSl~ «JJ~1i'illftJ1i!1J!til ~f11\n OOi!i!iilp~y
v:m\fth @jjQ prowAs!o!ii\O @~ ~ liW.~, ~ oo.~,
n oo.~, m OO.S~ ad! ~ 100).$17. ~jp)Wi'l!!t~
@&liJMQ~IOEi18 BTIiI!ill 00 I!i/lade ~O!i' ~@iPJ
OO!!Jt/clralNf 1Ci!1J1il~ OO/]l~O Imirl! !!ill «JJ@jj~I?
~@)!)COO~ ooafuJJgo wbeIm l!li!lOO6~ ~11!>
@19m~n~e OO~ji1)II!sm.oo wi~ @iJ:g
~~~ ~u fum ~ ~~}(11[M~iA].

(1) Clwyjile.. COFporotion, S£8l'ling .
Heights. Michigofl, automobile
assembly plant. (1) Pursuant to section
111m of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C.
741l(j). each iopcoai operation a~
Chrytller CorEXIration's sutomobUe
assembly plant Uocaied in Sterling
HeighiQ, Michigan. BhaG comply wiiil die
following conditions:
(i) The Chrysler Corporation shaU
obtain the necessary permits ao required
under Parta C and D of the Clean Air
Act. &9 amended August 1911. io operate
the Sterlins Heights assembly plant. .
(ii) Commencing on September 9.1985,
and continuing to December 31. 1986. or
until the bmsecost/ciearcoat (BC/CC)
topcoai syotem thai caD achiew the
standQ~ s~ecifted under 40 CPR
6O.39Z(c) il demonstrated to th8
Administrator's satisfaction. whichever
is sooner. the Chrysler Corporation shall
limit the discharge of VOC emissions to
the atmosphere from each topcoat
operation at the Sterling Heights. "
Michigan assembly plant. to either:
(A) 1.7 kilograms of VOC per liter of
applied coating solids from BC/CC
topcoats. and 1.41 kilograms of VOC per
liter of applied coating solids from aU
other topcoat coatings; or
(B) 1.41 kilosrams of VOC per liter of
applied coating solids from all topcoat
coa tings. .
(ill) Commencins on the day after the
expiration of the period described in
parqraph (f)(I)(ii) and continuing
111,-,103
thereafter, emissions of VOC', from
each topcoat operation shall not exceed
1.47 kilograma of VOC per liter of
applied coating solids 8S specUied under
40 CFR 6O.392(c).
(iv) Each topcoat operation shaD
comply with the provisions of II iIO.393,
60.394, 60.395. 60.398, and 60.397.
Separate calculations shaD be made for .
BC/CC coatings and aU other topcoat
coatiugs when necessary to demODBtraie
compliance with the emiasion Jimita
8pecified under i 6O.398{i')(1)(ii)(A).
(v) A technology development repori
ahall GMt ieni to EPA Region V, 230 South
Dearborn Sireet, Chicago, Illinois i106M, "
postmarked before 60 days artS'ihe
i!I!i'\)muJgation of tl1is waiver and
lIlm1ualIy thereafter wiille QhiB waiver As
WI effect /It, copy of this li'eport gi)}aJn be
Sf/Kit to Director. Emmuio1ID Stan~
Gnd !E.oginee~ DMtrion, U.$..
~vironmenia} lProiectlon Agerq-. MD-
1131, !b8e/il'ith Trilimgla Part. Nort!u
iCaFolmiil 2'17111.. 'rho tedmolO8Y
dewelopml!mt Re~ l!\!i1al1lU111m3rir.e tate
OC/CC dewlopment work inclu«bg tOO
Ii'3sWt8 01 exposure and endunmC8 teeiB
IOf the 'ifariGWi a::oaiings being eval\J8teci
The report shalll.nclude aD updated
(jchedwe of attamment of 40 Cf'm
00.392(c). based on the most C1.UTeI'!t
mt'oniJation. .
(2J This waiver shall be 8 federally
)promulgated lltandard of performance.
. As such. It shall be unlawful for the
Chrysler Corporation to operate a
topcoat operation in violation of the
requiremeuts established in this waiver.
Violation of the terms and conditions of
this waiver shall subject the Chrysler
Corporation to enforcement under
sections 113 (b) and (c) of the Act (42
U.S.C. 1412 (b) and (cn and under
section 120 of the Act (42 U.S.c. 7420),
as well a8 possible citizen enforcement
under section 304 of the Act (42 U.S.c.
1604). '
(3) This waiver shall not be construed
to constrain the State of Michigan from
Impolfna upon the Cbryllft CmporaIloD
any ami..lon redaction requirement at

-Chrysler's Sterling Heights automobile
assemD;Y plant nece1lsary for the
ma:n'i'!\iH'ICe of reasonable further
proS' esq or the attainment of the
natiu!'a1 ambient air quality standard
for ozcne ur t."Ie maintenance of the
nation.,;! ambient air quality standard
for ozone. Furthermore. this waiver shaD
not be construed as. granting any, .
exemptions from the applicabdity. '
enforcement, or other provisions of any
other stand81'da that apply or may apply
to topcoat operations or any other
operations at this automobile assembly
plant
-------
(g) Ford Motor Company, Hapeville,
Georgia, aulomotive assemply plant (1)
Pursuant to section 111m of the Clean
Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 1411m, each topcoat
operation at Ford Motor CompanY'8
automobile assembly plant located In
Hapeville, Georgia. shan comply with
the fonowing conditions:
(I) The Ford Motor Company shan
obtain the necessary permits auequired
under Parts C and D of the Clean Air
Act, as amended August 1971, to operate
the HapeviDe assembly planL
(ll) Commencing on September 9, 1985,
and continuing to December 31, 1988, or
until the basecoat/clearcoat (BC/cc)
topcoat system that can achieve the
standard specified under 40 CFR
6O.392(c) 18 demonstrated to the
Administrator's satisfaction. whichever
Is sooner, the Ford Motor Company shaD
limit the discharge of VOC emissions to
the atmosphere from each topcoat
operation at the Hapeville. Georgia.
assembly r;lant, to either:
(A) 2.8 kilograms of VOC per Uter of
applied coating solide from BC/CC
topcoats, and 1.41 kilograms 01 VOC per
liter of applied coating solide from all
othertopcoatcoatings:ar
(B) 1.41 kilograms of VOC per liter 01
applied coating solids from aU topcoat
coatingf;.
(IU) Commencing on the day after the
expiration of the period described In
paragraph (s)(1)(ii) and continuing
thereaft'1r, emissions of VOCs from
each topcoat operation shan not exceed
1.47 kilograms of VOC per liter 01
appUed coating soUds a8 specified under
40 CPR 6O.392{c).
(Iv) Each topcoat operation shaD
comply with the provisions of II 60..
60.3M. 60.395, 60.396. and 60.391.
Separate calculations shan be made for
BC/CC coatings and aU other topcoat
coatlJ18B when necessary to demonstrate
compliance with the emission limits
specified under I 6O.398(g)(1)(U)(A).
(vi A technology development report
shaU be sent to EPA Region IV, 345
Courtland Street, NE., Atlanta, Georsia
3038S, poetmarked before eo un after
the promWgatio1l1 of \hie waiWIl' 
-------
operations at this Jight-duty truck
assembly plant.
(i) Ford Motor Company, Hazelwood.
Missouri, passenger van assembly
plant. (1) Pursuant to section 111(j) of
the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 74110), each
topcoat operation at Ford Motor
Company's passenger van assembly
plant located in Hazelwood, Missouri,
shall comply with the following
conditions:
(i) The Ford Motor Company shall
obtain the necessary permits as required
under Parts C and D of the Clean Air
Act, as amended August 1977, to operate
the Hazelwood assembly plant.
(ii) Commencing on September 9, 1985,
and continuing to December 31, 1986, or
until the basecoat/clearcoat (BC/Cc)
topcoat system that can achieve the
standard specified under 40 CFR
eo.392(c) is demonstrated to the
Administrator's satisfaction, whichever
ie Booner, the Ford Motor Company shall
limit the discharge of vac emissions to
th!! atmosphere from each topcoat
operation at the Hazelwood, Missouri,
assembly plant, to either:
(A) 2.5 kilograms of vac per liter of
applied coating solids from BC/CC
topcoats. and 1.47 kilograms of VaG per
liter of applied coating solids from all
other topcoat coatings; or
(B) 1.47 kilograms of vaG per liter of
applied coating solids from all topcoat
coatings.
(Ui) Commencing on the day after the
expiration of the period described in
paragraph (i)(1)(ii) and continuing
thereafter, emissions of vaG's from
each topcoat operation shall no! exceed
1.47 kilograms of vac per liter of .
applied coating solids as specified. und€:f
40 CFR 5O.392(c).
(iv) Each topcoat operation shall
comply with the provisions of ~ ~ 60.393.
60.394, 60.395, 60.396. and 60.397.
Separate calculations shall be made fOf
BC/CC coatings and all other topcoat
coatings when necessary to demonstrate
compliance with the emission limits
specified under 160.398(i)(1)(iiJ(A).
(v) A technology development report
shall be sent to EPA Region VII, 726
Minnesota Avenue, Kansas City, Kansas
61101, postmarked before 50 dllYs after
the promulgation of this waiver and
annually thereafter while this waiver is
in effect. A copy of this report shall be
sent to Director. Emission Standards
and Engineering Division, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, MD-
13, Research Triangle Park. North
Carolina 27711. The technology
development report shall summarize the
BC/CC development work including the
results of exposure and endurance tests
of the various coatings being evaluated.
The report shall include an updated
schedule of attainment of 40 CFR
6O.392(c), based on the most current
information. .
(2) This waiver shall be a federally
promulgated standard of performance.
As such, it shall be unlawful for the Ford
Motor Company to operate 3 topcoat
operation in violation of the .
requirements established in this waiver.
Vio}@tion of the tenns and conditions of
this waiver shall subject the Ford Motor
Company to enforcement under section
1113 (b) and (c) of the Act [42 U.S.C. 7412
(b) and (c)) and under section 120 of the
Act (42 U.S.C. 7420), a8 well as possible
citizen enforcement under section 304 of
the Act (42 U.S.C. 7604).
(3) This waiver shall not be construed
to constrain the State of Missouri from
imposing upon the Ford Motor .
Corporation any emission reduction at
Ford's Hazelwood passenger van
assembly- plimt necessary for the
maintenance of reasonable further
progress8 or the attainment of the
national ambient air quality standards
for ozone or the maintenance of the
national ambient air quality standard
for ozone. Furthermore, this waiver shall
not be construed a8 granting any
exemptions from the applicability,
enforcement, or other provisions of any
other standards that apply or may apply
to topcoat operations or any other
operations at this passenger van
assembly plant.
III-I08b
~
~1-FR 57792, 10/5/79
~
~, 12/24/80 (124)
Revised
48 FR 5452, 2/4/83 (178)
50 FR 34461, 8/26/85 (288)
-------
Subpart NN-Standerda of
Performance for Phosphate RoCk
Plants 146

I 60.400 Applicability end designation of
affected facility.
(a) The provisions of this subpart are
applicable to the following affected
facilities used in phosphate rock plants
which have a maximum plant
production capacity greater than 3.6
megagrams per hour (4 tons/hr): dryers.
calciners. grinders. and ground rock
handling and storage facilities, except
those facilities producing or preparing
phosphate rock solely for consumption
in elemental phosphorus production.
(b) Any facility under paragraph (a) of
this section which commences
construction. modification. or
reconstruction after September 2t. t979.
is subject to the requirements of this
part.

f 60.401 Definitions.
(a) "Phosphate rock plant" means any
plant which produces or p~epares
phosphate rock product by any or all of
the following processes: Mining.
beneficiation. crushing, screening,
cleaning, drying, calcining, and grinding.
(b) "Phosphate rock feed" means all
material entering the process unit
including, moisture and extraneous
material as well as the following ore
minerals: Fluorapatite, hydroxylapatite.
chlorapatite. and carbonateapatite.
(c) "Dryer" means a unit in which the
moisture content of phosphate rock is
reduced by contact with a heated gas
stream.
(d) "Calciner" means a unit in which
the moisture and organic matter of
phosphate rock is reduced within a
combustion chamber.
(e) "Grinder" means a unit which is
used to pulverize dry phosphate rock to
the final product size used in the
manufacture of phosphate fertilizer and
does not include crushing devices used
in mining.
(0 "Ground phosphate rock handling
and storage system" means a system
which is used for the conveyance and
storage of ground phosphate rock from
grinders at phosphate rock plants.
(g) "Beneficiation" means the process
of wlishing the rock to remove
impurities or to separate size fractions.

I 60.402 Standard for particulate matter.
(a) On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by 1 60.8 is completed, no
owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall cause to
be discharged into the atmosphere:
(t) From any phosphate rock dryer
any gases which:
(i) Contain particulate matter in
excess of 0.030 kilogram per megagram
of phosphate rock feed (0.061b/ton), or
(ii) Exhibit greater than to-percent
opacity.
(2) From any phosphate rock calciner
processing unbeneficiated rock or
blends of beneficiated and
unbeneficiated rock. any gases which:
(i) Contains particulate matter in
excess of 0.12 kilogram per megagram of
phosphatuock feed (0.23 Ib/ton), or
(ii) Exhibit greater than lo-percent
opacity.
(3) From any phosphate rock calciner
processing beneficiated rock any gases
which:
(i) Contain particulate matter in
excess of 0.055 kilogram per megagram
of phosphate rock feed (O.nlb/ton), or
(ii) Exhibit greater than to-percent
opacity.
(4) From any phosphate rock grinder
any gases which:
(i) Contain particulate matter in
excess of 0.008 kilogram per megagram
of phosphate rock feed (O.Ot21b/ton), or
(Ii) Exhibit greater than zero-percent
opacity.
(5) From any ground phosphate rock
handling and storage system any gases
which exhibit greater than zero-percent
opacity.

* 60.403 Monitoring of emissions end
operations.
(a) Any owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
install, calibrate, maintain, and operate
a continuous monitoring system, except
as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of
this section, to monitor and record the
opacity of the gases discharged into the
atmosphere from any phosphate rock
dryer. calciner, or grinder. The span of
this system shall be set at 40-percent
opacity.
(b) For ground phosphate rock storage
and handling systems, continuous
monitoring systems for measuring
opacity are not required.
(c) The' owner or operator of any
affected phosphate rock facility using a
wet scrubbing emission control device
shall not be subject to the requirements
in paragraph (a) of this section, but shall
install, calibrate, maintain, and operate
the following continuous monitoring
devices: .
(1) A monitoring device for the
continuous measurement of the pressure
loss of the gas stream through the
scrubber. The monitoring device must be
certified by the manufacturer to be
accurate within :t250 pascals (:tt inch
water) gauge pressure.
(2) A monitoring device for the
continuous measurement of the
111-109
scrubbing liquid supply presaure to the
control device. The IDOIlitoring device
must be accurate within :t5 percent of
design scrubbing liquid supply pressure.
(d) FO,r the purpose of conducting a
performance teat under I 60.8. the owner
or operator of any phosphate rock plant
subject to the provisions of this subpart
shall install calibrate. maintain. and
operate a device for measuring the
phosphate rock feed to any affected
dryer. calciner. or grinder. The.
measuring device used must be accurate
10 within :t5 percent of the mass rate
over its operating range.
(e) For the purpose of reports required
under I 6O.7(c), periods of excess
emissions that shall be reported are
defmed as all ~minute periods during
which the average opacitY of the plume
From any phosphate rock dryer, calciner.
or grinder subject to paragraph (a) of
this section exceeds the applicable
opacity limit.
(f) Any owner or operator subject to
the requirements under paragraph (c) of
this section shall report For each
calendar quarter aU measurement
results that are less than 90 percent of
the average levels maintained during the
most recent performance test cOIlducted
under I 60.8 in which the affected
Facility demonstrated compliance with
the standard under I 60.402.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act as amended (4%
U.S.C. n14J)

fi 60.404 Teat meth0d8 and procedwu.
(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part, except as provided under
.1 6O.8(b}, shall be used to determine
compliance with I 60.402 al follows:
(1) Method 5 for the measurement of
particulate matter and associated
moisture content.
(2) Method 1 for sample and velocity
tra verses,
(3) Method Z for velocity and
volumetric flow rates.
(4) Method 3 for gas analysis, and
(5) Method 9 for the measurement of
the opacity of emissions.
(b) For Method 5. the sampling time
for each run shall be at leaot 60 minutes
and have a minimum sampled volume of
0.84 dscm (30 dscf). However. shorter
sampling times and smaller sample
volumes, when necessitatecl by process
variables or other factors, may be
approved by the Administrator.
(e) For each run, the average
phosphate rock feed rate in megagrams
per hour shall be determined using a
device meeting the requirements of
g 6O.403(d).
(d) For each run, emissions expressed
in kilograms per megagram of pHosphate
-------
rock feed shall be determined using the
following equ,ation:
E= (CsQI)10-1
M
where. E= Emissions of particulates in kg/Mg
of phosphate rock feed.
Cs = Concentration of particulates in mg/
dscm as measured by Method 5.
Qs = Volumetric now rate in dscm/hr as
determined by Method 2.
to- '= Conversion factor for milligrams to
kilograms.
M=Average phosphate rock feed rate in mg/
hr.
Note.-The reporting and recordkeeping
requirements in this section are not subject to
Section 3507 of the Paperwork Reduction Act
of 1980. 44 U.S.C. 3507. because these
requirements are expected to apply to fewer
than to. persons by 1985.
(Sec. 114. Clean Alr Act. as amended. (42
U.S.C. 7414))
~s~/effecti~e
FR 970. 9/2 179
~
u-F1fI658Z. 4/16/82 (146)
111-110
-------
Subpart PP-Standardl of
Performance for Ammonium SuHate
Manufacture 119

~ 60.420 Applicability and designation of
effected facility.

(a) The affected facility to which the
provisions of this subpart apply is each
ammonium sulfate dryer within an
ammonium sulfate manufacturing plant
in the caprolactam by-product.
synthetic. and coke oven by-product
sectors of the ammonium sulfate
industry.
(b) Any facility under paragraph (a) of
this section that commences
construction or modification after
February 4. 1980. is subject to the
requirements of this subpart.
~ 60.421 Definitions.
As used in this subpart. all terms not
defined herein shall have the meaning
given them in the Act and in Subpart A.
"Ammonium sulfate dryer" means a
unit or vessel into which ammonium
sulfate is charged for the purpose of
reducing the moisture content of the
product using a heated gas stream. The
unit includes foundations.
superstructure. material charger
systems. exhaust systems. and integral
control systems and instrumentation.
"Ammonium sulfate feed material
streams" means the sulfuric acid feed
stream to the reactor/crystallizer for
synthetic and coke oven by-product
ammonium sulfate manufacturing
plants; and means the total or combined
feed streams (the oximation ammonium
sulfate stream and the rearrangement
reaction ammonium sulfate stream) to
the crystallizer stage. prior to any
recycle streams.
"Ammonium sulfate manufacturing
plant" means any plant which produces
ammonium sulfate.
"Caprolactam by-product ammonium
sulfate manufacturing plant" means any
plant which produces ammonium sulfate
as a by-product from process streams
generated during caprolactam
manufacture.
"Coke oven by-product ammonium
sulfate manufacturing plant" means any
plant which produces ammonium sulfate
by reacting sulfuric acid with ammonia
recovered as a by-product from the
manufacture of coke.
"Synthetic ammonium sulfate
manufacturing plant" means any plant
which produces ammonium sulfate by
direct combination of ammonia and
sulfuric acid.

~ 60.422 Standards for partk:ul8ti! metter.
On or after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by i 60.8 is completed. no
owner or operator of an ammonium
sulfate dryer subject to the provisions of
this subpart shall cause to be discha1'8ed
into the atmospherl!'. from any
ammonium sulfate dryer. particulate
matter at an emission rate exceeding
0.15 kilogram of particulate per
megagram of ammonium sulfate
produced (0.30 pound of particulate per
ton of ammonium sulfate produced) and
exhaust gases with greater than 15'
percent opacity.

~ 60.423 Monltortng of operations.

(a) The owner or operator of any
ammonium sulfate manufacturing plant
subject to the provisions of this subpart
shall install. calibrate. maintain. and
operate flow monitoring devices which
can be used to determine the mass flow
of ammonium sulfate feed material
streams to the process. The flow
monitoring device shall have an
accuracy of :f:: 5 percent over its range.
However. if the plant uses weigh scales
of the same accuracy to directly
measure production rate of ammonium
sulfate, the use of flow monitoring
devices is not required.
(b) The owner or operator of any
ammonium sulfate manufacturing plant
subject to the provisions of this subpart
shall install. calibrate. maintain. and
operate a monitoring device which
continuously measures and permanently
records the total pressure drop across
the emission control system. The
monitoring device shall have an
accuracy of :f:: 5 percent over its
operating range.

(Section 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended
(42 U.S.c. 7414))
~ 60.424 Test methods and procedures.
(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part. except as provided in
I 6O.a(b). shall be used to determine
compliance with I 60.422 as follows:
(1) Method 5 for the concentration of
particulate matter.
. (2) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses.
(3) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric flow rate.
(4) Method 3 for gas analysis.
(b) For Method 5, the sampling time
for each run shall be at least 60 minutes
and the volume shall be at least 1.50 dry
standard cubic meters (53'dry standard
cubic feet).
(c) For each run, the particulate
emission rate, E. shall be computed as
follows:
E=Q.., x C. .;-1000

(1) E is the particulate emission rate
(kg/h).
III-Ill
(2) Qod is the average volumetric now
rate (dscm/h) as determined by Method
2; and
(3) C. is the average concentration (g/
dscm) of particulate matter as
determined by Method 5.
(d) For each run, the rate of
ammonium sulfate production, P rMg/h),
shall be determined by direct
measurement using product weigh
scales or computed from a material
balance. If production rate is determined
by material balance, the following
equations shall be used.
(1) For synthetic and coke oven by-
product ammonium sulfate plants, the
ammonium sulfate production rate shall
be determined using the following
equation:

P=AxBxCxO.0808

where:
P=Ammonium sulfate production rate in
megagrams per hour.
A = Sulfuric acid flow rate to the reactorl
crystallizer in liters per minute averaged
over the time period taken to conduct the
run.
B= Acid density (a function of acid strength
and temperature) in grams per cubic
centimeter.
C=Percent acid strength in decimal fonn.
o.0808=Physical constant for conversion of
time. volume, and mass units.

(2) For caprolactam by-product
ammonium sulfate plants the ammonium
sulfate production rate shall be
determined using the following equation:

p= D x E x Fx (6.0 x 10-"]

where:
P= Production rate of caprolactam by.
product ammonium sulfate in megagram~
per hour.
D=Total combined feed stream flow ratt' lu
the ammonium sulfate crystallizer before
the point where any recycle stream~
enter the stream. in liters per minute
averaged over the time period taken 10
conduct the test run.
E = Density of the process stream solution in
grams per liter.
F = Percent mass of ammonium sulfate in thp
process solution in decimal fonn.
6.0x 10-'= Physical constant for conversion
of time and mass units.
reI For each run, the dryer emission
rate shall be computed as follows:

R=E/P

where:
(1) R is the dryer emission Tale (kg/Mg):
(2) E is the particulate emission rate (ky/h]
from 1c) above; and
(3) P is the rate of ammonium sulfate
production (Mg/h) from (d) above.
(Section 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended
(42 U.S.C. 7414))
~
~uFR 7758, 2/4/80
Promu1~ated
45 FR 4846, 11/12/80 (119)
-------
Subpart QQ-Standards of
Performance for the Graphic Arts
Industry: Publication Rotogravure
Printing 169

i 60.430 Applicability and dealgnaUon @f
affec!ed facility.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph
(b) of this section, the affected facility to
which the provisions of this subpart
apply is each publication rotogravure
printing press.
(b) The provisions of this subpart do
not apply to proof presses.
(c) Any facility under paragraph (8) of
this section that commences
construction, modification, or
reconstruction after October 28. 1980 is
subject to the requirements of this
subpart.

!il60.4~1 DefinlUons and notations.
(a) All terms used in this subpart that
are not defined below have the meaning
given to them in the Act and in Subpart
A of this part.
"Automatic temperature
compensator" means a device that
continuously senses the temperature of
fluid flowing through a metering device
and automatically adjusts the
registration of the measured volume to
the corrected equivalent volume at a
base temperature.
"Base temperature" means an
arbitrary reference temperature for
determining liquid densities or adjusting
the measured volume of a liquid
quantity.
"Density" means the mass of a unit
volume of liquid. expressed as grams per
cubic centimeter. kilograms per liter. or
pounds per gallon, at a specified
temperature.
"Gravure cylinder" means a printing
cylinder with an intaglio image
consisting of minute cells or
indentations specially engraved or
etched into the cylinder's surface to hold
ink when continuously revolved tl;trough
a fountain of ink.
"Performance averaging period"
means 30 calendar days, one calendar
month, or four consecutive weeks as
specified in sections of this subpart.
"Proof press" means any device used
only to check the quality of the image
formation of newly engraved or etched
gravure cylinders and prints only non-
saleable items.
"Publication rotogravure printing
press" means any number of rotogravure
printing units capable of printing
simultaneously on the same continuous-
web or substrate and inctudes any
associ8ted de,,;ce for continuously
cutting and folding the printed web,
where the followt"8 saleable 1'aper'
products are printed:
" Catalogues, including mail order
and premium,
. Direct mail advertisements,
including circulars. letters, pamphlets,
cards. and printed envelopes.
. Display advertisements, including
general posters. outdoor advertisements.
car carda. window posters: counter end
floor displays: polnt-of-purcbase, and
other printed display material.
. Magazines,
. Miscellaneous advertisements,
including brochures, pamphlets,
catalogue sheets, circular folders,
announcements, package inserts, book
jackets, market circulars, magazine
inserts, and shopping news,
-. Newspapers. magazine and comic
supplements for newspapers, and
preprinted newspaper inserts, including
hi-fi and spectacolor rolls and sections.
~ Periodicals, and
e Telephone end other directories,
including business reference services.
"Raw ink" means all purchased ink.
"Related coatings" means all non-ink
purchased liquids and liquid-solid
mixtures containing VOC solvent,
usually referred to &S extenders or
varnishes. that are used at publication
rotogravure printing presses.
"Rotogravure printing unit" means
any device designed to print one color
ink on one side of 8 oontlnuous web or
substrate USU18 a gravure cylinder.
"Solvent-borneink systems" means
ink and related coati.n8 mix~s whose
volatile portion consists euentially of
VOC solvent with not more than five
weight percent water. as applied to the
gravure cylinder.
"Solvent recovery system" means an
air pollution control system by which
VOC solvent vapors in air or other gases
are captured and directed through a
condenser(s) or a ve&sel(s) containing
beds of activated car.bon or other
adsorbents. For the condensation
method, the solvent ta recovered directly
from the condenser. For the adsorption
method, the vapors are adsorbed, then
desorbed by ateam or other media, and
finally condensed and recovered.
"VOC" means volatile organic
compound.
"VOC solvent" means an organic
liquid or liquid mixture consisting of
VOC components.
"Waterborne ink systems" means ink
and related coating mixtures whoae
volatile portion oonaiats ola mixture of
VOC solvent and more than five weight
percent water, as applied to the grawre
cylinder.
{b) Symbola used in this subpart ere
defined 8S follows:

Da=the derillty at 6ebMe tempel'8tme of
VOC _¥1IRt II88d - ftIC».MllIIII."""
ene perfOI'lD8DC8 averagina period.
111"'112
Dd=the density of each ooIor of raw Ink and
each related coating (I) ueed .t the
subject facility (or facilities), at the
coatill8 temperature when the volume of
coating used is measured.
Dd!=the density of each VOC solvent (I)
added to the ink for dilution at the
subject facility (or facilities), at the
solvent temperature when the volume of
solvent used is measured.
Dol = the density of each VOC solvent (I) used
as a cleaning agent at the subject facility
(or facilities), at the solvent tempersture
when the volume of cleaning solvent
used is measured.
Dbj=the density of each quantity of water (i)
added at the aubject facility (or facilities)
for dilution of waterbome ink systems at
the water temperature when the volume
of dilution water used Is measured.
DmI=the density of each quantity of VOC
solvent and miscellaneous solvent-bome
waste inks and waste VOC solvents (i)
rpcovered from the subject facility (or
facilities), at the solvent temperature
when the volume of solvent recovered is
measured.
Dot = the density of the VOC solvent
contained in each raw ink and related
coating (i) used at the subject facility (or
facilities), 8t the coating temperature
when the volume of coating used Is
measured.
Dwi = the density of the water contained' in
each waterbome raw ink and related
coating (i) used at the subject facility (or
facilities). at the coating temperature
when the volume of coating used is
measured.
L.i=the measured liquid volume of each color
of raw ink and each related coating (i)
used at the facility of a corresponding
VOC content, Vot or Wot, with a VOC
density. Dot, and a coating density, Dd'
L.u = the measured liquid volume of each VOC
lolvent (i) with corresponding density.
Ddl. added to dilute the ink used at
M.i=the mass, determined by direct
weighing, of each color of raw ink and
each related coating (i) used at the
8ubject facility (or fac.llities).
M..=the mass, determined by direct
weighing, of VOC solvent added to dilute
the ink used at the subject facility (or
facilities) during one performance
averaging period.
M.=the mass, determined by direct
weighing, of VOC solvent used as a
cleaning agent at the subject facility (or
facilities) during one performance
averaging period.
Mb = the mass, determined by direct
weighing, of water added for dilution
with waterbome ink systems used at the
subject facility (or facilities] during one
performance averagiQ8 period.
M..=the mass, determined by direct
weighing, of VOC IOlvent and
miscellaneous solvent-bome waste inks
and wBste VOC'solvents recovered from
the subject facility (or facilities) during
one performance averaging period.
M.""tbe total mall of VOC 801-- ccmt8ined
in the raw Inks and related coatings used
-------
at the subject facility (or facilities) durins
one performance averaging period.
M, = the total mass of VOC solvent recovered
from the subject facility (or facilities)
during one performance averaging
period.
M, == the total mass of VOC solvent used at
the subject facility (or facilities) during
one performance averaging period.
My==the total mass of water !Jsed with
waterborne ink systems at the subject
facility (or fscilities) durins one
performance averagins period.
M" = the total mass of water contained in the
waterborne raw inks and related
coatings used at the subject facility (or
facilities) during one performance
averRging period.
P=the average VOC emission percentage for
the subj~ct facility (or facilities) for one
performance averaging period.
V.,=the liquid VOC content. expressed as a
volume fraclion of VOC volume per total
volume of coating. of each color of raw
ink and related coating (i) used at the
subject facility (or facilities).
V",=the water content. expressed as a
volume fraction of water volume per
total volume of coating. of each color of
waterborne raw ink and related coating
(i) used at the subject facility (or
facilities ).
W.,=the VOC content. expressed as a weight
fractioo of mass of VOC per total mass
of coating. of each color of raw ink and
related coating Ii) used at the subject
facility (or facilities).
W.,.= the water content. expressed as a
weight fraction of mass of water per tolal
mass of coating. of each color of
waterborne raw ink and related coating
Ii) used at the subject facility (or
facilitiesl.

(c) The following subscripts are used
in this subpart with the abuve symbols
to denote the applicable facility:

a = affected facility.
b= both affected and existing iaciiilies
controlled in comrnun by the same air
pollution control ~quiiJlJ,cnt.
e=existing facility.
f = all affected a..d existing facilities locat~d
within the same plant boundary.
f 60.432 Standard for volatile organic
compounds.

During the period of the pprformilnce
test required to be conducted by ~ 60.8
and after the date required for
completion of the test. no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall c:ausc to be discharged
into the atmosphere from any affected
facility VOC equal to more than 16
percent of the total mass of VOC solvent
and water used at that facility during
anyone performance averaging period.
The water used includes only that water
contained in the waterborne raw inks
and related coatings and the water
added for dilution with waterborne ink
systems.
010.433 Parf0nn8nc8 tat end complance
provl8lon8.
(a) The owner or operator of any
affected facility (or facilities) shall
conduct performance tesls in
accordance with I 60.8. under the
following conditions:
(1) The performance averaging period
for each test is 30 consecutive calendar
days and not an average of three
separate runs as prescribed under
I 6O.B(f).
(2) Except as provided under
paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section. it
affected facilities routinely share the
same raw ink storage/handling system
with existing facilities. then temporary
measurement procedures for sp.gregating
the raw inks. related coatings. VOC
solvent. and water used at the affected
facilities must be employed during the
test. For this case, an overall emission
percentage for the combined facilities as
well as for only the affected facilities
must be calculated during the test.
(3) For the purpose of measuring bulk
storage tank quantities of each color of
raw ink and each related coating used,
the owner or operator of any affected
facility shall install, calibrate, maintain.
and continuously operate during the test
one or more-
(i) Non-reseUable totalizer metering
device(s) for indicating the cumulative
liquid volumes used at each affected
facility; or
(ii) Segregated storage tanks for each
affected facility to allow determination
of the liquid quantities used by
measuring devices other than the press
meters required under item (i) of this
article; or
(iii) Storage tanks to serve more than
one facility with the liquid quantities
used determined by measuring devices
other than press meters. if facilities are
combined as decribed under paragraph
(d). (f). or (g) of this section.
(4) The owner or operator may choose
to install an automatic temperature
compensator with any liquid metering
device used to measure the raw inks.
related coatings. water. or VOC solvent
used. or VOC solvent recovered.
(5) Records of the measured amounts
used at the affected facility and the
liquid temperature at which the amounts
were measured are maintained for each
shipment of all purchased material or on
at least a weekly basis for-
(i) The raw inks and related coatings
used;
(ii) The VOC and water content of
each raw ink and related coating used
as determined according to A 60.435.
(iii) The VOC solvent and water
added to the inks used;
(iv) The VOC solvent used as a
cleaning agent; and
111-113
(v) The VOC solvent recovered.
(6) The density variations with
temperature of the raw inks. related
coatings. VOC solvents used. and VOC
solvent recovered are determined by the
methods stipulated in 160.435(d).
(7) The calculated emission
percentage may be reported as rounded-
off to the nearest whole number.
(8) Printing press startups and
shutdowns are not included in the
exemption provisions under IBO.B(c).
Frequent periods of press startups and
shutdowns are normal operations and
constitute representative conditions for
the purpose of a performance test.
(b) If an affected facility uses
waterborne ink systems or a
combination of waterborne and solvent-
borne ink systems with a solvent
recovery system, compliance is
determined by the following procedures.
except as provided in paragraphs (d).
(e), (f). and (g) of this section:
(1) The mass of VOC in the solvent-
borne and waterborne raw inks and
related coatings used is determined by
the following equation;
~ m
(M.J.= L IM.,). (W.,I.+ L IL.,I. (D.,I.IWo.I.+
1.1 j,,'
i (L.,I. (VoII. (D.,).
1,,1
where:
k is the total number of raw inks and related
coatings measured as used in direct mass
quantities with different amounts of VOC
content.
m is the total number ofraw inks and related
coatings measured as used by volume
with different amounts of VOC content
or different densities.
n is the total number of raw inks and related
coatings measured as used by volume
with different amounts of VOC can lent
or different VOC solvent densities.

(2) The total mass of VOC used is
determined by the following equation:
m
(M,I. = (M.J. + L (!"',I. (D.,J." (M.I. +
1;:1

i (L.,). (D.,I.+(M.I.
....,
Where "m" and "n" are the respective total
numbers of VQC dilution and cleaning
solvents measured as used by volume
with different densities.
(3).The mass of water in the
waterborne raw inks and related
coatings used is determined by the
following equation:
-------
. m
I M.I., ' L 1M..). (W..iI. + L (L..,,). (Dc.l. (W ~11.
, I , 1
.
. L (L.."I. (V..,). (0..,).
, I
" IS the toll.1 number of raw inks and reilited
cOlltings measured liS used in direct mass
quantities with diFFerent amounts of
water content.
OJ is the total number of raw inks and related
cORtings measured as used by volume
with dlfferentlllTlounts of water content
or diFFerent densities,
n 15 the totlll number of raw inks and rel/,Ied
coatings measured as used by volume
with diFFerent amounts of water content
or diFFerent water densities.
(41 The total mass of water used is
dt!ter'Clined by the following equation:
IM,I.~(M..I.+(Mh).+ I (Lh.l.tDh,l.
, 1
wht:re "m" is the tolal number of water
dilution additions measured as used by
volume with dirTerenl densities.
(5) The total mass of VOC solvent
recovered is determined by the
f(,lIowing equation:
k
1:\1,1. -IMm). + L (Lm,). (Om.).
i 1
whl're "k" if the lotal number of VOC
solvents. miscellaneous salven I-borne
waste inks. and wasil' VOC solvents
measured as recovered by volume with
differenl densities.
(61 The average VOC emission
percentage for the affected facility is
determined by the following equation:
".~llM.I.-[Mr).] x 100
(M.I.+(M,).
(c) If an affected facility controlled by
II solvent recovery system uses only
solvent-borne ink systems. the owner or
operator may choose to determine
complilmce on a direct mass or a
den[,ity-corrected liquid volume basis.
Exccpt iJS provided in paragraphs (d).
(e). (f). and (g) of this section.
compliance i8 determined a8 follows:
(1) On a direct mass basis. compliance
is determined according to paragraph (b)
of this section. except that the watp.r
term, M.. does not apply.
(2) On a density-corrected liquid
volume basis. compliance is determined
by the folluwing procedures:
(i) A base temperature corresponding
to that for the largest individual amount
of vue solvent used or recovered frum
the affected fHciIity. or other reference
temperHture. is chosen by the owner or
operiltor.
(ii) The corrected liquid volume of
VOC in the raw inks and related
coatings used is determined by the
fonowing equation:
1l..1.~ i (M"J. (W.,I. +I (L.."I. (Dn~~~
" DR ' 1 DB
.. f JL.!). (V.,I. (0.,1.
'~1 D9
where.
/( is the lotal number of raw inks and reilited
coatings measured as used in direct mass
quantities with different amounts of VOC
content.
m is the toto] number of raw inks and related
cOatings measured as used by volume
with dirTerent amounts of VOC content
or different densities.
n is the total number of raw inks and related
coatings measured as used by volume
with different amounts of VOC contenl
or djfferent VOC solvent densities.

(Hi) The total corrected liquid volume
of VOC used is determined by the
following equation:
1!11.=(L.I.+ I (L..,J.(Dctil.+ (M.,I. +
;, DB DB
i (lpJ. (D..J. + (M.I.
i 1 DB DB
where "m" and "n" are the respective total
numbers of VOC dilution and cleaning
solvents measured as used by volume
with different densities.
111-114
(iv) The total corrected liquid volum('
of VOC solvent recovered is determined
by the following equation:
(L,I.= (M.,I. + t (Lm,I. [DmI~
DB " DB
where "k" is the tolal number of VOC
solvents. miscelhmeous solvent .borne
waste inks. and waste VOC solventR
measured as recovered hy vlliume with
different densities,

(v) The a\'erage VOC emission
percentage for the affected fac:!iiy is
determined by the following eqo.lation:
p = [ (L,I. - (L,I.] ;.( 100
. (1..1.
(d) If two or more affected facilities
are controlled by the same solvent
recovery system. compliance is
determined by the procedures specified
in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section.
whichever applies. except that (1..). and
(1..).. (M,).. (Mr).. and (M, ).. are the
collective amounts of VOC solvent and
water corresponding to all the affectp.d
facilities c.ontrolled by that solvent
recovery system. The average VOC
emission percentage for each of the
affected facilities controlled by that
same solvent recovery system is
assumed to be equal.
(e) Except as provided under
paragraph (0 of ~his section. if an
existing facility (or facilities) and an
affected facility (or facilities) are
controlled in common by the same
solvent recovery system. the owner or
operator shall determine compliance by
conducting a separate emission test on
the existing facility (or facilities) and
then conducting 8 performance test on
the combined facilities 8S follows:
(1) Before the initial startup of the
affected facility (or facilities) and at ap.y
other time as requested by the
Administrator. the owner or operator
shall conduct emission test(s) on the
existing facility (or facilities) controlled
by the subject solvent recovery system.
The solvent recovery system must
handle VOC emissions from only the
-------
subject existing facility (or facilities).
not from affected facilities. during the
emission test.
(2) During the emission test. the
affected facilities are subject to the
standard stated in I 60.432.
(3) The emission test is conducted
over a 30 consecutive calendar day
averaging period according to the
conditions stipulated in 160.433(a)(1)
through (a)(5). except that the conditions
pertain to only existing facilities instead
of affected facilities.
(4) The owner or operator of the
existing facility (or facilities) shall
provide the Administrator at least 30
days prior notice of the emission test to
afford the Administrator the opportunity
to have an observer present.
(5) The emission percentage for the
existing facility (or facilities) during the
emission test is determined by one of
the following procedures:
(i) If the existing facility (or facilities)
uses a combination of waterborne and
1J0lvent-borne ink systems. the average
VOC emission percentage must be
determined on a direct mass basis
according to paragraph (b)"or (d) of this
section. whichever applies. with the
following equation:
p.= [ (MII.-(M,I.] x 100
(M,I.+(Mvl.
where the water and vaG solvent amounts
pertain to only existing facilities.

(ii) If the existing facility (or facilities)
uses only solvent-borne ink systems. the
owner or operator may choose to
determine the emission percentage
either on a direct mass basis or a
density-corrected liquid volwne basis
according to paragraph (c) or (d) of this
section. whichever applies. On a direct
mass basis. the average VOC emission
percentage is determined by the
equation presented in article (i) of this
paragraph. On a density-corrected liquid
volume basis. the average VQC
emission percentage is determined by
the following equation:
p = [1l"I.-(L,I.] x 100
. (L,I.
where the VaG Bolvent amounts pertain to
only existing facilities.

(6) The owner or operator of the
existing facility (or facilities) shall
furnish the Administrator a written
report of the results of the emission test.
(7) After completion of the separate
emission test on the existing facility (or
facilities). the owner or operator shall
conduct performance testIs) on the
combined facilities with the solvent
recovery system handliog VOC
emissions from both the existing and
affected facilities.
(8) During performance test(s). the
emission percentage for the existing
facility (or facilities). p.. is assumed to
be equal to that determined in the latest
emission test. The administralor may
request additional emission tests if any
physical or operational changes occur to
any of the subject existing facilities.
(9) The emission percentage for the
affected facility (or facilities) during
performance testIs) with both existing
and affected facilities connected to the
solvent recovery system is determined
by one of the following procedures:
(i) If any of the combined facilities
uses both waterborne and solvent-borne
ink systems. the average VOC emission
percentage must be determined on a
direct'mass basis according to
paragraph (b) or (d) of this section.
whichever applies. with the following
equation:
{ (M')"-(M'I..-(~)[(MJ.+(Mv).)}
p.= 100 x100
(M,I.+(M.I.
where (M,I.. and (M,I.. are the collective vac
solvent amoWlts pertaining to all the
combined facilities.

(ii) If all of the combined facilities use
only solvent-borne ink systems. the
owner or operator may choose to
determine performance of the affected
facility (or facilities) either on a direct
mass basis or a density-corrected liquid
volume basis according to paragraph (c)
or (d) of this section. whichever applies.
III-lIS
On a direct mass basis. the average
VOC emission percenfage is determined
by the equation presented in article (i) of
this paragraph. On a density-corrected
liquid volume basis. the average VOC
emissiC'n percentage is determined by
the following equation:

[ (L,I" - (L,I" - (L,I,( 1~) J
~= X 100
(L,I.
where (L,I" and (L,).. are the collective VaG
solvent amounts pertaining to all the
combined facilities.
(f) The owner or operator may choose
to show compliance of the combined
performance of existing and affected
facilities controlled in common by the
same solvent recovery system. A
separate emission test for existing
facilities is not required for this option.
The combined performance is
determined by one of the following
procedures:
(1) If any of the combined facilities
uses both waterborne and solvent-borne
ink systems. the combined average VOC
emission percentage must be determined
on a direct mass basis according to
paragraph (b) or (d) of this section.
whichever applies. with the following
equation:
p,,=[(MI),,-(M,I,,] x 100
(M,),.+(Mvl"

(2) H all of the combined facilities use
only solvent-borne ink systems. the
owner or operator may choose to
determine performance either on a
direct mass basis or a density-corrected'
liquid volume basis according to
paragraph (c) or (d) of this section.
whichever applies. On a direct mass
basis. the average VOC emission
percentage is determined by the
equation presented in article (i) of this
paragraph. On a density-corrected liquid
volume basis. the average VOC
emission percentage is determined by
the following equation:
p = [ (L,I" - (L'I"] x 100
" L,I"
-------
(g) If all existing and affected facilities
located within the same plant boundary
use waterborne ink systems or solvent-
borne ink systems with soh'ent recovery
syslf~ms. the owner or operator may
choose to show compliance on a
plant wide basis for all the existing and
Hffected facilities together. No separate
emission tests on existing facilities and
no temporary segregated liquid
measurement procedures for affected
facilities are required for this option.
The plantwide performance is
determined by one of the following
procedures:
(1) if any of the facilities use
wHterborne ink systems. the total plant
a\'p,rHge vac emission percentage must
he determined on a direct mass basis
Hccording to paragraph (b) of this
sp.ction wHh the following equation:
1', .lt~~~I-=(~!.!.-(M,).-(t\!!.!~] x 100
(M,),+(M.),
Where (M.I, and (M,J,are the collective VOC
suh'ent and wllter amounts used at all
the subject ~Iant facilities during the
perfurm/lnce test.

(2) If all (1£ the plant facilities use only
solvent-borne ink systems. the owner or
operator may choose to determine
performance either on a direct mass
bHsis or 8 density-corrected liquid
vulume basis according to paragraph (c)
of this sed ion. On a direct mass basis.
the tutal p!ant average vac emission
perccntagc is determined by the
eqll"tiun presented in article (i) of this
pilrilgraph. On a density-corrected liquid
volume basis. the total plant average
vac emission percentage is determined
by the following equation:
1', I (I.tk.J.L.0:.:l!:d~-(I,.)b] x 100
(1..),
\f\'ht'f(' Il.,), is the collective vac solvenl
amuunl used at all the subject jJlant
facilities during the performance test.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as a~ended (42
U.S.C. 7414))

~ 60.434 Monnorlng of operation. and
rec:ordkeeplng.
(a) After completion of the
performance test required under I 60.8.
the owner or operator of any affected
facility using wilterborne ink systems or
solvent-borne ink systems with solvent
recovery systems shall record the
amount of solvent and water used.
solvent recovered. and estimated
emission percentage for each
perforfnance averaging period and shall
maintain these records fur 2 years. The
emission percentage is estimated as
follows:
(1) The performance averaging period
for monitoring of proper operation and
maintenance is a calendar month or 4
cunsecutive weeks. at the option of the
owner or operator.
(2) If affected facilities share the same
raw ink storage/handling system with
existing facilities. solvent and water
used. solvent recovered. and emission
percentages for the combined facilities
may be documented. Separate emission
percentages fur only the affected
facilities are not required in this case.
The combined emission percentage is
compared to the o\'erall average for the
existing and affected facilities' emission
percentage determined during the most
recent performance test.
(3) Except as provided in article (4) of
this paragraph. temperatures and liquid
densities determined during the most
recent performance test are used to
calculate corrected volumes and mass
quantities.
(4) The owner or operator may choose
to measure temperatures for
determination of actual liquid densities
during each performance averaging
period. A different base temperature
may be used for each performance
averaging period if desired by the owner
or operiltor.
(5) The emission percentage is
calculated according to the procedures
under ~ 6O.433(b) through (g). whichever
applies. or by a comparable calculation
which compares the total solvent
recovered to the total solvent used at
the affected facility.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act a8 amended (42
U.S.C.7414)1

~ 60.435 Test method. and procedure..

(a) The owner or operator of any
affected facility using solvent-horne ink
systems shall determine the vac
content of the raw inks and related
coatings used at the affected facility
bv-
. (1) Analysis using Reference Method
24A of routine weekly samples of raw
ink and related coatings in each
respective storage tank; or
(2) Analysis using Reference Method
24A of samples of each shipment of all
purchased raw inks and related
coatings; or
III-116
(3) Determination of the vac content
from the formulation data supplied by
the ink manufacturer with each
shipment of raw inks and related
coatings used.
(b) The owner or operator of any
affected facility using solvent-borne ink
systems shall use the results of
verification analvses by Reference
Method 24A to d"etermfne compliance
when discrepancies with ink
manufacturers' formulation data occur.
(c) The owner or operator of any
affected facility using waterborne ink
systems shall determine the vac and
water content of raw inks and related
coatings used at the .affected facility
by-
(1) Determination of the vac and
water content from the formulation dilta
supplied by the ink manufacturer with
each shipment of purchased raw inks
and related coatings used: or
(2) Analysis of samples of each
shipment of purchased raw inks and
related coatings using a test method
approved by the Administrator in
accordance with ~ 6O.8(b).
(d) The owner or operator of any
affected facility shall determine the
density of raw inks. related coatings.
and vac solvents by-
(1) Making a total of three
determinations for each liquid sample at
specified temperatures using the
procedure outlined in ASTM D 1475-00
(Reapproved 1930). which is
incorporated by reference. It is available
from the American Society of Testing
and Materials. 1916 Race Street.
Philadelphia. Pennsylvania 19103. It is
also available for inspection at the
Office of the Federal Register. Room
8401. 1100 L Street. N.W.. Washington.
D.C. This incorporation by reference
was approved by the Director of the
Federal Register on November 8. 1982.
This material is incorporated as it exists
on the date of approval and a notice of
any change in these materials will be
published in the Federal Register. The
temperature and density is recorded as
the arithmetic average of the three
determinations; or
(2) Using literature values. at specified
temperatures. acceptable to the
Administrator.
(e) If compliance is determined
according to t 6O.433(e). (f). or (8). the
existing as well as affected facilities are
subject to the requirements of
paragraphs (a) through (d) of this
section.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))
~_ve
~/80
:~lfg~t 11/8/82 (169)
-------
Subpart RR-Standards of
Performance for Pressure Sensitive
Tape and Label Surface Coating
Operations 207

~ 60.440 ApplicaNlity and designation of
affected facility.
(a) The affected facility to whi~h the
provisions of this subpart apply IS each
coating line used in the manufacture of
pressure sensitive tape and label
materials.
(b) Any affected facility which inputs
to the coating process 45 Mg of VOC or
less per 12 month period is not subject
to the emission limits of t 6O.442(a),
however, the affected facility is subject
to the requirements of all other
applicable sections of this subpart. If the
amount of VOC input exceeds 45 Mg per
12 month period, the coating line will
become subject to t 6O.442(a) and all
other sections of this subpart.
(c) This subpart applies ~o any
affected facility which begins
constructicn, modification. or
reconstruction after December 30, 1980.

~ 60.441 DefinlUons and symbols.
(a) Except as otherwise required by
the context, terms used in this subpart
are defined in the Act. in Subpart A of
this part. or in this section as follows:
"Coating applicator" means an
apparatus used to apply a surface
coating to a continuous web.
"Coating line" means any number or
combination of adhesive. release, or
prewat coating app1icators. flashoff
areaa. and ovens which coat a
continuous web, locaaed betweEm a web
unwind station and a web rewind
station. to produce presSDre sensitive
tape and labeJ materiala..
"Coating aolids applied" means .the
solids coo tent of the coated adheSIve.
release. or precoat as measured by
Referetlce Metnod 24.
"FIashoff area" means the portion of a
coalin~ line after the coating applicator
and usually before the oVez! el\ran£e.
"Fugitive volalile organic compcIUnds"
mean. any volatile organic: com~unds
which are emined fram the coa1JJ11
applicator and f1ashoff IDeas and are
not emitted in the oven.
"Hood or enclosure" means an)'
device used to capture fagilive 1'01ati}e
organic compounds.
. "Oven" means a chamber whicb uses
heat or irradiatian 10 bake. cure.
polymerize. or dry a IW'fa~ coating:
"PrecOilt" means a coatiDg operation
in which a coating other than an
adhesive or release is applied to a
surface during the production of a
pressure sensitive tape or label product.
"Solvent applied in the coating"
means all organu: solvent contained in
the adhesive, release., and precoat
formulations that is metered into the
coating applicator from the formwation
area.
"Total enclosnre" means a structure
or building around the coating
applicator and Dashoff area or the ~~tire
coating line for the purpose of confmmg
and totally capturing fugitive VOC
emissions.
"VOC" means volatile organic
c:>mpound.
(b) All symbols used in this subpart
not defined below are given meaning in
the Act or in Subpart A of this part.
"a" means the gas stream vents
exiting the emission control device.
"b" means the gas stream vents
entering the emission control device.
"CaI" means the concentration of Vex:
(carbon equivalent) in each gas stream
(i) exiting the emission control device, in
parts per million by volume.
"Ct.t" means the concentration of VOC
(carbon equivalent) in each gas stre~m
(i) entering the emission control device.
in parts per million by volume.
"Cn," means the concentration of VOC
(carbon equivalent) in each gas stream.
(k) emitted directly to the atmosphere. In
parts per million by vo1~me.
"G" means the calculated weighted
average mass (kg) of VOC per mass (kg)
of C08tins solids applied each calender
month.
"Md" meana the total mass (kg) of
each coating (i) applied during the
calendar month as determined from
facility records. ,
"M " means the total mass (kg) of
solve~t recovered for a calendar month,
"Q .. means the vohlmetric flow rate
of ea~h effluent gas stream (j) exiting the
emission control de\';ce, in dry standard
cubic meters per hour.
"Q ," means the volumetric flow rate
of ea~h effluent gas stream (i} entering
the emission control device, ia dry
standard cubic meters per hour.
"Q "mearwlhe volumetric now ra!e
of ea~h effluent gas stream fkJ emitted,
to the atmosphere. in dry standard cubIC
meters per hour.
"R" means the overall VOC emission
reduction achieved for a cawmdar month

(in percent).
"R.," means the required overall VOC
emission reduction (in percent).
"W "means the weight fraction of
organi~s applied of each coating (i)
applied during a calendar month as
determined from Reference Method 24
or coating manufacturer's formulation
-data.
"W "means the weight fraction of
solidsolapplied of each coating (i) a~plied
during a calendar month as dete"':lmed
from Reference Method 24 or coatmg
manufacturer's formulation data.
111-117
~ 60.442 Standard for volatile organic
compounds.
(a) On and after the date on which the
performance test required by t 60.8 has
been completed each owner or operator
subject to this subpart shall:
(1) Cause the discharge into the
atmosphere from an affected facility not
more than 0.20 kg VOC/kg of coating
solids applied as calculated on a
weighted average basis for one calendar
month; or
(2) Demonstrate for each affected
facility:
(i) a 90 percent overall VOC emission
reduction as calculated over a calendar
month: or
(ii) the percent overall VOC emissIOn
reduction specified in I 6O.443(b) as
calculated over a calendar month.

~ 60.443 Compliance provisions.

(a) To determine compliance with
fi 60.442 the owner or operator of the
affected facility shall calculate a
weighted average of the mass of solvent
used per mass of coating solids applied
for a one calendar month period
accordil18 to the following procedures:
(1) Determine the weight fraction of
organics and the w.eigbt. fr~ction of .
solids of each coatmg applied by usmg
Reference Method 24 or by tbe coating
manufacturer's formulation data.
(2) Compute the weighted average by
the foHowing equation:
n
I "'-\!"
ic=t
G-
n
I w.~...
i=1
(3) For each affected facility where
the value of G is less than or equal to
0.20 kg VOC per kg of coating solids
applied, the affected facility is in
compliance with 160.442(a)(1).

(bl To determine compliance with
~ 6O.442(a)(2), the owner or operator
shall calculate the required overall VOC
emission reduction according to the
following equation:
(;-0,211 . 00
R.= )0; 1
G
If R., less than or equal to 90 pp.r~e~t,
then the required overall VOC emiSSIOn
reduction is RQ. If R., is greater than 90
percent, then the required overall VOC
emission reduction is 90 percent.
(c) Where compliance with the
emission limits specified in
160.442(a)(2) is achieved through the
use of a solvent recovery system, the
-------
owner or operator shall determine the
overall vac emission reduction for a
one calendar month period by the
following equation:
R=
M,
><100
n
1 w...'d..
1=1
If the R value is equal to or greater
than the RQvalue specified in paragraph
(bl of this section, then compliance with
~ 6O.442(a)(2) is demonstrated.
(d) Where compliance with the
emission limit specified in fi60.442(a)(2)
is achieved through the use of a solvent
destruction device, the owner or
operator shall determine calendar
monthly compliance by comparing the
monthly required overall vac emission
reduction specified in paragraph (b)1 of
this section to the overall vac emission
reduction demonstrated in the most
recent performance test which complied
with ~ 6O.442(a)(2). If the monthly.
required overall vac emission
reduction is less than or equal to the
overall vac reduction of the most
recent performance test, the affer:ed
facility is in compliance with
~ 60.442(8112). .
leI Where compliance with
Ii 60.442(d)(2) is achieved thro\l~h the
use of a solvent destruction device. the
owner or operator shall continuously
record the destruction device
combustion temperature during coating
operations for the.rmal incineration
destruction devices or the gas
temperature upstream and downstream
of the incinerator catalyst bed during
coating operations for catalytic
incineration destruction devices. For
thermal incineration destruction devices
the owner or operator shall record al1 3-
hour periods (during actual coating
operations) during which the average
temperature of the ~evice is more than
28.C l50.F) below the average
temperature of the device during the
most recent performance test complying
with 160.442(a)(2). For catalytic
incineration destruction devices, the
owner or operator shal1 record al1 3-hour
periods (during actual coating
operations) during which the average
temperature of the device immediately
before the catalyst bed is more than
38.C (50.F) below the average
temperature of the device during the
most recent performance test compl)'ing
wittt 160.442(a)(2), and al13-hour
periods (during actual coating
operations) during which the average
temperature difference across the
catalyst bed is less than 60 percent of
the average temperature difference of
the device durinR the most recent
performance test complying with
160.442(a)(2).
(f) After the initial performance test
required for all affected facilities under
1 60.8. compliance with the vac
emission limitation and percentage
reduction requirements under 1 60.442 is
based on the average emission reduction
for one calendar month. A separate
compliance test is completed at the end
of each calendar month after the initial
performance test, and a new calendar
month's average vac emission
reduction is calculated to show
compliance with the standard.
(g) If a common emission control
device is used to recover or destroy
solvent from more than one affected
facility, the perff''111ance of that control
device is assumed to be equal for each
of the affected facilities. Compliance
with ~ 6O.442(a)(2) is determined by the
methods specified in paragraphs (c) and
(d) of this section and is performed
simultaneously on al1 affected facilities.
(h) If a common emission control
device is used to recover solvent from
an existing facility (or facilities) as well
as from an affected facility (or facilities).
the overall vac emission reduction for
the affected facility (or facilities), for the
purpose of compliance, 8hall be
determined bv the followinR procedures:
(1) The owner or operator of the
existing facility (or facilities) shall
determine the mass of solvent recovered
for a calendar month period from the
existing facility (or facilities) prior to the
connection of the affected facility (or
facilities) to the emission control device.
(2) The affected facility (or facilities)
shall then be connected to the emission
control device.
(3) The owner or operator shall
determine the total mass of solvent
recovered from both the existing and
affected faciliiies over a calendar month
period. The mass of solvent determined
in paragraph (h)(1) of this section from
the existing facility shal1 be subtracted
from the total mass of recovered solvent
to' obtain the mass of solvent recovered
from the affected facility (or facilities).
The overal1 vac emission reduction of
the affected facility (or facilities) can
then be determined as specified in
paragraph (c) of this section.
(i) If a common emission control
devices is used to destruct solvent from
an existing facility (or facilities) as well
as from an affected facility (or facilities),
the overal1 vac emission reduction for
the affected facility (or facilities), for the
purpose of compliance, shall be
determined by the fonowing procedures:
(i) The owner or operator shall
operate the emission control device with
both the existing and affected facilities
connected.
(2) The concentration of vac (in parts
per million by volume) after the common
emission control device shall be
111-113
determined as specified in fi 6O.444(c).
This concentration is used in the
calculation of compliance for both the
existing and affected facilities.
(3) The volumetric flow out of the
common control device attributable to
the affected facility (or facilities) shall
be calculated by first determining the
ratio of the volumetric flow entering the
common control device attributable to
the affected facility (facilities) to the
total volumetric flow entering the
common control device from both
existing and affected facilities. The
multiplication of this ratio by the total
volumetric flow out of the common
control device yields the flow
attributable to the affected facility
(facilities). Compliance is determined by
the use of the equation specified in
ft 6O.444(c).
(j) Startups and shutdowns are normal
operation for this source category.
Emissions from these operations are to
be included when determining if the
standard specified at ! 6O.442(a)(2) is
being attained.
f 60.444 Perfonnance teat procedures.

(a) The performance test for affected
facilities c~plying with t 60.442
without the use of add-on controls shall
be identical to the procedures specified
in 160.443(8).
(b) The performance test for IIffected
facilities controlled by 8 Bolvent
recovery device shaD be conducted as
foHows:
, (1) The. performance test shall be a
one calendar month test and not the
average of three nms a8 specified in
! 60.8(0.
(2) The weighted average mass of
vac per mass of coating solids applied
for a one calendar mon\h period 8hall be
determined as specified in A 6O.443(a)(1)
and ~ 6O.443(a)(2).
(3) Calculate the required percent
overall vac emission reduction as
specified in t 6O.443(b).
(4) Inventory vac usage and vac
recovery for a one calendar month
period.
(5) Determine the percent overall vac
emission reduction as specified in
t 6O.443(c).
(c) The performance test for affected
facilities controlled by a solvent
destruction device shall be conducted as
follows:
(1) The performance of the solvent
destruction device shan be determined
by averaging the results of three test
runs as specified in t 60.8(0-
(2) Determine for each affected facility
prior to each test nm the weighted
average mass of vac per mass of
coating solids applied being used at the
facility. The weighted average shall be
-------
determined as specified in A 6O.443(a). In
this application the quantities of W 01'
W.1, and Mci shall be determined for the
time period of each test run and not a
calendar month as specified in A 60.441.
(3) Calculate the required percent
overall vac emission reduction as
specified in ~ 6O.443(b).
(4) Determine the percent overall vac
emission reduction of the solvent
destruction device by the following
equation and procedures:
n m
1 Q..c... - 1 Qh
i=1 j...t
R:
n p
1 Q,.,C...... 1 Q",C",
;=1 k-1
(i) The owner or operator of the
affected facility shall construct the
overall vac emission reduction system
so that all volumetric flow rates and
total vac emIssions can be accurately
determined by the applicable test'
methods and procedures specified in
A 6O.446(b).
(hl The owner or operS'tor of an
affected facfJity shan construct a
temporary totld enclosure around dte
coating line..applicator SlId flasboff area
duril18 the performaftce test for ttre
purpose of capturing fugiti~ VOC
emissions. If a permanent total
enclosure e,ast! in the affected facility
prior to the perfonnance test and rtJe
Administrator is satisfied that the
encloaure is totally capturing fugitive
VOC emissions. then m additional total
enclosure win be retlUired for the
performance test. .
(iii) For each affected facility where
the value of R is greater than or equal to
the value of R.a calculated in t 6O.443(b),
compliance with A 6O.442(a)(2) is
demonstrated.

(Sec. 114, Clean Air Act a8 amended (42
U.S.C.7414))
(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under control number 2060-00(4)

t 60.445 Monttorlng 0' operations and
recordkeeplng.
(a) The owner or operator of an
affected facility subject to this subpart
shall maintain a calendar month record
of all coatings used and the results of
the reference test method specified in
ti 60.446(&) or the manufacturer's
formulation data 'used for determining
the VQC content of those coatings.
(b) The owner or operator of an
affected facility controlled by a solvent
recovery device shall maintain a
calendar month record of the amount of
solvent applied in the coating at each
affected facility.
(c) The owner or operator of an
affected facility controlled by a solvent
.100
recovery device shall install, calibrate.
maintain, and operate a monitoring
device for indicating the cumulative
amount of solvent recovered by the
device over a calendar month period.
The monitoring device shall be accurate
within :!::2.0 percent. The owner or
operator shall maintain a calendar
month record of the amount of solvent
recovered by the device.
(d) The owner or operator of an
affected facility operating at the
conditions specified in 160.440(b) shall
maintain a 12 month record of the
amount of solvent applied in the coating
at the facility.
(e) The owner or operator of an
affected facility controlled by a thermal
incineration solvent destruction device
shall install, calibrate, maintain. and
operate a monitoring device which
continuously indicates and records the
temperature of the solvent destruction
device's exhaust gases. The monitoring
device shall have an accuracy of the
greater of :!::O.75 percent of the

temperature being measured expressed
in degrees Celsius or :!::2.5° C.
(f) The DWIler or operator of an
affected facility contratJed by a cat8'~1ic
incineration sotvent destructWn devtce
shall mataR, calibrB'fe, maintaia. and
opera~ a monitoring device wtricf»
continumrsly indk:ates and reaJros the
gas teRipera1ure both upstream and
dawnstream of the catalyst bed.
(g) The owner or operator of an
affected facility controlled by a wivent
destruction device which uses a hood or
enclosure to capture fugitive vac
emissions shall install, calibrate,
maintain, and operate a monitoring
device which continously indicates that
the hood or enclosure is operating. No
continuous monitor shall be required if
the owner or operator can demonstrate
that the hood or enclosure system is
interlocked with the affected facility's
oven recirculation air system.
(h) Records of the measurements
required in A A 60.443 and 60.445 must be
retained for at least two years following
the date of the measurements.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))
(Approved by the Office of Mansgement snd
Budget under control number~)

f 60.446 Test methods and procedures.

(a) The vac content per unit of
coating solids applied and compliance
with i 6O.422(a)(1) shall be determined
by either Reference Method 24 and the
equations specified in i 60.443 or by
manufacturers' formulation data. In the
event of any inconsistency between a
Method 24 test and manufacturers
formulation data, the Method 24 test will
govern. The Administrator may require
111-119
an owner or operator 10 perform M"ethod
24 tests during'such months as he deems
appropriate. For Reference Method 24.
the coating sample must be a one liter
sample taken into a one liter container
at a point where the sample will be
representative of the coating applied to
the web substrate.
(b) Reference Method 25 shall be used
to determine the vac concentration. in
parts per million by volume. of each
effluent gas stream entering and exiting
the solvent destruction device or its
equivalent, and each effluent.gas stream
emitted directly to the atmosphere.
Reference Methods 1, 2. 3, and 4 shall be
used to determine the sampling location.
volumetric flowrate, molecular weight,
and moisture of all sampled gas streams.
For Reference Method 25. the sampling
time for each of three runs must be at
leasl1 hour. The minimum sampling
volume must be 0.003 dscm except that
shorter sampling times or smaller
volumes. whp.n necessitated by process
variables or other factors, may be
approved by the Administrator.
(c) If the owner or operator can
demonstrate to the Administrator's
satisfaction that testing of
representative stacks yields results
comparable to those that would be
obtained by testing all stacks, the
Administrator will approve testing of
representative stacks on a case-by-case
basis.

(Sec. 114, Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))

t 60.447 Reporting requirements.
(a) For all affected facilities subject to
"compliance with t 60.442, the
performance test data and results from
the performance test shall be submitted
to the Administrator as specified in
A 6O.8(a) of the General Provisions (40
CFR Part 60 Subpart A).
(b) The owner or operator of each
affected facility shall submit semiannual
reports to the Administrator of
exceedances of the following.
(1) The vac emission limits specified
in ~ 60.442; and
(2) The incinerator temperature drops
as defined under A 6O.443(e). The reports
required under paragraph (b) shall be
postmarked within 30 dayo following the
end of the second and fourth calendar
quarters.
(c) The requirements of this
subsection remain in force until and
unless EPA. in delegating enforcement
authority to a State under Section 111(c)
of the Act. approves reporting
requirements or an alternative means of
compliance surveillance sdopted by
such States. In that event, affected
sources within the State will be relieved
-------
of the obligation to comply with this
subsection. provided that they comply
with the requirements established by the
State.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act as amended (42
V.S.C.7414))
(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under control number 2060-00(4)
Proposed/effective
45 FR 86278, 12/30/80
Promulgated
48 FR 48368, 10/18/83 (207)
111-120
-------
Subpart SS-Standards of Performance for
Industrial Surface Coating: Large
Appliances 165
o 80.450 AppUc:8bIIIty 8nd de8lgnatlon of
."eel8d f8cIIlty.

(a) The provisions of this subpart
apply to each surface coating operation
in a large appliance surface coating line.
(b) The provisions of this subpart
apply to each affected facility identified
in paragraph (a) of this section that
commences construction. modification,
or reconstruction after December 24,
1980.

060.451 DefInitions.

(a) All terms used in this subpart not
defined below are given the meaning in
the Act or in Subpart A of this part.
"Applied coating solids" means the
coating solids that adhere to the surface
of the large appliance part being coated.
"Large appliance part" means any
organic surface-coated metal lid, door,
casing, panel, or other interior or
exterior metal part or accessory that is
assembled to form a large appliance
product. Parts subject to in-use
temperatures in excess of 250° F are not
included in this definition.
"Large appliance product" means any
organic surface-coated metal range.
oven. microwave oven. refrigerator.
freezer. washer. dryer. dishwasher,
water heater. or trash compactor
manufactured for household.
commercial. or recreational use.
"'Large appliance surface coating line"
means that portion of a large appliance
assembly plant engaged in the
application and curing of organic
surface coatings on large appliance
parts or products.
"Coating application station" means
that portion of the large appliance
surface coating operation where a prime
coat or a top coat is applied to large
appliance parts or products (e.g.. dip
tank, spray booth, or flow coating unit).
"Curing oven" means a device that
uses heat to dry or cure the coating(s)
applied to large appliance parts or
products.
"Electrodeposition" (EDP) means a
method of coating application in which
the large appliance part or product is
submerged in a tank filled with coating
material suspended in water and an
electrical potential is used to enhance
deposition of the material on the part or
product.
"Flashoff area" means the portion of a
surface coating line between the coating
application station and the curing oven.
"Organic coating" means any coating
used in a surface coating operation,
including dilution solvents, from which
VOC emissions occur during the
application or the curing process. For
the purpose of this regulation, powder
coatings are not included in this
definition.
"Powder coating" means any surface
coating that is applied as a dry powder
and is fused into a continuous coating
film through the use of heat.
"Spray booth" means the structure
housing automatic or manual spray
application equipment where a coating
is applied to large appliance parts or
products.
"Surface coating operation" means
the system on a large appliance surface
coating line used to apply and dry or
cure an organic coating on the surface of
large appliance parts or products. The
surface coating operation may be a
prime coat or a topcoat operation and
includes the coating application
station[s), flash off area, and curing
oven.
"Transfer efficiency" means the ratio
of the amount of coating solids
deposited onto the surface of a large
appliance part or product to the total
amount of coating solids used.
"VOC content" means the proportion
of a coating that is volatile organic
componds (VOC's), expressed as
kilograms of VOC's per liter of coating
solids.
"VOC emissions" means the mass of
volatile organic compounds (VOC's).
expressed as kilograms of VOC's per
liter of applied coating solids, emitted
from a surface coating operation.
(b) All symbols used in this subpart
not defined below are given the meaning
in the Act or Subpart A of this part.

C. = the concentration of VOC's in a gas
stream leaving a control device and
entering the atmosphere (parts per
million by volume. as carbon).
Ct. = the concentration of VOC's i.n a gas
streHm entering a control device (parto
per million by volume. as carbon).
C, = the concentration of VOC's in a gas
stream emitted directly to the
atmosphere [parts per million by volume.
as carbon).
0, = density of coating (or input stream). as
received (kilograms per liter).
D. = density of a VOC-solvent added to
coatings (kilograms per liter).
Dr = density of a VOC-solvent recovered by
an emission control device (kilograms'
per literJ.
E = the VOC destructiun efficiency of a
control device (fraction).
F = the proportion of total VOC's emitted by
an affected facility that enters a control
de\'ice (fraction).
G = the volume-weighted average mass of
VOC's in coatings consumed in a
calendar month per unit volume of
111-121
,applied coating solids.{kilograms per
liter).
1..= the volume of coating consumed, as
received (liters).
L" "" the volume of VOC-80lvent added to
coatings (liters).
L. = the volume of VOC-eolvent recovered by
an emission control device (liten).
r. = the volume of coating solids consqpted
(liters).
M.. = the mass of VOC-solvent added to
coatings (kilOgrams).
M.. = the mass of VOC's in .:.oatings
consumed, as received (kilogral"s).
Mr = the mass of VOC's recovered by an
emission control device (kilograms).
N = the volume-weighted average mass of
VOC's emitted to the atmosphere per
unit volume of applied coating solids
(kilograms per liter).
Q. = the. volumetric flow rate of a gas stream
leaving a control device and entering the
atmosphere (dry standard cubic meters
per hour)..
~ = the volumetric flow rate of a gas stream
entering a control device (dry standard
cubic meters per hour).
Q,= the volumetric flow rate of 8 SHS stream
emitted directly to the atmosphere (dry
standard cubic meters per hour).
R = the overall VOC emission reduction
acliieved for an affected facility
(fraction).
T = the transfer efficiency (fraction).
V. = the proportion of solids in a coa ting (or
input stream). as received (fraction by
volume).
W.= the proportion of VOC's in 8 coating (or
input stream). as received (fraction by
weight).

fi 60.452 Standard for volatile organIc
compounds.

On or after the date on which the
performance test required by I 60.8 is
completed, no owner or operator of an
affected facility subject to the provisions
of this supbart shall discharge or cause
the discharge of VOC emissions that
exceed 0.90 kilogram of VOC's per liter
of applied coating solids from any
surface coating operation on a large
appliance surface coating line.

fi 80.453 Performance test and compliance
provisions.

(a) Sections 60.8 (d) and (f) do not
apply to the performance test
procedures required by this subpart.
(b) The owner or Qperator of an
affected facility shall conduct an initial
performance text as required under
~ 6O.8(a) and thereafter a performance
test each calendar month for each
affected facility according to the
procedures in this paragraph.
(1) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedures for any affected
facility that does not use In capture
system and control.device to comply
with the emissions limit specified under
160.452. The owner or operator shall
determine the composition of th2
-------
coatings by formulation data supplied
by the coating manufacturer or by
analysis of each coating. as received.
using Referenc'e Method 24. The
Administrator may require the owner or
operator who uses formulation data
supplied by the coating manufacturer to
determine the VOC content of coatings
using Reference Method 24. The owner
or operator shall determine the volume
of coating and the mass of VOC-solvent
used for thinning purposes from
company records on a monthly basis. If
s common coating distribution system
serves more than one affected facility or
serves both affected and existing
facilities, the owner or operator shall
estimate the volume of coatings used at
each facility. by using the average dry
weight of coating and the surface area
coated by each affected and existing
facility or by other procedures
acceptable to the Administrator.
(i) Except as provided in
subparagraph b(l}(iv) of this section. the
weighted average of the total mass of
VOC's consumed per unit volume of
coating solids applied each calendar
month will be determined as follows.
(A) Calculate the mass of VOC's
consumed (M.. + Md) during the
calendar month for each affected facility
by the following equation:
M.. + Md = i 1..:.0.. W Ot + f 1."11,0..,.
j...1 j="t
(1)
(IL.s J Dd J will be 0 if no VOC-solvent is
added to the coatings. as receive~)

where
n Is the number of different coatings used
during the calendar month. and
m is the number of different VOC-solvents
added to coatings during the calendar
month.
(B) Calculate the total volume of
coatings solids used (L.) in the calendar
month for each affected facility by the
following equation:
L,.=iL..v... (2)
j"""
where
n is the Dumber of different coatings used
during the calendar month.

(q Select the appropriate transfer
efficiency from Table 1. If the owner or
operator can demonstrate to the
satisfaction orthe Administrator that
transfer efficiencies other than those
shown are appropriate. the
Administrator will approve their use on
a case-by-case basis. Transfer
efficiencies for application methods not
listed shall be determined by the
Administrator on a case-by-case basis.
An owner or operator must submit
sufficient data for the Administrator to
. judge the accuracy of the transfer
efficiency claims.

TABLE 1.- TRANSFER EFFICIENCIES
AppllcallOn method
Transfer
efflCoency
(1.J
"'.'-_. ---_..-- -. -_. -----_._---
l\II.alomlZoo spray...... .. ..... . .............,...............
- spray..................... ..... . ..................................
Manual eJectrostabc spray.". ..".",.................-,
Flow coal..................... ..
0Ip coat...... ........ ..........."""'''''' ... ....... ..........................
Nonrota11ona1 automatIC etectrostat,c spray.............
Roteting heed automatic efec1rostat,c spray...........
EieC1rodepos>tJQn............ ......... ....... ............ ......... .........
.---------- - _.
..__...n___.-1- ...-
Where more than one application
method is used within a single surface
coaling operation, the owner or operator
shall determine the composition and
volume of each coating applied by each
method through a means IJcceptable to
the Administmtor and compute the
weighted average tmnsfer efficiency by
the following equation:
n m
L I L,,,V,,,Tb
T=' ,,, 1
L,.
(3)
where
n is the number of coatings (or input streamsl
used. and
m is the number of application methods used.

(D) Calculate the volume-weighted
average mass of VOC's consumed per
unit volume of coating solids applied (G)
during the calendar month for each
affected facility by the following
equation:
G= Mo+M...
L,.T
14)
(Ii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of VOC emissions to the
atmosphere (N) during the calendar
month for each affected facility by the
following equation:

N=G.
(5)
(iii) Where the volume-weighted
average mass of VOC's discharged to
the atmosphere per unit volume of
coating solids applied IN) is equal to or
less than 0.90 kilogram per litp-r. the
affected facility is in complilJnce.
(iv) If each individual coating used by
an affected facility has a VOC content.
as received. which when divided by the
lowest transfer efficiency at which the
coating is applied. results in a value
equal to or less than 0.90 kilogram per
liter. the affected facility is in
111-122
0.40
0.45
060
085
0.85
0.85
0.90
0.95
compliance. provided no VOC's are
added to the coating during distribution
or application.
(2) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedures for imy affected
facility that uses a capture system and a
control device that destroys VOC's (e.g..
incinerator) to comply with the emission
limit specified under A 60.452.
Ii) Determine the overall reduction
efficiency IR) for the capture system and
control dl'vice. For the initilJl
performance test the overall reduction
efficiency (R) shall be determined as
prescribed in A. B. and C below. In
subsequent months. the owner or
operator may use the most recently
determined overall reduction efficienr.y
(R) for the performance test. providing
control device and capture system
operating conditions have not changed.
The procedure in A. B. and C. below.
shall be repeated when directed by the
Administrator or when the owner or
operator elects to operate the control
device or capture system at conditions
different from the initial performance
test.
(A) Determine the fraction (F) of total
VOe's emitted by an affedf'd fi.lcility
that enters the control device using the
following equation:
i C",Q..
.,'= ; 1

i c..,Q.,+ t C"Q.. .
I=-I ~ 1
/6)
Where
n is the number of gas streams entering the
control device
p 18 the number of 8118 streams emitted
directly to the atmosphere.

(B) Detennine the destruction
efficiency of the control device (E) using
values of the volumetric flow rate of
each of the gas streams and the VOC
content (as carbon) of each of the gas
streams in and out of the device by the
following equation:
i Q.,C.,- f Q..C.,
E- i-I j 1

iQ",c...
; I
171
Where
n is the number of gas streams entering the
control device. and
m i8 the number of gas streams leaving the
control device and entering the
atmosphere.

(C) Determine overall reduction
efficiency (R) using the following
equation:
-------
R=EF.
(8)
(ii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of the total mass of vac's per
unit volume of applied coating solids IG)
during each calendar month for each
affected facility using equations 11). (2).
(3) if applicable, and (4).
liii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of vac emissions to the
atmosphere IN) during each caleOlIHr
month by the following equation:

N=G (1-R). (!II

(iv) If the volume-weighted average
mass of vac's emitted to the
atmosphere for each calendar month IN)
is equal to or less than 0.90 kilogram per
liter of applied coating solids. the
affected facility is in compliance.
(3) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedure for any affected
facility that uses a control device for
vac recovery (e.g., carbon adsorber) 10
comply with the applicable emission
limit specified under G 60.452.
(i) Calculate the total mass of VOG's
assumed IM..+M.t) and the volume.
weighted average of the total mass of
vac's per unit volume of applied
coating solids (G) during each calendar
month for each affected facility using
equations (1), (2). (3) if applicable. and
(4).
(ii) Calculate the total mass of vac's
recovered (M.) during each calendar
month using the following equation:
M.=L,.D..
11(1)
(iii) Calculate overall reduction
efficiency of the control device IR) for
each calendar month for each affl!ch!d
facility using the following equation:
R=~
Me. + ~~
Ill)
(iv) Calculate the volume-weighll!U
average mass of vac's emitted to the
atmosphere (N) for each calend
-------
incinerator catalyst bed. Where
compliance is achieved through the use
of a solvent recovery system. the owner
or operator shall maintain at the source
daily records of the amount of solvent
recovered by the system for each
. affected facility.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act a8 amended (42
V.S.C.7414»

t 60.456 Test methods and procedures.
(a) The reference methods in
Appendix A to this part. except as
provided undl:r ~ 6O.B(b). shall be used
to determine compliance with ~ 60.452
as follows:
(1) Method 24 or formulation daia
supplied by the cORting manufacturer to
determine the vae content of a coating.
In the event of dispute. Reference
Method 24 shall be the reference
method. For determining compliance
only, results of Method 24 analyses of
wllterborne coatings shall be adjus:cd
as described in Subsection 4.4 of
Method 24. Procedures to determine
vae emissions are provided in g 60.453.
(2) Metbod 25 for the measurement of
the vae concentration in the gas stream
vent.
(3) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses.
(4) Method 2 for volocity and
volumetric flow rate.
(5) Method 3 for gas analysis.
(6) Method 4 for stack gas moisture.
(b) For Method 24. the coating sample
must be a 1-liter sample taken into a 1-
liter container at a point where the
sample will be representative of the
coating material.
(c) For Method 25. the sample time for
each of three runs is to be at least 60
minutes and the minimum sample
volume is to be at least 0.003 dscm
except that shorter sampling times or
smaller volurne6. when necessitated by
process variables or other factors. may
be approved by the Administrator.
(d) The Administrator will approve
sampling of represeniative stacks on a
case-by-case bae:is if the owner or
operator can demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the Administrator that
the testing of representative stacks
would yield results comparable to those
that would be obtained by testing all
stacks.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act amended (42
V.S.C. 7414))
~
~/80
~
~. 10/27/82 (165)
111-124
-------
Subpart TT -Standard. of
Performance for Metal Coli Surface
Coating 167

t 60.480 Applicability and designation of
affected facility.
(a) The provisions of this subpart
apply to the following affected facilities
in a metal coil surface coating operation:
each prime coat operation. each finish
coat operation. and each prime and
finish coat operation combined when
the finish coat is applied wet on wet
over the prime coat and both coatings
are cured simultaneously.
(b) This subpart applies to any facility
identified in paragraph (a) of this section
that commences construction,
modification, or reconstruction after
January 5. 1981.

t 60.461 Deflnltlona.
(a) All terms used in this subpart not
defined below are given the same
meaning as in the Act or in Subpart A of
this part. ,
"Coating" means any organic material
that is applied to the surface of metal
coil.
"Coating application station" means
that portion' of the metal coil surface
coating operation where the coating is
applied to the surface of the metal coil.
Included as part of the coating
application station is the flashoff area
between the coating application station
and the curing oven.
"Curing oven" means the device that
uses heat or radiation to dry or cure the
coating applied to the metal coil.
"Finish coat operation" means the
coating application station. curing oven.
and quench station used to apply and
dry or cure the final coating(s) on the
surface of the metal coil. Where only a
single coating is applied to the metal
coil. that coating is considered a finish
coa t.
"Metal coil surface coating operation"
means the application system used to
apply an organic coating to the surface
of any continuous metal strip with
thickness of 0.15 millimeter (mm) (0.006
in.) or more that is packaged in a roll or
coil.
"Prime coat operation" means the
coating application station. curing oven.
and quench station used to apply and
dry or cure the Initial coating(s) on the
Burface of the metal coil.
"Quench station" means that portion
of the metal coil Burface coating
operation where the coated metal coil is
cooled. usually by a water spray. after
baking or curing.
"vac content" means the quantity. in
kilograms per liter of coating solids, of
volatile orsanic compoundo (VOCs) In 8
coating.
(b) All symbols used In this subpart
not defined below are given the same
meaning as in the Act and in Subpart A
of this part.

C.= the VOC concentration in each gaa
stream leavina the control device and
enterlna the atmosphere (parta per
million by volume. a8 carbon).
c,,= the VOC concentration on each ga8
stream enterlna the control device (parts
per million by volume. a8 carbon).
c,= the VOC concentration in each ga8
steam emitted directly to the atmosphere
(parts per million by volume. as carbon).
Dc= density of each coatina, as received
(kilograms per liter).
Dd= density of each.VOC-solvent added to
coatinas (kilograms per liter).
Dr='density ofVOC-solvent recovered by an
emission control device (kilograms per
Ii ter).
E= VOC destruction efficiency of the control
device (fraction).
F= the proportion of total VOC's emitted by
an affected facility that enters the control
device (fraction).
G= volume-weighted average mass of VOC'8
In coatinas consumed in a calendar,
month per unit volume of coatina solids
applied (kilogram8 per liter).
L.:= the volume of each coating consumed. as
received (liters).
Los= the volume of each VOC-solvent added
to coatlnas (liters).
L,= the volume ofVOC-solvent recovered by
an emission control device (liters).
L" = the volume of coatlna solids consumed
(liters).
M.,= the maS8 ofVOC-solvent added to
coatinas (kilograms).
Mo.= the mass of VOC'sln coatinas
consumed. as received (kilograms).
M, = the mass of VOC's recovered by an
emission control device (kilograms).
N = the volume.weighted average mass of
VQC emissions to the atmosphere per
unit volume of coatina solids applied
(kilograms per liter).
Q.= the volumetric flow rate of each gas
stresm leavina the control device and
entering the atmosphere (dry standard
cubic meters per hour).
Qb = the volumetric flow rate of each gas
stream enterina the control device (dry
stsndard cubic meters per hour).
Q,= the volumetric flow rate of each gas
steam emitted directly to the atmosphere
(dry standard cubic meters per hour).
R = the overall VOC emission reduction
achieved for an affected facility
(fraction).
s= the calculated monthly allowable
emission limit (kilogram. of VOC per
liter of coating solids applied).
V.= the proportion of solids In each coaling.
as received (fraction by volume).
W 0 = the proportion of VOC's in each
coating, as received (fraction by weight)

t 80.462 Standard. for volatile organic
compouncIa.

(a) On and after the date on which
111-125
1 60.8 requires. performance test to be
completed. each owner or operator
subject to this subpart shall not cause to
be discharged Into the atmosphere more
than:
(1) 0.28 kilogram vac per liter (kg
VaC!1) of coating solids applied for
each calendar month for each affected
facility that does not use an em:::slon
control device(s); or
(2) 0.14 kg VaC!} of coating solids
applied for each calendar month for
each affected facility that continuously
uses an emission control device(s)
operated at the most recently
demonstrated overall efficiency; or
(3) 10 percent of the vac's applied for
each calendar month (90 percent
emission reduction) for each affected
facility that continuously uses an
emission control device(s) operated at
the most recently demonstrated overall
efficiency; or -
(4) a value between 0.14 (or a 90-
percent emlsalon reduction~ and 0.28 kg
VaC!1 of coating solids applied for each
calendar month for each affected facility
that intermittently uses an emission
control device operated at the most
recently demonstrated overall
efficiency.

t 60.463 Performance teet and compflance
provisions.
(a) Sections 60.8 (d) and (f) do not
apply to the performance test.
(b) The owner or operator of an
affected facility shall conduct an initial
performance test as required under
160.8(a) and thereafter a performance
test for each calendar month for each
affected facility according to the
procedures in this section.
(c) The owner or operator shall use
the following procedures for determining
monthly volume-weighted average
emissions of VaC'a in kg!} of coa ting
solids applied.
(1) An owner or operator shall uae the
following procedures for each affected
facility that does nol use a capture
system and control device to comply
with the emission limit specified under
160.462(a)(1). The owner or operator
ahall determine 1he composition of the
coatings by formulation data supplied
by the manufacturer of the coating or by
an analysis of each coating. 8S received.
using Reference Method 24. The
Administrator may require the CWner or
operator who uses formulation data
supplied by the manufacturer of the
coatings to determine the vac content
of coatings using Reference Method 24
or an equivalent or alternative method.
The owner or operator shall determine
the volume of coating and the mass of
-------
vaC-solvent added to coatings from
company records on 8 monthly basis. If
a common coating distribution system
serves more than one affected facility or
serves both affected and existing
facilities, the owner or operator shaH
estimate the volume of coating used at
each affected facility by using the
average dry weight of coating and the
surface area coated by each affected
and existing facility or by other
procedures acceptable 10 the.
Administrator.
(i) Calculate the vclume-weighted
average of the total mass of vac's
consumed per unit volume of coating
solids applied during each calendar
month for each affected facility, except
as provided under i 6O.463(c)(1)(iv). The
weighted ave.age of the total mass of
vac's used per unit volume of coating
solids applied each calendar month is
determined by the following procedures.
(A) Calculate the mass of vac's used
(Mo+Md) during each calendar month
for each affected facili!y by the
following equation:
M. + M. = t L..D" W., ~ f L..,I)",
1",1 i.-I
(I.L.uDdJ will be 0 if no vac solvent is
added to the coatings. as received)
....here
n is the number of different coatings used
during the c!llendar month. and
m is the number of different \'OC solvents
added to coatings used during the
c!llendar month.

(B) Calculate the total volume of
coating solids used (L.) in each calendar
month for lIach affected facility by the
following equation:
ft
L.= I. V..I.....
, 1
where
n is the number of different coatings
used during the calendar month.
(C) Calculate the volume.weighted
average mass of vac's used per unit
vol ume of coating solids applied (G)
during the calendar month for each
affected facility by the following
equation:
M..+M..
G=-
L.
(ii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of VOC emissions to the
atmosphere (N] during the calendar
month for each affected facility by the
following equation:
N=G

(iii) Where the volume-weighted
average mass of vac's discharged to
the atmosphere per unit volume of
coating solids applied (N) is equal to or
less than 0.28 kg/ J, the affected facility
is in compliance.
(iv) If each indi\'idual coating used by
an affected facility has a vac content,
as received. that is equal to or less than
0.28 kg/ J of coating solids. the affected
facility is in compliance provided no
vac's are added to the coatings during
dislIibution or application.
(2) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedures for each affected
facility that continuousl)' uses 8 capture
system and a control device that
destroys vac's (e.g., incinerator) to
comply with the emission limit specified
under i 6O.462(a) (2) or (3).
(i) Determine the overall reuuction
efficiency (R) fot the capture system and
control device.

For the initial performance test. the
overall reduction efficiency (R) shall be
determined as prescribed in paragraphs
(c)(2)(i) (1\), (B), and (C) of this section.
In subsequent months, the owner or
operator may use the most recently
determined overall reduction efficiency
(R) for the perfonnance test. providing
control device and capture system
operating conditions ha\'e not changed.
The procedure in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)
(A), (B), and (C) of this section. shall be
repeated when directed by the
Administrator or when the owner or
operator eJects to operate the control
device or capture system at conditions
different from the initial perfonnance
test.
(A) Determine the fraction (F) of totill
vac's emitted by an affected facility
that enters the control device using the
following equation:
F
I
r c..Q..
1""1
f c",Qb. + t c,.Q,.
j"'1 1-"1
where

I is the numtJer of gas streams entering the
control d"vice, and
p is the nllmber of gas streams emitted
directly to the atmosphere.

(B) Detennine the destruction
efficiency of the control device (E) using
values of the volumetric flow rate of
each of the gas streams and the vac
content (as carbon) of each of the gas
streams in and out of the device by the
following equation:
111-126
t Qb,Cbt - f Q..Coj
E= ," 1~1

t QbiCbl
i:::'1
when:.
n is the number of gas streams entering the
control device, and
m is t!-le number of (las streams leaving the
control de\'ice and entering the
atmosphere.

The owner or operator of the affected
facility shall construct the vac
emission reduclion system so that all
volumetric flow rates and total vac
emissions can be accurately det~rmjned
by the applicable test methods and
procedures specified in i 00.466. The
owner or operator of the affected facili!v
shall construct a temporary enclosure'
around the coating appJicator and
flash off area during the performanr.(: test
for the purpose of evaluating the capture
efficiency of the system. The enclosure
must be maintained at a negath'e
pressure to ensure that all vac
emissions are measurable. If a
permanent enclosure exists in the
affected facility prior to the performance
test and the Administrator is satisfied
thaI the enclosure is adequately
containing vac emissions, no
additional enclosure is required for the
performance test.
(C) Detennine overall reduction
efficiency (R) using the following
equation:

R=EF
If the overall reduction efficiency (R) is
equal to or greater than 0.90. the
affected facility is in compliance and no
further computations are necessary. If
the overall reduction efficiency (R) is
less than 0.90, the average total vac
emissions to the atmosphere per unit
volume of coating solids applied (I")
shall be computed as follows.
(ii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of the total mass of vac's per
unit volume of coating solids applied IG I
during each calendar month for each
affected facility using equations in
paragraphs (c)(l)(i) (A), (8), and (C) of
this section.
(iii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of VOC emissions to the
atmosphere (N) during each calendar
month by the following equation:
N=G (l-R)

(iv) If the volume-weighted 8verase
mass of VOCe emitted to the
atmosphere for each calendar month (N)
is less than or equal to 0.14 ks/I of
-------
coating solids applied, the affected
facility is in compliance. Each monthly
calculation is a performance test.
(3) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedure for each affected
facility that uses a control device that
recovers the VOC's (e.g., carbon
adsorber) to comply with the applicable
emission limit specified under:
G 6O.462(a) (2) or (3).
(i) Calculate the total mass of VOC's
consumed (M..+M.t) during each
calendar month for each affected facility
using equation (1).
(ii) Calculate the total mass of VOC's
recovered (M.) during each calendar
month using the following'equation:

M,=L.D,

(iii) Calculate the overall reduction
efficiency of the control device (R) for
each calendar month.for each affected
facility using the following equation:
R=.. M.
M..+M.I

If the overall reduction efficiency (R) is
equal to or greater than 0.90, the
affected facility is in compliance and no
further computation are necessary. If the
overall reduction efficiency (R) is less
than 0.90, the average total VOC
emissions to the abnosphere per unit
volume of coating solids applied (N)
must be computed as follows.
(Iv) Calculate the total volume of
coating solids consumed (1..) and the
volume-weighted average of the total
mass of VOC's per unit volume of
coating solids applied (G) during each
calendar month for each affected facility
using equations in paragraphs (c)(l)(i)
(8) and (C) of this section.
(v) Calculate the volume-weighted
average mass of VOC's emitted to the
atmosphere (N) for each calendar month
for each affected facility using equation
(8).

(vi) If the weighted average mass of
VOC's emitted to the atmosphere for
each calendar month (N) Is less Utan or
equal to 0.14 kg/Tof coating solidk
applied. the affected facility is in
compliance. Each monthly calculation is
a performance tesl
(4) An owner or operator shall use the
follo~ing procedures for each affected
facility that intermittently uses a capture
system and a control device to comply
with the emission limit specified in
I 6O.462(a)(4).
(i) Calculate the total volume of
coating solida applied without the
control device in operation (I.J during
each calendar month for each affected
facility usins the foUowinB eqcation:
L..= t VoIL..
,~,
where

n is the number of coatil18s used during the
calendar month without the control
de,,'ice in operation.

(ii) Calculate the total volume of
coating solids applied with the control
device in operation (L.c) during each
calendar month for each affected facility
using the following equation:
I.c= f Val..
1-.
where

m is the number of coatil188 used duril18 the
calendar month with the control device
in operation.
(Iii) Calculate the mass of VOC's used
without the control device in operation
(Mo" + M.t..) during each calendar month
for each affected facility usins the
following equation:
M...+M.= t t...DdW.+ f L.tiD.u
t.:'. I-I
where
n is the number of different coatings uaed
without the control device in operation
durinB the calendar month, and
m is the number of different VC>C-80lvents
added to coatingt used without the
control device In operation duril18 the
calendar month.

(Iv) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of the total 10888 of VOC's
consumed per unit volume of coating
solids applied without the control device
in operation (G,,) during each calendar
month for each affected facility using
the following equation:
G M-+M...
. L..
(v) Calculate the mass of VOC's used
with the control device in operation
(Mo.+M.tc) during each calendar month
for each affected facility using the
following equation:
Mo<+M...:= t L..DdW01+ f L.vD.u
iel '<::<1.
111-127
where

n 18 the number uf dilferent coatinp used
with the control device ID operatioD
durins the calendar mODth. and
m is the number of differeDt VOC-solvents
added to coatil188 used with the control
device in operation duril18 the calendar
month.

(vi) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of the total mass of VOC's used
per unit volume of coating solids applied
with the control de\'ice in operation (Ge)
during each calendar month for each
affected faciUt)' using the following
equation:
G.
M..+M.
I.c
(vii) Determine the overaU reduction
efficiency (R) for the capture system and
control device using the procedures in
t 6O.463(c)(2)(i~ (~~, (8). a~~ (C) or 176
A 6O.463(c)(3) (I), (II). and (III), whichever is
applicable.
(viii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of VOC emissions to the
atmosphere (N) during each calendar
month for each affected facility using
the following equation:
N = _Gn ~ of G. L"" ~~.::_"~I
1_..+1....
lix) Calculate the emission limit[s) for
each calendar month for eilch affected
fHcility using the following equation:
S:. ~:::81~.+O.1 G,.L.,. or .~~ L~+_O:.l!.I...
L,n ....... LS( l...n ;, I....
176
whichever is greater.

Ix) If the volume-weighted !lVcrHgt~
mass of \'OC's emitted to the
Htmos!,h,!re for each calendar month (N)
is less than or equal to the calculHlp.d
emission limit (5) for the calendHr
month. the affected fdcilil" is in
comp!idp.ce. Each monlhl~; c;alculalioJ1 is
a performance test.
!i 60.464 Monitoring of emissions and
operations.

(iJ) Where compliHnce with the
numerical limit specified in ~ 6O.462(H)
(1) or (2) is achieved throu~h the use of
low VOC-content coatings withoulthe
use of emission control devices or
-------
through the use of higher VaC-content
coatings in conjunction with emission
control devices. the owner or operdtor
shall compute and record the iJverage
vac content of coatings applied during
pach cIJlendar month for each affected
facility. 
numerical limit spp.cifjpd in Ii 60.462(<1)
11. (2). or (4) is achieved through the use
of low VaC-content coatings without
emission control devices or throul:!h the
use of higher VaC-content coatings in
conjunction with emission control
devices. each owner or operator subject
10 the provi~iO!ls of this subpart shall
include in the initial cOlnpliance report
reqUIred by ~ 60.8 the weighted averplied
to the surface of the metal coil.
(c) For Method 25. the sampling time
is to be at least 60 minutes. and the
minimum sample volume is to be at least
0.003 dry standard cubic meter (DSCM):
however. Bhorter sampling times or
smaller volumes. when necessitated by
process variables or other factors. may
be approved by the Administrator.
(d) The Administrator will approve
testing of representative stacks on a
case-by-case basis if the owner or
operator can demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the Administrator that
testing of representative stacks yields
results comparable to those that would
be obtained by t~sting all stacks.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
V.S.C. 7414))
~~S~~6~~f~~~~~~

~
47 rR496OD. 11/1/82 (167)
Revised
48 FR 1056. 1/10/83 (176)
-------
Subpart Uu-st8ndard8 of
Performance for A8ph8n Pr~
and A8phalt Roofing Ilanuf8eture1

t 80.470 Apptlcabtllty end designation of
affected f8cIIltIes.
(a) The affected facilities to which thia
8Ubpart applies are each saturator and
each mineral handling and storage
facility at asphalt roofmg plants: and
each asphalt storage tank and each
blowing still at asphalt processing
plants. petroleum refmeries, and asphalt
roofing plants.
(b) Any saturator or mineral handling
and storage facility under paragraph (a)
of this section that commences
construction or modification after
November 18. 1980, Is subject to the
requirements of this subpart. Any
asphalt storage tank or blowing still that
processes and/or stores asphalt used for
roofing only or for roofing and other
purposes, and that commences
construction or modification after
November 18. 1980, is subject to the
requirements of this subpart.
Any asphalt storage tank or blowing
still that processes and/or stores only
nonroofing asphalts and that
commences construction or modification
after May 26, 1981, Is subject to the
requirements of this subpart.

080.471 DeflnItIon8.
As used in this subpart. all terms not
defmed herein shall have the meaning
given them in the Act and in Subpart A
of this part.
"Afterburner (A/D)" means an
exhaust gas incinerator used to control
emissions of particulate matter.
"Asphalt processing" means the
storage and blowing of asphalt.
"Asphalt processing plant" means EI
plant which blows asphalt for use in the
manufacture of asphalt products.
"Asphalt roofing plant" means a plani
which produces asphalt roofing products
(shingles. roll roofing. siding. or
8aturated felt).
"Asphalt storage tank" means any
tank used to store asphalt at asphalt
roofing plants. petroleum refineries. and
asphalt proce8Sing plants. Storage tank!!
containi.Ds cutback aaphalta (asphaltfJ
diluted with solvants to reduce viscosity
for lew temperature applications) and
emuloified asphalts (asphalts dispersed
in water with an emulsifying agent) are
not subject to thill regulation.
"Blowing still" means the equipment
in which ak III blown through asphalt
flux to change the softening point and
iXJDetration rate.
"Catalyst" maans means a substance
which. when added to alphalt Dux in a
blowiDs still. alters the penetrating-
softenins point relatiODllhip or increases
the rate of oxidation of the Dux.
"Coating blow" meana the process In
which air Is blown through hot asphalt
Dux to produce coating asphalt. The
coating blow starts when the air is
turned OD and stops when the air is
turned off.
"Electrostatic precipitator (ESP)"
means an air pollution control device in
which solid or liquid particulates in a
8as stream are charged as they pass
through an electric field and precipitated
on a collection suface.
"High velocity air IDter (IN AF)"
means an air pollution control fIltration
device for the removal of sticky. oily. or
liquid aerosol particulate matter from
exhaust gas streams.
"Mineral handling and storage
facility" means the areaa in asphalt
roofing plants in which minerals are
unloaded from a carrier. the conveyor
transfer points between the carrier and
the storage silos. and the storage silos.
"Saturator" means the equipment in
which asphalt is applied to felt to make
asphalt roofing products. The term
saturator includes the saturator. wet
looper. and coater.

080.472 Standards for partlcutate matter.
(a) On and after the date on which
160.8(b) requires a performance testto
be completed. no owner or operator
subject to the provisions of this subpart
shall cause to be discharged into the
atmosphere from any saturator:
(1) Particulate matter in excess of: (i)
0.04 kilograms of particulate per
megagram of asphalt shingle or mineral-
surfaced roll roofing produced. or (ii) 0.4
kilograma per megagram of saturated
felt or smooth-surfaced roll roofing
produced;
(2) Exhaust gases with opacity greater
than ZO percent; and
(3) Any visible emissions from a
saturator capture system for more than
ZO percent of any period of consecutive
valid observations totaling 60 minutes.
Saturators that were constructed before
November 18, 1980. and that have not
been reconstructed since that date and
that become subject to these standards
through modification are exempt from
the visible emissions standard.
SaturatOf8 that have been newly
constructed or reconstructed since
November 18. 1980 are subject to the
visible emissions standard.
(b) On and after the date on which
I 6O.8(b) requires a performance test to
be completed. no owner or operator
subject to the provisions of this subpari
shall cau8e to be discharged into the
atm08phere from any blowing still:
(1) Particulate matter in excess of 0.67
kilograms of particulate per megagram
of asphalt charged to the still when a
111-129
catalyst i8 added to the still; and
(2) Particulate matter in excess of 0.71
kilograms of particulate per megagram
of asphalt charged to the still when a
catalyst Is added to the still and when
No.6 fuel oil ia fired in the afterburner:
and
(3) Particulate matter in excess- of 0.80
kilograms of particulate per megagram
of asphalt charged to the still during
blowing without a catalyst; and
(4) Particulate matter in excess of 0.64
kilograms of particulate per megagram
of asphalt charged to tha still during
blowing without a catalyst and when
No.6 fuel oil i8 fired in the afterburner;
and
(5) Exhaust gases with an opacity
greater than 0 percent unless an opacity
limit for the blowing still when fuel oil is
used to fire the afterburner has been
established by the Administrator in
accordance with the procedures in
160.474(k).
(~J Within 60 days after achieving the
maximum production rate at which the
affected facility will be operated. but
not later than 180 days after initial
startup of such facility. no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall cause to be discharged
into the atmosphere from any asphalt
storage tank exhaust gases with opacity
greater than 0 percent. except for one
consecutive 1S-minute period in any 24-
hour period when the transfer lines are
being blown for clearing. The control
device shall not be bypassed during this
1S-minute period. If. however. the
emissions from any asphah storage
tank(s) are ducted to 8 control device for
a saturator. the combined emissions
shall meet the emission limit contained
In paragraph (a) of this section during
the time the saturator control device is
operating. At any other time the asphalt
storage tank(s) must meet ilie opacity
limit specified above for storage tanks.
(d) Within 60 days after achieving the
maximum production rate at which the
affected facUity will be operated. but
not later than 180 days after initial
startup of Guch facility. no owner or
operator subject to the provillions of this
subpart ahall cause to be ooscharged
into the atmosphere from any mineral
handling and storage facilii}' emissions
with opacity greater than 1 percent.

f 60.473 Monitoring of opemtlonfJ.
(a) The owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart, and using
either an electrostatic precipitator or a
high velocity air filter to meet the
emission limit in 160.472(a)(1) and/or
(b)(l) shall continuously monitor and
record the temperature of the gas at the
inlet of the control device. The
temperature monitoring instrument shall
-------
have an accuracy of :t1S.C over its
range.
(b) The owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart and using
an afterburner to meet the emission limit
in I 6O.472(a)(1) and/or (b)(1) shall
continuously monitor and record the
temperature in the combustion zone of
the afterburner. The monitoring
instrument shall have an accuracy of
:tl0.C over its range.
(c) An owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart and using
a control device not mentioned in
puragraphs (a) and (b) of this section
shall provide to the Administrator
information describing the operation of
the control device and the process
parameter(s) which would indicate
proper operation and maintenance of
the device. The Administrator may
require continuous monitoring and will
determine the process parameters to be
monitored.
(d) The industry is exempted from the
quarterly reports required under
fi 6O.7(c). The owner/operator is
required to record and report the
operating temperature of the control
device during the performance test and.
as required by fi 6O.7(d). maintain a file
of the temperature monitoring results for
at least two years.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act as amended [42
U.S.C. 7414))

~ 80.474 l'est methods and procedures.
(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part. except as provided in
fi 6O.8(b). shall be used to determine
compliance with the standards
prescribed in fi 60.472 as follows:
(1) Method SA for the concentration of
particulate matter.
(2) Method :1 for sample and velocity
traverses;
(3) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric flow rate;
(4) Method 3 for gas analysis; and
(S) Method 9 for opacity.
(h) The Administrator will determine
compliance with the standards
pra9Cribed in 160.472(8)(3) by using
Method 22, modifted so that 1'86din8s are
recorded 8Y8l}' 15 lecoads for a period
of consecutive observations during
representative conditions (in accordance
with fi 6O.8(c) of the General Provisions)
totaling 60 minutes. A performance test
shall consist of one run.
(c) For Method SA the sampling timp.
for each run on a saturator shall be at
least 120 minutes. and the sampling
volume shall be at least 3 dsem. Method
SA shall be used to measure the
emissions from the saturator while
l06.~ks (Z35-lb) asphalt 8hingle i8 being
produced if the final product is 8hingle
or mineral-surfaced roll roofing or while
6.8-kg (15-lb) saturated felt is being
produced if the final product is
saturated felt or smooth-surfaced roll
roofing. llf the saturator produces only
fiberglass shingles, Method SA shall be
used to measure saturator emissions
while a nominallQO-kg (~lb) shingle
is being produced. Method SA shall be
used to measure emissions from the
blowing still for at least 90 minutes or
for the duration of the coating blow,
whichever is greater. If the blowing still
is not used to blow coating asphalt.
Method SA shall be used to measure
emissions from the blowing still for at
least 90 minutes or for the duration of
the blow. whichever is greater.
(d) The particulate emission rate. E.
shall be computed as follows:
E=QlldXC.
(1) E is the particulate emission rate
(kg/h);
(2) ~ is the average volumetric flow
rate (dscm/h) as determined by Method
2; and
(3) Co is the average concentration
(kg/dsem) of particulate matter as
determined by Method SA.
(e) The asphalt roofing production
rate, P (Mg/h). shall be determined by
dividing the weight in megagrarns (Mg)
of roofmg produced on the shingle or
saturated felt process lines during the
performance test by the nun:ber of hours
required to conduct the performance
test. The roofing production shall be
obtained by direct measurement.
(f) The production rate of asphalt from
the blowing still, p. (Mg/h). shall be
determined by dividing the weight of
asphalt charged to the still by the time
required for the performance test during
an asphalt blow. The weight of asphalt
charged to the still shall be determined
at the starting temperature of the blow.
The weight of asphalt shall be converted
from the volume measurement as
follows:

M=Vd/c
M =wQight of 8sphalt in lIIeSS8l'alllS
V = volume of aephalt in cubic meters
d-=denaity of asphalt ill kilosrams per cubic
IIIlt.r
c = conversion factor 1,(100 kilograms per
8888.a81

The density of asphalt at any
measured temperature is calculated by
using the following equation:
d=10S6.1-(O.6176X .C)
The method of measurement shall
have an accuracy of :t:10 percent.
(g) The saturator emission rate shall
be compuied as follows: R = E/P.
(h) The blowing still emission rate
shall be computed as follows:

R.=E/P.
111-130
where:
(1) R is the saturator emission rate
(kg/Mg);
(2) R. is blowing still emission rate
(kg/Mg);
(3) E is the particulate emission rate
(kg/h) from paragraph Ic) of this section:
(4) P is the asphalt roofing production
rate (Mg/h); and
(S) p. is the asphalt charging rate (Mg/
h).
(i) Temperature shall be measured
and continuously recorded with the
monitor required under A 60.473 (a) or
(b) during the measurement of
particulate by Method SA and reported
to the Administrator with the
performance test results.
OJ If at a later date the owner or
operator believes the emission limits in
160.472 (a) and (b) are being met even
thou&Jt the temperature measured in
accordance with A 60.473 paragraph la)
is exceeding that measured during the
performance test. he may submit a
written request to the Administrator to
repeat the performance test and
procedure outlined in paragraph (h) of
this section.
(k) 11 fuel oil is to be used to fire an
afterburner used to control a blowing
still. the owner or operator may petition
the Administrator in accordance with
A 6O.11(e) of the General Provisions to
establish an opacity standard for the
blowing still that will be the opacity
standard when fuel oil is used to fire Ihe
afterburner. To obtain this opacity
standard, the owner or operator must
request the Administrator to determine
opacity during an initial. or subsequenl.
performance test when fuel oil is used to
fire the afterburner. Upon receipt of the
results of the performance test, the
Adminstrator will make a finding
concerning compliance with the mass.
standard for the blowing still. If the
Administrator finds that the facility was
in compliance with the mass standard
during the performance test but failed 10
meet the zero opacity standard. the
Administrator will establish and
promulgate in the Federal Regi8ter an
opacity standard for the blowi11i still
that will be the opacity Itandard when
fuel oil is used to fire the afterburner.
When the afterburner is fired with
Batural &88. the zero p81'C4!nt opacity
remains the applicable opacity
8tandard.
~
~/80
46 FR 28180. 5/26/81
~
VtI<3U37. 8/6/82 (158)
-------
Subpart VV-Standard8 of
Performance for Equipment Leaks of
VOC in the Synthetic Organic 206
Chemicals Manufacturing Induatry

f 60.480 Applk:8blRty and designation of
affected f8c:1Hty.

(a)(l) The provisions of this subpart
apply to affected facilities in the
synthetic organic chemicals
manufacturing industry.
(2) The group of all equipment
(defined in i 60.481) within a process
unit is an affected facility.
(b) Any affected facility under
paragraph (a) of this section that
commences construction or modification
after January 5. 1981. shall be subject to
the requirements of this subpart.
(c) Addition or replacement of
equipment for the purpose of proces~
improvement which is accomplished
without a capital expenditure shall not
by itself be considef'ed a modification
under this subpart.

(d)(I) If an owner or operator applies
for one or more of the exemptions in this
paragraph. thl'n the owner or operator
shall maintain records as required in
o 6O.486(i).227
(2) I\ny affected facility that has the
design capacity to produce less than
1.000 Mg/yr is exempt from I 60.482.
(3) If an affected facility produces
heavy liquid chemicals only from heavy
liquid feed or raw materials. then it is
exempt from S 60.482.
(4) Any affected facility that produces
beverage alcohol is exempt from
I 60.482.
(5) Any affected facility that has no
equipment in VOC service is exempt
from I 60.482.
f 60.481 Definitions.
As used in this subpart. all terms not
defined herein shall have the meaning
given them in the Act or in Subpart A of
Part 60. and the foHowing terms shall
have the specific meanings given them.
"Capital expenditure" means. in
addition to the definition in 40 CFR 60.2.
an expenditure for a physical or
operational change to an existing facility
that:
(a) Exceeds P. the product of the
facility's replacement cost. R. and an
adjusted annual asset guideline repair
allowance. A. as reflected by the
foHowing equation: P = R X A. where
(1) The adjusted annual asset
guideline repair aHowance. A. is the
product of the percent of the
replacement cost. Y. and the applicable
basic annual asset guideline repair
allowance. B. as reflected by the
ToHowing equation: A = Y X (B ~ 1001:
(2) The percent Y is determined from
the following equation: Y=t.o-0.575
log X. where X i. tllZ !minus the year of
construction: and" 230
(3) The applicable basic annual asset
guideline repair allowance. B. is selected
from the following table consistent with
the applicable subpart: 227
TABLE FOR DETERMINING ApPUCABLE FOR B
SuIIpan applicable 10 facility
Value at B
10 be used
..~
W[[[
000[[[
GGG[[[
kKK[[[
"Closed vent system" means a system
that is not open to the atmosphere and
that is composed of piping. connections.
and. if necessary. flow inducing devices
that transport gas or vapor from a piece
or pieces of equipment to a control
device.
"Connector" means flanged. screwed.
welded. or other joined fittings used to
connect two pipe lines or a pipe line and
a piece of process equipment.
"Control device" means an enclosed
combustion device. vapor recovery
system. or flare.
"Distance piece" means an open or
enclosed casing through which the
piston rod travels. separating the
compressor cylinder from the crankcase.
"Double block and bleed system"
means two block valves connected in
series with a bleed valve or line that can
vent the line between the two block
valves. 227
"Equipment" means each pump.
compressor. pressure relief device.
sampling connection system. open-
ended valve or line. valve. and flange or
other connector in VOC service and any
devices or systems required by this
subpart.
"First attempt at repair" means to
take rapid action for the purpose of
atopping or reducing leakage of organic
material to atmosphere using best
practices.
"In gas/vapor service" means that the
piece of equipment contains process
fluid that is in the gaseous state at
operating conditions.
"In heavy liquid service" means that
the piece of equipment is not in gas/
vapor service or in light liquid service.
"In light liquid service" means that the
piece of equipment contains a liquid that
meets the conditions specified in
fi 6O.485(e).
"Liquids dripping" means any visible
leakage from tt-e seal including
spraying. misting. clouding. and ice
formation.
"Open-ended valve or line" means
:LI.I:~131
'2~
12.5
70
4.5
any valve. except safety relief valves.
having one side of the valve seat in
contact with process fluid and one side
open to the atmosphere. either directly
or through open piping.
"Pressure release" means the
emission of materials resulting from
system pressure being weater than set
pressure of the pressure relief device.
"Process improvement" means routine
changes made for safety and
occupational health requirements. for
energy savings. for better utility. for
ease of maintenance and operation. for
correction of design deficiencies. for
bottleneck removal. for changing
product requirements. or for
environmental control.
"Process unit" means components
assembled to produce. as intermediate
or final products. one or more of the
chemicals listed in I 60.489 of this part.
A process unit can operate
independently if supplied with sufficient
feed or raw materials and sufficient
storage facilities for the product.
"Process unit shutdown" means a
work practice or operational procedure
that stops production from a process
unit or part of a process unit. An
unscheduled work practice or
operational procedure that stops
production from a process unit or part of
a process unit for less than 24 hours is
not a process unit shutdown. The use of
spare equipment and technically
feasible bypassing of equipment without
stopping production are not process unit
shutdowns.
"Quarter" means a 3-month period:
the first quarter concludes on the last
day of the last full month during the 180
days following initial startup.
"Replacement cost" means the capital
needed to purchase all the depreciablp
components in a facility. 227
"Repaired" means that equipment is
adjusted. or otherwise altered. in order
to eliminate a leak as indicated by' one
of the following: Bn instrument reading
or 10.000 ppm or greater. indication of
liquids dripping. or indication by a
sensor that a seal or barrier fluid system
has failed.
"Sensor means a device that measures
a physical quantity or the change in a
physical quantity such as temperature.
pressure. flow rate. pH. or liquid level.
-------
pressure which is at least 5 kilopascals
(kPa) below ambient pressure.
"Volatile organic compounds" or VOC
means. for the purposes of this subpart.
any reactive organic compounds as
defined in fi 60.2 Definitions.
"In VOC Service" means that the
piece of equipment contains or contacts
a process fluid that is at least 10 percent
VOC by weight. (The provisions of
A 6O.485(d) specify how to determine
that a piece of equipment is not in VOC
service.)

160.482-1 Standards: General.

(a) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
demonstrate compliance with the
requirements of A 60.482-1 to fi 60.482-10
for all equipment within 180 days of
initial startup.
(h) Compliance with i\ 60.482-1 to
!} 60.482-10 will be determined by
review of records and reports. review of
performance test results. and inspection
using ilie methods and procedures
specified in Ii 60.481\.
(c)(l) An owner or operator may
reque!!t a determination of equivalence
of a means of emission limitation to the
requirements of fi 80.482-2. -3. -5. -6. -7.
~. and -10 as provided in ~ 60.484.
(2) If the Administrator makes a
determination that a mean!! of emission
limitation is at least equivalent to the
requirements of ft 60.482-2. -3. -5. -6. -7.
~. or -10. an owner or operator shall
comply with the requirements of that
determination.
(d) Equipment that is in vacuum
Qervice is excluded from the
requirement!! of A 60.482-2 to A 60.482-10
if it Is identified a8 required in
A 60.486(12)(5).227
5 80.482-2 StandardsD Pumps In light liquid
8ervice.

(a)(1) Each pump in light liquid service
shall be monitored monthly to detect
leaks by the methods specified in
160.485(b). except as provided in
A 6O.482-1(c) and paragraphs (d), (e).
and (f) of this section.
(2) Each pump in light liquid service
shall be checked by visual inspection
each calendar week for indications of
liquids dripping from the pump seal.
(b)(1) If an instrument reading of
10,000 ppm or greater is measured. a
leak is detected.
{2) If there are indications of liquids
dripping from the pump seal, a leak is
detected.
(c)(l) When a leak is detected, it shall
be repaired as soon as practicable, but
not later than 15 calendar days after it is
detected, except as provided in I 60.482-
9.
(2) A first attempt at repair shall be
made no later than 5 calendar days after
each leak is detected.
(d) Each pump equipped with a dual
mechanical seal system that includes a
barrier fluid system is exempt from the
requirements of paragraph (a), provided
the following requirements are met:
(1) Each dual mechanical seal system
is:
(i) Operated with the barrier fluid at a
pressure that is at all times greater than
the pump stuffing box pressure; or
(ii) Equipment with a barrier fluid
degassing reservoir that is connected by
a closed vent system to a control device
that complies with the requirements of
~ 60.482-10; or
(iii) Equipped with a system that
purges the barrier fluid into a process
stream with zero vac emissions to the
atmosphere. .
(2) The barrier fluid system is in
heavy liquid service or is not in VOC
service.
(3) Each barrier fluid system is
'uipped with a Bensor that will detect
:ure of the seal system. the barrier
.Iuid system. or both.
(4) Each pump is checked by visual
inspection..each calendar week, for
indications of liquids dripping from the
pump seals.
(5)(i) Each sensor as described in
par~graph (d)(3) is checked daily or is
equipped with an audible alarm. and
(il) The owner or operator determines.
based on design considerations and
operating experience, a criterion that
indicates failure of the seal system. the
barrier fluid system. or both. .
(aJ(i) If there are indications of liquids
dripping from the pump seal or the
sensor indicates failure of the seal
sy!'tem, the barrier fluid system. or both
based on the criterion determined in
paragraph (d)(5)(ii). a leak is detected.
(ii) When a leak is detected. it shall be
repaired as soon as practicable. but not
litter than 15 calendar days after it is
detected. except al) provided in I 60.482-
9.
(iii) A fii'St attempt at repair shall be
made no later than 5 calendar days after
each leak is detected.
(e) Any pump that is designated. as
described in t 6O.486{e) (1) and (2). for
no detectSlble emission, as indicated by
an instrument reading of less than 500
ppm abov~ background, is exempt from
the requirements of paragraphs (a), (c),
and (d) if the pump:
(1) Has no externally actuated shaft
penetrating the pump housing,
(2) Is demonstrated to be operating
with no detectable emissions as
indicated by an instrument reading of
less than 500 ppm above background as
I-:O;-132
measured by the methods specified in
A 6O.485(c). and .
(3) Is tested for compliance with
paragraph (e)(2)' initially upon
designation. annually, and at other times
requested by tbe Administrator.
(f] If any pump is equipped with a
closed vent system capable of capturing
and transpor:ting any leakage from the
seal or seals to a control device that
complies with the requirements of
~ 60.482-10. it is exempt from the
paragraphs (a He).

~ 60.482-3 Compressors.
(a) Each compressor shall be equipped
with a seal system that includes a
barrier fluid system and that prevents
leakage of vac to the atmosphere.
except as provided in A 6O.482-1(c) and
paragraph (h) and (i) of this section.
(b) Each compressor seal system as
required in paragraph (a) shall be:
(1) Operated with the barrier fluid at a
pressure thiJ t is greater than the
compressor stuffing box pressure; or
(2) Equipped with a barrier fluid
system that is connected by a closed
vent system to a control device that
complies with the requirements of
A 60.482-10; or
(3) Equipped with a system that
purges the barrier fluid into a process
stream with zero VOC emissions to the
atmosphere.
(c) The barrier fluid system shall be in
heavy liquid service or shall not be in
VOC service.
(d) Each barrier fluid system as
described in paragraph (a) sball be
equipped with a sensor that wi1l detect
failure of the seal system. barrier fluid
system, or both.
(e)(I) Each sensor as required in
paragraph (d) shall be checked daily or
shall be equipped with an audible alarm.
(2) The owner or operator shall
determine, based on design
considerations and operating
experience, a criterion that indicates
failure of the eealsystem, the barrier
fluid system. or both.
(f) If the sensor indicates failure of the
seal system. the barrier system. or both
based on the criterion determined under
pal'Ql'aph (e)(2). a leak ill detected.
(g)(1) When a leak is detected. it shall
be repaired as soon as practicable. but
not later than 15 calendar days after it is
detected. except as provided in i 80.482-
9.
(2) A first attempt at repair shall be
made no later than 5 calendar days after
each leak is detected.
(h) A compre88or is exempt from the
requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b).
if it is equipped with a closed vent
system capable of capturing and
transporting any leakage from the seal
-------
to a control device that complies with
the requirements.of ~ 60.482-10. except
as provided in t 6O.482-3(i).
(i) Any compressor that is designated.
as described in ~ 6O.486(e) (1) and (2).
for no detectable emissions. as indicated
by an instnJment reading of less than
500 ppm above background. is exempt
from the requirements of paragraphs
(a)-(h) if the compressor:
(1) Is demonstrated to be operating
with no detectable emissions. as
indicated by an instnJment reading of
less than 500 ppm above background. as
measured by the methods specified in
fi 6O.485(c); and
(2) Is tested for compliance with
paragraph (i)(1) initially upon
designation, annually. and at other times
requested by the Administrator.
(j) Any existing reciprocating
compressor in a process unit which
becomes an rffected facility under
provisions 0 fi 60.14 or 60.15 is exempt
from I 60.482 (a). (h). (c). (d). (e), and (h).
provided the owner or operator
demonstrates that recasting the distance
piece or replacing the compressor are
the only options available to bring the
compressor into compliance with the
provisions of t 60.4823 (a). (h). (c). (d).
(e). and (h). .

160.482-4 Standards: Pressure relief
device. In gn/vapor 88ntIc8.

(a) Except during pressure releases.
each pressure relief device in gas/vapor
service shall be operated with no
detectable emissions. as indicated by an
instrument reading ::If less than 500 ppm
above background. 8S determined by the
methods specified in t 6O.485(c).
(b)(1) After each pressure release. the
pressure relief device shall be returned
to a condition of no detectable
emissions. all indicated by an instnnnent
reading of le88 than 500 ppm above
background. as 800n as practicable. but
no later than 5 calendar days after the
pressure relealle. except as provided in
fi 60.482-9.
(2) No later than 5 calendar days after
the pressure release, the pressure relief
device shall be monitored to confirm the
conditions of no detectable emissions.
as indicated by an instrument reading of
less than 500 ppm above background. by
the methods specified in g 6O.485(c).
(c) Any pressure relief device that is
equipped with a closed vent system
capable of capturing and transporting.
leakage through the pressure relief
device to a control device 8S described
in fi 60.482-10 is exempted from the
requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b).
t 60.482-5 Stand8rd8: Sampling
connection ayatem..

(a) Each sampling connection system
shall be equipped with a closed purge
system or closed vent system. except as
provided in t 6O.482-1(c).
(b) Each closed purge system or
closed vent system as required in
paragraph (a) shall:
(1) Return the purged process fluid
directly to the process line with zero
VOC emissions to the atmosphere; or
(2) Collect and recycle the purged
process fluid with zero VOC emissions
to the atmosphere; or
(3) Be designed and operated to
capture and transport all the purged
process fluid to a control device that
complies with the requirements of
160.482-10.
(c) In-situ sampling systems are
exempt from paragraphs (a) and (b).

A 60.482"" Standards: Open-ended valves
or Unes.

(a)(1) Each open-ended valve or line
shall be equipped with a cap. blind
flange. plug. or a second valve. except
a8 provided in 160.482-1(c).
(2) The cap, blind flange, plug, or
second valve shall seal the open end at
all timas except during operations
requiring process fluid flow through the
open-ended valve or line.
(b) Each open-ended valve or line
equipped with a second valve shall be
operated in a manner such that the
valve on the process fluid end is closed
before the second valve is closed.
(c) When a double block-and-bleed
system is being used. the bleed valve 01
line may remain open during oper8tior.s
that require venting the line between thE'
block valves but shall comply with
paragraph (a) at all other times. 227

t 80.482-7 Standards: Yafve8 In gu/vapor
8erYIce In light liquid 88rVIce.

(a) Each valve shall be monitored
monthly to detect leaks by the methods
specified in 1 6O.485(b) and shall comply
with paragraphs (bHe); except as
provided in paragraphs (£). (g). and (h).
~ 60.483-1, 2, and I 6O.482-1(c).
(h) If an instrument reading of 10.000
ppm or greater is measured. a leak is
detected.
(cU1) Any valve for which a leak is
not detected for 2 successive months
may be monitored the first month of
every quarter, beginning with the next
quarter. untile leak is detected.
(2) If a leak is detected. the valve shall
be monitored monthly until a leak is not
detected for 2 successive months.227
(d)(1) When a leak is detected. it shall
be repaired as soon as practicable. but
111-133
no later than 15 calendar days after the
leak is detected. except as provided in
160.482-9.

(2) A first attempt at repair shall be
made no later than 5 calendar days after
each leak is detected.

(e) First attempts at repair include. but
are not limited to. the following best
practices where practicable:
(1) Tightening of bonnet bolts;
(2) Replacement of bonnet bolts;
(3) Tightening of packing gland nuts;
(4) Injection of lubricant into
lubricated packing.
(£) Any valve that is designated, as
described in 160.486(e)(2). for no
detectable emissions. as indicated by an
instrument reading of less than 500 ppm
above background. is exempt from the
requirements of paragraph (a) if the
valve:
(1) Has no external actuating
mechanism in contact with the process
fluid.
(2) Is operated with emissions less
than 500 ppm above background as
determined by the method 8pecified in
160.485(c). and
(3) 18 tested for compliance with
paragraph (£)(2) initially upon
designation. annually. and at other times
requested by the Administlrator.
(g) Any valve that is designated, as
described in 160.486(£)(1). as an unsafe-
to-monitor valve is exempt from the
requirements of paragraph (a) if:
(1) The owner or operator of the valve
demonstrates that the valve is unsafe to
monitor because monitoring personnel
would be exposed to an immediate
danger as a consequence of complying
with paragraph (a). and
(2) The owner or operator of the valve
adheres to a written plan iliat requires
monitoring of the valve as frequently a8
practicable during safe-to-monitor times.
(h) Any valve that is designated. as
described in I 60.486(£)(2). as a difficult-
to-monitor valve is exempt from the
requirements of paragraph (a) if:
(1) The owner or operator of the valve
demonstrates that the valve cannot be
monitored without elevating the
monitoring persolU!el more than 2
meters above a support surface.
(2) The process unit within which thf'
valve is located either becomes an
affected facility through fi 60.14 or
A 60.15 or the owner or operulor
designates less than 3.0 percent of thf'
total number of valves as diffiedl-to-
monitor. and 227

(3) The owner or operator of the valve
follows iii written plan that requires
monitoring of the valve at least once per
calendar year.
-------
~ OO.482-G Sttmdards: Pumps and valves
In &teevy lIqulcl 881'V1ce, pressure rellel
dev1ce6 In !Ight Ilqulet or heavy liquid
f;61'V~, aM flanges and other connectors.
(a) Pumps and valves in heavy liquid
oervice. pressure relief devices in light
liquid or heavy liquid service. and
flange!} and other connectors shall be
monitored within 5 days by the method
specified in i 6O.485(b) if evidence of a
potential leak is found by visual.
sudible. olfactory. or any other
detection method.
(b) If an instrument reading of 10,000
ppm or greater is measured. a leak is
detected.
(c)(l) When a leak is detected. it shall
be repaired as soon as practicable. but
not later than 15 calendar days after it is
detected. except as provided in
g 60.482-9.
(2) The first attempt at repair shall qe
made no later than 5 calendar days affi!r
each leak is detected.
(d) First attempts at repair include.
but are not limited to. the best practices
described under fi 6O.<382-7(e).

9 OO.4!a:'f-~ Standards: IOeIB1f @~ Ii'8palr.

(a) Delay of repair of equipment for
which leaks have been detected will be
Qllowed if the repair is technically
infea!Jible without a process unit
ohutdown. Repair of this equipment
ohalI occur before the end of the next
process unit ahutdown.
(b) Delay of repair of equipment will
hi
-------
one of the alternative work practices, as
specified in 160.487(b).
(b)(1) An owner or operator shall
comply initially with the requirements
for valves in gas/vapor service and
valves in light liquid service, 8S
described in I 60.482-7.
(2) After 2 consecutive quarterly leak
detection periods with the percent of
valves leaking equal to or less than 2.0.
an owner or operator may begin to skip
1 of the quarterly leak detection periods
for the valves in gas/vapor and light
liquid service.
(3) After 5 consecutive quarterly leak
detection periods with the percent of
valves leaking equal to or less than 2.0.
an owner or operator may begin to skip
3 of the quarterly leak detection periods
for the valves in gas/vapor and light
liquid service.
(4) If the percent of valves leaking is
greater than 2.0, the owner or operator
shall comply with the requirements as
described in I 60.482-7 but can again
elect to use this section.
(5) The percent of valves leaking shall
be determined by dividing the sum of .
valves found leaking during current
monitoring and valves for which repair
has been delayed by the total number of
valves subject to the requirements of
I 60.483-2.
(6) An owner or operator must keep a
record of the percent of valves found
leaking during each leak detection
period.

180.484 Equivalence of mana of
8mIa8Ion Ilmlt8tlon.

(a) Each owner or operator subject to .
the provisions of this subpart may apply
to the Administrator for determination
of equivalance for any means of
emission limitation that achieves a
reduction in emissions of VOC at least
equivalent to the reduction in emissione
of VOC achieved by the controls
required in this subpart.
(b) Determination of equivalence to
the equipment. design. and operational
requirements of this subpart will be
evaluated by the following guidelines:
(1) Each owner or operator applying
for an equivalence determination shall
be responsible for collecting and
verifying test data to demonstrate
equivalence oi means of emission
limitation.
(2) The Administrator will compare
teai data for the meana of emission
limitation to test data for the equipment.
dl!!sign, and operational requirement!).
(3) The Administrator may condition
the approval of equivalence on
requirements that may be necessary to
assure operation and maintenance to
8Bhieve the same emission reduction as
the equipment. design, and operational
requirements.
(c) Determination of equivalence to
the required work practices in this
subpart will be evaluated by the
following guidelines:
(1) Each owner or operator applying
for a determination of equivalence shall
be responsible for collecting and
verifying test data to demonstrate
equivalence of an equivalent means of
emission limitation.
(2) For each affected facility for which
a determination of equivalence is
requested. the emission reduction
achieved by the reqlrired work practice
shall be Mmonstrated.
(3) For each affected facility. fur
which 8 determination of equivalence is
requested. the emission relhlction
achieved by the equivalent means of
emission limitation shall be
demonstrated.
(4) Each owner or operator applying
for a determination of equivalence shaH
commit in writing to work practice{s)
that provide for emission reductions
equal to or greater than the emission
reductions achieved by the ~quired
work practice.
(5) Tbe Administrator will compare
the demonstrated emission reduction for
the equivalent means of emission
limitation to the demonstrated emiasiOD
reduction for the required work
practices and will consider the
commitment in paragraph (c)(4).
(6) The Awninistrator may condition
the approval of equivalence on
requirements that may be necessary to
assure operation and maintenance to
achieve the same emission reduction u
the required work practice.
(d) An owner or operator may offer a
unique approach to demonstrate the
equivalence of any equivalent means of
emission limitation.
(e)(1) After a request for
determination of equivalence is
received. the Administrator wiU publish
a notice in the Federal Register and
provide the opportunity for public
hearing if the Administrator judges that
the request may be approved.
(2) After notice and opportwrity ffor
public hearing. the Administroior will .
determine the equiv~eBce of a means of
emission limitation and will publish the
determination in the Federal Register.
(3) Any equivalen~ means of emissio.!3
limitations approved under this section
shall constitule a required work
practice. equipment. design. or
operational standard within the meaning
of Section 111(h)(1) of the Clean Air Act.
(£)(1) Manufacturers of equipment
used to control equipment leaks of vac
may apply to the Administrator for
111-135
detennination of equivalence for any
equivalent means of emission limitation
that achieves a reduction in emiIWons of
vac achieved by the equipment. design,
and operational requirements of this
subpart.
(2) The Administrator will make an
equivalence determination according to
the provisions of paragraphs (b), (c). (d).
and (e).

180.485 Test method. and procedures.
(a) Each OWDer or operator subject 10
the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with the test method and
procedure requirements provided in this
section.
(b) Monitoring. as required in
It 6O.48Z, 60.483. and 60.484. shall
comply with the following requ:irements:
(1) Mowtoring shall comply with
Reference Method 21.
{2) The detectioD instrument shall
meet the performance criteria of
Reference Method 21.
(3) The instrument shall be calibrated
before use on each day of ita use by the
methods specified in Method 21.
(4) Calibration gases shall be:
(i) Zero air l1ess than 10 ppm of
hydrocarbon in air); and
(ii) A mixture of methane or n-hexane
and air at a concentration of
approximately. but less than. 10.000 ppm
methane or n-hexane.
(5) The instrument probe shall be
traversed around all potential leak
interfacell all close to the interface as
possible as described in Reference
Method 21.
(c) When equipment is tested for
compliance with no detectable
emissions 8S required in , 60.482 -Z{e). -
3(i), -I, -1{f). and -t(~e). the test shall
comply with the following requirementa:
(1) The requirements of par88raphs
(b)(1H4) shall apply.
(2) The background level shall be
determined. a8 set forth in Reference
Method 21.
(3) The instrument probe shall be
traversed around all potentiaJlleak
interfaces 88 close to the interface as
possible a8 described in Reference
Method 21.
(4) The arithmetic difference be tweeD
the maximum concentrntion indicated
by the instrument and the background
level is compared with 500 ppm for
determining compliance.
(d)(1) Each piea! of equipment within
a process unit as presumed to be in VOC
service unless an owner or operator
demonstrates that the piece of
equipment is not in VOC aentice. For a
piece of equipment to be ooosidered not
in VOC serVice. it must be detennined
that the percent VOC content can be
reasonably expected never to exceed 10
percent by weight For purposes of
-------
determining the percent VOC content !in
the process f!wd that is contained i.n or
contacts equipment. procedures that
conform to the general methods
described in ASTM E-26O. E-168. &-169
(incorporated by reference 9S specified
in 160.17) shall be used.
(2) If an owner or operator decides to
exclude non-reactive organic
compounds from the total quantity of
organic Ci)mpou.uds in determining the
percent vac content of the process.
fluid, the exclusion will be allowed i.f:
(i) Those substances excluded are
those con.sidcred as having negligible
photochemicai r~ectivity by ~he
Administxator; and
(ii) The owner or operator
demonstrates that the percent organic
content.. excluding Don-reactive organic
compounds. can be reasonably expected
never to exceed 10 perceni by weight
(3)(i) An owner or operator may u.se
engineering judgment rather than the
procedL\res in paragraphs (dl {II aDd {2)
of this section 10 demonstrate that the
percent '\Toe content does not exceed 110
percent bJ weight. pro'rided that the
engineering judgment demonstrates that
the vac content clearly does not
exceed 10 percent by weight. When an
owner or operator and the
Administrator do not agree on whether
iii piece of eq\!;pment is no' in vac
service. however. the procedures in
paragraphs (d) (1) and {Z) shall be used
to resolve the disagreement..
(ii) If an owner or operator determines
that II piece of equipment is in VOC
service, the determination can be
revised only after following the
procedures in paragraphs {dj (1) and (ZA.
. (e) Equipment i. in light liquid service
if the following conditions apply:
(1) The vapor pressure of one or more
of the components is greater than 0.3
kPa at 20° C. Vapor pressures may be
obtained from standard reference texts
or may be determined by ASTM 0-2879
(incorporated by reference as specified
in I 60.17).
(2) The total concentration of the pure
components having a vapor pressure
greater than Q.3 kPa at 20° C is equal to
or greater than 20 percent by weisht
and
(3) The fluid is a liquid 8t operating
conditions.
(0 Samples used in conjunction with
paragraphs (d). (e). and (8) shall be
representative of the process fluid that
is contained in or contacts the
equipment or the gas being combusted
in the flare.
(g)(1' Reference Method 22 shall be
used to detennine the compliance of
flares with the vis;ble emission
provisions of this subpart.
(2) The presence of a flare pilot flame
shall be monitored using a thermocouple
or any other equivalent device 10 detect
the presence of a flame.
(3) The net heating value of the gas
being combusted in a flare shall be
calculated using the following equation:

"'{~;)

1=1
Wllere:
BT = Net heating .value of the sample. Mil
scm: where the net enthalpy per mole of
offgas is based on combustion al 25'C
and 760 mm Hg. but the standard
temperature for determining the volume
corresponding to one mole is 20'.
!.:=Constant. (~\(g mole \(--~J_\
1.740 x 10' \ppmJ Bcm J kcal. J
where
standard temperature tOf
~.!-
scm
is 2O'C
C;.= Concentration of sample component i in
ppm. as measured by Reference Method
18 and ASTM D2504-67 (reapproved
1977) (incorporated by reference as
specified in ~ 60.17).
H,.= Net heat of combustion of sample
component i. kcal/g mole. The heats of
combustion may be determined using
ASTM D2382-76 (incorporated by
reference as specified in ~ 60.171 if
published values are not available or
cannot be calculated.

(4) The actual exit velocity ora flare
shall be determined by dividing the
volu.metric flowrate (in units of standard
temperature and pressure). as
dp.termined by Reference Method 2. 2A.
2C. or 20 as appropriate; by the
unohstructed (free) cross sectional area
of the flare tip.
151 The maximum permitted velocity.
V mo>' for air-assisted flares shall be
determined by the following equCltion;

V m.. = 8.706 +0.7084(HT)

V m.. ~ Maximum permitted velocity. m/sec.
8.706 = Constant.
O.i084 = Constant.
JlT ~ The net heating valup as determined in
para!,raph (g)(4).
(See. 114 d the Clean Air Act as amended (42
l!.Sc. i414))
~ 60.486 Recordkeeplng requirements.
(H)(1) Each owner or operator 8ubject
to the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with the recordkeeping
requirements of this section.
(2) An owner or operator of more than
one affected facility subject to the
pro\'isions of this subpart may comply
with the recordkeeping requirements for
111-136
these facilities in one recordkeeping
system if the system identifies each
record by each facility.
(b) When each leak is detected as
specified in A 60.482-2, -3. -7, -8. and
~ 60.483-2, the following requirements
apply;
(1) A weatherproof and readily visible
identification, marked with the
equipment identification number, shall
be attached to the leaking equipment.
(2) The identification on a valve may
be removed after it has been monitored
for 2 successive months as specified in
~ 6O.482-7(c) and no leak has been
detected during those 2 months.
(3) The identification on equipment
except on a vaJve. may be removed after
it has been repaired.
(c) When each leak is detected as
specified in ~ 60.482-2, -3. -7. -8. and
I 60.483-2. the following information
shall be recorded in a log and shall be
kept for 2 years in a readily accessible
location:
(1) The instrument and operator
identification numbers and the
equipment identification number.
(2) The date the leak was detected
and the dates of each attempt to repair
the leak.
(3) Repair methods applied in each
attempt to repair the leak.
(4) "Above 10,000" if the maximum
instrument reading measured by the
methods specified in A 60.485(8) after
each repair attempt is equal to or greater
than 10.000 ppm.
(5) "Repair delayed" and the reason
for the delay if a leak is not repaired
within 15 calendar days after discovery
of the leak.
(6) The signature of the owner or
operator (or designate) whose decision
it was that repair could not be effected
without a process shutdown.
(7) The expected date of successful
repair of the leak if a leak is not
repaired within 15 days.
(8) Dates of process unit shutdown
that occur while the equipment is
unreparred.
(9) The date of successful repair of the
leak. .
(d) The following information
pertaining to the design requirements for
closed vent systems and control devices
described in A 60.482-10 shall be
recorded and kept in a readily
accessible location:
(1) Detailed schematics, design
specifications, and piping and
instrumentation diagrams.
(2) The dates and descriptions of any
changes in th~ design specifications.
(3) A description of the parameter or
paramp.ters monitored, as required in
I 6O.482-10(e). to ensure that control
devices are operated and mClinlilined in
-------
conformance with their design and an
explanation of why that parameter (or
parameters) was selected for the
monitoring.
(4) Periods when the closed vent
systems and control devices required in
ft 60.482-2. -3. -4. and -5 are not operated
as designed. including periods when a
flare pilot light does not have a flame.
(5) Dates of startups and shutdowns of
the closed vent systems and control
devices required in 1 60.482-2. -3. -4. and
-5.
o (e) The following information
pertaining to all equipment subject to
the requirements in i 60.482-1 to -10
shall be recorded in a log that is kept in
a readily accessible location:
(1) A list of identification numbers for
equipment subject to the requirements
of this subpart.
(2)(i) A list of identification numbers
for equipment that are designated for no
detectable emissions under the
provisions of i 6O.482-2(e). -3(i) and
-7(f).
(ii) The designation of equipment as
subject to the requirements of ft 60.482-
2(e). -3(i). or -7(f) shall be signed by the
owner or operator.
(3) A list of equipment identification
numbers for pressure relief devices
required to comply with I 60.482-4.
(4)(i) The dates of each compliance
test as required in t 6O.482-2(e). -3(i). -4.
and -7(f).
(ii) The background level measured
during each compliance test.
(iii) The maximum instrument reading
measured at the equipment during each
compliance test.
(5) A list of identification numbers for
equipment in vacum service.
(f) The following information
pertaining to all valves subject to the
requirements of fi 60.482-7 (g) and (h)
shall be recorded in a log that is kept in
a readily accessible location:
(1) A list of identification numbers for
valves that are designated as unsafe-to-
monitor. an explanation for each valve
stating why the valve is unsafe-to-
monitor. and the plan for monitoring
each valve.
(2) A list of identification Humbers for
valves that are designated as difficult-
to-monitor. an explanation for each
valve stating why tbe valve is difficult-
to-monitor, and the schedule for
monitonng each value.
(gJ The following information shall be
recordl'd for valves complying with
i 6O.4I:1:i-2:
(1 J A schedule of monitoring
(2J The percent of valves found
leaking during each monitoring period.
(h) The following information shall be
recorded in a log that is kepi in a readily
accessible location:
(1) Design criterion required in
~ 6O.482-2(d)(5) and 160.482-3(e)(2) and
explanation of the design criterion; and
(2) Any changes to this cri'erion and
the reasons for the changes.
(i) The foUowi1)8 information shall be
record~d in a lo~ tha' is kept in a readily
accessIble location for use in
determining exemptions as provided in
i 6O.480(d):
(1) An analysis demonstrating the
design capacity ofthe affec,ed faciliiy.
(2) A stalF.!J1ent listing the feed or raw
materials and Pf'oducts from the affected
facilities and an analysis demonstrating
whether these chemicals are heavy
liquids or beverage alcohol. and
(3) An analysis demonstrating thai
equipment is not in VOC service.
(j) lnfonnation and data uaed 10
demonstrate thai a piece of equipmenl is
not in VOC service shall be recorded in
a log that is kept in a readily accessible
location.
(k) The provisions of Ii 80.7 {b) and
(d) do not apply to affected facilities
subject to this subpart

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act at amended (42
U.S.c. 7f14})

(Approved by the Office of Msnlllement 8Dd
Budget undel' the ocmtrol cumber 208G-0012)

f 60.487 Reporttng Requnmenta.

(a) Each owner or operator subject 10
the provisions of this subpart shall
submit semiannual reports to the
Administrator beginning six months
after the initial start up date.
(b) The initial semiannual report to
the Administrator shall include the
following information:
(1) Process unit identification.
(2) Number of valve8 subjecl to the
requirements of 180.482-1. excluding
those valves designated for no .
detectable emiasiOlUl under the
provisions of 180.482-7(f).
(3) Number of pumps subject to the
requirements of 180.482-2. excluding
those pumps designated lor DO
detectable emissions under the
provisions of 0 6O.482-Z(eJ and those
pumps complying with i 6O.482-Z(f}.
(4) Number of compressors subject to
the requirements of t 80.482-3.
excluding those COlDpres8Ol8 designated
for no detectable emissions under the
provisions of 180.48Z-3(iJ Bnd those
compressors complyiDs witb * 00..462-
3(h).
(c) All semiannual reportB to the
Administrator shall include the
following information. aummarized from
the information in 180.486:
(1) Process unit identification.
111-137
(2~ For each month during the
semIannual reporting period.

(i) Number of valves for which leaks
were detected a9 described in
160.4~7J(b) or 180.483-2.

(ii) Number of valves for which leaks
were not reported a9 repaired in
180.482r7(dJ(t). 227

(Hi) Number of pumps for which leaks
were detec11!d 88 descn"bed in It 60.482-
2(b) and (d)(6)(i),

(iv) Number of pumps for which leaks
erer not repaired as required in
II 6O.482-~C){1) and (d){8)(ii),

(v) Number of compressors for which
leaks were detected u de8Ctibed in
1 6O.482-3{f}.

(vi) Number of compressol'8 for which
leaks were DOt repaired 81 required in
1 6O.482-3{g)(IJ. and 227

(vii) ~ facta thai explain each delaJ
of TepaII' and. where approprimte. why 8
process mrit shutdown was technice.lly
infeasible.

(3) Dales ofprocesa unit !lhutdoWDB
which occUJTed within the semiannual
reporting period.

(4) Revisions to items reported
according to paragraph (b) if changes
have occurred since the initial report or
subsequent revisions to the initial
report.

(d) An owner or opertor eiectins to
comply with the provisioD8 of II 60.483-
1 and -2 shall notify the Adminiatrator
of the alternative standard eelected 90
days before implementiaa either of the
provisionL

(e) An owner or operator ahall report
the results of all performance te'" in
accordance with 1 60.8 of the General
ProviBioaa. The provitri0n8 of f 8O.8(d)
do not apply to affected facilities subject
to the provisions of thia subpart except
that an owner or operator must notify
the Administralor of the schedule for the
initial performance U!Bts .t lea8l30 days
before the initial performance tests.

(f) The requiremenb of paragrap1)s {a)
through (c) of this subsection remam in
force unlil and unleS8 EPA. in delegating
enforcement authority to a State under
Section 111(c) ohhe Act. approves
reporting requirements or an Bhernative
means of compliance lJUJ'VciIlance
adopted by such State. In that even'i,
affected 80urcetJ within the S'lite will be
relieved of the obligation to comp'ly with
the requirements of paragraphs {a)
tluough(c)ofthiG8Ub8ection.~ded
that they comply with the requirements
established by the State.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Ad u ammded {u
U.S.C. 741fJJ

Approved by the Offioe of Manqemaat WKI!
Budget under the conll'ol aumber 210110-0012}
-------
Ii 60.488 Reconstruction.

For the purposes of this sulJ~H1rt:
(a) The cost of the following
fre4Ue'ltly replaced components of the
fHcility shall not be considered in
ralculating either the "fixed capite!l cost
of the Tlew components" or the "fixed
capital costs that would'be required to
construct a comparable new facility"
under ~ 60.15: pump seals. nuts and
Lolts. rupture disks. and packings.
(bl Under fi 60.15. the "fixed capital
cost of new components" includes the
fixed capital cost of all depreciable
components (except components
specified in fi 60.488 (a)) which arc or
will be replaced pursuant to all
continuous programs of component
replar:ement which are commenced
within any 2-year period following the
applicability date for the appropriate
subpart. (See the "Applicability and
designation of affected facility" section
of the appropriate subpart.) For
purposes of this paragraph.
"commenced" means that an owner or
operator has undertaken a continuous
program of component replacement or
that an owner or operator has entered
into a contractual obligation to
undertake and complete. within a
reasonable time. a continuous program
of component replacement.

ti 00.489 Ust of chemicals produced by
effected facilities.
(a) The following chemicals are
produced. as intermediates or final
products. by process units covered
under this subpart. The applicability
date for process units producing one or
more of these chemicals is January 5-
1981.
CAS No. .
a.n.:8I
105-57-7............... Acetal,
75-07-0................. Ace1aIdehyde,
107-G9-1............... Ac:eIaIdoI.
60-35-5.."............. Acetamide.
1 03-84-4 -... Ace18niIid8.
84-19-7 "..'-'-' Acotic: IICd.
108-24-7 '-" AceIic anIIymIda.
87-64-1...........-." Acetone.
7~5 ................. Acetone cyanohydrin.
75-05-6 "............... AcetoniIriIe.
~2 ................. AceIopI1enone.
75-36-5................. AceIyt chloride.
74-86-2................, Acetylene.
107-02..e ............... Aaolem,
79-08-1................. ~
79-10-7 .... AayIic IICiCI.
107-13-1............... ~.
12~9 ............... Adipic 8cid.
111-69-3 ............... AdiponiIJiIe.
(") ............................ Alkyf napI11h&Ienea.
107-1B..e .......-...... AIIyt alcohol.
107-05-1 ~ chk>rid8.
1321-11~.._.. AlI".obef~ 8cid.
111~1-1__.. ~.........~,
123-30--11 . '-4..,.l...d.
~7.123- ~-
112-a.
71~1-o' ......---- An¥ 8IcotIoII.
110-6&-7 ..... ~ .......
~ - AI1Iyt c:NaIid8.
110-86-7' A8¥~
1322-08-1._- An¥ pIIenol
CAS No, .

82-63-3 .........- 1\nIIne,
142-04-1 .... JV8I8 /IrdI..a......
28191-52~ AnieicIin8.

100..e6-3 ............... Anisole,
118-112-3........_..... AnIIv8niIIc add,
84-6S-1 -- AaIInquinono.
100-52-7......._..... Bt...dICItiI'I,de.
65-21-0.... e.-iIcIB.
71~ Ber-.

1III-omob.,IIzone.
27497-61-4 ~
108-99-0............... But-.o,
108-98-9............... l-butene,
123-*-4 - n-I>uI\4 --
141-32-2............... n-t>uIyt aaytate,
71-36-3................. n-t>uIyt alcohol,
78-92-2 .. ~ aICDhI>I.
75-65-0.".............. 1-b1/1Y1_.
109-73-41 ~
13952~- ~
75-84-9................. ~"'18,
98-73-7 """""",,,,, ~ b8nzaC 8dd.
107-88-0............... 1.3-buIyIene ~
123-72-8...".......... n-bu1yraIdeIIyd.
107-112-8- aaync 8Iid.
106-31-0."".. &II)Oic ~
109-74-0 -""""'"'' Butyronitri!e.
105-80-2____. CapdacI8m.
75-1-60.. CIIrtK8 CIiIUIICI8.
558-1 ~ ............... Carbon ""'Id>o~...
56-~ """"-'''''' CortIon 1eIraI:I*),.,
9004-35-7 ,,-....-... CoIIutose acetale.
79-11..e ",,"',,"....., CtI:oroaceIIc!lad
108-42-9...........".. 1'A-CIIIoroe,*",-
95-51-2._...._. ~_...~
108-47..e"....___. ~
35913-00-!L "".-.. Chlorob8nzaldehyde
108-90-7..""..._.... ChJoroo......",
118.91-2.535- a..-...... acid.
80-8.74-11-
3 '
2136-61--4.
2136-89-2.
5216-25-1'.
13::' ..()3..5 "..-...... Ch1cMbenzoyt chloride.
25497-29-4 ""-"" CNorodiIIuoromeIhane.
75--45-6 ..............." Ch!or~,
67-ee-3................. 0t!0r0I0nn.
2558&--43-0.._....... Ch!oron8p1haJen,
88-73-3.._............. CH:I1Ioronitrobenzene.
100-00-5."..."....... p.cNoroniIrobenzene,
25167-60-0...._..... Ch/orophenaIs,
126-99-8........._.. ChkJroprene.
7790-94--5.._.....- Chlorosullonoc acid.
1 08-41..e ............." m-<:hlorolDluene.

95---49-8 .".."......".. CH:NoroIoIIIene.
1~.........._..~
75-72-9,,_.._.._. ~,
108-39-4 ............-. m-aesoI.
95-48-7........_....". <><:n>soI,
106-44-5.."........... p.aesoI.
1319-77-3..._..... Mixad c:nssob.
1319-77-3.".......... Cr8syIic acid.
4170-30-0......._.. CnltonaIdehyde
3724-85-0............. Cro!onic acid,
98-82-8 "....-.-.. QIrnene,
90-15-8_..._... Cumene /Ir<*OP8o""",
372-oH ..........-. C¥an08I:ebc acid.
506-77--4......_..... CVanogen cI1tOfide,
108-«>-5............... ~!Iad,
108-77-0__._. ~ c:Naride.
110-82-7............... Cyc!oIIeaMe.
108-93-0 -......-. CydohexanoL
108-94-1............... ~du",,_......,
11_._.- ~.......
108-91-8,_.._.- ~~"'"e.
111-7~.._. ~
112-30-1 ............... DecanoI,
CAS No, . I
123--42-2............... Doacetone alcohol,
27578-04-1........... Dlaminobenzooc 1ICid,
95--76-1.95-82- DichIoroendine,
9. 554-00-7.
608-27..5.
808-31-1.
626-43-7,
27134-27-8.
57311-82-9 "
541-73-1."............ fTHIichIo,obeo....~
95-50-1 "....-....... o-dictI~,
106---46-7 "...".""... p.n
64-17-5 "'-.-. EII\8nol
141-43-5 '-........... Elhanolamines.
141-79-8 "............. E"'Y'-=-e,
141-97-9..__... EIhyt ~,
140-88--5 "..........." Ethyt acryIala.
75-04-7................. Elhylamine,
100-41~ --.. EIhytIenane.
74-96-4 ...-.. EII¥ bromide,
9004-!i7-3............ E~
75-00-3 "....-....".. Elhyt_,
1~_,_.. EII¥ ..1*"-,
105-56-6 ---.- E81yIcyanoecel8l8.
74-85-1 .........-- Ethylene.
96--49-1 .."............. EII1ytne carbona1e,
107-07-3 ""..,,....... Elhytene chtofOhydrin,
107-15-3..__- EII¥fIo08diMine.
106-93-4. E-.yIene ~
107..21-1- E-.yIene IJ¥;Ol
111-55-7............... Ethytene glycol dIace1a1e.
110-71~ -........- E""""'" glyCOl dmeIhyt-,
111-76-2 - Ethylene WYaJlI1IIII1obuIyI _.
112-07-:1 - EJI¥8n8 gIwCXJI ~ - .........
110-80-5....._._... Ethytene gIyooI ~Ihy 811w,
111-15-9............... E1ItyIene gIyooI monelhyl - .-.:
1~ """"'"'''' Ethylene gIyooIlI1OIlOITIIIII¥-.
1 I~H ............... Ethylene WYaJI IIIOIICII'II8II - --
-,
112...88..41.- EIIIfIIRI \III'CXII.-.....---, ......
2807-30-8- EII¥8n8 gIwCXJI ~ 8Ih8r,
75-21-8 -......-.. Ethylene Glide.
80-29-7...._.......... EIIIyI-
104-79-7 ~.oI.
122-51-0_. E1I¥...--..L ..JA.,
95-92-1 -. EIhwI CII8IaI8.
41892-71-1........... EII¥ 8OdIum~,
so-oo-o ................. r'Ol1l8d8ll,doo.
75-12-7.._. Faw8IoIda.
Chemical
a.e...:aI
~1richIortde,
111-138
-------
~
CAS No. .
St-'8-6.....-.......... Forme IICid.
, ,0-'7-8 -' Fumaric IICid.
98-0,-, -.............. Furfural.
56-8,-5 """""""'" ~.
26~5-73-7........... Glycerol docNo.~..
2579'-96-2........... GIyceroIIrieIher.
56-40-8 ................. Glycine.
, 07-22-2 --- GIyoxII.
, '8-74-' .-...... Hexachlolobe._oe.
87-72-, .......-....... 1~1I...06.
36653-82-4_.- Ha8d8cyl8ahaI.
,24...09-4.. . ~...........
629-"-8_-..- ~ glycol
'00-97-0............... Ite_lIIflenele1rllmhe.
74-90-8................. Hydrogen cyanide.
'23-3'-8_-- ~.
99-96-7 .---- ~-.
26760-84-5...._... 1808myWIe.
711-83-, ..............,.. 1IaIIu1anoI.
"0-'9-0...........- 18oIIuIfI-
"5-,,-7_- .........
78-34-2_- ~
79-3, -2...........-. ISobuIwric acid.
2533&-'7-7..._.... '-"".
26952-2'-8_.._. I8DocIwI 8IcaIIaI.
78-78-4 .,............... ~
78-59-' .........- 18aphorone..
,21-9'-5............... IIOph\IIaIIc acid..

78-79-5.._._.......... ...-.
87-G-O...._..... ~
'08-21-4_.__.. ~_8.
75-3'-0..._.-...-- 1IIOpfQpytamine.
75-~ '''''''''''''-'' toopopyt cNoride.
25'68-06-3..___. ~~.........
410-5'-4...._....... ~
1'1............................ Ln. 8Ikyt UIonaIe..
'23-0,-3............... Unoar 811<~ (linear dodecyIben-
-I..
"0-'6-7......._.... MaIoic acid.
'08-3,-8.._........... -1f1h\IIIIIII8.
8915-'5-7......... MIle IICid.
'41-79-7 --...... 1ioI88IIyt-
'21-47-' .......-..... - acid.
78-4'-4................. MeIh8ayIIe acid.
563-47-3......._...... -,.--
87-58-' ................. 101e1hanoI.
79-20-9................. MeIhyI~.
105-45-3............... MeII¥--=e-
74-89-5................. Mell¥8fnine.
100-61-8............... ~......

74-83-9 ..........-.....1 ~~.
3736S-71-2........... M81hy1 butynat
74-87-3................. MeIhyI cHonde.
'08-87-2............... ~~06.
1331-22-2............. MeIhtIt,.dot-""'"

75-09-2................. -ylene_.
'01-77-9............... -ylene domoIone.
'0'-88-6............... -..,......, dIphenyI cr~
78-9'J-3 ................. Melhy1 ethyl ketone.
107-31-3............... Melhylbmate.
108-1,-2............... Melhyt tSObuIy1 cerbmoI
'08-10-' .....-....... Melhyt tSObuIy1 ketone.
80-82-8................. Methyl It18Ihaerytate
77-75-8................. Me1IIytpen1ynoI
96-83-9................. e..-.ytal)f8tIO.
,,0-91-8............... MorpI!oI!noI.
85-47-2................. ..,apt.II....."oe suIIoruc a'XI.
120-18-3............... lHIaphIIIaJone suIIoruc aco1.
90-15-3 ................. a-nsph\hot.
'35-19-3............... b-napItIIIoI.
75-96-9................. Neopentanoo: acid.
96-74-4................. O-ni1roenifll18.
100-~)1-8 ............... p.ni1roani!ine.
91-23-6................. o-nrtroanisoIe.
'00-17-4............... p-nitroarusole.

98-95-3 ................. Nilrobenzene.
27176-63-2'.......... NiIrOOenzojc acid (o.m. end pI.
79-24-3................. NilrOO1hane.
75-52-5................. Ni1n>me1hene.
88-75-5................. 2-Nl\rophenol.
25322-01-4........... Nl\ropropano.
1321..12-8............. Nl\rotOlueno.
272'5-95-8........... Nonene.
25154-52-3.._. NonytjIIIenoI.
27'93-2&-6_._.- 0c:Iytphen0I.
123-G3-7.__.. Pao~
~'S-77-8- Pa._,1IWoI.

too..-o............... ~.
100-67-1_..._... liM1"19n9
'27-18-4_- ~
584-42-3 -.- P8r~ nweapI8ft
94-70-2...___.-. (>-j)IIe."""-.
156-43-4............... pop-.
108-9&-2............... Phenol.
Chemocal
CAS No. .
98-87-8, 586-
-. 609-46-
,. '333-39-7 '.
9, -40-7 ..--........ Phenyl anthrenllic IICid.
1'1............................ I'henyIen'xyIene.
1300-71-6............. Xylenol.
1300-73-8............. Xytidine.
Chemical
PIw1oI5IAInc ...
Proposed/effect; ve
46 FR 1136, 1/5/81
Promu 1 Qa ted
48 FR 48328, 10/18/83 (206)
. CAS ~ l81er 10 1I1e 01ernIcaI Abs1raclS Registry
numbers assigned 10 specific cI1emic8ls, isomers. Of mMureS
01 CI1emicals Some isomers Of nmures lllat ere ~ed by

~ s:"J.. ~'::-~ ~1I1e~assc. ~
CAS numbers haYS been essigned Of not
its'=~:=r~ =.e been ~~. chemical.

'CAS numbers !of eome ~ isomers are 1181ed; 1I1e
Slnndards appty to all ot 1I1e isomers and mix1urea. -. u
CAS numbenl have not been assigned.
r:U-139
Rev;sed
48 FR 22598, 5/30/84 (227)
49 FR 26738, 6/29/84 (230)
-------
SUbpart WW-5tandard8 0' performance
for the Beverage Can Surface Coating
Indu8try 197

ti 60.490 Applicability l!imt designation of
affected facl"ty.
(a) The provisions of thiB subpart
apply to the following affected facilities
in beverage can surface coating lines:
each exterior base coat operation, each
overvamish coating operation, and each
inside spray coating operation.
(b) The provisions of this subpart
apply to each affected facility which ill
identified in paragraph (a) of this section
and commences construction.
modification, or reconstruction after
November 26,1980.

g 60.491 \r)QflnItI0i'l8.

(a) All terms which are used in this
subpart and are not defined below are
given the same meaning aD in the Act
and Subpart A of this part.
(1) Beverage can means any two-piece
cteel or aluminum container in which
90ft drinks or beer, including malt liquor,
are packaged. The definition does not
include containers in which fruit or
vegetable juices afe packaged.
(2) Extedor base coaUng operation
means the system on each beverage can
surface coating line used to apply a
coating to the exterior of a two-piece
beverage can body. The exterior base
coat provides corrosion resistance and a
background for lithography or printing
operations. The exterior base coat
operation consists of the coating
application station, flashoff area, and
curing oven. The. exterior base coat may
be pigmented or clear (unpigmented).
(3) Inside spray coating operation
means the system on each beverage can
surface coating line used to apply a
coating to the interior of a two-piece
beverage can body. This coating
provides a protective film between the
contents of the beverage can and the
metal can body. The inside spray
coating operation consists of the coating
application station, flashoff area, and
curing oven. Multiple applications of an
inside spray coating are considered to
be a single coating operation.
(4) Overvarnish coating operation
means the system on each beverage can
surface coating line used to apply a
coating over ink which reduces friction
ror aut9mated beverage can filling
equipment, provides gloss. and protects
the finished beverage can body from
abrasion and cOlTasion. The overvarnish
coating is applied to two-piefe beverage
can bodies. The overvarnish'coating
operation consists of the coating
application station, flashoff area. and
curing oven.
(5) Two-piece can means any
beverage can that consists of a body
manufactured from a single piece of
steel or aluminum and a top. Coatings
for a two-piece can are usually applied
after fabrication of the can body.

(6) VOG content means all volatile
organic compounds (VOC) that are in a
coating. VOC content is expressed in
term!) of kilograms of VOC per litre of
coating solids.

(b) Notations used under 1160.493 of
this subpart are dermed below:

G.=the vac concentration in each gas
Btream leaviruz the control device and
enteril1$ the atmosphere (parta per
million liB carbon)
G~=the vac concentration In each gas
stream entering the control device (parts
per million as carbon)
Dc = denoity of each coating, as received
(kilogrems per litre)
D. = density of each VaG-solvent added to
coatings (kilograms per litre)
D.-density of VaG-solvent recovered by lin
emiosian control device (kilograms per
litre)
E= VaG destruction efficiency of the control
device (fraction)
F = the pr()portion of total.VaG emitted by an
affected facility which enters the conlrol
device 10 lotal emissions (fraction)
G = the volume-weighted average of vac in
coatings consumed in 13 calendar month
per volume of coating solids applied
(kilograms per li:re of costing solids)
H.=the fraction of vac emitted at the coater
and flaahofr areas captured by a
collection system
H.=the fraction of vaG emitted at the cure
oven captured by a collection system
L.:=the volume of each coating consumed, as
received (Ii tres)
Lo= the volume of each VaC-solvent added
to coatings (Iitres)
1.,.= the volume of VaC-solvent recovered by
an emission control device (Iitres)
L,,=the volume of coating solids consumed
(litres)
M.. = the mass of VaG-solvent added to
coatings (kilograms)
M.,= the mass of VaG-solvent in coating.
consumed. as received (kilograms)
M.=the mass of VaG-solvent recovered by
emission control device (kilograms)
N = the volume-weighted average mass of
VOC emissions 10 atmosphere per unit
volume of coating solids applied
(kilograms per litre of coating solids)
Q. = the volumetric flow rate of each gas
stream leaving the control device and
entering the atmosphere (dry .tandard
cubic meter. per hour)
Qb= the volumetric flow of each gas stream
entering the control device (dry standard
cubic meters per hour)
R=the overall emission reduction efficiency
for ao affected facility (fraction)
S.=the fraction of vaG in coating and
diluent VaG-solvent emitted at the
coa ter and f1ashoff area for a cos ting
operation
S.=the fraction of vaG in coating and
diluent solvent emitted at the cure oven
for a coating operation
V.=the proportion ofsolids in 8ach coating.
as received (fraction by volume)
W.=the proportion of vaG in each coating.
a. received (fraction by weight).
III
140
fi 60.492 Standards for volatile organic
compounds.

On or after the date on which the
initial performance test required by
A 6O.8(a) is completed. no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of this
subpart shall discharge or cause the
discharge of VOC emissions to the
atmoshpere that exceed the followino
volume-weighted calendar-month
average emissions:
(a) 0.29 kilogram of VOC per litre of
coating solids from each two-piece can
exterior base coating operation. except
clear base coat;
(~) 0.46 kilogram of VOC per litre of
coating solids from each two-piece can
clear base coating operation and from
each overvamish coating operation; and
(c) 0.89 kilogram of VOC per litre of
coating solids from each two-piece can
inside spray coating operation.

~ 60.438 Performance test snd compliance
provisions.
(a) Section 6O.8(d) does not apply to
monthly performance tests and I 6O,8(f)
does not apply to the performance test
procedures required by this subpart.
(b) The owner or operator of an
affected facility shall conduct an initial
performance test as required under
A 6O.8(a) and thereafter a performance
test each calendar month for each
affected facility.
(1) The owner or operator shall use
the following procedures for each
affected facility that does not use a
,;apture system and a control device to
comply with the emission limit specified
under A 60.492. The owner or operator
shall determine the VOC-content of the
coatings from formulation data supplied
by the manufacturer of the coating or by
an analysis of each coating. as received.
using Reference Method 24. The
Administrator may require the owner or
operator who uses formulation data
supplied by the manufacturer of the
coating to determine the VOC content of
coatings using Reference Method 24 or
an equivalent or alternative method. The
owner or operator shall determine from
company records the volume of coating
and the mass of VOC-solvent added to
coatings. If a common coating
distribution system serves more than
one affected facility or serves both
affected and exiting facilities. the owner
or operator shall estimate the volume of
coating used at each facility by using the
average dry weight of coating. number
of cans, and size of cans being
processed by each affected and existing
facility or by other procedures
acceptable to the Administrator.
(i) Calculate the volume-weiRhtp.d
average of the total moss of VOC p'~r
volume of coatlnR aolide 1I",~rI rlurinH II",
calendar month fur mll:h hff",:I",1
fllr:ility. ,~xr;'~(li 1111 11I'1)\/I,I"rI 111111",
-------
160.493(b)(1)(iv). The volume-weighted
average of the total mass of VQC per
volume of coating solids used each
calendar month will be determined by
the followif1R procedures.

(A) Calculate the mass of VOC used
(Mo + Md) during the calendar month for
the affected facility by the following
equation:
n m
Mo + Md = l L.:; Del Woi + 1: L.ti Ddj.(l)
i = 1 j= 1
(~L 4J D4J will be 0 if no VOC IOlvent i8 added
to the coating8. a8 received.) where n i8 the
number of different coating8 u8ed during the
calendar month and m i8 the number of
different diluent VOC-80lvent8 u8ed during
the calendar month.

(B) Calculate the total volume of
coating solids used (1..) in the calendar
month for the affected facility by the
following equation:
n
L. = 1: Ld V.i.
i = 1
where n i8 the number of different coating8
u8ed during the calendar month.

(C) Calculate the volume-weighed
average mass of VOC per volume of
solids used (G) during the calendar
month for the affected facility by the
following equation:

G = Mo + Md
LT2.
(ii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of VOC emissions discharged to
the atmosphere (N) during the calendar
month for the affected facility by the
following equation:

N=G.

(iii) Where the value of the volume-
weighted average of mass of VOC per
volume of solids discharged to the
atmosphere (N) is equal to or less than
the applicable emission limit specified
under 1 60.492. the affected facility is in
compliance.
(iv) If each individual coating used by
an affected facility has a VOC content
equal to or less than the limit specified
under ~ 60.492. the affected facility is in
compliance provided no VOC-solvents
are added to the coating during
distribution or application.
(2) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedures for each affected
facility that uses a capture system and a
control device that destroys VOC (e.g..
incinerator) to comply with the emission
limit specified under 160.492.
IiI Odermine the overall reduction
.,rrki.IIII:Y (R) for the capture system and
Illuirol.lc'vit:...
For the initial performance test. the
overall reduction efficiency (R) shall be
determined as prescribed in A, B. and C
below. In subsequent months. the owner
or operator may use the most recently
determined overall reduction efficiency
for the performance test providing
control device and capture system
operating conditions have not changed.
The procedure in A. B. and C. below.
shall be repeated when directed by the
Administrator or when the owner or
operator elects to operate the control
device or capture .system at conditions
different from the initial performance
test.
(A) Determine the fraction (F) of total
VQC used by the affected facility that
enters the control device using the
following equation:

F = S.H. + s..H...
where Ii., an Ha. shall be determined by
8 method that has been previously
(2)
n
I~t Qa.
E...
m
~ - 1~1 Q..
(8)
approved by the Administrator. The
OWD~r or operator may use the values of
S. and ~ specified in Table 1 or other
values determined by a method that hal
been previously approved by the
Administrator.

TABLE 1.~STRIBUT1ON OF VOC
EMISSIONS
eo.v .......
EmIIIIan diIdIuIIan

~~
'1'---. ........ err ... -
e--.---~-
o-v.mIIII CII8IIng ~.._-
InIid8 IP8Y CII8IIng ~_.
0.75
0.75
CI.8O
0.25
0.25
0.20
(5)
(8) Determine the destnIction
efficiency of the control device (E) using
values of the volumetric flow rate of
each of the gas streams and the VOC
content (a8 carbon) of each of the gas
stream8 in and out of the device by the
following equation:
c.,
n
~ Q.. c...
1=1
where n la the number of vent8 before the
control device. and m ia the number of vent8
after the control device.
(:1)
(C) Determine overall reduction
efficiency (R) using the following
equation:

R '"" £P.
1-4)
(ii) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of the total mass of VOC per
volume of coating solids (G) used during
the calendar month for the affected
facility using equations (1). (2). and (3).
(ii!) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of VOC emissions discharged to
the atmosphere (N) during the calendar
month by the following equation:
N = G x (t-R).
(iv) If the volume-weighted average of
mass of VOC emitted to the atmosphere
for the calendar ~onth (N) is equal to or
less than the applicable emission limit
specified under 1 60.492. the affected
facility is in compliance.
(3) An owner or operator shall use the
following procedure for each affected
facility that uses a capture system and a
control device that recovers the VOC
(e.g.. carbon adsorber) to comply with
the applicable emission limit specified
under 1 60.492.
(i) Calculate the volume-weighted
average of the total mass of VOC per
unit volume of coating solids applied (G)
111-141
used during the calendar month for the
affected facility using equations (1), (2).
and (3).
(ii) Calculate the total mass of VOC
recovered ~) during each calendar
month using the fonowing equation:
(7)
M....LA
(9)
(iii) Calculate overall reduction
efficiency of the control device (R) for
the calendar month for the affected
facility using the following equation:
R=
...
w.+M.
(10)
(8)
(iv) Calculate the volume-weighted
average mass of VOC discharged to the
atmosphere (N) for the calendar month
for the afffected facility using equation
(8).
(v) If the weighted average of VOC
emitted to the atmosphere for the
calendar month (N) is eQual to or les8
than the applicable emission limit
specified under 1 60.492. the affected
facility is in compliance.
(Approved by the Office.of Management Bnd
Budset under control number ~11
-------
180.494 MOIIiltffilU of emIMIon8 8nd
operatIon8
The owner or operatO!' of an affected
facility that uses eJ «:aJIture system and
an incinerator to comply with the
I2Jmission limiw specified under A 60.492
shall install, calibmte, lD£!intain. and
operate temperature measurement
devices MI prescribed beiow.
(a) Where thermal incineration is
\Used. Q temperature measurement
device "hall be installed in the firebox.
Where catalytic incineration is used,
~emperature measurement device II shall
be installed in the gas stream
immediately before Emd (;'Ifter the
catalYflt bed.
(b) Each temperature measurement
device shall be installed. calibrated, and
maintained according to the
manufacturer's i:lpecifications. The
device shall have an accuracy the
greater of ::to.75 percent of the
Qemperature being measured expressed
in degrees Celciuil or ::t 2.5° C.
(c) Esch temperature measurement
device shall be equipped with a
I?ecording device so that a permanent
continuous record is produced.

(Approved by the Office of Management and
3udgetundercontrolnumber~)
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act 8S amended (42
IIJ.S.C.7414)

Q 6G.4~ ~ am:! rr6OO7dkeepln;
mqutrementa.
[a) The owner or operator of an
affected facility shall include the
following data in the initial compliance
report required under i 6O.8(a).
(1) Where only coatings which
individually have a VOC content equal
Qo or less thsm the limits Bpecified under
~ 60.492 are used, and no VOC is added
Ro the coating during the application or
distribution process, the owner or
operato~ ahall provide a list of the
coatings used for each affected facility
and the VOC content of each coating
calculated fromdata determined using
Reference Method 24 or supplies by the
manufacturers of the coatings.
(2) Where one or more coatings which
individually have a VOC content greater
ilian the limits specified under I 60.492
are used or where vac are added or
used in the coating process. the owner
or operator Ghall report for each affeli,ted
facility the volume-weighted average of
the total mass of VOC per volume of
coating solids.
(3) Where compliance is achieved
through the use of incineration. the
ouner or operator shall include in the
initial performance test required under
o 6O.8(a) the combustion temperature (or
the gas temperature upstream and
downstream of the catalyst bed). the
total mass of VOC per volume of coating
solids before and after the incinerator,
capture efficiency. and the destruction
efficiency of the incinerator used to
attain compliance with the applicable
emission limit specified under t 60.492.
The owner or operator shall also include
a description of the method used to
establish the amount of VOC captured
by the capture system and sent to the
control device.
(b) Following the initial performance
test, each owner or operator shall
Bubmit for each semiannual period
ending June 30 and December 31 a
written report to the Administrator of
exceedances of vac content and
incinerator operating temperatures
when compliance with A 60.492 is
achieved through the use of incineration.
All semiannual reports shall be
postmarked by the 30th day following
the end of each cemiannual period. !For
the purposes of these reports,
exceedancell are defined as:
(1) lEach performance period in which
the volume-weighted average of the
total mass of vac per volume of coating
solids, after the control device. if
capture devices and control systems are
used. is greater than the limit specified
under \} 60.492.
(2) Where compliance with I 60.492 is
achieved through the use of thermal
incineration. each 3-hour period when
cans are processed. during which the
average temperature of the device was
more than 28° C below the average
temperature of the device during the
most recent performance test at which
destruction efficiency was determined
as specified under ~ 60.493.
(3) Where compliance with I 60.492 is
achieved through the use of catalytic
incineration, each 3-hour period when
cans are being processed. during which
the average temperature of the device
immediately before the catalyst bed is
more than 28° C below the average
temperature of the device immediately
before the catalyst bed during the most
recent performance test at which
destruction efficiency was determined
as specified under ft 60.493 and all 3-
hour periods. when cans are being
processed. during which the average
temperature difference across the
catalyst bed is less than 80 percent of
the average temperature difference
across the catalyst bed during the most
recent performance test at which
destruction efficiency was determined
as specified under I 60.493.
(c) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
maintain at the source. for a period of at
least 2 years. records of all data and
calculations used to determine VOC
emissions from each affected faciity in
the initial and monthly performance
1.1.1-).42
tests. Where compliance is achieved
through the use ofthermal incineration.
each owner or operator shall maintain.
at the source, daily records of the
incinerator combustion chamber
temperature. If catalytic incineration is
used. the owner or operator shall
maintain at the source daily records of
the gas temperature, both upstream and
downstream of the incinerator catalyst
bed. Where compliance is achieved
through the use of a solvent recovery
system. the owner or operator ahall
maintain at the source daily records of
the amount of solvent recovered by the
oystem for each affected facility.
(d) The requirements of this
subsection remain in force until and
unless EPA. in delegating enforcement
authority to a State under Section 111(C)
of the Act. approves reporting
requirements or an alternative means of
compliance surveillance adopted by
8uch State. In that event. affected
facilities within the State will be
relieved of the obligation to comply with
this subsection. provided that they
comply with the requirements
established by the State.

(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under control number 206()..C()()1)'
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act 89 amended (42
U.S.C. 1714))

~ 50.496 Test methods and procedures.
(a) The reference methods in
Appendix A to this part, except as
provided in I 60.8. shall be used to
conduct performance tests.
(1) Reference Method 24, an
equivalent or alternative method
approved by the Administrator, or
manufacturers formulation for data from
which the VOC content of the coatings
used for each affected facility can be
calculated. In the event of dispute,
Reference Method 24 shall be the referep
method. When VOC content of
waterborne coatings, determined from
data generated by Reference Method 24.
is used to determine compliance of .
affected facilities, the results of the
Method 24 analysis shall be adjusted as
described in 'Section 4.4 of Method 24.
(2) Reference Method 25 or an
equivalent or alte~ative method for the
determination of the VOC concentration
in the effluent gas entering and leaving
the control device for each stack
-------
volumetric flow rate.
(iii) Method 3 for 8as analysis. and
(iv) Method 4 for stack 8as moisture.
(b) For Reference Method 24. the
coating sample must be a I-litre sample
collected in a I-litre container at a point
where the sample will be representative
of the coating material.
(c) For Reference Method 25. the
sampling time for each of three nms
must be at least 1 hour. The minimum
sample volume must be 0.003 dscm
except that shortenampling times or
smaller volumes. when necessitated by
process variables or other factors. may
be approved by the Administrator. The
Administrator will approve the sampling
of representative stacks OD a case-by-
case basis if the owner or operator caD
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Adminjstrator that the testing of
representative stacks would yield
results comparable to those that would
.be obtained by testing all stacks.

(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))
Proposed/effective
45 FR 78980
Promu1 qated
48 FR 38728. 8/25/83 (197)
111...143
-------
Subpart XX-Standards of
Performance for Bulk Gasoline
Terminals 195

~ 60.500 Applicability and designation o~
affected facility.
(a) The affected facility to which the
provisions of this subpart apply is the
total of all the loading racks at a bulk
gasoline terminal which deliver liquid
product into gasoline tank trucks.
(b) Each facilitY under paragraph (a)
of this section, the construction or
modification of which is commenced
after December 17,1980, is subject to the
provisions of this subpart.
(c) For purposes of this subpart, any
replacement of components of an
existing facility, described in paragraph
~ 6O.500(a), commenced before August
18, 1983 in order to comply with any
emission standard adopted by a State or
political subdivision thereof will not be
considered a reconstruction under the
provisions of 40 CPR 6D.15.

[Note: The intent of these otandards is to
minimize the emissions of VOC through the
application of best demonstrated'
technologies (BDT). The numerical emission
limits in this standard are expressed in termo
of total organic compounds. This emission
limit reflects the performance of BDT.)
n 60.50-1 Deflnltlol't8.
The terms used in this subpart are
defined in the Clean Air Act, in I 60.2 of
this part. or in this section as follows:
"Bulk gasoline terminal" means any
gasoline facility which receives gasoline
by pipeline, ship or barge. and has a
gasoline throughput greater than 75.700
liters per day. Gasoline throughput shall
be the maximum calculated design
iliroughput as may be limited by
compliance with an enforceable
condition under Federal. State or local
law and discoverable by the
Administrator and any other person.
"Continuous vapor processing
system" means a vapor processing
system that treats total organic
compounds vapors collected from
gasoline tank trucks on a demand basis
without intermediate accumulation in a
vapor holder.
"Existing vapor processing system"
means a vapor processing system
Icapable of achieving emissions to the
atmosphere no greater than 80
milligrams of total organic compounds
per liter of gasoline loaded], the
construction or refurbishment of which
was commenced before December 17,
1980, and which was not constructed or
refurbished after that date.
"Gasoline" means any petroleum
distillate or petroleum distillate/alcohol
blend having a Reid vapor pressure of
27.6 kilopascals or greater which is used
as a fuel for internal combustion
engines.
"Gasoline tank truck" means a
delivery tank truck used at bulk gasoline
terminals which is loading gasoline or
which has loaded gasoline on the
immediately previous load.
"Intermittent vapor processing
system" means a vapor processing
system that employs an intermediate
vapor holder to accumulate total organic
compoundc vapors collected from
gasoline tank trucks, and treats the
accumulated vapors only during
automatically controlled cycles.
"Loading rack" means the loading
arms, pumps, meters, shutoff valves,
relief valves, and other piping and
valves necessary to fill delivery tank
trucks.
"Refurbishment" means, with
reference to a vapor processing system,
replacement of components of, or
addition of components to. the system
within any 2-year period such that the
fixed capital cost of the new
components required for such
component replacement or addition
exceeds 50 percent of the cost of a
comparable entirely new system.
''Total organic compounds" means
those compounds measured according to
the procedures in i 60.503.
"Vapor collection system" means any
equipment used for containing total
organic compounds vapors displaced
during the loading of gasoline tank
trockc.
"Vapor processing system" means all
equipment used for recovering or
oxidizing total organic compounds
vapors displaced from the affected
facility.
"Vapor-tight gasoline tank truck"
means a gasoline tank truck which has
demonstrated within the 12 preceding
months that its product delivery tank
will sustain a pressure change of not
more than 750 pascals (75 mm of water)
within 5 minutes after it is pressurized
to 4,500 pascals (450 mm of water). This
capability is to be demonstrated using
the pressure test procedure specified in
Reference Method 27.

f 60.502 Standard for Volatile Organic
CornpouM1 (VOC) emissions from bulk
gasoline terminals.

On and after the date on which
A 6O.6(a) requires a performance test to
be completed, the owner or operator of
each bulk gasoline terminal cantaining
an affected facility shall comply with
the requirements of this sectier.. 213,
(a) Each affected facility shail be
equipped with a vapor collection system
designed to collect the total organic
compounds vapors displaced from tank
trucks during product loading.
11I-144
(b) The emissions to the atmosphere
from the vapor collection system due to
the loading of liquid product into
gasoline tank trucks are not to exceed 35
milligrams of total organic compounds
per liter of gasoline loaded, except as
noted in paragraph (c) of this section.
(c) For each affected facility equipped
with an existing vapor processing
syslem, the emissions to the atmosphere
from the vapor collection system due to
the loading of liquid product into
gasoline tank trucks are not to exceed 80
milligrams of total organic compounds
per liter of gasoline loaded.
(d) Each vapor collection system shall
be designed to prevent any total organic
compounds vapors collected alone
loading rack from passing to another
loading rack.
(e) Loadings of liquid product into
gasoline tank trucks shall be limited to
vapor-tight gasoline tank trucks using
the following procedures:
(1) The owner or operator shall obtain
the vapor tightness documentation
described in 160.505(b) for each
gasoline tank truck which is to be
loaded at the affected facility.
(2) The owner or operator shall
require the tank identification number to
be recorded as each gasoline tank truck
is loaded at the affected facility.
(3) The owner or operator shall cross-
check each tank identification number
obtained in (e)(2) of this section with the
file of tank vapor tightness
documentation within 2 weeks after the
corresponding tank is loaded.
(4) The terminal owner or operator
shall notify the owner or operator of
each nonvapor-tight gasoline tank truck
loaded at the affected facility within 3
weeks after the loading has occurred.
(5) The terminal owner or operator
shall take steps assuring that the
nonvapor-tight gasoline tank truck will
not be reloaded at the affected facility
until vapor tightness documentation for
that tank is obtained.
(6) Alternate procedures to those
described in (e)(l) through (5) of this
section for limiting gasoline tank truck
loadings may be used upon application
to. and approval by, the Administrator.
(f) The owner or operator shall act to
assure that 10adinJs of gasoline tank
trucks at the affected facilitv are made
only into tanks equipped wfth vapor
collection equipment that is compatible
with the terminal's \'apor collection
system.
(g) The owner or operator shall act to
assure that the terminal's and the tank
truck's vapor collection systems are
connected during each loading of a
gasoline tank truck at the affected
facility. Examples of actions to
-------
accomplish this include training drivers
in the hookup procedures and posting
visible reminder signs at the affected
loading racks.
(h) The vapor collection and liquid
loading equipment shall be designed and
operated to prevent gauge pressure in
the delivery tank from exceeding 4,500
pascals (450 mm of water) during
product loading. This level is not to be
exceeded when measured by the
procedures specified in IOO.503(b).
(i) No pressure-vacuum vent in the
bulk gasoline terminal's vapor collection
system shall begin to open at a system
pressure less than 4.500 pascals (450 mm
of water).
(j) Each calendar month, the vapor
collection system, the vapor processing
system, and each loading rack handling
gasoline shall be inspected during the
loading of gasoline tank trucks for total
organic compounds liquid or vapor
leaks. For purposes of this paragraph,
detection methods incorporating sight,
sound. or smell are acceptable. Each
detection of a leak shall be recorded and
the source of the leak repaired within 15
calendar days after it is detected.

(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budgerunder control number 2060-0006)

180.503 Tnt method. and procedureL
(a) Section 6O.8(f) does not apply to
the performance test procedures
required by this subpart.
(b) For the purpose of determining
compliance with I OO.502(h). the
following procedures shall be used:
(1) Calibrate and install a pressure
measurement device (liquid manometer,
magnehelic gauge. or equivalent
instrument), capable of measuring up to
500 mm of water gauge pressure with
~2.5 mm of water precision.
(2) Connect the pressure measurement
device to a pressure tap in the terminal's
vapor collection system, located a9 close
as possible to the connection with the
gasoline tank truck.
(3) During the performance test.
record the pressure every 5 minutes
while a gasoline tank truck is being
loaded. and record the highest
instantaneous pressure that occurs
during each loading. Every loading
position must be tested at least once
durinR the performance test. 213
(c) For the purpose of determining
compliance with the mass emission
limitations of ~ 5O.502(b) and (c). the
following reference methods shall be
uscd:
(1) For the determination of volume at
the exhaust vent:
(i) Method 28 for combustion vapor
processing systems.
(ii) Method 2A for all other vapor
processing systems.
(2) For the determination of total
organic compounds concentration at the
exhaust vent. Method 25A or 258. The
calibration gas shall be either propane
or butane.
(d) Immediately prior to a
performance test required for
determination of cl'."1lpliance with
i OO.502(b), (c), and (h), all potential
sources of vapor leakage in the
terminal's vapor collection system
equipment shall be monitored for leaks
using Method 21. The monitoring shall
be conducted only while a gasoline tank
truck is being loaded. A reading of
10,000 ppmv or greater as methane shall
be considered a leak. All leaks shall be
repaired prior to conducting the
performance test.
(e) The test procedure for determining
compliance with IOO.502(b) and (c) is as
follows:
(1) All testing equipment shall be
prepared and installed as specified in
the appropriate.test methods.
(2) The time period for a performance
test shall be not less than 6 hours,
during which at least 300,000 liters of
gasoline are loaded. If the throughput
criterion is not met during the initial 6
hours, the test may be either continued
until the throughput criterion is met, or
resumed the next day with another
complete 8 hours of testing. As much as
possible. testing should be conducted
during the 6-hour period in which the
highest throughput normally occurs.
(3) For intermittent vapor processing
systems:
(i) The vapor holder level shall be
recorded at the start of the performance
test. The end of the performance test
shall coincide with a time when the
vapor holder is at its original level.
(ii) At least two startups and
shutdowns of the vapor processor shall
occur during the performance test. If this
does not occur under automatically
controlled operation. the system shall be
manually controlled.
(4) The volume of gasoline dispensed
during the performance test period at all
IOllding racks whose vapor emissions
are controlled by the processing system
being tested shall be determinpd. This
volume may be determined from
terminal records or from gasollile
dispensing meters at each load;ng rack.
(5) An emission testing interval shall
consist of each 5-minute period during
the performance test. For each intervcl:
(i) The reading from each
measurement instrument shall be
recorded, and
111-145
(ii) The volume exhausted and the
average total organic compounds
concentration in the exhaust vent shall
be determined, as specified in the
appropriate test method. The a\'erage
total organic compounds concentration
shall correspond to the volume
measurement by taking into account the
sampling system response time.
(6) The mass emitted during each
testing interval shall be calculated as
fQ)lows:
Me, = 10. 'KV.C.

where:

M.,=mass of total organic compounds
emitted during testing interval i. mg.
V..=volume of air-vapor mixture exhausted.
m". at standard conditions.
C. = total organic comp:mnds concentration
(as measured) at the exhaust vent. ppnl\',
K=density of calibration gas. mg/m". at
standard conditions
..1.83 X 10', for propane
=2.41 X 10', for butane 213

s = standard conditions. W'C and 760 mm Hg.

(7) The total organic compounds mass
emissions shall be calculated as follows:
D
1M...
E- cr-
where: 213

E=mass of total organic compounds emitted
per volume of gasoline loaded. mg/liter.
M.1=mass of total organic compounds
emitted during testing interval i, mg.
L = total volume of gasoline loaded. Ii ters.
n=number of testing i:::tervals.

(f) The owner or operator may adjust
the emission results to exclude the
methane and ethane content in the
exhaust vent by any method approved
by the Administrator.

ISec. 114 of the Cle..n Air Act as amended (42
V.S.C. 7414))
(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under control number 2060-0006.)
060.504 [Reserved).

f 60.505 Reporting and recordkeeplng.
(a) The tank truck vapor tightness
documentation required under
160.502(eJ(1) shall be kept on file at the
termi;lal in a permanent form avaii",ble
for insrei.!ion.
(b] Tbe documentation file for each
gaso!ine ta:1k truck shall be updated at
le:!st once per year to re!1ect current test
results as determined bv Method 27.
This dncumentation sh~1I include. as a
mi:1imum. the following information:
(1) Test Title: Gaso!ine Delivery Tank
Pressure Test-EPA Reference Method
27.
-------
(2) Tank Owner and Address.
(3) Tank Identification Number.
(4) Testing Location.
(5) Date of Test.
(6) Tester Name and Signature.
(7) Witnessing Inspector. if any:
Name. Signature. and Affiliation.
(8) Test Results: Actual Pressure
Change in 5 minutes. mm of water
(average for 2 runs).
(c) A record of each monthly leak
inspectIOn required under fi 6O.502(j)
sk:l be kept on file at the terminal for
at icast 2 years. Inspection records shall
ine l~lde. as a minimum. the following
information:
(1) Date of Inspection.
[2) Findings (may indicate no leaks
discovered: or location. nature. and
severity of each leak).
(3) Leak determination method.
(4) Corrective Action (date each leak
repaired; reasons for any repair interval
in excess of 15 days).
(5) Inspector Name anJ Signature.
(d) The termina! owner or operator
sLaH keep documentation of all
notifications required under
~ 6O.502{e)(4) on file at the terminal for
at least 2 years.
(e) [Reserved].
(f) The owner or operator of an
affected facility shail keep records of all
replacements or additions of
components performed on an existing
vapor processing system for at least 3
years.

[Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act a6 amended (42
V.S.C. 7414]]
r Approved by the Office of Management and
Bud!,et under control number 2060--000O.)
~ 60.506 Reconstruction.
For purposes of this subpart:
(a) The cost of the following
frequently replaced components of the
affected facilitv shall not be considered
in calculating ~ither the "fixed capital
cost of the new components" or the
"fixed capital costs that would be
required to construct a comparable
entirely new facility" under S 60.15:
pump seals. loading arm gaskets and
swivels, coup:er gaskets. overfill sensor
couplers and cables. flexible vapor
hcses, and groanding cables and
connectors.
(b) Under S 60.15. the "fhed capital
cost of the new components" includes
the fixed capital cost of all depreciable
components !except components
specified in S 60.506(a)] which are or
wi!! be replaced pursuanl to all
continuous programs of component
replacement which arc commenceu
within any 2-year period following
Dccember 17. 1980. For purposes of this
paragraph, "commenced" means that an
owner or operator has undertaken a
continuous program of component
replacement or that an owner or
operator has entered into a contractual
obligation to undertake and complete.
within a reasonable time. a continuous
program of component replacement.
[Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
V.S.C.7414]]
Proposed/effective
45 FR 83126, 12/17/80
Promu 1 Qa ted
48 FR 37578, 8/18/83 (195)
~
48 FR 56580, 12/22/83 (213)
111-146
-------
Subpart FFF-Standards of
Performance for Flexible Vinyl and
Urethane Coating and Printing 231

fi 60.580 Applicability and designation of
affected facility.

(a) The affected facility to which the
provisions of this subpart apply is each
rotogravure printing line used to print or
coat flexible vinyl or urethane products.
(b) This subpart applies to any
affected facility which begins
construction, modification, or
reconstruction after January 18, 1983.
(c) For facilities controlled by a
solvent recovery emission control
device, the provisions of 160.584(a)
requiring monitoring of operations will
not apply until EPA has promulgated
performance specifications under
Appendix B for the continuous
monitoring system. After the
promulgation of performance
specifications, these provisions will
apply to each affected facility under
paragraph ;b) of this section. Facilities
controlled by a solvent recovery
emission control device that become
subject to the standard prior to
promulgation of performance
specifications must conduct
performance tests in accordanC'.e with
150.13Ib) after performance
specifications are promulgated.

~ 60.581 Definitions and symbols.
(a) All terms used in this subpart, not
defined below, are given the same
meaning as in the Act or in Subpart A of
this parI.
"Emission control device" means any
solvent recovery or solvent destruction
device used to control volatile organic
compounds (VOC) emissions from
flexible vinyl and urethane rotogravure
printing lines,
"Emission control system" means the
combination of an emission control
device and a vapor capture system for
the purpose of reducing VOC emissions
from flexible vinyl and urethane
rotogravure printing lines.
"Flexible .-inyl and urethane
products" mean those products, except
for resilient floor coverings (1977
Standard Industry Code 3996) and
flexible packaging, that are more than 50
micrometers (0.002 inches) thick, and
that cOI'1~jst of or contain a vinyl or
uretha!1e sheet or a vinyl or urethane
coated ''''eb,
"Gravure ~ylinder" means a plated
cylinder with a printing image consisting
of minute cells or indentations,
specifically engraved or etched into the
cylinder's surface to hold ink when
continuously revolved through a
fountain of ink,
"Ink" means any mixture of ink.
coating solids, organic solvents
including dilution solvent, and ...'ater
that is applied to the web of flexible
vinyl or urethane on a rotogravure
printing line.
"Ink solids" means the solids content
of an ink as determined by Reference
Method 24, ink manufacturer's
formulation data. or plant blending
records.
"Inventory system" means a method
of physically accounting for the quantity
of ink, solvent. and solids used at one or
more affected facilities during a time
period. The system is based on p!ant
purchase or inventory records.
"Plant blending records" means those
records which document the weight
fraction of organic solvents and solids
used in the formulation or preparation of
inks at the vinyl or urethane printing
plant where they are used.
"Rotogravure print slation" means
any device designed to print or coat inks
on one side of a continuous web or
substrate using the intaglio printing
process with a gravure cylinder.
"Rotogravure printing line" means any
number of rotogravure print stations and
associated dryers capable of printing or
coaling simultaneously on the same
continuous vinyl or urethane web or
substrate, which is fed from a
continuous roll.
"Vapor capture system" means any
device or combination of devk:es
designed to contain. collect. and route
organic solvent vapors emitted from the
flexible vinyl or urethane rotogravure
printing line.
(b) All symbols used in this subpart
not defined below are given the SHme
meaning as in the Act or in Subpart A of
this part.
"a" means the gas stream vents
exiting the emission control device.
"b" means the 8as stream vents
entering the emission control device.
"f' means the 8as stream vents which
are not directed to an emission control
device.
"Cat means the concentration of VOC
in each gas stream (j) for the time period
exiling the emission control device, in
parts per million by volume.
"CIn" means the concentration or vac
in each gas stream (i) for tbe time period
entering the emission control device, in
parts per million by volume.
"CIk" means the concentration of vac
in each gas stream (k) foc the time
period which is not directed to an
emission control device. in parts per
million by volume.
"G" means the weighted average
mass of vac per mass of ink solids
applied, in kilograms pet' kilogram.
"Mo" means the total mass of each
ink Ii) applied in the time period as
determined from plant records, in
kilograms.
1II-147
"M.s;" means the total mass of each
dilution solvent (j) added at the print
line in the time period determined from
plant records, in kilograms.
"Qat means the volumetric flow rate
of each effluent gas stream (j) exiting the
emission control device. in standard
cubic meters per hour.
"~" means the volumetric flow rale
of each emuenl gas stream Ii) entering
the emission control device. in slandard
cubic meters per hour. 237
"QIk" means the volumelric flow rate
of each effluent gas stream (k) not
directed to an emission control device,
in standard cubic meters per hour.
"E" means the vac emission
reduction efficiency (as a fraction) of Ihe
emission control device during
performance testing.
"F" means the vac emission capture
efficiency (as a fraction) of the vapor
capture system during performance
testing.
"Wo," means the weight fraction of
VOC in each ink (i) used in the time
period as determined from Referenr:e
Method 24, manufacturer's formulation
data, or plant blending records. in
kilograms per kilogram.
"W.."mcans the weight fraction of
solids in each ink (i) used in the time
period as determined from Reference
Method 24, manufacturer's formulation
data, or plant blending records. in
kilograms per kilogram.
"Wot means the weight fraction of
vac in each dilution solvent OJ added
at the print line in the time period
determined from Reference Method 24,
manufacturer's formulation data, or
plant blending records. in kilograms per
kilogram.

~ 60.582 Standard for volatile organic
compounds.
(a) On and after the date on which the
performance test required by A 50.8 has
been completed, each owner or operator
subject to this subpart shall either:
(1) Use inks with a weighted average
vac content less th3n 1.0 kilogram
vac per kilogram ink solids at each
affected facility, or
(2) Reduce vac emissions to the
atmosphere by 85 percent from each
affected "3cility.

~ 60.583 Test methods and procedures.
(a) Reference Methods in Appendix A
of this part, except as provided under
i 50.8(b). shall be used to determine
compliance with i 50.582.{a) as follows:
(1) Method 24 for analysis of inks. If
nonphotochemically reactive sol\'el1ls
are used in the inks, standard gas
chromatographic techniques may be
used to identify and quantify these
sol\'ents. The results of Reference
-------
Method 24 may be adjusted to subtract
these solvents from the measured VOC
content.
(2) Method 25A for VOC
concentration (the calibration gas shall
be propane):
(3) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses:
(4) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric flow rates:
(5) Method 3 for gas analysis: 237
(6) Method 4 for stack gas moisture.
(b) To demonstrate compliance with
~ 6O.582(a)(1). the owner or operator of
an affected facility shall determine the
weighted average'VOC content of the
inks according to the following
procedures: .
(1) Determine and record the VOC
content and amount of each ink used at
the print head. including the VOC
content and amount of diluent solvent.
for any time periods when VOC
emission control equipment is not used.
(2) Compute the weighted average
VOC content by the following equation:
n
r
G = ;=1
m
r
j=l
(w .Md')
OJ J
(W .M .) +
01 C 1
n
r (M. W .)
;=1 C1 51
(3) The weighted average VOC
content of the inks shall be calculated
over a period that does not exceed one
calendar month. or four consecutive
weeks. A facilitv that uses an
accounting syst~m based on quarters
consisting of two 28 calendar day
periods and one 35 calendar day period
may use an averaging period of 35
calendar days four times per year.
provided the use of such an accounting
system is documented in the initial
performance test.
(4) Each determination of the
weighted a\'erage VOC content shall
constitute a performance test for any
period when VOC emission control
equipment is not used. Results of the
initial performance test must be
reported to the Administrator. Reference
Method 24 or ink manufacturers'
formulation data along with plant
blending records (if plant blending is
done) may be used to determine VOC
content. The Administrator may require
the use of Reference Method 24 if there
is a question concerning the accuracy of
the ink manufacturer's data or plant
blending records.
(5) If. during the time periods when
emission control equipment is not used.
all inks used contain less than 1.0
kilogram VOC per kilogram ink solids.
the owner or operator is not required to
calculate the weighted average VOC
content, but must verify and record the
VOC content of each ink (including any
added dilution solvent) used as
determined by Reference Method 24. ink
manufacturers' formulation data. or
plant blending records.
(c) To demonstrate compliance with
~ 6O.582(a)(1). the owner or operator
may determine the weighted average
VOC content using an inventory system.
(1) The inventory system shall
accurately account to the nearest
kilogram for the VOC content of all inks
and dilution solvent used, recycled. and
discarded for each affected facility
during the 8veraging period. Separate
records must be kept for each affected
facilitv.
(2) To determme VOC content of inks
and dilution solvent used or recycled.
Reference Method 24 or ink
manufacturers' formulation data must be
used in combination with plant blending
records (if plant blending is done) or
inventory records or purchase records
for new inks or dilution solvent.
(3) For inks to be discarded, only
Reference Method 24 shall be used to
determine the VOC content. Inks to be
discarded may be combined prior to
measurement of volume or weight and
testing by Reference Method 24.
(4) The Administrator may require the
use of Reference Method 24 if there is a
question concerning the 8ccuracy of the
ink manufacturer's data or plant
records.
(5) The Administrator shall approve
the inventory system of accounting for
VOC content prior to the initial
performance test.
(d) To demonstrate compliance with
160.582(a)(2). the owner or operator of
an affected facility controlled by 8
solvent recovery emission control
device or 811 incineration control device
shall conduct 8 performance test to
determine overall VOC emission control
efficiency according to the following
proct:dures:
(1) The performance test shall consist
of three runs. Each test run must last a
minimum of 30 minutes and shall
continue until the printing operation is
interrupted or until 180 minutes of
continuous operation occurs. During
each test run. the print line shall be
printing continuously and operating
normally. The VOC emission reduction
efficiency achieved for each test run is
averaged over the entire test run period.
(2) VOC concentration values at each
site shall be measured simultaneously.
(3) The volumetric flow rate shall be
determined from one Method 2
measurement for each test run
conducted immediately prior to. during.
or after that test run. Volumetric flow
rates at each site do not need to be
measured simultaneously.
(4) In order to determine capture
111-.148
efficiency from an affected facility. all
fugitive VOC emissions from the
affected facility shall be captured and
vented through stacks suitable for
measurement. During a performance
test. the owner or operator of an
affected facility located in an area with
other sources of VOC shall isolate the
affected facility from other sources of
VOC. These two requirements shall be
accomplished using one of the following
methods:
(i) Build a permanent enclosure
around the affected facility:
(ii) Build a temporary enclo~ure
around the affected facility and
duplicate. to an extent that is
reasonably feasible. the ventilation
conditions that are in effect when the
affected facility is not enclosed (one
way to do this is to divide the room
exhaust rate by the volume of the room
and then duplicate that quotient or 20
air changes per hour, whichever is
smaller. in the temporary enclosure); or
(iii) Shut down all other sources of
VOC and continue to exhaust fugitive
emissions from the affected facility
through any building ventilation system
and other room exhausts such as print
line ovens tmd embossers.
(5) For each affected faciIit},.
compliance with 160.582(a)(2) has been
demonstrated if the average value of the
overall control efficiency (EF) for the
three runs is equal to or greater than 85
percent. An overall control efficiency is
calculated for each run as follows:
(i) For efficiency of the emission
control device.
n m
[ (Qb;Cb;) - [ (QajCaj)
[=;=1 j=1
n
[ (Qb;Cbi)
;=1
(ii) For efficiency of the vapor capture
system.
F =
n
[ ( Qb; Cb; )
;=1
p
(Qb;Cb;) + I (QfkCfk)
k=l
n
I
;=1
(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act as amended 142
U.S.C, 7414])

f 60.584 Monitoring of operations and
recordkeeping requirements.

(a) The owner or operator of an
affected facility controlled by a solvent
recovery emission control device shall
install, calibrate. operate, and maintain
-------
a monitoring system which continuously
measures and records the VOC
concentration' of the exhaust vent
stream from the control device and shall
comply with the following requirements:
(1) The continuous monitoring system
shall be installed in a location that is
representative of the VOC concentration
in the exhaust vent. at least two
equivalent stack diameters from the
exhaust point, and protected from
interferences due to wind. weather, or
other processes.
(2) During the performance test, the
owner or operator shall determine and
record the average exhaust vent VOC
concentration in parts per million by
volume. After the performance test, the
owner or operator shall determine and.
in addition to the record made by the
continuous monitoring device, record
the average exhaust vent VOC
concentration for each 3-hour clock
period of printing operation when the
average concentration is greater than 50
ppm and more than 20 percent greater
than the average concentration value
demonstrated during the most recent
performance test.
(b) The owner or operator of an
affected facility controlled by a thermal
incineration emission control device
shall install. calibrate. operate, and
maintain a monitoring de\ ice that
continuously measures and records the
temperature of the control device
exhaust gases and shall comply with the
following requirements:
(1) The continuous monitoring device
shall be calibrated annually and have
an accuracy of :to.75 percent of the
temperature being measured or :t2.5° C.
whichever is greater.
(2) During the performance test. the
owner or operator shall determine and
record the average temperature of the
control device exhaust gases. After the
performance test, the owner or operator
shall determine and record. in addition
to the record made by the continuous
monitoring device, the average
temperature for each 3-hour clock period
of printing opP.l'ation when the average
temperature of the exhaust gases is
more than 28° C below the average
temperature demonstrated during the
most recent performance test.
(c) The owner or operator of an
affected facility controlled by a catalytic
incineration emission control device
shall install, calibrate, operate, and
maintain monitoring devices that
continuously measure and record the
gas temperatures both upstream and
downstream of the catalyst bed and
shall comply with the following
requirements:
(1) Each continuous monitoring device
shall be calibrated annually and have
an accuracy of :to.75 percent of the
temperature being measured or :t2.5° C,
whichever is greater.
(2) During the perfurmance test, the
owner or operator shall determine and
record the average gas temperature both
upstream and downstream of the
catalyst bed. After the performance test.
the owner or operator shall determine
and record, in addition to the record
made by the continuous monitoring
device. the average temperatures for
each 3-hour clock period of printing
operation when the average temperature
of the gas stream before the catalyst bed
is more than 28°C below the average
temperature demonstrated during the
most recent performance test or the
average temperature difference across
the catalyst bed is less than 80 percent
of the average temperature difference of
the device during the most recent
performance test.
(d) The owner or operator of an
affected facility shall record time
periods of operation when an emission
control device is not in use.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))
(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under the conlrol number 20G0-00i3)
111-149
f 60.585 Reporting requirements.
(a) For all affected facilities subject to
compliance with i 60.582. the
performance test data and results from
the performance test shall be submitted
to the Administrator as specified in
160.8(a).
(b) The owner or operator of each
affected facility shall submit semiannual
reports to the Administrator of
occurrences of the following:
(1) Exceedances of the weighted
average VOC content specified in
160.582(a)(1):
(2) Exceedances of the average value
of the exhaust vent VOC concentration
as defined under 160.584(a)(2):
(3) Drops in the incinerator
temperature as defined under
t 6O.584(b)(2); and
(4) Drops in the average temperature
of the gas stream immediately before the
catalyst bed or drops in the average
temperature across the catalyst bed as
ddined under t 6O.584(c)(2).
(c) The reports required under
paragraph !b) shall be postmarked
within 30 days following the end of the
second and fourth calendar quarters.
(d) The requirements of this
subsection remain in force until and
unless the Agency. in delegating
enforcement authori:y to a Stale under
Section 111(c) of the Act. approves
reporting requirements or an alternative
means of compliance surveillance
adopted by such States. In that event,
affected sources within the State will be
relieved of the obligHtion to comply with
this subsection. provided that they
comply with requirements established
by the State.

(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C.7414))
(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under the control number 2060-00i3)
Proposed/effective
48 FR 2276. 1/18/83
Promulgated
49 FR 26884, 6/29/84 (231)
Revised
49 FR 32848, 8/17/84 (237)
-------
Subpart GGG-Standards o~
Performance for Equipment leaks of
VOC In Petroleum Refineries 22 7

fi 60.590 Applicability and designation of
~ffected 'acillty.

(a)(1) The provisions of this subpart
apply to affected facilities in. petroleum
refinerie8.
(2) A compressor is an affected
facility.
(3) The group of all the equipment
(defined in ~ 60.591) within a pro(;es~
unit is an affected facility.
(b) An\' affected facility under
paragrap'h (a) of this sectlon that
commences construction or modification
after January 4. 1983. is subject to the
requirements of this subpart.
(c) Addition or replacement of
equipment (defined in fi 60.591) for the
purpose of process impro\'ement which
is accomplished without a capital
expenditure shall not by itself be
considered a modification under this
Gubpart.
(d) Facilities subject to Subpart VV or
Subpart KKK of 40 CFR Part 60 are
excluded from this subpart.

g 00.691 Dtiftnltlona.

As used in this subpart. all terms nOI
defined herein shall have the meaning
gl'ven them in the Act. in Subpart A of
Part 60. or in Subpart VV of Part 60. and
the following terms shall have the
specific meanings given them.
"Alaskan North Slope" means the
approximately 69.000 square mile areil
extending from the Brooks Range to the
Arctic Ocean.
"Equipment" menns each valve. pump.
pressure relief device. sampling
connection system. open-ended valve or
line. and flange or other connector in
VOC service. For the purposes of
recordkeeping and reporfing only.
compressors are considered equipment.
"In Hydrogen Service" means that a
compressor contains a process fluid thilt
meets the conditions specified in
A 6O.593(b).
"In Light Liquid Service" means that
the piece of equipment contains a liquid
that meets the conditions specified in
1 eo.593(c).
"Petroleum Refinery" means any
facility engaged in producing gasoline.
kerosene. distillate fuel oils. residual
fuel oils. lubricants. or other products
through the distillation of petroleum, or
through the redistillation, cracking, or
refonning of unfinished petroleum
derivatives.
"Petruleum" means the crude oil
remuved from the earth and the oils
derived from tar sands, shale, and coal.
"Process Unit" means components
assembled to produce intermediate or
final products from petroleum.
unfinished petroleum derivatives. or
other intermediates: a process unit can
operate independently if supplied with
sufficient feed or raw materials and
sufficient storage facilitif!s for the
proJu\:1
~ 60.592 Standards.

(a) EdLh uwner or upl!rator subject to
the pJ'o\'i~ions of this subpart shall
comply with the requirements of
~ 60.482-1 to i 60.4.82-10 as soon as
practicable. but no later than 180 days
after initial startup.
(b) An owner or operator may elect to
comply with the requirements of
~ 60.4.:n-1 ilnd ~ 60.483-2.
(c) Ar. ,m'ner or operator may apply to
the Admm:stra\or fur a determination of
equivalency for any means of emission
limitation thaI achieves a reduction in
emissions of \'OC at least equivalent to
the reductiun in emissions of VOC
achieved by the controls required in this
subpart. In doing so. the owner or
operator shdll comply with requirements
of A 60.484.
(d) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with the pro\' isions of ~ 60.485
except as provided in A 60.593.
(e) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with the provisions of ~ 60.486
and fi 60.487.

(Sec. 114 of Cean ..\ir Ac! as amended (42
V.S.c. i4H~1

~ 60.593 Exceptions.

(0) Each owner or operator subject to
t!;e provisions of this subpart may
comply with the following exceptions to
the pro\'isbns of Subpart VV.
(b)(1) Compressors in hydrogen
service are exempt from the
requirements of i 60.592 if an owner or
operator demonstrates that a
compressor is in hydrogen service.
(2) Each compressor is presumed not
be be in hydrogen service unless an
owner or operator demonstrates that the
piece of equipment is in hydrogen
service. For a piece of equipment to be
considered in hydrogen service, it must
be determined that the percent hydrogen
content can be reasonably expected
always to exceed 50 percent by volume.
For purposes of detennining the percent
hydrogen c~mtent in the process fluid
that is contained in or contacts a
compressor, procedures that conform to
the general method described in ASTM
E-2eO, E-168, or E-169 (incorporated by
reference as specified in 160.17) shall be
used.
III-ISO
(3)(i) An owner or operator may use
engineering judgment rather than
procedures in paragraph (b)(2) of this
section to demonstrate that the percenl
content exceeds 50 percent by volume.
provided the engineering judgment
demonstrates that the content clearly
exceeds 50 percent by volume. When an
owner or operator and the
Administrator do not agree on whether
a piece of equipment is in hydrogen
service, however. the procedures in
paragraph (b)(2) shall be used to resolve
the disagreement.
(ii) If an owner or operator determines
that a piece of equipment is in hydrogen
service, the determination can be
revised only after following the
procedures in paragraph (0)(2).
(c) Any existing reciprocating
compressor that becomes an affected
facility under provisions of g 60.14 or
Ii 60.15 is exempt from t 60.482 (a), (b).
(c), (d), (e). and (h) provided the owner
or operator demonstrates that recasting
the' distance piece or replacing the
compressor are the only options
available to bring the compressor into
compliance with the provisions of
~ 60.482 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), and (h).
(d) An owner or operator may use the
following provision in addition 10
160.485(e): Equipment is in light liquid
service if the percent evaporated is
greater than 10 percent at 150°C as
determined by ASTM Method D-86
(incorporated by reference as specified
in t 60.18).
(e) Pumps in light liquid service and
valves in gl!s/vapor and light liquid
service within a process unit that is
located in the Alaskan North Slope are
exempt from the requirements of
A 60.482-2 and A 60.482-7.
Proposed/effective
48 FR 279, 1/4/83
Promu19ated
49 FR 22598, 5/30/84 (227)
-------
Subpart HHH-5t8nd8n18 of
P8rf0rm8nC8 for Synthetic: fiber
f'toductlon F8Cl11tIe8 222

18G.8oo Applubillty 8nd cIe8gn8tIon of
8ffec:t8d f8cIIIty.

(a) Except a8 provided in paragraph
(b) of thi8 section. the affected facility to
which the provi8ionl of thil lubpart
apply il each lolvent-spun synthetic
fiber process that produce8 more than
500 megagrame of fiber per year.
(b) The provisioD8 of thi8 subpart do
not apply to any facility that U888 the
reaction spinning procets to produce
Ipandex fiber or the viscose process to
produce rayon fiber.
(c) The provisioD8 of this subpart
apply to each facility al identified in
paragraph (a) of this section and that
commences con8truction or
reconstruction after November 23. 1982.
The provisioD8 of thil lubpart do not
apply to facilitie8 that commence
modification but not reconstruction after
November 23. 1982.
180.801 o.n..ltlons.
(a) All term8 that are used in this
subpart 8nd are not defined below are
Biven the same meanins u in the Act
and in Subpart A of thil parl
"Acrvlic fiber" means a manufactured
Iynthetic fiber in which the fiber-
forminB subltance il any long-chain
synthetic polymer composed of at least
85 percent by welsht of acrylonitrile
unite.
"Makeup aolvent" meanl the solvent
introduced into the affected facility that
compensatel for aolvent lost from the
affected facility durtD& the
manufacturing proce...
"Nongaleoua 1001es" mean8 the
80lvent that il not volatilized during
fiber production. and that elcapel the
procesl and il unavailable for recovery.
or is in 8 form or concentration
unsuitable for economicaf recovery.
"Polymer" me8D8 any of the natural or
synthetic compouoda of usuaUy hi8h
molecular welsht that conaist of many
repeated linka. each link beins 0
relatively light and limple molecule.
"Precipitation bath" means the water.
aolvent. or other chemical bath into
which the polymer or prepolymer
(partiaUy Nacted material) lolution io
extruded. and that cauee8 phY81cai 0"'
chemical changes to occur in the
extruded IOlution to rallult in e
Mlmihardened polymeric fiber.
"Rayon fibek''' means a manufactured
fib:;)f compolled of resenerated cellul08e.
ai well al manufactured fiOOn
composed of resenerated ooUulose in
which 8ubstituenta have replaced noft
more than 15 percent of the hydrosen8 of
the hydroxyl 8fOUp8.
"Reaction Ipinning proce.." means
the fiber-forming proce8s where a
prepolymer is extruded into a fluid
medium and lolidification takes place
by chemical reaction to form the final
polymeric material.
"Recovered aolvent" meanl the
lonvent captured from liquid and
salBOUi procen Itreama that is
concentrated in a CODtroI device and
that may be purified for reUle.
"Solven. feed" meanl the aolvent
introduced into the Ipinning aolution
preparation syltem or precipitation
bath. Thil feed Itream includes the
combination of recovered solvent and
mmup solvent. 225
''Solvent inventory variation" mean8
the normal chanae8 in the total amount
of lolvent contained in the affected
facility.
''Solvent recovery sYltem" means the
equipment ...ociated with capture.
tranaportation. collection. concentration.
and purification of organic 8Olventa. It
may include encloaurel. hoods. ducting.
pipins. ICnlbbera. condenaera. carbon
adaorbers. distillation equipment. and
asaociated ltorqe V888ela.
"Solvent-apun synthetic fiber" meanl
any Iynthetic fiber produced by a
process that use8 an organic solvent in
the spinning solution. the precipitation
bath. or proce88ins of the lun fiber.
"Solvent-8pun synthetic fiber process"
means the total of aU equipment having
a common spinning lolution preparation
IY8tem or a common lolvent recovery
8Yltem. and that is u8ed in the
manufacture of lolvent-Ipun synthetic
fiber. It includes Ipinning IOlution
preparation. Ipinning. fiber processing
and lolvent recovery. but does not
include the polymer production
equipment.
"Spandex fiber" meana a
maD8factured fiber in which the fiber-
fol'lDin8 lubstance i. a Ions chain
Iyntbetic polymer comprised of at least
85 ",reent of a l881Denred polyurethane.
"Spbming lolation" meana the
mixture of polynier. prepolymer. or
copolymer and additivea diao1ved in
lolvent. The !IOlution is prepared at a
viscosity and aolvent-to-polymer ratio
that is suitable for extruai~ into fibers.
. "Spinning solution preparation
system" meana the equipment used to
prepare spinning solutions; the Iystem
includes equipment for mixing. filtering.
blending. and 8tOrase of the 8pinning
solutions.
"Synthetic fiber" meana any fiber
composed partially or entirely of
materials made by chemical synthesis.
or made partially or entirely from
chemically-modified naturally-occwring
materials.
111:-151
"Viscole process" meana the fiber
fonning proce88 where cellulose and
concentrated caustic soda are reacted to
form soda or alkali cellulole. This reacts
with carbon disulfide to form sodium
cellul08e xanthate. which il then
diuolved in a solution of caustic loda.
After ripening. the lolution il spun into
an acid coagulating bath. This
precipitates the cellulose in the fonn of a
resenerated cellulose filament.

110.802 II8ndn tor YOIdI8 0fpnIc
compound8.

(a) On and after the date on which the
initial performance test required to be
conducted by I 80.8 is completed. no
owner or operator lubject to the
provisioD8 of thil 81Ibpart IhaU cause
the discharge into the atmosphere from
any affected facility that produce8
acrylic fibers. VOC emission8 that
exceed 10 kilosrama (kg) VOC per
mesasram (Ms) .olvent feed to the
8pinning solution preparation 8Y8tem or
precipitation bath. VOC emissions from
affected facilities that produce both
acrylic and nonacrylic fiber types shall
not exceed 10 ks VOC per Ms lolvent
feed. VOC emissions &om affected
facilities that produce only nODacrylic
fiber types shall not exceed 17 ks VOC
per Ms solvent feed. Compliance with
the emission limitations us determined
on a 6-month rollins average basis 88
described in I 80.803.

180.803 P.tormanc. t8IIt ..... ~,""1C8
pro¥l8lOn8.

(a) Section 8O.8(f) does not apply to
the performance test procedurea
required by thi8 subpart
(b) Each owner or operator of an
affected facility Ihall determine
compliance with the applicable 8tand!lrd
in 160.602(a) by determining and
recording monthly the VOC emissions
per Ms solvent feed from each affected
facility for the current and preceding 5
consecutive calendar months and using
these values to calculate the 6-month
average emissions. Eacli1 calculation is
considered a performance test. The
owner or operator of aD effected facility
shall use the following I?rocedure to
determine VQC emissions for each
calendar month:
(1) Install. calibrate. maintain. and
operate monitoring device!) thElt
continuously measure and permanently
record for each calender month the
amount of makeup solvent and Golvent
feed. Thele value!! shall be used in
calculating VOC emiS8ions according to
paragraph (b)(2) of this section. All
monitoring devices. meters. and
peripheral equipment shall be calibrated
and any error recorded. Total
-------
compounded error of the flow measuring
and recording devices shall not exceed 1
percent accuracy over the operating
range. As an alternative to measuring
solvent feed. the owner or operator may:
(i) Measure the amount of recovered
30lvent rerumed to the solvent feed
storage tanks. and use the following
equation to determine the amount of
solvent feed:

Solvent Feed = MUli!up Solvent + Rli!covered
Solvli!nHCbmllp In the Amount of 80lvenl
Contained In the Solvent Peed Holding Tank.

(ii) Measure and record the amount of
polymer introduced into the affected
facility and the solvent-te-polymer ratio
of Ihe spinning solutions, and use the
following equation to determine the
emount of solvent feed:

Solvent = fl
!Feed I
i=l
(~()Iymel Used),)(Solvent-lo-~olymer Raliol.

where subscript "i" denotes each
particular spinning 8olution used during
the test period: value8 of "i" vary from
one to the total number of spinning
solutione. "n," used during the calendar
month.
(2) VOC emission8 shall be
determined each calendar month by use
of the following equation8:
M-
E= - -N-I end M.=Mvs,.D
S.
s.s,.n IrI.
s.=- 1= -
1000 S.
where all values are for the calendar
month only and where

E= Emi88ions in ka perMg BOlvent feed:
5.= Meaaured or calculated volume of
BOlvent feed in litera:
S. = Wei8ht of IOlvent feed in Mg'
Mv = Measured volume of makeup IOlvent in
liters:
M.= Weight of makeup in ks:
N = Allowance for nongaseous 1088e8 per Mg
colvenl feed: (13 kaIMg\;
5,,=lfrection of meaBured volume that ie
ectual BOlvent (excludes water);
D= Density of the IOlvent in ka/liter;
1= Ailowance for solvent inventory variation
or changes in the amount of IOlvenl
contained in the affecled facility per Mg
6Olven~ feed (may be £W8itive or
negative):
Is=Amounl in 118 oholvent contained in the
effected facility at the besinning of te8t
period. as delermined by owner or
opera tor;
la = Amounl in ks of 80lvenl contained in the
effected facility at the close of tellt
period. 811 determined by owner or
operator. 225

(i) N. 1i8 u8ed in the equation in
paragraph (b)(2) of this section. equal8
13 kg per Mg solvent feed to the 8pinning
solution pi'eparatioil system and
precipitation bath. This value shall be
used in all ca8es unless an owner or
operator demonstrate8 to the
satisfaction of the Administrator that
greater nOi'lgaseouslosses occur at the
affected facility. In this case. the greater
value may be substituted in the
equation.

(Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under Control Number 2080-0059.J
(Sec. 114. Clean Air Act .s amended (42
V.S.C. 7414]]
111-152
180.804 Reporting NqUlfementL

(a) The owner or operator of an
affected facility 8hall submit a written
report to the Administrator of the
following:
(1) The results of the initial
performance test: and
(2) The results of subsequent
performance tests that indicate that
VOC emi8sions exceed the 8tandards in
1 60.602. These reports shall be
submitted 8emiannually. at six month
intervals after the initial performance
test.
(b) Solvent-spun synthetic fiber
producing facilities exempted from these
standards in 160.6OO(a) (those
producing le8s than 500 megagrams
annually) shall report to the
Administrator within 30 days whenever
extruded fiber for the preceding 12
calendar months exceeds 500
megpgrama.
(c) The requirements of this 8ection
remain in force until and unless EPA. in
delegating enforcement authority to a
State under Section 111(c) of the Act.
approves reporting requirements or an
alternate mean8 of compliance'
surveillance adopted by 8uch State. In
that event. affected 80urces within the
State will be relieved of the obligation to
comply with this section. p'rovided that
they comply with the requirements
established by the State.

(Approved by the Office of Mana88ment and
Budget under Control Number 2Q60.0059.)

Note.-Thi8 regulation does not Involve a
"collection of Information" as defined under
the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L
5&-511). Therefore. the provilliona of the
Paperwork Reduction Act applicable to
collections of information do not apply to this
regulation.
(See. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.s.c. 7414]]
Proposed/effective
47 FR 52932, 11/23/82
Promu1 gated
49 FR 13646, 4/5/84 (222)
Revised
49 FR 18096, 4/27/84 (225)
-------
Subpart JJJ-5tanderd8 01
JWtGnnance for Petroleum Dry
Ci88JW8il f

I." ApplIcability 8nd cIe8Jgndon of
affect8cl facility.
(a) The provisions of this subpart are
applicable to the following affected
facilities located at a petroleum dry
cleaning plant with a total
manufac.turers' rated dryer capacity
eq'Jal to or greater than 38 kilograms (84
pounds): Petroleum solvent dry cleaining
dryers, washers. filters, stills, and
settling tanks.
(1) When the affected facility is
installed in an existing plant that is not
expanding the manufacturers' rated
capacity of its petroleum solvent
dryer(s), the total manufacturers' rated
dryer capacit)' is the summation of the
manufacturers's rated capacity for each
existing petroleum solvent dryer.
(2) When the affected facility is
installed in a plant that is expanding the
manufacturers' rated capacity of its
petroleum solvent dryers, the total.
manufecturers' rated dryer capacity is
the summation of the manufacturers'
rated dryer capacity for each existing
and proposed new petroleum solvent
dryer.
(3) When the affected facilty is
installed in a new plant. the total
manufacturers' rated dryer capacity is
the summation of the manufacturers'
rated dryer capacity for each proposed
new petroleum solvent dryer.
(4) The petroleum solvent dryers
considered in the determination of the
total manufacturers' rated dryer
capacity are those new and existing
dryers in the plant that will be In service
al any time after the proposed new
source or modification commences
ooeration.
(b) Any facility under paragraph la) of
this section that commences
construction or modification after
December 14, 1982. Is subject to the
requirements of this subpart with the
following exception. A dryer installed
between December 14, 1982, and
September 2.., 19M. in a plant with an
annual solvent consumption level of lesl!
than 4,700 gallons. Is exempt tirom the
requirements of this subpart. 295
fi 60.621 DefinItion..
As used in this subpart. all terms not
defined herein shall have the same
meaning given them in the Act and in
suhpart A of this part.
"Cartridge filter" means a discrete
filter lIJtit containing both filter paper
and activated carbon that trap. and
remove. contaminant. from petroleum
solvent. together with the piping and
ductwork used in the installation of this
device.
"Dryer" means a machine used to
remove petroleum solvent &om articles
of clothing or other textile or leather
goods, after washing and removing of
excess petfoleum solvent, together with
the piping and ductwork used in the
installation of this device.
"Manufacturers' rated dryer capacity"
means the dryer's rated capacity of
articles, in pounds or kilograms of
clothing articles per load. dry basis, that
is typically found on each dryer on the
manufacturer's name-plate or in the
manufacturer's equipment
specifica tions.
"Perceptible leaks" means any
petroleum solvent vapor or liquid leaks
that are conspicuous from visual
observation or that bubble after
application of a soap solution. such as
pools or droplets of liquid. open
containers ot solvent. or solvent laden
waste standinll open to the atmosphere.
"Petroleum dry cleaner" means a dry
cleaning facility that uses petroleum
solveDt in a combination of washers,
dryers, filters, stills, and settling tanks.
"Settling tank" means a container that
gravimetrically separates oils, grease,
IIIJld dirt from petroleum solvent.
together with the piping and ductwork
used in the installation of this device.
"Solvent filter" means a discrete
solvent filter unit cQntaining a porous
medium that traps and removes
contaminants from petroleum solvent.
together with the piping and ductwork
II1sed in the installation of this device.
"Solvent recovery dryer" means e
class of dry cleaning dryers that
employs a condenser to condense an~
recover solvent vapors evaporated in e
closed-loop stream of heated air,
together with the piping and ductwork
used in the installation of this device.
"Still" means a device used to
volatilize, se.parate, and l'ecover
petroleum solvent from contaminated
solvent, together with the piping and
ductwork used in the im1tallation of this
device.
''Washer'' means a machine which
agitates fabric articles in a petroleum
solvent bath and spins the articles to
remove the solvent, together with the
piping and ductwork used in the
installation of this device.
160.622 Standard8 for volatile organic
compounds.
(a) Each affected petroleum solvent
III-.IS3
dry cleaning dryer that is installed at a
petroleum dry cleaning plant after.
December 14, 1982, shall be a solvent
recovery dryer. The solvent recovery
dryer(s) shall be properly installed,
operated. and maintained. 295
(b) Each affected petroleum solvent
filter that is installed at a petroleum dry
cleaning plant after December 14, 1982.
shall be a cartridge filter. Cartridge
filters shall be drained in their sealed
housings for at least 8 hours prior to
their removal 295

(e) Each manufa"cturer of en affected
petroleum solvent dryer shall include -
leak inspection and leak repair cycle
information in the operating manual and
on a clearly visible label posted on each
affected facility. Such information
should state:

To protect against fire hazards. loss of
valuable solvents. and emissions of solvent
to the atmosphere. periodic inspection of this
eqqipment for evidence of leaks and prom;>t
repair of any leaks is recommended. The U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
recommends that the equipment be inspected
every 15 days and all vapor or liquid leaks be
repaired within the subsequent 15 day period.

110.623 Equivalent equipment and
procedures.

(a). Upon written application from any
person, the Administrator may approve
the use of equipment or procedures that
have been demonstrated to his
satisfaction to be equivalent, in terms of
reduciD8. vac emissions to the
atmosphere, to those prescribed for
compliance within a specified paragraph
of this subpart. The application must
contain a complete description of the
equipment or procedure: the testing
method; the date, time and location of
the test: and a description of the test
results. Written applications shall be
submitted to the Administrator. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. 401 M
Street SW.. Washington, D.C. 20460.
(b) The Administrator will make a
preliminary determination of whether or
not the application for equivalency ill
approvable and will publish a notice of
thelle findings in the Federal Registe!1'.
After notice and oJpportunity for public
hearing, the Administrator will publish
the final determination in the"FedereR
Register.

160.624 T..t methods and procedures.

Each owner or operator of an affected
facility subject to the provisions of
I 6O.622(a) shall perform an initial test
to verify that the flow rate of recovered
solvent-from the solvent recovery dryer
at the termination of the recovery cycle
is no greater than 0.05 literl per minute.
-------
This test shall be conducted for a
duration of no less than 2 weeks during
which no les8 than 50 percent of the
dryer loads shall be monitored for their
final recovered solvent flow rate. The
8uggested point for mea8urins the flow
rate of recovered 801vent is from the
outlet of the solvent-water separator.
Near the I!nd of the recovery cycle. the
entire flow of recovered solvent should
be diverted to a graduated cylinder. As
the recovered solvent collects in the
graduated cylinder. the elapsed time is
monitored and recorded in periods of
greater than or equal to t minute. At the
.ame time. the volume of .olvent in the
8l'aduated cylinder i. monitored and
recorded to determine the volume of
recovered solvent that is collected
durins each time period. The recovered
.olvent flow rate is calculated by
dividina the volume of .olvent collected
per period by the length of time elapsed
durins the period and convertins the
result with appropriate factors into unit8
of liters per minute. The recovery cycle
and the monitorins procedure should
continue until the flow rate of 80lvent is
le88 than or equal to 0.05 liter per
minute. The type of articles cleaned and
the totallensth of the cycle should then
be recorded.

(Sec. 114 or the Clean Air Act. a8 amended
(42 U.S.C. 7414»
110.125 RecordkHplng requirements.
Each owner or operator of an affected
facility subject to the provisions of this
lubpart shall "maintain a record of the
performance test required under
I 60.624.
(Approved by the Office or Management and
Budpt under the Control Number ~.)
(See. 114. or the Clean Air Act. as amended
(42 U.s.c. 7414))
Proposed/effective
47 FR 56118. 12/14/82

ProD.I1gated
49 FR 37328. 9/2f/84 (242)
Aevi.sed
W11n9022. 11/27/85 (29S).
111....154
-------
~ 1Ot'I(-8t8I..... of Perfonnanc:8
"I:~r"-'" L88II8 of YOC From 0n8hcn
...... GI88 ........ ....... 281

t 80.830 AppUcaltllltJ 8ftCI d88lgnatloa of
8ffect8d 'acllity.
(aJ (1) 'I1te ploristoAa of tIm subpart
apply to affected faciliiies ia onshlml
natural g88 pIOCeISiDs pIams.
(Z) A compreaor in VOC service or in
wet g88 sentc:e i. an affected facility.
(3) The pup of aD equipment except
compressol'8 [tfefinied in t 6O.63i) within
a proce88 ~it it an affected faciH1y.
(b) ADy affected faci1ity under
paragraph fa) of this section that.
COllU'fteftceB comtructton. reconstruction.
or modification after January 20. 1984. I.
.ubject to the requirements of this
.ubpart.
(c) Addition GI' replacement of
eq.upment (defined ill I 8O.631J for the
purpose of process improvement thalla
accompUahed without a capital
ex,peadUure shaD Dot by itself be
constdered a modification under thh
.ubpart. ..
(d) Facilities covered by Subpart VV
or Subp8t GGC of.o en Part eo are.
8xcllJded from tbi. _ubpm
(e) A compre8lOr station, dehydration
umt. sweetening unit. underground
8torage tank, field gas gathering system.
or liquefied natural gas unit is covered
by this subpart if it is located at an
onahore natural gas proceS1ling plant. If
the unit is not located at the plant site,
then it is exempt from the provisions of
dill subprut.

f 10.631 DeflnltlonL
As used in this subpart. all terms not
defined herein shall have the meaning
given them in the Act, in Subpart A of
Part 60. or in Subpart VV of Part 60; and
the following terms shall have the
specific meanings given them.
"Alaskan North stope" means the
approximately 69.000 square-mile aree
extending from the Brooks Range to the
Arctic Ocean.
"Equipment" means each pump,
/!Ire.sure relief device, open-ended valve
or line. valve. compressor. and flange 01'
other connector that i8 in VOC service
or ii'll wet gas service, and any device or
.ymm required by this subpart. .
"Field gas" means feedstock g88
entering the natural gas processing
plant.
"In light liquid service" means that the
piece of equipmeat containa 81 liquid that
muta dae GOnditiCNts apecified in
IBO.485{e) or 1'80.833(b)(2J.
"Naturalga. liquid." means the
hydroc8l'b008, such as ethane, propane.
butane, and pentane. that are extracted
from field gaa.

"Natural gas processing plant" (ga8
plant) means any proCe&8ing site
eng~ged in the extraction of naturalg8tl
liqwds from field 8as, fractionation of
mixed naturalsaaliquids to naturalga8
prochJcta. 01' both.

"Nonfractionat1ng plant" means any
8a8 plant diat does not fractionate
mixed natural. gas liquids into natlD'Sl
8a. products. .

"Onshore" means all facilities except
those that are located In tlu!' territorial
seas or on the outer ~ontinental shelf.
"Process unit" mean8 equipment
aS8embled for &he extraction of natural
8a. liquids from field g88. the
fractionation of the Uquids into natural
888 products. or other operations
8880ciated with the processing of
natural g88 products. A proceS8 unit can
opera~e independently if supplied with
8uflic.tent feed or raw materials and
sufficient storage facilities for the
producta.

"Reciprocating compressor" means a
piece of equipmeo:t that increases the
pressure of a process B88 by paettive
dI8p1acemeat, elllp&ori~ linear
movement of the drivahaft.
"In wet gas 8ervice" means that a
piece of equipment contains or contacts
the field gas before the extraction step
in the process.

ti 80.632 Standards.

[a) Eacb owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
comp!y with the requirements of
160.482-1 (a). (b). and (d) and i 60.482-2
!hrough 1 60.482-10. except as provided
m 1 60.633, as soon as practicable, but
no later than 180 days after initial
8tartup.

(b) An owner or operator may elect to
comply with the requirements of
1 60.483-1 and 1 60.~2.

(c) An owner or operator may apply to
the Administrator for permission to use
an alternative means of emission
limitation that achieves a reduction in
emissions of VOC at least equivalent to
that achieved by the controls required in
this subpart. In doing so. the owner or
operator shall comply with requirements
of 1 60.634 of this subpart.

(d) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with,the provisions of 160.485
except as provided in t 6O.633(f) of this
subpart.
III-155
(e) Each' owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with the provisions of t 60.486
and t 60.487 except as provided in
I 60.633, I 60.635. and I 60.636 of this
subpart.

(f) ~ owner or operator shall use the
folloWing provision instead of
~ 6O.485[d)(1): Each piece of equipment
IS presumed to be in vbc service or in
wet gas service unless an owner or
opc~ator demonstrates that the piece of
equipment is not in vac service or in
wet. gas service. For a piece of
eqUlpme!lt to be considered not in VOC
serVice, It must be determined that the
percent vac content can be reasonably
expec~ed never to exceed 10.0 percent
by welg~t. For .a piece of equipment to
be consld~red m wet gas service, it must
be determmed that it contains or
contacts the fjeld gas before the
extraction step in the process. For
p.urposes of determining the percent
vac content of the process fluid that is
con~ained in or contacts a piece of
equipment. procedures that conform to
the methods described in ASTM
Methods E169, El68, or E260
!incorporated by reference as specified
m 160.17) shall be used.

~ 60.633 Exceptions.

(8) Ea~~ owner or operator subject to
the provls:ons of this subject may
comply with the following exceptions to
thl' provisions of Subpart VV.
(b) (1) Each pressure relief device in
gas/vapor service may be monitored
quarterly and within 5 days. after each
pressure release to detect leaks by the
methods specified in 160.485(b) except
as provided in 160.632(c). paragraph
(b)(4) of this section, and 160.482-4(a~.
[c) of Subpart VV.
(2) If an ins~ment reading of 10,000
ppm or greater is measured, a leak is .
detected.
(3) (i).When a leak is det~ted, it shaD
be repaired as soon as practicable. but
no later than 15 calendar deys after it is
:.etected. except as provided in fi 60.482-

(ii) A first attempt at repair sball be
made no later than 5 calendar days after
each leak is detected.
. (4) (i) ~y pressure reUef device that
IS located 10 a nonfractionating plant
that is monitored only by nonplant
personnel may be monitored after ill
pressure release the next time the
mon~to~ing personnel are on site, in8te~d
of wlthm 5 days as specified in
paragraph (b)(1) of thissection and
160.482-fb)(1) of Subpart VV.
-------
(ii) No pressure relief device
described in paragraph (b}(4)(i) of this
section sha1l be allowed to operate for
more than 30 days after a pressure
release without monitoring.
(c) Sampling connection systems are
exempt from the requirements of
~ 60.482-5.
(d) Pumps in light liquid service,
valves in gas/vapor and light liquid
service, and pressure relief devices in
gas/vapor service that are located at iii
nonfractionating plant that does not
have the design capacity to process
283.000 standard cubic meters per day
(scmd) (10 million standard cubic feet
per day (scfd)) or more of field gas are
exempt from the routine monitoring
requirements of i 6O.482-2(a)(1),
~ 60.482-7(a), and fi 6O.633(b)(1).
(e) Pumps in light liquid service.
\-alves in gas/vapor and light liquid
service. and pressure relief devices in
gas/vapor service within a process unit
that is located in the Alaskan North
Slppe are exempt from the routine
monitoring requirements of ~ 60.482-
2(a)(1 j, ~ 6O.482-7(a). and fi 6O.633(b)(1).
(f) Reciprocating compressors in wet
gas service are exempt from the
compressor control requirements of
! 60.482-3. .
(8) In addition to the requirements for
flares at fi 60.482-10(d)(4), the following
are allowed:
(1) Steam-assisted and nonassisted
flares designed for and operated with an
exit velocity, as determined by the
methods specified in fi 60.485(8)(4),
equal to or greater than 18.3 m/sec (60
ft/sec) but less than 122m/sec (400 ftl
see) if the net heating value of the gas
being combusted is greater than 3~.3
MJlscm (1000 Btu/sc£).
(2) Steam-assisted and nonassisted
flares designed for and operated with an
exit velocity. as determined by the
methods specified in t 6O.485(g)(4). less
than 122 m/sec (400 ft/sec) and less
than the velocity. vmax, as determined
by the following equation:

Loglo("max) = (Hr + 28.8)/31.7
vmax = Maximum permitted velocity. m/sec.
28.8 = Constant.
31.7 = Constant.
HT = The net heating value as determined.in
Q 80.485 (g)(3).
(h) An owner or operator may use the
following provisions instead of
f 6O.485(e):
(1) Equipment is in heavy liquid
service if the weight percent evaporated
Is 10 percent or less at 150 .C 8S
determined by ASTM Method 086
(incorporated by reference as specified
nn I 60.17).
(2) Equipment is in light liquid service
if the weight percent evaporated is
greater than 10 percent at 150 .C as
determined by ASTM Method 086
(incorporated by reference as specified
In fi 60.17).

I 80.634 Alternative mean. of emission
UmltaUon
(a) If, in the Administrator's judgment.
an alternative means of emission
limitation will achieve a reduction in
VOC emissions at least equivalent to
the reduction in VOC emissions
achieved under any design. equipment.
work practice or operational standard.
the Administrator will publish. in the
Federal Register a notice permitting the
use of that alternative means for the
purpose of compliance with that
standard. The notice may condition
permission on requirements related to
the operation and maintenance of the
alternative means.
(b) Any notice under paragraph (a) of
this section shall be published only after
notice and an opportunity for a public
hearing.
(c) The Administrator will consider
applications under this section from
either owners or operators of affected
facilities, or manuf;icturers of control
equipment.
(d) The Administrator will treat
applications under Ihis section
according to the following criteria.
except in cases where he concludes that
other criteria are appropriate:
(1) The iJpplicant must collect. verjfy
and submit test data. covering a period
of at least 12 months. necessary to
support the finding in paragraph (a) of
this section.
(2) If the applicant is an owner or
operator of an affected facility. he must
commit in writing to operate and.
m,lintain the alternative means so as to
achieve a reduction in VOC emissions at
!r.dst equivalent to the reduction in VOC
emissions achieved under the design.
equipment. work practice or operational
standard.
~ 60.635 Recordkeeping requirements.
(a) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with the requirements of
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section in
addition to the requirements of ~ 60.486.
(b) The following recordkeeping
requirements shall apply to pressure
relief devices subject to the
requirements of ~ 6O.633(b)(1) of this
subpart.
(1) When each leak is detected as
III-156
specified in 160.633(b)(2). a
weatherproof and readily visible
identification, marked with the
equipment identification numbel. shall
be attached to the leaking equipment.
The identification on the pressure relief
device may be removed after it has been
repaired.
(2) When each leak is detected as
specified in fi 6O.633(b)(2). the following
:nformation shall be recorded in a log
and shall be kept for 2 years in a readily
accessible location:
(i) The instrument and operator
identification numbers and the
equipment identification number.
(ii) The date the leak was detected
and the dates of each attempt to repair
the leak.
(iB) Repair methods applied in each
allempt to repair the leak.
(ivj "Above 10,000 ppm" if the
maximum instrument reading measured
by the methods specified in I 6O.635(a)
after each repair attempt is 10.000 ppm
or greater.
(v) "Repair delayed" and the reason
for the delay if a leak is not repaired
within 15 calendar days after discovery
of the leak.
(vi) The signature of the owner or
operator (or designate) whose decision
it was that repair could not be effected
without a process shutdown.
(vii) The eX{Jected date of successful
repair of the leak if a leak is not
repaired within 15 days.
(viii) Dates of process unit shutdowns
that occur while the equipment is
unrepaired.
(ix) The date of successful repair of
the leak.
(x) A list of identification numbers for
equipment that are designated for no
detectable emissions under the
provisions of f 6O.482-4(a). The
designation of equipment subject to the
provisions of ~ 6O.482-4(a) shall be
signed by the owner or operator.
(c) An owner or operator shall comply
with the following requirement in
addition to the requirement of
I 6O.486(j): Information and data used to
demonstrate that a reciprocating
compressor is in wet gas service to
apply for the exemption in I 6O.633(f)
shall be recorded in a log that is kept in
a readily accessible location.
160.836 Reporting requlrement8.
(a) Each owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart shall
comply with the requirements of
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section in
-------
addition to the requirement. of I 60.487.
(b) An owner or operator .hall include
~ followiQ8 information in the initial
.emiannual report in addition to the
information required in 160.487(b)(1)-
(4): number of pre8.ure relief device8
.ubject to the requirements of
I 6O.633(b) except for those pressure
relief devices designated for no
detectable emissions under the
provisions of t 6O.482-4(a) and those
pressure relief devices complying with
160.482-4(c). .
(c) An owner or operator shall include
the following information in all
aemiannual reports in addition to the
information required in t 6O.487(c)(2)(i)- .
(vi):
(1) Number of pressure relief device8
for which leaks were detected as
required in t 6O.633(b)(2) and
(Z) Number of pressure relief devices
for which lew were not repaired a8
required ita . 60.633{b)(3).
~t~S~~~~~f~/~~/~4
~
50 F~~. 6/24/85 (281)
III-IS7
-------
Subpart II.U.-standardl ~
Performance tor Onshorfi Natural Gae
Proces8Ing: SOn EmIaIoII8 292

~ 60.640 ApplIcabIlIty and deslgnation oi
8ffected f8cWtIes.

[a) The provisioM of this liIubpart 1m)
applicabla to the foUowing affected
facilities that proceoo natural gas: eaclJl
aweetening unit. and each sweetening
unit foUowoo by a sulfur recovery unit.
[b) Facilities that have II design
cepacity I~s than Z long tons per day
(I!. T ID) of hydrogel1l eulfidG (",S) nn the
mcid gBlD (e){pilressed! aD 0ulfur) .mre
required to oompiy with 5 OO.647(c) buQ
talre not required to comply with i 6O.M:g
ilirrough ~ 60.646.
(c) The provislonr; of thiQ subpart arG
.mpplicable to facilitieD located on land
GlJ!.d include facilities located onshorn
which process natural gas produced
ITom either onshore or offshore wells.
(d) The provisions of this cubpart
Glpply to each affected facility identified
bl paragraph (a) of thi8 IleCtion which
commences cOIUltmction or modificatiolm
sfter January 20. 1984.
[e) The provisions of thi8 subpart do
not apply to sweetening facilities
producing acid 8a8 that 18 cempletely
reinjected into oil-or-gas-bearing
geologic atrata or that 18 otherwise no~
released! ro the atmosphere.
Ii 60.641 Definition&.
All terms used in this subpart not
defined below are given the meaning In
the Act and In Subpart A of this parl
"Acid gas" means a gas stream of
hydrogen sulfide (I-LS) and carbon
dioxide (C
-------
Table 1.
H2S content
of ad d
gas (y),,s
2.0~)(~5.0
n50
79.0
20~Y<50
79.0
10~Y<20
79.0
Y<10
79.0
79.0
79.0
79.0
REQUIRED MINIMUM I~ITIAL S02 EMISSION
REDUCTION EFFICIENCY (I.)
1
I
Sulfur feed rate (X), LTfD
5.0300.0
. . . .
. . . 88.5IXO.0101yO.0125 .
. . . . .
or 99.8, whichever is smaller
. . . . 88. 51XO. 0101yO. 0125 . . .
or 97~9, whichever is smaller
97.9
aa.51xO.0101yO.0125

or 93.5, whichever
is smaller
93.5
93.5
Table 2. REQUIRED MINIMUM S02 EMISSION
REDUCTION EFFICIENCY (lc)
H2S content
of ad d
gas (Y), %
2.0~X~5.0
Sulfur feed rate eX), LTfD
5.0300.0
Y~50
74.0
. . . .
. . . 85.35XO.0144yO.0128 .
. . . . .
20~Y<50
74.0
10$Y<20
74.0
Y<10
74.0
or 99.8, whichever is smaller
. . . . 85.35XO.0144yO.0128 . . .
or 97.5, whichever is smaller
97.5
85. 35XO.0144yO.0128

or 90.8, whichever
is smaller
90.8
90.8
74.0
74.0
74.0
III-159
-------
~1SO.M4 .~_t~
(a) ~ring a performance test required
by fi 60.8. the minimum required sulfur
dilOxide I2mission reduction effi
-------
(g) For Method 4. each run shall
consist of 2 samples; one collected at the
beginning of the 4-hour test period. and
one near the end of the period. For each
sample the minimum sample volume
shall be 0.1 dscm (0.3S dscf) and the
minimum sample time shall be 10
minutes.
g 60.646 Monitoring of emissions and
operations.

(a) The owner or operator subject to
the provisions of A 6O.642(a) or (b) shall
install. calibrate. maintain. and operate
monitoring devices or perform
measurements to determine the
following operations information on a
daily basis:
(1) The accumulation of sulfur product
over each 24-hour period: The
monitoring method may incorporate the
use of an instrument to measure and
record the liquid sulfur production rate.
or may be a procedure for measuring
and recording the sulfur liquid levels in
the storage tanks with a level indicator
or by manual soundings. with
subsequent calculation of the sulfur
production rate based on the tank
geometry. stored sulfur density. and
elapsed time between readings. The
method shall be designed to be accurate
within :t2 percent of the 24-hour sulfur
accumulation.
(2) The H2S concentration in the acid
gas from the sweetening unit for each
24-hour period: At least one sample per
U-hour period shall be collected and
analyzed using the method specified in
A 6O.645(a)(8). The Administrator may
require the owner or operator to
demonstrate that the ~S concentration
obtained from one or more samples over
a 24-hour period is within :t20 percent
of the average of 12 samples collected at
equally spaced intervals during the 24-
hour period. In instances where the H2S
concentration of a single sample is not
within :t20 percent of the average of the
12 equally spaced samples. the
Administrator may require a more
frequent sampling schedule.
(3) The average acid gas flow rate
from the sweetening unit: The owner or
operator shall install and operate a
monitoring device to continuously
measure the flow rate of acid gas. The
monitoring device reading shall be
recorded at least once per hour during
each 24-hour period. The average acid
gas flow rate shall be computed from the
individual readings.
(4) The sulfur feed rate (X): For each
24-hour period. X shall be computed
using the equation in ~ 6O.644(a)(4).
(5) The required sulfur dioxide
emission reduction efficiency for the 24-
hour period: The sulfur feed rate and the
H~S concentration in the acid gas for the
24-hour period as applicable. shall be
used to determine the required reduction
efficiency in accordance with the
provisions of 160.642(b).
(b) Where compliance is achieved
through the use of an oxidation control
system or a reduction control system
followed by a continually operated
incineration device. the owner or
operator shall install. calibrate.
maintain. and operate monitoring
devices and continuous emission
monitors as follows:
(1) A continuous monitoring system to
measure the total sulfur emission rate
(E) of SOt in the gases discharged to the
atmosphere. The SOt emission rate shall
be expressed in terms of equivalent
sulfur mass flow rates (kg/br). The span
of this monitoring system shall be set so
that the equivalent emission limit of
A 6O.642(b) will be between 30 percent
and 70 percent of the measurement
range of the instrument system.
(2) Except as provided in
subparagraph (3) of this paragraph: A
monitoring device to measure the
temperature of the gas leaving the
combustion zone of the incinerator. if
compliance with A 6O.642(a) is achieved
through the use of an oxidation control
system or a reduction control system
followed by a continually operated
incineration device. The monitoring
device shall be certified by the
manufacturer to be accurate to within
:tl percent of the temperature being
measured.
When performance tests are
conducted under the provision of I 60.8
to demonstrate compliance with the
standards under I 60.642. the
temperature of the gas leaving the
incinerator combustion zone shall be
determined using the monitoring device.
If the volumetric ratio of sulfur dioxide
to sulfur dioxide plus total reduced
sulfur (expressed as SOt) in the gas
leaving the incinerator is ~0.98. then
temperature monitoring may be used to
demonstrate that sulfur dioxide
emission monitoring is sufficient to
determine total sulfur emissions. At all
times during the operation of the facility,
the owner or operator shall mainta'.n the
average temperature of the gas leaving
the combustion zone of the incinerator
at or above the appropriate level
determined during the most recent
performance test to ensure the sulfur
compound oxidation criteria are met.
Operation at lower average
temperatures may be considered by the
Administrator to be unacceptable
operation and maintenance of the
affected facility. The owner or operator
may request that the minimum
incinerator temperature be reestablished
111-161
by conducting new performance tests
under I 60.8.
(3) Upon promulgation of a
performance specification of continuous
monitoring systems for total reduced
sulfur compounds at sulfur recovery
plants. the owner or operator may. as an
alternative.to subparagraph (2) of this
paragraph. install. calibrate. maintain.
and operate a continuous emission
monitoring system for total reduced
sulfur compounds as required in
paragraph (d) of this section in addition
to a sulfur ~ioxide emission monitoring
system. The sum of the equivalent sulfur
mass emission rates from the two
monitoring systems shall be used to
compute the total sulfur emission rate
(E). .
(c) Where compliance is achieved
through the use of a reduction control
system not followed by a continu~lly
operated incineration device, the owner
or operator shall install, calibrate.
maintain. and operate a continuous
monitoring system to measure the
emission rate of reduced sulfur
compounds as SO:i equivalent in the
gases dischar/Jed to the atmosphere. The
SO:i equivalent compound emission rate
shall be expressed in terms of
equivalent sulfur mass flow rates (kg/
hr). The span of this monitoring system
shall be set so that the equivalent
emission limit of A 6O.642(b) will be
between 30 and 70 percent of the
measurement range of the system. This
requirement becomes effective upon
promulgation of a performance
specification for continuous monitoring
systems for total reduced sulfur
compounds at sulfur recovery plants.
(d) For those sources required to
comply with paragraph (b) or (c) of this
section. the average sulfur emission
reduction efficiency achieved (R) shall
be calculated for each 24-hour clock
internal. The 24-hour interval may begin
and end at any selected clock time, but
must be consistent. The 24-hour average
reduction efficiency (R) shall be
computed based on the 24-hour average
sulfur production rate (S) and sulfur
emission rate (E). using the equation in
~ 6O.643(b).
(1) Data obtained from the sulfur
production rate monitoring device
specified in paragraph (a) of th°is section
shall be used to determine S.
(2) Data obtained from the sulfur
emission rate monitoring systems
specified in paragraphs (b) or (c) of this
section shall be used to calculate a 24-
hour average for the sulfur emission rate
(E). The monitoring system must provide
at least one data point in each
successive IS-minute interval. At least
two data points must be used to
-------
calculate eech I-hour average. A
minimum of 18 I-hour averages must be
used to compute each 24-hour average.
(e) In lieu of complying with (b) or (c)
of this section, those sources with a
df'sign capacity of less than 150 LT /D of
~S expressed as sulfur may calculate
the sulfur emission reduction efficiency
achieved for each 24-hour period by:
R=
0.0236 S
X
(100 percent)
where:
R=the sulfur dioxide removal efficiency
achieved during the 24-hour period.
percent;
S=the oulfur 3>roduction rate during the ~4-
hour period. kg/hr;
X=the sulfur feed rate in the acid gas. LT/D;
and 0.0233=conversion factor. LT/D per
ks/hr.

(f) The monitoring devices requirep in
t 6O.646(b)(1). (b)(3) and (c) shall be
calibrated at least annually according to.
the manufacturer's specifications. as
required by ~ 6O.13(b).
(g) The continuous emission
monitoring systems required in
180.646(b)(1). (b)(3), and (c) shall be
subject to thl!! emission monitoring
requiremento of t 80.13 of the General
Provisions. For conducting the
continuous emission monitoring system
performance evaluation required by
160.13(c). Performance Specification 2
shall apply. and Method 6 shall be used
for systems required by t 8O.648(b).

II 60.647 Recordkeeplng and reporting
requirements.

(a) Records of the calculations and
measurements required in t 80.642 (a)
and (b) and ~ 60.646 (a) through (g) must
be retained for at least 2 years following
the date of the measurements by owners
and operators subject to this subpart.
This requirement is included under
160.7(d) of the General Provisions.
(b) Each owner or operator shall
submit a written report of excess
emissions to the Administrator
semiannually. For the purpose of these
reports, excess emissions are defined as:
(1) Any 24-hour period (at consistent
intervals) during which the average
sulfur emission reduction efficiency (R)
is less than the minimum required
efficiency (Z).
(2) For any affected facility electing to
comply with the provisions of
180.646(b)(2). any 24-hour period during
which the average temperature of the
gases leaving the combustion zone of an
incinerator is less than the appropriate
operating temperature as determined
during the most recent performance test
in accordance with the provl.iona of
180.648(b)(2). Each 24-hour period muat
consist of at leas1 96 temperature
measurements equally spaced over the
24 hours.

(c) To certify that a facility is exempt
from the control requirements of these
standards, each owner or operator of.
facility with a design capacity less that Z
LT /D of ~S in the acid gas (expresssed
as sulfur) shall keep, for the life of the
facility, an analysis demonstrating that
the facility's design capacity is less than
2 L T /D of ~S expressed as sulfur.
(d) Each owner or operator who elect.
to comply with 180.648(e) shall keep, for
the life of the facility, a reCford
demonstrating that the facility's design
capacity is less than 150 L T /D of ~S
expressed as sulfur.
(e) The requirements of paragraph (b)
of this section remain in force until and
unless EPA, in delegating enforcement
authority to a State under Section lU(c)
of the Act, approves reporting
requirements or aD alternative means of
compliance surveillance adopted by
auch State. In that event, affected
sources within the State will be relieved
of obligation to comply with paragraph
(b) of this section, provided that they
comply with the requirements
established by the State.

[Approved by the office of Management and
Budgetunderconuolnumber~20]

II 60.648 Optional procedure for
measuring hydrogen sutflde In acid gas-
'1I'utwller Procedure..
"(a) When an instantaneous sample i.
desired and HaS concenuation is ten
grains per 1000 cubic foot or more, a 100
ml Tutwiler burette is used. For
concentrations less than ten grains. a
500 ml Tutwiler burette and more dilute
solutions are used. In principle, this
method consists of titrating hydroJZen
sulfide in a gas sample directly with a
standard solution of iodine.
(b) Apparatus. (See Figure 1.) A 100 or
500 ml capacity Tutwiler burette; with
two-way glass stopcock at bottom and
three-way stopcock at top which
connect either with inlet tubulature or
glass-stoppered cylinder, 10 ml capacity,
graduated in 0.1 ml subdivision; rubber
. tubing connecting burette with leveling
bottle.
(c) Reagents. (1) Iodine Stock Solution,
O.lN. Weight 12.7 g iodine, and 20 to 25 8
cp potassium iodide for each liter of
solution. Dissolve KI in as little water a8
I Gas Engineers Handbook. Fuel Gas Englneerilll
Practices. The Industrial Press. 93 Worth Street.
New York. New York. 1986. Fil'8t Edition. Second
Prlntilll. page 6/25 (Docket A--.zG-A. Entry 11-1-
67). .
111-162
-------
nece...ry; eIi'lOlve iodine in
concentrated KI solution. make up to
proper volume. and store in glass-
.toppered brown glass bottle.
(2) Standard Iodine Solution. 1
""=0.001771 8 I. Transfer 33.1 ml of
above 0.1N atock solution into a 250 ml
volumetric flask: add water to mark and
mix well. Then. for 100 ml sample of gal.
t ml of standard iodine solution is
equivalent to 100 grains I-LS per cubic
feet of 8as.
(3) Starch Solution. Rub into a thin
paste about one teaspoonful of wheat
ltarch with a little water; pour into'
about a pint of bolling water; stir; let
cool and decant off clear solution. Make
fresh solution every few days.
(d) Procedure. Fill leveling bulb with
.tarch solution. Raise (L). open cock (G).
open (F) to (A). and close (F) when
IOlutions starts to run out of gas inlet.
Close (G). Purge 8as sampling line and
connect with (A). Lower (L) and open (F)
and (G). When liquid level is several ml
'pest the 100 ml mark. close (G) and (F).
and disconnect sampling tube. Open (G)
and bring starch solution to 100 ml mark
by raising (L): then close (G). Open (F)
momentarily. to bring gas in burette to
atmo.phertc pre'lUl'8. and close (F).
Open (G). briDa liquid level down to 10
ml mark by lowerina (L). Close (G).
.'
...,
10
5,
LEV tu. ING
8IJLI
..
.
ngure 1. Tutwiler burette (lettered IIem8 Dl8DtioDed
III text).
111':"163
clamp robber tubing near (E) and
disconnect it from burette. Rinse
graduated cylinder with a standard
iodine solution (0.00111 g I per ml); fill
cylinder and record reading. Introduce
successive small amounts of iodine thru
(F); shake well after each addition;
continue until a faint permanent blue ,~
color is obtained. Record reading;
subtract from previous reading. and call
difference D.
(e) With every fresh stock of starch
solution perfo.rm a blank test as follows:
introduce fresh starch solution into
burette up to 100 ml mark. Close (F) and
(G). Lower (L) and open (G). When
liquid level reaches the liD ml mark.
close (G). With air in burette. titrate a9
during a test and up to same end point.
Call ml of iodine used' C. Then.

Grains I-LS per 100 cubic foot of 88S=I00
(D-C)

(f) Greater se~sitivity can be attained
if a 500 ml capacity Tutwiler burette il
used with a more dilute (O.OO1N) iodine
lolution. Concentrations less than 1.0
grains per 100 cubic foot can be
determined in this way. Usually. the
starch-iodine end point is much less
distinct. and a blank determination of
end point. with I-LS-free gas or air. is
required.
~~S;:'~~f~~~~/d4
~
WFII4UT5!J. 10/1/85 (292)
-------
SUbp8r1 ooo-stand8rd8 Of
Performance for Nonmetamc Mlnem!
Processing Planta. 284

f 10.670 AppIk:abIIIty and designation oi
affected hIcIlty.

[8] Except 88 provided in paragraph8
[b]. (c) and (d) of this section. the .
fPlrovisions of iliis subpart are 8.pphcable
~@ the followir;g affected facUities in
ffl.1ted or portable.mmmetallic mine~1 .
~rocessing planis: each crusher, gnndnll'i1J
mill. screening operation, bucket
GJRevBltor, helt conveyor. bagging
i!)~r8tion, sioraga bin. canclosed truck or
!i'silcar loading atmtion.
[b) An affecied fBicility tluat ill subject
~c fue provisions of Subpart IF or n or
@not follows in fue plant procesa mny
[!1Icility subject to the provi~ions of .
\Subparts 1F or X of WI) part IS not subject
~It]) the provisions of tilil) subpart.
[c) Iracilities at fue fono~ng plants.
cu'e not subject io fue provislOnQ of thUI

~ubpart:
[1) !Fixed sand and grBlvel plants anirll
crushed atone plants willi capacities. as
defined in fi 80.671. of 23 megsgR'ams per
~our (25 ionl'! per hour) or le83;
(2) Portable sand and greve! pl~nts
ond crushed stone plante with
«:apacities. as defined in ~ 60.671. of 136
megagrams per hour (150 tons per hour]

or less; and
(3) Common clay plants end pumice
plants with capacities, as defined in
g 60.671. of 9 megagrams per hour (10
tons per hour) or less.
(d)(1) When an existing facility is
!i'eplaced by a piece of equipment of
lliqual or smaller size. a8 defined in
9 60.671. having the aame function 8S tht>

existing facility. the new facility is' .
exempt from the provisions of ~ ~ 60.672.
00.674. and 60.675 except as provided for
in paragraph (d)(3) of this secti0':l'
(2) An owner or operator seekmg to
comply with this paragraph shall comply
with the reporting requirements of
~ 60.676 (a) and (b). .
(3) An owner or operator replacl.ng all
existing facilities in a productIon.lme
with new facilities does not quahfy for
the exemption described in paragraph
(dJ(l) of this section and must comply
with the provisions of U 60.672. 60.674
and 60.675.
(e) An affected facility under
paragraph (a) of this section that.
commences construction. reconstruct~on.
or modification after August 31.1983 IS
subject to the requirements of this part.
* 6G.87~ DefInIUon&.
All terms used In. this subpart. but not
specifically defined in this section. shall
have the meaning given them in the Act,
and in Subpart A of this part.
"Bagging operation" means the
mechanical process by which bags are
filled with nonmetallic minerals.
"Belt conveyor" means a conveyiI18
device that transports material from one
location to another by means of an
endless belt that is carried on a series of
idlers and routed around a pulley at
each end.
"Bucket elevator" means m conveYina
device of nonmetallic minerals
consisting of a he&d mnd foot assembly
which supports and drives an endles.
single or double strand chain or belt to
which buckeis are attached.
"Building" memns mny frame structure
with s roof.
"Capacity" means fue cumulative
rated capacity of mil initial crushers ilial
are part of the plant
"Capture system" means the
equipment (including enclosures. hoods.
ducts, fans, dampers. etc.) used to
capture and transport particulate matter
generated by one or more process
operations to a control device.
"Control device" means the air
pollution control equipment ~se~ to
reduce particulate matter emission"
released to the aimosphere from one or
more process operations at a
nonmetallic mineral processiI18 plant.
"Conveying system" means a device
for tre.nsporUng materials from one
piece of equipment or location to
another location within a plant.
Conveying systems include but are not
limited to the followiI18: Feeders. belt
conveyors. bucket elevators and
pneumatic systems.
"Crusher" means a machine used to
crush any nonmetallic minerals. and
includes, but is not limited to. the
following types: jaw, gyratory. cone. roll.
rod mill. hammermill. and impact.or..
"Enclosed truck or railcar loadmg
station" means that portion of a
nonmetallic mineral processing plant
were nonmetallic minerals are loaded
by an enclosed conveying system into
enclosed trucks or railcars. .
"Fixed plant" means any no~etalhc
mineral processing plant at. wh1~h the
processing equipment specified m .
160.670(a) is attached by a cable, cham.
turnbuckle, bolt or other means (except
electrical connections) to any anchor.
slab. or structure includiI18 bedrock.
111-164
, "Fugitive emmi..ion" meana
particulate matter that i. not collected
by a capture system and is released to
the atmosphere at the point of
generation.
"Grinding mill" means a machine u.aed
for the wet or dry fine crushing of any
nonmetallic mineral. GrindiI18 milla
Include. but are not limit~d to. the
following types: hammer. roller. rod.
pebble and baU. and fluid energy. The
srinding mill includes the ~ir con~eylDl
system. air separator. or air classifier,
where such systems are used.
"Initial crusher" means any crusher
into which nonmetallic minerals can be
f0d without prior crushiI18 in the plant.
"Nonmetallic mineral" means any of
the following minerals or any mixture of
which the majority is any of the
following minerals:
(a) \::rushed and Broken Stone.
includiI18 Limestone. Dolomite. Gramte.
Traprock. Sandstone. Quartz. Quartzite.
Marl. Marble. Slate. Shale. Oil Shale.
and Shell.
(b) Sand and Gravel. .
(c) Clay including Kaolin. Fireclay.
Bentonite. Fuller's Earth. Ball Clay. and
Common Clay.
(d) Rock Salt.
(e) Gypsum. ,
(f) Sodium Compounds. includiI18
Sodium Carbonate. Sodium Chloride.
and Sodium Sulfate.
(g) Pumice.
(h) Gilsonite.
(i) Talc and ~phyllite. .
m Boron. includlI18 Borax. Kernlte.
and Colemanite.
(k) Barite.
(I) Fluorospar.
(m) Feldspar. '
(n) Diatomite.
(0) Perlite.
(p) Vermiculite.
(q) Mica. .
(r) Kyanite. including Andalu~li~.
Sillimanite. Topaz. and Dumortlente.
"Nonmetallic mineralprocessiI18
plant" means any combination of
equipment that is used to crush or grind
any nonmetallic mineral wherever
located. including lime plants. power
plants. steel mills. asphalt concrete
plants. portland cement plants. or ~ny
other facility processing nonmetalhc
minerals except as provided in I 60.670
(b) and (c).
"Portable plant" means any
nonmetallic mineral proces8iI18 plant
that is mounted on any chassis or skicla
and may be moved by the application of
-------
a IiftlDJ or pullina force. In addition.
there shall be no cable. chain.
turnbuckle. bolt or other means (except
electrical connections) by which any
piece of equipment is attached or
clamped to any anchor. slab. or
.tructure, including bedrock that must
be removed prior to the application of a
IiftiDJ or pulliDJ force for the purpose of
transporting the unit.
. "Production line" means all affected
facilities (crushers. grinding mills.
lCl'eeniDJ operations. bucket elevators.
belt conveyors. baggiDJ operations.
.torage bins. and enclosed truck and
railcar loading stations) which are
directly connected or are connected
together by a conveying system.
"Screening operation" means a device
for separating material accordiDJ to size
by passing undersize material through
one or more mesh surfaces (screens) In
aeries. and retaining oversize material
on the mesh surfaces (screens).
"Size" means the rated capacity in
tons per hour of a crusher. grinding mill.
bucket elevator. bagging operation. or
enclosed truck or railcar loading station;
the total surface area of the top screen
of a screening operation; the width of a
conveyor belt; and the rated capacity in
tons of a storage bin.
"Stack emission" means the
particulate matter that Is released to the
atmosphere from a capture system.
"Storage bin" means a facility for
.torage (including surge bins) or
nonmetallic minerals prior to further
processiDJ or 10adiDJ.
''Transfer point" means a point in a
conveying operation where the
nonmetallic mineral is transferred to or
from a belt conveyor except where the
nonmetallic mineral Is being transferred
to a stockpile.
''Truck dumping" means the unloadiDJ
of nonmetallic minerals from movable
vehicles designed to transport
nonmetallic minerals from one location
to another. Movable vehicles include but
are not limited to: trucks. front end
loaders. skip hoists. and railcars.
"Vent" means an openiDJ through
which there is mechanically induced air
now for the purpose of exhausting from
a building air carrying particulate matter
emissions from one or more affected
facilities.

'10.'72 Bt8ndard tor p8I1Iculate matter.
(a) On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be .
conducted by t 00.8 is completed, no
owner or operator subject to the
provislQns of this .ubpart shall cause to
be discharged into the atmosphere from
any transfer point on belt conveyors or
from any other affected facility any
.tack emissions which:
(1) Contain particulate matter in .
excess of 0.05 gl dscm; or
(2) Exhibit greater than 7 percent
opacity. unless the stack ~missions are
di.charged from an affected facility
u.iDJ a wet scrubbing control device.
Facilities using a wet scrubber must
comply with the reporting provisions of
. 8O.676(c). (d). and (e).
(b) On and after the sixtieth day after
achieving the maximum production rate
at which the affected facility will be
operated. bu~ not later than 180 days
after initial startup. no owner or
operator subject to the provisions of this
.ubpart shall cause to be discharged
into the atmosphere from any transfer
point on belt conveyors or from any
other affected facility any fugitive
emissions which exhibit greater than 10
percent opacity, except as provided in
paragrAphs (c), (d) and (e) of this
eec:tion.
(c) On and after the sixtieth day after
achieving the maximum production rate
at which the affected facility will be
operated, but not later than 180 days
after initial startup, no owner or
operator shall cause to be discharged
Into the atmosphere from any crusher. at
which a capture system is not uscd.
fugitive emissions which exhibit greater
than.15 percent opacity.
(d) Truck dumping of nonmetallic
minerals into any screening operation.
feed hopper, or crusher is exempt from
the requirements of this section.
(e) If any transfer point on a conveyor
belt or any other affected facility is .
enclosed in a building, then each
enclosed affected facility must comply
with the emission limits in paragraphs
(a), (b) and (c) of this section, or the
building enclosing the affected facility
or facilities must comply with the
following emission limits:
(1) No owner or operator shall cause
to be discharged into the atmosphere
from any building enclosing any transfer
point on a conveyor belt or any other
affected facility any visible fugitive
emissions except emissions from a vent
as defined in 0 60.671. .
(2) No owner or operator shall cause
to be discharged into the atmosphere
from any vent of any building enclosing
any transfer point on a conveyor belt or
any other affected facility emissions
which exceed the stack emissions limits
in paragraph (a) of this section.
111-165
110.873 Rec0ri8truc11on.

(a) The cost of replacement.of ore-
contact surfaces on processing
equipment shall not be considered in
calculating either the "fixed capital cost
of th~ new components" or the "fixed
capital cost that would be required to
construct a comparable new facility"
under 0 60.15. Ore-contact surfaces are
crushing surfaces; screen meshes, bars,
and plates; conveyor belts; and elevator
buckets. .
(b) Under t 80.15. the "fixed capital
cost of the new components" includes
the fixed capital cost of all depreciabh!
components (except components
specified in paragraph (0) of this
section) which are or will be replaced
pursuant to all continuous programs of
component replacement commenced
within any 2-year period following
August 31, 1983. .

180.674 Monltortng of operations.
. The owner or operator of any affected
facility subject to the provisions of this
subpart which uses a wet scrubber to
control emissions shall install, calibrate,
maintain and operate the following
monitoring devices:
(a) A device for the continuous
measurement of the pressure loss of the
gas stream through the scrubber. The
monitoring device must be certified by
the manufacturer to be accurate within
x250 pascals xl inch water gauge
pressur~ and must be calibrated on an
annual oasis in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
(b) A device for the continuous
measurement of the scrubbing liquid
now rate to the wet scrubber. The
monitoring device must be certified by
the manufacturer to be accurate within
x5 percent of design scrubbing liquid
now rate and must be calibrated on an
annual basis in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.

180.675 Tnt methoda and proceduraL
(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part, except as provided under
160.8(b). shall be used to determine
compliance with the standards
prescribed under t 60.672 as follows:
(1) Method 5 or Method 17 for
concentration of particulate matter and
associated moisture content;
(2) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses;
(3) Method 2 for velocity and
volumetric flow rate;
(4) Method 3 for gas analysis;
(5) Method 9 for measuring opacity
from stack emissions and process
-------
fugitive I2missions, and I2missions from
building vents:
(6) Method 22 for measurement of
visible fugitive emissions when
determining compliance with the
atandard prescribed in ~ 6O.672(e).
(b) For Method 5, th"e following
olipulationsshall apply:
(1) The sampling probe and filter
\1oldl2r may be operated without heaters
if the gas stream being sampled is at
0mbient temperature:
(2)'for gas streams above ambient
ti!!mperature, the sampling train shall be
operated with a probe and filter
temperature high enough to prevent
water condensation on the filter but no
higher than 121.C (2oo.F):
(3) The minimum sample volume shall
be 1.7 dscm (60 dscf).
(c) Whl2n detl2rmining compliance
with the standard prescribed under
G 6O.672(b) and (c), the Administrator
shall adhere to the following
otipulations in addition to those listed in
Method 9:
(1) The minimum distance between
the observer and the emission source
ollall be 4.57 meters (15 feet).
'(2) The observer shall, when possible,
sl2lect a position that minimizes
interference from other fugitive emission
sources (e.g., road dust). Note that the
required observer position relative to
the sun (Method 9. Section 2.1) must be
}ollowed.
(3) for affected facilities utilizing wet
dust suppression for particulate matter
control, a visible mist is sometimes
generated by the spray. The water mist
must not be confused with particulate
matter emissions and is not to be
considered a visible emission. When a
water mist of this nature is present, the
observation of the emissions is to be
made at a point in the plume where the
mist is no longer visible. .
(4) If emissions from two or more
facilities continuously interfere so that
thl2 opacity of fugitive emissions from an
individual affected facility cannot be
read, the owner or operator may show
compliance with the fugitive opacity
standards in 160.672(b) and (c) by-
(i) Causing the opacity of the
combined emission stream from the
facilities to meet the highest fugitive
opacity standard applicable to any of
the individual affected facilities
contributing to the emissions stream. or
(ii) Separating emissions so that the
opacity of emissions from each affected
facility can be read to determine
compliance with the applicable fugitive
opacity limits specified for each facility
in fi 6O.672(b) and (c).
(d) When determining compliance
with the standard prescribed under
A 6O.672(b) and (c), using Method 9. each
performance test shall consist of a .
minimum of 30 sets of 24 consecutive
observations recorded at IS-second
intervals. as described in Method 9 at
sections 2.4 and 2.5.
(e) When determining compliance
with the standard prescribed under
160.672(e), using Method 22. the
minimum total observation period for
each building shall be 75 minutes, and
l2ach side of the building and the roof
shall be observed fer a minimum of 15
minutes. Performance tests shall be
conducted while all affected facilities
inside the building are operating.

\'! iSO.67G ~e~ortln~ and record keeping.
(a) Each owner or operator seeking to
comply with 160.670(d) shall submit to
the Administrator the following
information about the existing facility
being replaced and the replacement
piece of equipment.
(1) For a crusher. grinding mill. bucket
elevator. bagging operation, or enclosed
truck or railcar loading station: -
(i) The rated capacity in tons per hour
of the exising facility being replaced and
(ii) The rated capacity in tons per hour
of the replacement equipment.
(2) For a screening operation:
(i) The total surface area of the top
screen of the existing screening
operation being replaced and
(ii) The total surface area of the top
screen of the replacement screening
operation.
(3) For a conveyor belt:
(i) The width of the existing belt being
replaced and
(ii) The wiuth of the replacement
conveyor belt.
(4) For a storage bin:
(i) The rated capacity in tons of the
existing storage bin being replaced and
(ii) The rated capacity in tons of
replacement storage bin3.
(b) Each owner or operator seeking to
comply with ~ 6O.670(d) shall submit the
following data to the Director of the
Emission Standards and Engineering
Division, (MD-13), U.S. Enyironmental
Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, North Carolina 27711.
(1) The information described in
I 6O.676(a).
111-166
(2) A description of the control device
used to reduce particulate matter
emissions from the existing facility and
a list of all other pieces of equipment
controlled by the same control device;
and
(3) The estimated age of the existing
facility.
(c) During the initial performance test
of a wet scrubber. and daily thereafter,
the owner or operator shall record the
measurements of both the change in
pressure of the gas stream across the
scrubber and the scrubbing liquid flow
rate.
(d) After the initial performance test
of a wet scrubber. the owner or operator
shall submit semiannual reports to the
Administrator of occurrences when the
measurements of the scrubber pressure
loss (or gain) and liquid flow rate differ
by more than j:30 percent from those
measurements recorded during the most
reee:1t performance te:>t.
(e) The reports required under
paragraph (d) sllal! be postmarked
within 30 days following end of the
second and fourth calendar quarters.
(f) The owner or operator of any
affected facility shall submit written
reports of the results of all performance
tests conducted to demonstrate
compliance with the standards set forth
in I 60.672. including reports of opacity
observations made using Method 9 to
demonstrate compliance with I 60.672
(h) and (c) and reports of observations
using Method 22 to demonstrate
compliance with 160.672(e). .
(g) The requirements of this paragraph
remain in force until and unless the
Agency. in delegating enforcement
authority to a State under Section l11(c)
of the Act. approves reporting
requirements or an alternative means of
compliance surveillance adopted by
such States. In that event. affected
sources within the State will be relieved
of the obligation to comply with
paragraphs (a), (c), (d). (e). and (f) of this
subsection, provided that they comply
with requirements established by the
State. Compliance with paragraph (b) of
this section will still be required.
~posed/effective
48 FR 39566. 8/31/83
~~O~~l~n~~
. 8/1/85 (284)
-------
Subpart PPP-Standard of
Performance for Wool Fiberglass
Insulation Manufacturing Plant. 263

~ 60.680 Applicability p.nd designation of
affected facility.
(0) The affected facility to which the
provisions of this subpart apply is each
rotary spin wool fiberglass insulation
manufacturing line.
(b) The owner or operator of any
facility under paragraph (a) of this
section that commences construction.
modification. or reconstruction after
February 7. 1984. is subject to the
requirements of this subpart.
~ 60.681 Definitions.

As used in this subpart. all terms not
defined herein shall have the meaning
gi\'en them in the Act and in Subpart A
of this part.
"Glass pull rate" means the mass of
molten glass utilized in the manufacture
of wool fiberglass insulation at a single
manufacturing line in 8 specified time
j)f: riod.
"MHllufacturing line" means the
manufacturing equipment comprising
the forming section. where molten glass
is fiberized and a fiberglass mat is
formed; the curIng section. where the
binder resin in the mat is thermally
"sct;" Hnd the cooling section. where the
l11at is cooled.
"Rolary spin" means a process used
to produce wool fiberglass insulation by
furcing molten glass through numerous
small orifices in the side wall of a
spinner to form continuous glass fibers
t!lat are then broken into discrete
Icngths by high velocity air flow.
"Wool fiberglass insulatid'n" means a
thermal insulation material composed of
glass fibers and made from glass
produced or melted at the same facility
where the manufacturing line is located.

~ 60.682 Standard for particulate matter.
On and after the date on which the
performance test required to be
conducted by i 60.8 is completed. no
owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this subpart shall cause to
be discharged into the atmosphere from
m:y affected facility any gases which
contain particulate matter in excess of
5.5 kg/Mg (11.0 Ib/ton) of glass pulled.

~ 60.683 Monitoring of operations.

(a) An owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart who uses
a wet scrubbing control device to
comply with the mass emission standard
shall install. calibrate. maintain. and
operate monitoring devices that measure
the g8S pressure drop across each
scrubber and the scrubbing liquid flow
rate to each scrubber. The pressure drop
monitor is to be certified by its
manufacturer to be accurate within
:t250 pascals (:tl inch water gauge)
over its operating range. and the flow
rate monitor is to be certified by its
manufacturer to be accurate within :t5
percent over its operating range.
(b) An owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this subpart who uses
a wet electl;pstatic precipitator control
device to comply with the mass
emission standard shall install.
calibrate. maintain. and operate
monitoring devices that measure the
primary and secondary current
(amperes) and voltage in each electrical
field and the inlet water flow rate. In
addition. the owner or operator shall
determine the total residue (tot'61 solids)
content of the water entering the control
device once per day using Method 209A.
"Total Residue Dried at 103-105 .C," in
Standard Methods for the Examination
of Water and Wastewater. 15th Edition,
1980 (incorporated by reference-see
t 60.17). Total residue shall be reported
as ~ercent b~ weight. All monitoring
devIces requued under this paragraph
are to be certified by their
manufacturers to be accurate within :t5
percent over their operating range.
(c) All monitoring devices required
under this section are to be recalibrated
quarterly in accordance with procedures
under 160.13(b).
~ 60.684 Recordkeeplng and reporting.
requirements. -

(a) At 30-minute intervals during each
2-hour test run of each performance test
of a wet scrubber control device and at
least once every 4 hours thereafter. the
owner or operator shall record the
measurements required by i 6O.683(a).
(b) At 3G-minute intervals during each
2-hour test run of each performance test
of a wet electrostatic precipitator
control device and at least once every 4
hours thereafter. the owner or operator
shall record the measurements required
by 160.683(b). except that the
concentration of total residue in the
wat!!r shall be recorded once during
ea~h performance test and once per day
thereafter.
(c) Records of the measurements
required in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this
section must be retained for at least 2
years.
(d) Each owner or operator shall
submit written semiannual reports of
111-167
exceedances of control device operating
parameters required to be monitored by
paragraphs (a) and (b) of. this section
and written documentation of: and a
report of corrective maintenance
required as a result of. quarterly
calibrations of the monitoring devices
required in 160.683(c). For the purpose
of these reports. exceedances are
defined as any monitoring data that are
less than 70 percent of the lowest value
or greater than 130 percent of the highest
value of each operating parameter
recorded during the most recent
performance test.
(e) The requirements of this section
remain in force until and unless the
Agency. in delegating enforcement
authority to a State under section l11(c)
of the Act. approves reporting
requirements or an alternative means of
compliance surveillance adopted by
such State. In that event. affected
facilities within the State will be
relieved of the obligation to comply with
th!S section. ~rovided that they comply
wIth the reqUIrements established by the
State.
f 60.685 Test methods and procedur...
(a) Reference methods in Appendix A
of this part. except as provided under
t 50.8(b). shall be used to determine
compliance with t 60.682 as follows:
(1) Method 1 for sample and velocity
traverses:
(2) Method 2 for stack gas velocity
and volumetric flow rate:
(3) Method 3 for stack gas dry
molecular weight;
(4) Method 4 for stack gas moisture
content; and
(5) Method 5E for the measurement of
particulate emissions.
(b) The sampling time for each test
run shall be at least 2 hours and the
minimum volume of gas sampled shall
be 2.55 dscm.
(c) The performance test shall be
conducted while the product with the
highest loss on ignition (LOI) expected
to be produced by the affected facility is
being manufactured. .
(d) For each test run. the particulate
mass emission rate. R. shall be
computed as follows:
-------
R=CtxQ'1dX
6 x 10- S min-kg
h-ms
where:
R=mass emission rate (kg/h). .
Ct=particulate concentration as determined
by Reference Method 5E (mg/dscm).
Q.w=8tack ga8 volumetric flow rate as
determined by Reference Method 2
(dscm/min).

(e) The glass pull rate, p, for the
manufacturing line shall be computed a8
follows:
6X10-S min-Mg
P=L.xWmxMx ( 1~~0l.) x
where:
P=glass pun rate (Mg/h).',
L.=line speed (m/min).
W..=trimmed mat width (m).
M=mat gram weight (g/m").
LOI=loss on ignition (weight percent), a9
determined by ASTM Standard Test
Method D2584-68 (Reapproved 1979),
"Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins" (incorporated by reference-see
t 60.17).

For each 2-hour test run. the average
glass pull rate shall be computed from at
least three glass pull rates determined at
intervals of at least 30 minutes during
the test run.
(f) For each test run, the particulate
mass emission level, E, shall be
computed as follows: .
R
E=-
p....
where:
E=maS9 emission level (kg/Mg).
R=mass emission rate (kg/h).
P...=average glass pun rate (Mg/h). .
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act. as amended
(42 U.S.C. 7414))
hog
111-168
~
~
~
sorRf691r, 2/25/85 (263)
-------
The r,'lerrnee melh",ls In Ihls ap""nl111 1\" ...INTNI In
In 160.8 (Perr'lfmane. Tests) and' 60.11 (Compliance
Wilh Siamlarf>('ial Instnh~fi<,wl or conditions to hfl ro~10wf'd when
npplying a m. thod 10 the resp.eelive lac!hty. I'uch In-
structions (lor e.oIl1I,I., cstablish ...mphng ral.e8. vol-
umes. or Wnperatnres) are to be used either In ad,lIlion
to, or a.q 1\ Ell bAt itllt. lor pror",dnros In a relerenee method.
I'!im.ilarly, lor sour""" "nbleet to emlR810n monltorll1l
requiremento, .peein. h..Imctlons pertaining to any u""
01 a reler..,.o method a... provided III Ihe slIbJ'8rt« in
A ppendls R.
Tnrhlllion 01 m.lhod. In Ihl. ap""n9110;:.(' thi~ allfJws th~ ~rp!\t(,5L nPllhlhty to tho U~I'J.
111 prnl'fI~f!', howe\"l"r. thjc:; oppron('h.l~ im.pn\C't it'sl ill t11n~t
rs.q"S bf'('RUC:O Pf'I'(OflH(\I1C,., ~p"(,ln('1\hol1~ rnni1nt ,hf'\
pstnhlio:hf'd. M()~t 01 lh., nll'l hlld~ d"~('Tlh"ct hf'H'Jn.
1 hrr,'(nrf', inTol\"e ~pf'rine NlllipIIH'I~t ~p~,'ifi('at iOl~C; 811<1
prll('rdul'l'.':::, And only a ft'w IUI,thtld::: 1111111::' BPIWtldl\ rply
(\11 lH'tformRu('f' Ni1nh.
~1il\or f'hnllcf'$ ill Iht- TP(.'ft'IWr 111..thod~ 5hon1d not
,w('f'...t::ujl\" J\fr.'rf 111(\ \':\1idil Y of 111(\ rl':::1I1I'\ and it i~
rC'j't)f!nI7ril 1Imt nlll'rnath"r 01111, p'lui"t'nlrnt n~f't.hodq
"j!-l, :-:('l'Iiol\ liU" pro\'J(.1t s authority ror thf' At1l1l1l11strn-
lor to f:pf't'ify or appro,'(' (l) ('qn,iv.llrnt nH'tho~t~t (:0
nl1{trnnfi\"f' 11I('lhod~t anti ~3) 1I111l0r rhanef's 111 thl'
n1f't-ht)doJn~\' of t.h!' r('[(\rrnt'" 1I1t"ho(1~. It ~hnulct hI'
rI(\Rr1y ulld~r~100d that ul1k~~ otl1f'rwi~1' it1f'1I1iIiNI 011
~uch 1I1('1hod~ :'md ('h~H1JH'!' mll~t 11:\\'1' pi iOT appro'f31 of
1 lip Admil1iFtraloT. An OWTlt.)' "1I\plnyill~ !"11f'h 11Il,thnrlc;; or
c1r,'ialiol1s rrom 'hI' ,.'f('I'('II('(' 11I"lhod~ \\ ithnu1, ohlainillJ~
prior appro'fnl ilnl'~ ~o at th4'> ri:-ok or !=lIh~f''lt1l'11t <1i!=AI""
'Irov:'\1 Bnd ff'h'~1i112 wil h npprOTNlllwthoo!;.
Wi1hln 1h" r~r~rpJ1ce mrthod~, ~rtBin ~fM'('ili(' rt')lJin-
mrnt or prorpdure5 are rr.rQp;ntll".d as .h.ping ~'t'ppta~)16
or polpn1ially 8l'cpptable 8."d arp ~IM"'IIt('al1y 1t1I'ntlflrd
in the mrthods. The itl"lD~ idpntiONt at: nt'j'''pta1,lr op-
tion~ may bf' u~d ,,'ithnnl approval hut njll~t he idl"llli.
lied in the le.t report. The I'ol,-nllally approvlIl.lr 01>-
tions are cit.d no "mhJpet 10 t.he al'pro\'.1 01 tho
Admini~trntor'J or as "or eQui\"olrnt. t' ~tJch pol ('Ill iRlly
8ppro~RhJe h.'chniQuE'.~or n1ten18tivtto.; IIIny hf' 1I!'rd at tilt!
diserflion 01 thp owner withQut prinr apl)fQ\'nJ. Ilowp\'nr.
detail.d de'c.ril'lions lor applyh1R Ihr.o polen1iolly
nppro~8h'~ tf'rhni'lne~ or altl"rJ1ath"('!; are not pro'fid4'd
tn thf rp(rrPllrc m('1hod~. AI~". the JX'tpntially appro,,-
ob1e option. aro not n"".",arily acrihlo lor: (I) ...surinR th.t the (echlliqucs nr
Blternati~('s are in [act applicnhlf'! nnft orA prolwrly
~I..,oted; (2) Ineluding a wrltt.n deseriptinn o. Ihe
s.ltemalivemethod In Ihe"'-.t  r.port (Ihe wrotten
m~lhod mmt "" clesr an
-------
1. "ri/lrijJl, tJl.Q. tl'plitobilitll
1.1 Prin('jplf'. To aid in thi' rl"pn\~,')dalh'(' t1It'a:--lIrr-
m('nt or pollutant emiR510ns and/or wts) \'ollln1t'l.ric Dow
r8t(' from 1\ ~t:\lionar)' SOII1'~P, 8 mrn~ur("nH'nt ~il.e ,,'hf'rn
the ('fflllt'111 ~frp9m )9 60vdng in 8 known dlrf'ctinn js
~,.lectJ'd Anrl th(' rross.s{'ction ot th(' ~tad\ i~ di\'idrd Info
R n\1mh~ 0' etlnat Breas. A trI\VNSI' }JOhlt i~ thrn IOfat"d
wit hin fIIIeh 01 these equa!areAS.
1.2 Applicability. This method j, applicahle tn no....
in~ gRP s1rPQnJ:'" jn dnrf8, sta('k~. and fl1lf'~. Thr 111rthod
cannot hp n~pd whr": (t) flow is rycJonir or swirling (5('P
~fJetion 2.4), c.n a stark is 1Ctmallf'r thAn ahout O.~O mt:'tf'T
02 In.) In diameter. or O.Oil m' (113 in.') in erO'Nec-
tional arPA, OJ' (3) th~ mf'l8.SUnmf'llt ~itf' is If'~s than two
stB<'k ~r dnrt di8mett.'r~ down~tr"Rm or Il'ss thnn 8 ha)f
dlnm~tPr l1pstTfam from Q. now disturhsn!'p.
The f(lquir('mi'nts or thl~ m(lthod mU!lt hf> ('on~i"'(lrfld
t'tl'fo~ t!cnst.rorti01l ora nf'lw radlit y rrom which emissions
~'ilI be meo..'tt1J'Pd; failure to do ~ ma),' rPQuirp suhs('(11lpnt
a1terationa to the atack or deviation !rom the standard
procednre. ('Me.! Involving variants aro suh)eet to ap-
proval by the. Admini[OtrntoT. P ,F:. F.tl'nroml1f'nta]
ProtecUon Ag.ne~'.
2. Pro«d"..
2.1 ~]f\('tion of Mf'l8SlIft'If\PIII ~itf'. Famp1iJ1K or
vf>Jodty IDM..quremf"ut is Pf'r10r1111'(1 at a File loca.tf'd at
least eight st.aok or duct dlalJ1e,ters downslream and two
cHamf:\tf'rs upslream from any flow di5turhal1('e such Q.q
a bl-nd. Alpanslon, or eontraetion in the staek. or Irom 8
'ViEibl~ flame. Jf n~r,f'~ry, nn aHprnative location may
b. ..IPOtP.d, at a po.oltlon at IM,t tl> 0 st.at'k or duct rding thc dat.a.
0.5
50
DUCT DIAMETERS UPSTREAM FROM FLOW DISTURBANCE IDISTANCE AI
2.5
1.0
1.5
. HIGHER NUMBER 15 FOR
RECTANGULAR STACKS OR DUCTS
~40
is
....
...
:!
~30
C(
a:
~
S
a:
i20
:::I
Z-
2
:::I
2
~ 10
2
16
2.0
STACK DIAMETER> 0.61 m /24'"'-1
'2
8 OR ,..
STACK DIAMETER. 0.30 TO 0.&1... 112.24 ;n.'
o
2
10
. 5

DUCT DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM FROM FLOW DISTURBANCE IDISTANCE BI

Figure t.2. Minimum number of lraverse points for velocity 'nonpartlC~late' tr';'erses. 204
:;::II-Appeildix A- 2
-------
'TRAVERSE
POINT
1
2
3
4
5
6
DISTANCE.
% of diameter
4,4
14.7
29.5
70,S
85.3
95.6
8
5
4
3
Figure 1-3. Example showing circular stack cross section divided into
12 equal areas, with location of traverse points indicated!
Table 1-2. LOCATION OF TRAVERSE POINTS IN CIRCULAR STACKS
(Percent of stack diameter from inside wall to traverse point)
Traverse            
point            
number   Number of traverse points on a diameter  
on a .    
diameter . 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
1 14.6 6.'7 4.4 3.2 2.6 2.1 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.1 1.1
2 85.4 25.0 14.6 10.5 8.2 6.7 5.7 4.9 4.4 3.9 3.5 3.2
3  75.0 29.6 19.4 14.6 11.8 9.9 8.5 7.5 .6.7 6.0 ' 5.5
41  '93.3 70.4 32.3 22.6 11.7 14.6 12.5 10.? . 9.7 8.7 7.9
5'   85.4 67.7 34.2 25.0 20.1 16.9 14.6 12.9 11.6 10.5
6   95.6 80.6 65.8 35.6 26.9 22.0 18.8 16.5 14.6 13.2
7    89.5 77.4 64.4 36.6 28.3. 23.6 20.4 18.0 16.1
8    96.8 85.4 75.0 63.4 37.5 29.6 25.0 21.8 19.4
9     91.8 82.3 73.1 62.5 38.2 30.6 26;2 23.0
10     97.4 88.2 79.9 71.7 61.8, 38.8 31.5 27.2
11      93.3 85.4 78.0 70.4 61.'2 39.3 32.3
tZ!      97.9 90.1 83.1 76.4 69.4 6q:7 ,39.8
13       94.3 87.5 81.2 75.0 68.5 60,2
14       98.2 91.5 85.4 79.6. 73.8 67.7
15        95'.1 89.1 83.5 78.2 72'.8
16        98.4. 92.5 87.1 82.0 77.0
n         95.6 90.3 85.4 80.6
18         98.6 93.3 88.4 83.9
19          96.1 91.3 86.8
20:          98.7 94.0 89.5
21           96.5, 92.1
22           98.9 94.5
23            96.8
24            98.9
   -        
2.3.1.2 StacD With Diameters EQl1al to or Less Than
0.61 m (24 In.). FoUow the procedure In Section 2.3.1.1,
noting onl:v that "":v "adjusted" points should be
relocated awa:v Irom the stack walls to: (L) a distance 01
1.3 em (0.50 In.): or (2) a dlstanee equal to the nozzle
inside diameter, whichever Is larger.
2.3.2 Rectangular St.a<'D. Determine tbe number
01 traverse polnte as e.plalned In SectiollS 2.1 and 2.2 01
tbls method, From Table I-I, detarmine tbe grid eon-
figuration. Divide tbe stack' c~tlon Into as m&n7
equal rectangular elemental are&II as traverse points,
and tben locate a traverse point at tbe centroid 01 _h
equal area IItCOrding to tbe esample In Figure l-t.
If the tester desires to use more than the
minimum number of traverse points.
expand the "minimum number of travt'rse
points" matrix (see Table l-lJ by adding the
extra traverse points along one or the other
or both tt'gs of the matrix; the final matrix
need not be balanced. For example. if a 4x3
III-Appendix A-3
"minimum number of points" matrix were

expanded to 36 points, the final matrix

could be 9x4 or 12x3, and would not neCf'8-

sarily have to be 6x6. After constructing the

final matrix. divide the stack cross-section

into as many equal rectangular. elemental

areas, as traverse poInts. and locate a tra.

vt'rse folnt at the centroid of each equal

area.8
The situation 01 traverse polnte being too c1098 to tbe
llta<'k walls Is not e.peeled to arise with rectangular
stacks. 11 tbls problem should ner arise, the Adminis-
trator must be contacted lor ","",utlon of the matter.
2,4 Verification 01 Absence of C:vdonlc Flow. In most
stationary SOllrces. tbe dIrection of stack gaa flow Is
essentiaU:v paraUeI, to the stack walla. However,
eyclenle flow'ma:v eslst 0) after such devices as ~:velones
and Inertial d81nlsters followtna venturi scrubboln O.
CI) In '*-cb bavlzll taDpnUallnleta or otber duct con-
ftllUl8&tGu wbIclI tend to Induce sw!rUng; In th.""
I nstancee, the p.....nce or absence 01 cyclonic flow at
the sampling location must be determined. The 10Uowing
techniques are acceptable lor tbls determination.
o : 0 I 0 I' 0
I I
--'1'--,--;--
o : 0 I 0 "1 0
I I
--r--I---\---
I I I
o I 0 I 0 I 0
I I
Figure 1-4. Example showing rectangular stack cross
seclion divided inlo 12 equal areas, with a travene
point al centroid of each area.
Level and zero the manometer. Connect a Type 8
pitot tube to the manomeler. Position the Type 9 'pitot
Lube at each traverse point in succession, so tbat tbe
planes 01 tbe lace openings of tbe pltot tube are per.P"ndio-
IIlar to the slack cross-sectional plane: when the '1'JP8 8
pilot tube is in tbis position. it Is at "0. relerence." Note
the differential pressllnl (dp) reading at eacb traverse
point. 11 a nnU (zero) pltot reading is obtained at f1'
relerence at a given traverse poInt, an BCCeptable flow
condition eslsts at that point. 11 tile pilot reading Is not
uro atf1' relerence. rotate tbe pltot tube (up to:l=OO" yaw
angle). until anull reading Is obtained. CarelnUy detarmino
and I"I!OOrd tbe value 01 the rotl>llon angle (a) to tbe
nearest degree. Aller the nuU technJQ~e bas been appUed
at eacb tRverse point, calculate the e<.r~e 01 the ebso-
lute values of a; assign a values 010. to those poln'" lor
which no rotation was required and Incldde tbese In tbe
overall average. If tbe average"Vaiue 01 a Is greater than
10. t the overall flow condition In tbe stack Is unacceptable
ana allernatlve methodolog:v, subject to tbe approval 01
tbe Administrator, must be used to perlorm accurate
sample and velocity traverses. 117

3. Bibliogroph,

1. Determining Dust Concentration In a OM Stream.
ASME. Performance Test Code No. 27. New York.
t957.
. 2. Devorkln, llo..ard, et aL Air Pollution Source
TestIng Manual. A!r PoUntion Control District. Los
Angeles, CA. November 1963
3. Methods lor Determination 01 Velocity, Volume,
Dust and Mist Content of Oases. Western Preclpltallon

~~11::i'~ ~fp~~. ~~~ Co. Los Angeles, CA.

M:t~~~dl~~t~~~r ~I~K~~' Ss':~J~~;a~~~I~

ASTM Designation D-2923-71. Philadelphia, Pa. 1971.
5. IIanson, H. A., et al. Particulate Sampling Stralt'llies
ror Large Power Plants Including Nonunllorm Flow.
[jSEPA, ORD, ESRL, Researcb Triangle Park, N.C.
E P A-00012-7tH70. June 1976.
6. Entrop:v Environmentalists, Inc. Determination of
the Optimum Number 01 Sampling PolnL" An Analysis
01 ~Iethod I Criteria. Environmental Protecllon Agenc:v.
Re!'OlU'Cb Trian&le Park. N.C. EPA Contract No. 68-01-
3172, Task 7-
7. Hanson, H.A.. R.J. Davini, '.K. Morgan,
and A.A. Iversen. Particula~ Sampling
Strategies for Large Power Plants Including
Nonuniform Flow. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park.
N.C. Publication No. EPA-«JO/2-7&-170- June
1978.350 p.204
8. Brooks, E.F., and R.L. Williams. Flow and
-------
Gao Sampling Manual. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. Research Triang!e Park.
N.C. Publicatior. No. EPA-OOO/2-7&-203. July
1976.93 p. 204
9. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Traverse
Point. Study. EPA Contract No. 6&-02-3172.
June 1977. 19 p.204
10. Brown. J. and K. Yu. Test Report:
Particulate Samplinst Strategy in Circular
Ducts. !&mission-Measurement Branch.
!&mission Standards and Engineering
Division. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. Research Triangle Park. N.C. 27711.
July 31. 1960.12 p.204
11. Hawksley. P.G.W.. S. Badzioch. and J.H.
Blackett. Measurement of Solids in Flue
Gases. Leetherhead. England. The British
Coal Utilisation Research Association. 19(H.
III~Appeadb~ A-4
p. 1~133. 204
12. Knapp. K.T. The Number of Sampling
Points Needed for Representative Source
Sampling. In: Proceedings of the Fourth
National Conference on Energy and the
Environment. Theodore. L. et al. (ed.).
Dayton. Dayton Section of the American
Institute of Chemical Engineers. October 3-7.
1976. p. 563-568.204

(Sees. 111. 114. and 301(a) of the Clean Air
Act. as amended (42 U.S.C. 7411. 7414. and
7601 (8)))
-------
METHOD 2-DETERMINATION OW STACIt OA9 VELOClTY69
AND VOLUMETRIC FLOW RATE (TYPE S PITOT TUBE)
1. Prlnclplt and ApplicabUUV
1.1 Principle. The average gas velocity In a sttlCk is
detennlned (rom the gas density nnd !rom measurement
o( the average velocity head with a Type S (Stausscheibe
or reverse type) 1'1 tot tube.
1.2 Applicability. This method Is applicnble (or
me=ement o( the average velocity o( a gas stee"", and

forT~~:n~~~3~Jears fI~o~'apPlicable at measurement sites
which fall to meet the criteria o( Method I, Section 2.1.
1.90.2.54.em8
(0.75.1.0 in.)
.:lJ
. r I< 7.62 em;3 in.l.ol
I I
I
Also, the method cannot be used (or direct measurement
In cyclonic or swirling gas streams; Section 2.4 o( ~Iethod
1 shows how to determine cyclonic or swirling flow con-
ditions. When unacceptable conditions exist, altcrnalive
procedures, subject to the approval o( the A(hnini"rator,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, must be em-
ployed to make accurate flow rate detenninations'
examples o( such alternative procedure, are: (1) to inslall
straightening vanes; (2) to calculate lhe total volume trio
flow rate stoichiometrically, or (3) to move to another
measurement site at which the flow is acceptable.
2. ApparatlU
Specifications (or the apparatus are given below. Any
other apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to
approval o( the Administrator) to be capable o( meetlna
the specifications will be considered acceptable.
2.1 Type 8 Pilot Tube. The Type 8 pltot tube
(Figure 2-1) shall be ~e of metal tubing (e.g. stain-
less steel). It Is reoommended tbat tbe external 'tubing
diameter (dimension D.. Figure 2-2b) be between 0.48
and 0.95 centimeters (~. and ~ Inch). There shall be
.l1li equal distance from \be base of each leg of \be pitot
tube to Its face.openlng plane (dimensions p. and p"
Figure 2-2b); It Is recommended that tbls distance bti
between 1.06 and 1.50 times the elterDaI tubing diameter.
Tbe face openings of the pilot tube shall, preferablYLbe
aligned 118 shown In FIgure 2-2; however, sli,ht misalign-
ments of \be openings are permJssihle (800 Figure 2-3).
The Type 8 pltot tube &ball have II known eoeffielent,
determined l1li outlined In Beetlon .. An Identiflcatlon
Dumber sbaIJ be assigned to \be pltot tube; tbls number
sbaIJ be permanently marked or engraved on the body
flf tbe tube.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TYPE S PITOT TUBE
LEAK.FREE
CONNECTIONS
MANOMETER
SUGGesTED (INTERFERENCE FREE)
;ITDT TUBE. THERMOCOUPLE SPACING
Fi'gure 2-1. Type S pitot tube manometer assembly.
III-Appendix A-5
-------
e
TRANSVERSE I I

TUBE~Xl_1 A X B ~-_.
~ FACE I
OPENING ~
PLANES
. ,

(a)
A-SIDE PLANE
LONGITUDINAL
TUBE AXIS
A
B
.-. -'j-'
. PA

---- ._~. ~~.
NOTE:

j 1.05 Dt ~ P ~ 1.50 Dt
~ PA = Pa
a-SIDE PLANE
(b)
--&--
-
AURB
E-7----
(e)
Figure 2-2. Properly constructed Type S pitot t.ube, shown
in: (a) end view; face opening planes perpendicular to trans-
verse axis; (b) top view; face opening planes parallel to lon-
gitudinal axis; (c) side view; both legs of equal length and
centerlines coincident, when viewed from both sides. Base-
line coefficient values of 0.84 may be assigned to pi tot tubes
constructed this way.
III-Appendix A-1i
-------
PI . i:!.i .~
. J I ., I
./ . ,/ \1
TRANSVERSE' _J~._!~L-._.
TUB.EAXIS .._.~ ~I
. . I I
I (I) I (b) I
. .
8
FLOW t
8
FLOW .t
-
LONGITUDINAL
TUBE AXIS-- .
.
A
;-
~--'=;1(+J
.. --:-J!2 ~ar.)


.~...
A
.."'---
..-.
..,.". ..

. ~-:1!!.~ If.)
A
B
---
Ct)
~z
.--V"T-_.-E-~--
8
(f)
.
--
- --.
A
----- . --... .
a..= .. ---ri
- --*-=.
------
I,)
Figure 2-3. Types of face-opening misalignment that cal) result from field use or 1m.
pr.oper construction of Type S pitot tubes. These will not affect the baseline value.
of.~p(s) so rong as 41 and 42 < 10°, 131 and 132 '< 5°. z < 0.32 em (1/8 In.) and w <
O.08'cm (1/32 in.) (citation 11 in Section 6).
III-Appendix A-7
-------
A .laIldard pltot hth~ may b~ nspd fnst..d ora Type S. JI".rature gange n~ed not I;e attached to the pltot tube;
provIded that it mo~ts thp .porifiralions or S.ctlons 2.7 this allI'rnative is subject to the approve.! 01 the
:11111 4.2: note. h()w~vf\r. thf\t th~ static and l,ltIpact Arlministrntor. .
I'rt'~,"l1r(' hnh's of SI:\IHbrd pitot tul)1's afl' sl1sc~phhle to 2.4 Prl'ssurr PrOhf'Rnd OBuge. A pit>zometcrtuhf'Bnd
p!l1~dIlR in p:ut irul:1ft'.I:\th'n ga,.q, stn'!\ms. '1 h('rdore, n\f'fl'ury. or wntl'r.fillf'd U.luhe manometer rapablo of
\,lh'IW\""l'r 1'1 sl:\THbrd pitot tl1h(\ IS tI~I'~ to lwrronn B rn,'[L.<\urillj;l 51:\C'k prpssure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) ITg
I:-;\\"\'rs(', ~r1t'q1l:\to prI)tlr I11m..t fir (nflll,hrd IIt!'t the is 1J~('d. Thr static lap of a standard type pitot tuhf\ or
()1','llirlS;::s of Iht' pill)t '111)(' h:,o;£, not 1,It1cl!"d, up dunn~ ~he one l,'g or B Type S pitot tube with tho (:1l1e opf'ning
1r.I\"t'r:':t' ~wn."t\d: Ihis 1':\1\ hI' <1011<:' by t:~klllJ! B V,doClty rl:ull's IUISI."tioIlNl parulLcl to. tho gas flow may also ue
111':\11 I ~1') I"t'.hliIIC 1\1 1111' Iin:!1 tm\'('r~' 1'111111., ~'lt'(\11Ing out 11:",tl as rhr. l)rI',,:mrl' probe.8?
1111' itl\l'ad :\I\d sta!k hClh'.~~ of !he st~nd::l.f(t pilot tube.by 2.5 Baromt'tt,r. A mercury, aneroid, or othf'r barom..
"h:\,'k.pl1t"~il\g" wit II prL's..--unzrd !lIr. and then takm~ ett'r capahle o( n1l'nsllring atmospheric prrs..l;juce to
:11,-IIIII'f ~/) t'l':H1i1\~, If tllr ~p rI'adlIl1l5 lIIa(!l' hl'ft)rr and within 2.5 nun Ifg (0.1 In. IIg) may be used. In many
..:"'t'r 1111' air p!lrC'I' :m"hl' ~i\T1H' , :!:,~ Iwrt'l'n~), thl' tniYI'rse casP~. the barollll'trir readinR may be ohtaint"d (rom 8
I": ;I\'t.,'pl~\hll', Uthrfwi:'r,. rt'j~t't tll<, ~1I11" :\utl' that If ~p JW:uuy naUonBi wl'alhf'r service station, in which ('a...qe
;H IIw JI:\:\I tr:H','rs(\ p'/Illt IS ullsultahly low, nnoth4'f the station vallIe {\\:hirh is the absolute barometric
p,'illt may he ~rlt't'It'd, If "h:\rk.ptlTgilig" at ~('~ulfLr pft'ssurt") slmH he rI'flul'stcd and an auJust~pn~ for
Int,'r\':1Is I~ part or the prtwrdl1rr, lI}('n cOl11pnmllVe ~p t'levation diffrrrl1rrs IH,tw\'l:'11 the weather stnl10n and
r,.,~tlip~s sln\!! he takt'l1, :\.." ahuvl', COf ~hc last two uackS7 the sampling point shall be applied at a rnte of millU8
pllr.!.!t's :\1 whkh :;t:itahly hich ~J> rrndll.\gs ?ore ohsPrv('d. 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg per 3O-mpter {tOO (oot) elevation
~.! 1 )jITt'frntit\1 I'n's:,urc liaugf'. An lIll'hnE'<,l mano.m- ill('rN1S~. or vice-versa for E'lt"vation (}('crea:;e.
rft'r or t'qt1lV:1!Pllt dl'vict' is uged. ~Iust s::unplll~g t~tnS 2.6 Gas Density Detrrmlnation Equiplllf"nt. Method
nrt" l'quiPP1'o \\ilh a H)..in. (\\',:1t('r ('oln,m!\~ tnclu1t"d- 3 cquipmont, It needed (see Section 3.6), to dl'tt'rmine
\"\'rtkal tII~\nomE'lf>r, havinft' 0.01-.10. fIlO d~v~";.LOns 00 the the stack gns dry mo1eeul8l' weiRht, and Reference
(}. to I-i.l. inclined scalp, and O.I-m. 11,0 dIVIsIOns on the 1II.t.hod 4 or Method 5 equlpm~nt for moisture content
1- to IO-in. vrrtical .rale. Thl. t~pe or manometer (or d.t.rmlnatlon; other methods may be used subject to
otlH'r gauge or equivalent sensttivlty) is .atlsfactory. for approval of the Administrator.
thr nH'asurl'ment 01 6p valnes as 10.... as \.3 mm (O.05m.) 27 CaUbratiou Pitot Tube. When calibration 01 the
H ,0. However. a dilfer~ntial pressure gauge or grp"ter TyPo S 1'1 tot tube is n.c.ssary (SPe S~ctlon 4). a standard
son.ilivity.hall be used (subject to the approval 01 tho pitot tube Is used as a refer"""", The standard pI~
Administrator), ;r any of the rollowlng I, ~und ~t::O tubeshall preferably haveakno\Voooemclent,ohtafned
tme: (I) the arithmetic average or all 6p rra mgs a . e) either (I) 'dir~ctly rr~m the National Bur~au of Stand.
trnv..>e points in the stark is less than 1.3 mm (0.05 m. ards Route 270 Qnince Orchard Road Oaitl1ersburg,
IIzO; (2) for trav('rses 01 12 or more points, more than 10 " ,
p.'roont or the individual 6p readings are below 1.3.nun
(0.05 in.) 11.0; (3) ror t.rave"""" of rewer than 1.2polllts,
rnOrp Ihan onelJ.p rpadin~ is below 1.3 mm (O.05m.) .H:O.
Citation IR in !'ection 6 describEct'ssity ur usillg a n\l)re semnl1ve dlfferenhal pft"SSur8
gnuge:
11
~ '~Pi+K
T=i~1
11
~ ,'6.Pi
;=1
whrre: .
4Pi= fndividual vplocity head readillg at a Lraverse
point. mm H,O (in, B.O).
n=Total numbcr of traverse points.
K=0.13 mm IT,D wh.n metric units are used and
0.005 in B,o when English units are u..d.
II T is greater than 1.05. the velocity head data am
unacc.ptable and a more sensitive dillerential pressure
gauge must be used.
NOTE.-If dillerential pressure ganges other than
IncHu.d manometers are used (e.g., magnebeUe g:,ug~),
their calihration must be checked an.. each tPSt serlPS.
To ch~ck the calibration of a dill..entlal pressure sauge,
compare 6p roadings or the gauge with those 01 a sallg.,.
oil manomoter at 8 minimum 01 three points, approu-
mately r~prpsenting the range of lJ.p values in the s~k.
H, at .ooh point, the value, of lJ.P.as read by the differen-
tial prrssure gauge and gauge..oil manometer agree &c
witlun 5 pf'rccnt, the ditferE'ntiBI prNlsure KBuge ~ha1l bl'l
ronsidered to be in proper calibration. Otherwtse, the
test series shall either be void~d, or proc.dures to adJust
the measured lJ.p values and fmal results shall be used,
sUbject to the approval of the Administrator.
2.3 T~mp..ature 03uge. A thermocouple, Uquld-
filled bulb thennometer. bimetallic thermom.t", mer-
cury.in.gla...c::s th~rmometf'r. or, othpr gange ('apable. 01
measuring ~mperature to withm 1.5 percent o( the mini-
mum absolute stack tf'mpl'rature shall be used. The
temperature ~auge shall he attached to the pitot tube
such that the sensor tip does not toucb any metal; Ut"
gauge shall be in an interrcrence-free arrangement WIth
respect to the pitot tube race opening1l (- Figure 2-1
and also Figure 2-7 In Section 4). Alternate positions may
be used if the pltot tube-temperature gauge system 18
calibrated according to the procedure of Section 4. Pr0-
vided that a difference 01 not more than 1 percent In the
DVerage velocity measurement is introduced, the tem-
~
j\faryll\nd, or (2) hy callhratlon against another standard
pitot tube with an N US-traceahle coeillclent. Alter-
natively, a standard pltot tube  Ninety df'grec bend, with curved or mitered
Junotion. .
2.8 VitTerential Prr.",re Gauge ror Type S Pitot
Tube Calibration. An iltcliltl'd manompt<:,r or cQuivalent
Is us~d. If the sillgie-velocity calibration technique 19
employed (see Section 4.1.2.3), the ealihratlon difTeren-
tial pressurp gauge shail be readable to the nearest 0.13
mm 11,0 (0.005 in. 11,0). For multi velocity calibrations,
the gauge shail be readable to the ncarr.st 0.13 mm H20
(n.OO5 in 11,0) for lJ.p valuas between 1.3 and 25 mm H,D
(n.05 and 1.0 In. H,O), and to tbe nearest 1.3 mm H,O
(0.05 in. .II,O) for lJ.p vaiues above 25 mm H,O (\,O In.
.II,O). A spPCla1, more sensitive PU11'II will be requll'Pd
to r!\lld ':'p values below 1.3 mm 1I,0 [0.05 In. .II,O)
(see Citation 18 in Section 6).
CURVED DR
MITERED JUNCTION
-,
.c:
].
a
at
",..
HEMISPHERICAL,
. TIP
.-
r:i
]'
a
..
~
Figure 2-4.. Standard pitot tube design speci fications.
3. ProutlMl,
3.1 Set up the apparatus as shown In Fig"4" 2-1;
Capillary tubing or surge tanks instalied between the.
manometer and pltot tube may be used to damp~n lJ.1I
fluctuations. It Is rlJCOmmend~d, but not requir~d, U13t
a pretast leak..,heck be conducted, as rollows: (I) biow
through tbe pitot Impact openIng until at least 7.6 cm
(3 in.) BoO velocIty pressure registers on the manometer;
then, close 011 the impact opening. The pre.ssure shall
remain stable for at least 15 seconds; (2) do the same lor
tbe static pressure side, except using suction to obtain
Ute mloImwn of 7.6 CIIt1 (3 In.) .II,O. Other leak-i>becI<
procedum!, subject to the approval oUhe AdminisLrator.
may be 1W!Cl-
3.2 Level and zero Ihe manometer. Because the Ipa-
III-Appendix A-8
nomeier tevel and zero may drirt due to vibrations and
temperature changas, make periodic checks during the
traverse. Record all necessary dBI;!' as shown in the
example data sheet (Figure 2-5).8
. 3.3 Measure the velocity hoad an
-------
PLANT
DATE RUN N'O.
STACK DIAMETER OR DIMENSIONS, m(On.)
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE, mm Hg (in. Hg)
CROSS SECTI'ONAL AREA, m2(ft2)
'OPERATORS
Pll'OT TUBE I.D. N'O. -
AVG. COEFFICIENT, Cp =
LAST DATE CALIBRATED
SCHEMATIC 'OF STACK
CROSS SECTION
Traverse Vel. Hd..~ Stack Temperature Pg 
Pt. No. mm (in.) H20 ts, 0C (Of) Ts. oK (OR) mm Hg (in.Hg) YAP
     .-
  Ave.....   
Figure 2.5. Velocity traverse data.
III-Appendix A-9
-------
:: Ii D~tA'rl1\it1t! 1 ho ...tl1l..'k gas dry IllOh'('lIlar welghi.
F.lr i'()mbll~tion pn)('t~~ or prol''''~S''~ that emit essen.
lIally CO" ()" ('0. nnu,N" use :\1"1110<1 3, For prOCl'8SeS
"IHiltlng t'sscllti:\lly air, an anaJy~is IH't'd oot oe con..
dlldl'U; us\.' 11 dry lIlolt'cular w,'i!lht of :..~).O. For other
pl'lk..'I's.~~s, other mt~thous, SUhJl'ct to the approval of the
Admillistri\tor, must he used.
.1 7 OlJt~in the moisture contl'!lt rcom Rdcrellce
~.Idhod 4 tor l'CII lI\'i'knt) or from .\It'thod 5.
:I.~ Dptt'l'milh' the crOSS-S{'I'1 ional area 01 the stadit
III' ltlld at thl' Mlllpliilli( IO".~tinll. Wht~lIevpr po~ihll',
1"ly~kJ.l1y 11}."\."'nrc lIH\ ::ot,lI'k (illI]t'l1~ions rKlller than
IJ"'tlg hll!"prll'l~.
-1 (~,,, .1,:.., i" ra

.t 1 1',1,'''('1 ~ Pitot Tuh('l. Bl'fol't' its initial use, ('ar('-
rlilly .-"\lIIII,e the T}'pe :; pilot tube ill top, side, alld
I'nct views to verify that the race oprnillgs of the tube
j\l'f'I n.lit(lIl'd within the spf~citkations illustrated in Figure
~,~ or 2-3. The pitot tuhe shaU not be used il it lails to
",..t these nllgumellt spedJkaUons.
Arter verirylng the rare opening alignment, mea.pening plane distances baseHne and as&'mhly c",'lIicient v.lues WIll he ill"nlical
(dimensions P. and Ps. Figure 2-2b), II Dr Is between only when th. relative placemNlt or Ih. comp'JII"nls in
0.48 and 0,95 em 010 and ~ in,) and il PA and Ps are the assemhly is such that aerodynamic iliterrrrr",'.
equal and hetween I.O,~and \.50D" there are two possihle efTecls ar. eliminater!. FI!(UI"'s 2-6 tHrough ~.~ illll,tm'.
options: (1) the pitot tube Dlay bo calibrated acr.ordiJlg illtp,rfl'rcnce-{rr.e componf'l1t arral1~I'rn1~nts (IJr Typ'~ ~
to the procedure outlined in Sections 4.1.2 through pir,ot tulH!S ha\'iIJR ('1t£'rnal tubing tliamf'fprs fJdWI'!'1I
4.1.5 b('low, or (2) a bas~line (Isolated tube) codn,'i~lIt 0.-18 and fI,~j~ ('m nil) and ~11 in.). TYfP S pitllt tutH' 0.....,1 III-
value of O.M may bo assigned to the pitot tube. Notp, Llios that (ail to llIeet any or 811 0 tile ~p..t:ilkati(llIs (Ir
howevP.t, that il the pitot tube is part of an assemhly, Figurl~g :!-fS through 2-8 shall be ('alibratj'd ac'c:IJrdill~ t.o
l'alibratlon may still he required, d('spite knowledge87 the prQ<.:J'dure uullirwd in HectifJl1s 4.1.~ thr,,"~h -41.5
of 'the basdine roclfi<'ient value (see Section 4.1.1). b~low, and prior to calibration, the \'altlt.,i of 1 !If' int"r-
Il Dt. P.4, and Ps are outside the specified limits, the cOlllponl'lIt spai.:if1gs (pi tot-nozzle, pitot-tlII,rllln,,'ollpj.',
pitot tllhe must be calibrated as outlined in 4.1 2 through pitot-prohc ~hl'ath) shall be ml'a.'iurcd and r"(.IJrd""d.
4.1 ,j bt'low.). ,. NOTE.-Do not u.::e any Typp. 8 pltot tub~ a;-:~(1mbly
4.1.1 Typo S 11tot Tuh~ AssemlJ1ies, Dur.lIlg samp~e which is consfrucr.I"d such that the impact pn'.',UfC (1(Jt'II-
aull velocity traverses, the l~lated Type S ~ltot tube IS ing plane 01 the pilot lube is below the c"lry plauc 01 tI,e
not IJ:lwn}'s t~sedi In J~mny Instances, the r1tot tube IS IlUule (see j'igure :l-ijh),
used In comblllatlOn wIth other source-s.mpli"g eompon- 4.1.2 Calibration Setup. It the Typp. S pilot tub. is t<)
Cllts (thernlOconple, sampling frobe, DOnle). as part 01 be calibrated olle leg 01 the tuhe shall be p,'nua"enUy
an "o.sspT11uly," The prl's~nce 0 other SamplHljit compo. . , , . .
""1115 can somelimes alfect the baseline value ortheType marked A, and the other, B. Callbr~llOn shall be don": In
S pilot tube eoetllcient (Citation 9 in Section 6); therelore a flow s~'stem havIIIg the 101l0wIIIg e.'.'IIII.1 dc>,gn
un a.""i~l\(1d (or 01 ht'rwise known) baseline coeffiri"lIt features: 87
'U'YPf S PITOT TUBE
. C;: 1.9'0 em (3/4 if\,) FOR On .1.3 em (1/2 ir!.)
SAMPLING .NOZZLE'
A. BOTTOM VIEW; SHOWING MINIMUM PITOT-NOZZLE SEPARATION.
SAMPLING
PROBE
$AMPLING
NOZZLE
STATIC PRESSURE
OPENING PLANE
181___.
IMPACT PRESSURE

IO'~:L.ANE
NOZZLE ENTRY ~
PLANE

--. ...--.

SlOE VIEW; TO PREVIENT PITOT TUBE
FROM INTERFERING WITH GAS FLOW
STREAMLINES APPROACHING THE
NOZZLE. THE IMPACT PRESSURE
OPENING PLANE OF 1THE PITOT TUBE
SHALL BE. EVEN WITH OR ABOVE THE
NOZZLE ENTRY PLANE.
..
'Figure 2-6. Proper pitot tube. sampling nozzle configuration to pret'eht
aerodynamic interference; buttonhook . type nozzle; cen\ers of nozzle
and pitot opening aligned; Dt between 0.48 and O.9S'cm (3/16 and
318 in.).
III-Appendix A-10
-------
THERMOCOUPLE
OR
6~
J.

Z >5.D8cm .
'(2 in.)
THERMOCOUPLE
CJ
TYPE S PITOT TUBE
~
cP
.I
!
Dt
Figure 2-7. Proper thermocouple placement to prevent interference:
Dt between 0,48 and 0.95 cm (3/16 and 3/8 in.).
TYPE S PITOT TUBE
I : . III
SAMPLE PROBE
I
, ,I
I
J
I
I
~I
I
...
y ~7.62 em (3 inJ
.
Figure 2-8. Minimum pitot-sample probe separation needed to prevent interference;
Dt between "0.48 and 0.95 cm (3/16 and 3/8 in.).
U.2.\ Th. Bowing po stream must be oonftned 10 a
duel 01 dellnJw. cr_...,.,Uonal 81'6&, either circular or
rectangular. For circular ~Uons, the minimum
duct dieme\.er shall be 30.5 em (12 in.); ior rectangular
rzoss-ooctions, tII. width ~ort.er sid.) shall be at I5st
2:;.4 cm (10 in.).
..1.2.2 Tbe cross-sectional arta of the calJbration ~uct
must be ~OIlSt.ant OTer . distan~e 01 \0 or more dnct
dialDtters. For a rectangular crOS!HleCtion, use an equi-

:nJe~':i~~~b~.:,~dol~~t ar:m~~ing equation,
2LW
D.= (L+ W)
Equation 2-1
where:
D.oEqulvaltnt diameter
La Len~tb
WaWidth
To ensure the pre!'Cnce 01 stable, lully developt'd ftow
pallerus at th. calibration sile, or "t...t section," the
sile must b.I0C8~d at least eight diameters downstream
and t\\'o diameters upstream !rom tbe nearest disturb-
ances.
NOTE.-The elght- and two-diamtter criteria are not
ab!\Olute; Olher tesl section local ions may be used (BUb-
J~t to approval 01 the Adminlslrator), provided thai the
flow al the test site Is stable and demonstrably para1lel
to the duct aUs.
..1.2.3 The flow systt>m shan have the capacity 10
gene",l. a t.ast-ileCtion veloclly around 915 m/mJn (3,000
ftlmJn). This velocity must be constant with time 10
guarantee steady flow during calibration. Note that
Type S pitot tube coefficients obtained by slngle-volocity
calibration at 915 m/mln (3,000 II/mtn) will generally be
valid to within :1:3 perceut lor the measurement 01
velocities above 305 m/mJn (1,000 It/mln) and to within
:1:5 to 6 peroent lor the mta,'urement 01 velocities be-
tween 180 and 305 m/min (600 and 1,000 It/mln). If a
more precise correlation between C. and velocity is
desired, the !low system shall hav. the capacity to
generate at Itast lour distinct, time-invariant ~st-sec1ion
velocities covering tbe velocIty range !rom 180 to \ 525
mlmtn (600 to 5,000 It/min), and calibration data shall
be taken at regular velocity intervals over tbis range
(See Citations 9 and 1. In Section 6 for details).
4.1.2.4 Two entry ports, one each lor tb. standard
and Type B pltot tubes, shall be cut in the test section;
\.be st.andara pitot entry port shell be located sllghtly
downstream 01 tile Type B port so tIIat tile standard
and Type S impact openings wtn lie in the same cross-
sectional plane during calibration. To facilitate align-
ment 01 tbe pitot tubes during calibretion, it is advisable
that the test sect ion be conslructed 01 plexiglas or some
other transparent material.
..1.3 Calibration Procedure. NoW. that this procedure
Is a generel on. and must not be used without first
relerring to the special con,iderations presented in Sec-
tion 4.1.5. Nota aI"" that this procedure applies Only to
single-velocity calibretion. To obtain calibration dala
for the A and B sides 01 the Type S pitot tube, proceed
as lollows: '

fl\t~'~~d ::~~h~r ~~:. ::;'0;., ':~~'::,~~:t i~n ~~J"'~~
the proper density. Inspect and Itak-i:heck all pitot lints;
repair or replace if necessnr)'.
III-Appendix A-II
..\.3.2 Level and &eI'O the manometer. Turn on the
fan and allow tile !low to stabilize. Seal the Type Sentry
pon.
'.1.8.3 Ensure that the manometer Is level and ....ood.
Position the standard pitot tube at the calibration point
(dettnnined as outlined i1l Betion 4.1.5.1), and align Ihe
tube so that its tip Is pointed directly into the ftow. Par-
ticular car. sbould be taken in aligning the tube to avoid
yaw and pilch anglts. Make sure that tbe enlry port
surrounding the lube Is properly sealed.
..1.3.4 Rtad 4p,,,0 and record its velue In a data tahl.
similar to the one shown In Figure :HI. Remove the
standard pitot tube lrom the duct and disronntct it frolU
the manomeler. Seal t ht standard enlry port.
'.1.3.1; Connect the T)'po S pilot tube to lilt manom-
eter. Opon theT}"I>e Sentry pon. Ch~k Ihe manom-
eter ltvel and ...ro. InSert and allgn the Type S 1'1 tot tuhe
so that its A sidt impact opening is al the sanl. point as
was the standard pltot tube and Is poinl<'d directly Into
the lIow. Mak. SUI'\' that t.be entry port SW1'OU1lding the
tube is propt'rl)' sealed.
..\.3.6 Read Ap, and enttr its value in the data tabl..
~,::~ci:?~O~)~~ ~,~~,~~~~t~~ Irom the duct and dis-
..\.3.7 Repeal st.ps4.1.3.3Ihrough 4.1.3.6 above until
three pairs 01 A1> readings have bten obtaintd.
..1.3.8 Rtpoat sleps 4.1.3.3 througb 4.1.3.7 above lor
the B sidt 01 the Type S pitot tnbe.
..1.3.9 Perlorm calculations, as described In S~tion
4.1.4 below.
".U Calculations.
..\...\ For each 01 the six pairs 01 A1> rMdings (i.e.;
three !rom side A and three !rom side B) obtained in
Seelion ..1.3 above, calrulate the value 01 the Type 8
pilot tube coe!licieul as 10110...'.:
-------
Plror TUBE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:
CALIBRATED BY: -
DATE:
 "A" SIDE CALIBRATION  
 . t, Pstd t, PIs)  
 em H20 em H20  DEVIATION
RUN NO. (in. H20) Un. H20) Cp(s) Cp(s) . Cp(A)
1    
2    
3    
  c.p (SIDE A)  
 "B" SID'E CALIBRATION  
 II Pstd t,P(s)  
 em H20 em H201  IOEVIATION
RUN'NO~ (In. H20) Un. H201 (Cp(s) Cp(s) . Cp(~)
1    
2    
3    
  tp (SIDE B)  
AVERAG~ DEVIATION" Q (A OR B) =
3
~ I Cp(s) . 'fp!A OR B) I
~
.
~
- MUST 8£ ~O.OI
I Cp (SIDE A)~C!1 (SIDE B) I~MU$T!l1t ~O.01
Figure 2-9. Pi tot tube cali~r~tion data.
C C .JtJ.'P'ld
.1,) = .(.,,1) tJ.po
Recording to the crit.Jria 01 Sections 2.7.1 to
2.7.5 oUbls method.
6P"d=Ve!oclty head measured by the standard pltot
tube, em BoO (In. B,O)
41>.= Velocity head me&!Ul'ed by tbe Type B pltot
tube. em BoO (In. BoO)
U.U Calcu!ate C. (jdde A). the mean A-I tube coefficient 87
c. (..d) = Standard pltot tube coefficient; use 0.99 If the
coefficient 18 unknown and the tube 18 designed
III-Appendix A-12
4.1.4.3 Calculate the deviation 01 each 01 the three A-
side values 01 C.I.) Irom C. (side A), and thedeviatlon 01
....h B-side value 01 Cpl.) !rom C. (.ide B). Use the 101-
lowing cquatlon:

DcvialilJll=C." _.(1.(:\ lOr B)

E'l'ialion 2-3
4.1.4.4 Cal<'ulate., tbe ave.ra~e deviation Irom the
IHe.an. lor both the A and B .ide. 01 thc lJitot tllhe. t'se
the lollowing equation:
fI (,idl' A ur B)
3 -
~!C.,,)-C.(A or 8)1
1
3

Equation 2-4

4.1.4.5 Il.e tbe Type S pitot tuhe only it tbe values 01
. (side A) and. (side ll) are less than or equal I<> 0.01
and if the absolute value 01 the difference between C.
(A) and C. (B) is 0.01 or less.
4.1.5 Special considerations:
4.1.5.1 Selection 01 calibration point.
4.1.5.1.1 When an isolated Type S pitot tube is cali-
brated, select a calibration point at or near the center 01
the duct, and lollow the procedures outlined In Sections
4.1.3 ana 4.1.4 above. Tbe Type S pitot coefficients so
obtaine<:, i.e., C. (side A) and C. (side B), will be valid.
so long as either: (I) the isolated pi tot tube is used; or
(2) tbe pitot tnbe is nsed with other components (nozzle,
thermocouple. sample probe) In an arrangement that is
Iree Irom aerodynamic interlerence etrects (see Figures
2~ through 2-8).
4.1.5.1.2 For Type B pil<>t tube-thennocouple com-
binations (without sample probe), select a calibration
point at or near the center 01 the duct, and lollow tbe
procedures outlined in Sections 4.1.3 and 4.1.4 above;
The coefficients so obtained will' be valid so long as the
pitol tube-thermocouple combination is used by it.sell
or with other components in an interference-Cree arrange-
ment (Figures 2~ and 2-8).
4.1.5.1.3 For assemblies with sample probes. the
calibration point should be located at or nenr the center
01 the duel; however, lusertion 01 a probe sheatb into a
small ducl may cause significant cross-seclional area
blockage and yield incorrect coefficient values (Citation 9
in Section 6). Therelore, to minimize the blockage etrect,
the calibration point may be a lew inches otr-(;enter II
necessary. The actual blockage ellect will be negligible
wben the theoretical blockage, as determined by a
r,:J~~~-~~:t ~.~~.~~t\~~~){~~~ sr~~~~~b~ir:~rt~~~~
..ternal sheaths (Figure 2-10a), and 3 percent or less lor
assemblies with elternal shealbs (Figure 2-lOb).
4.1.5.2 For those probe assemblies In which pilot
tnbe-noule Interlerence is a lac tor (i.e., those in wbich
the pil<>t-noulo separation distance lails I<> meet tbe
spooillcation illustrated in Figure 2~), tbe value 01
C.(o) depends upon the amount 01 free-space between
1 be tube and nozzle, and tberelore is a lunction 01 noule
size. In these instances. separate calibrations shall be
performed with eacb of the commonly used noule siz..
in place. Note that the single-vclocity calibration tech-
nique is accepteble lor tbis purpose even tbough the
larger noule~sizes (>0.635 cm or~. inJ are not ordinarily
used for isoklnetic sampling at velocities around 915
m/min (3.000 Itlmin). which is Ihe calibration velocity;
note also thai it is not necessary I<> draw an isokine!jo.
sample during calibration (sce Citation 19 in Section 6).87
4.1.5.3 For a probe assembly constructed such that
It. pJl<>t tube is always used In the same orientation, only
one side 01 the pi tot tube need be calibrated (the side
which will tace tbe Oow). Tbe pJtot tube must st.ilI meet
I he alignment speciftcations 01 Figure 2-2 or 2-3, however,
Dnd must have an avel'8lle deviation (.) valne of 0.01 or
less (see Section 4.1.4.4).
-------
..
(I)
ESTIMATED
SHEATH
BLOCKAGE
C%)
.
(~r
=
[IxW J
tEUCT AREA x 10D
Figure 2-10.
Projected-area m.odels for typical pitot tube assemblies.
4.1.8 Field Use and Recallbratlon.
4.1.6.1 Field Use.
4.1.6.1.1 When a Type B pi tot tube (Isolated tube or
assembly) Is used In the field, the approprlale coollicient
value (wbetber IIBSlgnod or obtained by calibration) sball
be used to perlorm velocity calculations. For calibrated
TvDe B pitot tubes, the A side COt'lIirlent shall be used
when tbe A side oltbe tube laces the lIow, and the B side
coefficient shall be used when the B side fares the !low;
alternatively the arithmetic average of the A and B side
_fficlent values may be used, irrespective 01 which side
faces the !low.
4.1.6.1.2 Wben a probe a.osemblyls used to semple G
small duct (12 to 86 In. In diameter), the probe sheatb
sometimes blodes a significant pen of the duct cross-
"""tion, causlug a reduction In the efiectlve value 01

'Z'. (.). Consult Citation 9 In Beetlon 6 for details. Con-
ventional pllot-5BlDpling probe assembliO$ are not
recommende<1 lor use In ducts having inside dlametero
smaller than 12 Inches (Citation 16 in Bection 6).
4.1.6.2 Recalibratlon.
4.1.6.2.1 Isolated Pitot Tubes. Alter each !leld use, the
pilot tube shall be carefully Teexamlned In lop, side, and
end views. II 'the pilot face openings are stili aligne<1
within the specillcations Illustrated in Figure 2-2 or 2. 3,
It can be assumed tbat the baseline coelliclent of the pilot
tube has not changed. If, however, the tube bes been
damaged 10 the extent that It no louger meets the 8perlll-
cations 01 Figure 2-2 or 2-3, the dama~e shall either be
repaired to restore proper aliRnment 01 the face openings
or the tube shall be discarded.

4.1.6.2.2 Pitot Tube Assemblies. Alter each field use,
eh...k the feee opening alignment 01 the pilot tube, as
In Bectlon 4.1.6.2.1; al,,<>, rem ensure the intcrcomponent
speelngs olthe assembly. If the Intercomponcnt speeln~
bave not chanKcd and the lace openinR aliKnment Is
lCeeptahle, it can be assumed that the coefficient 01 tbs
assemLJly hes not chanKed. II the lace openlnK alignment
Is no longer within the specUications 01 Figurcs 2-2 or

~~ib~~tf~:~C:i~e~~~\';'i;. ~~ ~~:;:";\}.elrl~\~~~

component speeinRs have changcd. restore tbe original
spacings or recalibrate the assembly.

4.2 Btandard pilot tube (If applJcable). If a standard
pilot tulO Is used lor the velocity traverse... the tube shell
be constructed aooording to tbe criteria or ..ection 2.7 and
sball be assigned a baseline ooeftIclent value of 0.99. U
the standard pilot tube IB aaed as part or an assembly.
the tube sba.U be In an Interfemno&.tree lUTallgemcnt
(subject to the approval 01 the AdmInistra1or).

U Temperature Oauges. After each field use. ea1J-
brate dial thermometers, liquld-lI1Ied bulb thermom-
eter.J, tbermocouple-potentiometer systems, and other
gauges at a temperature within 10 percent of tbe average
absolute steck tempereture. For tem~tures up 10
405° C (761° F), w;" an ABTM mercurY-lD-glass reference
tbermometer, or equivalent, as a reference; alternatively,
either a relerence thermocouple and potentiometer
(calJbrated b'l NBB) or thermometric filed points, e.g.,
ioe betb en boiling water (corrected for barometrlo
pressure) may be used. For temperatures Gbove {O50 C
(761° F), u.
-------
6. QlkWotlom

CarTy out ('8lcuJation9, retaining at least one extra
decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round
off figures altar final calculation.
6.1 N omencJature.
A = Cross~tIonal area of stack, m' (ft').
B..=Water vapor In the gas stream (from Method 5 or
Reference Method 4), proportion by volume.
C.= Pltot tube coefficient, dimensionless.
K.=Pltot tube constant,
34 97 ~ [(g/g-mole)(mm Hg)]'/J
. sec (OK)(mmHaO)

for the metric 8)'!tem and
. 8549 !!. [(Ib/lb-mole)(in. Hg)]I/l
. BeC (OR)(in. HJO)
for the English &ystam.
M .=Moleeular weight of stack gas, dry basis (see
Bection 3.6) gig-mole Ob/ll>-mole).
M.=Moleeular weight of stack gas, wet basis, gig-
mole (lb/ll>-mole).
=M. (1-B_)+18.0 B.. Equation 2-5
Pbar=Barometrlc pressure at m68SW'ement site, rom
Hg (in. Bg).
P,=Stack static pressure, mm Bg (In. Bg).
P.=Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in. Bg).
=P..,+P, Equation 2-6
P..d=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92
In. Bg).
Q'd = Dry volumetric stack gas flow rate corrected to
standard conditions, dscm/br (dscf/br).
1.=Stack temperature, °C (OF).
T.=Absolute stack tempel'&ture, oK (OR).
=273+1. for metric Equation 2-7
c460+l. for English Equation 2-8
T..d = Standard ahsolute tempel'1ft1!l'e, 293 OK (528" R)
..=AverBjte stack gas velocity, m/sec (ft/see).
Ap=VelocilY head of stack gas, mm B,O (in. B,O).
3,600=Conversion factor, sec/hr.
18.0=Molecular weight of water, gig-mole Ol>-lb-
mole).
5.2 Average staak gas velocity.
II, = K pC p ( ..['i;p) .,.
5.3 Average stack gas dry volumetric flow rate,
Qod=3,600( I-B..,)v,A
(T:;:J (J.J

Equation 2-10
6. BfbllDgrapAu
1. Mark. L. 8. Mechanical Englnoo!'!!' Bandbook. New
York McGraw-Hill 800k Co.. 1no. 1951.
2. Perry).. J. B. Chemical Engineers' Bandbook. Nell'
York. Mcuraw-Bill Book Co., Inc. 1960.
~. ~"i.,'ham, R. T., W. ~'. 1'0<.1,1. ",,01 W. S. Smith.
~i~I\llil':\IIc~ of Error!' in St:wk 8ampliltK ~ft'f~s1lrements.
".:-:. Environllhmla~ Protf\('lion AJ(I'Ih'.y, Ro~arch
Tri:'Ulllh' P:.\rk. N.C. (Prpsl'nh-ti at t.h~ Anlllmi ~f't~litlp;of
tilt' Air Pollution Control As.'\OCiation, St. Louis, Mo.,
JIIIII' [.I-tH, 1!)iO.)
.t. :-:1;uHlard :\1l,thod Cor SrmlplinJ1; Sl.~k:, Cor Pnrliculate
:\1aIIt'r. In: tH71 Book of A8TM SI:'\I\tlanl~, Pnrt 23.
l'ht!:.dl'lphia, Pa. IU71. AST~t 1)1'~i~nalinH () "'~I'2M-71.
:,. \ "1111:\111, J. K. f+:hHuentnry Fluicl .\tl'I'h.\lIks. Nt'W
York. John \\,i1.,y <\1\" Sons. (nc. HH7.
ti. 1;111111 ~1,'II'rs-Ttwir Tlwnry :\1141 Applkation.
A 1I\I'ril':m ::;Ol'h.'t y of ~11'ch;mic:.,1 J':IIJ.:illI'l'r..., ;..; I~W York,
N;~'.\~';:;"iL\ E 1T:1II1lhnnk oC FIIIlI1:lIlh'III:II..:. 1~17'2. p, ~~.
~. ,\111111:\1 Book or .\S1'.\1 ::Halldard:,. I'an '2ti. IUi4. p.
tH~.
'I. "oHam, R. F, Uui.lt'1iu{'s Cor TYP1' ;4 Pilnt Tuhn
(';Ilihralillll. U.8. EnvirontlH'ntal Prnll'I'lion Agl'Il(,Y.
tt."I'al'ch Trlau.,;lcPark, N,('. I Pn'sl'I1II'tl nt 1st Annual
~II'f'tin~, SOIlH'(' ~:vaillation :O:ocii'IY. Day tOil, Uhio,
:-31'pl~lIlbf'r 1~, IHi5,)8/
10. \'oUaro, R. F. A Tyl'" S Pitot 1'llh" l"llibralion
Slwlv, U.S. F.nv!rollll1f'utul Protedion Aj.tpncy, Jo:mis-
sion "'\1pn.sufI'ment Branch, Hcseurch Triangle }Jark,
N.C. July 1~74.
11. Vollam. R. F. The EIYeels of Impart OpeniUR
~li:O:, L.S. Environme-utal Proh'ctiun A~~n('y, Emis--
...ion )11'a.:iUff'lIwnt Brauch, Rl;'searrh Triangle Park,
N.('. ~I)vt'ml)t'r lU76.
1:1. VolhlTo, R. F. An Evaluation of Sill~le-'-elocity
f 'alihrat ion Tt'chniqu(' as a :\Irans of l)Ptt'rmininR Type
~ Pilot Tuhe Coellicil'llts. U.S. Environnwntal Protec-
IlOlI AgPIl('Y, Emission MpaSUI'4'IIII'llt Hn.uu.:h. Rcsearcb
1'ria,,~le Park, N.C. AUKUst lU7.';.87
H. VoUaTO, R. F. The l7se of TyPt' S Pilot Tu""s for
t ht' MI't\Surt'nwllt or Low Yelocilirs. U ,S, Environmental
J}rotection A~ency, Emis....,ion :\h'l\..":iUff'lIwnt Branch,
Ht':,parch Triangle Pnrk. N.C, Novt'mhp.r 1976.
15. Smilh, ~ltlTvin L. Velocity C"libralion of EP A
Type Source Sampling Probe. Uniled Teehnologi..
('orperation. Pratt and Whitney Aircmft Division,
Easl Hartford, Conn. In5.
16. \,,)lIaro, R. F. ReeoITUnend.d Pro",,<.Inl'o for Sample
Traverses in Ducts Smaller than 12 Jnchf"s in DitU11eter.
F.S. Environmental Protection Agrllcy. Emission
:\Ien.surcment Branch, Research Triangle JJal'k, N.C.
'\;o\"pmb('r 1~j'6.
17. Ower, E. and R. C- P"nkhurst. The ~[easuTPment
oC Air Flow, 4th Ed" London, Perga1l1on Prf's.q. ItJ66.
I~. \'olhlTo, R. F. A Survey of C:olIIlII"l'cillily Available
III~lnllneHtation for the ~1t:~l\Surt'nwnt of Low-Range
(ias \'..locitips. U.S. Environmt'ntal Protpclioll Agency.
El1Iis~ion :\Y"asurt;>lUpnt Branch, RI'~arch Triangle
Park, ~.C. Novemb<>r 1976. (Unpublished Paper) 87
I!t. Unyp, A. W., C. C. St. Pierre, D. 8. Smith, D.
~Iouon, an<.l J. 81.iner. An EXI"'rimcntal Investigation
III-Appendix A-14
of the EfT""t of PitOt Tuhe-Sampling Pm"" Configura-
tionR on the Magnitude of the S Typo' pitot Tnbe Co-
,,!tif.i,'nt for COIlUl)I'I'I'ially Availaillt' ;0:;1)111'('" ~nml)1ing
Prooo., Prepared by the UnivPr.ity o[ Windsor for the
Mini.lry o[ the F.nvironlllent, ToronlO, Canada. Feb-
TUlIJ'Y 1975.
t£-
-------
Mpthod Z:\. Direct Measurement of Gas
Volume Through Pipes and Small DuCt8195

1. Appliwbilfl,\' and Principle.
1.1 Applicabil::y. This method app!.E's to
the measurC?ment 01 gCls flow rates in pipes
and small duc:ts. either in-lin!! or at exhClust
positions. within the temperature range of 0
to 50'C.
1.2 Principle. A gas volume meter is used
to measure gas volume direc:ly. Temperature
and pressure measurements Are made !o
correct the volume to standard condltiuns.
2. Apparatus.
Specifications for the apparatus are given
below. Any other apparatus that has been
demonstrated (subject to approval of the
Administrator) to be capable of meeting the
specific:ations will be considered acceptable.
2.1 Gas Volume Meter. A positive
displacement meter. turbine meter. or other
direct volume measuring device capabie of
measuring volume to within 2 percent. The
mE'lt!r sh«1! bp. pqulpped with a tf'I!';" ,,,t:F"
gauge ("! 2 p!!r' .'nl of the minimurT1 ~> "'.'t:
lemppraluH') and a pressure "d;Jg" ;.: ~.S !'"1:1:
Hg). The mill1'lL.c:urer's recornmf'::.j, d
capacity of thp mE'ter shdll be sdfic:"nl f'Jr
the f'xpected mClximum and mini!!' "'" fluw
rates at the sampling conditions.
Temperature. pressure. corrOSIve
characteristics. and pipe size are (ClC!i,IS
necessary 10 consider in choo~lng as,: :,,1,;,.
ges meter. ?1~

2.2 Baromf't/'r A mercul'V, anoJ(..J or
othl'r baronu.tcr c;l(wble of ~w"M'r,:-':
atmospheric prp,ssure to within 2 5 IYlm fig !;,
many ca&e~. the barometric: reridln;': rrri~ "I'
obtCllned from II n~arby nHtlOn;:1 we,.!:).:r
service stiltion. in which CHse the s:,,' ..n
ndut: (whJl:h is Ihl' Hhs.,lut" barorn':!~":
prrssurp) shill! hI' requ!!~fPU a:':u all
udjustment for t-'Jevatton d~fh ri'nces Le~...&.'f ;.!.
the weather strillon ilnd the sClmplin~ pUll"
shall be applied at iI rate of minus z.;, mm 11;/
per 30-meter elevallon increase. or \,'cp-\'ers"
for elevation decrease.
2..1 Stopwatch. C;;pflble of meas,m'mt':!'
to wl~hin 1 sec::.:..d
3. Prucedure.
3.1 lnsta!/alio.'7 As there are nump, U;JS
types of pipes anc small auc!s that m;,~' b~
subjPct tn volume mp.<,suremenl. it w('uld l>~
d,fi,cL.!t to describe HII possib1e inst":;u'::.:n
schemes. In general !iange fmings sho'.J!d he
used for all connections wherever possible
Gilskets or other sea) materIals should be
used to assure leak-tight connec:ti:ms. Thl'
volume meter should be located so as :n
a\'oid sevl:re vibrations and other filctors tha'
ma} affect the mt'tt'r cCllibr..tiO:l.
3.2 Leak Tf:.~t. A \'o!ume meter !nslal!ed
at a location under positive pressure may be
leak-d:.:ckp.d at the meter c0nn!'c:iG!',s b\
using a liquid leak detector solutio:l -
contl:mir:!Z a surfactHnl. Apply a ~:n,i!1
a!T.ount of the s:;lullun to the connec:::ms. If H
leak exists, b'Jbbles will form, and tl..- leak
must be corrected.
A volume meter instaJIed at a 10(',- ::pn
under negiltlve prt'ssure IS very diifll.ldt to
test for leaks without blocking flow at the
inlet of the linp :]nd watcbng for meter
movement. If this procedure is nol pos~i:"ll~,
visuaily che(.k all connections and assure
tight seals.
.
3.3 Volume l\feas:Jreme.~I.
3.3.1 For sources with continuous. stPed;:
emission flow rates. record the inif;~j mf'ter
volume reading. metp.r temperaturpIE). me!cr
pressure. anc stHrt the stopwa!,:h.
Throughout the test penod, record th me;,.,.
temperature(s) and p~essure so thri: C\'C~ilg~
values can be determined. At the el'r~ of the
test. stop the timer and record the e:3psed
Ume, the final volume reading. mel~r
temperature(s). and pressure. Reco~d Ih!'
barometric pressure at the beglnlllng and end
of the test run. Record the data on a t;;b!p
similar to figure 2A-1.

3.3.2 For sources with noncontinuous.
non-steady emission flow rates. use the
procedure in 3.3.1 with the addition of the
following: Record all the meter parHmeters
and the start and stop times corresponding to
each process cyclical or noncontinuous event.
4. Calibration.
4.1 Volume Meter. The volume mpter is
cahbrated agClinst a standard r~f~rence meter
prior to its initial use in the field. The
reference meter is a spirometer or Ii'luid
displacement meter with a capacity
consistent with that of the test melt,r.
Alternately. a calibrated. standeird pitot
mav be used as the reference mFter In
co~iunction with a wind tunnel assemh!y.
AIlHCh the test meter to the V\ int! tunnel 50
that the total now passes through the test
meter. For each calibration run. conduct a 4-
point traverse along one sta.:.i-. diClmeter at a
position at least eight diameters of strdight
tunnel C:ownstream and two diameters
upstream of any bend. inlet. or air mover.
Determine the traverse point locations as
specifie.j in Method 1. Calculate the reference
volume us;ng the velocity values following
the pro::edure in Method 2. the wind tunnel
cress-sectional area. and the run time.
Set up the test meter in a configuration
similar to that used in the field installation
(i.e.. in relation to the flow moving device).
Connect the temperature and pressure gauges
as they are to be used in the field. Conncet
the reference meter at the inlet of the flow
line. if appropriate for the meter. and begin
gas 110w through the system to condition the
meters. During this conditioning operation.
check the system for leaks.
The calibriltion shall be run over at leAst
three different flow rates. The calibration
flow rates shall be about 0.3. 0.6. and 0.9
times the test meter's rated maximum fiow
rate.
For each calibration run. the data to be
collected include: reference meter initial and
final volume readings. the test meter initial
and final volume reading. meter average
tt:r:1perature and pressure. barometric
pressure. and run time. Repeat the runs at
each flow rate at least three times.
Calculate the test met~r ca!ibratlOn
coefficient. '1m.' for each run as follows:
(V,,-V"J (t,..~:'3)
p.
1f'.+P,1
Ym =
(VM,- vM,J(tm+273)
Eq. 2A-1 Where
Y m = Test volume meter calibration
coefficient. dimensionless.
V,= Reference meter volume reading. m',
Vm=Test meter volume reading, m'.
tr= Reference meter average temperature.
0c.
III-Appendix A-15
tm=Tesl meter average temperature, 0c.
P.=Barometric preSbure. mm Hg.
P.=Test meter average static pressure. mm
Hg.
f = Final reading for run.
i = lnitial reading for run. 213

Compare the three Y m values at each
of the flow rates tested and determine
the maximum and minimum values. The
difference between the maximum and
minimum values at each flow rate
should be no greater than 0.030. Extra
runs may be required to complete this
requirement. If this specification cannot
be met in six successive runs, the test

meter it not suitable for use. In addition,
the meter coefficients should be
between 0.95 and 1.05. If these
specifications are met at all the flow
rates. average all the Y m values from
runs meeting the specifications to obtain
an average meter calibration coefficient,
Ym.213
The procedure above shall be
performed at least once for each \'olume
meter. Thereafter. an abbreviated
calibration check shall be completed
follo\\iing each field test. The calibration
of the volume meter shall be checked by
performing three calibration runs at a -
single. intermediate flow rate (based on
the pre\'ious field test) with the meter
pressure set at the average value
encountered in the field test. Calculu te
the average value of the calibration
factor. If the calibraticn has changed by
more than 5 percent. recalibrate the
meter over the full range of flow as
descr;bed above.

Note.-If the volume meter cClIiLration
coefficient values obtained before and after a
test series differ by more than 5 percent. the
test series shall either be voided. or
calculations for the test series shall be
performed using whichever meter coefficient
value (i.e.. before or after) gives the greater
value of pollutant emission rate.

4.2 Temperature Gauge. After each
test series, check the temperature gauge
at ambient temperature. Use an
American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) mercury-in-glass
reference thermometer, or equivalent, as
a reference. If the gauge being checked
agrees within 2 percent (absolute'
temperature) of the reference. the
temperature data collected.in the field
shall be considered valid. Otherwise,
the test data sha!! be considered invaI:d
or adjustments of the test results shall
be made. subject to the approval of the
Administrator.
4.3 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer
used against a mercury barometer prior to thp
field test.
5. Calculations.
Carry Oul the calculations. retaining at
least one extra decimal figure beyond that of
the acquired data. Round off figures after the
final calculation.
-------
5.1 Nomenclature
P.=Barometric pressure. mm Hg.
p. = Average static pressure in volume meter.
mmHg.
QI=Gas flow rate. m'/min. standard
conditions.
Tm=Average absolute meter temperature. 'K.
Vm=Meter volume reading. m'.
Y m = Average meter calibration coefficient.
dimensioJ11ess.
f = Final reading for test period.
i=lnitial reading for test period.
6=Standard conditions. 20' C and 760 mm
Hg.
S=Elapsed test period time. min. 21

5.2 Volume.
'V... = 0.3853 Ym (V..,.v...J
Eq.2A-2 213

5..1 Gas Flm,' flule.
(P. + PI!
Too
Q.
Vm.
e
Eq. 2A-3 2 3
6. Bibliography.
6.1 Rom. Jerome J. M~ln![;J)iir.rp.
Calibration. and OperiJlion of ls"kinf'tic
III-Appendix A-16
Source Sampl::1~ Equipment U.S.
Environmental Prolec!lun Agenc~'. R8~t'"rr.h
Triangle Park. N.C. Pub!lcation !'
-------
Pl ar. t
Oa'te
R~r. ~:~r:;~er
Sample Locat~oli
Baro~etric Pressure ~~ Hg
S ta r t
Finish
O;:>erators
."aeter Nu;-:::.er
Meter Calibration CQe~ficier.t
Last Date :aiibrateG
; ~~e
I V01ui7:~
i.ieter
read i r.a
Sta~ic .
'Jn~SSli:'"e !
.
Ru~/clock
I

.

I.
.1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
rr.rn H
7E::;;peratu~e
°C oK
I
I
I

.1
i
.1.
I
,
I
I
r
I
I
1
-

I
I
I I
__I I
i I
I I
R
I I
I I
I I
! I
1- I
Average
--
Figure 2A-l.
Volu;;;e flc..., rate :::easure::':er.~ data.
III-Appendix A-I?
-------
Method 2B-Determination of Exhaust Gas
Volume Flow Rate From Gasoline Vapor
Incinerators 195
1..4ppli(oh;I:f.\ ond Prinrll'.'f' 213

1.1 .4pplico!Ji/i:y. This mpthod "r:;J;ie~ '\1
the measurement of exhaust \'ulume nuw ratl'
frum incinerators that process ga5n s;:as The span
\'it:dl' for the OJ, an;d~'zpr sha!!'J.. ;:; pt'rc:rnt
h volume. All cahbrHtlon gHse~ m,lst he
I~trodur:pd at the l.unr.ect,,)f! betweer tioe
pr(,be and the Si:r.~r ;p line, If!J mHn,!, ,'d
~\ £,ten; is used for thp (lxhi-ii..lst anai:,'zers, a!l
(iJf- n!1~!\'zprs and sbm;:,lt-' pumps must bf
{~pf'~;-':r.~ "'hen thf' cc.:l;brat10ns are do.nt'
':lte foot !t",t' r'.:rrf'~es of this te~t. mr!h:JTi(:
s~'.diJiJ ri(.lI lIt! u:-.pc dS an orgiin!c Cnllbri,tH,n
).: <:: ~..
;,- '; SJ:o;~i,!ir:r;, At the hrgip.ni:1/1 of ti:2 test
p-,-ir,d. rpr'c:rcl t1!e initIal parametrrs hlr th"
i:-:'"t \'obmt' mpter according to th"
p-ocp.d:Jres i!1 Method ZA and mark all cf tht'
rf'Lord.": s~rip charts to indicate the start 01
t!..P tesT. Contmue rec:Jrding ir,let ()~ganic an:J
e.'~~ust Co,. CO. ar.d crgur.ic c-2
5 B;hliu~n:;)f:\'.
~: l'Me~sure~ent of \',,!ac,;l' Org"~IH'
Cup.:pounds, U.S. Environmental Protp(.t,on
A!(rnrv. Office of Air Q'Jal1ty Plbnninl/ and
SiHnd~rds. Rpsearch Triangi~ Park, !'\.c.
27711. P!:bbcation ]'1;0. EPA-4~(Ji ::-7B-{}41.
Octobpr 197fi. p. 55.
-------
METHOD 3-n.,~ A'''LY"I~ FOR ('ARROS OIOXIDB,
OXYGEN, t:nr.1!8 AIR, AND DRY MOI.>:I.VI..,R W >:1G BY
J. Principle Gild ApplicGbi/it~
1.1 Prirwlp1f'. A RI\.'" ~amph' is ",:lnwlf',l Crom n ~lQ.l'k
hy UI'!~ of tllt~ ft!"owiIlR, lIIf'thods: (1) siIlMlc-point: grab
!',ullphllJt4 I:!) :-;1I1~h'-p()lnt. intr-gralN] sampling' or (3)
1IIIIIIi,pf)inl, illh'~mtl'tl sa III pli IlR. The gas sa;np1e Is
analY7.I'd (or IWrt'l'lit ('I\rholl (Hudde (CO]), Pf'ft'('llt o:ty.
~.'11 (Ih). und. if nl'j'.".....ary, .)ton'f'lIl (,RriJon lIIonra.h.le
(CO). H n clry IIInlt't'uhu wt'h:ht .It'll'flilination is to b6
IlladA, l'ithl'l' an Or~at or a Fyrilf' I BllaJ}1.I'f m:\y be us('d
Cor lhe unalysis; ror ('\('I'S-'i air or t.rni:.;...;ion ral.f' l:urn'('tion
CacLor det~'nllillnti()n, an Orsultmwyzf'r must h~ uS4.d.
l.~ Applicahi1ity. 'I'hl< ""'11",,115 app1icahle for de-
I,'rmilling C02 and 0% l'UIH'I'nlrutions, 1':'\4"'SS air, and
dry lUol~ular w4'i~h1 of a :-rll1iuaUons. E"l1lUpll'.s of ='I}{'dlic meth..
0419 and mndtfit'!\Hol1s In('lw.1p: 0) a multi-point sam~
linl; nH'thoc.l U:O:lIIg an Orsat :\lIulyz1'r to ullalyze Il1l.1i.
\"idual grab S3mplt.,S obto.lrh'tJ al t'ach l)Otllt; (2) a IDl'lhod
tlshlR C02 or 02 and stoichiulIlI'lrlc cul('ulalion::l to det..r.
mine dry rnolf'clIlar wt'il{ht and f'XCf'SS air: (3) assignillJl a
,'alue of 30.0 for dry molt-cular w..ight, in Ii"ll of adus}
nW8;"u.r{"numts, for prOCl'SS4'::I hnrllillK natural gas, ('081, or
4111. rhf'se mt>thods and m04liJif'aUon:; may he uSt-d, I)ut
:".. ~lIhJf'Ct to thf' "\J'prn"'MIII( Ih~ Administmtor. t.,~
":'I\lrnflIl1l'1lI:\1 Prolf'j"II" Al"'11I'}'87
~. Apparalu6
. As an al~el'nalivf! I? thp ~l\lIlplinR npj)al'allis Bud ~)S-
,1'1Il~ d~scliherl hpreU1, otlh'f sampling s)'::iI..ms (l',~..
~lqlllf1 d.~plo.cel'lent). may 00 US('11 proviclt-d such sy~tt'ms
.~rl). cnl-!n.l!le of ohtall1ing a r~'pn':'iI'lItnlivo samp(e and
mfl.lntummR 11 conSlant S3l1lphlll( nUl', and are oLherwiga
~u~ahle .of }'icldiug accl'ptnhle r,'slIlrs. \!se of such
:-oyshnns 19 suhject to the Bpprontl 01 the :\dministrator
~.I Urub ~ampling (Flguro 3-1). - .
'!.I.I Prohe. 'fhe probe should he m~,lo 01 stailll...
:oI1.~!e. or '?«>rosllk:.rte gllJ.SS tuhi.~J( ulIll should be equipped
\\ ILh an ItHltuck or ollt-stuck hUrr to remove particulatn
IIIIItter (a plug 01 glnss wool is "Illslactory lor this pur-
pose). Any o'her material inert to 0., CO., CO, and N.
and resistant to temperature at :-;ampling conditions may
he used (or the probe; exo.mp(t's of such matl'rial 8I'e
al~lm~n~m, cup~r, quartz glt1."5 anll T..f(on.
, . ~,t.:l ( mop. A one-way S4:IUCf'ze bulb, or f"quivl\lt'nt,
I. . u.',ed to tran.port the g"" sample to the analy..r.
Ll Int'~rated Sampling (Figure 3-2).
~. Ui~ ~~~::re. A probe such as thnt described in SectiOD
. MnnUon 01 trade namos or specillc products does not
('On~Utute .ndo.....ment by the Environmental Prot..,.
11011 AJ(f'o('y.
_/
PROBE
2.2.2 Conden!lel. An &lr-oooIOO or ...al6-oooled eoo-
denser, oz otber eondenser tbat ...iU Dot ""move 0..
(~O." CO, and N., may be used to remove e.ooss moJsture
:;~e80;':::~t~~terfere wltb tbe operation ot the pump
2.2.3 Valye. A Deedle ...&lve is used to adJwt sample
gas flow rate.
2.~.4 Puml>. A leak-Ir"", diaphragm-type pump or
.qu..alenl,Is nsed to transport sampl~ gas to the fI..ibJe
I,ag. InstaU a small surge tank between the pump and
r.'e mr.ter to eliminate the pulsation etrcct 01 the di~
vhragm pump on the rotametcr.
2.2.6 Rate Meter. The rotameter, or equivalent rate
DIeter, nsed shonld be capable ot m.asuring flow rate
to wlLiun :i,2 (>prrrnt 01 tho sclected lIow rale. Allow
ra!e rangfl 01:r,()(J to 1000 cm3jmin is sUJ!~,'~tf'd,
2.2.6 Fl..."le n~. Any IMk-!.ree plastic (e.g., Tedlar.
Mylar, Teflon) or pJoslic-eoaled aluminum (e.g., alumi-
",.ed Mylar) bag, or equivalent, ha\'in~ a car.lICilY
('onSJswnt wIth the ~l('ct('d flow ra1e and time ength
of the te.~t ron, may be nsed. A capadt). in the rallge 01
66 to 90 h t<-rs IS suggpsted.
To leak.du'ck the bllR, cs a leak.
2.2.7 Pressure Gange. A water-filled U-tnbe manom-
.ter, or .equivalent, 01 about 28 em (12 in.) is used lor
the lIe., ble bill! Iook-eheck.
2.2.8 Vacuum Gange. A mercury manometer, or
"'Iwvalent, 01 at least 760 mm Bg (30 in. Bg) is used lor
tbe sampling trainleak-eheck.
2.3 Analysis. For Orsat and Fyrite analy..r main-
t<-11&I1.... and operation prorednres, lollow the instrueIJons
""",mmended by the manulllCturer, unless otherwise
spec.ified herein,
2.3.1 Dry Molecular Weight Determination. An O......t
.nalyr.er or Fyrite type rombustion gas IW81rr.er may be
used.
2.3.2 Emission Rate CorrectioD Factor or E.ress Air
netennination. An Ursat analy... must be used. For
low CO. Oess than 4.0 percent) or bigb O. (greater tban
15 0 percent) eoncentralions, the measuring burette of
the Onat mllBt have at least 0.1 percent subdivisions.
3. Dr, Molteular Jf',iqht Dtttrmfnalioll
MY of the three sampling and analytiral Pro<'edures
d....:ribed below may be u.sed lor detennining the dry
Dlolecular weight.
3.1 Single-Point, Grab Sampling and ADa!ytlcaI
Procedure. .
3.1.1 Tbe sampling point In the dnct shall either be
at the oentroid ot the cross section or .t a point no eIoIIer
to the ...aIIs than 1.00 m (3.3 It J. UDle6s otherwise specified
by the Administrator.
FLEXIBLE TUBING
Fil TtR (GLASS WOOL)
SQUEEZE BULB
Figure 3.1. Grab-sampling train.
III-Appendix A-19
8.1.2 Bet up tbe equipment lIS mown in Figure 3-1,
'maJDng IIUJ'1! all eonnl'(:tions ahead 01 the analy...r are
tight and look-tree. 11 an Orsat analyzer Is used, It IB
recommended that the analyzer be 1eaked-ehecked by
foUowing tbe pr~ure In Section 5; bowever, the leak-
did is optional.
3.1.3 Place the probe In the stack, witb tbe tip 01 the
probe positioDed at the sampling point; purge the sampl-
ing line. Draw a sample into tbe analy.er and Imme-
diateJy analy.elt lor percent CO. and percent 0,. Deter-
mIne the percentage 01 the gas that Is N. and CO by
IlUbtl1lcting the sum 01 the percent CO. and percent O.
from 100 perrenl. Calculate the dry molecular weight as
indicated In Section 6.3.
3.1.4 Repeat the sampling, antilysis, and calculation
procedures, until the dry molecular weights ot nny throo
rrab samples dilIer from their menJJnulP. Ev(\('uatc thelle.ihlr bill!. Connect
'he prohe and plare it III the staek, with the tip of the
pro)l(' posil iODCd at the sam) lUng point; pUTgt' the samp1-
11\1 liuf'. I'PJt, COlln~~t the haR and mak~ 9ure that all
eonl1P(:tion~ arf' tilltht and leak frrp.
3.~.3 (;ample at a eonstant rate. The sampling nlll
"honld bP simultallOOll!\ with, 611d for thf'! same \.OtaJ
Ipn,-th or timp a.-;, the pollutant emission ratf' drtf'rmin6-
lion. Colleetion 01 at l.ast 30 liters (J .lW) It.) 01 SIImple gas
)fI. rt't"Ommpndt'd; however, smal1tr v01umes may be
("()l1p.rt,.d, U dp~iff'd.
~ 2 4 Obtain one integrated IIlIe gas SIImp!e during
.e.'h pollutant emission faIR dt>t,'rmillation, Within 8
honrs af~r t.ht' sample i~ takpn, analyu it for pprrf'llt
CO) and perrPllt 02 using either an Ur~t ana1)'tl'r or a
Fyrite-trpe rombllstion ras anal)'..r. II an Or...t alla-
Iy""r is used, II is recommende" that the Orsat leak-
o.h...k df\o;rriiJed In Section 6 be perlonned !)Plore this
de\.ermination; bowever, the eh...'k 121 optional. UelA'r-
mine the percentale 01 thelllB thaI is N I and CO by SlIb-
'""'tilll tbe 8UD1 01 tho Dereent CO. and percent O.

f:'.<:iJ'~~':~~ the /IrJ molacular ..elgbt lIS
TO ANAL YZER
-------
,PROBE
RATE METER
VALVE
SURGE TANK
FILTER"
(GLASS WOOL)
AIR.COOLED
CONDENSER
QUICK DISCONNECT
RIGID CONTAINER
Figure 3.2. Integrated gas-sampling train.
 TRAVERSE Q % DEV.a
TIME PT. 1pm
 AVERAGE  
Q . Q avg )
a% DEV = ( 100
Davg
(MUST BE ~10%)
Figure 3"~. Sampling rate data.
III-Appendix A-20
BAG
-------
8J1.6 Repe!lt the analysis and ealcuJation proceclures
until the Inclivldual dry molecular weigh'" lor any three
llnalyscs differ from t[,eir mean by nil more than 0.3
R!g-mole (0.3Ib/lb-mole). Average th- three molecular
weights, nnd report the results \.0 the nearest 0.1 gig-mole
(O.llb/lb-mole).
S.3 . Multi-Poilll, IIII<>grated SampHng end Analytical
Procea ure.
8.3.1 UDle~s otherwiS<' s""eifled by the Admlni.-
trator, n minimum 01 ei~ht treverse points shall be used
lor circular stach bn~lIlg diameu-rs leO'S then 0.61 m
(24 ID.), n minimum 01 nille shall be used lor rectangular
stacks bavlng equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m
(24 In.). aud a minImum 01 twelve traverse points shall
be ul'<'d lor all otber eaSl's. The traverse points sball he
!ocatod aeoordlnG to Mothod 1. The uS<' olle\\'er poin'"
IS snhject to appro~al 01 the Administrator.
3.3.2 Follow the procedurl'S outlined in S""UOIlS 3.~.~
through3.2.5, "".ept lor the lollowing: tra~erse all sam-
pling POUI1,:; alld sanlple at 01lCh point lor an equallellgtb
01 time. R~ord s"l1pling data as sho\\'n in Figure 3-3.
6. Emission Rale Co,r,dion Fado, or Ezc"s Air Dt1tr-
rnlnll/Ion
N oTE.-A Fyrlte-type com bust ion gas analyze~ is not
ooceptable lor eleess air or emission rate correction !actor
determInation, unless appro~ed by the Adrninlstnnor.
II both percent CO. !lDd percent O. are measured, tbe
nnalytieai n'6ults olnny 01 the three procl'dures given
below ma)' also be used lor calculating the dr)' molecular
weight.
Each 01 the three procedures below shan be u..d Oil"
,,'hen specified in an applicable subpan 01 the standard..
The use of tl}{~se procedurE's for other pUlpo~('8~!O(>s (thrpe or lour) slmuld be made
betw""n readings. 01 constant readings cannot be
obtained oltpr three consecutlve readings, replace tbe
absorbing oolutlon.)
4.1.6 Alter the IInal)'sls is completed. loak-ch""k
(mandalo,)') the Orsat anal)'[er ouee again as described
in Section ~. For the results 01 the analysis to be valtd.
the Ors~t analy[er must pa... this Icak tc~t belore and
alter the anal)'sls. NOTE.-Slnee this single-point groh
sampltn~ and anal~.tlcal procedu,e Is nermall)' conduetl'd
In ""nJunction ",ith a single-point. grab samplln!! and
aualytJcsl procPdure for a pollutant, only ono anal)'~i:-.
10 ordinarii)' conducted. Therelore, grt'at ea..e must b,.
takell \.0 ohtain a valid sal1lple and annl)'si8. AIUlou!!1
in moot e""",, only CO, or O. is requir.'d. It Is reoom-
mr..A,.,4 ".R\ both CO, and n. bp D1PQltUr.-d. and thBL
SeCtiOD 4.4 be useu \.0 Talida'" t . anal)'t,,'ai data.
P:';"d~~~le-J'Oillt, Integratod Sa"'I'HII~ an~ Anal~ ';".1
4.2.1 Tho SII",plillg point ill the du,,' shall he 10.';0,..,1
as sp""W.u ill f'''''tion 4.1.1.
4.~.2 ,fA':1k~hl'Ck (JnandR~ory) the fiPlih1f' hat:: n<: ill
f\p.c\lon _.2.~. 8<'t up the eqUIpment as shown in ~'iJtUr.
3-2: Just pnor 1.0 samphn!!, I.ak-ch...k (maIlUl1lor)') tho
tram b)' placmg a vacuum gauge at tbe ""ndenser Inll'l
pulling B vacunm 01 at least 250 mm llg (10 in. Hg\'
\Jlug~mg the outlet lit tbe qulek disconnect, and tbe~

turning oft the pump. The vacuum shall rem:lin stable
lor at I_t o.~ minute. Evacuate the flexible bag. Oon-
nect the probe and place It in tbe stack, wltb the Up olth.
probe positioned at the sampling point; purge the san..
pIIng line. Nelt, connect the bag and make sure tbat
nll connections are tight and leak free.
4.2.3 Bample at a constant rate, or as specified by lhe
Administrator. The sampling run mnst be simultaneou<
mth, and lor the same totallengt.b 01 time 86, the pollut.
c.ut emission rate determination. Collect at least 30
liters (1.00 ft.) 01 sample gas. Smaller volumes may be
collected, subleet to appronl 01 the Adnllnigtrafor.
4.2.4 Obta none im"l:t'atod flue gas sumple dnrin~
each pollutant t>mig.~ion rate detennination. }o~or clllissJ01I
rate rorrf"Ction Cartor drterminalioll, 8nalyU' th(' ~JUpl,'
within 4 hours 8hl'r it is tak,~n fur pt'H'el1t CO~ OJ' J>l'Tt't'lI1
0, (88 oUllh1Pd in St'ctiolls 4.2.5 lhrou~h 4.2.7), Tilt.
Orsat analner must be IMk-<,h~ked (see ".'Ction ,,'
'>pfore tho e.nah'sis. If rJCf'SS air i~ d('~irf'lI. pn.k'('('(l 1\"
lollows: (I) within 4 bours alter the sample is take...
Bnal}'zc it (8$ ill Sc~tjOl1.'5 4.~..) through 4.2.';) for I~r"t III
CO:. O:!, and CO: (2) dpl('rmine the J)('rC"(,l1h\t!I' of th...
1l3S 11mt i~ N, hy SUh11'RCtill!Z the ~llm or tll" IWII'I'III (~u:.
IWI'Cl'nt 0" and p~rC('llt CO tr~m )00 pt'fl"'111. ;3} 1'~1:'
culatl' p4'fl'cnt t'\\'pss air, as O1l1hurd in ~f.,\.tllln ti,~.
4.2.5 1'0 ensure complete absorption 01 th., t.( ':. 0,.
or if applicabll', CO, m8kl' rt'pps1t'd pas~s tllflH1lo!h "3. Ii
ahsorbing solution until t.wo conSl'('uti~(' rpatltn~:- af. Ili~
samp. t)t.'vpral pas.",'s (thrl't' or four) should hf' Jlm"l ht 4
tween n'adin~s. (If C'-OIlShll1t fI.awl1KS l'&.unot hr \,h1..3:1I'"
attt'.l thne cons(o{:utife reaui, ng:: frvlnt:c t.he Ul'~ll'lIig
solution. )
4.2.6 RePfat the anal)"$ls until the 10110\\ i,,~ ,'nkna
arf'ml"t:
4.2.6.1 For per<'pnt CO" r"1)('(1t thf> ana1yti('nl pr~-
cedurt' until tbp rNiul1s at any thrN' anall~"~~ dial'r by nn
morr than la) 0.3 pt'rrf'nt by ~olu1He whf'n CUlls grratf'r
than 4.0 ""rcent or (b) 0.2 I><''''t,nt h)' volume when ('0.
Is less Ihan or equal to 4.0 I",r,'ent. Average tho thr......-
ceptable valu.s 01 percent CUI and report tbe r<"lull.> '"
the nl\8l't'8t 0.1 percellt.
4.2.6.2 For percent 0.. re"".at thf analytical proct'dure
nntllthe result~ 01 any thr... analysee dld« by DO mo..
than (a) 0.3 """,ent by volume when 0, Is I""" than I.~.O
percent or (\'0, 0.2 »preent by volume wben O. ts great"r
tban ur equa; .u .;;.0 \Jereent. A VOT3jlie the three ac.eept -

~~~ ~::.~~rlt'~er~~n?'8,nd report the results to

4.2.6.3 For percent CU, r"(>eat the anal)'ttcal pr0ce-
dure until the re8ults 01 an)' three analyses differ b)' no
more than 0.3 ""reent. A verage the three acceptable
valu.~ 01 percent CO alld report tbe results \.0 the nearest
0.1 percent.
4.2.7 Alter the analysis is eomploted, leak-check
~mnlld~tory) the Orsat analyzer once again, as described
III Section 5. For the results olthe analysis to be valid, the
Orsat snal)'zer must pass this leak test belore and after
the analysis. Note: Although in most instanc~s only C02
or O.ls required, it is recommended thai both CO, and
0, be measured, and that Citation 5 in the Hibliograph}'
be used to validate the anal}1leal data.
4.3 lIIulti-Point, Integrated Sampling and Anal)'tlcaI
Prooedure.
4.3.1 Both the minimum number 01 sampling points
IInd .the samplin~ point location shall be as specified In
SectIOn 3.3.1 01 thIs method. The use 01 lewer points than
specified 10 .!object to the IIpproval 01 the Administrator.
4.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 4.2.~
throu~h 4.2..7, eleept lor the lollowing: Traverse all
sampling pomts and sample at each point lor an equal
lengtb of time. Record sampling data as shown In Figure
3-3.

4.4.1 Data Validation When Both co. and

u. Are Measured. Although in most

instances, only Co. or 0. measuremenl is

required, iJ is recommended that both Co.

and 0. be measured to provide a check on
III-Appendix A-21
the quality of the data. The following quality
control procedure is suggested.
Note-Since the method for validating the
Co. and 0. analyses is based on combustion
of organic and fossil fuels and dilution of the
gas stream with air, this method does not
apply to sources that (1) remove Co. or 0.
through processes other than combustion, (2)
add 0. (e.g.. oxygen enrichmenl) and N. in
proportions dilTerent from that of air, (3) add
Co. (e.g.. cement or lime kilns). or (4) have no
fuel factor, Fo, values obtainable (e.g.,
extremely variable waste mixtures). This
method validates the measured proportions
of Co. and 0. for the fuel type, but the
method does not detect sample dilution
resulting from leaks during or after sample
collection. The method i" applicable for
samples collected downstream of most lime
or limestone flue-gas desulfurization units as
the Co. added or removed from the gas
atream is not significant in relation to the
total Co. concentration. The Co.
concentrations from 'other typeD of scrubbers
using only water or basic slurry can be
significantly affected and would render the Fo
check mtnimally useful.
4.4.1.1 Calculate a fuel faclor, Fo, using
the following equation;
20.9 - '1(,0.
p.=
Eq. 3-3
'/(,co.
Where;
'Jf.o. =Pt!rcent 0. by volume (dry basis).
'Jf.Co. = Percent Co. by volume (dry basis).
20.9 = Percent 0. by volume in ambient air.
If CO is present in quantities measurable
by this method, adjust the 0. and Co. values
before performing the calculation for F. as
follows:

'Jf.Co.(adj)='Jf.Co.+'Jf.CO

'Jf.0.(adj)='Jf.0.-O.5 'Jf.CO

Where; 'Jf.CO = Percent CO by volume (dry
basis).

4.4.1.2 Compare the calculated Fo factor
with the expecled Fo values. The following
table may be used in establishing acceptable
ranges for the expected Fo if the fuel being
burned ia bawD. When ,.. ... bumed to
comblnatioD. C8k:ulate the _hhted fual F..
and F. facto", (a. defined ID Method 19)
according to the procedure ID Method 19
Section 5.2.3. 'I11tm calc:u1ate the F. factor a"
fo11owa:
-------
Q.209 F.
IF.- -
IF,
Sq. s-4
"'*1WP8
F. I'8/VI
CII8!:
An1IvaciI8 8IId lignite.............................
~-_.._._-_.__._-
1.01&-1.130
1.083-1.230
0Ii:
0IsII!Iate ............--....-..-..................... 1.28G-1.413
R..siduIL_..___............................. 1.210-1.370
Gas:
NeIuI8I__._---....--..
Propone .......--.................-................
BuIIfte .......--..........................................
Wood....---- .-'-'
Wood - '-'-"-"'''---''''''---'-''
1.600-1.836
1.434-1.5e6
1.40S-1.5S3
1.000-1.120
1.1103-1.130
Calculated Fo values beyond the
acceptable ranges shown in !hi! table should
be investigated before accepting the test
results. For exampla. the strength of the
oolutions In the gas nnelyzer and the
analyzing technique should be checked by
camp ling and analyzing a known
concentration. liuch 88 air; the fuel factor
obould be reviewed and verified. An
acceptability f8D8e of :U2 percent ie
appropriate for the Fo factor of mixed fuels
with variable fuel ratios. The level of the
emission rate relative 10 the compliance ievel
ohould be considered in determining if a
retest is appropriate. i.e~ if the measured
emissions are much lower or much greater
than the complia.nce limit. repetition of the
test would DOt ..~ cbaIIp the
compli8DC8 -- 01.. ~ and wo8d be
~ tiJDe..coa8wDin and CIII8tly.2u9
5. Lrak-Chrek ProCldurt for Orlat Ana/vzer.
Moving an Orsat analyzer frequently causes It to leal.
Therelore, an O...~. n~aly7.er should be thoroughly lea<
wE"rked 011 site heron. hI' flue ga~ samplE" is introdl}('. .
Int" it. The procedure I"r le"k-IH'f' mark or .1«' capiHar)' tubing aod then close tho
pipette ",vv"'-ICk.
5.1.2 Raise the leveling bulh sufficienl1y to bring ii,,,
confining liquid meniscus 011tO the ~raduated portion of
the burette and then close the manllold stopcock.
5.1.3 Record the meniscus position.
5.1.4 Observe the meniscus in the burette and the
~1~~~~elln the pipette lor movement over the next 4
5.1.5 For the Orsat analyzer to pass the leak-<.
r.peatoo.
fl. CalculGtf~
8.1 Nomenclature.
M 4= Dry molecular weigbt, g/g-mo]e Ob.%-mole).
%EA=peroent excess air.
%CO,=Percent CO. by volume (dry basis).
%0.= Percent O. by volume (dry basis).
%CO=Percent CO by volume (dry basis).
o/,.N.=Percent N. by volume (dry basis).
0.264= Ratio 01 O. to N. in air, v/v.
0.2'!O=Molecular weight of N. or CO, divided by 100.
0.320=Molecular weight of O. divided by 100.
0.440=lIIolecular weight 01 CO. divided by 100.
6.2 Percent Elcess Air. Calculate the percent elcess
air (II applicable), by substituting the appropriate
values of percent 0., CO, and N. (obtained from Section
III-Appendix A-22
4 1 1 or 4.2.4) into Equation 3-1.
. [ %O,-o.l)Cj"co ]
'7(l~A= 0.264%N,-(C;c.O,-0..5';(CU; 100

Equation 3-1 87

N oTE.-The equation above assumes that ambient
air is used as the source 01 O. and that the tuel does not
contain appreciable amounts 01 N. (as do coke oven or
blast furnace gases). For those cases when appreciable
amounts 01 N. are present (coal, oil, and natural gas
do not contain appreciable amounts of N.) or when
olygcn enrichment is used, alternate methods, subject
to approval ot the Administrator, are required.
6.3 Dry Molecular Weight. Use Equation 3-2 to
calculate the dry molecular weight 01 the stack gas
M, =O.HO(':;,C 0,) +o.320(~oO,)+o.280(%:--I.+%C 0)
Equation 3-2
N OTE.-The above equation does not 80nslder argon
in air (about 0.9 percent, molecular weight of 37.7).
A n..gallve error 01 about 0.4 percent is introduced.
The tester may opt to include I\I'gon In the analysis using
procedures subject to approval 01 the Administrator.
7. B.blio(JTaphv
t Altshuller, A. P. Storlll'e of Gases and Vapors In
Plu.c:tic BaRs. Intt"rnatiooal Journal of Air and WstN
]>pllllfion. 6:75-81. lU63.
. "onner, William D. and 1. S. Nader. Air Samplin;'
with P1.iSIIl': HJ~'\. JO\l~n.11 nf th~ Arr./i'.:...r1can bdu,trl:tl
tl' ~'1':,1t: A'\~C"i{l-JU. t6::"~'1-297. IIJ64. 7
'.. ..urr.lJ Manual lor Oas Analysts, Seventh edition.
B,,, (,11 Corporation, 2223 Filth Avenue, Pittsburgll,
l'b :m9.19-'1,
4. ~litchell, W.1. and M. R. Mld~ett. Field Reliability
01 tbe O=t Analvzer. Journal 01 Air Pollution Control
ASS/.clation t6:49t~95. May 1976.
" ~higehara, R. T., R. M. Neulicht, and W. S. SmHt
Yah lating Orsat Analysis Data from Fossil Fuel-Fired
elUts. Stack Sampling 1\ew,. ~(2):21.26. August, 1976.
-------
RESERVED FOR METHOD 3A
III-Appendix A-23
-------
~I) ('.-)I)!J'i/[!!)tlmll'ii!OI1 C'J IYIomuo!J CON'\'!JRlI
m CllIICIl 011=
n. ~~ OM AppJlfxJbtJtt.U
n.n J?rInclple. A (IllS SBDIple 18 extrected at c con.t:P\t
~ \rom the source; moisture Is i'SIIloved (rom the scm-
~ otremn BI1d detl!rmined Glther' volumetrlcally I/:l
(]I'avlmetrlcally.
1.2 Applicability. This method Is cppllcable CnK
C<>tennlnlng the moisture content 01 stack gas.
'ii't7o procedures are given. The first 18 a Keferenoo
=thod, for eccurate determinations of moisture content
(gch lIS are n0eded to calculate emission date). The
=nd Is an approximation method, which provldoo
GJtImatoo of percent moisture to aid In setting lsoklnetlc
=pling rates prior to a pollutant emission measure-
,nont mn. The approxim..tlon method described herein
b only a suggested approach; alternative means fCl?
~proalmnting the moisture content, e.g., drying tuboo,
Clot bulb-4ry bulb techniques, condensation techniques,
cUllchlometrlc calculations, pnwlous experience, ote.,
C70 also acceptable.
'1J'he Keference method Is often condurted slmulte.no-
=Iy with a pollutant emission measurement run; when
t~ tn, calculation of percent lsoklnetic, pollutant emlcalon .
rote, etc., for the ron shall be based upon the resulto or
M~o reference method or Its equivalent; thllSS calculations
81!all not be bassd upon the results of the approximation
12otbod, unless the approximation method Is shown, to
~e ootisfaetlon of the Administrator, U.S. Envlronmen-
~ Protection Agency, to be capable of yielding resultD
<;I'ithin 1 percent H,O of the reference method.
NOiE.-Tbe referenre method may yield questionsbk>
I?e:Jults wben applied to saturated gas streams or to
atreams that contain water droplets. Therefore) when
~ conditions exist or are IiUSpeeted, Ii secona deter-
mination of tbe moisture content shall be made lIlmul-
fiLTER 1f STACK
~EITHER iN STACK WALL
OR OUT OF STACK)
PROBE
~1WIj7 ctili ~ >'Ot=oo motltciil, CD !::III!>=: .&::;'1""0
e1b2 ~ (JC!J ~ ID ot~. Attceh a too3~
=r Iropa1>le or mscsl1r1ng to 01° C (~ F)J ~ tb
~nce metbod probe. Me=II'S the stc.elr «cs tem~
I\wo at oocb traverse point (838 Section 2.2.1) durlll3 th:J
~ca metbod traverse; roIculate the aVer!!3e cw,[I
(JOO temperature. Next, determine the moisture peroent.
CWGL Glther b:v: (1) using a ps:vchrometrlc chert tml3
DWDng appropriate correetions If Btaelr prossv:ro b
I Inch) ID (flooD Cu'bG
cmJndlng to about 1.3 cm Oi In.) from tho bottl8m at
\)!Jw flask. Tbe second implnger she.IJ be of tho Oroenllaq-
Dmltb design witb tbe standard tip. ModIflcations (C,fI.,
eslng fteJdble connections between tho Impingm, -01
tnaterlals other tban glass, or using fiellble vacuum 11-
t'4 connect tbe filter holaer to tbe condenser) mQ -
aHd, subject to the approval of the Administrator,
The Orst two ImplnRers shall contain known volum"
of water, tbe third shall be empty, aud the fourth IIh8U
Gnntaln a known weight of &- to l&-mesh Indicating 'JJJ0
!IIUea gel, or equivalent desiccant. If the silica gel 1181
!!Ieen previously used, dry at 175° C (350" F) for 2 l-.
,W 8W silica gel may be used as reee! ved. A thermome&er.
~ble of measuring temperature to within 1° C ('J!' n.
ohall be placed at the outlet of tbe fourtb lmplD!!SII', I!I!r
monltorinR purposes.
Alternatively, an:v system may be used (subJd m
the appro...al of the Adw.iniatrator) that rools the samp\!>
(Jm!I stream and tIll9wa tne8l\urement of bIIth the \fttc
!!bat hils bean con4eMe4 and tbe moisture lea vlns C!Ie
condenser, each to witbln 1 ml or 1 g. Acceptable mesna
Qro to meBSUro tbo ccndensed \'Ister, oUbe! gn.'"
~trlcalJV OK volumetrlcall:v, oneil W'meBSUOO the ~
~ I.€oIviDl! t!1e. oondellSS]' by: U) monltorlna I3i;)
ftem~ture u4 ~ at ~~ Gt~ $1 Ql» ~
G\Dd WIiI1Ii DaltoD '0 law of J!III;'tJalIll'WUl'\!ll, II' ~ J!U5IIII
ce eamp!e "",'e\nam throq!:l . tII'e4 IGioa "', (8r
C!IQI!lvalent 4e111cetlDt) lisp, with alt -- 1It-~
2If' C (fiB" V). and det.ernil.D1D« the weIIbt pWi:-1T ----
CONDENSER-ICE BAnt SYSTEM INa.UOING
SILICA GEL TUBE
---- - ---- ----
---------------
ORIFICE
THERMOMETERS
VACUUM
GAUGE
BY-PASS VALVE
III-Appendix A-24.
AIR-TIGHT
PUMP
Figure <4-1. Moisture sampling train-reference method..
-------
II means other than silka gel are USI'd to oetennine the
amount 01 moisture l('Bvina the condpnser, It is f('Com.
mentled that "iliea gel (or equivalent) still be used be-
tween the ('ondpnsl~r system and pump, to prevt}nt.
moisture rOlldf'n~al ion in the pump and n~etenn"
devl('t'~ Dud to avoid tho ncpd to mJke currel'llOUS for
alOhauct. in I he mpl,>n'd vululJIP.
:!.1.3 ('Of/liun: 8}'stt>m. An ice bath r~lItainpr ~Ild
crn~llI'd it'e ~or equivalt!nt) are u5ed to BId If1 CUlldpnFmg
mOl~tuff~.
1.11 ~I"erinn Syslem. This "y>tPm Includes a vac-
uum rMUPf' Ipalc.frPe pump, thprmomrtt>rs capable 01
mea.;urlllil i,'mpl'rature to within 3" (; (5.4° n. dry gas
mpu'f {'aIJ3111~ 01 llipa...uring volume to 9(llhin 2. Pl'(C1'nt,
Bud rdatt,lJ f'qulpwrnt [!.S shown in Figure 4-1. Other
ruetHIUfI' ';y...tpm~, capable of malllUirut1tt a (onstant
~mplin~ ml,' and d{'tt.rlUillil1~ ...umph' gus v,,1':1t~p, may
be u'I'd. "uhJI,(,t to tl1(' uppruvill ot. tho Adn1J!a~trator.
:!.1-5 H,trolll,.tl'r. ~I"rl-ur~, B!tt'rold, or otht'r uarf)~.
p1t'rt.'ap~hl.. 01 I11t'.:L.'nuill!. UI1llq..pl1dil~ prt'~:-l1re to wlthm
~,5 mm II~ :0.1 In. U!!) mar ut> usl.d. In mBIl}' l'a:'lr~, the
baromelril' readinn may be obl.lined (rom a nearby
naliOllal w,'alh,'r ~..rvi{'f' "irarion, in wllt.'h l'a,."iP, thf> sla-
tion \-'ulun Iwhic'h is th(\ 3h~llutf' harllllwlric prl--':-su,rt')
shall 00 r"quf-,tt'd and an ndju5tn1f'!lt tor elen~tIon
ditifrf-IIf't'S l~twppn th~ w.-atht!r station and the .~un-
pl1nR point "hall he applif..-I at B rate ot 1U~HU~ 2 5 lInn I.I~
1.01 Ul. HI?) JWr 30 m (lOt) CI) (>Ievatiun UlI'rt'asc or 'ill.0
'ft'rl-a (Of ,'kvallf1n d{"'ft'a~p.
1.1.6 (.mtlnolt<.d C}'lindl'r anrt.'or Dahllll'e. Till'Sr than :l mi.
~IOGt laboratory balane.', arc capable of weighing to the
neart'st 0.8 ~ or less, These balances are sultablo lor
use here,
2.2 Procedure, The loliowin~ procedure is written lor
a t'ondenSt'r s}.,tpm i"llich as Ihe impingt"r ~ystfm dl"-
PLMJT
LOCATION
OPERATOR
DATE
RUN NO,
AMBIENT TEMPERATURF
8AROMETRIC PRESSURE
PROBE LENGTH m(1t)
scri~d in S..dion 2.1.2) lllc1)rpt)ratil1g "o~um..!ric anaJy-
sis to mpa8ure the COlld~ns~d moi~turp. and slli~'a gel Dud
gravimetric analysis to DlCa.:;W'C tbe moisture leaving the
Co~,tl'se&nlessother....iSf' speeified by the Admini:'trator.
D minimum 01 eight traverse points shall be u""~ lor
circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m c24m,).
a minimum 01 nine points shall be USf'd lor rectan~ular
~tt\('k:s having ef"J.ui~al{'nt dia.mf>tt'rs 1("5s thra~ a,tit f!1
~24 in.), antI a minimum or tWl'lve travl'rse.pomts shall
be llsed in all othpt cast's. The tra't.~se puUlts ~ha~ be
located according to ~I..thotl t. The use 01 I,....... poUlts
is subject to tbe approval or the Admilli>tralor. S..ll'et a
suitable prohe autl prohe !enClh "ueh that ali trolver""
points can be samplf'd. COI\~H.h.t sam.phng froUl oppo....Ite
sidf>s of the stlwk ((our total sampllllg ports) fut lar;:(6
starks, to J.wrmit us~ oC shortt>! probE' l(,llgth!'. ~hU'b: th~
probe with hf'at rfsistnnt lap~ or by SOIn<> utl" r met 1100
to denote the propt'r di"t.)lu'~ inlo thp ~tal'}I or rlul't ror
Pt1C~l samp\jll~ POillt. Pla('p knowll volulIll's oC Wtitt'f In
the lirsl two 1l1llJill~t !'s. WI.igh and rpt'on) tll<> \\1'lght. ot
the- sHira gf'llo t!lf' nPdrt'~t n..PI g, allIl tran..:(..r 1liP "111('0.
Rf>i to the (ourth 1IIlpillg"r; alt,'nI.lti'f\'ly. tl1t~ ..:lIh't\ gfll
lllay 1lrst be trall~rt'rl't:d 10 the impltlgt'r ,.,j}J1ulh\:' \\ l.Jgl.Jt
o( the sHira RI" plus imlJiugl~r t'I'I'urd,'J.ol - ,
2.2.2 81-1('(;t a total sampling llml~ '::lkh th,t :1 n11111-
mum total gas volume or O.tiO ~'m !::?l .::dJ will I,,~ I'ot-
If>cted, at a rate no grt>at..r thall 0.u21 01' nun ~~.;.5 chn).
When hoth moi...turc cOllteut and pollm.11lt j'ml"'~lon rata
are to he dl.'t<>rmined, the 1110bture dt.tl'rminauun ~heJl
Ae simultulI{,ous with, and for the same tOlal Ipngth of
timt> as. tht' pollutant t>mi:-:"'(()II rnff' rim, unh's~()tth'rWI$-3
::;pt'C'lIh'd in .\n appli(,;lhle ~lIhpnrt or t ht' "'tanrl.LI'tJ~.
2.2.3 Set up tile sampling \.mill as shown. in Fi&UlO
4-1, Turn on the probe hr,ater alld (il appllcahle) tho
IiIt~r heating system to temp"raturea 01 ahout 12G" C
(2oW" F), to prevent water contlensatioo ahead 01 tho
conden,",r: allow time lor the teD! peratures to stWillrA
SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION
Plue crushed ioo io the Ice bath con~Bloe7, It !a recom-
mended, but oot required, thet a lea!! chedt bo dona. CC'J
lollows: Diseollnl'l:t the proho Irom too lirot impinaor Irl

(ilapp1icable) Irom the filter holder, Plug tbe InJet to.tbo
first Impinger (or filter holder) aod pull a 380 mm (1510,)
H~ vacuum; a lower vacuum may be used, provided that
It is not e.cetded during the test. A loakll«e rate in
excel'S 01 4 percent or the average samplinn rato or 0,00057
nt'lmln (0.02 elm). whichever is less, is unacceptablo,
Fol1owin~ the IoN< r.heck, reconnect the probe to the
AAmplin~ trBiu, 87
22.4 Durin~ the samplin~ nm, maintain a samp1i118
rat.e v..ithin 10 pp.rrf'nl o( ('oTlstAnl rnt('. or as sperifi<:'d by
the Adminif1 (III the exampl~ data sht'()t shown in Fiflure 4--2.
II" sure to reeord the dry ges meter reading at the b~m-
nltlJ! ami E"nd of eBC'h samplutB time increment ~nd t7h£>u-

over s:!mplln..~ Is helWd, Tcl're o~bor DppropriDto ~in["
~ =h =plo point. Dt 1= on"" d\ll'ln{! =11 tirno
Increment,
2,2.5 To be3in samplln3, position the probe tip at tho
first traverse point, Immedmtely start the pump and
adjust the flow to the desired rate. Traverno tbe cross
~('tion, sampling at eBCh trove~ pt,int (or an cqlleJ
length 01 time. Add moro 100 end, II nO('<'SS3ry, salt to
maintain D tempereturo 011= than 23" C (6jJ. F) at tho
silica gel outlet.
2.2.6 Alter eoll..<'Iln3 the sample. dis<'onnect the probo
from tho filter bolder (or from the first impinger) and eon-
durt a Ie,,!! chee!! (mandatory) as described in Seetion
2.2.8 Rl"roI'd tbo l
-------
FILTER
(GLASS WOOL)
ICE BATH
MIDGET IMPINGERS
FigiJre 4-4. Moisture-sampling train - approximation method.
lOCATION

TEST

DATE

OPERATOR
COMMENTS
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
 GAS VOLUME THROUGH  
 METER. (Vm). RATE METER SETTING METER TEMPERATURE. .
CLOCK TIME m3. (ft3) m3/min. (ft3/min.) 0c (oF)
..~. .   
Figure 4-5. Field moisture determ,ination . app.roximation method.
III-Appendix A-26
-------
2.3 Calculaliorul. Carry out tbe toUowlng calculatlorul
retaining at least olle extra decimal figure beyond that oi
the Bl'Quired dal a. Hound olt figures niter final calcula-
tion.
l;_;:,::
IMPINGER .
VOlUME.
mi'
SILICA Gel
"UGHT.
9
----_.- -
r;~u,o 4 3. Analytic,)1 dolta . fcfcrc1H':r. rn':lhorl.
2.:1.1 ~0111t'lIt'l:1turf'.
11,,. -ProporliQII or v.al.'1' ",\por. II} \1/1111111'. III
t hi' ~£\.S slrN\ln.
.\f. ~.\I()If'(.'ular \\'I'i~ht or wBh'r. 11;.0 Jl.'g.molc
IIH.llliJ,lh-molo). .
J).. ~ A hsulute ptt.'ssur{' (fur lilis 111,,1 hOlt, same
as harolllf.tric prcssurt') at \.hl~ dry J{i.lS 1111'\.1'(",
111111 Ilg (in. JIg).
P.,J .:itl\ndard ahsolutf' prl'!'slIrf', 7liO mm Hg
,;!fJ.tl2 in. II~).
R -Id..al gu.s cOllsl.aut. 0.06236 (mill Hg) Im')/
(K-Illule) (oK) (or mt'trfc units ;}11(121.Sj dn.
Ilg) Ift')/lIh-mole) (OR) for jo;lIglish UllilO.
r.. - i\h~ollitP. tt'OIJ.u'ruture at nu>tf"r. oK 1° R).
'l'.,d....;ShuularcJ ahsolutp. tempcrature. ~Jao K
(:,:11;0 H).
V.. .-.; Dry ~as voluH)f' nwa~urt'd to}' dry g:as IUf:tt'r,
.Iem ide!). .
A "tit ': IncrcJllel1tal dry ~a~ vc.lunH~ lIlf'asurt'd hy
dry Ras uwter at 4~ach tra\,I'r~ point, dem
/dl'l).
V.'.'d)~Ury Kns volume m,'a,c;urefl I), thr. dry gas
Jlu:ter. corrected to standard conditions,
dsom (dse!).
V .'('fd)~Volnme 01 wnt.'r vapor con,t~nsl'd corrected
to standard conditions. !k:m (sd).
V..,("d) uVolume 01 water vapor collect..d in silira
Itel corrected to standard conditions, 5<10
(scf).
V, = F'I nat volume 01 r.ondrllSf'r wnter, ml.
Vj=lnit.ieJ volume, U any, of ronJcnser water.
mi.
W,O Final wciltht of silica g"1 or -ilica gd plus
(mpinl(cf, R.
W,:::: Inajal weiRht or silit';) 11;1') or :-ii1it'3 g~l plus
ilOpinRcr, g.
Yo Dry JlI\S JUt-h'r rn1ihrat ion r"dor.
pvol~J~~;~Y870t wat.., 0.\1'-"'2 g:nol "1.wZ2I\1
2.3.2 \"'jlum~ or water \"'apur ('l1Ildl'n:i~tJ.
r (V,-V.)P../{1'''.1
1",,(111.1) =-~P.tttJl:--
=K.( V,- V.)
EqUalion" I
where:
K,oO.OOI333 m'!JUI tor metric uuils
cO,04707 fl'/ml tor English UllilS
2.3.3 Volume of water vapor collectcd
In siliea gl'l.
l' t('. , ~ I hI)
(W,- Wi)RT.1d
P .kI-'f .. u,
=KJ(W,- Wi)
Equation 4 ;{
.bere:
K.oO.OOI336 DI'/g for metric unils
00.04716 fl'/g tor Engll.h w,ils
2.3.4 Sample gas volume.
V m "..0) = V.. }-'
( 1',.)( T....)
t J> .~o) ( T m )
Vml'..
T", .
=K,l'
Fqll,IIillrl4 3
,..hI ft':
J'JL:on~ 0: KtllIIl1 IIJ: rur lIu.trk UII11S
=17.64 0 Hill. JlJ( rur Y.1I~lish ullits
~OTE.-H the pl)st~tf'~t I~'~~k ralt' f~"I.'i'.11 .:! h\ ".:.
l'I',.lIs the tllJowa"lr. mtl'. ('IIIT"I.t till' \'<1:1;1' or ,. - III
Eq1latiolt 4-3, n.s dt'sc'rilll'd in '''':''''11011 Ii 3 III ~11'11tf)d .Ii).
'2;I:j .'Ioi~tllrp t'Ul1ll'lIt,
/J - --_.Yu:.,.(fllil t !".,.,llt,) - -
.: - - ~",a (.1.1) -t- \T".." !"I.J) + ,,"''''1111,1)
E1luaUIIII -'-of
:'\"on: -rll ~atllrall'd OJ' Ihoi.;llIfI' dro.plt:t.ladl'lI Ra.....
:-:In'allls, two ~'alc.:1t18tjolls oC lilt' HlfJislurp l'ontf'lIt of tiul
st.aek KDS shall be made, onc IIsillJC a vallie hased upon
the satllrat~d c=ondiliolls (s~e ~('diol1 1.2), anti snotlwr
haseti "pOll the resulL'i or the imvillK~r allalysis, The
IOWl'f or nh'SC two valucs or /I,p shall be l'ol1sidered cor.
n'd.
2.:J Ii "l'rilit:atiOI\ or l'ollstant salllplillg ratl~, For ~Q(~h
tillle illf'rf'llwnt, drt('rmille the .6"'.. Caklllale the
BVf>rage. If thp. value Cor allY tilllC illl'n'lJIelllllilf,'rs rrom
the aVl'rage hy more than 111 pl'fI'l'n1, rl'jl" l till' rcs1l1t~
amI rl'lwat llll' fun.
:I. Appror;",al;o" .\/tthoo
The Sppl'f)Xilllatioll m..thod dl,~,'ritwd hl'llJW is pl~-
~I'lIled only as a slIggP.st.ed method (see Scl'liun 1.2),
:!.l A pparatll".
3.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or glnss tubill~. sllffi.-iently
h,'ated to prevent water condensation alld e'1uipped
with a Iilter (cither In-slack or heated ollt-stao'k) to r&-
lIIove partir:lIlate malter. A plug ot glass wool. inserted
into the olld 01 the probe. is a salisfadory filter.
3.12 Impingers. Two midget impingers. eacb witb
JO ml rapadty. or eQuivalent.
;j 1:1 Ire Rath. Container alld iro. to aid In conderul-
ing moisture ill impingers.
:1.1.4 Drying Tube. Tuhe packl.'d wit.h new or re-
J{I'IlI'rutl'd 6~ to H)~mesh ilidil'I:Hin~.type silica gel (or
I'qlli\'al,ont dl'!'i('l:ant), to dfY tht, sample gas and to pro-
11'1.t 111(' 1I1""'f and pump.
:i.1..~ Yaln'. :"il'cdte val\'", to n'~ulat(' tlll~ sam pic gas
nuwmtl'.
~,l.f) PUlI1p. Lrsk.rn\f', diaphragm typf', or cquiva-
1"lIt, fc) (11111 the gas sample through the tmin.
~,I.i \'ulume meter. Dry gas lI1et~r, sUlflcipntly ac.
l'lInHe to 1I1l'a5ure the ~amph~ volume within~, and
l.aHhmh'll OVt'r the range or flow ratt'S and cOllditions
a,'lually C'llcountcred during sa.mpling.
ra','I~.;~..o:~aJ~o ~i~~ (~~~~~~r~i~il)~08rasure Ihe now
:1.1.tl Uradu31ed Cylinder. 2.'; 1111.
:1.1.10 Barometer. Mercury, al\p.roicJ, or otll,:r harQm-
pt.-r, as d('~rjbp.d in Section 2,1.5 above.
:1.1.11 Vae\lum Oauge.' At least 760 mm IIg (:10 in
IIg) gauge. to be used for the sampling leak check.
:1.2 Procedure.
'U I Plnee exactly 5 ml distilled water iu each im-
pinger. Leak check the sampling train as follows:
Tprnporarily insert a vacuum gauRe at or
nf'ar the prob~ inJet; then. plug the vr':'\;('
inlet a.ld pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm
Hg (10 in. Ug). Note. the lime rat~ of
rhar,f;c of the dry gas met er dial; altc. .,a.U-
1i!'!Y. a rotameter (0-10 cc/min! may be te,,,,.
porarlly attached to the dry gas meter
outlet to determine the leakage rate. A leak
rate not In eXCes.5 of 2 percent of the aver-
age sampllng rate Is acceptable.
NOTE.-CarefullY release the probe inlet
pIliI!' before tumlnR off the pump. 117
3.~2 Connf'et tbe probe in84>rl It into the stllCk, and
roml,le at a constant rate 0/21pm (0.0'71 elm). Continue
Mml'lilllt until tbe dry gas meter registers about 30
lit.'" 11.1 ft.) or until visible liquid droplets are carTled
ov.r trom the first Impinger to the S<'CQnd. Rccord
t4'lUlwrature, pressure, and dry gas meler readillgs as
r.~uircd by Figure 4-,5.
3.~.3 Aller collecting the sample. combine tbe con.
tl'UI9 oCthe two impingers and measure the volume to the
I:,'an'st 0,.1} ml.
:'.:1 ('"Ieulal ions. The calculation melhod P".Pllted is
d,':o:iKned t.o estimate thp moistuT(' in the slack ga.'.
lI\I'r.for.. other data. which arc oilly I\I'CC:;sary lor ar-
curale moiSltlJ'e df'trrmillations, are lIot roll('clt'd. Thp
rollowina Nlnations adeqnatE'ly f'slim:u... 1hn mohilure
fm1tent, ror the purpose 01 dl'l!'rtllilliug i:.ukiJlNic SiUU-
"Hnlt rale sctLings.
:1.3.1 Nomenclature.
R.,.=Appro:llmate properlion, by volunu', of
water vapor In the gas stream leaving tbe
second Implnger, 0.025.
III-Appendix A-27
R..=Water vapor in thegns slream. proportion by
volume.
W'v=Molecular weigbt of water, 18.0 gig-mole
(\8.01b/lb.mole)
P.=Absolute pressure (tor this met bod, same as
barometric pressure) at tbe dry gas met.r.
P...= Standard ahsolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
(~".J.n in. Hg).
R = f deal gas oorultant, 0.06236 (mm Hg) (ml)!
(~-mole) (OK) for metric wilts and 21.85
:;;;its~g) (tt')I1b-mole) (OR) tor English

T .cAhsolute temperature at meter, oK (oR)
T...=Standard ahsoluta temperature 203° K
(,s28° Rl '
V,e Final volume ot Impinger contents. mi.
V;=Inlllai volume ot Implnger contents mI
V.=Dry gas volume measured by dry gaa ";eter
dcm (dcl). '
V.(o..)=Dry gas volume measured hy dry gas meter.
7:i~nc.ted to standard conditions, dscm

V..I...)=Volume ot water ~apor condensed, corrected
to sta.ndard condlUorul, scm (sel).
f"'- OenSlty ot water, 0.99821t/m1 (O.OO22Ollb;ml'
Y = Dry gas m!'t.er calibration fll.Cto~. 87
3.3.2 Volume ot water vapor collected.

V - (V,- Vi)p..RT.1d
..,- P'IdM.

=KdV,-Vi)
Eqll:,tion 4-.')
wbere:
K,=0.OOI3S.1 m'/ml tor melric units
=0.Ot707 flI/mI for English units.

3.3.3 Oas volume.
V.. (.td) = V.. y
(J.:) (;::)

V..p..
T::' 87
Equation '-6
=K, Y
ybere:
K.=O.3868 °K/mm Hg tor metric units
=17.C14 °R/in. Hg tor Epg11sh unita
3.3.4 Approsimate moisture oontent.

n -~!!!l- +8
,.. - ,r"e (Ilil) + Ir.. <8td) u-.
v."..., +(0.025)
V..(o'.) + V.. (.Id)
E . 787
quntlOn 4-
4. ('a)j~'oljOfI
4,1 For the ,...(t'I't'JU'C ml'lhod, ralihralp pquipml'nt as
>poeified in the following sections of M,.th"d 5: :;.:cllon 5.3
Cml't~rinJ~ s~;~t~m); Section 5.S (lt~nperoture 'InURes):
aud Section 5.7 (barometPr). "he rccommended It'aII:
check of Ihe metering system (~oClion 5.6 ot Method 5)
also applies to the reference method. For the approxima-
tion melbod. use the procedures outlined in Scction 5.1.1
01 Method 6 to calibrate the metering system. and the
procedure ot Method 5, St'ction 5.7 to calibrate the
barometer.
5. Bibllographp .
I. Air Pollution Engin~l'ing ~fanuBI (Second Edition).
Danielson, 1. A. (ed.). U.S. Environmental ProteCtion
Agency, Odlce ot Air Quality Planning and Standards.
Resparcb Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. AP40.
1~73.
~. Devorkin. Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Test-
ing Manual. Air Pollution Control District, Los Angeles,
('alit. Novemher. 1963.
3. Methods lor Determination 01 Velocity, Volume,
Oust and Mist Content ot Onscs. Western Precipitation
Division of 10y Manufacturing Co.. Los Angelos, CaUl.
Bulletin WP-50. IIH18.
-------
.)J~TURESENSOR

~ PROBE

TEMPERATURE
PITOTTUBE" SENSOR

STACK
- WALL
~tETHOD5-DETERY:INATIOS 011' PARTICULATE E~I!~~W~S
FROM ST.\TIONARY S01:'RCES
1. Principle and Applicability
1.1 Principle. P!\fticulate matter is withdrawn iso-
kinetically !rom the source and collected on a glass
fiher tIlter maintained at a temperature In the range 01
120:1:140 C (248:1:2.'\° F) or such other temperature 811
~i1ied by an applicable suhp!\ft 01 the stand!\fds or
approved by the Administrator, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, lor a particular application. The
particulate mass, which Includes any material that
condenses at or sbove the filtration te.mp~ralure, io
determIned gravimetrically alter removal 01 uncombined
water.
1.2 Applicahillty. This mdhod is applicahle for the
tlctenniuation of particulate emi&:ijQns from stationary
BOurces.
2. .4ppara/U8

2.1 Sampling Train. A sd.ematlc of the salllpJlng
train used In this method Is shown lu Figure 5-1. Com-
plete construction rtetai1s nre Kiven in APT D-oe,~t
(Citation 2 In Bibliography );cornmercial modebol this
train !\f" also available. ~'or changes from AI'TD-(J.;~t
and for allowahle modifications of the train shown in
t'igure 5-1, see oh. following subsections. 198

The operating and maintenance procedures for the
sampling train!\fe described in APTD-o.;76 (Citation 3
In ). Since correct usage is important in obtain-
Ing valid results, all users should read APTD-Q576 and
ndopt the operating and maintenance procedures out-
lined in It, unless otherwise specifted herein. The_'!1'm.
piing train consists of the following components: 1'>'t1

2.1.1 Probe NOIIzla. Blnlnl-.tee! (316) or glaas mth
ob3ro, teperod Iood\ug odge. Tbe Mgle o! taper sball
00 -
Ing; other materials of oonstruction ma"sr' used, subject
to the apProval 01 tbe AdministratOr.
~.
IMPINGER TRAIN OPTIONAL, MAY BE REPLACED
BY AN EQUIVALENT CONDENSER
THERMOMETER /
FILTER HOLDER

---:- --- - -- ---I
I
,
A range 01 nozzle size9 s"Hable lor ookinetic mmpling
sbould be available, e.g.. 0.32 to 1.27 em Oi ta ~. In.)-
or larger II higber volume sampling tr'ains are used-
Inside diameter (lD) nozzles In increments of 0.16 cm
01. in.). Eacb nozzle sball be calibrated according to
the procedures outlined in Section 5.
2.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quart.< glass tubing
with n heating system capable of maintaining a gas tern.
perature at tbe elit end during sampling of 120:1:14° C
(241:>:1:25° ~'), or sucb other temperature as specified by
an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by
the Administrat.or for a particular application. (The
tester may opt to operate tbe equipment at a temperature
lower than that specilied.) Since tbe actual temperature
at the outlet 01 the probe is not usually monitored during
1IaID piing , prohes constructed according to APTD-0581
and utilizing the calibration curves 01 APTD-Q576 (or
calibrated according to the procedure outlined in
APT D-(576) will be considered accer-table.
Either borosiliC:.te or quaru glass probe liners may be
used lor stack temperalures up to about 480" C .000" F):
quartz lillers shall be used lor :emperatures betwOOll 480
and 9()(f C (BOO and 1,650" F). Both types 01 liners may
be used at hi~her temperatures than specified lor short
periods or time, subject to tbe approval 01 the Admin;'"
trat.Qr. Thf' softening temperature for borosilicate is
82(f C (I,50!s° F), and lor quan. it is 1,50< ° C (2,732" F).
Whenever proctiuvely.
met.elliners (e.g., 316 stainiess steei, Inooloy 82.'>,' or other
corrosion m;istant metAlB) made 0 BOamleso; tubing may
113 used, ID,bjec. to the approval of the Administrator.
2.1.3 Pitot Tu!>e. Type S, as described in Seetion 2.1
<>f Method 2, .... other «brioo "pproved by tbe Adminis-
'/rotor Tbo pltot tube shoJi be atlaChed to tbe prob, (lIS
Cbown in l7igure ~1) to alkm coostant monitoring oItbe
aec~ (!lID velooitll Too impact (higb pressuro) opening
plane of the pilot tube shall be even witb or above the
lI.o..le ODtry plane (seo Metbod 2, Figure 2-6b) during
OBDlpling. Tbe Type S pitot tube assembly sbsll have a
lcnoW'll coefficient, det.erm.inad as outlined in Section 4 of
Metbod 2.
I Mention 01 trodc names or specific products does not
oonstltute endorsement by tlte Environmental Protec-
tion Agene:v.
HEATED AREA
PROBE
\
REVERSE~YP~ ~-- ~
PITOT TUBE
I
'ITOT MANOMETER
2.1,4 Differential Pressure Gauge. IncUned manom-
eter or equivalent de.. ") (two), as uscribed in Section
2.2 of Met hod 2..0ne manometer s'1all be 'used .or velocity
bead (Ap) readings, and the otber, lor orifice mlferentiaJ
pressufl readings.

2.1.5 Filter Holder. Borosilicate ~lass, witb a ~Iass
frIt filter support and a sili~.one rubber gasket. Other
materials 01 construction (e.~., !!t.afnless 51",,1 Tefton
Vi.to.") may be used. subjr<:t to approval 01 'tbe Ad:
DllnlStrator. The holder desi~n shall provide a positive
SMI against IMkage Irom tb. outside or around the tIIter.
Tbe bolder ~halJ be attached immediately at tbe outlet
01 tbe probe (or cyclone, if used).

2.1.6 Filter Heating System. Any beating system
capable of maintaining a temperaturr !\found the filter
bolder during sampling o. 120:H4° C (248:1:2.'.° F) or
such other temperature as specified by an applicable
8ubplU't of the stand!\fds or approved by tbe Adminis-
Valor lor a'plU'ticular application. Alternatively. tbe
tester may opt to operate the equipment at a temperature
lower than tbat specified. A tem perature gaUl(e capable
of measuring temperature to within 3° C (5.4' F) shall
be installed so that tbe temperature around the tilLer
bolder can be regulated and monitored during sampling.
Beating systems other than tbe one shown in APT 1)-
0581 may be used.

2.1.7 Condenser. The lollowing system shall be used
to determine the stack gas moisture content: Four
Impinge,:" connect~d In series with leak.lre.. ground
gla~s fittmJ::s or any s!mllar 1ea.Ia.-free non-conLaminalilig
fittmgs. Tbe first. tbird. and fourtb imping,'rs sball be
01 the Oreenburg.£mith desi~n. moo,II,'(! by replacing
the tip with 1.3 cm (~in.) 11) glass tube extrndin~ to
(;Ibout I.' cm (~ In.) Irom the bot1..om 01 thr ftask. The
"""ond impinger shall be 01 the Urr.cnburg.Smith drsj~n
with thr standard tip. Mo used subject
to the approval 01 the Adminlstra1..or. The flrst and
second Implngers shall contain known quantities of
water (Section 4.1.3), the tbird sball be empty. and tbe
fourtb sball contain a known weight 01 silica gel, ...
equlvalaot desiccant. A thermometer, capable of measur-
THERMOMETER

/
CHECK
VALVE
VACUUM
LINE
ICE BATH
IMPINGERS
BY-PASS VALVE
/
DRY GAS METER
AIR:TlG.HT
PUMP
Fjgure 5 1. Particulate-sampling train.
III-Appendix A-28
MAIN VALVE
-------
InS temperature to wltbJa 1° C rz' F) £hall be placed
at tho ouUot of the fourth Implngm em monitorinl
~tlvelY, any system that cools the sample gas
stream and v.lloWB mecsurement of the Wllter condensed
and moisture leaving the condenser, rech to wltbln
I m1 (R' I g may be used, subject to the approvnl of the
Administrator. Acceptable means are to measure ths
eondensad water either gravimetrlcaUy or volumetrlcaUy
and to measure the moisture leaving the oondenser by:
(1) monitoring the temperature and p'ressure at the
exit of the condenser BOd using Dalton s law of partial
1J"I!Sure5; or (2) passing the sample gas stream through
a tared slUca gel (or equivalent desiccantl trap with
alt gases kept below '}Jf' C (68° F) and determinlug
the weight goon.
U means other than silica gel 61'0 used to determine
UIe amount of moisture leaving the condenser, It is
rooommended tbBt eI1IOII gel (or equivalent) stiU be
ID84 between the condenser system and pump to prevent
moisture condensation In the pump and metering devices
and to avoid the need to makeoorrectlons for moisture in
the metered volume.
HorK.-If a determination of the parttc:ulate matter
4IIIIIlected In the Impingers is desired in addition to mois-
ture eontentr the Implnger system deserlbed above shaU
be used, Wltbout modification. Individual States or
OODtrol ageneles requiring tbls inlormstlon shsll be
oootooted as to the sample reoovery and BDalysis oI the
Implnger contenta.
2.1.8 Metering System. Vacuum gauge, lesk-free
pump, thermometers capable of messuring temperature
towltbln 3°C (5.4° F),dry gas meter capable of measuring
wlume to within 2 peroent, and relnted equipment, as
Ihown In Figure 5-1. Other metering systems capable of
maintaining sampUng rates withlu 10 percent 01 Iso.
kinetic and of deterroJnlng sample volum.... to witbln 2
psoont may. be used, subleet to the approval 01 the
AdmlnIDtrotor. When the metering system is used in
OODjunc:tlon with a pitot tube, the system .ball enable
cbaCks 01 lso!dnetlc: rates.
Sampu ng \roIns utllWng metoring systems designed for
~her flow 1'8tEi3 t.baD that described in APTD-0581 or
~~90 m~6odbe w~.rovlded tbaL the specl1lro-
2.1.9 Barometer. Mercury, soeroJd. or other bBromstG?
lJaj)Bblo of measurin~ at.mospherlc pressure to within
3.6 mm HI! (0.1 In. Hg). In many cases, tbe barometrlo
Ii'!8dIng may be obtained from a nearby national weathe:
oervIcv D1/:Itlon, 10 wblch case the 1I\8110D value fwblch Ip
'the 'absolute bllrometdc proosure) shaD be requested an4
an adjustmeot for e1evatlon differences betwee7' the
weather statton and SIIDIP"na point shaD be appll..u It a
rote of minna 2.6 mID Hg (0.1 in. Hg) per 30 m (100 ft)
~levntlon Inc:rease or vloo vema for ekwatlon decrease.
2.1.10 Oao Density Detarm1natlon Equipment.
Temperature sensor and pressure gauge, as described
10 8octlons 2.8 and 2.4 of Method 2, and gas analyzer,
If necessary as described 10 Method 3. The temperature
IIOmoor ahall, prefernbly, be pem1QJJontly attached to
tho pltot tube or 6ampling probe 10 a fixed eonl\guratloo,
.neh that tbe tip oUhe sensor extends beyond the leading
edRe 01 the probe sheath and dOO6 not touch any metal.
Alternatively, the 6eJIsor may be attached just prior
to \!Be In tho field. Note, however, that If tbe temperature
aenoor Is attached In the field, the B9nsor mnst be p1aoocl
In Ian Interference-Iree arrarigement wltb nspect to the
TJpc S pi tot tube opcnlnga (see Method 2, Figure 2-7).
As a second alteruatlve, If a difference 01 not more than
1 percent In the average velocity measurement Is to be
Introduced, the temperature gauge need not be attacbed
to t!l.e probe or pltot tube. (This altemotlve Is subject
to the approval 01 the Administrator.)
2.2 Sample Recovery. The following Items are
neede6'
2.2.1 . Probe-LiBer and Probe-Nozzle Brushes. Nylon
brl8t1e brusbes with stalnless steel wire handles. Tho
probe brusb shall have utensioDS (at least as long 6B
the probe) of stainless steel, Nylon, Tel1on, or similarly
Inllft mnterlal. The hrushes shall be properly sized and
shaped to brush out the probe liner and nozzle.
2.2.2 WQ9b Bottles-Two. Olass wash bottles are
recommended; palyethylene wash bottles may be used
at the option 01 the tester. I t Is reoommended that acetone
not be Dtored In polyethylene bottles lor long~r than II
month.
2.2.8 Oius Sample Storage Containers. Chemienlly
reolstant, borosillente glass bottles, for acetone wash09,
000 m1 or 1000 ml. 8erew enp liners shall either be rubber-
b8eked Teflon or ahaU be constructed &0 as to be leak.froo
and rcsIotnnt to chemical attBct by acetone. (Narrow
mouth [llllss bottles hcve been lound to be less prone to
leabIe.) Alternatively, polyethylene bottles may b3
.-4. I
2.2.4 Petri Dishes. For fI1ter samples, gIa.
,ecommended, but not required. If the t~ster opt., to
conduct the pretest leak~heclr, the following procedure
shall be.used.
After the sampling train has been assemhled, tum on
and ...t the filter BOd probe heating systems at the desired
openting temperatures. Allow time for the temperaturea
to stl\bllixe. If a Vi ton A O-ring or other leak-free connec-
tion is used in esscmbling the probe nozzle to the probe
liner,leak-cheek the train at the samplhlg site by plug-
ging the nozzle and pulling a 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg)
VQCuum.
NOTE.-A lower vacuum may be used, provided that
it Is not ex('ceded during the test.
If an asbestos string is used, do not eOJ1IIeet the probe
to the train during the leak-checlr. Instead, leah-checlr
the t....in by Ilrst plugging tbe inlet. to the filter holder
(cyclone, if applicahle) and pulling a 380 mm Hg (15 In.
Hg) vacUlUD (see Note Immediately above). Tben con-
nect the probe to the train and leak..,heck at about 2:.
rom Hg (1 in. Hg) v9<'uum;altenmtively, tbeprobemay
be leak-checked with the rest 01 the sampling train, in
one step, at 380 nun Hg (15 in. Hg) vacuum. Leskage
rates in ucess of 4 percent of the sverage sampling rate
or 0.00057 m '/min (0.02 cfm), whichever Is less, ore
unacceptable.
The following leak-cherk Instmctions for the sampling
tJain described in APTD-05i6 and APTD-().'.,81 may be
helpful. Stert the pump with bypass vsl~e fully open
and coarse adjust valve completely closed. Partially
open the coarse adjn6t valve and slowly close the bypass
valvf. nntil the desired vacuum iareaehed. Do not reverse
,ure<'tiun of bypass val vo; this will Cal1"9 water to back
-------
<:?'
U9 Into tho lllter tlolc!or. XI tile c!3BUOO vecuum Is 00-
~OOj Glth~r leoo-d:ltttr at this hI(!her VBeuum or QJlc!
~£!o 1= chet.tr as ohom! belo':l end start over. .
'W~en the lee!I-chectr is completec!, first slowly removo
~~o Jjl!11(! \:rom the Inlet to the probe, filter holdor, ~
CYc!IIDO (11 Q!lplicabl~) and Immediately turn of< tile
v('=..un "Gum'). '1l'lIlo prevents the wet~r In the impin(Jers
:~Z!1 ooIn3 rorl>OO b~!I1;7&c! Into the IIIter bolder end
::C:.!ro (Jo! from *1113 entroJnoo \)QC!Im,se! intG tbe third
:mJlID3Z1. .
<'.1..1.3 IWatr-CherlIa Durln3 lJample Run. If, anae 10
'C!Dt:o. 'Jr~o IOIlII-ehecII shell 110 done IM'cording to tbo
J~~uro outlined in Section ~.1.~.1 above, eGcopt that
n e:'l::)!11Ie <:11.110 Qt Q VMUum cquCII ro Or (jr~ter tllQn tho
. :~lmmD vcluo ECCllroOO ill> ro that pnlnt In tho teat.
::.n~o Ic:\tlc:(o rote Is ~ounc! ro be no (jfCllter tben O.au1J57
: ;:.G/rnl'i1 (O.~ el'm) C1 11J;)1ront 01 t:to Qveroae oQrnplblc1
. .'D~e <",..Iehever 10 1090), the rooulto Bfe GCceptBblei ane!
"'J =~n 1;7\iJ nczil to be C8>pl!oo ro the total vo umo
'. ,/ <£:r,7 COeD meteroo' If, b01;7evei'j a hlBllei' leelIB:je rote
..~. olOUlinea, the teSter ohcll oltll0r reco,'d the lee.iIeae
: 'c% encl p!lIn to coned tho =l?lo volume CD oJIo~ III
'~rt!U? 6.3 of this mothoe!, ar qhail voW the OODl!lliJl3
1.~..mcdleteIY cl'ter C1IrnjlllnQnt chQlI(jc:J loo!r-d:I\\Clw
('.."'0 c3)tlonal; If ouch Icdr-d:cc::W oro &!no, tho p~ure
e--.;;t!lncclln Bectlon ~.l.~.i Qoove ohcll be w:;,d.
6.M.S J?C3t-test ~-Check. A 1000!t-<:beclr Is mendQ.
'~]Il Qt tha concluolon of ench C!\1nphn(t run. The led!-
CS~" ollcll be done In Mcordc.nce with the prooeduTCa
c3t1lnecl In Bectlon ~.l.U, OGOOpt that It shall be CIII~-
"-"ctOO Qt D v~uum ~oel to or [lJ'eaturh\(j tI::o
=pllil(! run mc.lntoln C'JI !eatllnstlc ~mpllna roto
~'C1\thln no jlercent 0' true IlOklnetie ilnl- otberwlaa
L'l!\!IIT
I!..@CAYlOM
@'ERt\YOR.
[i).\TE
IiIUfJ NO.
SAMPlrE. DOX NO.
METER ~OX NO.
M!ETER ~H@
~ FACTOR
'ITOT TUBE COEF~ICIENT. CjJ
~I~ !I»)j \\I!o A~to7) CIne! Q lIon1~rot1!!i'3
~{] ~o!dl1.c:1 a1~n6° C ~o 17), a:r C1Zc!l ~
t:m~mro D ~Iaoo 1I»y OX! Cll9pllceblo aubpert of Wo
~(!erds 07 ElI?XIrovGd by ~a Ailiwllistretor. .
J7~ ~ 11U1I, room-e! tile ootl:\11cqol.oo on Q c2cte ~
~ C:J tho o~e iJOOwn In J7~ 1>-2. Jao 0i1!18 to reIIO,d \\It:)
fIDltlc! (;rg (J2!J meW'~. h1Ird tOO (iry~. m~
~I!JO Qt \\!t:) ~E.1n3 ~~ C!!~ cl ~ (B!!!1 ilia>
~<:::\~ ~ ~'W!B fZ!I'(7 ~ OliO m6fu~ =-':,-
C'J1{l ~ all !e3!J eGJootI, ~ wl::Mm C}miIIJlIIiI(! b ~
'R'QlIe c1h01l'roillngn \'I:)(\wi'OO b.. ~ &-2 Qt ~ 6OC'~~:!1 (::) ~ C::::\ = tD ~
~ 00= oU ='i)!.bi'J ~~tdl ~ 'iro \'t:::'ib
=3I~'t, =0170 tho iiC"w!\i:Q ~ ~ thQt t!!o QL2:J
~ Jl)i'OCJ hoo = ap w temparoti!ro, d
~fuffi Uto 1')1 '00 ero proP2l'ly ~&1dJ.
1Pdtloll thO nllzzle Dt ImVI!1E3 point mQ tIt:J Cb
~tbI(J ti!rct\t!y Into thQ (J23I;"=. !rmmC12!Qtclv ~
~ punlril QD~ CUjwn t&>q f.!.t>~ (;:) IcoIIfnot!c C1/nQt!CE3'
WomOl!lBpba = QvQ\!Qb"" ~R!lch c!61n tho roplci Giij~.
c:::::i cJ \!D::) ~3 c=~lli!,'J ro~ 'C1\~t m=1~
c=gmtQ1;!lIZ3. ~ =a:JroP'Jo cro ~ 00 =
1:71'::3 t&J 'R'!/BhJ 8 ~~!/Eb:) ~=t 10 Q.Li5211.M cr1
e!2:JacID!JeD a<:u!~t cI:c~tv (cir;:7 ~ ~~)
b ~~ ~ D:'::<\. .0.J?'1i'JO-:!3'iJ ~io.Im t.!tQ ~mo Cr::1
C'~ ~o EW~CJi'C3IhD. JIg Co aild Mo cro ~l:oIcIlo ~
q~\70 mtdl ~G:J &:I ~:'D ~~""" - ~ M1=
c,~i?7'L3to otoj!:] (= C!rot!:13 ? -' '. .O!lhv =
to!ron to:> emn~lo 00 !4Q dovbt!oow. ' .
Oho:n ~h~ LtclJ: In unW..1 ~n\Qrcnt n=tlw ~ -
C1-0!3!!t c1l.mph\(jOO' C"AE1), ~ CC1'O tII C!a;;;) tho =
cQWi1 IDVO 'lr.!/oro 1ru;aYt!n3 tho prooo Into t!lo ~ ~
IJP'Ovent =t01 iirom ~1I(j Into the Il1ter !lolder. ""
~ tho pumgl ?:lIDY lie turnoo on mth tho =
C1ilhrnt WivG cloosd. . ,
Wilen tho glrooo I.D In J!lllQltlO!l1(, bl~!r of< the oJl8D1n?
CJ'i;MId tho 1!t7000 Qild pnnl1= tII f?!'Ovent ~
Q!!.tetlve dl1,ut!on ~I the a~ otrrom.
'A'roVG!'!:8&11O~~(}!j~u!M~zr~'
n CI C9 opcclflztl ~)7 ~ Ll~, ~i!8 ~~
(::) OOmp tho probe EICI8!J!1e IBI~ ~ ~ m!!1!I "''''''''
Dm&lInl! n~ tbe =i!!J IL7 '3~ 1i\:)~.(H ~
, @0 &rob3 throl1(!b ~ ~; ~ ~ @1!
e'JwWe of extractlna ~t4I(J m!\ter!91.
. 1!>t!rIn3 Mw ~ &WI, ~ ~ ~\! Co>
!Jee31 tile tem~ t1nI1!iI~ I\1!e QJteIr ~ ~ ~
Drot)2r !evel; 006 mcJ'O Ic9 ~, f!l ~'" ~ (;;;j
Ji1I2intc!o 1'\ t0mperomro c1 ~ timn \>Y C ,.. u-) ~ i!!;;)
ooncl!,m_/91l1C8 a01 61Jt!e~. ~, ~cailJ1 ~
@Ie !..vel ooe! 00!l0 c1 ~ -~. -
Hf the pressure droll ~ tIIo illtcr ~mee ~ D\iIi1.
!iilMinB Isoldnetlc oamplln(t dlfi1~ tII tmn~, (jb~
OJte; may be repleced In the mldot 01 (\ C3m!)!$ ~. He
b iGWmrnended tbnt another complete iUter I1tS3mbl))'
~ ~d tElther than Dttemptll1(j to coonrJe the iUter ItseIH.
moUme Q tiew Il1ter C£OOmbl~ ID lnotclied. conuuct Q !~.
clIeck (= Beetlon U.~.2). '1!'ba total ~cul6tD w0f31!3
chDlllnclude tbo WIIlJIlI.>tlon of aU 1l1W' OGt3mbl)7 OOtchC9.
A alnale tre.ln ohcll 00 used for tile ootlro rnmp!o roo"
, OOc~t In = where oImultDnelluo ClD!:J1Ina In Ye1;\uiJD
In t~o or more cspcrol0 e!ucta 01 Qt t1:70 01 more 61fi01d
l'1IrotIono mtbln iho =0 ci!uct, CI:l, In OO!:;:) 1:7!!C5'O'cqulr;>
~t Wluro nc=:JItI:\kJ Q ~ c!J~. JlBI c!! ~
cJeUD~OmJ, ~!OO IE:) c1~aI = ~ vID t:J w~ (::)
& C(!I;%'OID c1~ £~.
Wc"-.o ~ 1:7b roo C1 =v ~ =u::c:J, ~
c:uI!)7C:J... '. c2 ~ CNrnt~ c:Ml (i] oW~~~
~1iioE1~~~OO~, "ZJ~
d ilo~cla 01= 1:7C5'O ~ on CIII irCllno, In 1:7h!cII =, @:)
~t-hc.li e:\tcbG:J \:rom ~bQ IBlcillTlcluai IroInJ 1!J!C>'!l t<>
emnblnGd (eo mDj7 the Im!>ll1(je7 CQtcII3J) [)!Ie! O!lO GI!!j!JnCJ
c1 ~nt-'.1cli rot!l'a ~ = cw!1Jt)!D c2 1my;)!nne7 :ibtz::J
~ bo parfon=J. ~"t ~@) \\!t:) .0.~~ C:7
~ conoomtna tS!.o ~a c!J="1a <;]~ WO CI
= trnIns are 1iG<;{1.
.0.t tile end 01~ =!P i'W, 0ump, recoi'6tho fu1aj cJrv (jCJ oQ£:? ~. G:&2
CIInc\Juct D j)IIst-test lroIt-i:beclt, CD outllnoo In ~
6.n.;(J D
BGtllod 2, Section 3.1; the lines muot p:IOO this leak~
1m order to validate the velocity hood dMD..
<1.1.6 CCllcul&tlon c2 1Poroen~ ~. ~
Pa mmHI ITS) I~Psl, mml:lzO VOlUME Ei\I!.E1: OUTLET TEMPERA TUllE. LAST IMPINGER,
. NUMB£A  I/)I,m!n. (In. Hili 0CIOF) ImI(ln.)HzO (In.H201 niSll.3) "c I"f) .c (1IIf) .CI"F) eC I "I't
       Avg. Avg.  
TOTAL          
AVERAGE       Avg,   
Figure. 5-2. Particulate field data.
III-Appendix A-3D
-------
<.
mine wbether the run was valid or another test run
ohol1ld be mode. II t~"re was dill" lIlty in maintainmg
I~kinetir rB1rs rlw' to Ylllrt'p rOlldltlOl15, consult with
tI". AdUJinl>lrbtor lor possible V6fialll'e on tha isomnetic
rilles.
4.2 Sample Recovery. Proper cl08nup procedure
beRins as soon as the probe Is removed Irom the stack at
the end o1tbe !U1mpling period. Allow the probe to cool.
When the probe can be salely handled, wipe off all
eKternal particulate matter new' the tip or the probe
nen,.!e and place a cap over It to prevent losing or gaining
particulate matter. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly
whlla the samplhlj{ traln Is cooling down as this would
create a vacuum In the filter holder, thus drawing water
from tbe Implngernlnto the filter bolder.
Belore moving the sample train to the cleanup site.
remove the proi>t' I,om the I18ml'le train, \\1pe off the

dlIcone grease! and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be
careful not to 0S8 any condensate that might be present;
Wipe off the ollioone grease from the filter Inlet where the
probe was fastened and cap It. Ramove the umbilical
cord from the last Implnger and cap the Impinger. If a
flexible line is used between the flrst Impinger or eon.
denser and the filter holder, disconnect the line at the
filter holder and let any condensed water or IIQ.uld
draln Into the Implngers or condenser. After wiping off
the slUoone grease, cap off the filter bolder outlet and
Implnger Inlet. Eltber ground.glass stoppern, plastic
caps, or serum caps may be used to close tbese openings.
Trnnsfer the probe and fIIter.lmplnger assembly to the
cl08nup area. This area should be clean and protected
from the wind SO that the chances of contamiuating or
losing the sample will be minimized.
Save a portion of the acetone used for cleanup as a
blank. Take 200 ml 01 this acetoM dlrectl}' lrom the wash
bottle IK>lng used and place It In a gla~ sample contalncr
labeled "acetone blank."
Inspect the train prior to and dnrlng dl"as""mbly an,1
note any abnormal conditions. Troat the sampl,,, ""
follows: .
ConIalfllr No. I. Carelully remove the filter from the
iIlter holder and place It In IlS Identifie«! petri dish con.
talner. Use a pBlr 01 tweezers audlor CIN\n dispo!U1ble
ourglcal gloves to handle the IUter. II It Is nrcessary to
fold tbe /lIter do 90 sucb tbat the particulate cake is
Inside the lold. Carefully transfer to the pelrl dish any
particulate mailer and/or filler fibers which adhere 10
tbe fIItllf holder gasket, by using a dry ]l;ylon bristje
bnwb and/or a sharlH'dged blade. Seal the container. 8
Con/oln" No. t. Taking care to 688 that. dust on the
outside 01 the probe or other uterlor surfaces d0e3 aot
Ret Into the sample, Q.uantltatlvely recover particulate
mati e' or any condensate !rom the probe nonie, probe

IIIttlnR, prolJ< lill«, and front half <>f the IiIter hdIder by
wash IuS these coDlpouents ...ith acetone and p\IIcina the
.as!.1Jj . ,lass conWnef. DistJ1Ied ,.,- ma, be WIed
in8\.enCI of II08tone when approve«! by tbe Admlnil;trator
<>Dd ehalI be used ,'ben sp.dfied by t b. AdminJBtrator;
in the51' co.-. save. water blank and lollow tlM' Admin.
Istrator's diJoections on analysis. Ferlonn the aoet,one
riw'e8 88 follows:
raeerull}' remove tlM' probe no..lc "nd d''8D the inside
~Ul'rB4.~" by rin!'iuJ:, ~1th fW'f't.n1\" from a ",,'a.c;h bottle and
brushing ,,'ith a:-l) 1011 brist\« ,"rusb. Jirush until Ihe
....",one rinse shows no visible partidos. after ",bleb
make B final rln... 01 the il1side surraee ,,'ilh 1\(""'l1e.87
Hrush IInd rln.. the inside parts of the Sw8jtelok
flttin~ ....lIh eo"tol1e In a s!mlbr wa}' until no visible
l18nl\'lp9 fpmo.in. .
Rinse 111(' prohf" l111..r with 8('fotonl' by tntin!! and
rotatjl1~ tht' pro\x~ whUe ~11tirtin~ at'~101lC into i1s upper
end !OO thaI all Inside surl""es will I:>P ",.tted ",lIh 8('e.
IOno. Let Ihe !)Celone Ilrninlro1D tI.e lower end into Ihe
sample container. A 10I1I1el (rla.t', and
OAkh any -(),oe and JJltnienlAtP mAlter whIch Is
brosbe«! Irom the prol:>P. Run the brush through the
proN> tIITee Um.o or more un1.l1 no vI!;!h!. panleu!alp
mattfl'r is carried out ,,;tl1 thl' ac~ton~ or until none
nrmnh'l8 In the prol., Unl'r on ,-i5U81 in!'1J(>('tion. ?'jth
lIIalnlf'SS !!teel or other mel>\t pro''''', run Ihe brush
through In the abon. prescrih,'d manner 01 h'ast sl1
times since luctaJ probt's have small crt'vic('s in whi,,'h
partJculat,e OIat1<" can i>t' enl '01>1"'(\. Rillse th.. brush
with _tone, and qu.al11itatlvel)' rollect tile$< washlo'J(s-
ill the aample cont>\hU',. AI"'r tile brushing, make a
ftnalacetoue rill51' 01 Ih"I',ol,.. 0.< dr~ri,bed ab?ve.
U IS recommended Ihat 1\\0 people De w;ed to cleIIlI
1be prolK> to mlniwi.e >ample'loos", Bpt....een samplin8
rom, keC9 brushes cle2>JI "lid prOle<:le«! from oontamJn&.
timl,
After ensuring that all joints have been wiped clean
G1 sili,'()ne grease, CJt,a,I the inside 01 tlM' !rout balf ef the
fII'~r bolder by rubbing tbe smlaees ",itb a Nylon bristle'
brush and rinsing with 8<'etone. RinI'G eaeb sw1aoe
dlrea times or more if needed to remove visible partiru.
!ale. Make II finsl rinee of the brush and filter bolder.
Carefully rin..ntily its oontent.S.tl7
ConIainn No. S. ]l;ote tbe rolor 01 the indicating sill...
pi to detenn.i.... it it has been t"()Dlple't'I)' spent and make
a motation 01 its oondition. Transfer the sili,'a gel from
tbe fourth impinger 1.0 ita qillal oon'ain... IInd 8I'IIl.
A fwml)! nt'By make it e.a.lume 01' weight. unless analysis 01 tbt lIDpinger t'lltcb
ill required (- Note, Section 2.1..).
If a ditIerent type of condenser is used, 1tlEA.o;ure the
amollnt of moisture co~lIsed eltber \'olum9U'ically or
cravimetrieally.
Wbenever possible, oontainm sbonJd be shipped In
.....b a way that tbey remain upright at all times.
4.a Analysis. Record tbe dat.a l1\QuiTed on a &beet
8UdI as the one sbown iJl Figure 5-8. H.andJe each sample
container as 10110.,., '
Oorotoinrr No.1. Lea_ve the cont.uts in the shipping
POlltain" or transfer the filter IInd allY Ioo6e partieulate
from the sample oontailler to a tared glass weighing dish.
Desi"""te for 24 hours in a desiccator oontaining anl1)'.
dJrOus calcium sullate. Weigb to II oonst.ant weigbt and
report tbe results to the nearest 0.1 mg. For purposes of
this 8ect.iOnj 4.3, the term "ronstant weight" means .
dJ1Jerenoo 0 no more than 0.6 DIg or 1 percent of total
...eight less tare weight, ",hkhever Is greater, between
two tOtUl8C'Utive WeI(hings, with DO less than ti bours of
cletiittation time between welSbing..

Alternatively, tbe earnple may be oven dried at 10."" C
(220" F) for 2 to a hours, cooled In the desiccator, and
weigbed to a oonBt.ant weight, unless otberwlse specl1led
by the Administrator. Tbe tester may also opt to oven
dry the sample at 105 0 C (2200 F) for2to3hours, weigh
the sample, and use this weight as a final weight.
Containrr No. I. Note the level olliQ.uld in the container
and contlnn on the analysis sheet whether or not leakage
occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of
leakage has occurred, eltber void the sample or use
methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator,
to correct t.he final results. Measure the liquid in tbis
oontainer either volumetrically to :1:1 ml or gravl.
metrically to :1:0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a tored
2.'>0.ml beaker and evaporate to dryness at ambient
temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hourn and
weigh to a constant weigbt. Report tbe results to tbs
nearest 0.1 mg.
Contalfllr No. $. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel
plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 ~ using a balance. This

st~~~~~ ~~~,,!c~.J:I~r~ t~ure acetone In this

container either volumetrlcally or gravimetrically.
Transfer the acetone to a tared 25(}.ml beaker and evap-
orate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure.
Desiccate for 24 bours and weigh to a conlSant weight.
Report tbe results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
NOTE.-At the option 01 the tester, the oontents of
Container No.2 as well as the acetone blank container
may be evaporated at temperatures higher than ambi.
ent. If evaporation Is done at an elevated temperature,
III-Appendix A-31
the tom perature must be below tlte boiling poi lit 01 the
solvent: "Iso, to prevent "bumping," the evaporation
proceas must be closely supervised, and the contents e1
the beaker must be swirled occasionally to mainlatn an
even temperature. Use ertreme care, as acetone Is hlabl)'
fiammnbls and bas II low flash point.

4.4 Quality Control Procedures. The

following quality control procedures are

suggested 10 check the volume metering

system calibration values at the fieid test site

priur to sample collection. These procedures

are optional fo!' th!' tester.212

4.4.1 Meter Orifice Check. Using the

cl'libration data oblained during the

Cdlibration procedure described in Section

5.3. df!tennine the faH@ for the me!ering

system orifice. Th~ faH~ is the orifice

prei-9
'\ 'V'.,
Where:

Y.=Dry gas meler calibration checl< valoe.
dimensionless.
10=10 minutes of run time.

Compare the Y. value with the dry gas meter
calibration factor Y to detennine that:
O.97Y 
-------
II. ~1br8t1tm

MalDtaIn a laboratory log 01 aD calibrations.
II.l Probe N ozzla. Probe nozzles sball be caI1breted
before tbelr initial WJe In the field. Using Ii mlerometer, JIIInt
measure tbe inside diameter of the nozzle to the D8IInISt

1'1.025 mm (0.001 In. ). Mate three 88parate meuumnente .te
IJ3Ing di1Jerent diameters each time, and obtain tbe aver.
1118 oftbe measurements. Tbe ~erenee between tbe hilb
and low numbers sbell not exeeed 0.1 mID (O.OOi In.).
When nozzles become nicked, dented, or corrodedl ~8J'
IbaD be reshaped, &berpened, end recalIbrated DeJOn
-. Recb nozzle &bell be permanently end nnlque\7
Identified. .
6.2 Pltot Tube. Tbe Type S pltot tube 888embly shaD
be calibrated aceord\ng to the proeedure outlined ID
, 1Iectlon 4 01 Metbod 2. ft 5"
11.8 Metering System. ..

5.3.1 Calibration Prior to Use. Before its

initial U8e In the field. the metering 8Y8tem

.hall be calibrated as follows: Connect the

metering system Inlet to the outlet of a wet

Qa.t meter that is accurate to within 1 percent.

Refer to Figure 5.5. The wet test meter should

have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 fts/rev). A

.plrometer of 400 liters (14 ftS) or more

capacity. or equivalent. may be used for this

calibration. although a wet test meter is

!118ual1y more practical. The wet test meter

.hould be periodically calibrated with a

liplrometer or a liquid displacement meter to

!!Insure the accuracy of the wei iest meter.

Splromeiers or wei iesi meie!'!) of other oizeo

may be used. provided thai the specified

IIccuracies of the procedure are maintained.

!Run the metering system pump for about 15

I!Ilinuies with the orifice manometer

Indicating a median reading as expected in

field use io allow the pump to warm up and

to permit ihe interior surface of the wet iest

liDoter to be thoroughly wetted. Then. at each

of a minimum of three orifice manometer

.etUngs. pass an exact quantity of gas

through the wet test meter and note the gaG

volume indicated by the dry gas meter. Also

note the barometric pressure. and the

temperatures of the wet test meter. the inlet

of the dry gas meter. and the outlet of the dry

gas meter. Select the highest and lowest

orifice settings to bracket the expected field

operating range of the orifice. Use a minimum

volume of 0.15 mB (5 cf) at all orifice settings.

Record all the data on a form similar to

Figure 5.6, and calculate Y. the dry gas meter

calibration factor. and 4H@. the orifice

calibration factor. at each orifice setting 8G

shown on Figure 5.6, Allowable tolerances for

Individual Y and ~H@, values are given in

Figure 5.6. Use the average of the Y values in

the calculationll In Section 6.

Before calibrating the metering s)'stem. it is

suggested that a leak-check be conducted.

For metering systems having diaphragm

pumps. the normal leak-check procedure will

not detect leakages within the )Jump. For

these cases the following leak-check

procedure is suggested: make a 1o-minute

calibration run at 0.OOO57mS /min (0.02 cfm):

at the end of the run. take the difference of

the measured weUest meter and dry ga8

meter volumes; divided the difference by 1Q,

to get the leak rate. The leak rate should not

exceed 0.00057 me/min (0.02 cfm).
Run No.
Filter No.
Amount liquid lost du.ring transport
Acetone blank volume, ml
Acetone wash volume, ml
Acetoile blank i:cncentration, mg/mg (equation 5~)
~i:eto!le wash blank, mg (equation 5~5)
   WEIGHT OF PARTICULATE COLLECTED,
CONTAINER   mg  
 NUMBER     
  fiNAL WEIGHT TA,RE WEIGHT WEIGHT GAIN
 '8     
I> 2     
 'ifOTAl --- - - --- 
 --- --- --- -- 
   less acetone blank  
   Weight of particulate matter 
 VOlUME OF LIQUID 
 WATER COllECTED 
 IMP INGER  SILICA GB.
 VOLUME. WEIGHT, 
 ml, 9 
FINAL   
. INITIAL   
LIQUID COLLECTED   
TOTAL VOlUME COLlECTED  . 9-1 ml
" CONVERT WEIGHT OF WATER TO VOlUME BY DIVIDING TOTAL WEIGHT
INCREASE BY DENSITY OF WATER (1g/ml).

INCREASE. 9 : VOLUME WA1£R, IQI
, glml
Figure 5-3. Analytical data.
III-Appendix A-31a
-------
1.3.2 Calibration After Un. After eacll
filed use. th:J calibration of the metering
.v.tem Bhell be checked by performing three
CllllbratioD NIlS at a single. intermedi&te
oriIk:e setting (based on the previous field
tnt). with the vacuum set at die.maximum
villue reached during the test series. To
edJust the vacuum. Inset a valve between thl!
.It test meter and the Inlet of the metering
.y.tem. Calculate the averll8e value of the
dJy p' meter calibration factor. U tile value
bas chenged by more than 1 percent.
f't!C8librate the meter over the full range of
orifice Mttlngl. e. previously detailed.
Alternative procedures. e.g.. rechecking the
orllice meter coefficient may be used. subject
to the approval of the Administrator.
5.3.3 Acceptable Variation in Calib~ation.
IJI the dry gas meter coefficient values
obtained before and after a test series differ
by more than 5 percent. the test series shall
either be voided. or calculations for the test
lilies shall be performed using whichever
meter coefficient velue (I.... before or after)
"v.. the lower velua of total umple volume.
a.4 Probe Heeter Calibration. The probe
heelina 'f.tem .hell he calibrated before its
initial use in the field. .
Use a heat source to generate air heated to
..Iected temperatures that approximate those
expect.ed to ~cur In the sources to be
I8IIIpled. Pan thl8 8Ir throuah the probe et e
typical limp" now rate while melllU'ln8 the
probe Inlet end outlet temperaturel et various
Elrobe heater settings. For each air Q, 1 N~ature
~lamperature generated. construct a graph (If .4. ...C_Uonnl area cf I:3~. mi (rt').
11.. ~"1Iter ftPCIl' 111 &he Iti 1!t3e8m, proporti0:3
I)/robe heating system setting versus probE= by vclum3. .
outlet temperature. The procedure outlined in !J. -Acetone blank residue con=tI'atIon, ma/l.07
APTJ)...()576 can also be used. Probes ... -~~"t~~ o~~: ,:~111 c::.~
!COnstructed according to APTD-0581 r.eed I -~~:e:f=~='Samp1lng.
Utot be calibr"ted if the calibration curves ill I.. -Mal:lmum aceeptableleaka30raterorelthen
APTD-0576 are used. Also. probes with oullH !;test leak e/!eck or for a leak check 1011011'-
a oomponent ehllnge; eqU&l to 0.00067
temperature monitoring capabilities do not . m Imln (0.02 erm) or fJl8roant of tbe aVlll'8lf
require calibration. .. 8!UDpllng rate, whlch~er 1D1ess. .
- -IndfvldU&ll8akage rate observed durin.. the
6.& Tem~ture Oauaee. UII8 the procedure h. leak cbeck conducted prior to the"'.",..
Beetlon U or Metbod 2 to calibrate In~k temperature oomponont obaDge ('-1, 2, a.... .),
PoUIII!II. Dial thermometens. sucb 811 are used lor the dry .' m'/ri1ID (ctm). .
l1li meter and condenser outlet, sb&Il be calibrated r.. - Leakage rate observed durlDe &he post-tefi
IPInst mercnry-1n1!1&ss thermometers. leak C/Iook, m'/D1ID (cfm).
6.S Leak Cbeck or Metering System Shown In Ft,ure" ..Tot.&lamountofp&rtlculatomattorooUeoted,
IH. That portion or tbe 8&IDpUng train from tbe pump. . mg. .
\\otbe orifice meter should beleakobecked priortolnlUaI It. -Molecnlar welgbt or -tar, 18.0 gfg-DUIIe
tI88 and after each shipment. Leakage after the pump JVIIl (18.0 Ib/l~mole).
r8Jlt In less vo lume being recorded than Is actually a. - Mass 01 residue 01 acetone BIter evaporaUOJI,
_pled. Tbe rollowing Dl'OOecIure Is suggested (888 ~.
JIIUre H): Close tbe main valn on &he meter box. Pk. - Barometr1e ~ at the II&1Dp!lng II1te,
IDist a one-bole robber stopper wi&h robber tabllII p mm JIg (In. Hg).
=~~ I~n: sl'ee o~g:'o~fi':r~:-e~~:e~ft~ ,.:.. :~~8~~mmr:a ~ IlfC
I0'Il' Bide orifice tap. Pressurize &he system to 13 to 18l1li1 . CI8.t2 In. 11&>.
(I to 7 In.) water oolumn b, blowing Into &he rubber Jt -I4eaII811 OOD8taIIt, 0.08288 mm lie-marK...
ab!ng. PIne/! 011 the tubing and observe tbe manomeW mole (Z1.I6 111. Bc-ft'rR-lb-mole).
far one mlnato. A 1068 of pressure on tbe manomeW 2'. -Ab80lute a\'8r118 dry 1811 meter tomperatun
Inbe~~eak 111 the meter box; I~, II present, mlllt (- Figure &-2), oK ("R).
-.""..... 2'. -Absolute average staoll: gIlD tomperat1lre (-
~~ Barometer. C&IIbrate ags.lnst a mercury bIlom. 2'... -:=~2)a~I~~)' temperature, 293" K
(6280 R). .
.. a.leul4tlona V. -Votume of_tone bl&nll:. mL
~ t cal oIaU retain! t 1_... --'- V.. -Volume of -tone used In we.sh. ml.
- ou e ODS. JIg a """. one ........ V..=Total volume of Uquld colLectecIl11lmplnpn
figure beyond that or the aoqulred date. Bound and silica gel <- Figure H), mi.
. l18ures &Iter the final caloolaUon. Otber rorma of the V. = Volume 01 gas sample IIa lOe8SIU'OG by 471U
oquatiODI ma1 be 1II8d .. IoDa 811 &he, sin equivalent meter. Gem (dd).
rwa1t& ~ V.(...)=Volume 0':=18 ml!ll&Ul'ed \;J the t\ry
C:~ to standard conditio".,
ORIFICE.
..ow liTO TUIING
IInL MANOMETER
'IUDS I TO 7 .ICHES
WATER COLUMI
VACUU'
GAUGE
MAIN VALVE
CLOSED
AIR-TIGHT
PUMP
Figure 5-4. Leak check of meter 00)(.
III-Appendix A-31b
-------
,~
THERMOMETER
o
METERING SYSTEM
WET TEST METER
Figure 5 5 Equipment arrangement for metering
systern calibration. 259
Date
Barometric pressure. Pb .
Meter1ng Systelll
I dent 1fi cat1 on:
1n. Hg

I I
I Temperatures I

1~~~~o::~:~)1 lnle~r~ g~~l:~t~rAVerage ITi..
I (tw) I (to) I (ti) I (tm) I (e)
I of I of I of I of I 1111n
I I I I ~
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
i I I I I
I I
Orifice ISpirometer lOry gas
manometerl(wet meter) I meter
setting Igas volume Ivolume
tJf I (Vw) I (V...)
in. H20 I ft3 I ft'3
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
Calcu1ations
AH
in. H20
I
I
I
I V", P b (tm ... 460)
I ~H
1 Vm(Pb ... !!:O) (tw ... 460)
j
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
y
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
dHraM 2

0.0317 lIH ( ... 460) e
Pb (to ... 460) - w
Average
c Ratio of reading of wet test meter to dry test meter; tolerance
for individual values ~.02 from average.

dH@ . Orifice pressure differentfal that equates to 0.75 cfm of air
e 68°F and 29.92 inches of mercu~. 1n. H20; tolerance for
1ndividual values ~0.20 from average.
v
Figure 5.6.
Example data sheet for ca11brat10n of .etering
systelll (Eng11sh un1ts).25'
III-Appendix A-32
-------
V.Ctf,)aVolume or water ..por In the R88 sample.
conected to standard conditions, scm (sef).
V. = 8tack pa velocity, cUcu1at.ed by MeUlod 2,
Equation H, UII_III cIa&a obWnecl !rom
Metbod 6, mt- (~). 117
W.~Welgbt of residue In _tone wash, mg.
Y=Dry g88 meter calibration factor.
6H=Average pressure diIJerentla18C1'09S the orI&e
meter (Bee Figwe 6-2), mm UtO (In. UtO).
P.-Denalty or ~ mg/mI (Bee label on
bottle). .
h- DenIIty of ".., 0.81182 IfmJ (0.002201
Ib/ml).
'-TcMI amp1lna Ume, min. .

'j = Bampllng time Interval, from the beginning
or a run untO the I1nIt component-cbange,
min. ,
';=Bampllng time Interval, between two IItlC-
cesslve component changes, beginning with
the InIllrvaJ between the I1nIt and 8800nd
changee, min. .
,.=BampUng time Interval, !rom the final (n'b)
component change until the end or tbe
sampllng run, min.
13.6=8pecl1lc IIf&vity or 1D8I'CUI"f.
60= Bec,1mln.
UJO= Connnlon to perte11t.

8.12 Acceptable Results. If 90 percent '" I

.; 110 percent. the results are acceptahle. If

the particulate results are low in comparisCJ:J

to the standard. and I is o\'er 110 percent or

less than 90 percent, the Administrator me:)

accept the results. Citlstion 4 in the

bibliography section can be used to m"ke

acceptability judgments, If I is judegt:d to 1.>1'

unacceptable. reject the particulate r£'suli~

and repeat the test. 259

6.2 A nra«e 4rJ pa meter temperature and average
orUloe ~ drop. Bee clata sheet (Figwe 6-2).
'.1 Dry Oas Volume. Can-ect the ample volume
~ by the 4rJ ps meter to stanclarcl conditions
i:'~ 760 mm Be « 68" F. 29.92 In. Bg) by uslnl



V. on:v.1. y(To...) [P""'+~J
.(otd)-. T p.
. - e&d.

=K1V.y p.....+{Ml/13.6)
T.
8q188IoD r...!
wbere'
K .'O.I8SII°J[/mm Ib far metrtc UDJU 87
I -17.It 0 B,/In. 11& & KDIJIaI111D11a

Non.-ZquMIoD 6-1 an be 1III8G . written UDle8
tile IeabIe ra&e obeerved dminl UI~ the mandatory
II8k ebecb (t.e., the poIIHest leak « led: ebedIII
8ID4ueW pnar W campone!l& cbanpa) a:-.b .i.. U
~f a:ceedI .i., BquaUon 6-1 mUst be mocWIec1 .

(8) Cue I. No CCllllpotIf'IIt ehaTll'lS _de durIn8
ampl/ng mo. In tbIa -, replace V. In Equatlon:>-1
wttb the up-asJon;

'J'.-{L.-L.)'] .

(II) c:- D. ODe . - C01DpoDID1t changes made
CuriDI the ampllnl nm. In this -, replace V. In
8QuaUon H by the upressIon:


[V.- {La-L.)S1
- -5: (Li-L.)S.-{L.-L.)..]
1=2 .
8Dd lUbsl.ltu\e ODIy lor th- Ieabce ra1.e8 (LI fir L.)
wIaIeb ..-d L.. .
..4 "oIUDW or waW ftpOI'.
Equation ~2
V..Cotd)=\'h (~J(RA::)=KIVa.
..lwre:
XI=O.OOl333 ml/ml for metric until!
-O.
-------
J?:'C'Jc1.-1?o l~1clI Cl r:Rf!t::1 ~~ (j::J..
~. ~~c1~~,",=an~c1~
~ [f'w3 Gn\l 00 ~O. <3',) Glc;.a ~ 1m8rlD8<13' ~
~ootlon!HI) Q;J.(J Q c=/i Crom ~ =j)tio:n c1
~tOO CS1IDCSlt101l!J. 'j!'ho 1111:7& oj &0 two I7C!uCJ c1
2]"" alia!! 00 ccmmdilfoo 1IOli'Cct. Tbo ~IU\) ib!l iief/$-
~ 'UIo molsturo ClJDtmt ~ DjWn C!I!IWDpi!on 111
~ted condlt1oD!l ill (!iven In ?Jlo Note of &t:tJon &.3
dMetbotJ 4. )lex tOO puI"MSeS of thin meU1od. Ule avGroll0
Caeli: [\QIJ ~mpj)roturo \rom Figure &-2 J001' bG/ W'lmMIJiIDO&O~ 0& ~Q !Lilno~ o3~ &fJ ~ ~ !Jeo
EJieler ohoulcJI ~ IiiIlnlmi8~cl [i'l0 &Ji'eBlter iliti'l!'il
~iW rom IH!.O (IiG~ecl
~11 uoing lIiU'ge diemeler ~~ oonnecilol1JG
~d Gtraight j!)1j!!! fittings.WI --
7.U.S Colleci the data GS aboWD In iM
IJxsmple data sheet (oeG I?igure 5-3). Make
I!riplicate runs at each of the flow rates and at
!DO less than five different now rates. The-
1T8l\Re of flow rates should be between 10 and
, at litera/min (0.35 and 1.1 elm) or over the
IIXpected operating range.1!98
Figure S.7 .1'Ec:;uiprr.ent arra~Qtm8nt for dry-gas meter cllibraticn."
1I- 1100 T.(K.V,. + 
-------
H
H
H
I
~
"0
"0
CD
::3
p,.
~.
X
~
I
W
111
DATE:
DRY GAS METER IDENTIFICATION:
'BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (Pb):
in. Hg
    TEMPERATURES      
 SPIROMETER DRY GAS   DRY GAS METE~ DRY GAS    
APPROXIMATE (WET METER) METER SP!ROMETER    METER  flOW METER AVERAGE
flOW RATE GAS VOLUME VOLUME (WET METER) INLET OUTLET AVERAGE PRESSURE TIME RATE METER METER
(O) (Vs) (Vdg) hs) hi) hot (id) (6p) (e) (Q) COEFFICIENT COEFFICIENT
cfm ftJ ItJ of of of of in. H20  min. cfm ( Y ds) ( V ds )
          ....l1lI 
0.40           
0.60           
0.80           
1.00           
1.20           
o
Vs 'b
.. 17.65 '-'
e hs + 460)
VI
Yds :a-
ad + 460)
Vdg
'b
. 6p
hs + 460) (Pb .. m)
Figure 5.8. Examplt: datd g;wel for (;<1liiJration of a S[i1llci:!rcf my !jac; meter for method 5 sampling equipment (EmJlish uni ts).198
-------
values at the same flow ratell, Ihe meter need
not be recalibrated until the neJtI date for Ii
recalibra'!',r, check 198

8. BiU,,>t!rapl. 198

, Alidpndum to ~pt'dli('ati()m: for 111\ inrru,lor Tcsttng
ntl~~I/"J1~~ tl~S6~~~~3orP~;'~81:~~i Iso-

metic Source-Sampling Equipment. Environmental
I'roWclion Agency. Research Triangle ParI<, N. C.
APTJ)~"'I. April, 19,1.
3. Rom. Jc.rome J. Maintenance. Calibration, and
OperatIon 01 lsokinetlr. Source Sampling EqUIpment.
Environmenta! ProtRction AI':ency. Researcb Triangle
ParI<, j\.C. AI'TD-OS,6. Marcb, 1972. .
4. 8mith, W. S" R. T. Sbigehara, and W. Y. Todd.
A M,'lhod 01 Interpreting Staek Sampling Data. Paper
Pr_nled al the 63d Anr,ual Meeting 01 tbe Air Pollu-
~~~o. Control AssociatlOu, St. Loui.. Mo. June 14-19,

b. Smith. W. 8".' al. Stack Oas Sampling Improved
~: :-~';'\~li~,~- WlLb New Equipment. APCA Paper

II. .8'''''-'';''&1 'om lor Incinerator Testing at Federal
Pad,I".,. !'HS, ]\;(,APC.I967.

7. 81""eh...... R. T. Adlustrner>t. in the EP A Nom().
(lf8!,h 10< DHltrf.nl PIt.ot Tub< CoefficienIE and Dry
1\1" ".ular v.eJgl:t>. St8<'k 8amphng Ne",. #:4-11.
(}t'1,.tlh('!' 10"4

8. Vollaro, R. F. A Surny 01 Commercially Availa)"l.
Instrumentation For tbe Measurement 01 Low.R"I!~e
1186 Velocities. U.S. Environmental Prot.e
-------
Method 5A-DetermiDatiou of Puticulate
Emissions from the A8phalt rr-iDg and
Asphalt Roofing lndU8try 158
1. Applicabi/Jty and Principle.
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to
tbe determination of particulate emlssiora
from asphalt roofing industry process
saturators. blowing stills. and other SOurcel
es specified in the regulations.
1.2 Principle. Particulate matter i8
withdrawn isokinetically from the source and
collected on a glass filter fiber maintained at
I temperature of 42°:t10°C (108°:t18°F). The
particulate mass. which includes any
material that condenses at or above the
filtration temperature. is determined
gravimetrically after removal of uncombined
water.
2. Apparatus.
2.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train
configuration is the same as shown in r1gUre
5-1 of Method 5. The sampling train consists
of the following components:
2.1.1 Prabe Nozzle. Pitot Tube.
Differential Pressure Gouge. Filter Holder.
Condenser. Metering System. Barameter. and
Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same
ss Mp.thod 5. Sections 2.1.1. 2.1.3 to 2.1.5. and
2.1.7 to 2.1.10. respectively.
2.1.2 Probe Liner. Same as in Method 5.
Section 2.1.2, with the note that at high stack
gas temperatures (greater than 250°C (480°F)).
water-cooled probes may be required to
control the probe exit temperature to
42°:t10°C (108:t18°F).
2.1.3 Precollector Cyclone. Borosilicate
glass following the construction details
shown in Air Pollution Technical Document-
0581. "Construction Details of Isokinetic
Source-Sampling Equipment".
Nole.-The tester shall use the cyclone
when the stack gas moisture Is greater than
10 percent The tester shall not use the
precollector cyclone under other. Jess severe
conditions.
2.1.4 Filter Heating System. Any heating
(or cooling) system capable of maintaining a
sample 8as temperature at the exit end of the
filter holder during sampling at 42°:t10°C
(108°:t18°F).lnstall a temperature gauge
capable of measuring temperature to within
3°C (5.4°F) at the exit end of the filter holder
so thut the sample gas temperature can be
regulated and monitored during sampling.
The tester may use systems other than the
one shown in AP'fD-{J581.
2.2 Sample Recavery. The equipment
required for sample recovery is as follows:
2.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle
Brushes. Graduated Cylinder and/ar
Balance. Plastic Storage Containers. and
Funnel and Rubber Policeman. Same as
Method 5. Sections 2.2.1. 2.2.5. 2.2.6, and 2.2.7.
respectively.
2.2.2 Wash Bottles. Glass.
2.2.3 Sample Storage Containers.
Chemically resistant. borosilicate gla9s
bottles. with rubber-backed Teflon screw cap
liners or caps that are constructed so a8 to be
leak-free and resistant to chemical attack by
1.U-trichloroethane [fCE). soo-mJ or 1000-ml.
(Narrow mouth glass bottle9 bave been found
to be les9 prone to leakage.)
2.2.4 Petri Dishes. Glass. unle91 otherwise
specified by the Administrator.
2.2.5 Funnel. Glass.
2.3 Analpis. For analysis. the following
equipment Is needed:
2.3.1 Gloss Weishing Dishes. Desiccatar.
Analytical Balance. Balance. Hygrometer.
and Temperature Gauge. Same as Method 5.
Sections 2.3.1 to 2.3.4. 2.3.6, and 2.3.7.
respectively.
2.3.2 Beakers. Glass. 250-ml and soo-mJ.
2.3.3 Separatory Funnel. 100-mJ or greater.
3. Reagents.
3.1 Sampling. The reagents used in
sampling sre as follows:
3.1.1. Filters. Silico Gel. and Crushed Ice.
Same as Method 5. Sections 3.1.1. 3.1.2. and
3.1.4. respectively.
3.1.2 Stopcock Grease. TCE-insoluble.
heat-stable grease (if needed). This is not
necessary If lICI'ew-on connectors with Tenon
sleeves. or similar. are used.
3.2 Sample Recovery. Reagent grade 1.1.1-
trichloroethane [fCE). ~O.OO1 percent
residue and stored in glass bottles. is
required. Run TCE blanks prior to field use
and use only TCE with low blank values
(~0.OO1 percent). The tester shall in no case
subtract a blank value of greater than 0.001
percent of the weight of TCE used from the
sample weight
3.3 Analysis. Two reagents are required
for the analysis:
3.3.1 TeE. Same 8S 3.2.
3.3.2 Desiccant. Same as Method 5.
Section 3.3.2.
4. Procedure.
4.1 Sampling Train Operatian. The
complexity of this method is such that in
order to oblein reliable results. te.ters should
be trained and experienced with Method 5
test procedures.
4.1.1 Pretest Preparatian. Unless
otherwise specified. maintain and calibrate
all components according to the procedure
described in Air Pollution Technical
Document.{)576, "Maintenance. Calibration.
and Operation of Isokinetic Source-Samplin8
Equipment".
Prepare probe liners and sampling nozzles
as needed for use. Thoroughly clean each
component with soap and water followed by
. minimum of three TCE rinses. Use the
probe and nozzle brushes during at least one
of the TCE rinses (refer to Section 4.2 for
rinsing techniques). Cap or seal the open
ends of the probe liners and nozzles to
prevent contamination durin8 shipping.
Prepare silica gel portions and glass filters
as specified in Method 5. Section 4.1.1.
4.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Select
the sampling site. probe nozzle. and probe
length as specified in Method 5. Section 4.1.2.
Select a total sampling time greater than or
equal to the minimum total sampling time
specified in the test procedures section of the
applicable regulation. Follow the guidelines
outlined in Method 5. Section 4.1.2. for
sampling time per point and total sample
volume collected.
4.1.3 Preparation of Collection Train.
Prepare the collection train as specified in
Method 5. Section 4.1.3. with the addition of
the following:
Set up the sampling train as shown In
Figure 5-1 of Method 5 with the addition of
III-Appendix A-37
the precollector cyclone. If ueed. between the
probe and filter holder. The temperature of
the precollector cyclone. if used. should be
about the same as for the filter. i.e" 42°:t 10°C
(108°:tlIrF). Use no stopcock grease on
ground glass joints unless the grease is
insoluble in TeE.
4.1.4 Leak Check Procedures. Follow the
procedurel given in Method 5. Sections 4.1.4.1
(Pretest Leak Check). 4.1.4.2 (Leek Check
During Sample Run). and 4.1.4.3 (Post-Test
Leak Check).
4.1.5 Particulate Train Operation.
Operate the sampling train as described in
Method 5. Section 4.1.5. except maintain the
8as tempereture exiting the filter at 42°:t10'C
(108°:t 18°F).
4.1.6 Calculation af Percent /sokinetic.
Same as in Method 5. Section 4.1.8.
4.2 Sample Recovery. Using the
procedures and techniques described in
Method S. Section 4.2. quantitatively recover
any particulate matter into the following
containers (additions and deviations to the
stated procedures are as noted):
4.2.1 Container Na. 1 (Filter). Same
instructions as Method 5. Section 4.2,
"Container No.1." U it is nece9sary to fold
the filter. do so such that the film of oil is
inside the fold.
4.2.2 Container No.2 (Probe to Filter
Holder). Taking care to see that material on
the outside of the probe or other exterior
lurfaces does not get into the sample.
quantitatively recover particulate matter or
any condensate from the probe nozzle. probe
fitting. probe liner. precollector cyclone end
collector flask (If used). and front half of the
filter holder by washing these components
with TCE and placing the wash in a glass
container. Carefully measure the total
amount of TCE used in the rinses. Perfonn
the TCE rinses as described in Method 5.
Section 4.2, "Container No. 2," using TCE
instead of acetone.
Brush and rinse the inside of the cyclone.
cyclone collection flask. and the front half of
the filter holder. Brush and rinse each surface
three times or more. If nece9sary. to remove
visible particulate.
4.2.3 Cantoiner Na. 3 (Silica Gel). Same
procedure as in Method 5. Section 4.2,
"Container No.3."
4.2.4 Impinger Water. Treat th,e impingers
as follows: Make a notation of any color or
film in the liquid catch. Follow the same
procedure as in Method 5. Section 4.2.
"Im~inger Water."
- 4.2.5 Blanlc. Save a portion of the TCE
used for cleanup as a blsnk. Take 200 ml of
this TCE directly from the wasb bottle being
used and place it in a 81ass sample container
labeled "TCE blank:'
4.3 Analysis. Record the data required on
a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5A-1.
Handle each sample container as follows:
4.3.1 Container No.1 (Filter). Transfer the
filter from the sample container to a tared
glass weighing dish and desiccate for 24
hours In a desiccator containing anhydrous
calcium sulfate. Rinse Container No.1 with a
measured amount of TCE and analyze this
rinse with the contents of Container No.2.
Weigh the filter to a constant weight. For the
purpose of Section 4.3. the term "constant
-------
weight" meena 0 difference of no more thai!
10 percent or 2 mg (whichever is greater)
between two consecutive weighings made 24
hours apart. Report the "final weight" 10 the
nearest 0.1 mg as the average of these two
values.
4.3.2 Container No.2 (Probe to Filter
Holder). Before adding the rinse from
Container No.1 to Container No.2. note the
level of liquid in the container and confirm on
the analysis sheet whether or not leakage
occUlTed during transport. If noticeable
leakage occurred. either void the sample or
take steps. subject to the approval of the
Administrator. to correct the final results.
Measure the liquid in this container either
volumetrically to ::t1 ml or gravimetrically to
:to.5 g. Check to see if there is any
appreciable quantity of condensed water
present in the TCE rinse (look for a boundary
layer or phase separation). If the volume of
condensed water appesrs larger than 5 ml.
separate the oil-TCE fraction from the water
fraction using a separatory funnel. Measure
the volume of the water phase to the nearest
ml; adjust the stack gas moisture content. if
necessary [see Sections 6.4 and 6.5). Next.
extract the water phase with several 25-ml .
portions of TCE until. by visual observation.
the TCE dOt!s not remove any additionsl
organic material. Evaporate the remaining
water fraction to dryness at 93.C (2oo.F).
desiccale for 24 hours. and weiih to the
nesrest 0.1 mg.
Treat the total TCE fraction (Including TCE
from the filter container rinse and water
phase extractions) as follows; Transfer the
TCE and oil to a tared beaker and evaporate
at ambient temperature and pressure. The
evaporation of TCE from the solution may
take several days. Do not desiccate the
sample until the solution rllaches an apparent
constant volume or until the odor of TCE is
not detected. When it appears that the TCE
has evaporated. desiccste the sample and
weigh it at 24-hour intervals to obtain a
"constant weight" (as defined for Container
No.1 above). The "total weight" for
Container No.2 Is the sum of the evaporated
particulate weight of the TCE-oil and water
phase fractions. Report the results to the
nearest 0.1 mg.
4.3.3 Container No.3 (Silica Gel). This
step may be conducted in the field. Weigh the
spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to
thl: nearest 0.5 g using a balance.
4.3.4 "TCE Blank" Container. Mt!asure
TCE in this container either volumetrically or
gravirr.';td::ally. Transfer the TCE to a tared
25G-ml beaker and evaporate to dryness at
ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate
for 24 hours and weigh to a constant weight.
Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
Note.-In order to facilitate the
evaporation of TCE liquid samples. these
samples may be dried in a controlled
temperature oven at temperatures up to J8.C
(100.F) until the liquid is evaporated.
5. Calibrotian.
Calibrate the sampling train components
according to the indicated sections of Method
5: Probe Nozzle (5.1). Pitot Tube Assembly
(5.2). Metering System (5.3). Probe Heater
(5.4). Temperature Gauges (5.5). Leak Check
of Metering System (5.6). and Barometer (5.7).
6. Calculations.
".11 Namenclatu1VJ. Same taS In Method Ii.
Section 13.1. with the following additions:

c.=TCE blank residue concentration. mg/g.
Mt = Mass of residue of TCE after
II!vaporation. mg.
V pc= Volume of water collected in
precollector. mI.
Vt=Volume ofTCE blank. mI.
V... = Volume ofTCE used in wash. ml.
W.= Weight of residue in TCE wash. mI!.
Pt=Denslty ofTCE. mg/ml (see label on
bottle ).

13.2 Dry Gas Meter Temperature and
Orifice Pressure Drop. Using the data
obtained in this test. calculate the average
dry gas meter temperature and average
orifice pressure drop (see Figure 5-2 of
Method 5).
6.3 Dry G~J Volume. Using the data from
this test. calculate Vm1atdl by using Equation
5-1 of Method 5. If necessary. adjust the
volume for leakages.
13.4 Volume of Water Vapor.

V~stc1J=K1(Vk+V..) Eq.5A-1.
Where:
K,=0.00133 mS/mJ for metric units.
=0.04707 ft s/mI for English units.
8",= V~dV .,1014)+ V"Istd) Eq. 5A-2.

Note.-In 8aturated or water droplet-laden
8as streams. two calculation8 of the moistufll
content of the stack gas shaD be made. one
from the impinger and precollector analysis
(Equations 5A-1 and 5A-2) and a second
from the assumption of 8aturated conditions.
The lower of the two valuas of moisture
content shall be considered correct. The
procedure for determining the moisture
content based upon assumption of 8aturated
conditions is given in the note of Section 1.2
of Method 4. For the purpose of this method.
the average stack gas temperature from
Figure 2 may be used to make this
determination. provided thaI the accuracy of
the in-stack temperature sensor ia within
::t1'C (2.F).

6.6 TCE Blank Cancenlrotian.

Ca=M./V,P, Eq.5A-3.

6.7 TCE Wash Blank.

W,=(c.)[Vt..)(P,) Eq.5A"".

6.8 Total Particulate Weight. Determine
the total particulate catch from the sum of the
weights obtained from Containers 1. 2. and 3.
less the TCE blank.
6.9 Particulale Concentration.

c.=K.M./V",f.t4I Eq.5A-5.

Where:
K.=0.001 g/mg.
6.10 Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable
Results. Method 5. Section 6.11 and 6.12.
respectively.
7. Bibliagrophy
The bibliography for Reference Method 5A
is the same as for Method 5. Section 7.
III-Appendix A-38
-------
Method 5D-DeterminatioD of Particulate
Matter Em1ssiODS From Positive Pressure
Fabric FUters 251

1. Applicability and Principle.
1.1 Applicability. This method apJ:lies to
the detennination of particulate mailer
emissions fronl positive pressure fabric
filrprs. Emissions are detennined in temls £If
concentration (mg/m") and emission ratp
(kg/h).
The General Pro\'isions of 40 CFR Part 60.
paragraph 0 6O.8(e1 reQuirp that the owner or
operator of an affected facility shall provide
performance testi.lg facilities. Suc~h
performance tesling facilities include
sampling porls. safe samp!ing plrllfomls. safe
access to sampling sill's. and ulihlii!s for
testing. J! IS intendl'd thAt afft'r.fed facilities
also provide sampling locations thaI meet the
specification for adequate sfa.:.~ lenglh and
minimal now distu:haocf.'s as dPRcrihed in
Method 1 Provisions fo~ testing are often
overlockI'd faclOrs in dp.~igning fahric fillers
or are e1(trcmply costly. The pUl"p"6<' of this
procedure is to idlmtify IIjJpmpna!p.
altf'f!1ative IOl-ations and pr,)cpd"rf's for
samlYng the pmiss!ons from p09il1\'e
prf>ssure fdh. ia: fJl!prs. "fl-e requirenlt'nts that
the affected far.ility owner or operator
pro\'idp adequate Rccess to j)erfor:nanC:f>
testing facilities remRin in effl-ct.
1.2 Principle. Parth:ulale matlpr IS
wilhdrawn is\.lkinel1cally from the 90uce and
collt:cted on a glass fiber filter maintained at
a temperature at or above the exhaust gas
tempera'ure up to a nom;nall20'C I1~O -
:t 14 'c or 248 ~ 25 'F). The par:kula te mass.
which includes any material that condenses
at or above the filtration temperature. is
determmed gravimetri.:all\ offpr r".l1o\'al 01
uncombined water. .
2. Apparotus.
The equipment rE.'quire:nents lor the
sampling train. sample recovel1'. and aoc!!}sis
are the same as specified in Secltons 2.1. 2.2.
and ~.3. respecti\'Ply. of Method 5 or !'Iethod
17.
3. Reagenis.
The reagents u~ed in sampling. samplE.'
recovery. and analysis are the same as
spE.'cified in SeClions 3.1. 3.2. and 3.3.
respectively. or Method 5 or Method P.
4. Procedure.
4.1 D~termination 01 Medsu:er.li!nt Site.
The configurations of positi\'e press~re fabric
filter st:1Jctures frequently are not ami'nable
to emission testing accordin{! to the
requirements of Metl-od 1. Following Rre
several alternatives for determining
measurement sites for positive pressure
fabric filters.
4.1.1 Stacks Meeting Method 1 Criteria.
Use a measurement site as specifif,d in
Method 1. Sectio!"! 2.1.
4.1.2 Short Stacks "'ot Meeting Method 1
Criteria. Use stack extensioTls and the
procedur€s in Melhod 1. Alternatively. use
now strHightening vonE.'S of thE.' "egg-crate"
type (spe Pig'lre 50-1). Locate the
meRsurement site downstream of the
straightening vanes at a distance equal to or
greater than two hmes the average equivalent
diameter of the vane openings Rnd at least
one-half of the overa:1 stack diamPtE.'r
upstream of the stack outlet.
4.1.3 Roof Monitor or MonlHen!. (See
Fijlure 50-2.) For a positive pressure fabric
filtE.'r equipped with a peaked roof monitor.
ridge vent. or other type of monovent. use a
measurement site at the base of the
monovent. Examples of such locations are
ghown in Figure 50-2. The measurement site
must be upstream of any exhaust point (e.g..
louvered vent).
4.1.4 Compartment Housing. Sample
immediately downstream of the filter bags
directly above the tops of the bags as shown
in the examples in figure 50-2. Depending on
the housing design. use sampling ports in the
housing walls or locate the samplmg
equipment wilhin the compartment housing.
4.2 Determination of ~umber and
Location of Traverse Points. Locatp the
traverse points according to Method 1.
Section 2.3. Recause a pprformdncp. tegl
consiots of at least three test runs and
because of the vsrii'd configurations of
positive pressure fabric. fillers. thert' arl'
several schemes by which the numhcl nf
Iraverge points can be detprmi,,~d anrJ ::,p
three test runs can bE.' condur.ted
4.2.1 SIngle Stacb Meeting M..,hod 1
Criteria. Selec' the nmr.hl'~ of travprse points
accordir.g to Method 1 S.J:11p!t. all :rij\'e~S'''
points fur each test run
4.2.2 Other Single M"asurer:e,,' S,lph For
a roof monittJr OJ monove'lt. si"glp
compartment housing. or other stl!d not
meetmg Method 1 criteria. use at ieas! 24
traverse point. Fur examplE'. fllr a
rectangular measurement site. su,;h as Ii
monovent. use a blanced 5 x 5 Ira verse point
matrix. Sample all traverse points for pach
test run.
4.2.3 Multiple Measurement Sites
Sampling from two or more stads I)r
measurement sites may be combiJ;ed for a
test run. provided the foHowing guiJelin~s are
met:
a. A!I measurement sites up to 12 must bt>
sampled. For more than 12 measuremenl
sites. conduct sampling on at least 12 sites or
50 percent of the sites. whirhever is greRter.
The measurement sites sampled sl-ould be
evenly. or nearly evenly. distributed among
the available sites: if not. 01: sites Hre to be
sampled.
b. The same number of meosurempnt sif~s
must be sampled for each te~t run.
c. The minimum number of trav.ersp points
per test run is 24. An exception to thE' 24-
point minimum would be a te8t comb;ning the
sampling from two stacks meeting Method 1
criteria for acceptable stack length. and
~ethod 1 specifies fewer than 12 points per
sIte.
d. As long as the 24 traverse points per test
run criterion is met. the number of t".verse
points per measurement site ma~' be reduced
to eight.
Alternatively. conduct a test run fur each
measurement site individually using the
criteria in Sections 4.2.1 or 4.2.2 for number of
traverse points. Each test run sha:1 count
toward the total of three required for a
performance test. If more than thlee
measurement sites are aampled. thp number
of traverse points per measurement site may
be reduced to eight as long as at least 7Z
traverse points are sampled for all the tests.

The followmg examples demonstrate the
procedures for sampling multiple
measurement sites.
Example 1: A source with nine circular
III-Appendix A-39
measurement sites of equal areas may be
tested as follows: For each test run. traverse
three measurement sites using four points per
diameter (E'ight points per measurement site).
In this manner. test run numbel 1 will include
~..mnlinQ from sitn.s 1. 2. and 3: Man , '" ill
mclude samples from sites 4. 5. and 6: and
run 3 will include sites 7. 8. and 9. Each 'f'~1
area may consist of a separate test of ee. h
measurement site using eight points. t:~~ tlJl'
results from all nine tests in determminp fnp
emission averajle.
Example 2: A source with 30 rectan~ula'
measurement sites of equal areas mav be
tested as follows: For each of three '';SI r,lna
traverse five measurement sites ubing a 3 x 3
matrix of traverse points for each site In
order to distribute the sampling evenly 0\'1'1
Rllthe available measurement sites whlll'
sampling only 50 percpnt of the sill's. num!>...
the si!p.s con~eculively from 1 to 30 and
sample all the e-en numbered (or odd
numberedls!tt:s. Alternatively. conull' ( IS
separate test of each of 15 measuremen: SI1~"
usin" Sections 4.2.1 or 4.2.2 to determint' th..
number and location of traverse poi",s itA
appropriate.
E"ample 3: A ~our<:e with two
medsurement sites of e'1\.1al areas ma\ b..
tested as follows: For each test of Ihr~e le~I
runs: traver8e bott. measurement sill's usn~
S"l'IItITlS 4.2.3 in determining number o!
traverse points Alternatively. condu,-! I"."
full emission test runs of each measurf.:n.mi
sill' using the criteria in Sections 4.2.1 or 4.::.:!.
to determme the number of traverse points.
Other test schemes. such as random
determination of troverse points for 8 largl'
number of measurement sites. may he used
with prior approval from the Adminis!:ator
4.3 Velocity DE.'tennination. The veJoc.itJp~
of exhaust gIlS(~S frorr. postilive pressure
bagh0uses are oft~n too low to measure
accura'.~ly wilh the type S pitot specifi!!d in
Method 2 (i.e.. velocity head <1.3 mm tLO
(O.O!\ in HoO)). For these conditions. meaau""
the gdS now role at the fabric filter in;...1
foll,)wing the procedures in Method 2.
C..kulare the average gas velocity at the
measurement aite as follows:
(),
\" ':'" - -
A"
T..
T,
Where:

v~ A"erage gas velocity at the measure:n...nl
aite(s). m/s (ft/s).
Q. ' Inlet gas volume flow rate. m'/s (fl '/s).
A..=Measurement site(s) total cross-spction"j
area. m. (ft ').
To=Temperature of ga8 at measurement sitt!.
'K ('R)
T.=Temperature or gas at Inlet. OK ('R).
use the avef(~ge velocity calculated for t!'IP
measurement sile in determining and
maintaining iso\..inetic sampling rates. "'otP.:
All sources of gils leakage. into or out of till'
fabric filter housing between the inloJt
measurement site and the outlet
measurement site must be blocked and rr""ie
leak. tight.
Velocity determinations at measurement
-------
Sifl'S with gas velocities within the rang"
nreasul'aLle with the type S pitotli.e., \'elOCI:.\'
head> 1.3 mm H20 (0.05 in. H,O)) sh,,11 bl'
cOllductnd according to the procedllrps in
Method 2.
44 Snmplin!!. Follow the pro(:edllrr.~
Npecifird in $ection 4.1 of Method ~ or
Mt.,thoti 17 with the p.xr.eptions liS noted
abo\e.
4.5 S"rrple Recovt'ry. Follow the
procedurl's sppClfipd in Spclion 4.2 of Method
!\ or Method 17.
4.6 SlImple Analp:s. F(Jl!()~ thu
procedures spf'clflcd in Sectinn 4.3 of M(!th(.d
5 or Method 17.

5. Calibrotiull.
Follow the proc\'dmes liS sp,'cifi..d in
S..r.tion 5 of Method 5 of Melh,.d 17
0. Ccdculat/{'n...

Follow thl' procedur..s as sp"r:ifit.d in
SectIOn (I of Ml'thod 5 or M,'rhod 17 with tIll'
P1I.cqJ!ions a8 fo!iows:
6.1 Tot..l \'olumE' flow rate muy llf'
dE'termined usin!! intet velocity meilRul'E'menls
and 8111(,10. dimensi(.ns.
6.2 A\'cn~8e PlOrticulafE' Concentration.
For (f,ultiple measurement s,'"s. clOlcul"I" tll"
!lVerd!!p particlllhte conr.enlrHtion as f<>lIow8:
n
1m.
;.1
t,~-
n
1\'01.
I =. I
III-Appendix A-40
\,\'hpT!:;

m,::Thf m&~8l:(IHf~('t~d tor run I u~ ~I rn;..:\~.:"
V(JL= The sumpl,. \'(.Ium', c,.ill:U", f.., :..J' ,
of n. Nm' Iscf)
r.':..l\\"cra~f" conctnt~fttr(l1t ,d J'~I'" 'fI;f t:}.
811 n runs. m!:/N:n' r 1.:'; '( f)

7. Biblioj)."Cwf'.I'

The bibllol1fllphy is tt". ~"~;.I. ,,!> :,,; '.1, :i:..,~
5. Section 7.
(Secs. 1'/1. 114. Hnd 3{1J,,'" «, rhl' ('!"..:' .,\"
Act. 8S arnclldE'd (42 t:.~.(' 74 J 1 ~~- ~ ;II,d
7tI011..JlI
-------
H
H
H
~
'"0
I'd
CD
::s
P-
I-"
>(.
~
I
~
......
UIdI
(CILL lID)
a-
D
lOTI: POlmOIl ITRAlom.IRS SO THAT !:ILL SIOII Alii LOCATID AI'PIIC!II..' .IIOM TRAVIRII OlA'.
Figure 50-1, Example of flow nraightenlng ven..
54
VlIlTlLATDR THROAT
SAIIPL'IIG 11TH .
(ITR., PORn .011
IAllPLIIG A.OVI
'IL 1IR IAU
VINTILATOR THROAT
IAMP\.ING SITU
INTR" POm pall
IAMPt.lIIO AIOVI
m 1IR IAGI
III
Figura 5D.2. Acceptable. .mpling site 10Cltions for: (a) peaked roof; and Ibl ridge yent
typt fabric filters.
-------
Maalli:d f!j!&-~aGIiiI1!Ilfumot1i\~ CIDU IPor&f(!;~lloaQ
CkMoD3@!mo [,I'rnl1iJll ~ W@@IT I?i~:i'URQSO
nmo~lllJ)tilDlIJI MOlJ1l.Bfm«:il.lllM~ lliID\!ll!.l1cUy

1. Applicability and Principle.
1.1 ApplicabjJjty. ThiD method is
applicable for the determination of
porticulate emissiono from wool fiberglacc
IInoulaticn manufacturing sourceD.
1.2 Principle. Particulate matter is
withdrawn isokinetically from the source mnd
collected on 8 I:Ilass fiber filter maintained oi
o iemperature in ihe range of 120 °:f:14 °C
(248 °:f:25 OF) and in solutions of 0.1 NNIIIOIH.
The filtered particulate mass. which includlOo
OilY material that condenses at or above the
mtration temperature. is determined
(jI'Qvimetrically after removal of uncombined
wliiter. The con dell oed particulate material
collected in the impinger solutions is
determined ao total organic carbon (TOe]
using El nondioperoive infrared type of
enalyzer. The sum of the filtered particulatl1J
mlliss and the condensed particulate matter 10
reported as the total particulate mass.
2. Apparatus.
2.1 Sampling Train. The equipment list for
tlte sampling train 10 the same as described In
~ction 2.1 of Reference Method 5 except iii!)
follows:
2.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as described in
Section 2.1.2 of Reference Method 5 except
use only borosilicate or quartz glass l~nel'6:
2.1.2 Filter Halder. Same illS descrIbed In
~ction 2.1.5 of Reference Method 5 with the
addition of a leak-tight connection in the rear
lu1lf of the fil ter holder designed for insertion
of El thermocouple or other temperature gauge
for measuring the oample gas exist
temperature.
2.2 Sample Recovery. The equipment liot
for cample recovery Is the Dame as describ3d
ill Section 2.2 of Reference Method 5 excepi
three wash bottleo are needed instead of two
and only glass storage bottleD and funnels
may be used.
2.3 Analysis. The equipment list for
analysis is the same 8S Section 2.3 of .. .
Jfteference Method 5 with the additional
e
-------
N ..mpl.. coUected In 0.1 N NaOH often
contain. hlah meaaure of Inol'lanlc carbon
that Inhibits repeatable determinations of
TOC. sample pretreatment Is necessary.
Me..ure and record the liquid volume of each
..mple. If the sample contains solids or an
immllCible liquid. homogenize the sample
with . blender or ultrasonics until
..tllfactory repeatability Is obtained.
Traaafer a representative portion of 10 to 15
ml to a 3O-ml beaker. acidify with about z
dropa of concentrated HCJ to a pH of Z or
leal. Warm the acidified sample at 50 "C
(120 "F) In a water beth for 15 minutes. While
Ittrrtng the sample with a magnetic stirrer.
withdraw a ZO- to 5O-~1 sample from the
linker and Infect It Into the total carbon port
of 1M analyzer. Measure the peak height
Repeet the injections until three consecutive
pew are obtained_within :t:10 percent of the
.v..p.
R8peat the 8ftalyle8 for aU the I8mples and
the 0.1 N NaOH blank. Prepare standard
CWW88fOr total carbon and for iDorsanic
carbon of 10. 20, 30. 40, so. eo. 811. and 100 mal
I bJ dIIut1n8 with COr&ee water 10. 20, 30,
.. ad 50 ad of the two stock aolutiOllll to
UDD ml and 30, 40, and 50 ml of the two
Itock solutlona to 500 mI. IDJect samples of
theM solutions Into the analyzer and record
the peak hetpta u deac:ribed above. Tbe
adcIficatioa aad warmins atepa are not
~ ... prep&nltioD of the ltandard
CIUrW8. .
A8certain the IBIBpIe concentrations for
the I8mplel from the corrected peak hets)da
for the 88mp188 by reference to the
.pproprlate standard ~e. Calculate the
corrected peak hei8ht for the atand8rda aDd
the IBDIpIea by deduc:t1n8 the bIaak
Conectlon a. foUows: .
CoItected peak hei8ht=A - B Eq, ~1

Where: .
A-Peak helaht of standard or sample. nun or
other appropriate unit. .
B-Peak height of blank. mm or other
appropftate wdt.
U nmpla IIUIIt be clllutad lor auaJy.""
.pply an appropriate dIIU1Ion factor.
5. Calibtotion. Calibration of sampling and
aoalYlls equipment II the I8me as in Section
5 of Reference Method 5 with tbe addition of
the calibration of the TOC analyzer
described in Section 4.3 of this method.
6. Calculations. The calculations and
nomenclature for the calculations are the
88me as described in Section 6 of Reference
Method 5 with the addition of the following:
8.1 Mass of Condensed Particulate
Material Collected.
~=(o.OO1)(Ce)(V.)
Where:
0.001 = Liters per milliliter. .
m.=Mass of condensed particulate mllterial
collected in the Impingers measured as
TOC. mg.
~=Concentration ofTOC in the liquid
sample from TOC analysis in Section 4.3.
mg/l.
V.=Total volume of liquid sample. mL
8.2 Concentration 01 ClJndensed
Porticulate Material
C.=(0.001 [1I1c/Vmlow)) Eq. 5&-3
Where: .
o.oot = Grams per milltsram.
~=Concentratiori of condensed particulate
matter in stack gas. dry basis. corrected
to standard condition. g/dsr:m.
V -low) = Volume of g88 sample messured by
the dry ga8 meter. corrected to standant
conditions. dscm. from Section 8.3 of
Reference Method 5.
8.3 Total Particulate Concentration.
c.=C.+c. Eq.5&-4 .
Where:
C.=Total particulate concentration. dry
basis. corrected to standard conditlon8.
g/ dscm.
c.=Concentration of filtered particulate
matter In stack gas. dry basis. corrected
to 8tandard conditions. g/dscm. from
Equation 5-6 of reference Method 5-
7. Bibliography. The bibliography 18 the
..me as In Section 8 of Reference Method ~
with the addition of the foUowing:
7.1 American Public Health A88oci.tlon,
AmericaD Water Works Association. Water
Pollution Control Federation. Standard
Methoda for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater. Fifteenth Edition. Wa'8hlnaton.
D.C. 1lIIIO.
Eq:5E-2
III-A~pendix A-42a
-------
lJlUHOD I>-DItTERMIJ,Un~or. !(Jt).mloloo.
rMtt0r in the probe and isopropanol bub\JIN), cltertID- D.S.7 C~:?!w1om~. 'JI'0 m=ure abcllrbc.noo at
tive methods, ou\JjllCt to the opprovcl of tbe AdmlIUStro. cas iI3iIomG1.3rn.
~, U.S. Environnll'l1tiM l>roter1io~ Agency, Gro 1I~.,ro
!IC1!nired. .
"Unless otheroise IndiootW, ell I'OO(!enta muet confonn
2. .4pparaluD W the oP3CliJc~tlons establlsbed by tbe Commlttoo on
3.! 1!.'::\m1)1II13. 'ii'b3 DmP1ln3 tro1n I:J oI!Ot7ll In Jl~ Anclytlcal Ree3enta of tbe American ChemiciM Soclety.
c;..!, GIld cilmytlownt J!DI"tD oro ~ b3!ow. 'J!'h2 Wbere ouch o~lacatloDD c.ro not avc.l1cble, U&3 tbe b3st
~Wr ~ the option o! wb9t1tutlD(! OOIDpllIlt!. eqnlp- cvnllcb!o (j1'Cde.
:..Y'..nt de:;crib3d In Metbod 8 In y;lW<:e 01 tbe mll16et 1m- 11.1 Qcmp\InJ.
1t:!J1U' eqnlpment of Method 6. 1':!O'-'1everl tbe Methcd (I £ 1Uj Wo!a"l. ~DnU8GI~ ~13mJ:OO ~~
G?D!ii muet b2 madlfted to Inclnde a hz::I\OO filter betwG2n' . . -". 0
~b probe and I::upro~olimp1nger, end tbe oP3"Qtlon a:aJInfOITJ'! Uo AiSTM! O~"""'ni!:Q~~iJi !DJllll~7'7,
c1 ~ho =pllD(! troin end =ple cnclyuls mUllt bo ct 'TI'wB ,,"oolia a ottsfcctory ter. ~
'D.l.2 IDubbler and Implngera. One mldaet bnbbler, Peroxides may be removed from isoprope.nol by reclls-
\7Ith m3d1um-oo:>J'!re (l1e.ss frlt and borcoillcata or qlIDTtz WilD(! or by !:JWseae through Q column of ootlve!k'd
~ "001 ~!Ied In top (eu Vlgure 11-1) to prevent alumina; however, ~ent crrnde Isopropanol tilth
c.J1furlc cdd mlot =yover, and tbreo 3O-ml midaet aIlitcbly low peroxide level9 may be obtained from COlli-
t!::;oJl)tngers. The bubbler and mid(let Imptngera mwrts b3 mereic1 Ctluroeo. Rejection of oontaminated lots may,
:I1Innectcd In ~rlG9 witb 1B!)h:-free uh>B connectors. 111. tbere!ore b2 a more efilclent procedure.
wn~ = mey be tJSj!d, 11 OOtOOS!Y'Y, to prevent lea\Ic:le. D.l.3 H)dro:!e.n Peroxide, 3 Percent. Dilute 80 peroont
,(lUbe op-Uon oltbe tester, Q mldaet Imptnger may 00 hydro:!en p3I'Oxide 1:9 (1'/1') t71th delonlz.d. distilled
~ Inplaoo oftbe mld(let bubbler. wat0r (CO ml Is nooded per sample). Propare fresh dally.
Other oollectlon absorbers and flow rates may be US3d, D.1.~ Potnsslum Iodide Solution, 10 Percent. Dissolve
t.n Ql'0 sublect to tbe approval of tbe Admlnlstretor. 10.0 [!1'CIJI19 Iel In deionized, distilled water and dllute to
~, ooll~tlon efilclency must be sboQII to be at le::>at lCt1 ml. Prepare when needed.
CJ p31'03nt lor eacb test nm e.nd must 00 documented In D.2 Semple Reeovery.
c,ereport. Utheefficlency Is found to 00 ccceptable after D.2.1 Water. Deionized, distilled, as In 3.1.1.
a =183 o! thrC3 tests, furtber documentation Is not 11.2.2 Isopropanol, CO Percent. Mix 80 ml 01 isopropcnol
K1:IulrGti. To conduct tbe efficiency test, an GJItra ab- ctth 20 ml of deionized, distilled water.
=00r must 00 cdded nnd analyzed C3parate\y. Tbls 11.3 Analysis.
CJ'1;ro QOCIIrb3r mwrt not contc1n more th!In 1 p"rcent 01 II.D.l Water. Deionized, distilled, as In 3.1.1.
(f;xJ tote! 80.. S.D.a Ii:!Ipropanol, 100 P"I'cont.
BoU Ole.ss Wool. Boroslllcnta or quartz. D.3.3 Thorln Indicator. 1-(CKY'SOnopbenylczo)-2.
D.l.~ 8topcoch: OrG8SB. AcetonlrlnCtlluble, hGCIt- ncpbthoJ-3,6-dJsullonic ccld. disodium sclt, or equJva.
QQble oIlioone (!I'Gt!IG may be w:W11f nGCODBarY. brito Dissolve 0.20 U In 100 ml 01 deionized, distilled
8.U Temporoture Oauge. D aI thermometer, ~ waWr.
~ulvcJent, to m~ ~m~turo 01 (J!!O leavtna im 1I.3.~ Wcrlum Perchlorote Solut.lon, 0.0100 N. Dis.
D\n{!or "'if to wifube Tu~ ~!IGd ct~b '" to .II-moob CIIlw 1.e5 (I o! rortum p3rcblornte trihydrota [Ba(CIO.".
8.1.6 rv\n[! . uJ r>\ t to ary th cr !lJ!I!O) In 2UO ml distilled water and dilute to 1 Utt'r with
~l1lcctln/! t>'P3 011100 [jel, or ~ v on, e I>B isopron<'mol. Alternatively, 1.22 g of [BaClo'2H,OI mey
omple nne! to protect tbe me~~QDc1t P17umfjo II. 1f(.~e Vd1I) f tn be ustd"inll.t3Bd 01 the P"I'cbWrote. Stcndcrdll!e QS In
nol bas bc3n ~ previously, ~, a C o>vv or B3etl 65 ST
II hours. Ne" slllco (lei mtly b3 used es received. Altema- on . .
(;\. vely, o~er typoo of desiccants (?:l,uJvalent or be:erh 335 Sulfuric Acid Stcndcrd, O.OICtl N, Purcheoo oz
DIQY be w:OO, wbJect to approviMolt e Admlntstra r. stcn' d'ardl.e to 60.0002 N n_lust 0.0100 N NaOH ",hlch
a.l.7 Vclve. N"e3d1e viMUG, tJI r<;3u1t\te =ple (les fIIIw . "'~
rote. 87 has prevlou.ly been ste.ndardlzed against. pottlBslum
a 1.11 Pump L31!.!t-frea dlapbrl>(flIl pump, or GQnlv- I!Cld phthalate (primary ster>dard (lrBde).
cloiIt to {luJI ~ througb tbe tr£\In. lnatcill a small ourse 3.3.6 QYQlity ASI}U!'mi'0:2 I\tldit Samp1eli\.
~r.!I' ""t;""n the pumP <>Dd rata meter to eliminate ...I
the "',\sation efiel'tofthe dlapbmgm pump on the rolli- Slilfale sample!! in glass ri",s prepared iJDy
mcter. el EPA'6 Emlifoonmental Mcniloring S)'S~D
219 Rate Meter Rotllmeter, or eqUivalent, capable laboratory. Quality Assurance Divi~,
4I! m~ng Ilow ro"e to within 2 percent of tbe selected
110.... rote of about 1000 oolmln. Source BraIM:h, Mail Drop 77A. Research
III-Appendix A-42b
Triangle !Perlt. North Corolili'llil Z771\1l. !!ach MI
will consisl 01 iwo vi aID 'ltavinB so'luiloiW oV
unknown coocenlr&ii0nm. Only whei'l ma\!tin,g
oompliai'lce delerminaiiml8, o'Msin tm audit'
sample ael from Ute Qua1!ty AI/SUI'IHWe
Management office at each ra:PA rqioa&a
Office or the responsible ~'i'otcemefi\t
agency. (Nell;): The 4eater lObouJd ootil'y the
quality aS8I.1rSnCe office or the reiponiJib1e
enforcemenl &,genc)' at least 30 days.pricf tIP
the tesl date 10 allow 8Ufficienl lime ~or
!l1cmple delivery.) 229

~. Proetdurt.
U Samplll\l.
<:1.1.1 PrePMItlon of collection troIn. Meaaure 1581 trJ
GO pe.rcent isopropanol lnto tile mlclget bubbler ~ U6
mI of 3 percent bydrotlen peroxide Into eacli 01 ebe !1m
two midget fmplngGrn. Leave tho final mlellot ImDlIII8U
dry. Assemble tbo tBIn as shown In Jllguro 11-1. A4,1US1t
p70be beater to a temperature sufllelent to pi'Ovent W3ter
condensation. P~ crushed fco ane! water ~un~ U!()
Imp~.
U.!I ~..,hG('k procedure. A 1m chet'k!ll"lOl' ~o tbcJ
mmpllng run Is optional: homver, 8 leak cllede @tWo the
B81Dplln(l run Is mandatory. The \w..,beel! r;J!'OCodure It!
CD fI1!lows:
Timlparnrlly attach B 1'!Uit81:1}e (e.g., ~
~/nWn) ro~r2wr 00 ~r2 I!>UUet @f ~e r&rtJ
GOO m~1i' GmCiI 1')11iWe 0. w.cuum glM!(Je G~ !lr.e Ii'Otamli!ter. .fI,. ~e ~ ra.ot in (tm~
oK 3 ~eDt of tlM BVernge MmPL!ng ~ ffi
oo:oopt&ble.

~Joro: CQ,Ni'u!1y !i"GU~ IIhr2 ~rclJc ~
[JJ!WS ~fore t\Rrn1ng off the ~.

ll~ !g I3UMested (not mane2atory) t.1, bo UtdJ, !lUO~ W
tbe tlpproval of tbo Aamtntstmtor, "U.B. O:nvlronm(;.;l~
Protection A(lency. Tbe procedure usacI! In MotltcNil II 10
not m.Illllble for diaphragm pum)l9.
4.1.3 Sample collection. Record the Inltinl fiT;; ~
meter reading and barometric pressuro. To begin com-
piInU, position the tip of the prooo £It tbe sompllna ~1nt,
connect the probe to the bubbler, and Btcrt the pump.
Aci.lwrt the sample flow to a constcnt row 4t! IA~
proximately 1.0 IIter!mln 
entire sampl!na run. Taite recdlnB9 (dry fIOO mete:?,
, temperatures at dry (IQS meter end at Implnget outbt
and rote meter) at lomt every 5 minutes. Add mc:rn 100
durlll8 the ron to keep the temperature of tbo (j!}5e:J
I~vln(l tbe last Implnger Bt 'lJ:1' C (611" F) or IQS!J. At t~
conclusion 01 ~h run, turn oil th3 pump, removo prob:J
from the Rtcck, (IUd rooord the f\n&l readlngu. Conduct G
look check c.s In Section ~.1.2. (This lrok cb~!t 10 m,;m~
tory.) If a Ien!! Is lound, void the taIJt run. or UOOB>-.
IIr.. e>ccep\.able 10 the AQmInIB'rotor 10 &<\jL!!lt tho """,p~
YOlume for the leoll Ol!c. Drafn the \.... \)o>th, anel purae
the remal~ p&t of the tmln by crrn'V:~cloon Bmblent
~tet.hBOfgb t e system tor 15 mlnute8 at t e sampllna.

Clean ambient Q\r can be provided by ~ cJr
througb Q cbarcocl flltar or througb QD Odm mfdgot
Implnger with 15 ml of S percent H.o.. Tbe tester IIIfIY
opt to simply use ambient $, wItbout purification.
~.2 Sample Recovery. Disconnect theimpll\lers after
p11Jl!lng. Discard the contents oUbe midget bubbler. Pour
tbe contents 01 the midget Implngers Into Bleak-free
polyetbylene bottle for shipment. Rinse the three ~~t
implngers and tbe connectlng tubes wItl1 delonl.....,
dlstl11ed water, and ndd the wasblnJS to tbe same sto.....,
oontalner. Mark tbe flnld level. Seal and Idant!fy the
saroDle container.
)
-------
~.u 8=plo AnclyGID. Noto lovol ofUquid In contclnor,
e.nd confirm 1:7hother Gny =ple 1:7CD lo:it durlIl(! ship-
mont; noto thb on MGlytlcal dew oheet. If G not:croble
=ount 01 loott"(lo hCD occurred, elthor void tbo =ple
or U!::) mothodn, oublect to tbo G!>provGI 01 tho AdmInJ..
trotor, to correct tho 11001 resultD.
Trorwlcr tho contonw 01 tbo otoTC3o contcln2? to 0
100000ml volumetric fleslr e.nd dilute to OKCCtI:v 100 ml
mtb deionized, distilled woter. Pipette G 2O-ml oliquot 01
thin colutlon Into G 250-ml Erlenmeyer IIBSIr, ood CO ml
01100 porcent loopropanol and t1:70 to lour dropJ 01 tborln
Indicator, ond tltrato to G plnlr ondpolnt uslncr 0.0100 N
bc.rlum perchlorote. Repoot and avercgo tbo titrotior
volumC3. Run G blank mth er,cb ~rles 01 samples. Repli
cate tltrotions must "(Ir02 mtb1n 1 poroont or 0.2 ml
whlcbever Is llIrrIor.

(No?I!.-Protect the 0.0100 N bc.rlum P2fChlorolA
solution Irom evaporotlon Gt till times.)

03.'1 Audit Sample Ano1yois. Concurrently

IInhlY1.e the two audil samples and 0 get 01

ct\'iI (!ualitf centro!

sumpleo be onol),zecl priw to \he complifloce

and audil sample analysio to optimi&e the

8~'81{'m accuracy and precision. One source of

Ihr'se sampleo ia the Source Branch lio~ecl in

Sf'clion 3.3.6.) The ~ame IJnalysts. analytical

n:i1gpnts. ond analyticol system sha11 00 used

hoth fur compliance olH'i\plea end the IZPA

"lIdit silmples: ;[ this condilion i.!J met.

auditin/! or IDubsequent compliance an.olv1J00

for the same enforcement GfJency within 1m

d,,~ s is nol required. An audil somple set alQ~

not iJe used to validate different aet. 01

complilmce sampleo under the juriodiclion of

dirrerl'nt enforcement IIgenc:ies. IUIleos prior

arrangements are made with both

l'nforcement agencies.

Calculate the concentrations in msfdscm

usin~ the specified sample volume in the

audit instructions. {Note: Indication of

acceptllt>le re&uks mey be obtained

Immedilltely by reportins the lIudit reaults in

mg/dscm and compliaRce resvlta in totalmg

so./lJample by telephone to the responsible

enforcement agencY.llnclude tbe results of

both audit samplea. their identification

numbers. and tbe analyst's name with thE!

results of tile compliance detenninatlcm

aamples in appropriate reports to the EPA

regional office or the appropriate

enforcement alfeJ\q'.lDclude thie information

with Gubseql1ent compHance analysea for the

same enforcement af.lency durins the »day

period.

The concentrations of the audit aamp!eo

obtained by the analyst shall agree within 5

percent of the actual concentrations. If the 5.

percent specificat;on iI not met. reanalyze

the Cl'Jmpliance samples and Qudit samples.

and include initial.nd reanalyaNi vaWeti In

the tell report (see Nate in first parasraph of

thill uectionJ.

Failure to meel the 5-perceRI spedficetiun

ma)' require retestll until the liIudit problema

are resolved. However. if the audilreaults dlS3, U£3 the aver-
~e as the callbrotion lector lor sub""quent test run..
'>.1.2 Post-Test Callbrntlou Checlr. Alter e:lCh lIeld
test sori.., conduct CI cGllbrotion check CD In Section 5.1.\
above, except ror the lollowlna variations: (0) tbo lo::'h
cb""k i9 not to be conducted, (b) tb=, or more revolu.
tions or tbe dry gas meter may be used, and (c) ont:v t<70
independent runs need be mOOo. II the ccllbrotion I~tcr
does not deviBte by more tbGn 5 percent Irom tbe Inltlcl
callbrotion lector (determined In Section 5.1.1), tbon th2
dry ges meter volumes obtnlned durll1(! the te9t sut"'"
are acceptablo. II the callbrotion factor deviates by moro
than 5 percent, recalibrote the meterlncr systam CIS In
'ec(ion 5.1.1, and for tbe ooIculationD, usa tbe ccllbrotlon
BC tOr (Inlti,,1 or recal1bratlQll) that :v\eldD tho 10t701' (!Q9
,olume for ooch test run.198

5.2 TbennometenJ. Calibrote C(!cl~ m=wy-In-
glass thennomoters.
5.3 Rotameter. The rorometer need not ~ ccJlbrotod
but should be cleaned Bnd malntalnod I\Ccording to the
manufacturer's Instruction.
5.4 Barometer. Calibrote against " mercur:v bGl'Om-
eter.
5.5 Be.r\um Perchlorate Solution. Standm'dl"" tbe
barium peroblorote solution aga\Mt 2.'i ml 01 sta.ndani
sulIurIc acid to whlcb 100 ml 01100 percent isopropanol
has been added.

Run duplicate analYlieli. Calculate the

normality using the averl\8e of 8 pair of

duplicllte analyses where the titrations agree

within 1 percent or 0.2 ml. whiche\'er is

lalRer. 2 '19
6. CuleulatIOM
Carty out calculations, retaining at least ono estra
decimal llgure beyond tbat 01 the scqulred data. Round
off ligures after IInai calculation.
6.1 Nomenclature.
Cm =Concentratlon 01 sulfur dlodde, dry beBIs
. corrected to standard conditions, mg/dscm
. (lb/(bcO.
1V=Normaiity 01 barltim perchlorate titrant,
mUUequlvaients/ml.
Pb.,=Barometric pressure at tbe..1t orifice 01 tbo
dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pol' = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
(29.92 In. Hg).
T _=A verage dry gas meler absolute temperotnro,
OK (OR).
T..., = Stendard absolute temperature, 293" K
(5280 R).
\'. = Volume 01 sample Bliquot titrated, ml.
V. = Dry 1188 volume as measured by tbo dr:v goo
meler. dcm (dcO.
V . (...) = Dry gas volume measured by tho dr:v san
meter, corrected to standard condlUons,
dscm (dscI).
V ~Io = Total volume 01 5OIntion In which the suilur
dloIlde sample Is contained. 100 ml.
V,=Volume 01 barium perohlorate titrant used
lor tbe sample, ml (average 01 replicato
titratlons).
V.. = Volume 01 barlnm peroblorate titrant usOO
lor the blanlr, ml.
y= Dry gas meter calibration !actor.
32.03= Equivalent weight 01 sulIur dloIlde.
6.2 Dry sample gas volume, corrected to standard
conditions.
V. -v. Y(Totd) (P.,.r)-K yV.P.,.,
...(.Id)-... T. P.OIi - t T.
..hsre:
Equatton 6-\
III-Ap!?endixA.-43
-------
f( I ~O:m5f! °K/mm HU for metric unlw.
~17.M ° a/In. HU Cor Ena1wh unlf.!I,.
6.3 Sulfur dl01!lde oonoontrotJoD.

(V,- V,D) N(~V~)

CGOg=KD v:
",(old)
Equation 6-2
",hero:
U',~~2.m m~!ml'Q. for metric unltD.
- 03\ Xlf1-O lh/meq fnr \7,nallsh unltD.
Q.
-------
Method I3A-JI)etennination o~ Sulfur
:)io,ude. Moisture. and Carbon JI)io,ude
IEmioolona !From lFossillFuel Combustion
SourC!ltl

1. Applicability and Principle

1.1 Applicability. This method applies to
the determination of sulfur dioxide (SO,)
emissions from fossil fuel combustion sources
in terms of concentrution (mg/m') und In
terms of emission role (ng//) und 10 the
determination of carbon dioxide (CO,)
concentration (percent). Moisture. if desired.
muy ulso be determined by this method.
The minimum detectable limit. the upper
limit. and the Interferences of the method for
the measurement of SO. are the same as for
Method O. For u 20-liter sample. the method
hils u prec:ision of 0.5 percent CO. for
concentrutions between 2.5 und 25 percent
CO. and 1.0 percent moisture for moisture
concenlrutions greater thun 5 percent.
1.2 Principle. The principle of sample
collection is the sume as for Method 6 except
Ihat moisture and CO, are collected in
addition to SO, in the some sampling train. .
Moisture and CO. fractions are determined
gravimetrically.

2. Appuratus

2.1 Sampling. The sampling train Is shown
in Figure 6A-1; the equipment required is the
bolme liS for Method 6. Section 2.1. except as
specified below:
21.1 SO, Absorbers. '1'1'11" :\lI.n" midget
il11pil11owrs wilh II t 0101 "'s"'ict,,d lip nndlw"
:1f)'1111 midg"1 II1,bblNS wilh 1111 IInr"strll:l"d
lip. Ollll!r typ"s "f itnpil1lo(,.rs al1d Il1Ibbl"rs.
"l1o:h as :l.la" W,,,I for SO, cf,lI"o:ti"n and
rigi.1 cylimlprs fl1r moislll": absorl,,'rs
o:ontaininR Drier;":. mllY he used wilh prnp"r
IIII"olion III ff'lIlo(I:nl voh,m"s IIndll'\'I:ls.
."bj..", 10 Ihl' Adn,;n;strnl....'. IIppruvII1.221
2.1.2 CO, "b,orl..:,. " s""I"bl" ,ilo(id
o:ylinder III' hottl,: wilh 1111 inside dillnU:It:r
1,,:11'111'1'11 :\0 alld !IO 0101 IIndli Il'nlllh Ilf'lwPl'n
12!i IInd :!,,/I 10m IInd wilh "I'prnprill":
I:"'IIII'I:lions al holh ends.221

Nllte.-For appliclilions dllwnstrt:llm of w,:1
Rcrllhlll~rs, a 11I'all'd 1I1I1.of,slnr:k filt,:r [I'itlwr
hornsilir:all' ~llIss 1'110111 or ~Iass fillI:r mill) is
n"cI:ssllry. The fill"r may III: II s"p"rall'
h,,"led IInil III may he wIthin Ih,: h"ah,d
pOllion of Ih" prni.l'. If .h" fill"r iR wilhin Ih.:
Ramplin~ pro he. ',Ir. filh!r shollid nol hI'
wilhin 1!i ':01 of Ihe prnlll: inlo:1 or IIny
11l1h,:a"'cI ,,,elion of Ilw prohl!, slleh AR Ihl:
connr:r.lion 10 the first SO. IIhsorl,,:r. The
prolll: and fill..r shollid III, h,:ah:clto at I,,"si
20' C 111,0\'1: 1111' HOllrce It'mpNlllllrH, hul not
Rrl'IIII'" thlln 121)" C. Th,: fill"r tl'mpl:ralum
Ii I'. Iho: sllmpll: Ras lemp"p,luff') shollid hI:
mllnilnr"d 10 nssurt: 1111: cI"sirt:d tt:mpI:ruturo'
is m1lintll;no:cI. A he1lll:d TI:non <:onno:r.lor
mllY hI' 1I,,:dlo connl:<:1 1111: fillrr hold"r or
prnhl: 10 Ih,. fi,sl impinR"'.
Notlt.-M..nlinn of II hrllnd oan", d,":s 11,.1
cOllslitll'" "ndllrsl:m".nl hy Ihl: En\'ironment.1i
Pmt"'.lion "~.:nl:.v. 2:l1
2.2 Sample Recovery IInd Analysl~. The
equipment needed for sample recovery and
una lysis is the same as required for Melhoa
6. In addition. a balance to measure within
0.05 g Is needed for analysis.

3. Reugents

Unless otherwise Indicated. all reugents
l1Iusl conform to the specificlltions
established by the committee on analytical "'"I:h room tempemture. clean the outsides of
reagents of the American Chemical Society. I,JOse dirt anJ moisture. and weigh them
Where such specifications ure not available. silllult..nenusly in Ihe same manner us in
use the best available grade. Section 4.1.1. Rewrd this final mass.221
3.1 Slimpling. The reagents required for 4.2.2 Peroxide Solution. Discud thlt
sumpling lire the same as specified In Method contents of the isopropanol bubbleR and pour
6. In addition. the following rellgents are the contents of the midget impingers into 8
required: lellk.free polyethylene bottle for shiPlling.
:1.1.1 Dri....ilt:. Anhydro"s n"r:ium',ulf"'I: Rinse the two midget Impingers end .
(CaSO., rI"sil:cllnt. R mesh. inclil:lltinlltyp', is connecting tubes with deionized distiUed
rl'f:()mn",nd.:d.IDu not use siliclI gl.1 or water. and edd the wael1ings.to the same
similar rlI:slr.:cant in the IIpplil:utinn.J221 otorage container.
3.1.2 CO, AbsorhinR Matl',i,,1. Ascari": II. 4.2.3 CO. Ahsoruer. Allow the Co..
Sodium hydrn.ide c:ual"cI ~ilif:", 1\ 10 20 ml:sh221 "usurb!:r 10 wa,m to room tempf:rature (about
3.2 Sumpla Recovery and Anlllysis. The Jl) minalf:s). clean the.outside of loose dirt
reagents needed for sample recovery IInd ~nd mOisture. and welg.h 10 Ih~ nearest 0.1 II
anulysis lire the same as for Method 6. 111 the same ~'anner liS mSectlon 4.1.1. .
S..ti ns 3 2 d 3 3 e Pecl' .1 I{,!cord Ihls fll1.,1 mass. U,st:ard u~ed Aseante
ec 0 . un .. r s Ive y. IllIIaterial. 221

oJ. I'rocuclu1'll 4.3 Sample Analysis. The sample ..uulynie
4.1 Sampling. procedure for So. is the Gamo 8S. GpWfied. i:n
Method16. Section 4.3.
4.1.1 '>n:parlllion of Collecti"n 1'111111.
Mf,asure 1!i ml of III) percent isopropanol intll 5. Calibration
the firsl midget bubbler And 1!i 011 of :I The celibrations and checks are the same
I""cenl hyelrug"n p,'rnxide intn "lIch of the 08 required in Method 6. 5ectioa 5.
first two midR,!t impinlo(er. as elescribed in
Mi'lhorJ 6. Insert thl: ~Iass wool into the tnp of 8. Calculations
th" isopropanol buhhl"r liS shown in Fil/ur,' CUIT)I out cwculationa. reWining IIllaast
6A-1. Inlo Ih" fourth ,'ess,,1 in thp. !rllin. the one extre decimal 68J1re beyond that oflbe
second'midgp! hubh!"r. pillce IIhllut 25 R of acquired data. Round offflgures after finHl
Dri.!rit". Clcan Ihl' oulsides of Ihe huhulprs calculations. The calculanolUl. nomenclature.
AnrJ impinR"rs. IInd """ilo(h al ronm and pEoca.dlUles are the IISIDIt as specified in
temperlllt're (..,,20' Clio the nearest 0.1 ~. Method 6 with the. additiGD ofdut f&J1lAwing:
Weillh the fOIlT vesSl:ls simultaneously. IInri 6.1 Nomendature.
record this initial muss. C. = COllcentration of moislure. vere:.:nl.
With one end of the CO, IIhsnrhl:r seAled. C".,"~Concenlrlltion of CO" dry basis.
plar.e "lass w(lo! in th" .."'ind.... to II rt..pth of percenl.
"bllull cm. Place abuul15lJ g of CO, Mw.= Initial mass of impingers, bllbbler~, and
..hsorbing malerial in Ihe cylinder on tup of muislurc ausurher. g.
Ih.. glash ",""1. and fill the ren'Llining space in II1w,= Final maSH of impingl!rs. blll,bll:rs, find
Ih.. l.ylil1d..r Wllh gl.I>" wool. Ass',miJle Ihe moisture absorher. g.
I'~ hnd"r LIb ,1111\\ n in Figure IIA-2. Wilh Ih.. m," = Iniliulmass uf CO, ahsurlu:r. g.
I ylind.:r III a huri:wnl..1 posiliun. rotate it In.. . Finaln1aHs IIf CO, uhsorber. g.
ar'HII,d Ihe horizonlal iI)(is. The CO. V. ,,,,...,', E'III'\'III':III vulilme ul CO, (;,,11':1.1,,<1
, "horuing male,ial should remnin in posilion at stanlloJrd cundilHJJlS. dSIll'.
during Ihe rotation. anll nu op"n spdces or Vw(.,.)=Equivalent volume of moisture
. hannels shonlJ ue formed. If necessary. collected al standard condillons. SI1l".
pack mon: Hld5s wool into the cylinuer to !i 4tJ7 X 10-'= E'Ioivulent volume of gaseous
lH"ke the CO, ahsorbing materi,.1 staule. CO, ut slandard cllndiliuns p.!r gr.lm. sn,.'/
CI"all the o'utsiJe of the cylinder of loose dirt II.
..nd moiHlure and weigh at room tel11per"ture 1.330" 11)" "= Equivalent \'olume of walo:r
, ) Ihe nean'sl n.1 g. Record this initi,,1 mass. \'apur ill standard conditions per gri1m.
Assemble Ihe tram as shown in Fi~ure 6:\- sm"/g.221
I. Adjust till: prol)!, h,:aler to II \i,mpenttum 6.3 ~ VolUIDIt~.ied. ~Uld
sllffiden; 10 peen'nt condensiltiun (see NI.h: to StaDdaalCanditions.
III pal "gr,'ph 2.1.1J. Place crushed Ice al:ld Vw(.I41= 1.336 x 10-.(Jn.,- m.J
water arolinJ the imvingers and uuuulers.
Muunt Ihe CO, absurber outside the water
IH.th in a ""llical flow pvsilion with the
""mvle I!as in lei at the Imllom. Flu)(ible
lilioing. I:.).! Tygun. may ue used to connect
li,e last Si), ,"L..sorhing bouul"r 10 the Uri!:ri'e
ausor!!!!r ,,":1 to connect the Uno:rite ausorh!!r
Iv the CU. "llsmlwr. A second, smaller CO,
ul,sorlwr cOIII,.ining Asr:arile II milY ue udded
in li,w t!"wIIHlream IIf the primary CO,
..hsorl"., .IS a I,...,akthrouf:h indie.ltor.
'\SI.",.,I" 111111'''" \\obile when cn, is
..losor\..,,1221
4.1.2 Lellk-Check Procedure and Sample
Collection. The leak-check procedure and
sample collection procedure aEe the same as
specified in Method 6. SectloIUI 4.1.2 IInd
4.1.3. respectively.
4.2. Sample Recoverv.
-1.2.1 Mllisture Measun:nwnl. Dbcllnnec.l
illI: isol'r
-------
C - .
.-
VQ10wl
VOIII>.loIl" V\\I"..It'" VI 'I.~I'"''
221
7. Emissiull Rate PI'Uc:eJure.
If the only emission measuremlml dc:;in;u
is in terms of emissiun rate uf SOl lng/II. an
abhreviated procedure may be used. The
diffenmces between the above procedurc aBd
the ilhhft!viated procedure are dcscriued
hduw.221
7.1 Sample Treln. The sampla train Is
the IIsme aD shown Inl?'lgure 6A-1 and as
described in Saction 4. except that the dry
gas meter is not needed.
7:! I'rcpar"tion of the 'Collection Train.
I'ullow the same procedure as In S.!r:lion
.1.1.1, cJ\cepl do not weigh (he isoprol'.JIlo)
huhblur. the SO> uh~orbinl! impinw!rs or IIII!
n"';SII1I'(' aL.IJrlwr. 221
7.3 Sampling. Operate the train ao'
described in. Section 4.1<.3, exc6}J~ thaQ dry sail
melD«' readings. baromotD: prGsOW'e. and dry
gus muter temperaturG8.need nQd be recorda€4.

7.4 5,II11\.1le Recovery. Follow the
pro(.l,dum in S.,dion 4.2. except do not weigh
Ih" isupropanol hubbler, the SOl ab.Hlrhing
iOlplllgers. 01' Ihe moisture ubsorber.221
7.5 Sample Analyeis. Ana!yeio of the
peronide rwlu&i.on. I~ the Gtlme mc described i:m
Section 4.3.
7.6 CalGulations.
7.6.1 So. Mass Collected.
msu2=32.03 (V.- VuJN(~:)
(Eq. ElA-7)
Where:
m- = Mass of So. collected. mg.
7.6.2 Sulfur Vioxide Einission Rate.
Es01=F.(1.829Xl0"}
mS02
(m,..- mal)
(Eq. 6A.8)
Where:
eoo.=Emission rate of SOa. InstJ)'
F.=Carbon F Factor for the fuel burned. mJ/J.
from Method 19.
8. Bibliography
IU Same as for Method' 6. citations 1
throuJlh 8. with the addition of the following:
8.2 Slimley. Jon and P.R. Westlin. An
Alternate Method for Stack GaD Moisture
Determination. Spurce Evaluation Society
Newsletter. Vol. 3. No.4. November 1978.
8.3 Whittle. Rir;ha~d N. and P.R. Westlin.
Air Pollution Tesl Reporl: De\lelopmenland
Evaluatien of an lnU!rmiltenL lnt.egrltWi SOaI
Co. Emission Sampling PooCedlWl.
EnvirOWDental Protection }\genc)'. Emission
Standatd and ElI8inell~in& Div.iaioll. Elllission
MOWluwmeul Brlloch. RlI8earcin TrilluHle
Park. North Carolina. DoclIIIlber 1979. 14
pages.
,..,,~u.
Jl
'....
f igure6A-1. Sampling train. 221
e:::c118.'1W'at)
figure 6A.2. C02 absorber. 221
III-Appendix A-46
-------
M\Gili~ O[!)-~~(IJ;~~ ~cib
D~ ~~:m lDwm!t::J ]JJ;:N:;r D..Vc:Io'O- IM::.i!J()~=
Ilros !/a[J[JM Wid ~~~I:\$=
1. Applicability and Principle
1,1 Apl'lit..,bilily. This method apJllie~ lu
Ih" dele',l1ination of sulfur dioxide (SO.)
el1li9~ions frul1I combustion sources in tel'11I8
of concenlration (n8/m") Dnd cmissiun rate
InglJl. and fur the determination of carbon
dioxide (CO.) concentralion (Jlercenl) on a
daily (2-A 11C1U1'~) h,lsis.
The minimum dctectuble limits. UPP':I limit.
.IIIJ the intl:!'ferenC~1I for S02 measuremcnls
afl' the sa,m, as for Melhod Ii. EI'A'Sl'ulisorl:ll
cllllal",rali\'e sludil:s were uncll'rlal-ell 10
delt:l'milie Ihe magnilude of fI'(,,'alahilily alld
reprmludhilily achil:vahle by quahfi"d
lI:slt,ro foliliwinllihe prul;edul'l's in this
nll:lhod. Thl: n,sulls uf Ihe sludius evolve
frum H5 field tesls indudi"l! I:OmJlill'iSllllS
with Mulhllus 3 and II. For nll",SlIn.IIII:I.ts IIf
IIlIIisuion rlll"s fro III Wilt. fIuu gall
dusulfuri1.alilln ullils ill (ng/II. 11u:
repoHllabilily (wilhilll"hllraillry IJI,'dsilllll is
8,0 p"namlllnd tho: ruprmJucihihly (1...1"'''1'11
luburatory prm;isionl is 11.1 pun;e1l1.221
1.2 l'rindple. A gas sample i~ e"lrHclI.d
frum thl! sampling poinl in the sl"d,
ililurmillenily u"I:r a 24-hour ur 11111101'
spedfiud lime Pl,riod. Salllplilig nli'y abu I",
I:onductcd conlinuuusly if 1Iu: uvparalus illid
vrul:mluws IIrc approprialely mudifiud (sce
Noll! in Suction 4.1.1). Thc So., alld Co., an.
suvarall,d IInd collcctud in Ihe ~all\JIlilig Iraill,
Thl! So., fnu:tion is nu:"suwu hy thl! h"l'ium-
Ihurin litralion nwthod. ami Co., is
d""~rminud gl'lIvillll!lrically, 221
2. /\JlJl"f'lllll.~,
Till, C11llipll1l:l\I Willi ired fur Ihis lI",thud is
Ihc HilllW liS spueified fur I\o\tolhud (jA. St:clion
2. e~ccpl Ihc isupl'Opllllul hllhhllJl is nlll used.
An em ply huhltl..r fur Ihe collt,cliun ur liquid
drul.lels and dues nul ulluw u,r"cI cunlllt:1
h..tw....n Ihe collecll,dliqllid IInd Ihe )IllS
sumpll, muy be i,":llul,d in II", lrain. Fur
inlt:rmilll!nl operutiun. indudu all industrilll
lilllt:r-swill:h designed 10 opl,ralt, in tilt, "IIU"
1",,,lllIn ulll'lIstl nllnlll"s cunllllllollsly and
""It"' Ih,' ,en"lilling I",riod UVI:!' a l'I:p,'"I;nl:
cyd". The cyd.. of up,'raliun in dusignlll"d ill
II", "I'vlical.lt: mgulalion. AlII minillll/ll'. 1111'
s.IInl'ling upNaliun shuulu illt:lt,d" alle..sl Il.
1.It'II'1. ""I,nly-splIl:!:d p"l'iuds v"r 24 hlllll'S.
Fur appliciltiulls duwnsln,am uf wl'l
"'III.III,rs. a hl"""d 'II,I-uf-slilck l'il.,,1' Il'illll"
I.IIl'IIsiliclIl" )lIIIsS wllul ur )llass [il"" 111;"1 is
""C"SSilry, '1'1", JlI'III", IInd [illt,r sh,,,ddl,,,
h,.;.I"d t:lllllinlluusly lu III leasl 20 C IIIHJvl:
II", Suul'I;..dlcl1lpl,rallire. bill nol grcalt:r Ih,,"
120 C. Tlw fill..r (i.e" sllmpll' )I"s)
II,nll",r;.11I1'1: shuliid I", munilun,J 10 a","'I'
Ih" dcsimd 1"l1Iv",'alll/'l: is maint"in",!.
SI"illll'~s sll",1 salllviing prohes, IYJI" ~lh.
.tI'I. lIul n,clllnnu:ndl,d fur IIse wilh M"IIIIIII hll
I"";OIIISC IIf 1'"1"lIlilll t:urrosilln and
c:unl,tluiI1HliOIl ur sampl(!. Class prulu::; ur
ulh"r IypI's III' slilinl,,"s siel-l, e.g.. Ilaslt-illY n,
(;"I'I"'nll'r 20 111'1' wcullll1lelult,d for IIIn)l-II:1'11I
tiM',
()Ih"r SlIlIIl'lillg "quiVllwnl. such "s Mil"
WcM IJUI.I.lt,l's 'IOd rigid cylind..rs for
moihlul"«: .dn..orlJliun. which rcquirt~s silmph!
III' n','~"1I1 ,"IIIIII"S ulh"r Ihiln IlIlIs" "11I,<:ifi...,
in Ihis VI'IIl."dtll'" tor I'ull err"t:liven"ss l1Iay I",
llso.d. slll.i"cI III 11... ilppl'llvlIllI( Ihe
Adlllinisllltlur.221
:1, III'II}:('III,~,
AIII'I'''I("nls 1'111 s"l1Ipling illld ar"oIbsis .11'"
IIII' SiI"'" ilS d"sl.I';I...d in !l.lelhlld ht\. S,.<:titHl
:1. "~t:I:pl isupl'OlJannl is nlll IIs"d I'll'
s"'lIl'lillg. The hyul'ug,:tI pt.J'II"id" a"sII,llill~
SlIllIlilln sh:,III", uillllt,d tll nil I"ss Ih..11 Ii
1"'I'Lt:llt I.y \'lIlu"",. illst"iHl o[ 3 pel'c"1I1 itS
~I'..dfil:d ill !l.Jtolhlld 6. II' Ml:lhlld lill is 10 III'
0lll'l'itll.d ill II low sillnpll, nllw I:IIn
-------
described In Method 6A. section 7. ucept
thHtthe limer Is needed Hnd is operated HS
described in this method.
1I.l/ihliug/'(/llhr.
TI,l: Ioibliography is th" SIIIII" as 
-------
M' Ii..,.,
2 pl!rcent of the span. Measurement S\ 51"",
<.nmponf'nts. inr.ludinR Ihe data n', 01'<11'1'
shall be selected such thllt the method 1..11"
fl:solve a chan~e in stack gas con",!n:r"!'.,,,
of :!: 0.5 pI:rcrml of the span.
3. Dl'finitiol1s.
3.1 Measurement Svstem. Tht: tot.1I
cquipment required for" the determinati'JIi 'J)
gAS concentration. The measuremf!nt ~\'st.''1'
c:onsjst~ of th,~ fullowing major subsy;,;pm<'
3.1.1 Sample Interface. That portion .J! oJ
sysll,m used for one or more of the fu!lo\\';n~.
sumplc acquisition, sample transport, samp!.,
conditiuning. or protection of the am!!J Z,"9
from thp. effects of the stack ernuent.
3.1.2 Gas Analyzer. That portion of :h,
system that senses the gas to be measun:d
and generates an output proportional to i'-.
concentration.
3.1.3 Data Recorder. A strip chart
recorder. anulog computer. or digital r<'!"'" .;..,
for recording measllr' ~,;-
is intruducr~d directly to the anaJyzer.
3.6 Zero 01 ift. The differ'mce in thl'
measurement system output reading ~,'ol1' I' .
initial calibration response at the zero
concentration level after a stated periuu 
-------
the Environmental Protec:ion Agency
Traceability Protocol Number 1 (see Citation
1 in Bibliography). Obtain 9 certification from
the gas manufacturer that Protocol Number 1
was followed.
6.1.2 Alternative Number 2. Use
calibration gases not prepared according to
Protocol Number 1. If this alternative is
chosen. obtain gas mixtures with a
manufacturer's tolerance not to exceed ::t2
percent of the tag value. Within 6 months
before the emission test, analyze each of the
calibration gases in triplicate using Method 6.
Citation 2 in Bibliography describes
procedures and techniques that may bl! used
lor this analvsis. Record the results on iii data
sheetlexamplt. is shown in Figure 6C-31. For
the low.. mid.. 01' high-rangf' gases. each of
the indi\'idual SO, analytical results must be
within 5 percent (or 5 ppm. whichever is
greater) of thl' triplicate set average:
otherwise. discard the entire set and repeat
the triplicate analyses. If the average of the
triplicate anulysl's is within 5 percent of the
calibration gus manufacturer's tag value, use
the tag value: otherwise. conduct at least
three additional analyses until the resulls of
sil( individual runs (the three onginal pluB
three udditional) agree within 5 percent (or 5
ppm. whichever is greater) of the average.
Then use tJUB average for the cylinder \'alue.
6.2 Measurement System Preparation.
Assemble the measurement system following
the manufacturer's written instructions in
preparing and preconditioning the gas
analyzer and. as applicable. the other system
components. Introduce Gny combinal1on of
calibration gases. IInd make all necessary
adjustments to calibrate the analyzer Gnd the
data recorder. Adjust system components to
IIchieve correct sampling rates.
6.3 Analyzer Calibration Error. Conduct
the analyzer calibration error check by
introducing calibration gaseo to the
mellsurement oystem ~t an~' point upstream
of the gas analyzer as follows:
6.3.1 After the measurement system has
baen prepared for use. introduce the zero and
low-, mid-. and high-range gaseo to the
analyzer. During thio check. make no
IIdjustmentB to the system except those
net:esoary to achieve the correct calibrahon
gaD flow rate at the analyzer. Record the
analyzer responses to each calibrahon gas on
a form similar to Figure 6C-4. NOTE.-A
calibra tion curve established prior to the
analyzer calibration error check may be used
to convert the analyzer reponse to the
equivalent gas concentration introduced to
the analyzer. However. the same correction
procedure must be used for all effluent and
calibration measurements obtained during
the test.
6.3.2 The analyzer calibration error check
ohall be considered invalid if the gas
concentration displayed by the analyzer
exceeds ::t2 percent of the span for the zero
or low-, mid-, or high-range caliuration gases.
If an invalid calibration is exhibitf'd. ta"!!
corrective action and repeat the analyzer
calibration error check until acceptable
performance is achieved.
0.1! Reponse Time. Determine response
time by first positioning the sampling prcbe
to obtain effluent samples at the
measurement location, and adjusting the
measurement system to achieve the proper
sampling rate. Introduce zero gas into the
system at the calibration valve until the
analyzer response is stable: then switch to
monitor the stack effluent until a stable
reading can be obtained. A stable vallie is
equivalent to a change of less than 1 percent
of span fO! 30 seconds or less than 5 percent
of the measured average concentration for 2
minutes. Record the upscale response time.
Next. introduce high-range calibration gas
into the system. Once the system has
otabilized at the high-range concentration.
owitch to monitor the Btack effluent. and wait
until a stable value is reached. Record the
downbUile m,;pOnBI' lima. Repeililhe
procl'du'T :hrfe linws. Rf'cord the respon~e
tinw duta on iI form similJr to Figure 6C-5.
a\er"~e the thrpp mea~ur('mp:1ts of the
upscale and downscale response limes. and
report the gft'a I PI' !im.. as thl' "response time"
for the measurement s\.slem.
6.5 Samr ling System Bias Chf'r.k.
Perform the sampling system bias check by
introducing ciilibratio!1 gases Ht the
calibration vulvf' instulled ut the outlel of the
sampling pre>be as follnws:
6.5.1 Introduce the miJ range calibration
gas. and record thi' g:iS concrnt: oti,'O
diw rut!',; ai the anaivzrr. Introduce bo:h the
zero and mid-range g~ses for a period not
less than twice the rr>sponse time.
6.5.2 The sampling system bids check
shdl hI' considered invalid if the difference
bel ",.een thl' gas concentration displayed by
the mcast;rement svstem for the ani!lvzer
clI!ibration error check and for the sa'mpli:1i<
SYStl'ffi bias cI:l'ck exceeds =3 percent of the
span lur either the zero or mid-range
canbration gases. If an invalid (;alibr~tion is
exh:l1ited. take corrl'cti, e action. ~t1d repeat
the sampling system bies check until
aCLeplable performancE is achieved. If
"djustment to the analyzer is required. first
repeat tbe analyzer calibration error check.
tl,en repe..t the sampling system bias check.

7. Emission Test Procedure.
i.l Selection of Sampling Site ar.d
Sampling Points. Select a measurempnt sill'
and sampling points using the same criteria
that are applicable 10 Method 6.

i.2 Interference Check Preparation.
CQnduct En intp.rfr:rence check for at least
three runs per test.

Assem!)!e the modifi,rJ M.,th,;J 6 tl':,;n
(nuw contrul vake. two midget impingPl's
contalnmg 3 percent 11,0, and dry gas meter)
as she \',n in Figure 6C-2. Install the sampling
train tn r:Ltdin Po sample al the measurement
system ~~rI1i:le by-pass discharge vent.
Record the initial dry gas meter reading.

This check ma\ be omitted. subject 10 the
approvlIl of the Administrator. provided thut:
(a) information is submitted prior to the test
demonstrating that measurement renults for
the gas analyzer used fo;- the test cannot be
bilOlIOO low OOcauoo of the pra6enee of
interferents within the sample stream. and (hI
no adjustment to the test data is made to
account for interferents that may r.reate a
III-Appendix A-50
high bias in the measurement results.
7.3 Sumple Collection. Position the
sampling probe at the first measurement
point. and begin sampling at the aame rate !IS
used during the response time test. Mdintain
const"nt rate sampling [i.e.. ::!.10 perrent)
during the entire run. The aampling time per
run shall be the same as for Method 6 ;llus
twice the average system response time. For
t'ach run. ust' onlv those measurements
obtHined after tw'ice the response time of the
measurement system has elapsed to
determine the average effluent concentration.
Concurrent with the initiation of Ihe sampling
period. open the now control \'alve on the
modified Method 6 train. and adjust the now
to 1 liter per minute (::: 10 percent). (Note.-If
a pump is not used in the modified Mf'thod 6
truin. caution should be exercised in
adjusting the now rute since
overpressurization of the impingern nwy
cause leakage in the impinger tr~in. re~ulting
in positively biased rest;ltsJ.
7.4 Zero and Calihra:ion Drift 1'esl.
Immediutely following each run. or if
adjustments are necessary for the
measurement system during the run. n'pedt
the 8rlmpling system bias check procedure
described in Section 6.5. (Make no
adjustments to the measurempnt system until
after tht' drift cher;k~ are complt'ted.) Rpcnrd
the analyzer's responses on a form sir.:;!"r tn
Fi~ure 6C~.
7.~.1 If either the zero or mid-rungl:
calihration value exceeds the aampling
system bias specification. then the run is
consiJered invalid. Repeat both the ani"yz,~r
calibration error Lhet.k procedure (Spcth,"
6.3) and the san:p!in,: system bids ch(.ck
procedure (Section 6.5) h"fore repl'ating Il1l'
fun.
7.4.2 If both the zero and mid-rangl'
calibration values are within the sumpling
syste'!l bids specification. then the a\f'rilge of
the inili,,1 and final bias check values shall be
used to calculate the gas concentration for
the fIIn. If the zero or mid-range drift value
excpeds the drift limits. repeat both Ihe
analvzer calibrc1tion error <..heck pI nc"dure
(Seciion 6.3) and the sampling system bi.<8
check procedurt' (Section 1\.5) beforp
conducting additional runs.
7.5 Interference Check. After completing
the run. record the final dry gas meter
reading. meter temperature. and barometric
preosure. ~ecover and analyze the cantl'nls
of the miJget impingers. and detNminp Ihf'
SO, gas concentration using the procedur"~
of Method 6. (It is not necessary to an,,:yzf'
EPA performance audit samples for Melhod
6.) Determine the average gas concentra'/fln
exhibited by the analyzer for the run. If the
gas concentrations pro\'ided hy tht' ana!:, Zf'r
and the modified Method 6 differ hy mort'
than 7 percent of the modified Mplhod 6
result. the run shall be considered lO\'dbd
8. Emission Calculation.
The average gas effluent concentriltlnn I~
determined from the average So:dS
concentration displayed by the g~s anill~ z,.r
and is adjusted for the zero and mid-range
sampling system bias checks as determined
in accordance with Section 7.4. CdlcuIdi.. the
effluent gas concentration using Eq lallo:1 6C-

1. Cm
Ca.. ~!C - Cool
Cm - Co
Eq I>C-1
-------
Whl're:
C... = Ernuentgas concentratiun. p;:.m b~
volume (dry basis).
e= Average gas concentration indi, "tl'd !;~
j!as analyzer. ppm (dry basis).
C.=Average of initial and fin!!1 s~'st~rn
calibrdtion bias check respuns,'s f\Jr 11:1'
zeru gas. ppm.
Cm= Average of initial and finul syslf'm
calibration bias check responsps for thp
mid.range gas. ppm.
9. Biblingrnphy.

1. Traccahilit\ Protocol for Estdbhshill\!
True C(lJl(:pnlr,,'tions of GAses l'spu lor
CalilJ!'atiuns and Audits for Conlin"oils
Sourcc Emission Monitors: Prntoca: :\ill11[""
1. liS. Em'ironmental Protection A~l'n, ~
Quality Assurance Di\'ision. Rpseal"'1
Trian!!l.. Palk. N.C. June 1978.
2. \!Vpstlin. Peter R. and John W. Bm\\:l
M.,thous for Collecting and :\nalyz';If; CdS
Cyliiluer Samples. U.S. Em'ironmpr,t,;I
Protection A!!ency. Emission Me"sI:rl'm"nl
Branch. Heseurch Triangle Park. :\.c. );.1.1
1978. Source E\'alualfon Socie!~ \CI\ si,.t:i'r
3(3) :5-15. September Hli8.
III-Appendix A-51
-------
il
Stack Wall
Heated Filter
Calibration Valve
Bypass Flow
Control
Flow Rate
Control
Figure 6C-l. Measurement syate2 ochematic.
Excess
Sample Bleed
.
11!11EEDlE
VALVE
T
SAMPLE
)BY-PASS VENT
IIJRYING
TUBE
3%
IJiZOZ
«15 ml)
Figure 6C-2.
Sample Bypass
Discharge

1
Sample
Gas
Manifold
ROTAMETER
Interference check sampling train.
III-Appendix A-52
Gu
Analyzer
Analyzer
Flow Control
-------
H
H
H
I
~
ttj
ttj
CD
~
P.o
......
X
~
I
U1
W
Date
Analytical method used
Samp 1 e run
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Maximum \ deviation
I
2
3
Average
I
I
I
I
I low levela
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I High levelC I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
Gas concentration (indicate units)
Mid-levelb
a Average must be 20 to 30 percent of span.
b Average must be 50 to 60 percent of span.
c Average ~st be 80 to 90 percent of span.
Figure 6C-3. Analysis of calibration gases.
Source identification:
Test persunnel:
Date:
Analyzer calibration data for sampling runs:
Span:
  I  I Ana ly zpr I  I 
  I Cylinder I calibration I Absolute I 
  I value I res~.!1se I dff ference I DI Herence
  I  (1ndlcatp units)   I (\ of span)
I  I  I  I  I 
I Zero gd s I  I  I  I 
I  I  I  I  I 
I  I  I  !  I 
I low ran\le I  I  I  I 
I  I  I  I  I 
I  I  I  I  I 
I MI d- range I  I  I  I 
I  I  I  I  I 
I  I  I  I  I 
I Hi gh range I  I  I  I 
I    
I  I  I  I  I 
Figure 6C-4. Analyzer calibration data.
-------
,
IDate of test
I
! Analyzer type

ISpan gas concentration
I
IAnalyzer span setting
I
I
I
IUpscale
,
I
,
I
I
I
,
'Downscale
,
I
I
I
I
ISystem response time s slower average time s
I
2
3
Average upscale response
H
H
H
I
~
"d
"d
CD
::J
0..
1-'-
X
~
I
VI
~
2
3
Average downscale response
Figure 6C-5.
SN
(indicate units)
Ii ndi cite uni ts)
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
Response time.
seconds
seconds
seconds
I
I
I
,
I
,
,
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Source id~ntlflcation:
Test personnel:
Run nll1lber:
Date:
Span:
I
IZero gas I
I I
I I
I Hi d-rangel
I ,
I
I
r
I
I
SystEW Calibration 81as . System Cal. Response - ~nalyzer Cal. Response. 100
Span
Drift. Final
Figure 6(-6. Systel c.llbratlon bias and drift data.
-------
!:113'i'C1>D 7-DrmJ!!tm1Aii:1>!J 011 Ni'iIooo!!!J OJ!ID3
!!.:U=!JO Ji'OOt1 3'i1Aut)!JADll 00=
1. Frif'.dzrlc 000 AppJID3bBIJf}
1.1 Princlplo. A (!rob !::Imp!:! 10 ooll2<:~ In an eV~I!'
()tcd fl~:t oontcJnina a diluto IiUlluric ood.bydr!n:m
il'Jl'cmtdo ab::nrbln3 ~Iutlon. ODd tbe niuO(!en oxide:!,
OJ!oopt nitrolW omdo, oro m=urcd oolorimeterlccll17
IElna tbo pbenoldJDultonJc ccld (PDB) proc3dure.
1.2 Appliccblllty. TbJD metbod 19 applicable to tbe
m=uroment 01 nit.ro;!en oxide3 emltt£d from stotlOIllJ!'y
cn=. Tbo rouge oftbo motbod b09 003n determlnod
to be 2 to 00tI mlW(IJ'ODW NO. (09 NOd !121' dry stMdcM
cubic moror. witbout bavfns to dilute the =pl:l.
2. App:JrclW
2.1 Bcmplina (= J.1'lcruro 7-1). Otbc:r (!rob =PIln3
Ol7DtOmo 01 equlpmont, ccpOOb 01 m~urtna snmpb
volume to mtbln :!:2.0 p::?C3nt ODd ooliootina 119uJi1cJent
=plo volume to oliot7 anolytlCIII reproducibility to
mtbln :2:5 ~C3nt. mU be consJderod ~cepteblo rilror.
notl Ve3, aubJeot to approval 01 tbo Admlnistroto1. U .G.
IZnvlronmentol Protection l!.aenc17. Tbo 10Uomna
~ulpmont 10 ~d In amplina:
2.1.1 Prob3. Bondllccto a1= tubln3. aufilcl:mtlj7
bc:1ted to prevent =tG:r conde=t!on ODd cqulp!)3d
mtb 00 In-otccII 01 out-atccII flltar to remove putlcUIcto
mDttG:r (a pili(! 01 (11= t700l In !::Itlsbctory ror thID
purp=). BtcJnIB:::J ~ a:r Toflon n tublllJ may oWl be
\WOO lor tbe probe. Hc:>tInJ ID nGt n~ II tlto probo
romolno dry durina tllo p~ 1IGriod.
. Mention 01 trode DrIIDee or opceiflo pro Environmental Pro-
taction Aaenc7.
FILTER
3.WAY STOPCOCK.
T -BORE. I PYREX.
2-rnm BORE. B-rnm 00
GROUND.GlASS CONE.
STANDARD TAPER.
I SLEEVE NO. 24/40
2.1.2 CoU:;,:tton J.1'~II. 1't7o-lItQ- bcro:JIIIccto, rnnnd
bottom &s1<, mth 9bort n<>e1I and 24/40 stondard ta~r
o~nlng, proWeted egainst Implosion or b=IIlIse.
2.1.3 Flask Valve. T-bore 9topcock connected to ()
31140 atondllrd to~r Joint.
2.1.4 Temp"rature Oal1«e. DlcJ-t~ tbermometer, 01
other temperature t!8ll1te, copable of m~uring 1. C
(2' F) IntervcJs !rom -5 to 50" C (2.) to 125. F).
2.1.5 Vacuum Line. Tubing capable 01 mtootondina
" vacuum of 75 DUD Hq; (3In. Hg) absolute pressure. mth
"T" connection IIDd T-bore stopeock.
2.1.6 Ve.euum Olllllte. U-tube manometer, 1 D!.2tGr
(1)6 In.), mth I-mm (O.Hn.) divisions. or other (!nU(!e
ropcble of meesurlng pressure to mlbln :!:2.5 DUD H(!
(0.10 In. Hg).
2.1.7 Pump. CaJ)3ble 01 eV!!CUllting the coUection
&s1I to II pressure equal to or less than 75 DUD Hg (3In.
Hg) ebsolute.
2.1.6 Squeeze Bulb. One-wny.
2.1.9 Volumetric Plp"tw. 2.) mI.
2.1.10 StopcoclI and Oround Joint OI'0l>Se. A blah-
vacuum, bigh-temp"rature chlorofluorocorbon ~ ID
required. Halocarbon 25-5S has boon found to be efiectlve.
2.1.11 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other rorom-
oter cmpable of measuring etmospherlc pressure to mthln
2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg). In many eases. the barometric
i'roding may be obtained !rom II nearby natlonc.1 t7""tb{,r
C3rvice station, in which ease tbe Btation veJue ("blcb In
the absolute barometric pressure) shaU be requested ond
= adjustment lor elcvation dlfloren<:e:l bet"G2n tbe
t7eather stetion and sampling point 9haU be applied at ()
rote of minus 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg) per 30 m (lGO It)
~vation Increase, or vice versa for elevation dec"""",.
2.2 SlUIJp}p Recovery. Tbe following equipment 10
required lor sample recovery:
2.2.1 OradWlted Cylinder. 50 ml wltb I-ml divisions.
2.2.2 Storage Containers. Leak.free polyethylene
bottles.
2.2.3 \;:'I09b Bottle. Polyctbylene 01 ab:3.
2.2.4 Om DUmng Rod.
~e501 r: I~.aper for Indlcatlna pH. ?o cover the pH
!:;1~;;'t I~~':~' J.1'01 tbe QIlcJyn!s. tile follomna ~Wi>'
2.3.1 Volumetric PI~t- to 25G-mi
CCp3City mtb lip for pouring, one Cor =b !;:IIDple Dnd
=b stondard. Tbe Coors No. 450W (shallow-Corm 195
ml) hl!B be
-------
8. ~ eter. Tbe absolute InternQ) pressure In tbe flask (1';)
Unless otber..nse Inci1cnted, It Is Intended tbat alJ Is eqUDJ to tbe barometric pressure less tbe manometer
=3ent~ conform to tbe specifications estebllsbed by tbe ro:Iding. Immedistely turn the fI...k vQ\ve to the "sam-
Committee on Analytical R_ents of tbe American pie" positiou and permit the gas to enter tbe flBSk until
Cbemical Society, wbere snch specifications e.re \lvaii. pressures in the fI""k and S&I11ple line (I.e., duct, stack)
Bble; otberwlse, use the best evBllnble grade. (\I"e eqUDJ. This will usualJy require about 15 seconds;
8.1 Sampling. To prepe.re the nbsorbiqg solution a longer period indicates e "plug" in the probe which
cautiously add 2.8 ml concentroted H,SO. to 1 liter of must be corrected before samplinlt is continued. After
deionized, distilled water. Mix well nnd !ldd 6 In1 of 3 oollectina tbe sample, turn the fl8.cord
OCMnO test for o)lidizable o""'anic metter this finJ>J pressure, GOd tben vent tbe flc.s!r to the Qt-
4, ,." mosphere until tbe fIc.s!r pressure Is Cl\most equal to
may be omitted whei1 high conc~ntrllltionG og etmospberic presstll'P
organic matter are IIOt cmp~cted to Ix? <1.2 SMlple Recovery. L3ttbeflc.s!rs<>Uoramlnlmum
"'re!!ent 177 of 10 bours GOd then shab:e the cotItents for 2 minutes
Ii' . Connect tbe flesk to a mercury fl]]ed U-tube mnnometer
3.3 Analysis. For the analysis, tbe followl!\(! ~ent.> O!l2I1 the valve from the fIc.s!r to tbe manometer aml
tIl'I> required: rnoord the lic.s!r temparoture (T,), the b:>rometric
3,3.1 FumIng SuUuric Acid. 15 to 18 percent by weight pressure, end the difference between the mercury levels
(rea sulfur trioxide. HANDLE WITH CAUTION. In tbe mc.nometer. Tbe absolute internal pressure in
11,3.2 Pbenol. White colld. the flask (P,) Is tbe barometric pressure less the man-
3,3.3 SuUuric Acid. Concentrated, 95 parcent mlnI- ometer I'e1\ding. Transfer the contents of tbe flesk to a
mum lISSIIy, HANDLE WITH CA UTION. leab:-free polyetbylene bottle. Rinse tbe flesb: twice
3.3.4 Potesslum Nitrote. Dried at 105 to 110" C (220 wltb S-mJ portions of deionized, distilled water nnd add
to 28{j0 F) for e minimum of 2 bours lust prior to prep&ra- the rinse t7&ter to tbe bottle. Adjust the pH to between
tlon of standard solution. II GOd 12 by adding sodium bydroxide (1 N), dropwtse
3.3.5 Stands.rd ~O. Solution. Dissolve .exectly (about 25 to 35 drops). Check the pH by dipping a
2..1e8 g of dried potnss.'!m nitrate (KNO,) in de,ronlzed, stirring rod into the solution and then touching the rod
dIstilled water. e.nd dilute to 1 hter wltb deIOnized. to the pH test paper. Remove as little material as possible
distilled weter In a .1,ana.ml volumetric flesk. during this step. M&k the beight of the liquid level so
3.3.6 WorlIing Stendard KNO, Solution. Dilute 10 toot tbe container 0011 be cbecked for leakage after
ml of tbe stB.nderd solution to 100 mJ with deionized tronsport. L:lbel tho contniner to cIearl:!:: Identify its
dlstil.led water: One milliliter of the working standard contents. ~l tbe container for shiPPIn8. 87
CDlutron Is equIvalent to 100 ~ nitrogen diodd~ (NO.). ~.3 Anclysis. Note the level oftbe liquid in oonteiner
11.3.7 Water. Delonrz!'d, d.stllled I!B in SectIon 3.2.2. and confirm wbether or not any sample was lost during
3.3.8 Phenold.sulfonrc Acid SolutIOn. Dissolve 25.a sblpment; note this on the analytical data sbeet, If a
of pure wblte phenol in .150 mJ concentrai;ed suifunc noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void
c.cld on a ~m roth. C~l, add 75 mI fumin!! sulfuric tbe sample or use methods, subject to the approval of
c.cld, c.nd b~t at 1()O" C (212" F) I'or 2 bours. Store In the Administrator, to correct tbe fln&1 results. Immedi-
a d(\l"!:t, otopP&ed oott1e, ate!y prior to analysis, transfer the contents of tbe
.. .. n K1\ I. f\ 1\ dl S'- obJpping container to a 5O-ml volumetric flask, and
oJ."... ,,!\ile .ty nD!!UranCC....u tamp..,!!. rIn& lmown pnor In ...
management ~C2lJt ~Qcb EPA regional "ater, mix weli by stirrl.'rt!, c.nd Cldd conc6D~ted 1\JI1. I'h"~ A'...mble the flesh nnd fltlSk vQ\ve GOd fill \\' '
ffi...., monium bydroxlde dropwi... with constent stirring, =t"r, to the stopcock. Measure the volume of wale: I.
o ce 01 Ule reaponslble ~nforcemenl agenc)'. until tbe pH Is 10 (O,s determ1Iied by pH paper), If the :l:JO ml. Record this volume on the fll!sk.
{Note: The tester ohould notify the qualitv ample contains oolids, tbese must be removed by 6.2 SpectrophOlnmeter Cnl!bratlon.
OSflUf'Q!lC0 offioo cr 1110 rwpon!!ible ' filtration (centrifngat!on Is en eccepteble alternative, 8.2.1 Optimum Wavelena1.h Determination
~nlicreceliJent alj2i1cy 01 !eoot S;O davs pYi' "..........e"",r ~ery '" mon........ AJUe """,,,ro.
~ ecaD1 II/Iac.o to allAU"" oUmClenl lime or f>.ml portions of deionized, distilled water; filter these tlon may be !!'ocomplished by usina a.n
oample ~hWi'!f.J 229 tbr,,!, rinses. ~&>~ the tllte! with at least three IS-mI enel'ffY source wtth an Intense line emission
~ Pi~urel) portIons of de.omzed, distIlled water. Add the tllter h I...
' tYtlShings to tbe contents of the volumetric flesk and = e.s a mercury cmtp, or u1 I.!fIlna C\ cenes
~.1 t!bmpllnf!.. dilute to tbe ms.rk with deionized, distilled water. If @1 alt:!!1!l mlizrn ~ the measwi.n8
<1.1.1 Pipette 25 mI of absorbing solution Into a oomple CDllds are absent. the solution can be transferred directly rnnge of the spectrophotometer. CtIllbretion
fIc.s!r, rotninlng a sl'.fficlent Quantity for 1188 In prep&rins to tbe 1000mt volumetric fll!sk and d.luted to the mark te 'als II bl I 11 d
the CQ\Jbration stnnd(\l"ds. Insert the fle.sk valve stop~r mtb deionized. distilled water. Mix the contents of th,' ma n are ava a e commerc a y IU1
Into tbe flesk with the vclve in the "purge" position. &sk tboroughiy, and measure the ebsorbence at th, from the National Bureau of Standards.
Assemble tbe campling tro/n cs shown in Figure 7-1 optimum wavelength used for the stands.rds (Section ~Ic deiaI19 on the ~ of IJUch mc.t.ertals
Dnd place the probs at the sampling point. Make sure 5.2..1), using the blank solution es a zero reference. Dilute ahou1d h2 supplied by the vendor' cr~roJ
that Q\j fittings are tigbt CJld le!\lt-free, CJld tbat cJ] the B8mple and tbe blank with equal volumes of dei,>n- , . .
[Jround alass Joints have bean pro~rly f!roosed ~Ith a Iood, distilled trater U the absorbance exceohotometer Is In proper caHbratlon, use <\10
1 mll1ulta iD not =ptQble, '1111 <><1 uoeu double-beam spectrophotometer, BC'&n the
CtCurs In tbe probe cnd tbe IIu!t vQ]ve (\1"83,. b~t the ~th ~or IkJ C!1)iiiph= oomp!Go and the F.PA m>ectrum between 1,\00 and <115 nm usina a
WO~ t~ t~p~ unp ~vt~~ ~n~;~~!~~!~ Qudit aampleo: If ~io lC~ti!m ia met wo ,.a NO. sta.nd&d oolutlon In the sample
tIY.> &sir vQ\vo cloclrwlss to Its "evecuater.-pi,sition and ouditinu of IJl3bo~0E~ mmpliooC3 anel~'sea cell and 110 blCll1!!. cnluUon In the refer'2nce
rroord tte difference In tbe mercury levels In tbe manom- for the aemG ~n5(1)=rnIan1 agancy within :w cell, Ii iii ~ dOll!S not occur, the sPeCtro-
III-Appendix A-56
days i8 ngt required. An aadit sample set ma)'
not be used to validate different setll of
compliance aamplee under the jurisdiction Df
different enforcement agencies. unless prior
arrangements are made with both
enforcement agencies.
Calculate the concentrfJtions in mg/d!!ClfI
using the specified sample volume in the
audit instroctions, (Note: Indication of
accepteble lesult& may be obtained
immediately bV reporting the audit results in
mg/dccm and compliance resulto in total lAg
No,,/sample bV telephone to the reoponsible
enforcement egenc)'.) !nclude the rellults of
both audit samplen, their identification
numbfors, Imd the enalYBt"o name with the
results of the compliance delermination
lIamples in appropriate reports to the ErA
regional office or the appropriate
enforcement agency, Include thiD information
with Dubcequent compliance analyseo ror the
same enfoi'Cement ag'1!ncy during the 3O-dRY
period.
The concentratioD!! of the Dudit samples
obtained by the analyat ahall agree within 10
percent of the lJctual l1udit concenlrations. If
the 100percent specification ia not met.
reanalyze the compliance oamples and audit
Gumplea end include Initial and reanalysis
valueo in the teot report (oee NO~IB in the first
paragraph of thiD Dection),
failure to meet the 100percent specification
may require reteot!! until the audil problema
are resolved. However. it the audit resulto do
not effect the compliance or noncompliance
otatuo of the affected recility, the
Adminiotrator may waive the reanel)'si8
requirement. further pudila, or retests and
accept the resultJ of Ihe compliance test.
While 9tepo are being teken to resolve aumt
anlllysis problema. the Administrator may
also rhoose to U!!e the data to determine Ihe
complumce or noncompliolnrp sf..tus of tl1t'
affected facility 229
-------
photometer Is probcbly meJfunction!ncr C'.Ild
ahould b2 repeJred. When (\ peek Is obtained
mthin thG ~ 00 <11& run roDcr-c, the =ve-
!<)i!!\1.b Qt ohlch U1!D ~ =n1 f.JhrJ.l ~
the optimum 'llBvelentrth lor tbe measure-
ment 01 absorbance 01 both the standards
and the samples. For a s41gle-beam spectro-
photometer, 10llow the scnnning procedure
described above. except \.hat \.he blank and
standard solutions shall be eca.nned sepa-
rately. The optimum wavelength shall be
the wavelength at which the maximum dU-
ference In absorbance between the standard
and tbe blank OOCW'S.87
62.2 ~tennJnntlon of Spectrophotometer
CcJlbmtion Factor K.,. Add 0.0 ml, 2 ml. i!
ml, G ml, e.nd II ml of the KNO, \:YorlUna
atC'.IldDJ'd solution <1 m1 = 100 I&g NO.) to (\
series 01 five 50-ml volumetric llesk.s. To
roch i1lll5k. add 25 ml of aOODrtlir.g ooluUon.
10 m1 deionized.. distilled water. and !IOd.\um
hydroxide (1 N) c1ropwWe untll the pH Is be-
tween 9 and 12 (..bout 25 to :!IS drolltJ efiCh).
Dilute to the mark with deionized. dUltl11ed
"Vo.ter. Mix thoroughly e.nd pipette i) 25-m!
aliquot of each solution into " sePlll1lte por-
celain evaporating dish. 87
B."innln" with the evaporation step, 10110\17 the nnaly.
~~.rS~-:d~ ~~:f~~1 ~~\uu,;;~~~~h~:~':tt~dn dW~;'te'ii';~
thf mlU'k. MfBSurf the absorbanCf ol..acb solution. at thf
optimum wav.len~th, as dftermined in Section 6.2.1.
This calibration procedure must 00 repeated on each day
thai samples are analy.ed. Calculalf> thf spfCtrophotom-
.ter calibration factor as lollows:

K =100 A.+2A2+3As+4A4
e A.2+A~+Ass+~s

Equation 7-1
wbere:
K,oCaUbrotion lactor
A, oAbsorbance 01 the J()().,.g NO, standlU'd
A,cAbsorbance 01 tbe 200-,.g NO, atandard
A,oAbsorbance 01 the 300-,.g NO. standard
A.oAhoorhance 01 the 4O().1II! NO. atandard
5.2.3 Speo;lrophotom"h!r Calibralion
Quality Control. Multiply the IIbsorbance
value obtainf'd for each sfHndllrd hy the K<
faclor (least squares slop!'! to determine the
distance each calibration pnmtlies from the
theoretical calibration line. These calculilted
concentration villues should not differ from
the !tctuill coni'pntral1ons Ii.e . 100. 200. 300.
and 400 1&8 N~) by more than 7 percpnl for
three of the four standards. 229
5.3 BMlmeter. Clilibrate C(!clnst Q mercury b:Irom-
eter.
5.4 TemP3J'Qture GQuge. Clilibrote dll>1 tbermoruel. 'S
8!:w,.st mercury-tn-j!1ass thermometers.
6.5 Vceuum Gauge. Calibrate mechtlnlrol..gooaes, If
~:ddjn'.~.~ a mercury manometer such es Qt aped-
6.6 Analytical Balance. Calibrate agBinst Gtande.rd
welgbts.
6. CalculaliMID
Carry out the calculations, retaining al IfBSI one extro
dI'Cima\ figure beyond tbat 01 tbe acquired data. Round
off figures after final calculations. .
6.1 Nomenclature.
A=Absorbance 01 sample.
C=Concentralion 01. NO. as NO,. dry basis. cor-
m;:~cO.to standlU'd conditions, mg/dlem
F=Dilution factor (i e., 2f>/6, 26/10, elc., required
only if sample dilution was nooded to reduce
the absorbance into the range 01 calibration).
K,=Spe<'trophotometer calibration lactor. 87
m=Mass 01 NO. as NO. in gas sample. /41.
p/= Final absolute prt'SSUre 01 flask. nun Hg (in. Hg).
p,= Initial absolute pressure 01 flask, mm Hg (in.
H").
P'ldc~':~dard absolute pressure, 760mm Htt (29.92 in.
T,cFinal absolute temperature 01 flask ,oK ("R).
T,=lnitial absolute temperature 01 flask. oK (OR).
T..d = Standard absolute tempe.rature, 293° K (628" R)
\/..cSample volume at standard conditions (dry
basis) I m1.
V,=Volume 01 flask and valve, ml.
V. c \' olume 01 absorbing solution. 2f> ml.
2=60/2f>, the aliquot factor. (I! other than a 26-ml
aliquol WaR used lor analysi~, the correspond-
Ing lactor.must he substituted).

6.2 "ample vOlume, dry b""is, corrected to standard
oondiUons.
V..= T.1d (v,- Vo) [P,-~.]
P.1d T, T.
=K.(V,-25ml) [P,_P,]
T, T.
Equation 7-2
wbere:
K.=0.3858 OKH for metric units
mm g

= 17,64 . ORH for English units
m. g .
6.3 Total,.g NO. per sample.
m=2 KsID, oorr~ to
at£illde.rd oonditioIU!.
m
C=Ka -V
oe
Equation 7-4
",bona:
Ks= loa :::::; for metric units


=0.2~3X 10-a Ib//SCfI10r English units
IIg m
3.5 Itelative Error (RE) for QA Audil
Samples, ~ercent.
c.,-c.
RE= - )( 1CJU Etj 7-5
c.
Where:
Co = Determined audit Dample
concentration. mg/dscm.
C.= Actual audit sample concenlr,ni,m.
mg/ dscm. 22 9

(Secs. 111,114. and 3011a) of the Clean A.r
Act. 89 amended (42 V.S.C. 74i1. 7414. and
760110 )))
7. Bibliograpllfl
1. Standard Metbods 01 Cbemlcal Analysis. 6tb ed.
New York'8P' Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1962. Vol. I,
p. 329-330.
2. Standard Metbod 01 Test lor Oxides 01 Nitrogen In
Gaseous Combustion Products (Phenoldisulfonlc Acid
Procedure). In: 1968 Boot 01 ASTM Standards, Part 26.
Pbiladelphia, Pa. 1968. ASTM Designation D-I60&-60,
n. 72.>-729.
3. Jacob, M. B. Tbe Cbemlcal Analysis 01 Air Pollut-
ants. New York. Intenlcience Publlsbers, Inc. 1960.
Vol. 10, p. 351-356.
4. Beatty, R. L., L. B. Berger, and H. H. Schrenk.
Determination 01 Oxides of Nitrogen by the PbenoldisuJ.
Ionic Acid Method. Bureau 01 Mines, U.S. Dept. 01
Interior. R. I. 3687. February 1943.
6. Hamil, H. F. and D. E. Carnann. CollabOrative
Study 01 Metbod lor tbe Determination 01 Nitrogen
Oxide EmIssions lrom Stationary Sources (Fossil Fuel-
Fired Steam Generators). Soutbwest Researcb Institute
report lor Environmental Protection Agency. Researcb
Triangle Park, N.C. October 6,1973.
6. Hamil, H. F. and R. E. Tbomas. Collaborative
Study 01 Metbod lor the Determination 01 Nitrogen
Oxide Emissions !rom Stationary Sources (Nitric Acid
Plants). Soutbwest Research Institute report lor En-
vironmental Protection AIIency. Researcb Triangle
Park, N.C. May 8,1974.87 -
-------
\VJG~iI~ "I A-DGiGrmlinmticlii c1 NMog0i1
OlIDI!)10 IEmillrl!CiIIS IF'rom Si!lrt!oillavy ~a
Ion Chromatographic Method

1. Applicability and Principle.
1.1 Applicability. This method IIIpplies to
the measurement of nitrog~m o)(ias NO, (65 to
as5 ppm). and higher concentrations may bl!
analyzed by diluting the sample. The lower
detection limit is appro)(imately UJ mg/m' (10
ppm). but may vary among instruml!nts.
1.2 Principle. A grab sample is collected
in an evacuated flaok containing a diluted
oulfuric acid-hydrogen pl!ro)(ide absorbing
oolution. The nitrogen o)(ides. except nitrous
o)(ide. are o)(idizp.d to nitrate IInd measured
by ion chromatography.
2. Apparatus.
2.1 Sampling. Same ao in Method 7.
Sl!ction 2.1.
2.2 Sampling Recovery. Same liS m
Method 7. Section 2.2. except the otirring rod
and pH paper are not needed.
2.3 Analysis. For the analysis. the
following equipment is needed. Alternative
instrumentation and procedures will be
allowed provided the calibration precillion in
Section 5.2 IInd acceptable audit accuracy
can be met. -
2.3.1 Volumetric Pipets. Class A: 1-. 2-. 13-.
5-ml (two for the set of standards and one per
cample). 6-. 10-. and graduated 5-ml sizes.
2.3.2 Volumetric Flasks. s.o-ml (two pe1
oample and one per standard). 2C3-ml. and 1-
liter sizes.
2.3.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to
within 0.1 mg.
2.3. and l:apa\'lI' nl
rHslllving nitr,,'" ion trolll sullah' imd olhl"
sl'''<:1''' 1'"",,"1 IIld\ h.. us,,"
3.35 Quality Assurance Audit Samples.
Same as required in Method 7
13. Procedure.
<1.1 Sampling. Same as in Method 7,
Section 13.1.
13.2 Sample. Recovery. Same as in Method
7. Section 13.2. except dele Ie the steps on
adjusting and checking the pH of the sample.
Do not store the samples more than 13 days
between collection and analyois.
<1.3 Sample Preparation. Note the level of
the liquid in thl' container and confirm
whether any oample was lost during
ohipment: note this on the analytical data
sheet. If a noticeable IImount of leakage has
occurred. either void the sample or use
methods. subject to the approval of the
Administrator. to correct the final results.
Immediately before analysis. transfer the
contents of the shipping container to a 5o-ml
volumetric flask. and rinse the container
twice with S-ml portions of water. Add the
rinse water to the flllsk. and dilute to thl'
mark with water. Mix thoroughly.
Pipet a 5-ml aliquot of the sample into a 50-
ml volumetric flask. IInd dilute to the mark
with water. Mix thoroughly. For each oet of
determinations. prepare a reagent blank by
diluting 5 ml of absorbing solution to 50 ml
with water. (Alternatively. eluent solution
may be used in all sample. standard. and
blank dilutions.)
13.13 Analysis. Prepare a standard
celibration curve according to Section 5.&.
Analyze the oet of standards followed by the
oet of samples using the same injection
volume for both standardo and lIamples.
Repeat this analysis sequence followed by a
final analysis of the standard set. Average
the results. The two sample values must
agree within 5 percent of their mean for the
anlaysis to be valid. Perfonn this duplicate
analysis sequence on the same day. Dilute
any sample and the blank with equal
volumes of water if the concentration
exceeds that of the highest standard.
Document each sample chromatogram by
listing the following analytical parameters:
injection point. injection volume. nitrate and
sulfate retention times. flow rate. detector
sensitivity setting. and recorder chart speed.
4.5 Audit Anal)/sis- Same as required in
Method 7.
5. Calibration.
5.1 Flask Volume. Same a8 in Method 7.
Section 5.1.
5.2 Standard Calibration Curve. Prepare a
series of five standards by adding 1.0. 2.0. 4.0.
6.0. and 10.0 ml of working standard solution
[25 IAg/ml) to a series of five 5o-ml volumetric
flasks. rrhe standard masses will equal 25.
50. 100. 150. and 250 ,.,.g.) Dilute each flask to
volume with water. and mix well. Analyze
with the samples as described in Section 13.4
and !lubtract the blank from each value.
Prepare or calcula te a linear regression plot
to tbe standard masses in ,...g (x-axis] versus
their peak height responses in millimeters (y-
axis]. (Take peak height measurements with
symmetrical peaks; in aU other cases.
calculate peak areas.) From this curve. or
equation. determine the !llope. and calculate
its reciprocal to denote as the calibration
factor. S. If any point deviates from the line
by more thaD 7 perce.,t of the concentration
at that point. remal.e al.d reanalyze that
standard. This deviatioll can be determined
by multiplying S times the peak height
response for each standard. The resultant
concentrations must not differ by more than 7
percent from each known standard mass (Le..
25. 50. 100. 150. and 250 lAg).
5.3 Conductivity Detector. Calibrate
according to manufacturer's specifications
prior to initial use.
5.
-------
Where:
H = Sample peak height. mm
S = Calibrntion factor. ""g/mm
F = Dilution factor (required only if sample
dilution wall needed to reduce the
concentration into the fBnae of
calibration)
10' = 1:10 dilution times co.nvenrion factor of

mg 10' ml
-x-
10" J.&8 m"
If desired. the concentration of NO. may be
calculated as ppm NO. at standard
conditions 118 followlI:
IJIpm N~ = 0.5228 C
Eq.7A-2
Where:
0.5228 = ml/mg N~.
7. Bibliography.
1. Mulik. J. D. and E. Sawicki. Ion
Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental
Pollutants. Ann Arbor. Ann Arbor Science
Publishers. lIne. yolo Z. 1979.
2. Sawicki. E.. ). D. Mi.llik. and E.
Wittgenstein. Ion Chromatographic Analysis
of Environmental Mutants. Ann Arbor. Ann
Arbor Science Publishers. lnc. VoL 1. 1978.
3. Siemer. D. D. Separation of Chloride and
Bromide &om Complex Matrices Prior to Ion
Chromatographic Determination. Analytical
Chemistry 52(12:1874-1877). October 1980.
4. Small..H.. T. S. Stevens. and W. C.
Bauman. Novel Ion Exchanae
Chromatographic Method Using
Conductimebic Determination. Analytical
Chemistry. 47(11:1801). 1975.
5. VII. King K. and Peter R. Westlin.
Evaluation of'Reference Method 7 Flask
Reaction Time. Source Evaluation Society
Newsletter. 4(4). November 1979. 10 p.
(Sees. 111. 114. and 301(3) of the Clean Air
Act. as amended (42 U.s.c. 7411. 7414. and
7601 (a)))
III-Appendix A-S8a
-------
w.:::;~~~ m. ~~tIf.$:rIl!Zq 1)!5~:;j) ~~
!bTJ.oo:= ~ ~1j);~ITiill'Y ~=
~~ov1~~ ~~~~3'fiy~ 275

1. Applicability'ond.PriF/cJpJe

'1.1 :Applicablli\;N. Tbis methnd ie
applicable to the meaSW'8wmt of mtrogeD
oxides emitted from nitric acid plants. The
range of the 'method 'as outlined 'has been
detennined :to 'be 57 to 1.500 milligrams NO.
(08 NOd) P£1' dry 8tandard.cubic meter. or 3(p
,10786 ppm N2
timeaw~h ~o.m1 :pIrthJlm of water. IimclltlM
to. the ~c ilmik. ,l1Iilute .10 iOO E11 wM1
water. Mix thorol!ghly. The samp}ei6 !!lOW
ready for analysis.
4.3 'Analysis. Pipette a 200ml aliquot 01
sample into. a 1DO-ml volumetric flask. '00tma
to 100 ml with water. The sample ie-mJW
ready to. be read by ultra via let
spectrophotometry. Using the blank as zero
reference. read the ~b8cUbanr:e ttf:the 8IiImp1e
at 210 om. ..
U Audit Nnalyliis. 'With each flet ,of
com»liance samplea,(JI' &lnee penmalysi8,d8y.
or ance per week when averaging continuous
samples. analyze each performance audit in
the same maMer as~lhe:samp1e1o ev8l1Hf111
the analyst's technique and standard
pl'lllp8l'1tfion. The 'same penon. 'the same
reagents. and tbe'same '6!RI~cal Byuttml
must be used bo.thlor com'pliance
determination samples and.the 'EPA audit
samples. Repart the results of aU audit,
samples with !the !lll1iI1Ib'of.the oomptiance
determiDatian IRIJIIPles. U'be mative ,BUm'
will be determined by the resianal office or
the appro'priate enforcement -agency.

5. Calibmron

Same 8S M\!thod 'l. Section Mand1iectimw
5.3 through 5.6wilh the~dd"ion.ofthe
followi'18: -
5.1 Determination aT Spectrophatameter
Standard Curve. Add 0.0 Dil.5 Dil. 10 mt, 15
mi. 'and 20'1111 'Of 1tre 'KNe.. wurking lItImdard
salutian (1 ml-l0 I£g NO.) to. a.sece8..to.fW.8
1DO-ml valumetric flasks. To each flas'k, adt! 5
ml of absorbing solutian. Dilute to the mark
with water. The resulting salutioDl contain
0.0.50. 1IXI. 150. and 2OOJ4.a NO.. refUMlCtively.
Measlft 1be ~1AI1'bIrnc1I 'by :fitra violet
spectrolfhdt~1ft'21e'nm, 'Ustnsltho blan1t
a6 a 1!8rooNf~oe.:Prepare a1ftllftcknil-cwve
plolting absorbance vs. ,...g NO..

Note.-U other than a 2O-ml aliquot of
sample Is used for analysis. then the amount
of absorbing Bolution In the blank and
III-Appendix A-59
C~C2~~ CZJQ kJ C@!1!.:;2oo ccclJ QllioQ ~o
ooco o~~~ cq olb!i:~~ ~~~2!fidi 10 !riiJ ~
lMQfl1! c:?tcl a~o!ii~o~O QO fo ~!ii e.,.u Qilql!1(J;~ ~q
alllmp!ca I!acad. Colcu1f1tl3 th<2
Bpectrophotorne~er calibraliol'J fector 1110
«ollowo:
N
K
c
Hi Ai
t:: 1 c 1
N 2
A.
~ o~l
(Eq.7.1o)
Where:
M.=Maso of N(h in otandarcJll. /log.
t.. = AbGorbance of NOiJ ntemdaro I.
N=Totel Dumber of calibration [)tanda~.
!For ilie o:at of calibration otandaroo
Ii~ecifled h:ai'G.lEqualion 7-1 oimplifieo 10 ~
following:
Al + 2AZ . 3A3 + 4~
Kc .. 50
A 2 + A 2 + A 2 + A 2
1 Z . 3 4
([9. 7.:U
B. Calculations
Same a8 Method 7. Sections 8.1. 6.2, and...
with the addition of the following:
6.1 Tolal,...g NO. Per Sample:
m=5K. AF (Eq.7-3)
Where:
5=100/20. the aliquot factor. ,
Note.-U other than a 200m! aliquot is uled
for enalysis,. the factor 5 muet be replaced by
. cOlTf!sponding factoL
6.2 Relative Error (RE) for Quality
AI8urance Audits.
<:.t-c"
RE= -X100
c"
(Eq. 7-4)
Where:

C.=Determlned audit concentration.
c,,=Actual audit concentration.

7. Bibliography

1. Nallonallnslltute far Occupatlanal
Safety and Health Recommendations for
Occupational Exposure to. Nitric Acid. In:
Occupatianal Safety and Health Reporter.
Washington. D.C. Bureau of National AffalFll,
Inc. 1976. p. 149.
2. Rennie. P.).. A.M. Sumn!!!r. and F.B.
Basketter. "Determination of Nitrate in Raw.
Potable. and Waste Watero by Ultraviolet
Spectrophotometry." "Analyst." Vol. 11M.
September 1979. p. 837.
-------
Ml1IclliJ(9;!!I7'C-~cr~ni~:ID @« NingolI!l 24'
Om~e IE:miooic:mo !From 5~Dui(p7ilDi1' ~!li'C08 .

Alhaline-Permanganate IColorimetric
Method
1. Applicability. Principle. Interferences.
Precision. Bias. and Stability.
1.1 Applicability. The me~Rlcd is
applicable to the determination of NO.
emisoions from fossil.fuel fired oUeam
Beneratol'8. elec~ric uiility planie. nitric acid
plentG. or other courcea es cpecified in ~hi1101!S II:NO 'ACK.ED
WIYH GLASS WOOl.
1r/--
samplillfl emiBsione from Q coal-fired ell!!c~ric
utility pleni buminB 2.1-percent Gulfur coal
with no control of 50a I!!missions. collection
efficiency wac not reduced. In fact.
calculationD Dhow ihet Damplins 3000 ppm
BOa will reduca the MnO.- concentration by
only 5 perceni If all ~lIa S~ is consumed in
the firo! impingeI'.
N~ io olowly oJticllzed to N~- by the
absorbillfl oolution. Ai 100 ppm NH. in ihe
ga8 stremm. an interference of 6 ppm NOn (11
mg NOa/m~ was obeenoed when the Bilmple
was analyzed 10 days aftl!!r collection.
Thereforl!!. ilie method may not be applicable
io plants using NJ-b injection to contrel NOn
emissiono unlesG ml!!ans Brl!! iaken to correct
the reBullo. An I!!quaiion lIa9 been developed
to allow quantitation of ihl!! interference and
ic discuc;;ecl in Citlition 5 of the bibliography.
va Precision IIInd l3i80. '!!'he method does
not eJthibit I:Jny biac relstive 10 Method 7. The
within-laboratory relative olandard deviation
for a single measurement is 2.11 and 2.11
percenl at 201 and 268 ppm NO.. respectively.
1.5 Stability. Collecled samplp.5 arp stable
for at least () weeks,
2. Apparatus.
:U &1mpling and Sample Recovery. The
Samplillfltrain io Dhown in figure 7~1. and
componl!!ni !}Iarts !!Ire diecussed bl!!low.
Alternetive apparatuG end procedurl!!s ere
allowed provided eccl!!ptable accuracy and
precision can be demonstrated.
CQ\:SYIiH@V!!O om~i~1Z \MI'iNCI'!RS
~I'W
~tO!!'il~a
v~9u~a 1CoA. NOn BD~11ng ~~O\
2.11.11 Wi'Obe. ~rooalbc@~e cJlllOO habil!fJ.
c1!Wlc!enUy ~(3DiGciI Uo ~Gii!i <;;;/oilar
\!:C?:.clZiiOliliiGii! oiicl Qt!}I!I!,3IQ:clJ <;;;11~11 081 I8I'o~1i1c!t
1C:7 @;'\t.oioc!l miei' io romO\1G I'c~ICt!I@iQ
~cliiD!? (0 j:I!~ of glOIX) <;;;/~n ~o oo~iGql.Zi'cio>1' for
1.::'110 J}l1.!\'BIoce). S~oii1!QOO o~oo3 C7 'll'G:7/aSiJ ru~i8!6
may eloo ~ UOGcl for i~Q !'rob<1. (Noil1l:
Mention of tredla nameD or opecific proclucio
doeo not conDUtutl!! lai\dorcameni by lli:a U.S\.
I&nvironmQn~o! IhoUecilo:rJ Aj;jI!!IiU:y.)
2.1.2 IImpl!'IfJQi"Q. Thre3 rooUlci~.qwiKioo
glaoe iml?i~ro. hl:Jvin3 ilie o~riiCDMci!lO
III-Appendix A-GO
given in Figure 7~2. lilre required for p.1I1.h
Gampling train. The impinge!'s mus' be
connected in series with leak.free glass
connectors. Stopcock grease may be uspd. it
necessary. to prevent leakage. (The impinger,
can be fabricaled by 8 gla8s blower until Ih..v
become available commercially.)
!l4W
4i1'
EJIM~I'JSIOl'li: "'0
a70
u
UPtlUII'I
'ilU.UIG U L
,
,
Figure 7C-2. lIenrlcted orifle. 111111"9'"
2.1.3 Glass Wool. Stopcock Grease.
Drying Tube. Valve. Pump. Barometer. and
Vacuum Gauge and Rotameter. Same as in
Method 6. Sections 2.1.3. U.4. 2.1.6. 2.1.7.
2.1.8. 2.1.11. and 2.1.12. respectively.
2.1.4 Rate Meter. Rotameter. or
equivalent. accurate io within 2 percent al the
selected flow rate between 400 and 500 ccl
min. for rota meters. a range of 0 to 1 liter I
min is recommended.
2.1.5 Volume Meter. Dry 8as meter
capeble of meuuring the sample volume.
under the sampling conditions of 400 to 500
cc/min for 80 minutes within en accuracy of 2
percent.
2.1.6 filter. To remove NO. from ambient
air. preparlad by adding 20 g of e 5-angstrom
moleculer oieve io III cylindricel ~ube. e.g.. a
polyethylene drying tube.
2.1.7' Polyethylene Bottles. 1-liler ',\1'
oamplla i'GCOVl2ry.
U'@ Wunna! ancl SIiITing !Rods. For &!lmple
recovQry .
2.2 Sample Prep1Jratian and Ar.alysitJ.
-------
2.2.1 Hot Plute. Stirring type with 50- by
10-mm Teflon-coated stirring bars.
2.2.2 Beakers. 400-. 600-. and 1000.ml
capncities.
2.2.3 Fi!tering Flask. 500'ml capacity with
side arm.
2.2.4 BuchnE'r Funnel. 75.mm 10. with
spout equipped with a 13-mm to by 9O-mm
long piece of Teflon tubing to minimize
possibility of aspirating sample solution
during filtration.
2.2.5 Filter Paper. Whatman GF/C. 7.0-cm
diameter.
2.2.6 Stirring Rods.
2.2.7 Volumetric Flasks. 100-. 200- or 250-.
500-. and 1000'ml capacity.
2.2.8 Watch Glasses. To cover 600- and
1.000.ml beakers.
2.2.9 Graduated Cylinders. 50- and 250-ml
capacities.
2.2.10 Pipettes. Class A
2.2.11 pH Meter. To measure pH from 0.5
to 12.0
2.2.12 Burette. 5O-ml with a micrometer
type stopcock. '!The stopcock is Catalogue
!\jo. 82.25-t--{)5. Ace Glass. lnc.. Post Office
Box 996. Louisville. Kentucky 50201.) Place a
glnss wool plug in bottom of burette. Cut off
burette at a height of 43 em from the top of
plug. ,md have a glass blower attach a glass
funnel to top of burette such that the
diameter of the burette remains essentiall)'
unchangrd. Other means of attaching the
funnel are acceptable.
2.2.13 Glass Funnel. 75-mm ID at the top.
2.2.14 Spectrophotometer. Capable of
measuring absorbance at 540 nm. One-em
cells are adequate.
2.2.15 Metal Thermometers. Bimetallic
thermometers. range 0 to 150 'C.
2.2.16 Culture Tubes. 20- by 150-mm.
Kimax No. 45048.
2.2.17 Parafilm "M." Obtained from
American Can Company. Greenwich.
Connecticut 06830.
2.2.18 C~ Measurement Equipment.
Same as in Method 3.
3. Reagents.
Unless otherwise indicated. all reagents
should conform to the specifications
established by the Committee on Analytical
RE'agents of the American Chemical Society.
where such specifications are available:
otherwise. use the best available grade.
3.1 Sampling.
3.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to
conform to ASTM specification D 1193-74.
Type 3 (incorporated by reference-see
fi 60.17).
3.1.2 Potassium Permanganate. 4.0 percent
(w/w). Sodium Hydroxide. 2.0 percent (w/w).
Dissolve 40.0 g of KMnO. and 20.0 g of NaOH
in 940 ml of water.
3.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
3.2.1 Water. Same as in Section 3.1.1.
3.2.2 Sulfuric Acid. Concentrated H2SO..
3.2.3 Oxalic Acid Solution. Dissolve 48 g
of oxalic acid [(COOH)..2H20j in water. and
dilute to 500 ml. Do not heat the solution.
3.2.4 Sodium Hydroxide. 0.5 N. Dissolve
20 g of NaOH in water. and dilute to 1 liter.
3.2.5 Sodium Hydroxide. 10 N. Dissolve
40 II of NaOH in water and dilute to 100 ml.
3.2.6 Ethylenediamine Tetraacetic Acid
(EDTA) Solution. 6.5 Percent. Dissolve 6.5 g of
EDTA (disodium salt) in water. and dilute to
100 ml. Solution is best accomplished by
using a magnetic stirrer.
3.2.7 Column Rinse Solution. Add 20 ml of
65 percent EDT A solution to 960 ml of water.
and adjust the pH to 11.7 to 12.0 with 0.5 N
l'\aOIl.
3.2.8 Hydrochloric Acid (HCI). 2 N. Add
86 ml of concentrated HCI to a 5OO-ml
volumetric flask containing water. dilute to
volume. and mix well. Store in a glass-
stoppered bottle.
3.2.9 Sulfanilamide Solution. Add 20 II of
sulfanilamide (melting point 165 to 167 'C) to
700 n,1 of water. Add. with mixing. 50 ml
concentrated phosphoric acid (85 percent).
and dilute to 1000 ml. This solution is stable
for at least 1 month. if refrigerated.
3.2.10 N-(l-Naphthyl)-Ethylenediamine
Dihydrochloride (NEDA) Solution. Dissolve
0.5 g of NED A in 500 ml of water. An aqueous
solution should have one absorptiun peak at
320 nm over the range of 260 to 400 nm.
",g N~-/ml=g of NaN~"
\
This solution is stable for at least 6 months
under laboratory conditions.
3.2.13 KNQ, Standard Solution. Dry KNQ,
atll0 'C for 2 hours. and cool in a desiccator.
!'\EDA. showing morr than one absorpli:>n
peak over this range. is impure and should
not br used. This solution is stahlt' for at
least 1 month if protected from light and
refrigerated.
3.2.11 Cadmium. Obtained from Matheson
Coleman and Bell. 2909 Highland Avcnup.
Norwood. Ohio 45212. as EM Laboratones
Catalogue No. 2001. Prepare hy nnsing in 2 :-.;
HCI for 5 minutes until the color is silvcr.
grey. Then rinse the cadmium with watE'r
until the rinsings are neutral when testf'd
with pH paper. CAUTIO!'ll: H, is hbf't"ted
during prepa~ation. Prepare in an exhaust
hood away from any flame.
3.2.12 NaNQ, Standard Solution. ,,"aminal
Concentration. 100 '" g N~-/ml. DesiccatE'
Na!';D. overnight. Accurately weigh 1 4 to 1.6
g of NaND. (assay of 97 percent :1<,,:--;0. or
greater). dissolve in water. and dilute to 1
liter. Calculate the exact 1\0.- concentration
from the following relationship:
purity. %
46.01
X10',( -
100
69.01
Accurately weigh 9 to 10 g of KNo. to within
0.1 mg. dissolve in water. and dilute to 1 liter.
Calculate the exact NO,- concentration from
the following relationship:
",g NQ,-/ml=g of KNQ, X10'
X
62.01
101.10
This solution is stable for 2 months without
preservative under laboratory conditions.
3.2.14 Spiking Solution. Pipette 7 ml of the
KNQ, standard into a 100-ml volumetric
flask. and dilute to volume.
3.2.15 Blank Solution. Dissolve 2.4 g of
KMnO. and 1.2 g of NaOH in 96 ml of water.
Alternatively. dilute 60 ml of KMnO./NaOH
solution to 100 ml.
3.2.16 Quality Assurance Audit Samples.
Same as in Method 7. Section 3.3.9. When
requesting audit samples. specify that they be
in the appropriate concentration range for
Method 7C.
4. Procedure.
4.1 Sampling.
4.1.1 Preparation of Collection Train. Add
200 ml of KMnO./NaOH solution (3.1.2) to
each of three impingers. and assemble the
train as shown in Figure 7C-1. Adjust probe
heater to a temperature sufficient to prevent
water condensation.
4.1.2 Leak-Check Procedure. A leak-check
prior to the sampling run should be carried
out: a leak-check after the sampling run is
mandatory. Carry out the leak-check(s)
according to Method 6. Section 4.1.2.
4.1.3 Check of Rotameter Calibration
Accuracy (Optional). Disconnect the probe
from the first impinger. and connect the filter
(2.1.6). Start the pump. and adjust the
rotameter to read between 400 and 500 ccl
min. After the flow rate has stabilized. start
measuring the volume sampled. as recorded
III-Appendix A-61
by the dry gas meter (DGM). and the
sarnpling time. Collect enough volume to
measure accurately the flow rate. and
calculate the flow rate. This average flow
rate must be less than 500 cclmin for the
sample to be valid: therefore. it is
recommended that the flow rate be checked
as above prior to each test.
4.1.4 Sample Collection. Record the initial
DGM reading and barometric pressure.
Determine the sampling point or points
according to the appropriate regulations. e.g..
Section 6O.46(c) of 40 crn Part 60. Position
the tip of the probe at the sampling point.
connect the prohe to the first impinger. and
start the pump. Adjust the sample flow to a
value between .400 and 500 cc/min.
CAUTION: HIGHER FLOW RATES WiLL
PRODUCE LOW RESULTS. Once adjusted.
maintain a constant flow rate during the
entire sampling run. Sample for 60 minutes.
For relative accuracy (RA) testing of
continuous emission monitors. the minimum
sampling time is 1 hour. sampling 20 minutes
at each traverse point. INote.-When the SO,
concentration is greater than 1200 ppm. the
sampling time may have to be reduced to 30
minutes to eliminate plugging of the impinger
orifice with MnO.. For RA tests with SO,
greater than 1200 ppm. sample for 30 minutes
(10 minutes at each point)). Record the DGM
temperature. and check the flow rate at least
every 5 minutes. At the conclusion of each
-------
run. turn off the pump. remove probe from the
stack. and record the final readings. Divide
thl' sample volume by the sampling lime to
dt'termine the evarage now rale. Conduct iii
leak-check as in Section 4.1.2. If a leal< is
found. void the test run. or use procedures
acceptilble to the Adminiatrator to ildjuBt thl!!
sample volume for the leakage.
4.1.5 CO, Measurement During sampling.
measure the CO, content of the stacl< glls
near the sampling poml using Method 3. The
single-point grab sampling procedure is
adequate. provided the measurements are
made alleast three times-near the start.
midway. and beforl' thE' end of a run and the
averagp. CO, concentriltion is computpd, The
Orsat or Fyrite analyzer milY be used for t~;s
R:':.!~ sis.
4;( Sam pic Recovery Disconne'1 the'
i'n;JlngI'J~. Pour the contents of the impingers
in", a I-liter polyethylem. bottlp. usin~ a
fur.r.el and a stirring rod (or other means) to
prC'vent splililge. Com~lele the quan!itati\'e
trcinsfer by rinsl:lg the impingl'rs and
connecting tubes with water until thp rinsn:gs
that are clear to light pink. and add the
r:nsings to the bottle. MIX the Bllmple. and
mf:rk the solulion leve! Seal and idpnt:f:.' the
sample container.
4.3 Sample Prpparation for Analy',is.
Prppare a clldmium r'i!du'.:lOn column as
follows: Fill thl!! burette :~.2.12) with water.
Add freshly prt'parecl cadmium olowly wIth
tapping until no further settling occurs. Thp
hp;ghl of the cadr.i,lm column should be 39
cm. When not in use. store the coiumn \II,d.-r
rinse solution (3.2.7). tNote.-The column
should not con:a:n an\' bar.ds of cadmium
fines. This mav or cur 'if .egenerated column
15 used and wi'll !lre..::v reduce the r:olu:,nn
lifetime.)
Note the levei of ilyuid i:'1 the sample
contH:ner. and dc.terrni:1c whether any sample
was lost during shipment. If a noticeable
a.nount of h:akage has occurred. the volume
lost can 00 determint:d from the differencl!!
Letwp.en initidland final 5ulution levels. and
this value can then be used (0 correcl the
analytical re~ult. Quantitatively transfer the
contents to a I-liter volumetric flask. and
c!ilutt' to volume.
Take a l00-ml aliquot of the samplp. and
b:ank (unexposed KMnO./:\IaOH) solutions.
and transfer to l)(J1}-ml bedkers containing
magnetic atirring bars. Using a pH meter. add
concentrated H,SO. with stirring unril a pH
of 0.7 is obtained. Allow the solutjon~ to
stand for 15 minutes. Cover thl!! bl!!akera with
watch glasses. and bring Ihe tl!!mperature of
the solutions 10 !iO 'c. Keep thl!! temperature
below 60 'c Dissolve  Il:Iot of the rinse aolution
hds passed from the funnel into thp. burel te.
but bt'!ore air entrllpment can occur. start
adding thp. sample. and co!lect it in a 250.ml
gradullted cylinder. Complete the
quantitative transfer of the sample to the
column as the sample pas~es through the
column. After the last of the sample hils
passed from thl' funnel into the burette, slurl
adding 60 ml of column rinse solution. and
collect thl!! rinse solution until the solution
just dIsappears from the funnel.
Quaillitatively transfer the sample to a ZOO.ml
volumptric nask (250-ml may bp rt'quiredl.
and dilute to volume. The samples arc now
ready for NO,-4- analysis. ISote.- Both the
sample and blank should go through this
prot;t'dure. Additionally. two spi~l'd samples
should be run with every group of samples
passed throu~h the column. To do this.
prepare two additional 5O-ml ahquots of the
sample suspected to have the highest !\O,-
concentration. and add 1 ml of the spiking
solution to these aliquots. If the spike
rero\'e"y or column efficiency (see 6.2.1) is
below 95 percent. prepare a new column. and
repeat the cadmium reductionJ.
0\\.e
bibi!)g:-aph~ Le cqr.suiled.
5.1.2 Pust.Tesl Calibra:ir,n Ch~'.k 5;::111'
as in Method 6. Section 5.1.2.
5.2 Thermometers fvr DCM IIfld
Barometer. Same as in Method 6. Serlior.s 5.2
and 54. TI,spectively.
5.3 Caiibration Cu~ve fur
Srer trophotomeler. Diiutc 5.0 ml of the
r>;a:-;o, standard solutio!') to 200 ml w:t~)
water. This solution nor.:;;:d:ly contiuns 25 I'i!.
I'\iO,-/ml. U~e this 9CJlut,un to prepdr'i!
calibration standards to c()ver t~le rl'n~" uf
0.25 to 3.00 ~g :'IIo,-/rr.!. PTepJn~f' ur
tbe curve. Vse p'pett:s for all a-iJ,t",rs
Run sta:ldiirds iJnd s water Lloid !IS
instructed in Section 44. Plot th npI
absorbance \'5 ILII.~o,-iml. Drdw 0 smooth
CUT\'e through the points. The curve should I,..
linpar up to an absorbance of approximatel~
1.2 with a slupe of approximately 0.53
ab~orbance unitsl ~g No.-/ml. The curve
should pass throu!!h the ongin. The curve 15
slightly nonlinear from an aLsorbance of 1.2
101.6.
6. Calculations.
Carry oul calculations. retllining al leasl
one extra decimal figure beyond that of the
acquired data. Round off figures lifter final
calculallon.
6.1 S,,:rlple \'o\ume. dry bas;s. corrected to
standard conditions.
VmPha,
(Eq.7C-l)
To>
p.., = Barometric pressure. mm HIS'

p.", = Standard absolute pressure. 760 mm HI'

T m =Average dry gas meter absolute
temperature. 'J<.

T.,.=Standard absolute temperCJtur~. 293 °i<'

1<, =0.3858 '1
-------
£ =
(" - y) 200
s x 1. 0 It 46. 01
6DIT
= 26~.6 «Jl - Y)
s
(Eq. 7C-2)
v\ h.,,..,,
E Culumn-errH:il'nn, uni,l!'ss.
,,~Anillysis 01 ~riJ"ed silmple. fJ.1o: I\U'-/II,I
\' ' Analysis of IInspiked saJ:1pl~. f'.1' ':\0,-/
ml.
~I~I c. Flnill \'olumt' of silmpll' Hnd 1»",,1.. "fll'!
p"ssil18 throllgh th" coilimn. ru!
01-
IS-HI
E
](1(1
5()()
100tl
I~ -,I(I'j I~ Iii
>.200,-
50
\\,h"le,
n, !\1i1s5 of NO., IIG No.,. an 5i1mplt'. fJ.J.:
S - Anitlysis of sumple, I'll No.-/ml.
[1 - Analysis of blan!... /1g NO.-/m!.
500 c Tolalllolume of preparpd silmplc. OIl
5{j AJiquoI tJf prepared sample pro~:l'sst'd
thruugh cadmium column. OIL
J(~I Aliquot of KMnO./'I;ilOIi solulil'''. ml
1l~llI Tolal \'oluml' of K!\lnO,,'!\'aOII
~ululion 011.
f; :1 SilmpJe Concentrlitlon.
m
Cd<" -
Vmt..t"J
\\"~II'n':
c., Cor.cenIJillio!) of NO, HS !\'O,. dr.\ ""~IS.
mgJdscm.
..... ~ 10 'mg! f'.g.
() ~ Convers!:1r. Fd~lors.
1 (I "'I'm 1\:0=1.::47 mil NO/m"111 5TI'
1.0 I'pm !\'0,=1.!l12 mg NO,/m>Ii' STI'
1 Ir '.=.2.83:: ).;10-' m'.
7. QualitJ' COn!rol.
QIIJ~I'~' control procedures are speejfllod 10
S('( IIon5 4.1.3 (flow raIl' accurHcy): 4,3
[cocrr.ium cC'lumn efficienry J: 4,4 (ca!ibration
(.UI"\'1' accuracy): Bnd 4.5 (audit anlilys:,
Ciccu"i:tcyl.
, C'H!l"lIlralion of sp;kl"lo: SOIIlIIlIl' 1'10:
~;O:,/n".
1.0 \'oluml' "f ~pikin" solul,"" "cid,'d. nol
4i'_'IJ , fJ.g :...U,-/ /o,-"1O!('.
"~1I1 . fJ.~ ':\0-'-//0101011'
h C ~ ./01..1 fJ.g NO...
1E4 ~C- 31
F.
8 Bibliog;ap"r,
1 !\largeson, 1.1i.. W.J. Mitchell. I.e. Suggs
lind !'-I.R. Mjd~ell. Integratl'd Sampb
-------
MI'IIwd iD-Detcrminatioo of NitroglP.n ~4 7
O'\idl' Emissions !From Slntiona~' Sources -
.\ I.:. o!lae-P"i7::11J1sanale//o[;
I'hrnmalf'!;-cph;c Melhr>d
1. App/~rnb,.};tr, Prirripl(>, In/f,r-/t. 'i'!ln',',
";','..;.<;on. Hio.<. and Stabiiil\".
1.1 Apl,licahility. TI~P method I~
"tJ"!!(;,,t.,!e 10 tl,p delern:ination of :\:U.
r'~."sinns from fossil-fuel fired st(,;,m
(/"rw'atuls. electric utllity plants. nitric aLi"
pJ'ints. or othp, sources as sppcified ill the.
l"/'IIt.I,dio:1s. The lower dc!pr.t,.Lle hmit is
5!milnr to that for Method iC. No upper limi!
h...s lJl'rn established; however. whpn using
Ih.. rE'commended sampling conditions. thl'
methud has been found to collect 1\0,
emissions quantitativel~ up to FIJ2 m!!-/ t\O.i
m". as t\()., (9:12 pm NO.1.
1.2 Pnncir1'e. An integrated gus S;':11,,:.. is
f.xt!uctE'd trom the stack and collectrd i/1
H!hd!me-potassium perlT'anganate soh'!lu/1;
:'100, (''';0+ NO,) emissions are oxidi7."d to
:\:0:.-. Then r.;o.- iG anal\'zed bv ion
ch;omatography. . .
1.3 Interfuences. Pu~.siiJle inlerf(;rt',l(:"~
,HE' So., and :'\H:,. High concentrat;u:Js of S0,
u,,:lJ interferE' because S0, cunsumes MnO,-
(ill\ dops NO,) and. therefore. could rcdl:cl'
the :,0, co!lection efficiency. Howe\'!'!. wtwn
samp1ing ernls~ions from iI cOI>lI-fired eler.trir
uhi!ty p!sn! burning 2.1-percent sulfur coal
with no control of so. emissions. collection
t'ffiL,encv was not reduced. In fact.
caiculations show that sampling 3000 ppm
SO> will redUCE' the MnO.- concentration hy
or:~~ 5 percent if all the So. is consumed in
the first impinger.
r..:tt, is slowly oxidized to No.- by the
ilbsorbing solution. At 100 ppm NIl:. in the
g"s stream. an interference of 6 pPrQ NO, (11
mg \;O:ln:"i WiJS oh~I,rv!'d wlH,n tl". "If"pl,.
Wa~ iinllln~r~d 10 da\'s Hftl'r collt:Llio!:.
1'111'1'1 fur;', ;t,p mf"h~d may nnt hI' ;;ppl":,,i,',
tt, p!.,n.s l"ing :'\11:. i'1jer.lion to c ,,:rlml \;( J.
f'mls~i(Jns unless rr.f:uns Hrp t.ilJ.-,f'n 10 (or rd.:
Ihr' results. An !'(juatiun has lH'en d!'\,.J":,,.r!
10 allow quantitation of the inlr!rfrr!'ncp and
IS t),sc.ussed in Citiltion 4 oi !hp bibl!og..apb\
1.4 Pre,rision 1100 B,dS. TIll' mf'thod do,"
nol eJ(hibil An)' bias rl!liili\'e to 1\1('1110,: 7. Th,'
withm.IHboriltory relative slu/lc1;mj d",'j.ltio"
lur It single measurement was app"o,i"';'I,.I~
fj pl'rcen! al 200 10 :!'iO pjJm NO,
1.5 Stahili!y. Coli!'. Il'd s"~'I'I, sail' ",,\,1,.
It" At leHst II wf'Pks
2. .4l'nfl."atlls.
::.1 Sampling and SHmpl.- RI'('I)\''''~, '1'1...
'dOlplin!; train is thl' same as i1' "".,:..,. :-C-1
of l\1t:tnod 7t:. C(lrr;,IClIrell! r.art, ;." :1". 'Hml'
"s in Mptnou 7C. Sp(.'ic'" 2 1
2.2 S<1mpll' 1'r!'fHHdtion and An.."';:'
2.~.] l\1
-------
NO. peak height or peak area, and determine
the sample concentrelion from the calibration
curve.
<1.5 Audil analysis. This is the same iJS in
Method 7, Section 4.4
5. Co/ibration.
5.1 Dry Cas Metering System (DCM).
5.1.1 Initial Calibration. Same S5 in
Method 8, Section 5.1.1. For detailed
instructions on carrying out this calibration. il
is Duggested that Seclion 3.5.2 of Citation 3 in
the bibliography be consulted.
5.1.2 Post-Tesl Calibration Chp.ck. Same
as in Method 6, Section 5.1.2.
5.2 Thermometers for DCM and
Barometer. Same as in Method 6. Seclion 5.2
and 5.4. respectively.
5.3 Calihration Cur\'e for Ion
Chromatograph. Dilute a given volume (1.0 ml
or greater) of the KNo. standard solution to a
convenient volu'me with water, and use this
aolution to prepare calibration standards.
Prepare at least four standards to cover the
range of the samples being analyzed. Use
pipettes for all additions. Run standards as
instructed in Section 4.4. Determine peak
height or area. and plot the individual values
versus concentration in j.Lg No.-/m\. Do not
force the curve through zero. Draw a smooth
curve through the points. The curve should be
linear. With the linear curve. use linear
regression to determine the calibration
equation.
8. Calculations.
Carry out calculations. retaining at leasl
one extra decimal figure beyond that of the
acquired data. Round orr figures after final
calculation.
8.1 Sample Volume. Dry Basis, Corrected
to Standard Conditions. Same as in Method
7C. Section 8.1.
8.2 Total j.Lg NO. Per Sample.
1000
46.01
m=(~B)X250X
-x-
= 3710 (~B)
50
82.01
Where:
m = Mass of NO.. 88 NOt. in sample. j.Lg.
S= Analysis of sample. j.Lg No.-/m\.
B=Analysis of blank.l&g No.-/m\.
Z50=Volume of prepared sample. m\.
48.01 = Molecular weight of No.-.
82.01 = Molecular weight of NOt-.
1000=Total volume ofKMnO. solution. ml.
50= Aliquot KMnO./NaOH solution. ml.
8.3 Sample Concentration.

m
C=~ --
Vlllc...sl
Where:
C=Concentration of NO. as NO.. dry basis.
mg/d.scm.
K. = 10- I mg/j.Lg.
Vllllatdl=Dry gas volume measured by the dry
gas meter. corrected to standard
conditions. dscm.
8.4 Conversion Factors.
1.0 ppm NO=1.247 mg NO/m' at STP.
1.0 ppm NO. =1.912 mg No./m'at STP.
1 fts=2.832X10-sm'.
7. Quality Contral.
Quality control procedures are specified In
Sections 4.1.3 (now rate accuracy) and 4.5
(audit analysis accuracy) of Method 7C.
8. Bibliography.

1. Margeson. J.H.. W.J. Mitchell. J.C. Suggs,
and M.R. Midgett. Integrated Sampling and
Analysis Methods for Determining NO.
Emissions at Electric Utility Plants. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Research
Triangle Park. N.C. Journal of the Air
Pollution Control Association. 32:121~1215.
1982.
2. Memorandum and attachment form J.u.
Margeson. Source Branch. Quality Assurance
Division. Environmental Monitoring Systems
L8boratory, to The Record, EPA. March 30.
1983. NJ-L Interference in Methods 7C and 70.
3. Quality A88urance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems. Volume
III-Stationary Source Specific Methods. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park. N.C. Publication No. EPA-OOO/
4)-77~27b. August 1977.
4. Margeson. J.H.. et a\. An Integrated
Method for determining NO. Emissions at
Nitric Acid Plants. Manuscript submitted to
Analytical Chemistry. April 1984.
(Eq. 7~1)
III-Appendix A-65
-------
RESERVED FOR METHOD 7E
III-Appendix A-66
<
-------
METHOD G-DETEI\MINATION OU BOLUtHlIC ACID MIS1
ASD SULvun DIOJUDE Eh!I8S.JOND FaoM STATlON..nv
BouncEs

1. P,lne/plt and ApplicabUIlU

1.1 Principle. A gas samplo is elt,octod IsohlneUenlly
Irom Ih. sUlek. Th. sullurie acid mlsl (lnchl\.hng sullur
trlollde) nnd Ihe sullur dloald. ar. spparaled, nnd Lolb
Iracl Ions nre rnensur.d ""paralel)' by Ibe barium.thorin
Ii lrallon melhod.

1.2 Applicability. Thi. method is appllcablo lor lb.
d~lomllnalion 01 suI/uric acid mist (Including sulfur
tnollde, and In the ah...nee 01 ~Iber particulate matler)
nnd sullur dlollde emissions Irom slatlonary suurCe:J.
Collaborative tests have shown that the minimum
detectable limilS 01 the method are O.O~ millignuns/eubic
meter (0.03)'10-' pounds/cubic loot) lor sul/ur trlolido
nnd 1.2 mg/III' (0.74 10-' Ih/It') lor sullur diolid.. No
UJ'per limits have been estabh;hed. IJased on theorellclll
calculation. lo~ WO millilite,s 01 3 percent hydf01!en
perollde solullon, the upper concent"'tion limit lor
sullur dlOlide in a I.U 01' (35.3 It') gas sam pl. i. about
12,500 mg/m' (7.7XIO-' Ib/(t'). The uppcr limit can b0
exlended l>y increasing the 'juantily of pewlide solullon
in the IInpmgen.

Possihle interloring agents 01 this method nr. Ouorides
Ir"", nmmonia, and dimethyl aniline. II any 01 the";
Interlering agel,L. are pre""nt (Ihis can be delemtlned by
hnowledge ollh. process), allernative melh<>d.. suhl,,<,1
10 the ou~ruvnl 01 the Admlnlst",tor, V.S EPA are
requ"ed. B7

FillNable particulate mattl'r may hp d.,.

t.'rmlnrd along with SO, and SO, (s;lbJl'ctto

the approval of the Administrator) by In.
sprting a heatpd glass fibpr filter betwppn

the probe and isopropanol Impinger (Sf'e

Spcllon 2.1 of Method 6). If this option is

cho:;en. particulate analysis is gravimetric

only;' H,80. acid mist is not determined sep.

"rately. 87

2. .Ippa,al...

~.1 Sampling. A schematic 01 tho sampling trllln
u""d In thl. m,'thod Is shown In Figure 8-1; It Is slmilnr
to Ihe ~Ielhod 5 Irnln ,'ed In A I'TIJ'{)')76. Since correct
usug(! Is Impurltt.nL In outl\llljuR '.uUd rrsuhs. an u.sero
.hould r,'ad tho At'TIH)')76 ,tOo'lIm.,nt and adopt Ibo
oVt'ralln{t and ma1nt~l1anc(' Jlrucl.Jur~s oUlUn~d 111 It.
unlrss ottu:rwlsc s,wdftcd hl~rl'm. Funhcr det.a.ils and
~uitlt'l1m"'J on o(lrrution and mo.illll:l\anCe arc lriven 10
~t"lhod :; and should bo read ~Ild [oHowed whcnevff
Ihey arc applicable.
~.1.1 Prohe NOllIe. Samo as ~Iethod 5, So<:I.10112.1.1.

'!.1.2 l'rollfll.Jner, IJorosillcalcnt v~s1hle condl'l136l1ou during
sampling. Do not use metal prolle IIncrs.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR


~;-$il~ ..."

PITOT TUBE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

I
FILTER HOLDER
'!.1.3 l'ltol Tul>c. Snme "" Method 5, Section 2.1.3.

S;tll:n r.1.~~rentbl P~nro Oauae. Same fIB Melbod 5.

2. U Vlltor Holdar. B=illcate al8s:J, with a alnss
IrIt IUter .upport and n silicone rubber gasket. Otber
p.sket IIUIltrla.ls, a.g., Teflon or Vlton, may be used .ub-
leet to the approval 01 the Adminl'lJ1Itor. The holder
d9s1gn sbnll provide a poo!Uve &eal aga!nsllenltage from
tbe outside or 1II'0lmd tbe filler. The filter holder .hall
~ plM~d Mtt'll'On too first and cecond Impingern. Note:
Do not hf'Bt the flllPr holder.
2.1.6 lmplngen-Four 1\8 ahovn In Fiiure 8-1. The
!im and thlrd shall be 0/ tbe Oreenbl1l'1!.Bmlth doolgn
with .\lJndard Ups. The second and lourth allall be 01
tbo Oretnbl1l'1!.Smlth dt.slgn, modified by replBtlng the
I_rt with nn approllmately 13 millimeter (0.5 In.) ID
~I",," tube, having an uncofUltricted Up located 13 mm
(0.5 In.) From Ihe bottom 01 the flask. Simllnr coliecUon
;yaleDI/I, which have been approved by the Admlnl4.
\rotor, mny be nsed.
2}'J:7 Melerlng B)'8tem. 8nme as Method 5, 8ocUon

2.1.8 Barometer. Bame!!oS Melhod 5 B....,lIon 2 I 9
2.1.9 Oas Density Determl!U!lIon Equipmeni 'SW
r;w t1ethod 5, Section 2.1.10. .
2.1.10 Temporoturo Oauge. Thermometer or oquin.
im~n~1 to m"",qure tbe lemperature of tbo Bas leaving tbe
plng.r train to within 1° C (2" F)
2.2 Semple Recovery. .
(~)~ W...b BotUM. Polyetbyl811f1 or Slaaa, IlOO mi.

2.2.2 Oraduated .cyUnda",. 21!0 mI 1 Uter (VoIn-
_lIIc I1aab may al80 be U8IId.) , .
1000'.2.8 BtoTllle BotUes. LeU.Free polyetbylene bottles
mI8Ize (t..o for each IlUDpllfil run). '
THERMOMETER
THERMOMETERS
DRY TEST METER
ICE BATH
VACUUM
GAUGE
MAIN VALVE
Figure 8-1. Sulfuric acid mist sampli.ng train.
III-Appendix A-67
-------
2.2.~ TrIp n"lanoo. OO!I-«rom ro~lt)', to meQBU1e to
*0.5 J;\ (n~ only If Q moisture content c.nclyslB IIJ
to b3 done). .
2.3 Analysis.
2.3.1 Pi""tt"". Volume~9c 25 ml, 100 ml.
2.3.2 BUTetlA'. 60 ml.
2.3.3 I':rlenmeyer l"1a9!I. 250 mi. (one lor eacb ImJ1ple
bll\j1 II "nd stondard).
2.3.4 Oraduated Cylinder. 100 ml.
2.3.5 Trip Balance. 500 a repully, to measure to
*0.58.
2.3.6 Dropplna Bottk!. To ood indicator oolotlon,
l*mI lllze.

a. RtaqtnlD
UnleS!) olherwlse Indlooled wI reagenl. "'" to conlorm
to the opoclOcaUons estebllshcd by the Committee on
An!!!ytlool Reagents 01 tbe American Chemical Boclely,
where !/\Jch op"clnretlono sro ovcll"hle. OtheraU:3, OS<\
the best avalloble grede.
D.I Bamplln:!.
U.I Filters. &me M Melhod 5, f'kctlon 3.1.1.
D.1.2 81l1ro Oel. &>me QS Method 5, l!9ct.Ion 3.1.2.
~.1.~ Water. Deionized, di~tillC!d 10
oonform to ASTM specific£ltion D1193-77.
11'ype 3 (incorporated by rofC!renco-Gee
~ 60.17). At the option ofihe analysl, the
IKMnO. lest for oxidizable organic matter
may be omitted when high concl!ntrations 01
organic metter are nol expected 10 bl!
present.17]
PLAHT
LOCATION
OPERATOR
DATE
RUN NO.
SAM'LE BOX NO.
METER BO}! NO.
METIER ~ He
C FACTOR
!'ITIII"!' TUBE COltFflt:IENT, Cp
STATIC PRESSURE, mm Helin. Hg)
AMBIENT 1rEMPERATURE
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
ASSUMED MOISTURE, "
PROBE LEr~GTH, m 1ft)
NOZZLE IDENTIFICATION NO.
AVERAGE CALIBRATED NOZZLE niAMETER, em (in.)
PROBE HEATER SETTING
LEAK RATE, m3/miD,ldm)
PROBE LINER MATERIAL
FE!. TER NO.
a.u Xcopropanol. 00 Perront. Mix oon ml ollsopro-
P"Dol mtb 200 ml 01 deionized, dlolllled wcler.
!IIOyI:t.-"xp"rlen"" be.s l1li0'"'" that onl)' A.C.B. (!rode
lcopropanol la t>atlslactory. Tests bave ahoVII tbat
toopropanol obteJned from commercial l!Ources CItCt?>-
Cl\SlonDlly hDIJ peroxide impurities that mil caWIG or-
fOnrously hlgb GUlfuric celd mist measurement. 1100
tile following last lor detecting peroxides In each lot of
Ioopropanol: 8ha!re 10 ml 01 the Isopropanol wltb 10 ml
01 freshly prepared 10 percent powqium lo.llde oolotlon.
PreJI'II'B " blan!t by olmllarly treating 10 mI 01 distilled
water. Alter 1 minute, read the absorbance on Q aJI2C\ro-
photometer at 352 nanometers. 11 tho absorbe.oce excocdD
0.1. the Isopropanol ahall not be used. Peroxides ma)' 00
romoved from loopropnnol by redistilling. or bJ7 psssago
tmouah 0 oolumn 01 activated alumina. However, re-
sgent-(irooe isopropanol with suitably low peroxide levels
Is rrodJly avo.llable Irom commercial OOW'C8ll; tberelon>,
reJ<:ttlon 01 contnmlnated lote may be more efficlont
tbM following the p".roxJde removal prooodlm'.
3.1.5 Hydrogon Peroxide 3 P""""nt. Dllnte 100 ml
~I~r.::roont hydrogen ""roxlde to 1 liter with dolooUOO,
od water. Prepare lresh d81Iy.
U.6 Crushed Ice.
n.2 Born pie Recovery.
nJl.1 Water. Bame as 3.1.3.
3.2.2 Isopropanol, 00 Percent. &une 1Y13.1.~.
3.3 AnalJ7Sls.
3.3.1 Water. 8ame 8S 3.1.3.
3.3.2 isopropanol, 100 Percent.
3.3.3 Thorln Indlcator.I-(04rsOnophenylooo)-?,oapb-
thal-S 6-dlsul!onlc acid, dIaodJum II8lt, or OQnlvalant.
DlBsnlve 0.2<>" In 100 ml 01 delonl!ed. distilled water.
SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION
3.3.~ Barium Porchlornre (0.0100 'Norm!!!). Dissolve
I.M" 01 barium P0rehlomte trthydrote (BQCClo.)r.3HrO)
In 200 ml delOnl!edj distilled "'alor, and dilute to 1 Utar
with Isopropanol; .22 g 01 barium chloride dlhydrolo
(B"Ch.2H,o) moy be uaecllnslead 01 the barium per-
ahlorale. 81andardiUl with lI'I1lIuric IIcld 8S 10 8ccUon 11.2.
Thill oolullon must be protected aplns\ t hod 5, Section 4.1.2.
4.1.3 Preparation 01 Collection Train. Follow the pro-
('edure outlined in ~Iethod 5, Seetinn 4.1.3 (e!cept lor
the second paragmph and other obviously inapplicable
paris) and use Fhwre 8-1 instead 01 Figure ~1. Replace
the second paragraph with: Placo 100 ml 0180 ""rcent
isopropanol in the first impinger, 100 mI 01 3 percent
hydrOl{en peroxide in both the second and third 1m-
pingers; retain a portion 01 each reagent lor use ... '"
blank solutton. Piece nbout 200 g 01 silica gel In tbe Caurtb
imDinaer.
     PRESSURE    
    VELOCI'i'V DIFFERENTIAL.    TEMPERATURE
    ACROSS  GAS SAMPLE TEMPERATURE OF GAS
   STACCt !lEAD ORIFICE  AT DRY GAS METER LEAVING
 SA1'IIi'I!.IN6 VACUUM YiEl'.1PImA'i'UAE (6Ps), METER, GAS SAMPLE   CONDENSER OR
TRAVERSIE PO!f1V TIM!E mm!l~ (ii)' t::mll;l@ mm H20 \fOLUMIE, INUT, OUTLET, LAST IMPINGER,
HUMBlEr. (B),min. (In. Hul DC ( ~) (i:l.H20r. (in. H20) m:! (ft3) DC (OF) DC (OF) DC (OF)
      /   
TOTAL       Avg Avg 
AVERAGIE       Avg  
Figure (3-2. FIE/ld d~lliI.
III-Appendix A-6G
-------
NOIID.-na !2!olct= =b~ I:J W ~ ~~ciil Db'
Im)1n.lcl Dn2!y;1..:J, velJ~ =~ c1 ~Q £:d ~ Im:+~"GJ
(~~:.:J Db:1l1b!r;( r.:1luUon) ~ ~!lQ n:::'c?C2 0.5 [J C'1!:1 ~
e.tcc::J velabw. 1i'ho vel'iM 01 tbQ olUro [Jol (01 ol1!ro p
~IIO etlntcln31) muot cla> bQ dot:Ji'lnlndJ to eho n=::1
0.6 [J ()Ild =1Ccd.
-
~, ood cIro thct vG1bc:!e cuch D9 ' . . . pluaatna t!::o,
Inlet to the filter holda "'," .hell be replnoo,.
unoa In Sa:tlon 6.3 of Method 5. !mmcdlatGl~ DftQ1 com-
ponent chMl!GD, len!r~ha:ko are optloncl. If th~
1c::o!i:-chc<:tIO c.ro dono, tl10 proooduro outlined In Sectl071
U.U Clf MothOlll 5 (with B!lproi)lrlet3 modIllootlooo)
~ bo uaed. .
Aito1 taming 0:11 tho glump end ~ the Iincl
ro&6Inga at tho concluolon of each run, removo tho probe
i'iom the lltel:r.. Conduct c prot.tGot (mDI1dcto~) Ic:I!I-
chedt C!Jln Set:tlon 4.1.4.3 of Method 5 (vitb D!l9Topricto
modification) and record tho 1600 rota. If tho post-tese
ls3ktlge rote exceeds the opeclfled ooCl!ptBble rote tho
tc3ter ohll11 either correct the oomple volume, B9 outuned
II! BetUon 6.3 of Method 6. or ohell void the run.
Droln the Ice bath Md, with the probe disconnected,
purge the remll1n1ng pcrt of the train, by drawing cleon
ambient air through the O}'otGm for 16 mlnutes at tho
IIvorage flow rote used for oamp1\ng.
NOTE.-Clean amblont air CM be provided by pass!1II
air through a charcoallllter. At the option of the tester,
ambient air (without cleaning) may be used.
6.1.0 Calculation of Percent lsolrlnotlc. Follow tho
IIfOOCdwe outllned In Method 6, 8Gctlon U.6.
4.2 Samplo Recovery. '
4.2.1 Contalnu No.1. If" moisture contont o.naI1701.a
10 to be> dooo, wellh tIlo ~ Implngc.r gtI~ ennto7lta to
t.!J1e ncBreSt 0.5 g ana room1 tblo w0lght.
TrnnDfer thl> contento of tbo IIr1n Impln.1G1 to c 25!).mI
lfIIdunted cylinder. RIn£3 the proho, finn Impln(!111 ell
GIInn~tllI8 (!looawBI'G hofolO tho filter, cnd the Cront Ii:ill
of tho flltor holder with 00 percent lcoprop:ulol. Add tho
I1inIo oolutlon to the c17l1nder. D\1ute to 250 ml wtt.!J11t!)
~nt lsoprop:ulol. Add the filter to the calutlon, mix,
,""d Wenofer to the otol'Cl!o contclner. Protect tile £1IIUtl.,!l31
8f!l!InDt evcptlrotlon. Merit the level of lIo.v.Id on the
GIIntalner and Identify the OOII1ple contclner. 117
a.2.2 Contnlne:r N'p. D. If c molDiuro contont cncl~
fa to 00 dono. weigh tho =nd end third Implll$~
(plWJ contento) to tho nooro:Jt 0", (! end record th=
"elghto. Alro, welBh the o!)3nt ol1!ca (!01 (01' olUCQ lie!
gtlll:1lmpln(!er) to tho neere:Jt 0.5 (!.
TronofG1 tho £1Ilut!llnn \rom tho =nd end ehlii/
lmp\n8ero to c l()oo'mI ITI'Cdootcd CI/UndZ1. RInca DI1
conncetln(! (!lBs9wBI'G (incrudillf! I:r-ctr bill of fIlto1 h=
bjJtwcon tbe filter Md IIillcB aollmp!n;Jer with dolo ,
d1£t11bti water end a<:1d thl, rIJw -(\(;1 ~ ~ C1111acl.a.
D\1uto to D volume of 1000 IDl wtth do!on1zc{l, cW;'Jl!cd
WBtez. Transfer the solution to" otoregc COntoln01. Mark
the lavel of I~uld on the contclner. Sen! E\I1d Identll'y tho
-rte~~~~l. '

Note the level of liquid In contBlnero 1 Md 2, and con.
linn whether or not any oomple WaD !oat during ohl~
ment; note this on the Bnn1ytlcBl dato .heet. If a notice-
.ble amount of leakage hco occurred, either void t!1e
IIIIDplo or \ISO methodS, subject to the approv(l\ of tlhe
Administrator, to correct tho ilnBl rosulta.' ,
4.3.1 Contolner No.1. Shako the container holdlDa
the Isopropanol oolutlon WId tho filter. If the filter
breBko up, allow the fmgmenta to settlG for a few minute!!
before removlng a sample. Pipette II l00.mI ellquot of
thl8 IOlutlon Into a ~in1 Erlenmeyer 1Iaak, &lid 2 to 4
drops ofthorln Indicator, and tltrato to a pink endpoint
uallII 0.0100 N harlum oerchlorate. Repeat the titration
with II second BlIquot of sample and BYCJ'IIII! the tltnlUon

ftlaee. &pUcate Utntl.on8 m1l!t III'BB wit.hln 1 pueent
or 0.2 mI, whlohner 18 poeater.
U.2 Container No.2. Thorouahly mix the lIOIution
ID the contains holdlni the contente of the _d and
third \mp1naen. Pipette .1()'mlaI1qDOt of IIIIIIple Into a
tIIO-ml Brleiunerer 1Ia8k. Add 40 ml of I8opJopsnol. 2 to
4 ~ of thorln Indfcator. and tlnteto . pink ~po!nt
~M:a1I ~!d1=~. Dc~ ~~~"'::I
\71~ D=i< c11~\!1i'Jr;'.J=PIT£D~~e::?~
~~~:~:r~~~t:::~~~

8@:21in Ind!CQto1 W inn ml of ~ ~~ ~~..l
1i~~o bbn!wln ~3 =o=C:J@1o=~
[J.«Jt'J~~
Iln Cclibroto C1;jwpmsnt !Z!!!n3 ~o ~WCJ ~.
~Q~~~&1=~~
~ 6.7 (h7Iromew). Note that ilia rcctIDIJDim=
bok-e'Jl~r. 01 the motoring eyotGm, dC2Crlbcd In ~tIs::1
[J.e! of Mothc4 5, e.!oo appllOD to thiD mothc4.
[J.1) GU\nd~loo the berlam I;I3YChl=eo C!lh.~n ~
LJ Ell of otcD&:\rd DUlfur\c celli, to 'Which unn m of r.::J
r:;=t !aI!I1O~111D9 bC3n ctidcd.
o.~
~~.-o~ oue CI:I1cubtiODD ~ ~ ~ =
c::WD e~1mcl ~ boyond toot of tho DII1!uIict! ~
~tI ofi aaum cftor fincl cclculct.!-o,n. '
o.n N omanclcture.
.I.lQ=C~ona1 = of ncr.JZ1o, m" (W'). '
B",=Wcter VO!101In @lo acn IJtI'cm. ~~
b vo1
CM'"", '" ~~ GOn) =oot!o.
~"'" '" &cf).~dO etlIlOOII~, r]/:nm Bg (hi. Bg). II
P.=Absolute 8tack goo pm!SIUQ, mm JBta 02.
P ct<]=~~ 1l000lot.e ~, 7S) Imn J'.'t
(I!9.92In. Bg).W
'iI'.,cAv~,ab!oruto dry glWmotQ1 tom~
C/'!IZ3 P'1gW'G 3-2), ° K f B).
'iI'.=b \70.r0gO Bb::oluto ob\!t gcn tom~ <=
T otd ",~8-~~ift!'~porot1ln), 2M;" ~
Vo";iV~r:.:;.eBJi 1!a!IID1e aliquot tltmtOO, tOO E1
for BoBO. anell0 ml for SO,.
V,,-Totel volume ofllquld oo11ectod In lmp\Dgm
and slUca gel, mi.
V...Volume of gas sample B81111188111'1!f4 by 'dry
V IllS meter, clem (dc!).
m(otd)-Volume of -~~~ measured by the dry
5::ew ~..... to standard ccndltlons,
O.-AV~~ glIB veloclt)', ealculated b:r ~U20I'orJJ:l1lti1eunlt&
Method 2 Equatlon:HI, 0S!ng dlltaobtBlnel!l ooO.OIN5O for E!!II1I9I1 unlta.
!rom Method 8, mIsee (ft/see). ... Aeooptablo Resn1to. If ~~~ ~I ~1n0 p..
V coin" Tot&! volume of I!Olution In which ~ tint, tt!\) ~t!! am ecoopmblo. If tho i"C8II1UIlI1O !ow hi
imlfurIr. acid or I5Ulfur dioxide =p\l) !>IS7 ~n to tho atondBrdD 5!ld I !ZJ beyond tho ---
eontclned 2.'iO ml or 1,000 mI,l'OOj)GCUvoly. 1II!t!!e ~o, tho Adm!nIstrotoJ' 1;j11Jj7 opt ~ -pt *
, V,,,,,VolUl1l9 Oi bnrIum percb10rnte tltnmt ~ !'/GLOW. VI!;;) Clrot1031 <;\ In thl) Blb!!ll'g!ll:iphy of Moth04 3
W tho 5BII1ple, mi. G9 ~e $~t& Othe:rwfea, fI'. 17. T1i!Q D~ of SO.tmll G@o
!OOe Convorn!on to !J2I'COI1t. t1!rm;) Oe=.!JCI1I7i!cl oftllo ~~to of FusL .Q!4,'2!17-2rD.
()'2 A V=:le dr17 IIIIS mew tompzlnturo and Cl7G1C30 UQIIl
c:rt1loo !I1=ure d'OJI. See d8tc cbG3t (Ji'lguro G-2). &\. ~ llIch:::n M ~on ~ ofifJok\n~
OJ! D~ Oea Volume. CCI1i'Gct tho ~lo volumo ~G3riiEtl1n3U:~~mcnt. !1nvl3vDmlJl1tBl~
~d~in~%~a:~r=ln.Ba'f::= ='O~~I&~~T~ttrA~~~
~qUBtion 3-1. ~ ~iI 'fl. !7.liII/Il. b. Brink,lr. New EqnlpmalJt
p, + (!oR ) cm1l ~;/nir.c:J !:zI1 G3m1ll1n..'t Chomieal Proc:c39 OllENJ.
(T ) 00' 136 .Joom&!ofAlrJ?oUutlonCcmtroIAGlOdatlon.lS:162.i9la.
V..(obl)=V",Y ~ . I!.Bom,l.1.Melntenan~I.<::a1Ibmt!on,lII1dOpcmtlon
T... Potd '" bat1netlc ~p1IIJg .Equlpment. Ollioo of
.Air I'ragramJ!. EnvinmJnGDtaI Protection AgonC!F.
~ ~Ie Part, N.C. APTD-G676. MIII'cb,1911.
-K V. Y Pba,+(.ut'/13.6) "1Iam!l1 B. F. BUd D. E. Cwnann. Collaborntlft
- 1 .. T.. Itndy of MGthod for ~n of Sulfur Dioxide
8mf1i11ous from Btat.loIIIII'Y 80- (POSI!II Puel-1i'\N4
Iteam Otmemtcml). Bnv1nmmontal ProtectIon AllenC!F.
Equation 8-1 a-.m Trt&ng1e Park, H.C: EPA-«IO/4-1+-GM.
~ber, 11178.
7. Anno8l Bock of ABTM StIIndar/la. Pan 81; WaW,
A~bGric Analysia. pp. 40-42. Amerlcan SocIst,
b TegtJng and UatcrtaIa. Philadelphia. Pa. 1!'74-- -
where:
EI~O.8858 0K/mm IIg for metric unI~.
-17.84 oR/in. Bg fnl' English uni~.
NcnB.-lf the IOIIk rate observed during any manda-
tGry 1oak~heck9 ezceod9 the epeclftOO acceptable rate,
the tester ohBll either oorrect the value of V - In Equation
&-1 (u described in BeotIon e.a 01 Method 6), 0: IIbaU
Inftlidate the teIIt run.

IA Volume of Water Vapor III1d MoIsture Coutent.
Calculate the YOlume of water npor asIng EqllUlGn
6-2 of Method 6i.~e we1sht of water ooIleCtcc1 In $he
~dl:r 11114 mnca 101 can be directly conve1'ted '"
Uten (the IpeCi1Ic sravit, of water 18 1 1ImI). Ca!-
III-Appendix A-G9
c::::':::3a ~":J C::::::-;V C'0~C\ c1 t":J ~.J2?o C:;::U., ,,,,:;~
\':::JG-Oc1G~(J. 'iJ"::Jc7[J:r::::f'b~Mcf~
[J~":::J(')Jl'8bC'2J=:l~.!:-;:aG.,,:::() Oe2:Jc.:::::::::;D
L:;:::::.--:!~~C!1I!1d~&g.&QIA::..";::::=:)c1~~
c::::j =~ =b~ Ilcciil ilO~ ~Irln~
M O~ C1ttl !ZI!c:\ (lncllZdIn:J GOD) ~.

.Rr(1Y'o-1Y' c) ((VOOIC).
CL:1a= 1rD V. \\. w"
Q(ot;])
JEQootioR!. IH)

~o.Ct'.m~1Bi~~!:zI1m~omw.
",n.nJ!){uli-< Ib~ !:zI1 L<:1I.'!1IQI1!D!tD.
().() ~~d!wt~=~
N(1Y'o-1Y'aD) (1Y';:,,)
Ca>rJ=llrD Vy
"GJ(ofAl)

JE~1!BttC!!l! ~$

~o.C!31:!I3 U~!:ZI1 m...r1Jl!e 1:WtD.
o'l-'J!){Ao-aib7moq D1:r J3~ ~
C:.'l ~~cV~n.
C:.U ~1!!Dtb:n hm IDU C::3o.

H = nan ~o~;;ra 1Y'Bc+ (1Y' c:41'if c)lP'e;;,.+ NJ/h8.('))]
ooov.J?'o~"
Equatfo!i!1 Q-
-------
~ D--'i71[)"ii'J)JI. Drni'WMX1NA- @!7 = 'Fha ~t1lvo ob~tloDCIl G:!l'i'OJr usoclc,ted
OPlJ.CIfiff! 0\7 I:;tJXOOXor,o !?WOr::t O!l'AlruOmm1Z' W'il~ = ev~ (;f fuGnty-flv0 1i'elUUngs W
OO~ II) . . tberoforo G:!.!:!tabllshGd. The. accUracy of. the
.. msthOl! . must bG teJtGn luto GCcountr-whea
Mam.y DtatWIIn8Y ~= ~8I'BG 171DRMo de~ ~I'Olo vlolat1oXllJ of appll-
c~1tI!Il!3 mto tho CI~!;)=: flhG;:O o~ cab!o O;?ac1ty IJta.I!4CIni!D. ..
o!.C:'M aro ulJ\!mUy m t!:!o @.G:!IO oil e, pl1!mW. -- --
'TI'h\s !:D.9thOO !.xlvoRwa ~o lio~tlGll o!l 11. M~~ c~ cwlWtBbtUty.
~nume GpaclW ~:Y q1J)~ ~&'11Gro. 'lr'ii3o. .
=~oo mc1uc1.GIJ P~=:J fo:? ~o ~8 1l.t Piinclple. Tho opoolty of emJssloDG
=~ cartiflcctlOI1 oil o'OCOF'\7oro, =ca p~OO'UiJiW ~m. IJtctlOJU1!7 Gourcas 10 dGtG1i'm!:ilGd vla-
~ 00 WOO m ~a fiolc.il fo:? C/oto~t!.1nl ~ ~D11y by c. qualW~ obsGrVei'. -
~1m:ro OPru:lty. Tho ~)i:O=CQ c:\ e plwmo co 1.2 AppllC&bUlty. 'X'h11J mGthoo is appU-
~o=tl. by = o~ ~~ 'illl~En e mwrn- oo1i)lo foi' tllo dO~tlOD (;f tho OPM~
D:=? @1 ~nC3, ~= ~ v~ rnDQI)7 ~ ~- oil li)m!ssl0Wl i'rom stl:lt1onary oourceo .pU1i'-
~~ZG ~ = ~ ~ Oi1JWJtJioIID. '....
~~ crow CI lJianmcCDt infIuonco U~D 21. PYcwelZures. Tho obse1i'V1Oi' qu~We«2 m
)JJ~~ Clpj»OCECDCQ m.c!\!~o: A3!.B'lo 0:\ ~ ~- ~corow.co 'i1lth PC=(3i1i\ph S of th!s m t:ilo fOUO~D6 p~U1i'CJ foJi' 17iI:P
~;r;]oI? 'i1&t!:a 1i'OO~ to t!:!o !roD; po11J\t a1? 1!!e111)7 ~~fJ t!:!o op~At:Y oil OiWd01l!D:
@~Clt&Om\ of attl:l!:hCJll enc.il ~o~~ cw= a.1 J?C3lUoIL. 'XUo qucl1f!~ 0~i'VC8 W!lill
19>:\=0; CDcIl CDglo of tho 0~G:i' wlt!:a roo ot=d at c dl.6te\i1co cU@clont to p!i"ovlc&o. c.
~ to CI plumo om1tood fJrom c !."OOtc,n~ cltaE\!;" view of tho emlss10Wl with ~!lo !lun
o~ with c, l~ length to w!(gth l'I1>tlo. Tho oJrloKloot& in I;hG l~O° BGt:toJr to hl.l3 bacII. Con-
lli'.:)~ &nc!udGIJ ~c crttaric. cpp1!.ccl)lo oWtont mth .iX!.£\&IltIMn1ng tho chnvo roqulro-
00 ~= \7~blw. . . . mli)nt, thta obseJrv01i' sh~. lIS much I!£) ~blo,
O~ho:?vmflblw 'i1h1cll mlllY not bG conhl- mooD hID ob~l"VEItlons from I!I pooltlOI!. such
~&o !D the field c.ro lwn1:ileaconc t1I> =ooly =!.BD O!;DC&ty 17cBuG:J tho outA=nt = be ~~oo w1th tho ~on. typo fac21!ty, ob£01i'VG1i"o .=mo c.ncil
(9iCJtoot ().~ oK =~. JErooOVGJi', tho p4:I- CItiillct&02!, end tho dcto on c, fiGlc1. lia~ Dh0'Jt
~~(IW ilc:? CI proJlt!.\70 01i'Ji'O:? &D c1J:D 1:I1G grectoot (~I')...l ~. Tho timo, GGtlmE/,~ ~
<;hwn e plume IIJ vlo~ ~ ouch contl'8lt-> to ~o cmlrotoD l=t!o!!.. ()PproB~ 'Obl~
faa con~t~oXllJ. 1O'!2c2:J? oon~tA01M pJr=ntmiJ ci1roetwn, ostlmc.tct& mnd spoo;tll. (iJc:JCrtption
a b.::J WEiltJi'mtixl!;: I:~~~. the ~p=t of tho oky cond!tlon (prosence c.ncil 00100 of
O~(;'y (l)K e plwm.o Ro &= =cil cpp1i'roC!loo clcucJs), CDd plume ~groUDc.il = =1i'~
C:;S@ Q o!laU be !D~O e.t the po!nt of grelilt:.:Jt op~ty
t!ve bl~ d(1)- in thfIt pG1i't!:1m of tho plume whOIi'O con-
@=:J ro&h CImt1nuOV!J3y Glt tho
nClt!.oD of opoolty GtcJ!!d&'ds ~tIG to ob~1i'Vo:? plumo, but 1XllJtc~..QJ Dhlill. ob1::G1i'VQ tho ~umo
C!?i'OJr. moment&'Uy M 15-c=d &nta!'VaW.
G:ltucilloo hI!Iv by «:IW\1lf!c12 o'Osoi'Voro vhilo rooo- plume RI> It omtarae>J from. thG toJr vc,pm' ill DO 10~I' Vislblo. Tho
w!cta) which Invt'lvo Ii> to~ of 7<10 sew of ob:JG1i'VGJi' ~l 1i'e01)Jrc.il tho flppro~ta dls-
2D ~B6 eltCh ero C!J fonows: tCDco from tile eDl.ls:llon outlGt to tho point
(1) P01i' bla.clt plumes (133 sow fit I!. 8t"1oOO !:il tho plume li>t which the obsorvctlolW arc
e;oncli'cto1i'), 100 pOi'cli)nt oj? tho seta wora m.000.
!.'oeil. with Ii> posltlvG Ol'i'01i'1 of 1<:& tllltn 7.6 2.3.2 Dete.chccll ateam plume. WhGI!. wElte1i'
)l}o~Gn',-ope.clty; 90 poreoJJ:\~ wcro roa.d with ve.poli'!:il the plume condenses and becomoo
CI i?oslt~vo ono? of 1= thw. 5 p~ont opacity. vIDIb1verage opacity of 0m1ss.10IIIJ for a 15-
aecond perlocl. .
2.6 Data Reduction. Opa.clty sh~l bo (10-
tGrmlned aa a.n. averago of M cOIlDOCutlvo
observations recorded at 15-aecond Inte1i'Vaw.
Divide thecutlve In t1mIcu11i>ta tho cverocrCl by auxnmixlcr ~o opac1t~
of tho M ob:JGF'\7()tIODD anc\l cill171illng ~ID awn

by 2~. If en cppl!Cf\blli) stl:lDd08'l& o~l1ieG an
cvtlolW mEldo durine; the spooWoo timo
portod. RecoJrc.il the cvorniJe oplM:lty on.!i:I JreOOM
sheet. (Seo
(sloEn bt !:nne!lJtG oil Ghowlng tho ccndldc.b CI
ooXllgliooo i'UD of 60 j!)lumoo-:-25 blLM:k j!)lumC8
a2!.1'i!. 216 1;7\111;0 plum~n=~ by GI IJmn!ro
~ooreto1i'. !?lu!Dro oltb1n GJCCh GOt of 25 bl~
CID«& 215 wh!.oo I?U1IW ol:l."U !:Io prosonooc.ill.n 1i'CD-
120m OOOGJi'. 'R'he ce.nCl1dc~ QDS!gns an ope.clty
\7e!'i!le 00 c.:ICh gllume oneil roooOOD !l1fj obco:;'a
\7()~on on CI au1tcblo fonn. ..t the complet1oXi.
of =h I1UD of 60 ~gc, thG GCOJre of thi' lnmmaleti! to D13tYJUJrG cpoolty ~
~ho ~tei' of the amoko &enemtol' st:!.ck.
Tho cmOk0 motai' output chen display 1n-
stack opc.clty ~ upnn c pe.th1engt.h oq~
to tho et:!.ck eJItt diameter, on e. !u11 0 to 100
~=D.t chart roooi'Q01i' 001IJ
completion of each test, the zero find ape.n
drift 8hcJ1 ~ chCtllroo end If the 
-------
caIDIB ~ IrI.!E!D. 'X'ho =O~O m.O~Y ohcll bs
qtcm:!~t:>d. c.t ~o ~ of ~tlo!l, to
meet t.ho apwUlc:!otlono list.IW. In TC!ble 9-1.
'X'h1r3 demonatrat1on ohcll b') I('0P~~ fole
1cw1n8 CI.n~ GUb:Jcquent ropatr 00' ropl..e.C
to the 11m1ting a.perture.
3.3.2.5 Ca.l1bratlon error. '[]'Blng neutral-
deIW1ty fllters of known opa.city, checJt the
Grror between the actual respoDBO and the
theoretlcaJ lli1ear response ot the amoke
meter. This check 18 accomplished ~y first
ccal1bre.t1ng the smoke meter sooording to
3.3.1 ane! then Inserting a serl.es Of three
neutral-denslty fil terti (If nominal ope.city ot
20, 50, and 75 percent 111 the sm01ro meter
petblengtb. Filters caUbarted with1n:2 per-
cent Ghall be used. Oare should be tl!.ken
when Inserting the .iuters to prevent stray
light from a1Iactlng the meter. Make a total
ot five nonconsecutive readings for each
filter. The maximum: error on anyone read-
Ing shall be 3 percent opacity.
3.3.2.6 Zero and span drl.tt. Determine
the zero and span drift by cal1brat1Dg and
operating the smoke generator 111 a normal
mElnDer over a 1-hour per10cL The c1rttt Is
measured by checking the zero and sps.n at
the end of this period.
3.3.2.7 Response time. Detenn1ne the re-
sponse time by producng the series of five
B1mulated 0 percent and 100 percent opacity
vaJues and observ1l1g the time requ1red. to
reech stable response. Opacity valuoe of 0
percent and 100 percent may be B1mulated
by alternately switching the power to the
light source o!r and on whUe 'the smoke
generator is not operat1ng.
4. r.l!fC7'ctIC~s.
4.1 AIr Po~UtlOD, Oontrol District Rules
and RegulatioWl, Los Angeles County All'
Pollution Control DistrIct, Regulation IV,
Prohibitions. Rule 50.
4.2 We16burc1, Melvin L, Field Operations
and Enforcement Manual for AIr, US. Bnv1-
ronmentaJ Protection Agency, Research Tri-
angle Park" N.O.. APTD-lloo, August 1972.
pp. 4.1-4.36.
4.3 Oondon, E. U., and. Oc11sha.w, II.. Hand.
boot. of Physics, McGraw-HlU CO., N.T.. N.T..
1968. Table 3.1, p. 6-02.
III-Appendix A-71
-------
FIGU~t 9~1
!R~Cmtij (j~ VISUAL DETERMlNATXON Or OPACITV
PAGE' 6'
~~
~O~Wil.\\!1P HOURS OF OBSERVATXON  
J. ~  
U.QCATXON OBSERVER =
'jJgsa NUMBER OBSERVER CERTIfICATION DATE =
 -
[gATE OBSERVER AFFILZATION -
-------
FIGUREo9-Z OBSERVATIOn RECORD
PAGE _OF-
COMPANY
LOCATION
TEST NUMBER
DATE
OBSERVER
TYPE FACIL lTV
POINT Of EMISSIONS
H
H
H
I
:t>'
'"0
'"0
(()
~
P,
1-"
~
:t>'
I
-...J
W
      5TEA~1 PLUME 
   Seconds (check if applicable) 
Hr. ~lfn, 0 I:> JU c:> Attacnea vetacned CONMENTS
 o       
 1       
 2       
 3       
 4       
 5       
 6       
 7       
 8       
 9       
 10       
 11       
 12       
 13   I    
 14       
 15       --
 16      
 17       
 18       
 19       
 20       
 21       
 22       
 23       
 24       .-
 25      
 26       
 27       
 28       
 29       
COMPANY
lOCATION
TEST NUMBER
DATE
fIGURE 9-2 OBSERVATION RECORD
(Continued)
OBSERVER
TYPE FACILITV
~OINT OF EMISSIONS
PAGE _OF-
      STEAH PLUf1E 
   Seconds check if applicable) 
'Hr. Min. 0 J~ 3U 4:> Attached' Oetached COMMENTS
 30      
 31      
 32      
 33      
 34      
 35      
 36      
 37      
 38      
 39      
 40 I     
 41 ,     
 42      
 43 !     
 44      
 45      
 46      
 47      
 48      
 49      
 50      
 51      
 52      
 53      
 54      
 55      
 56      
 57      
 58      
 59      
IFa Doc.74.-26150 Fl1e4 11-11-74;8:41) am)
-------
Mailiod 8-Vlm.lElIl!Mermmaft!oo cq d1.
~dty of RmI""""'lFmm ia~
hun:ee
AJtemate Meduxl t-Determl...&. 01 tbIJ
!Opacity of EmlssloDllFrom StatloDary
Soun:es Remotely by !!Jdu I J 1

Thlo alternate method provides the
quantitative determination of the opacity of
tan emissions plume remotely by a mobile
lidar system (laser radar; Light Detection and
Ranging). The method Includes procedures
~or the calibration of the lidar and procedures
to be used in the field for the lidlU'
determin&tion of plume opacity. The lidar liD
uoed to measure plume optacity during eitheIi'
day or nighttime hourn because it contains il8
own pulsed light source or transmitter. The
operation of the lidar io not dependent upom
ambient lighting conditiono (light. dark, ounny
or cloudy).
The lidat' mechanism 01' technique Is
tapplicable to measuring plume opscity aU
numeroull wavelengths of laseIi' radiation.
lHowQver. the performance G!valuation and
calibration teot result9 given in oupport of
this method apply only to Q lidar that
camployo a ruby (red light) Ieeei' [litefereDCfJ
5.1].

2. Princjple and Applicability

1.1 !?rinciplo. The opacity oU viclble
cmissiono from otationtal71 OOWU1O (stacke,
roof vents, etc.) 10 meaoured remotely by Q
mobile lidar (laser radar).
1.2 Applicability. 11Iio method is
Gpplicable foIi' the remota m0aoU4"OrnenR 0« ilia
opacity of visible am!aoionG iIrom siat!OIl1&ri)7
oourceo during both ni8httime end daylight
conditions. purouam to 40 CFR D OO.l1(b). It Ie
CiJlsa applicable ~or ilie calibration and
performa nce verification 01 the mobile lide!i'
~or the measurement of the opadty q)f
cmisoions. A per1ol'ii!sn4:eldocip
o~ification foIi' £1 b.JfI!c Yid8!i' @ye~OO3IB !i1l$@
Incorporated into tW5 meilicd.
1.3 Definitions.
Azimu th angle: Th!i! ongle im tho 2Iorl80ntw
plane that designateo where the IeeeI' beam Is
pointed. It is measured from an arbitrary
fixed reference line in that plane.
Backscatter: The ocattering 01 laser light II!!
a direction opposite to mat of the incident
laser beam dU0 to reflection from particulatw
along the beam'o £limO spheric path whicll
may include Q smo!to plumo.
Backscatter signal: The general term foIi' tOO
lidar return oignml which results from laser
light being backscattered by etmoapheric 8,":rl!
omokQ plume particulate!\.
Convergence distance: The diatance from
the lidar to the point of overlap 01 the lida~
receiver'a field-of-view and the laoor beam.
Elevation angle: The angle of inclination oil
the laser beam refeI'Gilced 20 the hQrizontcl
plane.
Far reg1oo: Tho rogiOi'l of !tic mtmoqpbei'l'i1'o
path along tho lidali' lina-of-sight beyond Gii'
behind !!:Is plllli'iliJ beinB mraanurod.
Lider: Acronym fur Light Dotectiol!1 eJMJ!
RaD3in3.
Lidar ranga: Tbe range or dietarwa from tho
*dar to I) ~oint IlK interoat aloll8 the !ider Ji!w.
q)~-Qi8M.1 2
Nil&' region: Tbe region or the atmospheric
patb along !be lidu line-ol-sight between the
lidar's convlJ\1I8I1Ct1 distance and the plume
being measured.
Opacity: One minus the optical
transmittance of II smoke plume. screeD
target. etc.
Pick interval: The time or range intervals In
the lidar backscatter signal whose minimum
average amplitude is used to calculate
opacity. Two pick intervals are required, ona
In the near region and one in the far region.
Plume: The plume being measured by lidar.
Plume signal: The backscatter signal
resulting from the lase~ light pulse passing
through e plume.
l/R S corredion: The correction made for
the systematic decrease in lidar backscatter
signal amplitude witn range.
Reference signal: The backscatter signal
resulting from the laser light pulse passing
through ambient air.
Sample interval: The time period between
Duccessive sempleli) for a digital signal 01'
between successive measurements for an
analog signal.
Signal spike: An abrupt. momentary
Increaoe and decrea!le in oignal amplitude.
Sourc0: The source being tested by lidar,
Time reference: The time1t..) when the
laser pulse emergeD from the laser, used aD
the reference in alllidar timo or range
me&surementfl.
2. ProceduNJG.

The mobile lidBi' calibrated In aocordanc~
t1/ith Paregi'aph 3 of !hiD method shall use the
~ollowina proceduroc for remotely measuring
the oiJlOcity oIT IIItaticlMK');! OOW'Ce emiDsiono:

2.1 IUdar 1?ocition. The lidar 8h811 be
pODitioned at Q distonce !from the plume
sufficient to provide en unobstructed view of
the source emissiono. The plume muM be at Q
rmnge of at leaot 00 metern or three
consecutive pick intervels (whichever 10
greater) from the lidlu'o trensmitter/receiver
convergence distance along the line-of-sight.
The maximum eCfe"ctive opacity meaourement
distance of the lidEli'-io 0 function of local
stmospheric conditions. laser beam diameter.
IInd plume diameter. The teot position of the
lidar shall be selected 00 that the diameter of
the laser beam at the measurement point
within the plume shall be no larger than
three-fourtho the plume diameter. The beam
diameter is calculated by Equation (AM1-l):

D(lidar)=A+Reju;O.75 D(Plume) (AM1-1)

where:

D(Piume)=diameter of the plume (cm).
4>=laser beam divergence measured in
radians
IR = range from the lidar to the source (cm)
D(Lidar)=diameter of the laser beam at range
lit (cm),15l
A=diameter of the laser beam or pulse
where it leaves the laser.
The lidar range. R. ie obtained by aiming
end firing the laser at the emissions source
structure immediately below the outlet. The
range value io then determined from the
backscatter oignel which conoisto of & oignal
apilte (return from oource structure) and the
ctmospl10ric b&ckscatter signal (Referencca
III-Appendix A-74
5.1). This backscatter signal should be
recorded.
When there Is more than one source of
emissions in the immediate vicinity of the
plume. the lidar shall be positioned so that
the laser beam passes through only 8 single
plume. free from any interference of the other
plumes for a minimum of 50 meters or three
consecutive pick intervals (whichever Is
greater) in each regioD before and beyond the
plume along the line-of-sight (determined
from the backscatter signals). The lidar shall
initially be positioned so that its line-of-sight
is approximately perpendicular to the plume.
When measuring the opacity I1f emissions
from rectangular outlets (e.g.. roof monitors.
open baghouses. noncircular stacks, etc.). the
lidar shall be placed in a position so that its
line-of-sight is approximately perpendicular
to the longer (major) axis of the outlet.
2.2 Lidar Operational Restrictions. The
lidar receiver shall not be aimed within an
angle of j: 15' (cone angle) of the sun.
This method shall not be used to make
opacity measurements if thunderstorms.
snowstorms. hail stornls. high wind. high-
ambient dust levels. fog or other atmospheric
conditions cause the reference signals to
consistently exceed the limits specified in
Section 2.3.
2.3 Reference Signal Requirements. Once
placed in its proper position for opacity
measurement. the laser is aimed and fired
with the line-of-sight near the outlet height
and rotated horizontally to a position clear of
the source otructure and the associated
plume. The backscatter signal obtained from
this position is calli';! the ambient-air or
reference signal. The I.dar operator shall
inspect this signal [Sec:ion V of Reference
5.1) to: (1) determine if the lid8r line-of-sight
is free from interference from other plumes
&nd from physical obstructions .uch a.
ceble.. power lines, etc.. for 0 minimum of 50
meters or three consecutive pick Intervals
(whichever Is greater) in each region before
and beyond the plume, and (2) obtain a
qualitative measure of the homogeneity of the
ambient air by noting any signal spikes.
Should there be any aignal spikes on the
reference Dignal within a minimum of 50
meters or three consecutive pick intervals
(whichever io greater) in each region before
and beyond the plume, the laser shall be fired
three more timeD Gnd the o!;lerator shall
Inspect the reference signalo on the display. If
the spike(s) remains. the azimuth engle ahall
be changed and the above procedures
conducted again. U the spike(s) disappeal'lJ in
all three reference signals. the lidar line-of-
oight is acceptable if there i8 shot-to-shot
consistency and there is no Interference from
other plumea.
Shot-to-shot consistency of a series of
reference 0lgn81s over a period of twenty
Beconds is verified in either of two ways. (1)
The lidar operator shall observe the reference
signal amplitudes. for shot-to-shot
consistency the ratio of R, to R. (amplitudeo
of the near and far region pick Intervals
(Section2.6.11) shall vary by not more than j:
6% between shota: or (2) the lidar operator
shall accept anyone of the reference eignala
IInd treat the other two liS plume signal 0; then
the opacity for each of the flubBequent 152
-------
rofei'enCQ olBnolo 10 C£Jlculoled (lE4!uolion
AM1-2). fCT Bhot-to-ohot conoiolcmcy, the
c~ocltr \1olt!:3o ohGlII be wllMn % 8% of 1m
o~acity Glncl the aODoclated So valueD leso
than or li1(!uml to 8% (full Bcale) (Seclion 2.0).
III II Del of reference Bignalo fallo 10 meellb
-------
H
H
H
I
:t:>'
"0
"0
ro
::s
P-
I-"
~
:t:>'
I
-.J
0'\
UDn lOG .:O~TlOI. 'H "BEN HBUUIO'
hji jj(wL 'umb..r.
Ihlill 81 cunOl 11111£1 tit neb in~i'i~fI8l "uu uder tutl
eOlnOl un  
IUIIU 1$Slun PlOJECT CITY. STITE
c..ti...~ .. ...t "1'
UiU!C !.OG U~:\TROl ~H"REH TABLUnU\ (run!")
Ilnlll . COlnOl IUIIU Iii ii8C~ i.~i,i'u.1 ..UCI III'" tutl
COlnOL DIU  
IUIIU uSlun PlOJEeT ~I'" sun
".t Ltl h.. I..hr-
Figure AM1-1 Lidar Log Control Number Tabulation
-------
H
H
H
I
;J:<
'"d
'"d
CD
::s
p"
~.
~
;J:<
I
-...J
-...J
"'"' II 1.111. lit. 11""11' 1111'"
I.IIIU IIt'UHIIR"' ,on,
IIUI... '"111011 " III" I... ..1111 ,,"."-- '111111' ,1'.1 lie'
. ..al,..1 numb."
11'1111. S.
,..1111, '1.' .1' 1"..t..;
'" Ih II,,, .11, u
'"11111 .1 "IU:
11...1 "..1
tn.
- ,.
01l1C"" I' SlUrel
LII.. I'CI,DII," I' UIII IS .,.
Su... '''' "' .lIIcI.1 ,,,,,,,,,":
I.
1"11 ID saure,
hlllOOli1 'S 0 I
PI... ''''1....11'''' h,t,., ....,.. .t... "...... '''.f.
W'd ""': III" _1m ., ... _1m .,
ih ".,"11"0: III" - C... - C
IIf'."": hilA tR'
CI... ..u,: "110
811' .1...11..: billn u.
.,'"1" "81''',= hllft - -0 en. - ~..
'hllllll" b',," - 1m ... 11ft
..0
'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-.
e... ren.', .d. .1 '1,1' (11,". .,1....... ,ht"'. .tc t
.'UIIIC lAPIS
~~~
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
Lilli 'UICIIOI ..IIIIU'IOI
hll II 1111 uloI,lIlI1
I
SII'U I,IIUI .11..11.. I I II'"'' I I
fill 1111 '1111'" .. 11'1' _1111"
. I . J
CII,I"II' I,ICII,
C"UIII" ',ICII,
hu,'" II 'II,
.-.-.-.-.-.-.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
0"16'01'1 II8Ii'UII: I
W"IUS SI8IUUIi:
1111:
OPIIUOI'S llIli"I':
Uti:
1111,
W"I.1t IIIU '811:
Uti:
FIgure AM1-11 Lldar Log Of OperatIons
-------
t 
(1) 
1:' 
::J 
~ 
.... to
.....
Co J
~
t 
(1) 
1:' 
::J 
.... 
.... to
.....
Co J
~
(a) Reference S igll'lal, 'UR2 Corrected
(Near Region)
(Far Region)
Convergence Point

1

-
Rn Rf

~~
t
..~
-
Time or Range
(b) Plume Signal. 'lIRa Corrected
--
~--
/p lu m e
/'


~.J1(L ~ - .
Spike
.
In
If
(a)
(b)
Time or Range ~
Reference signal, 1/R2-corrected. This reference signal is for
plume signal (b). Rn' Rf are chosen to coincide with In' If.
Plume signal. 1/R2-corrected. The plume spike and the decrease
in the backscatter signal amplitude in the far region are due to
the opacity of the plume. I, If are chosen as indicated in
Section 2.6. n
Figure AMl-XII.
Plots of lidar Backscatter Signals
III-Appendix A-78
-------
2.6 Opacity CBllculetion &nd Det&
Analysis. Referring to the reference signal
and plume signal in Figure AM1-1II. the
measured opacity (0.) in percent for each
lidar measurement is calculated using
Equation AMl-2. (0.=1- T.: T. is the plume
transmittance.)


0, . (1001) [ 1 - ( ~~ ~:) ~],

(AM1-2)
where:
In = nedr-region pick interval signal'
amplitude. plume oignal.l/R1corrected.
I, = far-region pick interval signal amplitude.
plume signal. l/R. corrected.
Rn"" near-region pick interval signal
amplitude. reference signal.l/R'
corrected. and
R,,,,far-region pick interval signal amplitude.
rcr~rence signal. l/R ~ corrected.
The l/R'correction to the plume and
reference signal amplitudes is made by
multiplying the amplitude for each successive
sample interval from the time reference. by
the square of the lidar time (or r\lnge)
associated with that sample interval
(Reference 5.1 J.
The first step in selecting the pick intervals
I -
f -
The standard deviation. Stn. of the set of
amplitudes for the near-region pick interval.
In. shall be calculated using Equation
(AMl-5).


SIn - [ ~ (
f=1
Inf - In
(m-I)
)2] It

(AM1-S)
Similarly. the standard de\'iaUons Suo SRn.
and SR' are calculated with the three
expressions in Equation (AM1-6).
Sit
[ ~ (Iff - I, )2] It
f=1 (m-l)
=
So
(100%>( If Rn )~ [SIn 2 .
2 Rf I n ~
=
The calculated values of In. I,. Rn. Rt. Sto. St,.
~o' SR'. 0.. and S. should be recorded. Any
plume-signal with an S. greater than 8% shall
be discarded.
2.6.1 Azimuth Angle Correction. If thra
azimuth angle correction to opacity specified
in this section is performed. then the
elevation angle correction specified In
Section 2.6.2 shall not be perfonned. When
opacity is measured in the residual region 01
&n attached steam plume. and the lidar line-
for Equetion AM1-2 10 io divide the plumG
signal amplitude by the reference signlill
amplitude at the same respective ranges io
obtain a "nonnalized" signal. The pick
intervals selected using this normalized
signal. are a minimum of 15 m (100
nanoseconds) in length and consist of at least
5 contiguous sample intervals. In addition.
the following criteria. listed in order of
importance. govern pick interval selection. (1)
The intervals shall be in a region of the
normalized signal where the reference signal
meets the requirements of Section 2.3 and is
everywhere greater than zero. (2) The
Intervals (near and far) with the minimum
averageamplitude are chosen. (3) If more
than one interval with the same minimum
average amplitude is found. the interval
closest to the plume is chosen. (4) The
standard deviation. So. for the calculated
opacity shall be 8% or less. (So is calculated
by Equation AMl-?).152
If So is greater thap 8%. then the far pick
interval shall be changed to the next interval
of minimal average amplitude. If So is still
greeter than 8%. then this procedure is
repeated for the far pick interval. This
procedure may be repeated once again for the
near pick interval. but if So remains greater
than 8%. the plume signal shall be discarded.
The reference signal pick intervals. Rn and
R,: must be chosen over the same time
1 m
iii I Ifi .
i=1
m
I Rni .
f=1
1
m
R =!
f m
R
n
=
  [.~1 (R - R )2]"
SRn = nf n 
 (m-1) 
  [m ( Rff - Rf )2]"
SRt = i~l
 (m-l)
    (AMI-6) I
The standard deviation. So, for each
associated opacity value. 0.. shall be
calculated using Equation (AMl-7).
5If2
P
f
SRn2
p.
n
SRf2] ~
P
f
152
(AMl-7)
.
of-sight is not perpendicular to the plume. it
may be necessary to correct the opacity
measured by the lidar to obtain the opacity
that would be measured on a path
perpendicular to the plume. The following
method. or any other method which produce!!
equivalent results. shall be used to determine
the need for a correction. 10 calculate the
correction. and to document the point within
the plume at which the opacity was
measured.
III-Appendix A-79
interval eo the plumra signal pick intervals. IQ
and I,. respectively [Figure AM1-1II). Other
methods of selecting pick intervals may be
used if they give equivalent results. Field-
oriented examples of pick interval selection
are available in Reference 5.1.
The average amplitudes for each of the
pick intervals. In. I,. Ro. Rt. shall be calculated
by averaging the respective individual
amplitudes of the sample intervals from the
plume signal and the associated reference
signal each corrected for 1/R'. The amplitude
of In shall be calculated according to
Equation (AM-3).
1
n
!
!II
m
I
i=1
(AMI-3)
I -
n1
=
wh~re:
In.=the amplitude of the ith sample int~rval
(near-region).
I", sum of the individual amplitudes for the
sample intervals.
m = number of sample intervals in the pick
interval. and
In=average amplitude of the near-region pick
interval.
Similarly. the amplitudes for It. Ro. and R,
are calculated with the three expressions in
Equation (AMl-4).
m
I
;=1
Rfi
(AM1-4)
Figure AM1-I\r(b) shows the geometry of
the opacity correction. L' is the path through
the plume along which the opacity
measurement is made. P' is the path
perpendicular to the plume at the same point.
The angle E is the angle between L' and the
plume center line. The angle (7I'/2-E). is the
angle between the L' and P'. The measured
opacity. 0.. measured along the path L' shall
be corrected to obtain the corrected opacity.
00<' for the path P'. using Equation (AM1~).


Ope = (l00%) [1 - (l - 0.01 Op)COS (nl2-r)]


= (100%) [1 - ( 1 - '0.01 Op)Sin c]

(Am-e)152

The correction in Equation (AM1~) shall
be performed if the inequality in Equation
(AM1-9) is true.
&
>
_1
Sin
[ 1n (101
1 n (100
0p> ]

- 0 >
P 152
(AMI-g)

Figure AM1-IV(a) showlHhe geometry
used to calculate E and the p9sition in the
plume at which the lidar llU!J!.surement is
made. This analysis assumes that for a given
lidar measurement. the range from the lidar
to the plume. the elevation angle of the lidar
from the horizontal plane. and the azimuth
angle of the lidar from an arbitrary fixed
reference in the horizontal plane can all be
obtained directly.
-------
H
H
H
I
~
I'Q
I'Q
CD
::s
p,.
...,.
X
~
I
co
o
Projection of Pp onto the 'II-plane, Pp" Plume measurement position

./;", R /
/ I ',6
/" "
. I '
/ . R
R" , I P E.
S /
/
I
1(
Pp (Rp' til', Pp>
Plume drift angle position
I P (R til' + a' P >
I a a' . a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

, / -'I
" R / I /
a 7" ' , - R" ,6 / I / /
, '-'- P / I /
, .,
, -'-' I . I /
" '-, ~l/Projection of P onto the xy.plane. Pp' /
, " P I /
......, " I /
, , I /
......" /
',Ra' "R I I /
" " a I /
" " I /
, " I /
',,, /
',' I /
" I /
'......' I /
,,, /
'\J/
Projection of Pa onto the xy.plane. Pal
/
/
~$ (~$' o. ~\)
{a}
lidar line-af-Sight,
Position P p
(b)
Figure AMI. IV, Correction in Opacity for Drift of the
Residual Region of an Attached Steam Plume.
-------
R. - rangeJrom IIdar to source'
{3, -elevation angle of R,'
R. ~ range from lidar to plume Ht the opHcity
measurement point'
tJ. = elevation angle of R;
R. -= range from lidar to plume Ht some
arbitrary point, Po' so the drift angle or
the plume can be determined'
{3. ,=elevalion angle of R.'
a'" angle between Ro and R.
The correction angle E shall be deh:rmined
tI~;ng Equation AM1-10,
\I here:

,,- Cos -, (CostJ. CostJo Coso' T Sin{3. S'nIl,I,
"nd
R6 = (R~2
whpre:
R',=R, Cos 13" and
R'. = R. Cos 13..
111 the special case where the plume
£
=
Cos-1
where:
R", =(R'~, + R. 2 Sin 2 (J.)"".

If the angJe E is such that fe, 30' or E L
t:;O', the azimuth angle correction shall not
be performed and the associated opacity
\ illue shall be discarded.
p > Cos -1
p -
The measured opacity, 0., along the lidar
path L, is Hdjusted to obtain the corrected
R', = projection of R. in the horizontal plane
R'. = projection or R. in the horizontal plane
R'. = projection of R. in the horizontal plHne
Ill' = angle between R'e and R'..
a' =angle between R'. and R'..
R6=distance from the source to the opacity
measurement point projected in the
hori7.0ntal plane 152
Ra =distance from opacity measurement
point p. to the point in the plume p)52
£
=
5io-1
["S:~ ]
(AMI-IO)
R. .152
cr=(R.-+R.'-2 R. R. Coso) I. -
ReS' the distance from the source to the
opacity measurement point projected in the
horizontal plane, shall be determined using
Equation AM1-11,152
",
R'2
P
2R' R' Costjl')~
s p
(AMI-H)
centerline at the opacity measurement point
is horizontal. parallel to the ground, Equation
AMt-12 may be used to determine E instead
or Equation AM1-10.
[ R 2
P
.;' ]
152
(AMl- 12 )
+ R 2 -
6
2 Rp ReS
2,6.2 Elevation Angle Correction. An
individuallidar-measured opacity, 0., shall
be corrected for elevation angle if the laser
eleva tion or inclina lion angle, 13. I Figure
AM1-V), is greater than or equal to the value
calculated in Equation AM1-13,
[ 1 n (101 - 0p) ]
1 n (100 - 0 )
p
1~2
(AMI-H)
opacity, 0.., for the actual plume (hori7.0ntHII
path, p, by using Equation (AMl-14).
o
pC
=
152
(100%) [ 1 - (1 - 0,01 Op)COSPp]. (AMI-14)
where:

tJ. = lidar elevation or inclination angle,
o. = measured opacity along path I.. and
0.. = corrected opacity for the actuHI plume
thickT\ess p,
'Obtained directly from !ida., The~e \'aiue.
should be recorded.
The \'alues for 13., O. and 0.. should he
recorded.
III-Appendix A-81
-------
_!L -
Lidar Line-of-Sight
Referenced to Level Ground
(Horizontal Plane)
H
H
H
I
;x::.
"0
"0
(I)
::s
p..
1-'-
X
;x::.
I
ex>
N
Horizontal Plane
Stack's Vertical Axis
Vertical Smoke Plume
Gp9 Lidar Elevation or
Inclination Angle
P
= Effective Plume Thickness
L
P = Actual Plume Thickness
P
= lCost-,
P
= Opacity measured along path l
0p
o
pc
= Opacity value corrected to the
actual plume thickness. P
Smoke Stack
Figure AM1-V.
Elevation Angle Correction for Vertical Piumes.
-------
2.6.3 Determination of Actual Plume
Opacity. Actual opacity of the plume shall be
determined by Equation AM1-1~.
o
pa
°pc
[2 50 .. S'].
(AMI-IS)
=
2.6.4 Calculation of Average Actual Plume
Opacity. The average of the actual plume
opacit)'. 0... shall be calculated as the
a\'crage oC the consecutive individual actual
opacity values. 0... by Equation AM1-16.
°pa
I
n
I (0 )
k=I pa k
=
n
(AMI-I6)
where:
(0..1.= the kth actual opacity valu!! in an
averaging interval containing n opacity
values; k is a summing index.
I = the ,um oC the individual actual opacity
values.
n = the number of individual actual opacity
values contained in the averaging
interval.
0.. = average actual opacity calculated over
the averaging interval.
3. Lidar PerCormance Verification. The
lidar shall be subjected to two types oC
perCormance verifications that shall be
peformed in the field. The annual calibration.
conducted at least once a year. shall be used
to directly veriCy operation and perCormance
of the entire lidar system. The routine
verification, conducted for each emission
source measured. shall be used to insure
proper performance of the optical receiver
and associated electronics.
3.1 Annual Calibration Procedures. Either
a plume from a smoke generator or screen
target. shall be used to conduct thl.
calibration.
If the screen target method Is selected. five
screen. shall be fabricated by placing an
opaque mesh material over a narrow frame
(wood. metal extrusion. etc.). The screen
shall have a surface area of at least one
square meter. The screen material should be
chosen for precise optical opacities of about
10. 20. 40. 60. and 8O'Jf.. Opacity of each target
shall be optically determined and should be
recorded. If a smoke generator plume I.
selected. It .hall meet the requirements of
Section 3.3 of Reference Method 9. This
calibration shall be performed in the field
during calm (as practical) atmospheric
conditions. The lidar shall be positioned in
accordance with Section 2.1.
The screen targets must be placed
perpendicular to and coincident with the
lidar line-of-sight at sufficient height above
the ground (suggest about 30 ftl to ovoid
ground-level dust contamination. Reference
aignals shall be obtained just prior to
conducting the calibratIon test.
The lidar shall be aimed through the center
of the plume within 1 stack diameter oC the
exit. or through the geometric center of the
screen target selected. The lid81 shall be act
in operation Cor a 6-minute data run at a
nominal pulse rate of 1 pulge every 10
seconds. Each backscatter return signal and
each respective opacity value obtained Crom
the smoke generator transmissometer. shall
be obtained in temporal coincidence. The
data shall be analyzed and reduced in
accordance with Section 2.6 of this method.
This calibration sholl be performed-Cor 0%
III-Appendix A-e3
(clean air). and at least five other opacities
(nominally 10. 20. 40. 60. and 80%).
The average of the lidar opacity values
obtained during a 6-minute calibration run
shall be calculated and should be recorded.
Also the average of the opacity values
obtained from the smoke generator
transmlssometer for the same 6-minute run
shall be calculated and should be recorded.
Alternate calibration procedures that do
not meet the above requirements but produce
equivalent results may be used.
3.2 Routine Verification Procedures.
Either one of two techniques shall be used to
conduct this verlfica tion. It shall be
performed et least once every 
-------
PMT Entrance
Window Completely
Covered
(a) Zero~Signal Level Test
CW laser or
Light-Emitting Diode

(light Source)
-~
..
--
light path
(b) Clear-Air or 0% Opacity Test
CW Laser or
light-Emitting Diode

Light Source
Neutral-density
optical filter
f

~
~
..
.....
~
~
(c) Optical Filter Test (simulated opacity values)
~
1 ight path
*
lidar Receiver
Photomultiplier
Detector
l idar Receiver'
Photomultiplier
Detector
li da ',. Recei ver
Photomultiplier
Detector
*
*Tests shall be performed with no ambient or stray light reaching the
detector.
rigure AM1-VI.
Test Configuration for Technique t
III-Appendix A-84
-------
Thc zero-signal level shall be measured
1:1<1 should be recorded, as indicated in
Figure AMt-VI(a). This simulated clear-air or
.)"" opacity value shull be tested in using the
sf!ll'cted light source depicted in Figure AM1-
Vllb),
The light source either shall be a
continuous wave (CW) laser with the beam
mcchanically chopped or a light emilling
diode controlled with a pulse generator
(reclan~ular pulse). (A laser beam may have
10 be allenuated so as not to saturate the
PMT detector). This signal level shall be
ml'dsured and should be recorded. The
opacity value is calculated by taking two pick
1I11ervalsiSection 2.6) about 1 microsecond
dpart in time and using Equation (AMt-2)
st~lting the ratio R../R,=l. This calculated
I'alue should be recorded.
The simulated clear-air signal level is also
t,mployed in the optical test using the neutral
d':l1sity filters. Using the test configuration in
Fi~ure AM1-VI(c), each neutral density filter
shall be separately placed into the light path
from the light source to the PMT detector.
The signal level shall be measured and
should be recorded. The opacity value for
cf!(;h filter is calculated by taking the signal
Ic\'el for that respective filter (I,), dividing it
oy the 0% opacity signal level (I.) and
performing the remainder of the calculation
oy F.4uation (AMl-2) with R./R,=l. The
calculated opacity value for each filter should
be recorded.
The neutral density filters used for
Te(;hnique t shtlll be calibrated for actual
opacity with accuracy of ::t:2% or beller. This
calibration shall be done monthly while the
filters are in use and the calibrated values
should be recorded.
3.Z.Z Procedure for Technique 2. An
oplicalgenerator (built-in calibration
mechanism) that contains a light-emitting
diode (red light for a lidar containing a ruby
laser) is used. By injecting an optical signal
into the lidae receiver immediately ahead of
the PMT detector, a backscaller signal Is
simulated. With the entire lidar receiver
electrQnics turned on and adjusted for normal
operating performance, the optical generator
is turned on and the simulation signal
(corrected for 1/R2) is selected with no plume
spike signal and with the opacity value equal
to 0%. This simulated clear-air atmospheric
return signal is displayed on the system's
video display. The lidor operator then makes
any fine adjustments that may be necessary
to maintain the system's normal operating
range.
The opacity values of 0% anuthe other five
values are selected one at a time in any
order. The simulated return signal date
should be recorded. The opacity value shall
be calculated. This measurement/calculation
shall be performed at least three times for
each selected opacity value. While the order
is not important, each of the opacity values
from the optical generator shall be verified.
The calibrated optical generator opadty
value for each selection should be recorded.
The optical generator used for Technique 2
shall be calibrated for actual opacity with an
accuracy of ::t:l% or better. This calibration
shall be done monthly while the generator is
in use and calibrated value should be
recorded.
Alternate verification procedures that do
not meet the above requirements but produce
equivalent results may be used.
3.3 Deviation. The permissible error for
the annual calibration and routine
verification are:
3.3.1 Annual Calibration Deviation.
3.3.1.1 Smoke Generator. If the lidar-
III-Appendix A-SS
measured average opacity for each data run
is not within ::t:5% (full scale) of the
respective smoke generator's average opacity
over the range of 0% through 80%, then the
lidar shall be considered out of calibration.
3.3.1.2 Screens. U the lidar-measured
average opacity for each data run is not
within ::t:3% (full scale) of the laboratory-
determined opacity for each respective
simula tion screen target over the range of 0"(,
through 80%, then the lidar shall be
considered out of calibration.

3.3.2 Routine Verification Error. If the
lidar-measured average opacity for each
neutral density filter (Technique 1) or optical
generator selection (Technique 2) is not
within ::t:3% (full scale) of the respective
laboratory calibration value then the lidar
shall be considered non-operational.

4. Performance/Design Specification for
Basic Lidar System.
4.1 Lidar Design Specification. The
essential components of the basic lidar
system are a pulsed laser (transmitter),
optical receiver, detector, signal processor.
recorder, and an aiming device that is used in
aiming the lidar transmitter and receiver.
Figure AM1-VII shows a functional block
diagram of a basic lidar system.
-------
H
H
H
I
:J:"
'"d
'"d
CD
::s
p..
1-'-
X
:J:"
I
(X)
Q)
I~---~~~~-~--i


Transmitted light Pulse I Pulsed i
.( I laser i
, I
I Narrow Band OptIcal Filter i
I
Backscatter Return Signal I
- )1
I
I

III AImIng DevIce i

r~~--~-~~--_J
- - ~:::,bl~~I- - - - - - J
 / I    
 /    
Opltcal rf ! VIdeo SIgnal   VIdeo
 DCI~CIOr ~  SIgnal Processor -==- DIsplay
Receive' ''''    
  i    
.  I    
.     
cr
I
Recorder
I
Figure AM '-VII. Functionol 8/0clc Diog,om 0' 0 805i, Lido, 5.Y5tem
-------
~.:.! Performance Evaluation Tests. The
uwner of a lidar system shall subject such a
lidar system 10 the perfonnance verification
tpsts described in Section 3. prior to first
use of this method. The annual
calihration shall be perfonned for three
separate. complete runs and the results of
each should be recorded. The requirements of
Section 3.3.1 must be fulfilled for each of the
three runs.152
Once the conditions of the annual
calibration are fulfilled the lidar shall be
sul>jected to the routine verification for three
separate complete runs. The requirements of
Section 3.3.2 must be fulfilled for each of the
three runs and the results should be recorded.
The Administrator may request that the
results of the perfonnance evaluation be
submitted for review.
5. References.
5.1 The Use of Lidarfor Emissions Source
Opacity Determination. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. National Enforcement
Investigations Center. Denver. CO. EPA-3301
1-79-003-R. Arthur W. Dybdahl. current
edition (NTIS No. PB81-246662J.
5.2 Field Evaluation of Mobile Lidar for
the Measurement of Smoke Plume Opacity.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
National Enforcement Inves!igations Center.
Denver. CO. EPA/NEIC-TS-128, February
1\176.
5.3 Remote Measurement of Smoke Plume
Transmittance Using Lidar. C. S. Cook. G. W.
Bethke. W. D. Conner (EPA/RTP). Applied
Optics 11. pg 1742. August 1972.
5.4 Lidar Studies of Stack Plumes in Rural
and Urban Environments. EPA~/4-73-00z.
Odoher 1973.
5.5 American National Standard for the
Safe Use of Lasers ANSI Z 136.1-176. 6 March
1976.
5.6 U.S. Army Technical Manual TB MEn
279. Control of Hazards to Health from Laser
Radialion. February 1969.
5.7 Laser Institute of America Laser
5<1fety Manual. 4th Edition.
5.6 U.S. Department of Health. Education
and Welfare. Regulations for the
Administration and Enforcement of the
Radialion Control for Health and Safety Act
of 1968. January 1976.
5.9 Laser Safety Handbook. Alex MaUow.
Leon Chabot. Van Nostrand Reinbold Co..
1978.
III-Appendix A-87
o
-------
METHOD lo-DETERMINATION OF CARBON MON-
J08JDE EMIssIONS mOM 8TA'I'XONARY So'D'RCES 5

1. Principle and Applicabtllty.
1.1 Principle. An Integrated or continuous
gas sample is extracted from a sampling point
and analyzed for carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tent using a'Luft-type nondispersive infra-
.-ed analyzer (NDIR) or equivalent.
1.2 Applicability. This method 18 appU.-
cable for the determination of carbon'mon-
oxide I3m1ssions from stationary sources onJ.y
when specUied by the test procedures for
determining compliance with new source
performance standards. The test procedure
w11l indicate whether a continuous or an
!lDtegmted _pie 18 to be usee!.
2. Bange and sensitivity.
2.1 Bange. 0 to 1,000 ppm.
2.2 Sensitivity. Minimum detectable con-
centration is 20 ppm for e. 0 to 1,000 ppm
IJpan.
3. Interferences. Any substance having :L
atrong absorption of infrared energy will
interfere to some' e1ttent. For example, dis-
crimination rn.tios for water (H,O) and car-
bon dioxide (CO,) are 3.6 percent 11.0 per
'1 ppm CO and 10 percent CO. per 10 ppm
00. respectively. foi' \2evlcoo mea.sur1!!lg In the
1.600 to 3.000 J!lpm rnnge. J?or ltlevJces meas-
1!1rtng 1n tho 0 to 100 ppm ronge.lnterfeNnco
!lCtioB can be GO hJgh lID 3.6 percent B"O pIR
c.nclyzero 1s approximately :2 percent of
lJPan. .
<2:.2 Accuracy. The c>ccumcy of most NDIR
anclyzers 1s e.pproxlmately :t5 percent of
op= efter cclibnt1on.
5. Apparatus.
6.1 Continuoua sample (~ 10-1).
6.1.1 Pl"obe. S~1nloS!J steel or ahee.thed
J?yrex 1 glMS, equipped with a Wtei' to remova
pcrticu1ate DUlttcr.
5.1.2 Ai?-ccolert condense? OJ' equIValent.
To remove =y =1300 moisture.
6.2 Integrated. sample (Figure 10-2).
5.2.1 Pl"obe. S~1n1esa oteel or ab~thed
I!'yrox aleoo, equipp<:d with iii Wtcr to remove
put1cule.te me,tter.
6.2.2 Ail"-cooled. conl/.e"Me? a7 aquit1alent.
To remove e.ny exce&I moisture.
5.2.3 Valve. Needle vB1ve, or equivB1ent, to
to adjust flow rate.
5.2.i!. Pump. Lellk-frea d1e.pbnlgm typG, Oi'
oqufvclent, to transport gas.
6.2.5 .Rate mete? Ro~eter, Oi' equlvclent,
'W melMure a flow re.nge from 0 to 1.0 liter
per m1n. (0.035 cfm).
0;.2.6 l"le:rible bag. Ted1e.r, or equlvclent.
with G c:e,pacity of 60 to 90 liters (2 to 3 it 0).
Loo,k-1;eet tha be.g In tha laborctory before
using by aVB.cuating bag with. Co pump fol-
~oweC! by G dry gas meter. Wban evncuation
rD @!)D1ploto, thore chould boo no flow tbroUBJ!!.
~(HI10tsi' .

9.2.'7 pjgog ~oo. Typo 8. 0.- oqu1voJent, c.~
~oo to tho Eli'CIJIo en ~c.~ ~o oompllng
rota can bCl regulc.~ Elro~o~cl to tho
atack gQS velocity when velocity 1s ve.ry1ng
with tho ~me or a oampla tre.versa 1a con-
ducted.
5.3 .t..nalyuW (Piguro 10-3),
1 MO!!htaon oK ~ nc.moo Oi' OJj)OOlfic prod-
ucte Claea no~ collBtltute ondo1'S3mont by tho
Envlronmcntc! Protection Agency.
ThBLIII ID-l.-F1eld elates
Location ------------------------------.----------------
Test ---------- -------------------------------
Date ----------------------------------------------------------
C),perator----_---___----------------------------------------------
Comments:
Clock time
Rotameter setting, liters per minute
(cubic leet 'J18f" minute)
Ulat:1olo.I. c«UInco1!o..,.,U'1)1rOIO.
5.3.1 Cavbm3 monoxide a1l4lyze? Nondlsper-
sive 1n!re.red spectrometer, or equivalent.
This instrument should be -demonstrated,
preferably by the manufacturer, to meet or
- exceed' me.nufacturer's specifications e.nd
those deacr1bed in this method.
5.3.2 DYying tube. To contain approxi-
mately 200 g of sll1ca gel.
6.3.3 Calibl"ation gG8. Refer to pe.ragraph
6.1.
5.3.~ Filte? As recommended by NDIR
manu!ccturer.
5.3.5 CO. l"8moval tube. To contaJn a.pproxi-
mately 500 g of !!Bce.rlte.
5.3.6 Ice water bath.. For ascar1te and slJ1ca
gel tubes.
6.3.7 Valve. Need1e veJ.ve. or equivalent, to
adjust flow rate
5.3.1:1 Rate meter. Rotameter or equivalent
to mee.sure ges flaw ra.te of 0 to 1.0 liter per
min. (0.035 cfm) through NDIR.
5.3.9 Recorder (optional). To provide per-
manent record of NDm readings.
6. Reagents:
~~ 1M. AnaI,U",,: OQaIJlC1(1.
<1.1 Calib?ation gases. Known concentration
oi !l oonC0D.tn:\tion ahe.li not exceed 1.5 times
the e.ppUce,bla source performance stande.rd.
The cclibretion ge.ses shall be certified by
the manufacturer to be within :!:2 percent
of the specJ.1ied concentration. .
6.2 Stlica gel. Indlcc.tlng type, 6 to 16 mesh,
dried e.t 1750 C E3~7° F) for 2 hours.
6.3 Ascarite. Corum6Iclally e,veJlaole.
7. PYoc..duTG.
'7.1 Sa7Tlo1lZing.
III-Appendix A-88
g
.~
...
F1t3..CoII. --_'~-

7.1.1 Continu
analyzer.. Allow S minutes for the systmn
to stabilize, then record the a.nalyzer read-
ing as required by the test p~edure. (See
117.2 and 8). CO. cont~nt of the gas may be
determined by ,.sint. the Method 3 Integ
grated sample procedure (36 FR 2!\886) , or
by weighing the asce.rl.te COo removal tube
and computing CO. concentration from the
gas volume sampled and the-- weight gain
of the tube.
7.1.2 Integrated sampling. Evacuate the
flexible bag. Set up the equipment as shown
in Figure 1()"2 with the bag disconnected..
Place the probe in the stack and purge the
sampling line. Connect the bag, making sure
t.hat cll oonnections are leak free. Sample at
e, - rate proportional to the stack velocity.
CO. content of the gas may be determined
by using the Method 3 integrated sampl~
procedures (36 FR 24886), or by weighing
the II.5carlte CO. removal tube a.nd comput-
ing CO. concentration from the gll8 volume
sampled and the weight gain of the tuhe.
7.2 CO Analysis. A.s3emble the appe.n.tus DB
shown in Figura 10-3, cailbret& the instru-
ment, e.nd perform other required operations
as deacribed in paragraph 8. Purge analyzer
with N. prior to introduction of each samplE>.
Direct the sample stream through tbe instru-
ment for the test period, recording the re9.d-
ings. Check the zero and span Bg!l.iIl efter thE>
test to assure that any drift or me.lfunction
18 detected. Record the sample date. on Table
1()"1.
8. CalibYatt01l.. Assemble "l1e apparatus ac-
cording to Figure 10-3. GenereJ.ly 3D. in3tru-
ment requires a warm-up period before sta-
bility is obtained. Follow the manu!a.::turer's
instructions for specific procedure. Allow a
minimum time of OIre hOl1l' for warm-up.
During tb1a time check the sample condi-
tioning apparatus, i.e., filter,. condenser, dry-
ing tube, and Co. removal tube, to eWJUN<
1:bat each component 18 in good operatUlg
conditIon. Zero and calibrate the instrument
acoordlug to the manufac'rurer'B procedures
using. respectively. nltroeen and the c:allbra.-
tion gasee.
-------
9. CalcU14tio71-Concentr4ticm 0/ _bora ~. Calculate the concentration or carbon
monoxide in the stack using equation 10-1.
Cco,"'" = CcoNDm(l- Fees)
equation 10-1
where;

CCOdac' = concentration of CO in stack, ppm by volume (dry basis).

cCOr. ""concentration of CO measured by NDIR analyzer, ppm by 1'olume (dry
DI8 basis). 6

Fco,=volume fraction of CO. in sample, I.e., percen~ co, from Oraat anal-
divided by 100.
iO. Btblfograrmll.
10.1 McElroy, Frqmk. The Intertech NDIR-CO
Analyzer. Preaented at 11th Methods
COnference on Air Pollution. Un1vcrslt1'
of CaJUorn1a. Berkeley, CaJU., April I,
1970.
10.2 Jacobe. M. B., et al., COntlnuous Deter-
mination ot Carbon Monoxide and Hy-
drocaI'bonn In Air by a MoctlfIed In!ra-
red Analyzer, .J. Alr Pollution COntrol
Association. 9(2) ;110-114, August 1959.
10.3 MSA LIRA Intrared Ga.a and Liquid
Analyzer InIItruCJt10n Book, Mine Ssfety
Appliances CO. Techntoal ProduC'tll D1-
vision, !PIttsburgh. Pa.
10.4 Models ':U6A. 815A, 'and. 416A II1trar8d
Analyzers, Beckman Instruments. Inc..
Beckman Instruct1OD.11 1635-B, Fuller-
ton. CaUt. October 1967.
.10.5 Oontlnuous 00 Monitoring System,
Model A5611, IDtertech Corp. Princeton.
N.J.
10.6 UNOR In.trared. Ga.a AJ18Jyzers, Bendix
Corp., Ronceverte, West Vtrg1n1a.
ADDENDA

A. Performance SpeclftcatlOns far NDIR CarboT.l Monozide An4ZJfzers.

~ge (~um)------------------------ J-looOppm.
Output (miDllnum)----------------------- o-l~V.
Mln1mum detectable sensittvlty_--__---_':' 20 ppm.
Rise time, 90 percent (maximum) ------ 30 seconds.
Fall time, 90 percent (maxJ.mum) ---------- 30 seconds.
Zero drift (.ma.x1mum) ------------~---- 10% in 8 homs.
Span dr1tt (maUmum) ----------------- 10% in 8 hours.
Precision (m1n1mu:in) ------------------- :!:: 2% ot tull scale.
Noise (max1mum) ----------------------- :t 1 % ot tull seale.
Linearity (maxtmum deviation) ------------ 2% of full seale.
Interference rejection ratlo___--_----------- CO.-I0oo to 1, H.O-600 to 1.
B. Deftnlt10ns 0/ Performance Speciftca-
t1ons.
Ro:n.ge-The minimum and max1mum
measurement l1m1ts.
Output-Electrical signal which 18 propor-
tional to tJ1e measurement; intended tor con-
nection to readout or data procesalng devices.
Usually expressed as mllltvolts or m11l1amps
Cull scale at a given Impedance.
FuZZ scale-The maximum measuring limit
tor n given range.
Minimum detectable sensitlvity--The
smallest amount ot Input concentration that
can be detected as the concentration np-
proaches zero.
AccurGC!f-The degree ot agreement be-
tween a measured value. and the true value;
usually expressed as :t: percent of Cull scale.
Time to 90 percent responSe-The time in-
terval trom a step change In the input con-
centration at the Instrument Iniet to a read-
ing ot 90 percent ot the ultimate recorded
concentration. '
Rise Time (90 pereent)-The interval be-
tween Initial response time and'ttme to 90
percent reapOD5e alter II step in- in tbe
iDlet OODCeDtr&ttOn.
Fan Time (90 pereent)-The interval be-
tween 1n1t1al response time and time to 90
percent response atter a step decrease in the
iDlet concentration.
Zero Drift-The change In instrument out-
put over a stated tlmeperiod, usually 24
hours~' ot unadjusted contInuoUs operation
when the Input concentration Is zero; usually
expressed as percent tull scale.
Span DriJt-The cbange In instrument out-
put 0get' a stated time period, usually 24
hours, ot unadjusted continuous operation
When the Input concentration is a stated
upscale value; usually expressed lIS percent
tull scale.
Precision--The degree ot agreement be-
tween repeated measurements ot the same
concentration, expreased. lIS the average de-
viation ot the slngle results tram the mean.
Noise-Sponte.neous deviations from a
mean output not caused by input concen-
tration changes. '
Linearity-The maximum deviation be-
tw~ 8.11 actual 1Dstn1ment reac11ng and the
reading predicted by II straight Une drawn
between upper 8.I1d. lower calibration poInts..
III-Appendix A-89
-------
t2IITHOD II-DETJ1:RMINATION 01" HYDROGIrn
SULFIDJ1: CONTENT 01" FUEL GAS GTREAMS m
Pii:TROLEUM REFINERIES 79

1. Principle and applicability. 1.1 Princi-
ple. Hydrogen sulfide (H,S) is collected from
a source in a series of midget impingers and
absorbed in pH 3.0 cadmium sulfate ,. liter
of deionized distilled water. Dilute to
volume with deionized water. Mix thorough-
ly. pH should be 3:!:0.1. Add 10 drops of
Dow-Corning Antifoam B. Shake well before
use. If Antifoam B is not used. the alternate
acidified iodine extraction procedure (sec-
tion 7.2.2) must be used.
6.1.2 Hydrogen peroxide. 3 percent.
Dilute 30 percent hydrogen peroxide to 3
percent as needed. Prepare fresh daily.
6.1.3 Water. Deionized. distilled to con-
form to ASTM specifications D1l93-72.
Type 3. At the. c>pt i:m of the analyst. the
KMnO. test ior )"idizable organic matter
may be omitted ,. hen high concentrations
of organic matte: are not expl'cted to be
present.
6.2 Sampk re~r.v( ry.
6.2.1 Hydrochloric acid solution (HC!>,
3M. Add 240 ml of concentrated HCl (specif.
ic gravity 1.19) to 500 ml of deionized. dis-
tilled water in a I-liter volumetric flask.
Dilute to 1 liter with deionized water. MIx
thoroughly.
6.2.2 Iodine solution 0.1 N. Dissolve 24 g
of potassium Iodide (Kl> in 30 ml of deion-
ized. distilled water. Add 12.7 g of resub-
limed iodine (I.) to the potassium iodide so-
lution. Shake the mixture until the iodine is
completelY dissolved. If possible. let the so-
lution stand overnight in the dark. Slowly
dilute the solution to I liter with deionized.
distilled water, with swirling. Filter the so-
lution if it Is cloudy. Store solution in a
brov.-n-glass reagent bottle.
6.2.3 Standard iodine solution. 0.01 N. Pi-
pette 100.0 ml of the 0.1 N iodine solution
into a I-liter volumetric flask and dilute to
volume with deionized. distilled water. Stan-
dardlzt> daily as in section 8.1.1. This solu-
tion must be protected from light. Reagent
oottles and flasks must be kept tightly stop-
pered.
6.S Analysis.
6.3.1 Sodium thiosulfate solution. stan-
dard 0.1 N. Dissolve 24.8 g of sodium thio-
Gulfate pentahydrate (Na.,S.0,.5H,0) or 15.8
II of anhydrous sodium thiosulfate (Na.,S.O.)
in 1 liter of deionized, c!istilled water and
add 0.01 g of anhydrous sodium carbonate
(Na.CO.) and 0.4 ml of chloroform (CHC1.)
to stabilize. Mix thoroughly by shaking or
by aerating with nitrogen for approJClmately
15 minutes and store in a glass-stoppered.
reagent bottle. Standardize as in section
8.1.2.
6.3.2 Sodium thiosulfate solution. stan-
dard 0.01 N. Pipette 50.0 ml of the standard
0.1 N thiosulfate solution into a volumetric
flask and dilute to 500 ml with distilled
water.
-------
NOT!!:.-A 0.01 N phenyll1rslne oxide oolu.
tlon may be prepared instead of 0.01 N thio-
sulfate (see section 6.3.3).

3.3.3 Phenylarslne oxide solution. stan-
dard 0.01 N. Dissolve 1.80 g of phenylarslne
oxide (C.H.AsD) In 150 ml of 0.3 N sodium
hydroxide. After settling. decant 140 ml of
this solution Into 800 ml of distilled water.
Bring the solution to pH 6-7 with 6N hydro.
chloric acid and dilute to 1 liter. Standard.
Ize as In section 8.1.3.
6.3.4 Starch Indicator solution. Suspend
10 g of soluble starch in 100 ml of deionized.
distilled water and add 15 g of potassium
hydroxide (KOH) pellets. Stir until dis-
solved. dilute with 900 ml of deionized dis-
tilled water and let stand' for 1 hour. Neu.
trallze the alkali with concentrated hydro.
chloric acid. using an Indicator paper similar
to Alkacld test ribbon. then add 2 ml of gla.
clal acetic acid as a presen'atlve.

NOTE.-Test starch Indicator solution for
decomposition by. titrating. with 0.01 N
Iodine solution. 4 ml of starch solution In
200 ml of distilled water that contains 1 g
potassium Iodide. If more than 4 drops of
the 0.01 N Iodine solution are required to
obtain the blue color. a fresh solution must
be prepared.

7. Procedure.
7.1' Sampling.
7.1.1 Assemble the sampling train as
shown In figure 11-1. connecting the five
midget Implngers In series. Place 15 ml of 3
percent hydrogen peroxide solution In the
first Impinger. Leave the second impinger
empty. Place 15 ml of the cadmium sulfate
absorbing solution In the third. fourth. and
fifth Implngers. Place the Implnger assem-
bly In an Ice bath container and place
crushed Ice around the Impingers. Add more
Ice during the run. If needed.
7.1.2 Connect the rubber bulb and mano.
meter to first Implnger. as shown In figure
11-1. Close the petcock on the dry gas meter
outlet. Pressurize the train to 25-cm water
pressure with the bulb and close off tubing
connected to rubber bulb. The train must
hold a 25-cm water pressure with not more
than a l-cm drop In pressure In a I-minute
Interval. Stopcock grease Is acceptable for
sealing ground glass Joints.

NOTE.-Thls leak check procedure Is op-
tional at the beginning of the sample run.
but Is mandatory at the conclusion. Note
also that If the pump Is used for sampling. It
Is recommended (but not required) that the
pump be leak-checked separately, using a
method consistent with the leak-check pro-
cedure for diaphragm pumps outlined in
section 4.1.2 of reference method 6. 40 CFR
Part 60, Appel1dlx A.

1.1.3 Purge the connecting line between
the sampling \'alve and first Imp Inger. by
disconnecting the line from the first 1m.
plnger, opening the sampling valve. and al-
lowing process gas to flow through the lint'
for a minute or two. Then. close the sam.
piing vah'e and reconnect the line to the im.
plnger train. Open the petcock on the dry
gas meter outlet. Record the initial dry ga.s
meter readin&:.
7.1.<1 Open the sampling valve and then
adjust the valve to obtain a rate of approxi-
mately 1 liter/min. Maintain a constant
(:dO percent> flow rate during the test.
Record the meter temperature.
1.1.5 Sample for at least 10 min. At the
end of the sampling time. close the sam-
pling valve and record the final volume and
temperature readings. Conduct a leak check
as described in Section '7.1.2 above.
1.1.6 Disconnect the Impinger train from
the sampling line. Connect the charcoal
tube and the pumP. as shown In figure 11-1.
Purge the train (at a rate of 1 llter/min)
with clean ambient air f~r 15 minutes (0
ensure that all H,S is remo\'ed from the hy.
drogen peroxide. For sample recovery. cap
the open ends and remove the Impingel
train to a clean area that Is away from
sour.:es of heat. The area should be well
lighted. but not exposed to direct sunlight.
7.2 Sample recovery.
7.2.1 Discard the contents of the hydro.
gen peroxide Impinger. CarefullY rinse the
contents of the third. fourth. and firth im.
pingers into a 500 ml Iodine flask.
   MIDGET 
   IMPINGERS SILICA GEL TUBE
  I  
  I  
  I  
 CENTER I
f LINE I  
tAP I  
I  
 I  
fUEl GAS I  
LINE  I  
  I  
  I  
  I  
  I  
  I  
  I  
  I  
    VALVE
    \
    \
    \
    \
    \
  DRY GAS METER RATE METER \
   \
    \
.fDR AIR PURGE)
Figure II-I. H2S sampling train.
III-Appendix A-91
-------
NOTE.-The Implngers normally have only
11 thin film of cadmium sulfide remaining
'after a water rinse. If Antifoam B was not
used or If significant quantities of yellow
cadmium sulfide remain In the Implngers,
the alternate recovery procedure described
below must be used.

7.2.2 Pipette exactly 50 m1 of 0.01 N
Iodine solution Into a 125 ml Erlenmeyer
flask. Add 10 ml of 3 M HCl to the solution.
Quantitatively rinse the acidified' iodine
Into the iodine flask. Stopper the flask Im-
mediately and shake briefly.
7.2.2 (Alternate). Extract the remaining
cadmium sulfide from the third, fourth, and
fifth Impingers using the acidified Iodine so-
lution. Immediately after pouring the acidi-
fied iodine Into an ImpingeI', stopper It and
shake for a few moments, then transfer the
liquid to the Iodine flask. Do not transfer
any rinse portion from one impingeI' to an.
other; transfer It directly to the iodine flask.
Once the acidified Iodine solution has been
poured Into any glassware containing cadmi-
um sulfide. the container must be tightly
stoppered at all times except when adding
more solution, and this must be done as
Quicldy and carefully as possible. After
adding any acidified Iodine solution to the
Iodine flask. allow a few minutes for absorp-
tion of the H,s before adding any further
rinses. Repeat the ioJ:!ine extraction until all
cadmium sulfide Is removed from the Im-
pingel's. Extract that part of the connecting
glassware that contains visible cadmium sul-
fide.
Quantitatively rinse all of the Iodine from
the implngers, connectors, and the beaker
Into the iodine flask using deionized, dis-
tilled water. Stopper the flask and shake
briefly.
7.2.3 Allow the iodine flask to stand
about 30 minutes In the dark for absorption
of the H,s into the Iodine, then complete
the titration analysis as in section 7.3.

NOTE.-Cautlon! Iodine evaporates from
!lCidified Iodine solutions. Samples to which
acidified iodine have been added may not be
stored, but must be analyzed In the time
schedule stated In section 7.2.3.

7.2.4 Prepare a blank by adding 45 ml of
cadmium sulfate absorbing solution to an
Iodine flask. Pipette exactly 50 m1 of 0.01 N
iodine solution Into a 125-mJ Erlenmeyer
flask. Add 10 ml of 3 M HCI. Follow the
same impingeI' extracting and Quantitative
rinsing procedure carried out In sample
analysis. Stopper the flask, shake briefly,
let stand 30 minutes In the dark., and titrate
with the samples.

NOTE.-The blank must be handled by ex-
!lCtly the same procedure as that used for
the samples.

7.3 Analysis.

NOTE.-Titration analyses should be con.
ducted at the sample-cleanup area In order
to prevent loss of Iodine from the sample.
Titration should never be made In direct
sunlight.

7.3.1 Using 0.01 N SDdium thiosulfate 130-
]ution (or 0.01 N phenylarsln:e oxide, if IlP'
/;)licable), rapidly titrate each sample in an
todine flask using gentle mixing, until solu.
tlon is light yellow. Add iI ml of starch indi-
cator solution and continue titrating slowly
until the blue color Just disappears. Record
Vn. the vQlume of sodium thiosulfate solu-
tion used, or VAT, the volume of /;)henylar.
sine oxide solution used (m)).
7.3.2 'Titrate the blanks In Ute liame
manne;r IW the samples. Run bJanks each
d2y until replicate values agree within 0.05
m1. Average the replicate titration values
which agree within 0.05 m1.
8. Calibration and standards.
IU Standardizations.
8.1.1 Standardize the 0.01 N iodine solu.
tion dai1y as follows: Pipette 25 ml of the
Iodine solution into a 125 m1 Erlenmeyer
flask. Add 2 ml of 3 M HCI. Titrate rapidly
with standard 0.01 N thiosulfate solution or
with 0.01 N phenylarsine oxide until the 130-
]ution is light yellow, using gentle mixing.
Add four drops of starch indicator solution
and continue titrating slowly until the blue
color Just disappears. Record VT, the volume
of thiosulfate solution used, or V AS. the
volume of phenylarsine oxide solution used
(mD. Repeat until replicate values agree
within 0.05 m1. Average the replicate titra-
tion values which agree within 0.05 mJ and
calculate the exact normality of the iodine
solution using equation 9.3. Repeat the
standardization daily.
8.1.2 Standardize the 0.1 N thiosulfate
solution as follows: Oven-dry potassium di-
chromate (K,Cr,O,) at 180 to 200' C (360 to
390' F). Weigh to the nearest milligram, 2 g
of potassium dichromate. Transfer the di-
chromate to a 500 ml volumetric flask, dis-
solve in deionized, distilled water and dilute
to exactly 500 ml. In a 500 ml iodine flask,
dissolve approximately 3 g of potassium
Iodide (KI> In 45 ml of deionized, distilled
water, then add 10 ml of 3 M hydrochloric
acid solution. Pipette 50 ml of the dichro-
mate solution Into this mixture. Gently
swirl the solution once and allow it to stand
In the dark for 5 minutes. Dilute the solu-
tion with 100 to 200 ml of deionized distilled
water. washing down the sides of the flask
with part of the water. Titrate with 0.1 N
thiosulfate until the solution Is light yellow.
Add 1,\ ml of starch Indicator and continue ti-
trating slowly to a green end point. Record
VD, the volume of thiosulfate solution used
(mD. Repeat until replicate analyses agree
within 0.05 ml. Calculate the normality
using equation 9.1. Repeat the standardiza.
tion each week, or after each test series,
whichever time is shorter.
3.1.3 Standardize the 0.01 N Phenylar-
sine oJtide (if applicable) as follows: oven
dry potassium dichromate (K,Cr,O,) at 180
to 200' C (360 to 390' F). Weigh to the near-
est milligram. 2 II of the K.Cr.O,; transfer
the dichromate to a 500 ml volumetric flask.
dissolve In deionized, distilled water, and
dilute to exactly 500 mJ. In a 500 m1 iodine
flask, dissolve approximatelY 0.3 g of potas-
sium Iodide (KI> In 45 m1 of deionized, dis.
tilled water; add 10 ml of 3M hydrochloric
acid. JPjpette 5 m1 of the K,Cr,O, solution
Into the Iodine flask. Gently swirl the con-
tents of the flask once and allow to stand In
the dark for 5 minutes. Dilute the solution
with 100 to 200 m1 of deionized. distilled
water, washing down the sides of the flask
with part of the water. Titrate with 0.01 N
phenylarslne oxide until the solution Is
light yellow. Add ':\ ml of starch Indicator
and continue titrating slowly to a green end
!;)Oint. Record V.. the volume of phenylar-
sine oxide used (mD. Repeat until replicate>
analyses agree within 0.05 m1. Calculate the
normality using equation 9.2. Repeat the
standardization each week or after each test
series, whichever time Is shorter.
8.2 Sampling train calibration. Calibrate
the sampling train components as follows:
8.2.1 Dry gas meter.
8.2.1.1 Initial calibration. The dry gas
mew eh!ill be ca.librated before Its initial
use In the field. Proceed as follows: First. &S-
III-Appendix A~2
semble the following components In series:
Drying tube. needle valve, pump, rotameter,
and dry gas meter. Then, leak-check thc
system as follows: Place a vacuum gauge (at
least 760 mm Hg) at the Inlet to the drying
tube and pull a vacuum of 250 mm <10 in.)
Hg: plug or pinch ore the outlet of the flow
meter, and then turn ore the pump. The
vacuum shall remain stable for at least 30
seconds. Carefully release the vacuum
gauge before releaSing the flow meter end.
Next, calibrate the dry gas meter (at the
sampling flow rate specified by the method)
as follows: Connect an appropriately sized
wet test meter (e.g., 1 liter per revolution) to
the inlet of the drying tube. Make three in-
dependent calibration runs. using at least
five revolutions of the dry gas meter per
run. Calculate the calibration factor, Y (wet
test meter calibration volume divided by the
dry gas meter volume, both volumes adJust-
ed to the same reference temperature and
pressure), for each run, and average the re-
sults. If any Y value deviates by more than 2
percent from the averag'e, the dry gas meter
is unacceptable for use. Otherwise, use the
average as the calibration factor for subse.
Quent test runs.
8.2.1.2 Post-test calibration check. After
each field test series, conduct a calibration
check as in section 8.2.1.1. above. except for
the fOllowing variations: (a) The leak check
is not to be conducted, (b) three or more
revolutions of the dry gas meter may be
used, and (3) only two independent runs
need be made. If the calibration factor does
not deviate by more than 5 percent from
the Initial calibration factor (determined in
section 8.2.1.1.), then the dry gas meter vol-
umes obtained during the test series are ac-
ceptable. If the ca.libration factor deviates
by more than 5 perr~nt, recalibrate the dry
gas meter as In secdon 8.2.1.1, and for the
calculations. ,use thE; calibration factor (ini-
tial or recallbration) that yields the lower
gas volume for each test run.
8.2.2 Thermometers. Calibrate against
mercury-In-glass thermometers.
8.2.3 Rotameter. The rotameter need not
be calibrated, but should be cleaned and
maintained according to the manufacturer's
Instruction.
8.2.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer-
cury barometer.
9. Calculations. Carry out calculations re-
taining at least one extra decimal figure
beyopd that of the aCQuired data. Round ore
results only after the final calculation.
9.1 Normality of the Standard (-0.1 N)
Thiosulfate Solution.

N.=2.039W IV.
where:

W = Weight of K,Cr,O, used, g.
V.=Volume of Na,s,O, solution used, ml.
N.=Normaiity of standard thiosulfate solu-
tion, g-eQ/liter.
2.039=Converslon factor
(6 eQ. I,/mole K'cr,O,) <1,000 ml/liter)1 =
(294.2 g K,Cr,O,/mole) no aliquot factor)

9.2 Normality of Standard Phenylarsine
Oxide Solution (If,applicable).

N.=0.2039 W IV.
where:

W=Weight of K,Cr.O, used, g.
V.=Volume of C.H,A.O used, ml.
N.=Normality of standard phenylarsine
oxide solution, g=eq/liter.
CI.2039=Conversion factor
-------
(6 eQ. I,/mole K,Cr,O,) <1.000 ml/llter)/
(249.2 e K,Cr,O,/mole) <100 all:

C",,= ConcPntration of H,S at standard con.
ditions. mg/dscm.
K = Conversion factor = 17.04 x 10'
<34.07 g'mole H,S) n.ooo IIters/m') <1.000
ml(/g)/=<1.000 ml/liter) <2H,S eq/mole)

VIT ~ Volume of standard Iodine solu.
tion = 50.0 ml.
N,=Normality of standard iodine solution.
g'PQ lliter.
Vn=Volump of standard (-0.01 N) sodium
thiosulfatp solution. ml.
N,=Normali(y of standard sodium thlosul-
fa«(' solution. g-eQ/liter.
Vm....,=Dry gas volume at standard condi.
tions. liters.

NOTE.~1f phpnylarsinp oxide Is used In.
stead of thiosulfate. replace NT and VTT In
Equation 9.5 with N. and V AT' respectively
(sep Sections 7.3.1 and 8.1.3).
III-Appendix A-93
10. Stabilily. The absorbing oolutlon Is
stable for at least 1 month. Sample recovery
and analysis should begin within 1 hour of
sampling to minimize oxidation of the acidi-
fied cadmium sulfide. Once Iodine has been
added to the sample. the remainder of the
analysis procedure must be completed ac.
cording to sections 7.2.2 throuB'h 7.3.2.
11. Bibliography.
11.1 Determination of HYdrogen Sulfide,
Ammoniacal Cadmium Chloride Method.
API Method 772-54. In: Manual on Disposal
of Refinery Wastes. Vol. V: Sampling and
Analysis of Waste Gases and Particulate
Matter. American Petroleum Institute,
Washington. D.C.. 1954.
11.2 Tentative Method of Determination
of Hydrogen Sulfide and Mercaptan Sulfur
In Natural Gas. Natural Gas Processors As-
sociation. Tulsa. Okla.. NGPA Publication
No. 2265-65. 1965.
11.3 Knoll. J. E.. and M. R. Midgett. De.
termination of Hydrogen Sulfide in Refin-
ery Fuel Gases. Em'ironmental Monitoring
Series. Office of Research and Develop-
ment. USEPA. Research Triangle Park. N.C.
27711. EPA 600/4-77-007.
11.4 Scheill. G. W.. and M. C. Sharp.
Standardization of Method 11 at a Petro-
leum Refinery. Midwest Research Institute
Draft Report for USEPA. Office of Re-
search and Development. Research Triangle
Park. N.C. 27711. EPA Contract No. 68-02-
1098. August 1976. EPA 600/4-77-088a
.1
-------
Method 12. Determination of IIDorgaoic: I!.esfIJ
Emissions From Statioaary Sources 145

1. Applicability and Principle.
1.1 Applicability. This method applies 10
the determination of inorganic lead (Pb)
emissions from specified stationary sources
only.
1.2 Principle. Particulate and gaseous Pb
emissions are withdrawn isokinetically from
Ihe source and collected on a ftlter and in
dilute nitric aCId. The collected samples are
digested in acid solution and analyzed by
alomic absorption spectrometry using an air
acetylene flame.
2. Range, Sensitivity, Predsion, and
In terferenc8ll,
2.1 Range. For a minimum analytical
accuracy of :1:10 percent, the lower limit of
the range is 100 p.g. The upper limit can be
considerably extended by dilution.
2.2 Analytical Sensitivity. Typical
sensitivities for a 1-percent change in
absorption (0.0044 absorbance units) are 6.2
and 0.5joL8 Pb/mI for the 217.0 and 283.3 nm
lines. respectively.
2.3 Precision. The within-laboratory
precision. as measured by the coefficient of
variation ranges from 0.2 to 9.5 percent
relative to Q run-mean concentration. These
values were based on testa conducted at Q
gray iron foundry. a lead storage battery
manufacturing plant, a secondary lead
smelter, and a lead recovery furnace of an
alkyl lead manufacturing plant. The
concentrations encountered during these
lests ranged from 0.61 to 123.3 mg Pb/mo.
2.4 Interferences. Sample matrix effects
may interfere with the analysis for Pb by
flame atomic absorption. If this interference
is suspected. the analyst may confinn the
presence of these matrix effects and
frequently eliminate the interference by using
the Method of Standard Additions.
High concentrations of copper may
interfere with the analysis of Pb at 217.0 nm.
This Interference can be avoided by
analyzing the samples at 283.3 nm.
3. Apparatus.
3.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the
sampling train is shown in Figure 12-1: it io
similar to the Method 5 train. The sampling
Irain consists of the following components:
3.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Probe Liner. Pitot
Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge. Filter
Holder. Filter Heating System. Metering
Syslem. Barometer. and Gas Density
Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5.
Sections 2.1.1 to 2.1.6 and 2.1.8 to 2.1.10.
. ~spectively. .
3.1.2 Impingel'6. Four impingers connected
in series with leak-free ground glass fittings
or any similar leak-free noncontaminating
fittings. For the first. third. and fourth
impingers. use the Greenburg-Smith design.
modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3 em
('12 in.) ID glass tube extending to aboull.3
cm ('12 in.) from the bottom of the flask. For
the second impinger. use the Greenburg-
Smith design with the slandard tip. Place a
thermometer. capable of measuring
lemperature to within 1°C (2°F) at the oullet
of the fourth impinger for monitoring
purposes.
III-Appendix A-94
3.2 Sample Recovery. The foUowirtg iteIM
are needed:
3.2.1 Probe-Liner snd Probe-Nozzle
Brushes. Petri Di8hel. Plastic StoreBB
Containers. and Funne1 and Rubber
Policeman. Same as Method 5. Sections 2.2.1.
2.2.4.1.2.8. and 1.2.7. respectively.
3.1.2 Wash Bottles. Glass (:!).
3.2.3 Sample Storege Containers.
Chemicatly resistant, borosilicate slaBB
bottles. for 0.1 nitric acid (HNO.) impinser
and probe solutions and wastleB. looo.ml.
Use SCl'1!w~p liners that are either nJb~
backed Teflon" or leak-free and reIIi8tant to
chemical attack by 0.1 N HNO.. (NarTOw
mouth glass bottles have been found kJ be
less prone to leakage.)
3.2.4 Graduated Cylinder and/or Balanoe.
To measure condensed water to within 2 ml
or 1 8. Use a graduated cylinder that bas 6.
minimum capacity of 500 mi. and
subdivisions no greater thBn 5 mi. (Most
laboratory balances are capable of weighing
to the nearest 0.5 g or less.)
3.2.5 Funnel. Gla8ll. 10 aid in sample
recovery.
3.3 Analysis. The following equipment is
needed:
3.3.1 Atom'ic Absorption
Spectrophotometer. With lead hollow
cathode lamp and bumer for air/acetylene
flame.
3.3.2 Hot Plate.
3.3.3 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 1Z5-mL 24/40 $.
3.3.4 Membrane Filters. Millipore SCWPO
4700 or equivalent.
3.3.5 Filtration Apparatus. Millipore
vacuum filtration Wlit. or equivalent. for use
with tha above Ii .emL,rane filter.
3.3.8 Volumetric Flasks. lOO-ml. 2SO-ml
and 1000-ml.
4. Reagents.
4.1 SampUng.. The leagents uaed in
sampliQ8 are as follows:
4.1.1 Filter. Gelman Spectro Grade. Reeve
Angel 934 AH. MSA 1106 BH. all with lot
assay for Pb. or other high-purity glass fiber
filters. without organic binder, exhibiting al
least 99.95 percent efficiency «0.05 percent
penetration) on 0.3 micron dloctyl phthalate
smoke particles. Conduct the mter efficiency
test Uling ASTM Standard Method D~71
(Incorporated by reference--eee 1 80.17) or
l18e tost data from the luppliar'. quality
control program. 177
4.1.2 Silica Gel Crushed Ice, and
Stopcock Crease. Same a9 Method 5. Section
3.1.2. 3.1.4. and :1.1.5. respectively.

U.3 Water. Deionized distilled. to
conform 10 ASTM Specification D11~"
(Incorporated by reference-eee 160.17).
Type 3.1l high concentrationB of organic
matter are not expected 10 be present. the
analyst may delete the pota81ium
permanganate test for oxidizable organic
matter. 117
4.1.4 Nitric Acid, 0.1 N. Dilute 6.5 m1 at
concentrated HNO, to 11i1er with deionized
distilled water. {I' may be desirable '0 nm
blanks before field Me to e!imina'e e hig}!
blank on test 1Iamptes.)
'Mention df ITBde nllllle8 er epecffic produ~8
does not conlllitute end81'8ement '" the U.S.
F.I1\'ironmtlRla! I'r8t8dICJII ARencF.
-------
H
H
H
I
~
'tj
"0
CD
:::3
0..
f-'.
X
~
I
\D
V1
PROBE
HEATEO AREA
THERMOMETER
THERMOMETER
./ CHECK
" VALVE
PITOT TUBE
,
REVERSE.TYPE
PITOT TUBE
I
I
) I
PITOT MANOMETER
VACUUM
LINE
IMPINGERS
r BY.PASS VAL VE
I
ICE BATH
THERMOMETERS
\
'/
DRY GAS METER
) t
,. j_s
AIR.TlGHT
PUMP
\ VACUUM
GAUGE
MAIN VALVE
Figure 12-1. Inorganic lead sampling train.
-------
4.2 Preteu'/ ~~on. G N 'fiNO.;5
needed. Dilukl ~ m1 fA 
-------
in the impinger catch. The liquid volume or
weight 10 needed. along with the oill!;9 gel
dato. to calculate th0 otaclt gao moloruro
content (Dee Method 6. Jrigure &-3).
(). Tranofer the contento to Contalnei' No. 
-------
7.
-------
Method 13A. Dptermination of Total Fluoride
Emissions From Stationary Sources: SPADNS
Zirconium Lake Method 14",113

1. Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to
the determination of fluoride (F) emissions
from sources as specified in the regulations. It
does not measure fluorocarbons. such as
£reons.
1.2 Principle. Gaseous and particulate F
are withdrawn isokineticnlly from the aource
and collected in water and on a filter. The
total F is then determined by the SPADNS
Zirconium Lake colorimetric method.

2. Range and Sensitivity
The range of this method is 0 to 1.~ pog pi
ml. Senoitivity has not been determined.

.i Interferences
Large quantities of chloride will interfere
'With the analysis, but this interference can be
prevented by adding silver oulfete into the
distillation flask (see Section 7.3.~). If
chloride ion Is present. it may be easier to use
the Specific Ion Electrode Method (Method
13B). Greese on sample-eJtposed surfaces
may cause low F results due to adsorption.

4. Precision, Accuracy, and Stability
4.1 Precision. The following estimates
are based on a collaborative test done at a
primary aluminum smelter. In the test, six
laboratories each sampled the stack
simultaneously using two sampling trains for
a total of 12 samples per sampling run.
Fluoride concentrations encountered during
the test ranged from 0.1 to 1.4 mg F/m'. The
within-laboratory and between-laboratory
standard deviations, which include sampling
and analysio errors, were 0.044 mg F/m' with
eo degrees of freedom and 0.064 mg F/m'
with five degrees of freedom, respectively.
4.2 Accuracy. The collaborative test did
not find any bias in the analytical method.
4.3 Stability. After the sample and
colorimetric reagent are mixed, the color
formed is stable for approximately 2 hours. A
3°C temperature difference between the
sample and standard solutions produces an
error of approximately O.OOS mg F/liter. To
avoid this error, the absorbances of the
sample and standard solutions must be
measured at the same temperature.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of ~he
oampling train is shown in Figure 13A-1: It IS
similar to the Method S train except the filter
position is interchangeable. The sampling
train consists of the following components:
5.1.1 Probe Nozzle, Pitot Tube.
Differential Pressure Gauge, Filter Heating
System. Metering System. Barometer, and
Gas Density Determination Equipment.
Same as Method S, Sections 2.1.1, 2.1.3, 2.1.1.1,
2.1.6.2.1.8,2.1.9, and 2.1.10. When moisture
condensation is a problem. the filter heating
oystem is used.
5.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate glass or
316 stainless steel. When the filter is loca ted
immediately after the probe, the tester may
use 8 probe heating system to prevent filter
plugging resulting from moisture
condensation. but the tester shall not allow
the temperature in the probe to exceed
120z HOC (248z2SoFJ.
5.1.3 Filter Holder. With positive seal
against leakage from the outside or around
the filter. If the filter is located between the
probe and first impinger. use borosilicate
glass or stainless steel with a 20-mesh
stainless steel scrpen filter support and a
silicone rubber gasket: do not use a glass frit
or a sintered metal filtpr support. If the filter
is located between the third and fourth
impingers, the tester may usp. borosilicate
glaas with a glass frit filter support and a
ailicone rubber gasket. The lester may also
use other materials of construction with
approval from the Administrator.
5.1.4 Impingers. Four impingers
connected as shown in Figure 13A-1 with
ground-glass (or equivalent). vacuum-tight
fittings. For the first. third. and fourth
impingers. use the Greenburg-Smith design.
modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3-cm-
inside-diameter ('II! in.) glass tube extending
to t.3 cm (¥. in.J from the bottom of the flask.
!For the second impinger. use a Greenburg-
Smith impinger with the standard tip. The
tester may use modifications (e.g.. flexible
connections between the impingers or
materials other than glass), subject to the
approval of the Administrator. Place a
thermometer. capable of measuring
temperature to within tOC (2'F), at the outlet
of the fourth impinger for monitoring
purposes.
III-Appendix A-99
5.2 Sample Recovery. The following
items are needed:
5.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle
Brushes, Wash Bottles, Graduated Cylinder
and/or Balance, Plastic Storage Containers.
Rubber Policeman. Funnel. Same as Method
5, Sectiono 2.2.1 to 2.2.2 and 2.2.5 to 2.2.8.
respectively.
5.2.2 Sample Storage Container. Wide-
mouth, high-density-polyethylene bottles for
impinger water samples. 1-liter.
5.3 Analysis. The following equipment io
needed:
5.3.1 Distillation Apparatua. Glass
distillation apparatus assembled aa shown in
Figure 13A-2.
5.3.2 Bunsen Burner.
5.3.3 Electric Muffle Furnace. Capable of
heating to BOOoC.
5.3.4 Crucibles. Nickel. 75- to 100-ml.
5.3.5 Beakers. 5aO-ml and 1500-ml.
5.3.8 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml.
5.3.7 Erlenmeyer Flasks.or Plastic BoUleo.
5IJO-ml.
5.3.8 Constant Temperature Bath.
Capable of maintaining a constant
temperature of :t1.0°C at room temperature
conditions.
5.3.9 Balance. 300-g capacity 10 measure
to :to.S g.
5.3.10 Spectrophotometer. Instrument
that measures absorbance at 570 nm and
provides at least a 1-cm light path.
5.3.11 Spectrophotometer Cells. 1-cm
pathlength.

8. Reagents
6.1 Sampling. Use ACS reagent-grade
chemicals or equivalent, unless otherwise
specified. The reagents used in sampling are
as follows:
6.1.1 Filters.
6.1.1.1 If the filter is located between the
third and fourth impingers. use a Whatman 1
No.1 filter, or equivalent. sized to fit the filter
holder.
I Mention of company or product names doe. not
constitute endol'8emant by the U.s. Envtroamental
Protect/au A,ency.
-------
TEMPERATURE ,...---------,
SE(ljS~O'R"- I STACK WALL I OPTIONAL ~ILTER I
I ~ :HOLOER LOCATIONI
--- j PROBE: + :

0= =:'::=:;:;:::~~TOTTUBE : :
"-- 1/ : :
I ~---------~

if-- su".m
PROBE
\-
------


,,;:G R u. ::~



'ITOT MANOMETE~
CHECK VAlVe
DRY TEST METEfJ
figure 13A 1. Fluoride sampling train.
&ONNUTING TUBE '\
9Z.mm 10
!24/411
Figure 13A-2. Fluoride distillation appannus.
III-Appendix A-lOa
-------
6.1.1.2 If the filter ia located between the
prolle end first impinger. use any Guitable
medium (e.g.. paper,orgftnic membrane) that
conforms 10 the following specifications: (1)
The fiI ter can withstand prolonged eJlposure
to temperatures up to 135'C (275'F). (2) The
filter has at leasl 95 percent collection
efficiency (-:5 percent penetralion) for 0.3 jAm
dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. Conduct
the filter efficiency test before the test series.
using ASTM Standard Melhod D 2980-71. or
use test data from the supplier'o quality
control program. (3) The filter has a low F
blank value (..0.015 mg F/cm20f filter area).
Before the tesl series, determine the average
F blank value of at least three filters (from
tlJe lot to be used for sampling) using the
applicable procedures described in Sections
7.3 and 7,1J of Ihis method. In general. glaso
fiber fillers have high and/ or variable F
blank values. and will not be acceptable for
use. 123
6.1.2 Water. Deionized distilled. to
conform to ASTM Specification D 1193-74.
Type 3. If high concentrations of organic
matter are.not eJlpected to be present. the
analyst' may delete the potassium
permanganate test for oJlirnzable organIc
matter.
6.1.3 Silica Gel. Crushed Ice. and
Stopcock Grease. Same as Method 5.
Section 3.1.2. 3.1.4. and 3.1.5. respectively.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Water. from same
container as described in Section 6.1.2. is
needed for sample recovery.
0.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
The reagents needed for sample preparation
and analysis are as follows:
0.3.1 Calcium Oxide (CaD). Certified
grade containing 0.005 percent F or less.
0.3.2 Phenolphthalein Indicator.
Dissolve 0.1 g of phenolphthalein in a mixture
of 50 011 of 90 percent ethanol and 50 m1 of
deionized distilled water.
6.3.3 Silver Sulfate (Ag.SO.).
6.3.4 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH).
Pellets.
6.3.5 Sulfuric Acid (H.SO.). Concentrated.
6.3.6 Sulfuric Acid, 25 percent (V IV).
Mix 1 part of concentrated H.SO. with 3
parts of deionized dislilled water.
6.3.7 Filters. Whatman No. 541. or
equivalent.
6.3.8 Hydrochloric Acid (HCI).
Concentrated.
6.3.9 Water. From same container a9
described in Section 6.1.2.
6.3.10 Fluoride Standard Solution. 0.01 mg
F/ml. Dry in an oven at 110'C for at least 2
hours. Dissol\'e 0.2210 g of NaF in 1 liter of
deionized distilled water. Dilute 100 ml of thie
solution to 1 liter with deionized distilled
water.
6.3.11 SPADNS Solution (4. 5 dihydroxy-3-
(p-s ul fop hen y la zo )-2. 7 - na ph tha I ene-rn sull onic
acid trisodium sail). Dissolve 0.960 :t: 0.010
g of SPADNS reagent in 500 OIl deionized
distilled w&ter. If stored in a well-sealed
bOll Ie protected from the sunlighl. this
solution is stable for at least 1 month.
6.3.12 Spec!l'ophotometer Zero Reference
Solution. Prepare daily. Add 10 ml of
SPAm.S solution (6.3.11) to 100 ml deionized
distilled water. and acidify wilh a solution
preparcd by diluting 7 011 of concentrated HCI
to 10 OIl with deionized distilled water.
8.3.13 SPADNS MiJled Reagent. DisDolve
0.135 :t: 0.OD5 g of zirconyl chloride
octahydrRte (zrOCI.. 8H.O) in 25 ml of
deionized distilled water. Add 350 ml of
concentrated HCI. and dilute to 50D mI with
deionized distilled water. MiJl equal volumes
of this solution and SPADNS solution to form
a single reagent. This reagent is stable for at
least 2 montho.

7. Procedure

7.1 Sampling. Because of the compleJtity
of this method. testers should be trained and
eJlperienced with the test procedures to
assure reliable resuJta.l23
7.1.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the
general procedure given in Method 5. Section
<1.1.1. eJlcept the filter need not 00 weighed.
. 7.1.2 Preliminary Determinationo.
Follow the general procedure given in
Method 5. Section 11.1.2.. except the nozzle
size selected must maintain isokinetic
sampling rates below 28 liters/min (1.0 cfm).
7.1.3 Preparation of Collection Train.
Follow the general procedure given in
Method 5. Scction 4.1.3. except for the
following variations:
Place 100 mI of deionized distilled water in
each of the first two impingers. and leave the
third impinger empty. Transfer approximately
ZOD to 300 g of preweighed silica gel from itB
container to the fourth impinger.
Assemble the train as shown in Figure
13A-l wilh the ruter between the third and
fourth impingers. Alternatively, if a 2O-mesh
stainless steel screen is used for the filter
support. the tester may place the filter
between the probe and first impinger. The
tester may also use a filter heating system to
prevent moisture condensation. but shall not
allow the temperature around the filter holder
to exceed 120 j; 14'C (248 j; 25'F). Record
the filter location on the data sheet.
7.1.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the
leak-check procedures given in Method 5.
Sections 4.1.4.1 (Pretest Leak-Check). 4.1.4.2
(Leak-Checks During the Sample Run). and
4.1.4.3 (Post-Test Leak-Check).
7.1.5 Fluoride Train Operation. Follow
the general procedure given in Method 5.
Section 4.1.5. keeping the filter and probe
temperatures (if applicaule) at 120 :t 14'C
(248 :!: 2S0F) and isokinetic sampling rates
below 28 hIers/Olin (1.0 dm). For each run.
record the data required on a data sheet such
a5 the one shown in -Method 5. Figure 5-2.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Begin proper
cleanup procedure a5 soon as the probe is
removed from the stack at the end of the
sampling period.
Allow the probe 10 cool. When it can be
safely handled. wipe off all external
particulate matter near the tip of the probe
nozzle and place a cap over it to keep from
losing part of the sample. Do nol cap off the
probe tip tightly while the sampling train is
cooling down. because a vacuum would form
in the filter holder. thus drawing impinger
water backwards.l23
Before moving the sample train to the
cleanup sile. remove the probe from the
sample train. wipe off the silicone grease. and
cap the open outlet of the probe. Be careful
not to lose any condensate. if present.
Remove the filter asscmbly. wipe off the
silicone grease from the filter holder inlet.
III-Appendix A-IOI
and cap this inlet. Rel.10Ve the umbilical cord
from Ihe last impinger. .Jnd cap the impinger.
After wiping off the silicone grease. cap off
the filter holder outlet and any open impinger
inlets and outlets. The tes.er may use ground-
glass stoppers. plastic caps. or serum caps to
close these openings.
Transfer the probe and filter-impinger
assembiy to an area that io clean and
protected from the wind DO that the chances
of contaminating or losing the sample is
minimized.
Inspect the train before and during
disassembly. and note any abnormal
conditions. Treat the samples as follows:
7.2.1 Container Na. 1 (Probe. filter. Bnd
Impinger Catches). Using a graduated
cylinder. measure to the nearest mi. and
record the volume of the water in the first
three impingero; include any condensate in
the prooo in thiD determination. Transfer the
impinger water from the graduated cylinder
into this polyethylene container. Add the
filter to this container. (The filter may be
handled separately using procedures subject
to the Administrator's approval.) Taking care
that dust on the outside of the probe or other
eJlterior surfaces does not get into the
sample. clean all oample-eJlposed surfaces
(including the probe nozzle. probe fitting.
probe liner. first three impingers. impinger
connectors. and filter holder) with deionized
distilled water. Use less than 500 011 for the
entire wash. Add the washings to the sampler
container. Perform the deionized distilled
water rinses as follows:
Carefully remove the probe nozzle and
rinse the inside surface with deionized
distilled water from a wash bottle. Brush ¥o;th
a Nylon bristle brush. and rinse until the
rinse shows no visible particles. after which
make a final rinse of the inside surface. Brush
and rinse the inside parts of the Swagelok
fitting with deionized distilled water in a
similar way.
Rinse the probe liner with deionized
distilled water. While squirting the water into
the upper end of the probe. tilt and rotate the
probe so that all inside surfaces will be
wetted with water. Let the water drain from
the lower end into the sample container. The
tester may use a funnel (glass or
polyethylene) to aid in transferring the liquid
washes to the container. Follow the rinse
with a probe brush. Hold the probe in an
inclined position. and squirt deionized
distilled water into the upper end as the
probe brush is being pushed with a twisting
action through the probe. Hold the sample
container underneath the lower end of the
probe. and catch any water and particulate
matter that is brushed from the probe. Run
the brush through the probe three times or
more. With stainless steel or other metal
probes. run the brush through in the above
pl'escribed manner at least six times since
metal probes have small crevices in which
particulate matter can be entrapped. Rinse
the brush with deionized distilled water. and
quantitatively collect these washings In the
sample container. After the brushing. make a
final rinse of the probe as descriued above.
It is recommended that two people clean
Ihe probe to minimize sample losses.
Between sampling runs. keep brushes clean
and protected from contamination.
-------
Rinse the inside surface of each of the first
three impingers (and connecting glassware)
three separate times. Use a small portion of
deionized distilled water for each rinse, and
brush each sample-exposed surface with a
Nylon bristle brush, to ensure recovery of
fine particulate matter. Make a final rinse of
I:ach surface and of the brush.
After ensuring that all joints have been
wiped clean of the silicone grease. brush and
rinse with deionized distilled water the inside
of the filter holder (front-half only, if filter is
positioned between the third and fourth
impingers). Brush and rinse each surface
three times or more if needed. Make a final
rinse of the brush and filter holder.
After all water washings and particulate
matter have been collected in the sample
container. tighten the lid so that water will
not leak out when it is shipped to the
laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid level
to determine whether leakage occurs during
transport. Label the container clearly to
identify its contents.
7.2.2 Container No.2 (Sample Blank).
Prepare a blank by placing an unused filter In
a polyethylene container and adding a
volume of water equal to the total volume in
Container No.1. Process the blank in the
same manner as for Container No.1.
7.2.3 Container No.3 (Silica Gel). Note
the color of the indicating silica gel to
determine whether it has been completely
spent and make a notation of its condition.
Transfer the silica gel from the fourth
impinger to its original container and seal.
The tester may use a funnel to pour the silica
gel and a rubber policeman to remove the
silica gel from the impinger. It is not
necessary to remove the small amount of dust
particles that may adhere to the impinger
wall and are difficult to remove. Since the
gain in weight is to be used for moisture
calculations. do not use any water or other
liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance
is available in the field, the tester may follow
the analytical procedure for Container No.3
in Se.-tion 7.4.2.
7.3 Sample Preparation and Distillation.
(Note the liquid levels in Containers No.1
and No.2 and confirm on the analysis sheet
whether or not leakage occurred during
transport. If noticeable leakage had occurred.
either void the sample or use methods,
subject to the approval of the Administrator,
to correct the final results.) Treat the contento
of each sample container as described below:
7.3.1 Containe." No.1 (Probe. Filter. and
Impinger Catches). Filter this container'o
contents, including the sampling filter.
through Whatman No. M1 filter paper. or
equivalent. into a'1500-ml beaker.
7.3.1.1 If the filtrate volume exceeds 900
mI. make the filtrate basic (red to
phenolphthalein) with NaOH. and evaporate
to less than 900 ml.
7.3.1.2 Place the filtered material
(including sampling filter) in a nickel crucible,
add B few mI of deionized distilled water,
ane! maCerate the filters with a glass rod.
Add 100 mg CaO to the crucible. and mix
the contents thoroughly to form a slurry. Add
two drops of phenolphthalein indicator. Place
the crucible in a hood under infrared lamps
or on a hot plate at low heat. Evaporate the
water completely. During the evaporation of
the water. keep the lIiurry basic (red to
phenolphthalein) to avoid loss of F. If the
indicator turns colorless (acidic) during the
evaporation. add CaO until the color turns
red again.
After evaporation of the water, place the
crucible on a hot plate under a hood and
slowly increase the temperature until the
Whetman No. 541 and sampling filters char. It
may take several hours to completely char
the filters.
Place the crucible in a cold muffle furnace.
Gradually (to prevent smoking) increase the
temperature to OOO.C, and maintain until the
contents are reduced to an ash. Remove the
crucible from the furnace and allow to cool.
Add approximately 4 g of crushed NaOH to
the crucible and mix. Return the crucible to
the muffle furnace, and fuse the sample for 10
minutes at 6OO.C.
Remove the sample from the furnace. and
cool to ambient temperature. Using several
rinsings of warm deionized distilled water.
transfer the contents of the crucible to the
beaker containing the filtrate. To assure
complete sample removal, rinse finally with
two 200ml portions of 25 percent H,SO.. and
carefully add to the beaker. Mix well. and
transfer to a I-liter volumetric flask. Dilute to
volume with deionized distilled water. and
mix thoroughly. Allow any undissolved solids
~o settle.
7.3.2 Container No.2 (Sam pIa Blank).
Treat in the same manner as described in
Section 7.3.1 above.
7.3.3 Adjustment of Acid/Water Ratio in
Distillation Flask. (Use a protective shield
when carrying out this procedure.) Place 400
ml of deionized distilled water in the
distillation flask. and add 200 ml of
concentrated H.SO.. (Caution: Observe
standard precautions when mixing H.SO.
with water. Slowly add the acid to the flask
with constant swirling.) Add some 110ft glasll
beads Bnd several amall pieces of broken
glass tubing. and assemble the apparatus as
shown in Figure 13A-2. Heat the flask until it
reaches a temperature of 175.C to adjust the
acid/water ratio for subsequent distillationll.
Discard the mstillate.
7.3.1J Distillation. Cool the contents of
the distillation flask to below SO.C. Pipet an
aliquot of sample containing less than 10.0 mg
F mrectly into the distillation flask. and add
deionized distilled water to make a total
volume of 220 ml added to the distillation
flask. (To estimate the appropriate aliquot
aize, lIelect an aliquot of the solution and
treat all described in Section 7.4.1. This will
be an approximation of the F content because
of possible interfering ions.) Note: If the
oample contains chloride. add 5 mg of Ag.SO.
to the flask for every mg of chloride.
Place II 250-ml volumetric flask at the
condenser exit. Heat the flask as rapidly as
possible with a Bunsen burner, and collect all
the distillate up to 175.C. During heatup, play
the burner flame up and down the side of the
flask to prevent bumping. Cond'.1ct the
distillation as rapidly as possible (15 minutes
or less). Slow distillations have been found to
produce low F recoveries. Caution: Be careful
not to exceed 175.C to avoid causing H,SO.
to distill over.
IC F distillation in the mg range is to be
followed by II distillation in the fractional mg
III-Appendix A-I02
range. add 220 ml of deionized distilled water
. and distill it over as in the acid adjustment
step to remove residual F !rom the distillation
system.
The tester may use the acid in the
distillation flesk until there is carry-over of
interferences or poor F recovery. Check for
these every tenth distillation using a
deionized distilled water blank and a
standard solution. Change the acid whenever
the F recovery is less than 90 percent or the
blank value exceeds O.ll.\g/ml.
7.4 Analysis,
7.4.1 Containers No.1 and No.2. After
distilling suitable aliquots from Containers
No.1 and No.2 according to Section 7.3.4,
dilute the distillate in the volumetric flasks to
exactly 250 ml with deionized distilled water,
and mix thoroughly. Pipet a suitable aliquot
of each sample distillate (containing 10 to 40
I.\S F/ml) into a beaker. and dilute to 50 mI
with deionized distilled water. Use the same
aliquot size for the blank. Add 10 ml of
SPADNS mixed reagent (6.3.13). and mix
thoroughly.
After mixing. place the sample in_a
constant-temperature bath containing the
standard solutions (see Section 6.2) for 30
minutes before reading the absorbance on the
spectrophotometer.
Set the spectrophotometer to zero
absorbance at 570 nm with the reference
solution (6.3.12). and check the
spectrophotometer calibration with the
standard solution. Determine the absorbance
of the samples, and determine the
concentration from .be calibration curve. If
the concentration doe I. not fall within the
range of the calibratioll curve. repeat the
procedure using a different size aliquot.
7.4.2 Container No.3 (Silica Gel). Weigh
the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus
impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance.
The tester may conduct this step in the field.

8. Calibration

Maintain a laboratory 108 of 811
calibrations.
8.1 Sampling Train. Calibrate the
sampling train components according to the
indicated sections in Method 5: Probe Nozzle
(Section 5.1); Pitot Tube (Section 5.2);
Metering System (Section 5.3); Probe heater
(Section 5.4); Temperature Gauges (Section
5.5); Leak Check of Metering System (Section
5.6); and Barometer (Section 5.7).
8.2 Spectrophotometer. Prepare the
blank standard by adding 10 mI of SPADNS
mixed reagent to 50 ml of deionized distilled
water. Accurately prepare a series of
standards from the 0.01 mg F/ml standard
fluoride solution (6.3.10) by diluting O. 2, 4. 6.
8. 10, 12. and 14 ml to 100 ml with deionized
distilled water. Pipet 50 ml from each solution
and transfer each to a separate 100-ml
beaker. Then add 10 ml of SPADNS mixed
reagent to each. These standards 'Nill contain
0,10. 20. 30. 40 50 60. and 70,.,.g F (0 to 1.4 I.\g/
ml). respectively.
After mixing, place the reference standards
and reference solution in a constant
temperature bath for 30 minutes oofore
reading the absorbance with the
spectrophotometer. Adjust all samples to this
same temperature before analyzing.
-------
With the opectropholometer at 570 nm. use
the reference solution (6.3.12) to set the
absorbance to zero.
Determine the absorbance of the
standards. Prepllre a calibration curve by
plotling 1'8 F /50 ml versus absorbance on
linear graph paper. Prepare the standard
curve initially and thereafter whenever the
SPAD!'I:S mixed reagent is newly made. Also.
run a calibration standard with each set of
samples and if it differs from the calibration
curve by :r 2 percent. prepare a new standard
curve.
9. Calculations

Carry out calculations. retaining at least
one extrll decimal figure beyond that of the
acquired data. Round off figures after final
calculation. Other forms of the equations may
be used. provided that they yield equh'alent
results.
9.1 Nomenclature.
A.J =I Aliquot of distillate taken for color
development. ml.
A. = AJiquot of total sample added to still.
ml.
Ba, = Water vapor in the gas stream.
. proportion by volume.
C, = Concentration of F in stock gas. mg/m'.
dry basis, corrected to standard
conditions of 760 mm lig (29.92 in. Hg)
and 293'1( (528'R).
Ft
10-3
Vt
At
(lJ9 F)
Vd
Ad
c
IF. = Total F in sample. mg.
/-Ig F = Concentration from the calibration
curve. /lg.
Tm = Absolute average dry gas meter
temperature (see Figure 5-2 of Method 5).
01( ('R).
T. = Absolute average stack gas temperature
(see Figure 5-2 of Method 5), OJ( (OR). 123
Vd = Volume of distillate as diluted. ml.
V mC,1dJ = Volume of gas sample as measured
by dry gas meter, corrected to standard
conditions. dscm (dscr).
V, = Total volume of F sample. after final
dilution. ml.
V Q'lald) = Volume of water vapor in the gas
sample. corrected to standllrd conditions.
scm (sd).

9.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature
and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data
sheet (Figure 5-2 of Method 5).
9.3 Dry GIIS Volume. Calculate Vmlat4' and
adjust for leakage. if necessary. using the
equation in section 6.3 of Method 5.
9.4 Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture
Content. Calculate the volume of water vapor
V.'C>.d) end moisture content B.~ from the data
obtained in this method (Figure 13A-1); use
Equations 5-2 and 5-3 of Method 5.
9.5 Concentration.
9.5.1 Total Fluoride in Sample. Calculate
the amount of F in the sample using the
following equation:
Eq. 13A-1
9.5.2 Fluoride Concentration in Stack Gas. Determine the F concentration in the stack
gas using the following equation:
Cs
Ft
K Vm(std)
c
Eq. 13A-2
III-Appendix A-I03
Where:
K = 35.31 ft'/m'ifVmlaldJ is expressed in
English units.
= 1.00 m'/m3 if Vmlat4) is expressed in
metric units.
9.6 Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable
Results. Use Method 5. Sections 6.11 and
6.12.
10. Bibliography

1. Bell!tck. Ervin. Simplified Fluoride
Distillation Method. Journal of the American
Water Works Association. 50:5306. 1958.
2. Mit(;h~ll. W. J.. J. C. Suggs. and F. J.
Bergman. ColIRborative Study of EPA method
13A and Method 138. Publication No. EPA-
6OO/4-77~50. Em'ironmental Protection
Agency. Research Tria'ngle Park. North
Carolina. December 1977.
3. Mitchell, W. J. and M. R. Midgett.
Adequacy of Sampling Trains and Analytical
Procedures Used for Fluoride. Atm. Environ.
10:865-672. 1976.
-------
/I1t,thod 138. DeiermiIlQ!ion of Total Fluoride
EmlSSlOlIS From Stationar\, Sources; Specific
Ion Electrode Methad 14,1T3

1. Applicability and Principle

1.1 Applicability. This method applies to
the determination of fluoride (F) emissions
from stationary sources as specified in the
regulations. It does not measure
fluorocarbons. such a~ freons.
1.2 Principle. Gaseous and particulate F
are withdrawn isokinetically from the source
and collected in water and on a filter. The
total F is the,n determined by the specific ion
electrode method.
2. Range and Sensitil'itJ'

The range of this method is 0.02 to 2.000 ",g
F/ml: however. measurements of less than 0.1
p.g F/ml require extra care. Sensiti\.ity has
not been determined.

3. Interferences

Grease on sample-exposed surfaces may
CRuse low F results because of adsorption.
<1. Precision and Accuracy

4.1 Precioion. The following estimates
are based on a collaborative test done at a
primary aluminum smelter. In the test. six
laboratories each sampled the stack
simultaneously using two sampling trains for
a total of 12 samples per sampling run.
Fluoride concentrations encountered during
the test ranged from 0.1 to 1.13 mg F/m'. The
within-laboratory and between-laboratory
standard deviations. which include sampling
and analysis errors. are 0.037 mg F/m' with
60 dpgrees of freedom and 0.056 mg F/m'
with five degrees of freedom. respectively.
4.2 Accuracy. The collaborative test did
not find any bias in the anal~'tical method.

5. Apparatus

5.1 Sampling Train and Sample Recovery.
Same as Method 13A. Sections 5.1 and 5.2.
respectively.
5.2 Analysis. The following items are
needed:
5.2.1 Distillation Apparatus. Bunsen
Burner. Electric Muffle Furnace. Crucibles.
Beakers. Volumetric Flasks. Erlenmever
Flasks or Plastic Bottles. Constant'
Temperature Bath. and Balance. Same as
Method 13A. Sections 5.3.1 to 5.3.9.
respectively. except include also loo-ml
polyethylene beakers.
5.2.2 Fluoride Ion Activity Sensing
Electrode.
5.2.3 Reference Electrode. Single
junction. sleeve type.
5.2.4 Electrometer. A pH meter with
millivolt-scale capable of :toO.l-mv resolution.
or a specific ion meter made specifically for
specific ion use.
5.2.5 Magnetic Stirrer and TFE 2
Fluorocarbon-Coated Stirring Bars.
. Mention of any trade name or specific product
does not constilule endorsement by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. n23
6. Reagents

6.1 Sampling and Sample RecO\'erv.
Same as Method 13A. Sections 6.1 and 6.2.
respectively.
6.2. Analysis. . Use ACS reagent grade
chemicals (or eqUIvalent). unless otherwise
specified. The reagents needed for analysis
are as follows:
6.2.1 Calcium Oxide (CaO). Certified
grade containing 0.005 percent F or less.
6.2.2 Phenolphthalein Indicator.
Dissoh'e 0.1 g of phenolphthalein in a mixture
of 50 ml of 90 percent ethanol and 50 ml
deionized distilled water.
6.2.3 Sodium H~'droxide (~aOI I).
Pellets.

6.2.4 Sulfuric Acid (H.SO.). Conc!'ntrat~d.
6.2.5 Fillers. Whatman 1'\0. 541. or
equivalent.
6.2.6 Water. From same container as
6.1.2 of Method 13A.
6.2.7 Sodium Hydroxide. 5 M. Dissolve
20!! of NaOH in 100 ml of deionized distilled
water.
~.2.8 Sulfuric Acid. 25 percent (V /V).
MIx 1 part of concentrated H.SO. with 3
parts of deionized distilled water.

6.2.9 Total Ionic Strength Adjustment
Buffer (TISAB). Place approximately 500 ml
of deionized distilled water in a l-liter
beaker. Add 57 ml of glacial acetic acid. 58 g
of sodium chloride. and 4 g of cyclohexylene
dinitrilo tetrsacetic acid. Stir to dissolve.
Piace the beaker in a water bath to cool it.
Slowly add 5 M NaOH to the solution.
measuring the pH continuously with a
calibrated pH/reference electrode pair. until
the pH is 5.3. Cool to room temperature. ~ur
into a l-liter volumetric flask. and dilute to
volume with deionized distilled water.
Commercially prepared TISAB may be
substituted for the above.
6.2.10 Fluoride Standard Solution. 0.1 M.
Oven dry some sodium fluoride (NaF) for a
minimum of 2 hours at 110'C. and store in a
desiccator. Then add 4.2 g of NaF to a 1-liter
volumetric flask. and add enough deionized
distilled water to dissolve. Dilute to volume
with deionized distilled water.

7. Procedure

7.1 Sampling. Sample. Recovery. and
Sample Preparation and Distillation. Same
as Method 13A. Sections 7.1, 7.2. and 7.3,
respectively. except the notes concerning
chloride and sulfate interferences are not
applicable.
7.2 Analysis.
7.2.1 Containers No.1 and No.2. Distill
suitable aliquots from Containers No.1 and
No.2. Dilute the distillate in the volumetric
fla'sks to exactly 250 mJ with deionized
distilled water and mix thoroughly. Pipet a
25-ml aliquot from each of the distillate and
separate beakers. Add an equal volume of
TISAB. and mix. The sample should be at the
same temperature as the calibration
standards when measurements are made. If
ambient laboratory temperature fluctuates
more than :to2'C from the temperature at
which the calibration standards were
measured. condition samples and standards
III-Appendix A-104
in a constant-temperature bath before
measurement. Stir the sdmple with a
magnetic stirrer during measurement to
minimize electrode response time. If the
stirrer generates enough heat to change
solution temperature. place a piece of
temperature insulating mdterial such as cork,
between the stirrer and the beaker. Hold
dilute samples (below 10.' M fluoride ion
content) in pol,yethylene beakers during
measurement.1Z3

Insert the fluoride and reference electrodes
into the solution. When a steady millivolt
reading is obtained. record it. This may take
several minutes. Determine concentration
from the"t:alibration curve. Between electrode
measurements, rinse the electrQde with
deionized distilled water. 123

7.2.2 Container No.3 (Silica Gel). Same
as Method 13A. Section 7.4.2.

8. Calibration

Maintain e laboratory log of all
calibrations.

8.1 Sampling Train. Same as Method
13A.

6.2 Fluoride Electrode. Prepare fluoride
standardizing solutions by serial dilution of
the 0.1 M fluoride standard solution. Pipet 10
ml of 0.1 M fluoride standard solution into a
l00-ml volumetric flask. and make up to the
mark with deionized distilled water for a 10.1
M standard solution. Use 10 mJ of 10.2 M
solution to make a 10.' M solution in the
same manner. Repeat the dilution procedure
and make 10.. and 10.. solutions.
Pipet 50 ml of each standard into a
separate beaker. Add 50 ml of TISAB to each
beaker. Place the electrode in the most dilute
standard solution. When a steady millivolt
reading is obtained. plot the value on the
linear axis of semilog graph paper versus
concentration on the log axis. Plot the
nominal value for concentration of the
standard on the log axis. e.g.. when 50 mI of
10.' M standard is diluted with 50 ml of
TISAB. the concentration is still designated
"10.2 M."
Between measurements soak the fluoride
sensing electrode in deionized distilled water
for 30 seconds. and then remove and blot dry.
Analyze the standards going from dilute to
concentrated standards. A straight-line
calibration curve will be obtained, with
nominal concentrations of 10-., 10.°, 10.2.
and 10- I fluoride molarity on the log axis
plotted versus electrode potential (in mv) on
the linear scale. Some electrodes may be
slightly nonlinear between 10.. and 10.4 M. If
this occurs, use additional standards between
these two concentrations.
Calibrate the fluoride e1ectrode daily. and
check it hourly. Prepare fresh fluoride
standardizing solutions daily (10.2 M or less).
Store fluoride standardizing solutions in
polyethylene or polypropylene containers.
(Note: Certain specific ion meters have been
designed specifically for fluorid~ el~ctrode
use and give a direct readout of fluoride ion
concentration. These meters msy be used in
lien of calibration curves for fluoride
measurements over narrow concentration
ranges. Calibrate the meter according to the
manufacturer's Instructions.)
-------
9. Calculations

Carry out calculatioDB, retaining at least
one extra decimal figure beyond that of the
acquired data. Round off figures after final
calculation.
9.1 Nomenclature. Same 8S Method 13A.
Section 9.1. In addition:

M=F concentration from calibration curve,
molarity.

9.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature
and Average Orifice Pressure Drop, Dry Gas
Volume, Volume of Water Vapor and
Moisture Content.FluorideConcentration in
Stack Gas. and Isokinetic Variation and
Acceptable Results. Same as Method 13A,
Section 9.2 to 9.4. 9.5.2. and 9.6, respectively.123
9.3 Fluoride in Sample. Calculate the
amount of F in the sample using the
following:
Ft  K Vt C.Vd) (M)
c At
Where:     
1<=19 mg/ml.    
     123
    Equation 138-1
10. References

1. Same as Method 13A. Citations 1 end 2
of Section 10.
2. Macleod. I
-------
METHOD :i4-DETERMINA TION Olr'
FLUORIDE !EMISSIONS FROM POTROOM
ROOF MONITORS FOR PRIMARY
ALUMINUM PLANTS '27, 114

1. Applicability and Principle.
1.1 Applicllbility. This method is
applicable for the determination of fluoride
emissions from stationary sources only when
specified by the test procedures for
'determining compliance with new source
performance standards.
1.2 Principle. Gaseous and particuillte
fluoride roof monitor emissions are drllwn
into a permanent sampling manifold through
several large nozzles. The sample is
transported from the sllmpling manifold to
ground level through a duct. The gas in the
duct is sampled using Method 13A or 138-
Determination of Total Fluoride Emissions
from Stationary Sources. Effluent velocity
and volumetric flow rate are determined with
anemometers located in the roof monitor.

2. Apparatus.
2.1 Velocity measurement apparatus.
2.1.1 Anemometers. Propeller
anemometers. or equivalent. Each
anemometer shall meet the following
spccifications: (1) Its propeller shall be mae!.'
of polystyrene. or similar matcrial of uniform
density. To insure uniformity of performan....
among propellers. it is desirable that all
propellers be made from the samt' mold: (2)
The propeller shall be properly baldncl'd. to
optimize performance: (3) When Ihl'
anemometer is mounted horizontally. its
threshold velocity shall not exceed 15 m/min
(50 fpm): (4) The measurement range of th"
anemometer shall e)(tend to at least 6IXJ ml
min (2,000 fpm): (5) The anemometer shall I...
ahlt! to withstand prolonged exposure to
dusty and corrosive environments: one wu~
of achieving this is to continuously purge th..
bearings of the anemometer with filtered ail
during operation: (6) All anemometer
components shall be properly shielded or
encased, such that the performance of thl'
anemometer is uninfluenced by potroom
magnetic field effects: (7) A known
relationship shall exist between the electril;al
output signal from the anemometer generator
and the propeller shaft rpm. at a minimum of
three evenly spaced rpm settings between 60
and 1800 rpm: for the 3 settings, use 6O:!: 15,
GOO:!: 100, and 1800:t:100 rpm. Anemometers
having other types of output signals (e.g..
optical) may be used. subject to the approval
of the Administrator. If other types of
anemometers are used, there must be a
!mown relationship (as describl!d above)
between output signal and shaft rpm: also.
each anemometer must be equipped with a
ouitable readout system (See Section 2.1.3).
2.1.2 Installation of anemometers.
2.1.2.1 If the affected facility consists of a
single, isolated potroom (or potroom
oegment). install at least orie anemometer for
every 85 m of roof monitor length. If the
length of the roof monitor divided by 85 m is
not a whole number. round the fraction to thl'
nearest whole number to determine the
number of anemometers needed. For
monitors that are less than 130 m in length.
use at least two anemometers. Divide the
monitor cross-section into as many equal
areas as anemometers and locate an
anemometer at the centroid of each equal
:irl'u. See exception in Section 2.1.2.3.
2.1.2.2 If the affected facility consists uf
two or more potrooms (or potroom spgmcnts)
ducted to a common control device. install
anemometers in each potroom (or segment)
that contains a sampling manifold. Install at
least one anemometer for every 85 m of rouf
monitor length of the potroom (or segment). If
the potroom (or segment) length divided by 115
is not a whole number. round the fraction to
the nearest whole number to determine thl'
number of anemometers needed. If the
potroom (or segment) length is less Ihan 130
m. use at least two anemometers. Divide the
pot room (or segment) monitor cross-section
inlo as many equal arells as anemometers
and locate' an anemometer at the centroid of
each equal area. See exception in Section
2.].2.3.
2.1.2.3 At least one anemometer shall b,.
installed in the immediate vicinity (i.e..
within 10 m) of the center of the munifold
(See Section 2.2.1). For its placement in
relation to the width of the monitor. then' .II'('
twu alternatives. The first is'to make a
velocity traverse of the width of the roof
monitor where an anemometer is to be placed
and install the anemometer a t a point of-
a\'erage velocity along this traverse. The
traverse may be made with any suitable low
velocity measuring device. and shall b~ made
during normal process operating conditions.
The second alternative. at the option of the
tester, is to install the anemometer halfway
across the width of the roof monitor. In this
IMter case. the velocity traverse need not be
conducted.
2.1.3 Recorders. Recorders. equipped with
suitable auxiliary equipment (e.g.
transducers) for converting the output signlll
from each anemometer to a continuous
recording of air now velocity, or to an
integrated measure of volumetric nowrate. A
sUitable recorder is one that allows the
output signal from the propeller anemometer
to be read to within 1 percent when the
velocity is between 100 and 120 m/min (350
and 400 fpm). For the purpose of recording
velocity. "continuous" shall mean one
readout per 15-minute or shorter time
interval. A constant amount of time shall
elapse between readings. Volumetric now
rate may be determined by an electrical
count of anemometer revolutions. The
recorders or counters shall permit
identification of the velocities or nowrate
measured by each individual anemometer.
2.1.4 Pitot tube. Standard-type pitet tube.
as described in Section 2.7 of Method 2. and
having a coefficient of 0.99:t:0.01.
2.1.5 Pitot tube (optional). Isolated. Type
S pitot. as described in Section 2.1 of Method
2. The pitot tube shall have a known
coefficient. determined as outlined in Section
4.1 of Method 2.
2.1.6 Differential pressure gauge. Inclined
manometer or equivalent. as described in
Section 2.1.2 of Method 2.
2.2 Roof monitor air sampling system.
2.2.1 Sampling ductwork. A minimum of
one manifold system shall be instaHed for
each potroom group (as defined in Subpart S.
Section 60.191). The manifold system and
connecting duct shall be permanently
III-Appendix A-106
installed to draw an air sample from the rool
monitor to ground level. A typical installation
of a duct for drawing a sample from a roof
monitor to ground level is shown in Figure
14-1. A plan of a manifold system that is
located in a roof monitor is shown in Figur/'
14.2. These drawings represent a typical
installation for a generalized roof monitor.
The dimensions on these figures may be
altered slightly to make the manifold system
fit into a particular roof monitor, but the
general configuration shall be followed.
There shall be eight nozzles. each having a
diameter of 0.40 to 0.50 m. Unless otherwise
specified by the AdminiMrator. the length of
the manifold system from the first nozzle to
the eighth shall be 35 m or eight percent of
the length of the potroom (or potroom
segment) roof monitor. whichever is greater.

The duct lellding from thl' ruuf monitor
manifuld shall be round with a diameter uf
0.30 to 0.40 m. As shown in F,!!ure 14-2. each
of the sample legs of thl' manifold shall ha\'P
a device. such liS II blast gatl' or \'ah'e. to
enablp adjustm..nl of Ihl' fiow Inlu each
sample nozzle.
Thl' manifuld shall be locllted in the
immediate \'icinily of one of the propeller
anemometers (see SeLliun 2.1.2.3) and as
close as possible to the midsection of the
potroom (or potroom segment). Avoid
locuting the manifold near the end of a
potruom or in a section where the aluminum
reduction pot arrangement is not typical of
the rest of the potroom (or potroom segment).
Center the sample nozzles in the throat of the
roof monitor [see Fig".re ]4-1). Construct all .
sample-exposed surfdces within the nozzles.
manifold and sample duct of 316 stainleB8
steel. Aluminum may be uspd if II new
ductwork system is conditioned with
fluoride-laden roof monitor air for a period of
six weeks prior to initial testing. Other
mllterials of construction may be used if it is
demonstrated through cOR:)parative te5ting
that there is no loss of flourides in the
system. All connections in the ductwork shall
I;e leak free.
Locate two sample ports in a vertical
spction of the duct between the roof monilor
and exhau&t fa.n. The sample ports shall be at
least 10 duct diameters downstream and
three diameters upstream from any now
disturbance such as a bend 01' contraction.
Tht! two sampl!' ports shall be situated 90.
apart. One of the sample ports shall be
siluuted so that the duct can be traversed in
th.. plane of the nearest upstream duct bend.
2.2.2 Exhnust fan. An industrial fan or
blower shall be attached to the sample duct
al ground level (see Figure 14-1). This
exhaust fan shRIl have a capacity such that B
large enough volume of air can be pulled
through the ductwork to mllintain an
iiwkinetic sampling rale in !Ill the sample
nozzles for all now rates normallv
encountered in the roof monitor. .
The exhaust fan volumetric flo\\' rate shall
111, IIdj~stable so that the roof monitor air can
1)1' dray,'J] isokinetically into the aample
nozzles. This Gontrol of flow may be achieved
by A damper on \jJe inlet to the exhau~ter or
by any other workable method.
2.3 Temperature measo;remenl 6P\>
-------
SAMPLE
MANIFOLD
W/8 NOZZlES
SAMPLE EXTRACTION
DUCT
35 em I.D.
---
H
H
H
,
~
'"d
'"d
CD
::s
P-
I-"
X
~
I
I-'
o
-.....J
10 DUCT DIA.
MINIMUM
SAMPLE PORTS IN
VERTICAL DUCT
SECTION AS SHOWN
7.5 em DIA.
3 DUCT DIA. I
MINIMUM

I
POT ROOM
-~-
.-...;
EXHAUS:r BLOWER
F i!-jure 14.1 Roof monitor sampling system.
-------
I-~--

I n.D.
35
~I
11.27
1.0.
10 BLOWER
DII\.~ENSIONS Ii\! METERS
NOT TO SCALE
t'iI.3i1
~1.15
l+--~:~~~
Figure 14 2 Samplinq manifold and nozzles.
III-Appendix A-lOB
-------
 :; 
I%: E 
w ~ 
~ ~ +1 
w 
:E .J~o 
0 etw~ 
:E ~:Ew 
w (::I~~ 
Z -.Jet 
et. 001%: 
>:;:) 
 U 0
 U
 ~
I%:
o
~ -
o ~
:EZ~
yo +1
'-0
o~~
'et
I%:Zw
w-~
~CDC(
w:EII:
:EO:;:)
OUU
% U
U ~
et
~
a:
",,0
(::I~
C(C(
~.J
.J:;:)
0(::1
>'"
I%:
a:>
",.J
:!:t
0:;:)
o..cn
o
o
....
o
...
CO
....
Q)
C
Q)
C>
~
a..
a:
CO
U
C.
>
~

c;
~
Q)
....
:J
D>
u..
III-Appendix A-109
RHmple duct. The thermooouple shl!ll confoml
to the spp.ciflt'Hlions outlined in Section 2.3 of
Method 2.
2.3.2 Signal transducer. Tran&ducer, kI
change the thermocouplli' vohl!ge output tv II
temperature readout.
2.3.3 Thermocouple wire. To reach from
roul monitor tu signal transducer and
relorr!er.
2.3.4 Recurder. Suit:lI.Jle re:;order to
monitor the ou:put from the' thermocouple
signal transducer.
2.4 Fluoride sampling train. Use the train
described in Method 13A or 138.

3. Rpogents.
3.1 Sampling Hnd analysis. Use reagents
described in Method 13.'\ or 138.
4. Colibratiun.
4.1 Imtial performance checks. Conduct
these checks within 60 days prior to the first
performance test.
4.1.1 Propeller anemometers.
Anemometers which meet the specificHtions
outlined in Section 2.1.1 need 110t be
cHlibrated. pro\'ided that a reference
performance curVE relatiflS! anemometer
8ignal output 10 Hir velocit~ (covering the
velocity range of interest) is a\lllillible from
the manufacturer"For the purpose of this
method. a "reference" performance curve is
defined as one that hHs been derived from
primary standard calibration data. with the
anemometer mounted vertically. "Primary
8tandard" data are obtainable by: (1) Direcl
calibration of one or more of the
anemometers by the National Bureau of
Standards (NBS1: (2) NBS-traceable
calibratiDn; or (3) CalibratiDn by direct
measurement of fundllmental parameters
such a8 length and time (e-8.. by moving the
anemometers through still air at measured
rates of speed. and recording the output
signals). If a reference performance curve is
not available from the manufacturer, such a
curve shall be generated, using Dne Df the
three methDds described as above. Conduct 8
performance-check as outlined in Sectioo
..1.1.1 through 4.1.1.3, below. Alternatively.
the tesler may use any other suitable method.
subject ID the approval of the Administrator.
thai takes intD account the signal output.
propeller condition and threshold velocity of
the anemometer.
4.1.1.1 Check the signal output of the
anemDmeter by using an accurate rpm
generatDr (see Figure 1~3) or synchronous
motors to spin the propeller shaft at each of
the three rpm settings described in SeLl ion
2.1.1 above (specification ND. 7), and
measuring the output signal at each setting. If.
al each setting, the Dutput signal is within :t
5 percent Df the manufacturer's value. the
anemDmeter can be used. If the anemometer
performance is unsatisfactory, the
anemDmeler shall either be replaced Dr
repaired.
4.1.1.2 Check Ihe propeller condition, by
visually inspecting the propeller, making no Ie
Df any significant damage or warpage:
damaged Dr deformed propellers shall be
replaced.
-------
SIDE
SIDE
.'y"

gram
WElGHT
(A)
FRONT
(8)
FRDNT
Figure 14.4. Check of anemometer starting torque. A "y" gram weight placed "x" centimeters
from center of propeller shaft produces a torque of "xy" g-cm. The minimum torque which pro.
duces a 900 (approximately) rotation of the propeller is the "starting torque."
4.1.1.3 Check the anemometer threshold
VIiIlocity as follows: With the aAemometer
mounted 811 shown in Figure 14-<\!(A). fasten II
known weight (8 straight-pin will suff\(re) to
the anemometer propelJor at a fixed dial/mce
from the center of the propeller sluii't. This
will generate II known torque: for ~xample. iI
0.1 i weight. placed 10 em from the center of
the shaft, will generate 11 torq..e of 1.0 g-cm. H
tbe known tOl'que causes tbe propeller to
rotate dort"IIward. approximately 90' [~ee
f'lBure14-4(BJ]. then the known torque is
greater than or equal to the starting torque: if
the propeller fails to rotate approximately
90', the known torque ia leas than the atarling
torque. By trying different combinations of
weight and distance. the starting torqup of a
particular anemometer can be satisfactorily
estimated. Once an estimate of the starting
torque has been obtained. the threshold
velocity of the anemometer (for horizontal
mounting) can be estimated from 8 graph
such a8 Figure 14-5 (obtained from the
manufacturer). If the horizontal' threshold
velocity is acceptable 1<15 m/min (50 fpm),
when this technique is usedl, the anemometer
can be used. If the threshold velocity of an
anemometer is found to be unacceptably
high, the anemometer shall either be replaced
or repaired.
III-Appendix A-110
-------
5
4
E 
.. 
a. 3
w 
::;) 
0 
a: 
0 
I- 
t:I 
Z 
i= 
a: 
oct 2
I-
eI) 
FPM 20
(m/min) (6)
40
(12)
60
(18)
80
(24)
100
(30)
.120
(36)
140
(42)
THESHOlO VElOCITY FOR HORIZONTAL MOUNTING
Figure 14.5. Typical curve of starti ng torque vs horizontal threshold velocity for propeller
anemometers. Based on data obtained by R.M. Young Company. May. 1977.
III-Appendix A-Ill
-------
(1.1.2 ThlWmocouple. Check the calibration
of the thermocouple-potentiometer oystem.
using the procedures outlined in Section 1iI.3
of Method 2. at temperatures of O. 100. and
1SO'C. If the catlbration is off by more than
5'C at any of the temperatures. repair or
replace the system: otherwise. the system can
be used.
(1.1.3 Recorders and/or counters. Check
the calibration of each recorder and/or
counter (see Section 2.1.3) at II minimum of
three pointo. approximlltely spanning the
expected range of velocities. Use the
calibration procedureo recommended by the
mllnufacturer. or other suitable procedures
(subject to the approval of the
AdministrCttor). If a recorder or counter is
found to be out of calibration. by an IIIverage
amount greater than 5 percent for the three
calibration points. replace or repair the
system: otherwise. the system can be used.
4.1.4 Manifold Intake Nozzles. In order to
balance the flow rates in the eight individual
nozzles. proceed as follows: Adjust the
exhllust fan to draw a volumetric flow rate
(refer to Equation 14-1) sUl:h that the
entrllnce velocity into each manifold nozzle
approximates the average effluent velocity in
the roof monitor. Measure the velocity of the
air entering each nozzle by inserting a
standard pitot tube into a 2.5 cm or less
dill meter hole (oee figure 14-2) located in the
manifold between each blast gate (or valve)
and nozzle. Note that a standard pitottube is
used. rather than a type S. to eliminate
possible velocity measurement errors due to
cross-section blockage in the small (0.13 m
dilimeterJ manifold leg ducts. The pi tot tube
tip shall be positioned at the center of each
mHnifold leg duct. Take care to insure that
there is no leakege around the pitot tube.
which l:ould affect the indicllted velocity in
the manifold leg. If the velocity of air being
drawn into each nozzle is not the same. open
or close each blast gate (or valve) until the
velocitv in each nozzle is the same. fasten
each bias! gate (or valve) so that it will
remain in this position and close the pi tot
port holes. This calibration shall be
performed when the manifold systt.m is
installed. Alternatively. the manifofd may be
prpussembled and the flow rates balanced on
the ground. before being installed.
4.2 Periodical performance checks.
Twelve months after their initial installation.
check the calibration of the propeller
anemometers. thermocouple-potentiometer
s~'Stem. and the recorders and/ or counters as
in Section 1iI.1. If the above systems pliSS the
performanl:e checks. (I.e.. if no repair or
replacemeni of any component is necessary).
continue with the performance checks on a
12-month interval basis. However. if any of
the above systemo fail the performance
checks. repair or replace the syotem(s) that
failed and conduct the periodical
performance checks on a 3-moitth interval
basis. until sufficient information (consult
with the Administrator) is obtained to
establish a modified performance check
6chedulc and calculation procedure.

Note.-If any of the above 6ystemo fan the
inili'll performance checks. the datlll for the
past year need not be recalculated.
5. Procedure.
5.1 Roof Monitor Velocity Determination.
5.1.1 Velocity estimate[s) for setting
isokinetic now. To assist in setting isokinetic
flow in the manifold sllmple nozzles. the
anticipllted average velocity in the section of
the roof monitor containing the sampling
manifold shall be estimated prior to each test
run. The tester may use any convenient
means to make this estimate (e.g.. the
velocity indicated by the anemometer in the
section of the roof monitor containing the
sampling manifold may be continuously
monitored during the 24-hour period prior to
the test run).
If there is question as to whether a single
estimate of average velocity is adequate for
an entire test run (e.g.. if velocities are
anticipated to be significantly different
during different potroom operations). the
tester may opt to divide the test run into two
or more "sub-runs." and to use a dirrerent
estimated average velocity for 'each sub-run
[see Section 5.3.2.2.)
5.1.2 Velocity determination during a test
run. During the actual test run. record the
velocity or volumetric flowrate readings of
each propeller anemometer in the roof
monitor. Readings shall be taken for each
anemometer every 15 minutes or at shorter
equal time intervals (or continuously).
0.2 Temperature recording. Record the
temperature of the roof monitor every 2 hours
during the test r\Jn.
5.a Sampling.
5.3.1 Preliminary air flow in duct. During
21i1 hours preceding the Jest. turn on the
exhaust flln and draw roof monitor air
through the manifold duct to condition the
ductwork. Adjust the fan to draw a
volumetric flow through the duct such that
the velocity of gas entering the manifold
nozzles approximates the average velocity of
the air exiting the roof monitor in the vicinity
of the sampling manifold.
5.3.2 Manifold isokinetic sample rate
adjustment(s}.
5.3.2.1 Initial adjustment. Prior to the test
run (or first sub-run. if applicable: see Section
5.1.1 and 5.3.2.2). adjust the fan to provide the
necessary volumetric flowrate in the
sampling duct. so that air enters the manifold
sample nozzles at a velocity equal to the
appropriate estimated average velocity
determined under Section 5.1.1. Equation 14-1
gives the correct stream velocity needed in
the duct at the sampling location. in order for
oample gas to be drawn isokinetically into
the manifold nozzles. Next. verify that the
correct stream velocity has been achieved. by
performing a pitot tube traverse of the sample
duct (using either a standard or type S pitot
tube): use the procedure outlined in Method 2.

8 (D.)' 1 min
vo=
(v~)
{EquctJOn 14-"
60 sse
(OJ-
'Where:
,1/4= Desired velocity in duct at sampling
location.m/sec.
III-Appendix A-112
Dn =Diameter of a roof monitor manifold
nozzle. m.
D. = Diameter of duct lit sampling lOCH lion.
m.
Vm = Average velodty of the air stream in
the roof monitor. m/min. liS df:termined
under Section 5.1.1.
5.3.2.2 Adjustments during run. If the If,s!
run is divided into two or mure "sub-runs"
(see Section 5.1.1). additional isokinctic rute
adjustment(s) may become necesSHry during
the run. Any such adjustment shall be made
just before the start of a sub-run, using the
procedure outlined in Section 5.3.2.1 above.
Note.-Isokinetic rate adjustments arc not
permissible during a sub-run.
5.3.3 Sample train operation. Sample the
duct using the standllrd fluoride train and
methods described in Methods 13A and 13B.
Determine the number and loclltion of the
sampling points in accordance with Methud
1. A single train shall be used for the entire
8ampling run. Alternatively. if two ur more
sub-runs are performed. a separate train mny
be used for each sub-run: note. howc\'er. thHt
if this option is chosen. the areH of thi'
sampling nozzle shall be the sanlt: (' 2
percent) for each train. If the test run is
divided into sub-runs. a complete traverse of
the duct shall be performed during each suh-
run.
5.3.4 Time per run. EHch test run shlflliast
8 hours or more: if more than one run is to 1)('
performed. all runs shall be of approximHII-ly
the same (:t 10 percent) length. If qupstion
exists as to the representativeness of an 8-
hour test. a longer period should be selec.tpd.
Conduct each run duri,,~ a period when all
normal operations are verformed undernettth
the sampling manifold. For most recently-
constructed plants. 24 hours lire required for
all potroom operations and events to occur in
the area beneath the sampling manifold.
During the test period. all pots in the pot room
group shall be operated such that emissions
are representative of normal oper"ting
conditions in the potroom group.
5.3.5 Sample recovery. Use the sample
recover~' procedure described in Method 13A
or 138.
5.4 Analysis. Use the analysil< procedures
described in Method 13A or 13B.

6. Calcu/ation.~.
6.1 Isokinetic sampling l:heck.
6.1.1 Calculate the mean velocity (v..) for
the sampling run. as measured by the
anemometer in the section of the roof monitor
containing the sampling manifold. If two or
more sub-runs have been performed. the
tester may opt to calcullite the meHn veloGity
for each sub-run.
6.1.2 Using Equation 14-1, calculate the
expected average velocity (V4) in the
sampling duct. corresponding to each value of
Vm obtained under Section 6.1.1.
6.1.3 Calculate the actual average velocity
(v,) in the sampling duct for each run or sub-
run. according to Equation 2-9 of Method 2.
aad using data obtained from Method 13.
6.1.4 Express each vlllue v, from Section
6.1.3 as a percentage of the corresponding V4
value from Section 6.1.2.
-------
6.1.4.1 If v. is less than or equal to 120
percent of Vd' the results are acceptable (note
that in cases where the above calculations
have been perfonned for each sub-run. the
results are acceptable if the average
percentage for all sub.runs is less than or
equal to 120 percent).
6.1.4.2 If v. is more than 120 percent of Vd.
multiply the reported emission rate by the
following factor.

(100 y./v,1 .120
1+
200

6.2 Average velocity of roof monitor
gases. Calculate the average roof monitor.
  n 
  r eFt);
Cs = 1=1 ..
 n 
  ~ (Vm(std));
  ..
  ;=1
Where:
C,= Average fluoride concentration in roof
monitor air. mg F/dscm.
F. = Total fluoride mass collected during a
particular sub-run. mg F (from Equation
13A-1 of Method 13A or Equation 138-1
of Method 13B).
Vml'Id)=Total volume of sample gas
passing through the dry gas meter during
a particular sub-run. dscm (see Equation
~1 of Method 5).
n='fotal number of sub-runs.
6.5 Average volumetric flow from the roof
monitor of the potroom(s) (or potroom
segment(s)) containing the anemometers is
given in Equation 14-3.

¥m,(A) (M,) P ",(293 K)
'-- - -. ~ (Equation 14-3)
IT m. 273 ) (760 mm HgI
0..-
Where:
Qm = Average volumetric flow from roof
monitor at standard conditions on a dry
basis. m3/min.
velocity using all the velocity or volumetric
flow readings from Settion 5.1.2.
6.3 Roof monitor temperature. Calculate
the mean value of the temperatures recorded
in Section 5.2.
6.4 Concentration of fluorides in roof
monitor air (in mg F/m").
6.4.1 If a single sampling train was used
throughout the run. calculate the average
fluoride concentration for the roof monitor
using Equation 13A-2 of Method 13A.
6.4.2 If two or more sampling trains were
used (i.e.. one per sub-run). calculate the
average fluoride concentration for the run. as
follows:
(Equation 14~2)
A = Roof monitor open area. m".
Vmt = Average velocity of air in the roof
monitor. m/min. from Section 6.2.
Pm=Pressure in the roof monitor: equal to
barometric pfl~ssure for this application.
mmHg.
T m = Roof monitor temperature. 'C. from
Section 6.3.
Md=Mole fraction uf dry gas. which is
given by:
M,. (1 B.J

Note.-B~.. is the proportion b~' volume of
water vapor in the gas stream. frum Equation
~3. Method 5.
7. Bibliography.
1. Shigehara. R. T.. A guideline for
Evaluating Compliance Test Results
(Isokinetic Sampling Rate Criterion). U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Emission
Measurement Branch. Research Triangle
P.ark. North Carolina. August 1977.
III-Appendix A-113
-------
METHOD 15. DETERMINATION OF HYDROCEN
SULFIDE. CARBONYL SULFIDE. AND CARBON
DrSULFIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY
SOURCES 86
INTRODUCTION

The method described below uses the
principle of gas chromatographic separation
and flame photometric detection (FPD).
Since there are many systems or sets of op.
erating conditions that represent usable
methods of determining sulfur emissions. all
systems which employ this principle. but
differ only in details of equipment and oper.
ation. may be used as alternative methods.
provided that the criteria set below are met.
1. Principle and applicability

1.1 Principle. A gas sample is extracted
from the emission source and diluted with
clean dry air. An aliquot of the diluted
sample is then analyzed for hydrogen suI.
fide (H.S>. carbonyl sulfide (COS>. and
carbon disulfide (CS.> by ffas chromatogra.
phic (GC> separation and flame photomet-
ric detection (FPD>.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica.
ble for determination of the above sulfur
compounds from tail ffas control units of
sulfur recovery plants.

2. Range and sensitivity

2.1 Ranffe. Coupled with a g2.S chromto-
ffraphic system utilizing a I-milliliter sample
size, the maximum limit of the FPD for
each sulfur compound is approximately 10
ppm. It may be necessary to dilute gas sam.
pIes from sulfur recovery plants hundred-
fold (99:lJ resultinff In an upper limit of
about 1000 ppm for each compound.
2.2 The minimum detectable concentra-
tion of the FPD Is also dependent on sample
size and would be about 0.5 ppm for a 1 ml
sample.
3. Interfcrences

3.1 Moisture Condensation. Moisture con-
densation In the sample delivery system, the
analytical column, or the FPD burner block
can cause losses or Interferences. This po.
tentlal Is eliminated by heating the sample
line, and by conditioninff the sample with
dry dilution air to lower Its dew point oolow
the operating temperature of the GC/FPD
a.nalytlcal system prior to analysis.
3.2 Carbon Mono1tlde IIDd Co.rbon Dio1tide.
CO and CO. have substantial desensitizing
eHeNs on thE' flame photometric dl'tector
E'VE'n after 9:1 dilution. (AcceptablE' systE'ms
must demonstrate that they have eliminat.
ed this interference by some procedurE' such
8.~ eluding CO and CO. before any of the
sulfur compounds to be measured.) Compli.
ance with this re:juirE'ment can be demon.
strated by submitting chromatograms of
calibration gases with and wIthout CO, in
thE' diluE'nt gas. The CO. level should be ap-
proximately 10 pE'rcent for the case with
CO. present. The two chromatographs
should show agreement within the precision
limits o( section 4.1.
3.3 Elpmental Sulfur. The condE'nsaticn of
sulfur vapor in the sampling line can lead to
e\'E'ntual coating and even blockag£' of the
sample line. This problem can be eliminated
along with the moisture problem by heating
thE' sample line.
4. Precision

4.1 Calibration Frecision. A seriE's of three
consecutive injections of the same calibra.
tion gas. at any dilution. shall produce rE'-
suIts which do not vary by more than:,: 13
percent from the mean of the three injec.
tions.
4.2 Calibration Drift. The calibration drift
dE'termined from the mean of three Injec-
tions made at the beginning and end of an)'
B-hour period shall not exceed ~5 percent.

5. Apparatus

5.1.1 Probe. The probe must be made of
Inert material such as stainless steel or
fflass. It should be designed to incorporate a
filter and to allow calibration gas to enter
the probe at or near the sample entry point.
Any portion of the probe not exposed to the
stack gas must be heated to prevent mois.
ture condensation.
5.1.2 The sample line must be made of
Teflon,' no greater than 1.3 cm (V2 In> inside
diameter. All parts from the probE' to the di-
lution system must be thermostaticaliy
heated to 120' C.
5.1.3 Sample PO'mp. The sample pump
shall be a leakless Teflon coated diaphragm
type or equivalent. If the pump is upstream
of the dilution system, the pump head must
be heated to 120' C.
5.2 Dilution System. The dilution system
must be constructed such that all sample
contacts are made of Inert material (e.g.
stainless steel or Teflon>. It must bE' heated
to 120' C and be capable of approximately a
9:1 dilution of the sample.
5.3 Gas Chromatograph. The gas chroma-
tograph must ha\'e at least the foJIowing
components:
5.3.1 Oven. Capable of maintaining thE'
separation column at the proper operating
temperature ~ I' C.
5.3.2 Temperature Gauge. To monitor
column oven. detector. and exhaust tem-
perature ~ I' C.
5.3.3 Flow System. Gas metering system to
measure sample. fuel. combustion gas. and
carrier gas flows.
5.3.4 Flame Photometric Detector.
5.3.4.1 Electrometer. Capable of fuJI scale
Ilmplificatlon of linear ranges of 10-' to 10-'
amperes full scale.
5.3.~.2 Power Supply, Capable of deliver.
inff up to 750 volts.
5.3.~.3 Recorder. Compatible with the
output voltl\(Je rMffe of the electrometer.
5.~ Gas Chromatograph Columns. ThE'
column system must be demonstrated to be
capable of resolving three major reduced
sulfur compounds: H,S. COSo and CS..
To demonstrate that adequate resolution
has been achieved the tester must submit a
chromatograph of a calibration gas contain.
ing all three reduced sulfur compounds In
the concentration rang£' of the applicable
standard. Adequate resolution will be de-
fined 2.S b2.Se line separation of adjacent
peaks when the amplifier attenuation is set
so that the smaller peak is at least 50 per-
cent of full scale. Base line separation is de.
fined as a return to zero :1:5 percent In the
Interval ~tween peaks. Systems not meet-
Ing this criteria may be considered alternate
methods subject to the e.pproval of the Ad.
minlstrator.
5.5.1 Calibration System. The calibration
system must contain the following compo-
nents.
5.5.2 Flow System. To measure air flow
over permeation tubes at ~2 percent. Each
flowmeter shall be calibrated after a com-
plete test series with a wet test meter. If the
flow me2.Suring device differs Irom the wet
test meter by 5 percent. the completed test
shall be discarded. Alternatively. the tester
may elect to use the flow data that would
yield the lowest flow measurement. Callbra.
tlon "",Ith C\ wet test meter before €I tR.st Is
optional.
'Mention of trode names or specific prod-
ucts does not constitutE' an endorsement b)'
the Environmental Pratectlon Agency
III-Appendix A-114
5.5.3 Constant Temperature Bath. Device
capable of maintaining the permeation
tubes at the calibration temperature within
:1:1.1' C.
5.5.4 Temperature Gauge. Thermometer
or equivalent to monitor bath temperature
within :1:1' C.
6. Reagents

6.1 Fuel. Hydrogen (H.> prepurilled grade
or better. .
6.2 Combustion Gas. Oxygen (0.) or air.
research purity or better.
6.3 Carrier Gas. Prepurlfled grade or
better.
6.4 Diluent. Air containing less than 0.5
ppm total sulfur compounds and less than
10 ppm each of moisture and total hydro-
carbons.
6.5 Calibration Gases, Permeation tubes.
one each of H.S. COSo and Cs.. gravimetri-
cally calibrated and certified at some conve-
nient operating temperature. These tubes
consist of hermetically sealed PEP Teflon
tubing In which a IIqulfied ff2.SeOUS sub-
stance Is enclosed. The enclosed gas perme-
ates through the tubinff wall at a constant
rate. When the temperature Is constMt.
calibration gases covering a wide range of
!mown concentrations can be generated by
varying and accurately measuring the flow
rate of diluent gas passing over the tubes.
These calibration gases are used to calibrate
the GC/FPD system e.nd the dilution
system.
7. Pretest Procedures

The following procedures are optional but
would be helpful in preventing any problem
which might occur later and invalidate the
entire test.
7.1 After thp. c',mplete measurement
system has been set up at the site and
deemed to be operational. the following pro-
cedures should be completed before sam-
pling Is initiated.
'I.l.l Leak Test. Appropriate leak test pro-
cedures should be employed to verify the in-
tegrity of all components. sample lines. and
connections. The followlnff lealt test prace-
dur!, is Sugg!'sted: For components up~trE'am
of the sample pump. attach the probe end
of the sample line to a manometer or
vacuum gauge. start the pump and puJI
greater than 50 mm (2 in.) Hg vacuum. clc"e
off the pump outlet, and then stop the
pump and l!.Sc-ertam that there Is no leak for
1 minul e. For components after the pump,
apply a slight positive pressure and check
for leaks by appl,'lng a liquid (detergent In
water. for example) at each joint. Bubbling
indicates the presence of a leak.
7.1.2 System Performance. Since the com.
plete system Is calibrated foJIowing each
test, the precise calibration 01 each compo.
nent Is not critical. However. these compo-
nents should be verified to be operating
properly. This verification can be performed
by observing the response of fiowmeters or
of the GC output to changes in flow rates or
calibration gas conc€ntratlons and ascer.
tainlng the response to be within predicted
limits. If any component or the complete
system falls to respond In a normal and pre-
dictable manner, the source of the discrep.
ancy should be Identlfed and l:orrected
before proceeding.

8. Calibration
Prior to any sampling run. calibrate the
system using the foJIowlng procedures. (If
more than one run is perfornled during any
2.e-hour period. a calibration need not be
performed prior to the second and any sub.
sequent runs. The calibration must. howev-
er. be verified as prescribed In section 10.
after the last run made within the 24-hour
-------
!)Iarlod. )
11.1 Genercl CoruJlderotions. This C1!Ctlon
outllneo ote~ to be follo1:'led for \!Se of the
GC/FPD rmd the dilution system. The pro-
ceo1ure does not Include det.Biled instruc-
tions becs\!Se the operation of these systems
10 complex, Md It requires M understandInB
of the individual system being \!Sed. Each
Gystem should Include a written operating
manual describing In detail the opentlng
procedures MSoclated with each component
In the measurement system. In addition, the
operator shuld be familiu with the operat-
Ing principles of the components: particular-
ly the OC/FPD. The citations In the BIb-
lIo(Jl'aphy at the end of this metho!! are rec-
ommended for review for this purpose.
11.2 Calibration Procedure. Insert the per-
meation tubes Into the tube chamber. Chec!!
the bath temperature to assure e.greement
with the calibration temperature of the
tubes within :O.l"C. Allow 24 hours for the
tubes to equilibrate. AJternatively eQuillbra.
tlon may be verified by injecting samples of
calibration gas at I-hour Intervals. The per-
meation tubes can be assumed to have
reached equilibrium when consecutive
hourly Gamples agree within the precision
limits of section 4.1.
Vary the amount of air flowing over the
tubes to produce the desired concentrations
for calibrating the analytical and dilution
systems. The air flow across the tubes must
at all times exceed the flow requirement of
the rmalytlcal systems. The concentration In
parts per million generated by a bube con-
ta!n1ng Q specific permeant can be calculat-
ed as follows:
C=KXP,/ML
Equation 15-1
where:
C=Concentration of permeant produced
In ppm.
P.=Permeation rate of the tube In /11/
min.
M = Molecular weight of the permeant: g/
g-mole.
L=Flow rate. IImln. of air over permeant
@ 20'C, 760 mm Hg.
K""Gas constant at 20'C and 760 mm
Hg=24.04 lis mole.
8.3 Calibration of analysis system. Gener-
ate a series of three or more known concen.
trations spanning the linear range of the
FPD (approximately 0.05 to 1.0 ppm) for
each of the four major sulfur compounds.
Bypassing the dilution system, Inject these
standards In to the GC/FPD analY7.ers and
monitor the responses. Three Injects for
each concentration must yield the precision
described In section 4.1. Failure to aUain
this precision Is an Indication of a problem
In the calibration or analytical system. Any
such problem must be Identified and cor.
rected before proceeding.
8.4 Calibration Curves. Plot the GC/FPD
response In current (amperes) versus their
causative concentrations In ppm on log.log
coordinate graph paper for each sulfur com-
pound. Alternatively, a least squares equa-
tion may be generated from the calibration
data.
8.5 Calibration of Dilution System. Gener-
ate a know concentration of hydrogen sul-
fled using the permeation tube system.
Adjust the flow rate of diluent air for the
first dilution stage so that the desired level
of dilution Is approximated. Inject the dilut-
ed calibration gas Into the GC/FPD system
and monitor Its response. Three injections
for each dilution must yield tlte precision
described In section 4.1. Failure to attain
this precision In this step Is an indication of
a problem In the dilution system. Any such
!')roblem m\!St be Identified ood corrected
~fore Elr=edIng. Uo!ng the ccllbrotlon
data for JH[tS (develoEled under 11.3) dt>ter.
mine the diluted callbretlon III!.S concentro-
tlon In ppm. Then calcule.te the dilution
feetor as the re.tlo of the calibration lIas
concentrctlon before dilution to the diluted
callbntlon gas concentre.tlon determined
under this paragraph. Repeat this proce.
Clure for each stage of dilution required. AJ-
ternatlvely, the GC/FPD system may be
calibrated by generating a series of three or
more concentrations of each sulfur com.
pound and diluting these samples before in-
Jecting them Into the GC/FPD system. This
data will then serve as the calibration data
for the unknown samples and a separate de-
termination of the dilution factor will not
be necesse.ry. However. the precision re-
quirements of section 4.1 are stl1le.pplicsble.

9. Sampling and Analysis Procedure

9.1 Se.mpllng. Insert the sampling probe
Into the test port making certain that no di-
lution air enters the stack through the port.
BetJin sampling and dilute the sample ap-
proximately 9: 1 using the dilution system.
Note that the precise dilution factor Is that
which Is determined In paragraph 8.5. Con-
dition the entire system with sample for a
minimum of 15 minutes prior to commenc-
Ing analysis.
9.2 Analysis. Allquots of diluted sample
are Injected Into the GC/FPD analyzer for
analysis.
9.2.1 Sample Run. A sample run Is com-
posed of 16 Individual analyses (Injects) per-
formed over a period of not less than 3
hours or more than 6 hours.
9.2.2 Observation for Clogging of Probe. If
reductions In sample concentrations are ob-
served during a sample run that cannot be
explained by process conditions, the sam-
pling must be Interrupted to determine if
the sample probe is clogged with particulate
matter. If the probe Is found to be clogged.
the test must be stopped and the results up
to that point discarded. Testing may resume
after cleaning the probe or replacing It with
a clean one. After each run, the sample
probe must be Inspected and, If necessary.
dismantled and cleaned.
10. Post-Test Procedures

10.1 Sample Une Loss. A known concen-
tration ot hydrogen sulfide at the level of
the applicable standard, :20 percent. must
be introduced into the sampling system at
the opening ot the probe In sufficient quan.
titles to ensure that there Is an excess of
sample which must be vented to the atmo-
sphere. The sample must be transported
through the entire sampling system to the
measurement system In the normal manner.
The resulting measured concentration
should be compared to the known value to
determine the sampling system loss. A sam-
pling system loss of more than 20 percent Is
unacceptable. Sampling losses of 0-20 per-
cent must be corrected by dividing the re-
sulting sample concentration by the frac-
tion ot recovery. The known gas sample may
be generated using permeation tubes. Alter-
natively. cylinders of hydrogen sulfide
mixed In air may be used provided they are
traceable to permeation tubes. The optional
pretest procedures provide a good guideline
for determining If there are leaks In the
sampling system.

10.2 Recallbration. After each run, or
after a series of runs made within a 24-hour
period. perform a partial recallbratlon using
the procedures In section 8. Only HaS (or
other permeant) need be used to recculbrate
III-Appendix A-lIS
the GC/1"'PD ootllysls system (8.3) ood the
dilution oystem (G.5).
10.3 Determination of Ctlllbrotion Drift.
Compare the calibration curves obtained
prior to the runs, to the calibration curves
obtained under paragraph 10.1. The callbre-
tion drift should not exceed the limits set
forth In paragraph 4.2. If the drift exceeds
this limit, the Intervening run or runs
ohould be considered not valid. The tester,
however, may Instead have the option of
choosing the callbre.tlon data set which
would /rive the highest sample values.
11. Caleulatw718

11.1 Determine the concentrations of each
reduced sulfur compound detected directly
from the calibration curves. Alternatively,
the concentrations may be calculated using
the equation for the lel!.St squares line.
11.2 Calculation of SO. Equivalent. SO.
equivalent will be determined for each rmal.
ysls made by summing the concentrations of
each reduced sulfur compound resolved
during the given rmalysls.
SO. eoulvalent=I(H,S, COS, 2 CS.)d
Equation 15-2
where:
SO. equlvalent=The sum of the concen-
tration ot each of the measured com-
pounds (COS, H,S, CS,) expressed as
sulfur dioxide In ppm.
H,S=Hydrogen sulfide, ppm.
COS=Carbonyl sulfide, ppm.
CS.=Carbon disulfide, ppm.
d=DlluUon factor. dimensionless.
11.3 Averaee SO. equivalent will be deter.
mined 88 follows:
N
t 502 equtv. i

Average 502 equivalent. i' 1
II (1 - Bwo)
Equation 15-3
where:
Average SO. equlvalent,=Average SO.
equivalent In ppm, dry basis.
Average SO. equlvalent,=SO. In ppm as
. determined by Equation 15-2.
N=Number of analyses performed.
Bwo=FracUon of volume of water vapor
In the gas stream as determined by
Method 4-Determlnatlon of Moisture
In Stack Gases (36 FR 24887).

12. Example System

Described below Is a system utilized by
EP A In gathering NSPS data. This system
does not now reflect all the latest develop-
ments In equipment and column technology.
but It does represent one system that has
been demonstrated to work.
12.1 Apparatus.
12.1.1 Sample System.
12.1.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel tubing, 8.35
mm (Y. In.) outside diameter, packed with
glass wool.
12.1.1.2 Sample Une. 0/.. Inch inside diam-
eter Teflon tubing heated to 120' C. This
temperature Is controlled by a thermostatic
heater.
12.1.1.3 Sample PumP. Leakless Teflon
coated diaphragm type or equivalent. The
pump head Is heated to 120' C by enclosing
It In the sample dilution box <12.2.4 below).
12.1.2 Dilution System. A schematic dia-
gram of the dynamic dilution system Is
given In Figure 15-2. The dilution system Is
constructed such that all sample contacts
are made of Inert materials. The dilution
-------
system which Is heated to 120' C must be ca-
pable of a minimum of 9:1 dilution of
sample. Equipment used In the dilution
system Is listed below:
12.1.2.1 Dilution Pump. Model A-150 Koh-
my hI' Teflon positive displacement type,
nonadjustable 150 cc/mln. :1:2.0 percent, or
equivalent, per dilution stage. A 9:1 dilution
of sample Is accomplished by combining 150
cc of sample with 1350 cc of clean dry all' as
shown In Figure 15-2.
12.1.2.2 Valves. Three-way Teflon solenoid
or manual type.
12.1.2.3 Tubing. Teflon tublna and fittings
.are used throughout from the sample probe
to the GC/FPD to present an Inert surfe.ce
for sample gas.
12.1.2.4 Box. Insulated box. heated and
maintained at 120' C. of sufficient dimen-
sions to house dilution apparatus.
12.1.2.5 Flowmeters. JRotameters or equiv-
alent to measure flow from 0 to 1500 mI/
min. :I: 1 percent per dilution stage.
12.1.3.0 Gas Chromatograph.
12.1.3:1 Column-1.83 m (6 ft.) length of
Teflon tubing, 2.16 mm <0.085 In.) inside dl-
o.meter. packed with deactivated silica aet
or equivalent.
12.1.3.2 Sample Valve. Teflon six port (i1!1.S
sllmpllng valve, equipped with a 1 ml sample
loop, actuated by compressed air (JF'IffUre 15-
1 ).
12.1.3.3 Oven. JF'or containing sample
veJve. stripper column and separation
column. The oven should be capable of
mtllntainlng an elevated temperature ranf!'-
in(!' from nmblent to 100' C. const.!:lnt within
:l:l'C.
12.1.3.1.1 Temperature Monitor. Thermo.
couple pyrometer to measure column oven.
detector, and exhaust temperature :I: I' C.
12.1.3.5 Flow System. Gas metering
system to mea.~ure sample flow. hydrogen
flow. oxygen now and nitrof!'en carrier f!'as
flow.
12.1.3.6 Detector. Flame photometric de.
tectoI'.
12.1.3.7 Electrometer. Capable of full scale
amplification of linear ranges of 10-' to 10"
amperes full scale.
12.1.3.8 Power Supply. Capable of deliver.
Ing up to 750 volts.
12.1.3.9 Recorder. Compatible with the
output voltage range of the electrometer.
12.1.1.1 Calibration. Permeation tube
system (FI(!'Ure 15-3).
12.1.1.1.1 Tube Chamber. Glass chamber of
sufficient dimensions to house permeation
tubes.
12.1.1.1.2 Mass Flowmeters. Two mass flow-
meters In the range 0-3 IImln. and 0-10 11
min. to measure all' flow over permeation
tubes at :I: 2 percent. These flowmeters shall
be cross-calibrated at the bef!'lnnlnf!' of each
test. Using CI convenient flow rate In the
me&.Surlng range of both flowmeters. set
and monitor the flow rate of f!'as over the
permeation tubes. Injection of calibration
gas f!'enerated at this flow rate as measured
by one flowmeter followed by Injection of
calibration gas at the same flow rate as mea.
sured by the other flowmeter should agree
within the specified precision limits. If they
do not. then there Is a problem with the
mass flow meaSurement. Each mass flow-
meter shall be calibrated prior to the first
test with a wet test meter and thereafter at
least once each year.
12.1.4.3 Constant Temperature Bath. Ca-
pable of maintaining permeation er Magazine of
Can2'.!a. 73,3 (March, 1972).
13.5 GrimJ(.y, K. Woo W. S. Smith, and
R. M. Martin. "The Use of a Dynamic Dilu-
tion System in the Conditioning of Stlfck
Gases for Automatpd An..ly~is by a Mobile
SampJing Van" Prf'sd1ted at the 63rd
Annuf\l APCA Meeting in St. Louis, Mo.
June 14-19, 1970.
13.6 General Reference. Standard Meth-
ods of Chemical Analysis Volume III A and
B Instrumen:al Method;;. SIJ